IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 lAo 
 
 
 i 
 2f lii * 
 
 2.2 
 
 u I. 
 
 1.4 
 
 III 
 
 1.6 
 
 1 
 
 *^ 
 
 /l 
 
 % 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 '^> 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 //a 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 w^ 
 
 v 
 
 rv 
 
 ^1. 
 
 
 \\ 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 145S0 
 
 (716) 873-4503 
 
 
 6^ 
 
i^> 
 
 ^!# 
 
 , ! 
 
 ■ 
 
 :< 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microriproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notaa techniques et bibliographiquee 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographicallly unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checlced below. 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommagie 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture resiaurAe et/ou pelliculAe 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes gAographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 ReliA avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intirieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que cartaines pages blanches ajoutAes 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6ti filmtos. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires supplAmentairas; 
 
 L'institu V' nicrofilm* le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a eti possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite. ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mtthode normale de f iimage 
 sont indiquAs ci'-dessous. 
 
 r~~| Coloured pages/ 
 
 y 
 
 D 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommaym* 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurAes et/ou peilicuiAes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d4color6es, tachetAes ou piquAes 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tachtes 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 [~n Quality of print varies/ 
 
 Quality inigale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel suppi^mentaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponibie 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tisku«», dtc, have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partieilement 
 obscurcies par (jsn feuiilet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6ti filmtes A nouveau de fa9on A 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film* au taux da reduction indiquA ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 17X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 n 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here hae been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 Dana Porter Arts Library 
 Univariity of Waterloo 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reprodult grAce A la 
 gAnirositA de: 
 
 Dana Porter Arts Library 
 University of Waterloo 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 4t* reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nette:i de Texemplaire film*, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated iriipres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimie sont filmte en commen^ant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 derniire page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exempltures 
 originaux sont filmte en commenpant par la 
 premiire page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression uu d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol ^»> (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Un des symbcles suivants appara?tra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbols — r signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbols V signifie FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. peivent Atre 
 fiimis A des taux de reduction diff Arents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour 6tre 
 reprodult en un seul clichA. 11 est f ilm6 A partir 
 de I'angle supArieur gauche, de gauche A droite. 
 et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre 
 d'images n6cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 ' 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
L/ 
 
 (;e( 
 
m. a. (^^t ^ (ra/$ (rii$$ical »tt\t^. 
 
 A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTIOP] 
 
 tD 
 
 LATIN PROSB COMPOSITION 
 
 BV 
 
 THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A 
 
 NEW EDITION, Edited and Revised 
 
 BY 
 
 CEORGE GRANVILLE PRADLEY, D.D. 
 
 DI-.AN Ol' WKSl.MINSTKK 
 
 I.ATK .MASTKK (IK UNIVKKSII V ( nl.l.piJE, OXKuKI) 
 
 AND FOKMKI,-VY MASTKK OK M A KI.KO Kdl ( ,h Ci)\A.V.(,E. 
 
 8215? 
 
 W. J. GAGE & COMPANY, 
 
 TORONTO & WINNIPEG. 
 PROPERTY OF THF I IBRARY 
 

 1 
 
 ta 
 
 
 i 
 
 in 
 
 
 1 
 
 te 
 in 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 sii 
 
 
 .1 
 
 re: 
 
 
 4 
 
 \\i 
 in: 
 
 Sii 
 lar 
 of 
 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Some yoars have passoil since I was requested ])y tl 
 
 10 
 
 PuhH.slu'is of the hite Mr. T. Kerclirvcr Arnold's edu(ati«tnal 
 works, to undertake the revision (vf liis Iiitnuliiriioii Id Lafin 
 Prose Ci)iii/>ositiuii. 
 
 Tlie wi(h» and long sustained circulation of tlu^ hook, hoth 
 in England and America, was a proof that, whatever might 
 he its defects, its author had j)rovided sometiiing which c<»m- 
 mended itself as a piactical aid to an exceedingly large class 
 l)otli of students an<l teacliers of the Latin language. 
 
 The task, however, of so revising such a woik as to jtlacc 
 it on a level with the recjuirements (»f the piesent time I 
 found fai' more serious than I had expected. The result t»f 
 mudi lahour, and of more than one unsuccessful attempt 
 to satisfy myself, may he state<l hroadly as follows:— 
 
 In the first place, an Introduction lias l)een prefixed con 
 tainmg tliice parts, two of wliich are new, the other uokIi 
 
 moili 
 
 Hed. 
 
 1, 'I'he fiist of these is an explanatittn of the traditional 
 terms hy whicii we (h'signate the diflei-ent "parts of speech" 
 in Knglish or l-atin. The exi)osition is confined to tlit; most 
 simple and elementary points; hut it is scarcely necessaiy to 
 remin«l any e.-;j»erienced teacher of tlie (extreme vagueness 
 with which tiie nature of such essential distinctions is often 
 mastered, even hy those whose mental tiaiuiug has for years 
 l>een almost confined to the study of Language. 
 
 2. This is followed hy a few })ages on the Analysis iA' the 
 Simi>h^ and Com}>ound Sentenc(>. Such logical analysis of 
 language is hy this tim»' generally accepted as the only hasis 
 of iutelliurent grammatical tea<'hing, whether of our own oi- of 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 
vl 
 
 PPEFACr.. 
 
 iiiiy other l;uiji;ua<^e. At all events, no teacher, who would 
 care to make trial of the present work, will n'^Met the 
 insertion of a shoit explanation of the general principle on 
 which all its exposition of syntactical questions is directly 
 founded. 
 
 3. I liave followed Mr. Arnold's example in prefixing some 
 lemarks, retaining so far as possible his r)wn language, on the 
 Onler of Words; I have addcnl some also on the Ariange- 
 ment of Clauses in the Latin Sentence. It is desiralile 
 to i)oint out, at the very eailiest stage of the learner's 
 piogress, not only the great ditVerences between the structure 
 of the t>NO languagi's in this respect, but also the grounds on 
 wiiich these ditferi'uces rest, and to indicate the general laws 
 which regulate what may appear to the uninstructed the 
 loose iin<l arbitiaiy texture of the fiatin Sente)ice. 
 
 The matter for translation as comprised in the various 
 Kxercises has been almost entirelv rewritten. I have not, 
 after full consideration, taken what wouM have been the 
 easier course, and substit ited single continuons jtassages for 
 a iunid)er of s«'paiate and unconnected sentences. 1 found 
 that for the special purpose <(f the j)resent work, dealirig as it 
 do^^s with such manifold and vui'ious forms of expression, the 
 employment of these latter was indisj)ensable, and I lune by 
 long experience convinced m\self of their value in teacliing 
 or studying the various turns and forms of a language which 
 (litters in such innumerable points fiom oui" own as classical 
 iiatin. 
 
 At tlu' close of the Exeicises, 1 have omitted Mr. Ai'uold's 
 " List of Differences between English and J.atin idi«>ms." As 
 these <lifVerences are, or should be, brought home to the 
 
 f his 
 
 readei in almost evcMy line (»f the pres(!nt rtnision 
 ork, such a list wnuld either convey a false impressic^i 
 
 w 
 
 of 
 dd 
 
 general similaiity \\\\\\ occasional disagreement, or won 
 reach a length wliidi wmild defeat its puipose, Jt is better 
 that the puinl should leain from the very first, that as a 
 
 similar 
 and that a 
 
 general rule, Latin and English exjness tl 
 thoughts by a more or less different j)v 
 
 le same 
 ocess 
 
PKEFACE. 
 
 VI 1 
 
 ■ouM 
 , tlic 
 le on 
 rectly 
 
 some 
 n the 
 
 ran.n*'- 
 
 uiut's 
 
 \l(tlUO 
 
 lids on 
 \ laws 
 ed the 
 
 vario"!^ 
 
 k'o. not, 
 
 •en the 
 fur 
 found 
 i<i as it 
 
 ion, tl»c 
 avo l»y 
 ea«-binji 
 e wliifli 
 •lassical 
 
 AnioM's 
 IS. As 
 to the 
 of his 
 ession of 
 V >voul«l 
 is Uetter 
 lat as a 
 [• similar 
 1 that a 
 
 lgi«S 
 
 
 pcrtertly litoral traiisl.itiun of j-vt'iy woid in onr lun^ua^'»> 
 1>V a coricspondiiij.' Nv<»rd in an<»tlit'r will, wlicthor In- is 
 tiaii.>latin<r Enidisli into Lutjii nr L.ttiii into KiiL'lish, ahnost 
 
 inevi 
 
 tahl 
 
 V ic 
 
 'Ult ii 
 
 1 al»iiruit \ ;iinl M'li'i i>in. 
 
 A f«'w wor<ls may 1»<' added <>ii llif nnlt-r in which tlio 
 variitiis snlijccts tn-iitrd in the ditlcrciit Kxcrcisos arc 
 arran^i^t'd. Some sur|>i'isr may Itc caused at its want of 
 scientific method, and apparently (»f detinit*> principle. It 
 would havo het'ii (piite jtossihlo to liave stalled with 
 
 exerci.ses on 
 
 the shortest ami most clemenfarv for 
 
 m o 
 
 f 
 
 the simple sentence ; then tc> liave trac«'d its various 
 enlar<;enients through all the manifold us<'s of the piononns, 
 ohliqiic cases, uses of adjectives, adverhs, )>articiple.s, ueiuiKls, 
 an«l prepositi(»ns, an<l thus to have deferre<l to the second or 
 rather final poition of the w(»rl< any notice of the ^ arious 
 forms of the compound sentence, of many uses (»f the iiitini 
 five, (»f e\t'n the most ordinary uses of the relative, and of 
 all suhordinatiiii; coiijiuictioiis. I oltsei \ c that in Se\ ffert and 
 iJusch's last edition of Mllendt's Latin Syntax, the cniistinc 
 tion of the acciisaiive with the inliiiiti\e is n(^t reached till 
 two thii'ds of the work liaNc Imcii read, that of the •• indirect 
 <|Uestion" till considerahly later, ihit had I followed this 
 course, the pupil must ha\«! heen conducted, liy the aid of a 
 loiiiLj series of elahorately constructed s|(eciniens of the Sini|)l«' 
 Sentence, thrctuuh all the lan^! of usau'es that coulil possihly 
 he com})r;sed within its limits. Not till this was done could 
 he have atteni])te(l to deal with the very connnonest turns of 
 lan^uaj^e, such as meet him in every line of natural Kn^lish, 
 and form the texture of every sentence in ("aesar or in 
 Livy. lie wouhl have wasted his strength anil patieiKe 
 in mounting; and (h'scendinir laddei' after ladder of artificial 
 lanj^Miaii'e before he was invited to set foot on the free and 
 natural patliS of spee<-h. It is diflicult, no d(»ulit, t«» decide 
 which anion^i;; the inmniierahle idic nis of a lanj^Mia^e so unlike 
 our own has the first claim on the attention of the teachei-; 
 and the precise order which should he a<lopted is a matter 
 less of principle than one dictated by various and complex 
 
VIII 
 
 PR F FACE. 
 
 X\. 
 
 Il 
 
 consijii'nitioiis of ]»nu;ti(al utility. Uiii 1 liiive not licsitatrd 
 to invite tlu! IrariMT, wlio will follow tlie ^uitlaiicc! of 
 th(5 piosiiut W(trk, to icavti at a vciy early iicriod the 
 artiticially siiiooflitMl watei's of sudi sinijdr seiitenccs as aio 
 <'arefnlly frani<Ml with a view to extlu<le the most oidiiiury 
 forms of sjM'erh in l»oth Kii^lish ami Latin, and to fare 
 as soon as possihle tlit! constnicti^tns of the Infinitive Mood, 
 of tlie Kelativo and Intel loi^ative Pronoun, (»f tho Con- 
 jiuictional Clause, and .some of the main uses of ^he Sub- 
 junctive Mood, and of the liatin, as r(»mj>ared with the 
 En}j;Iish, Tenses. It appears to me that after thus ohtaininj^ 
 some firm grasp of tlu- great lines in which the Latin language 
 is modelled undei' the influence (f that great instrument of 
 thought, tho Verh, he will bo far more likely to notice 
 and retain a peiiiianent inipres: ion of the usages and 
 mutual relations of otiier jiaits of sj)eech, than if he had 
 followed .step by step an opposite .system under tlie gui«l- 
 ancc of a .synthetically arranged Syntax. At the same time, 
 as :>ome amount of .systematic arrangement is desirable even 
 on j)ractical grounds, the E.\ercis(!s liave Iteen arianged, as a 
 glance at the Table of (,'ontents will show, in groups of 
 closely related subjects. Such (piestions as the use of the 
 Cases, and of the \aiious Pronouns, }>re.sented consider- 
 al)l«' tlilliculty. Placed where they are, they somewhat 
 interrupt the main current • '" tlie general teaching on the 
 structure of tho Latin sentence, yet I lie.sitated to rcilegati! 
 them to the end of the bo(»k. As it is, 1 have u.sed them 
 .largely, and I hope successfully, not only to elucidate the 
 subject of which they directly treat, but al.so to renew, 
 imi)i'e.ss, and enforce the piinciples and details laid down 
 in the earlier sections. At the same time there is no lea.soii 
 why the teacher should not post[)one their use for a time, 
 and pa.ss on to any of the groui»s of Exercises which follow. 
 
 It only remains that I should ex [tress my oliligation.s, not 
 only to the grc;it (Jerman ({rammarians, including the recently 
 completed Hixlonsche, S/infu.r of Dr. Draeger, to Schult/' 
 
 i^i/iioni/ni 
 
 ik and Haacke's Sli/isfiL; but also t(» two sii<h English 
 
Ph'/'.F. ••'/■:. 
 
 IX 
 
 writers on I,:itin (Irainiiuir as ProfVssor Kemu'ily und Mr. 
 Kolty. To the former, ciniiieiit. alike us a tearliei' ami a 
 writer, I owe<|, as a »om|>aratively yoimi; teaehrr, my tii>t 
 full jtercepf ion ol" tlie (■(jiicatioiial valm> of a systematic 
 stmiv ol l-atin Syntax .is Wased on the Analysis of tli.- 
 Sentenee , to tli(^ second volume of Mr. Iiohy's valuaMe 
 work I am hn-^ely indeltted. I may also nn-ntion tlie less 
 obvious l>ul not h'ss ii-al assistance wliicli 1 have icccixcd 
 from the jiuhlislied works and evei- reac'y assistance and 
 j;ni<lanc(! of INof'essor Max Midler ; also from Professoi 
 Karhi's treatise on the Philology t)f the Kni,dish tongue, and 
 from some interestiiii,' Lectures of I'rofessor I>uiir,i;ratr of 
 Liej,'e. 
 
 I nmst also exjiress my ohliijations for nuich lielp received 
 in an earlier sta^e of the wo:k from Mr. A. M. Hell of 
 lialliol rolle«;e ; more recently from Mr. V Madan of 
 liiasj'uoso Colh\i^e, and for the <;!t'at aid j^iven nn; in shajiing 
 the Vocal»nlaiv and drawing uj» the Imh-x, l)y Mr. T. W. 
 Haddon, late Schohir of my own College. 
 
 G. G. BRADLEY. 
 
I.N 
 
 E.\ 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 IV 
 
 V. 
 
 VI 
 
 VI 
 IX. 
 X. 
 
 XI. 
 XIJ 
 
 XII 
 
 xr 
 
 XV 
 XV 
 XV 
 XV 
 
 XI y 
 
 XX 
 XX 
 
 XXi 
 
TAHLK (3F CONTENTS 
 
 Introduction - Til*/ Tarts of Sju't'ch. 
 
 AnalyHiM of the Sfiit«MU'e, 
 
 Order of Worda and ClaiiHt'S, 
 EXERCISKS — 
 
 I. Eh'nieiitary and CJeiieral Rules, . . . 
 
 II. III. Meaning of Word.s and IMinusos, 
 IV. Agrt't'int'nt of Suhji'L-t and Verl*, . 
 V . VI. Accusative with Inlinitive, (h-ni'io Ohlhfun, 
 VII. Nominative with Infinitive, Modal Verbs, I'aasive Verbs 
 
 of Sai/iiiff, ..... 
 VITI. Adjectives — Agreement, Substantival Use, other uses, 
 
 IX. Adjectives for fJenitive, Adverbial Tae, 
 
 X. The Kehitive— General Kule.s; In >/iil, . . 
 
 XI. The Relative in Orntio Ohliifiia ; other uses, 
 
 XII. The Relative — Correlatives, 
 
 XIII. The Inlinitive as Sul)stantive, . 
 
 XIV. Final (^lauses — Uf, Np, Quo ; Sequence of Tenses, 
 
 XV. Consecutive Clauses, Ut, Ut ii<»i, 
 
 XVI. Cf, AV, introducing r Substantival Clause, 
 
 XVII. Quill, Qiioiiiiiiiis—y vrhs of Fearing with ri, X<; 
 
 XVIII. Cuinniunds and ProhiJiitions, . 
 
 XIX. Remarks on Moods — Subjunctive used independently, 
 
 XX. Interntgative Sentences— Direct, . 
 
 XXI. XXII. Interrogative Senten es — Dependent or In 
 
 direct .... 
 
 XXIII. RemarV ~( on Teii a, . , . . 
 
 PACIR 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 31 
 38, 43 
 
 47 
 50, r)4 
 
 AT 
 
 61 
 
 69 
 
 74 
 
 79 
 
 83 
 
 88 
 
 O'J 
 
 96 
 
 102 
 
 lOS 
 
 113 
 
 116 
 
 121 
 
 126, 130 
 133 
 
 .\. 
 
XII 
 
 TAHLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 r.viiK. 
 
 142 
 
 14(> 
 
 1 ;')•_> 
 
 ir.fi, !;'){> 
 
 162, 1(57, 170, 172 
 
 17C., 181, 185 
 
 189, 198, IOC, ion, 202 
 
 2()(> 
 
 XXIV. How t<t translate (\u\. Could, May, MUjht, Slmll 
 Mitsf, <'tc., ..... 
 
 XXV.' KciiiarkH «»n the Cas»'s — the Noiiiinative, 
 
 XXVI. Apposition, ..... 
 
 XXVII. X.\ VI 11. The Accusative, 
 XXIX. .\.\XI1. The Dative, 
 XX.\I11.-XX\V. The Ahlative, 
 XXxWI. XL. The (Jeiiitive, 
 
 XLI. Place, Space, ..... 
 
 XLll. Kxpressions of Time, .... 212 
 XLIII. I'repositioiia — General llemarks ; Prepositions 
 
 with .Accu-sative, . . . . 21(» 
 
 XLIV. Prepositions with A l.lative, . . . 221 
 
 XLV. Pronouns, Personal and Demonstrative, . . 224 
 
 XLV^I. Pronouns, Pellexive and Emphatic, . . 2.H0 
 
 XLVII. I'ronouns, Indefinite, .... 234 
 
 XLVIII. A and B, Pronouns, Pronominalia, . 239, 243 
 
 XLIX. L. Gerund and Gerundive, . . . 247, 252 
 
 LI. The Supines, ...... 256 
 
 LII. Participles, ...... 258 
 
 Llil. The Ahlative Ahsolute, . .... 265 
 
 LIV. Temporal Clauses — General Rules, Qiium, . . 269 
 
 LV. Tenip(;ral Clauses- fJiim, Donee, PrUisqaam, etc., . 274 
 
 LVI. Suhcrdinate Clauses in Orutio Ohliqua, . . . 278 
 LVII.-LIX. Conditional Clauses, . . . 282,289,294 
 LX. Concessive Clauses, . . . . .301 
 
 LXI. Causal and Explanatory Clauses, . . . 305 
 
 LXII. Comparative Clauses, ..... 309 
 
 LXIII. (^«< with the Subjunctive, Final and Consecutive, . 316 
 
 LXIV. (^>w/ with the Subjunctive, Causal and Concessive, . 321 
 
 LXV. Reported Speeches in Oratio Obll(/i(a, . . 324 
 
 LXVI. Numerals, ...... 332 
 
 LXVII. The Roman Kalendar, .... 338 
 
 supi'lementaky exekci.ses, . . . . .341 
 
 General Vocabulary, ..... 353 
 
 Index of Subject.s, ...... 396 
 
 Latin Index, ....... 402 
 
 1 See I*l'eface, p. viif. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 1. l>y I'aits <^t' S[)eech wo mean tlu; various classes, or 
 l»ea(iiiiL;s, under wliicli all words used in speakiuj^f or 
 writini,' may be arranged. 
 
 '2. In English Grammars eight are usually enumerated, 
 vi/. : — 
 
 Noun. Pronoun. Adverb. Conjunction. 
 
 Adjective. Ycrl). Preposition. Interjection. 
 
 3. besides these there is a ninth, the Article, definite 
 and indefinite, t/if; an, a. The former is merely a shortened 
 form of the demonstrative ])ronoun fli((t ; the latter two of 
 the numeral adjective one; and both may be classed under 
 the adjective. 
 
 But in Latin Grammars the list is somewhat dilferetit, 
 and it will be more convenient to folio >v the usual 
 arrangement. 
 
 4. There is no Article in Latin, and the Adjective is 
 included under the Xoun. 
 
 iv. Adverb. 
 V. Pre{)osition. 
 vi. Conjunction, 
 vii. Litcrjection. 
 
 As all these names will be frecjuently used in the 
 following ])aues, it is necessarv that their meauinii and 
 nature should be understood. 
 
 The Noun. 
 
 5. (i.) The XouN is the name {novicji) which we give to 
 any person, ihing, or coiu'cjition of the miTid ; for even 
 conceptions we may regard a- iliLn<jsi. We may name such 
 
 A 
 
 I 
 
 . -VT { Substantive. 
 1. Moun < A T ♦.• 
 
 ( Adjective. 
 
 ii. Pronoun. 
 
 iii. Verb. 
 
PARTS OF SI' EEC !f. 
 
 f Intro :!uction 
 
 m 
 
 111 
 
 jKM'sons or tliint^s in two din't'nMit ways; nouns thei ifore, 
 or atniics, niiiy )>« ot" tvv<j kinds. 
 
 6. Tli(» Substantive is a namo wliicli we give to a person 
 or tiling to distinguisli it from otlier persons and things: 
 Caesar, tal)le, goodness ; Cars'ir, /tioi-sa, virfns. 
 
 It dedotes tlse assenihlage, or sdnL-foffil, of all the 
 (piiiUtics" l>y which we recognisi; such })erson or thing. 
 
 Hence its name (nomen ^uhdnntiram), as a name 
 denoting what wsis once called the sithdantid, or essential 
 nature of persons and things. 
 
 It (len<»ti\s also something which is looked on as having 
 an existence {siilisfaniia) by itself. 
 
 7. The Adjective is a name which we odd or apply to 
 a person or thing, to denote S(jme our. qiia/i/// which we 
 attribute to it : good, white, small ; ho)iifs, landidas, jMrvus. 
 
 8. As this one quality may Ix; shared by many persons 
 or things, the adjective is not well fitted to stand by itself 
 as the name for ]»ersons or things; many different pexsons 
 and things might be "good," " white," or " small." 
 
 Its proper use, therefore, is either to be attached to the 
 nouicn suhslanticuin, or genei'al name of an object, so as 
 to define its meaning more closely, as v)}iUe, horses, r/ood 
 men ; et[ui albi, homines honi ; or to be prrdii-aled, that is 
 asserted, of such substantive: the men \\\v tjoud ; homilies 
 sunt hold; in the lirst case it is called an iitlribidc, in the 
 second a /J?T(//6Yf/c. Hence its name, nomen adjcdivum ; 
 a name, that is, fitted for adding, or attaching, to another 
 name, from adjiccre, "to add to." 
 
 9. In Latin this fitness for idtachnirnt or uddition is 
 even more mark( d than in English. Latin adjectives 
 have, what the Kiiglish have not, infie.i'unis, i.e. variable 
 terminations of gender, case, and numiter, which vary with 
 those of the substantive A> which they are attached, or o/ 
 which they arc predicateil. Thus m idler sajjerlm; vir est 
 SKperhna; arhores rididltus. In J'^nglish the adjective has 
 no longer any inHexions : A /irocd lady, the man is proud, 
 I saw lofty trees. We can attach the same worij /trtuol to 
 ladi/ anil to m'Ui. ; the same, word lo/ft/ to tree and treo€ 
 
Introduction] 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 10. (ii.) IMtoNOUNS sire words substituled lor n(Mins(;)n) 
 noitiiiu) to iiulicatf ov jxiini to a jx'rson, tliiiii;, or <|nality, 
 witliout iiiuniuij tlic. tltiii.t,', or its ([uality : J. //ci/ , Jn, she, 
 it ; that, siirli, irho, and niiiuy otljurs. 
 
 Tliti noun tlieii, and })n>n<)uii, uaiur or jxu'tit to jxirsons, 
 things, or the ([iialitii's of persons or tilings ; Imt, 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 1 1. (iii.) The \k\{U nialrs it stntt'iiwnt as to them, it j*.ins 
 together two such ohjeets of our thought. 
 
 ? a/t'.s', you are well ; ciino, I run ; iiiiciiiifiir, they are con- 
 quered. 
 
 In each of these Latin words not one but two separate 
 conceptions are included; "you" and the " oeing well," 
 " I " and " running," " they " and " being {M)n(piere(l ;" of 
 these, the first is called the Snhjrct, the second the Prcdicdtc. 
 
 12. The Latin verb differs from the Knglisli in not 
 requiring the aid of a separate pronoun {<'f/()., tn, etc.) to 
 nuike its statement. The pronoun is contained in, an<l 
 expressed by, its final syllable. 
 
 Vivo, I live ; vi.i kti, you have lived ; a mat, he loves. 
 
 13. The verb then is a saijinf/ about persons or things 
 {verbuni = (/k. prjfxa : a saying, or thing said). 
 
 It makes a s<^ itement, or, as it is called, a predicfftioii, as 
 to the state of, or action done either by, or to, some person 
 or thing. 
 
 Valt'd, I am well ; riiiro, 1 conquer ; rliirur, I am con(|Uered. 
 
 14. All these parts of speech have in Latin their 
 iiijlrxioiis, i.e. variable and movable terminations, answer- 
 ing to those in such English words as do.s^, tables, come,s, 
 and admit of oth(U' changes in form (cf. /, vie; come, 
 c^nu!), by the aid of which they express various rehitions. 
 or notion.-^ of nuiiihci\ cane, ijimlrr, </rijnt: of co/njjarisun, 
 time, pet'Hoii, mood. 
 
PARTS OF srhh'.CH. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 III KiU;^Misli, iiijiiiy, if not most, of tlicse iclutions are 
 (!Xjirt'.ss(Ml 1)V stqiiiratt! words, as pronouns, ]>r(!|»ositions, 
 auxiliiiry V(!rhs, or by tho place (jf lliu word iu tlie 
 sciitLMuu; ; tlius ('()inj)ar<', 
 
 Pdfi'r jUluni riili']}it. The father //•/// s«m' liis son. 
 PitivvAu Ji/iuH rii/A'Vid. The son had .swn his fatht^r. 
 //imc lihvum f[]n (IctU'-riiui. I had ^ivrii this hook t.,' you. 
 
 15. Ihit the other four ]»arts of speeclj aie not intleeted, 
 or (Icc/initl; tliey are all ealh'd particles (imrtunhi), or 
 l(!ss iinjiortant pitrt.^ of xiHCch., because they are not so 
 essential to tluH'orniation of a sentence as those already 
 descirihed. 'J'he first thnie can form a sentence by them- 
 selves, not so the hist four. 
 
 The Adverb. 
 
 16. (\\.)T\m Xdwmw {(uhrrhiiun) is so called, because 
 its main use is to attend upon the verh. All verbs make 
 a statement; the adverb ([ualities the statement which 
 the verb makes, by adding some particular as to the 
 tiuoiHcr, amount, time, or j^lacc of the state or action 
 asserted. 
 
 Fortiter piKjiiant. turn exressif. 
 lie fought bravely. then, or at that time, 
 
 he went out. 
 
 ibi cecidit. 
 he fell there, or 
 iu that plaee. 
 
 17. ]>ut adverbs, especially those of amount or def/ree, 
 nuiy also he. joined with adjectives, and even with other 
 advei'liH. 
 
 Satis sapiens. 
 Su^fiett'idhj wise. 
 
 Adnioduni lo'f /lit/enter. 
 Vevji carelessly. 
 
 18. Adverbs when derived from adjectives are capable 
 of one kind of inflexion; that which expresses "more," 
 " most," sapientar, sajjientixifi,, sapie?itissm\e. 
 
 1 9. Observe how often tiie adverb may be interchanged 
 Avith an adv(;rbial phrase ; i.e. two or more words equiva- 
 lent to an adverb : negligently, with negligence ; hastily, 
 
Introduction] 
 
 PAKTS OF SPFJ-C/r, 
 
 iti JiHstf ; tlicn, at tluif finic Tlio suiiMf is tlici casj; in 
 Latin: y\ni(' = iti f<)iijK>ri\ 
 
 Prepositions. 
 
 20. (v.) ritKl'OsiTloNS arc words wliicli arc joiiUMl witli, 
 aiul almost iuvariably p/ncrtf In fan' {j>)((( po.sifn), nouns 
 and ])ronouns, to detinc; tlicir relation to other words in 
 the sentencH'. 
 
 Ad III/' rhi'it. ;i Cmxnn' rir/iis rs(. pro pnli'id iii<>il. 
 
 He. came to me. lie was e()n([iiered Inj to dir fur one's nati\ ti 
 
 Caesar. land. 
 
 21. There are a great many pre])ositi(»ns in Latin, and 
 the same preposition is used in various senses, <•.//., a {ah), 
 " from " and " by." Tliey are rarely used with any liuL 
 the aecusative and ablative cases. 
 
 22. But the case-endinu; alon«' will often express what 
 in Knglisl; must be expressed by a prejxjsition. 
 
 Knsr UN' jwrnissif. lidnmin Karhinio rnliif. 
 
 ll. struck nie irilh a sword He returned t<i Ixonn^ from 
 (instrument). Narbonne (motion from and 
 
 to a town). 
 
 23. ^Fany words used as ])re})ositions are also used as 
 adverbs, /.c. are not joined with nouns but with verbs. 
 
 Ante te loifiis sinii. Jfor )iniojiin)ii ant<* videram. 
 
 I was boin licf'nn' you (prej).). I lia<l nexcr Jiejorc seen this 
 
 (adverl)). 
 
 24. jVIany also are ])retixeil to and e(»ni])(uinde(l with 
 verbs, to modify their nu'aning. Very often they convert 
 an intransitive into a tiansitive verb. 
 
 Pioiiio, I tiiiht ; o\)jni</iio, I assault (a place). 
 
 The same was the case in Old Knuhsh ; wc still use on r- 
 conic, ?/////staud, )/<(i'nf^;\y. In later Knglish the prepositi(»u 
 is plac«'d after the verb : " He is xciit fi>r," " I am Imuilutl of." 
 
 A list of ])repositions, with the cases which they uovciii, 
 or art? joineil with, will be Ibund further on. (See \i\. 
 XLIII., XI, IV.) 
 
6 
 
 PAK'I'S OF SPF.ECn. 
 
 r Introduction 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 25. (vi.) Conjunctions are indeclinable words which 
 join to^n;tli(!r ((Yy//yV?///o) sentences or clauses/ and occasion- 
 ally even words. 
 
 20. Their proju'r oflico is to unite two or mere sentences 
 or (tlauses, and to show the i(dation hetween the clauses 
 wliicli tliey unite. " Vou \\v\\\.Juii 1 remained heliind," 
 tlie hut exjtresses opixisU ion ,- " yt»u did tliis, fJinrfoir I 
 will," //irn'Jn/r di'aws an In/nrticr. 
 
 27. (fhx. They often connect mirdu, but ^fonenilly tlio won! con- 
 noitcd rcprcHi'i'ts :i clause left out, c.^. Y(»u and 1 saw tliis— Vou saw 
 tliis, inul J saw this. 
 
 Sometimes however they really connect wonl.s, and words only : 
 "This (rood but Door man woidd often sa^," or "two and two make 
 four." ' i 
 
 For the list of conjunctions and their classes see helow. 
 
 Interjections. 
 
 28. (vii.) Inteimections aie so called because they are 
 words inserted {interjccUi), or ihroicn in ecmomj the other 
 words ot" a sentence to (Express some feeling or emotion. 
 Tliey are either mere exclamations, as heu, rae, alas ! woe ! 
 or ahltreviated sentences, such as Me Divs Jidivs (j'virf). 
 Conijiare " good-bye " (CJod be with you). They do not 
 enter into the construction of a sentence, and their st/nfax 
 therefore presents no ditticulty. 
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 21). The Noin. — (i.) Stustantivks are of more than 
 one kinil. 
 
 {(f.) 'J'lie proper name {noiucn i^ropriunt^, i.e. the spei'ial 
 name appropriated to and the^Jvo^^tv/v/ of a single person 
 or place : Cuivs, Bovut, Italia. 
 
 (h.) The common noun or name {nomen appellaiivum), by 
 which we can designate either a whole class, or an 
 individual of the class: arhor,Jliu)ir)i; tree, river. Any 
 tn-e or i iv(^r r.i;-.y boar this name. AVilhout the hel}> of 
 
 ' See below, lutr. 7S. 
 
 v1^ 
 
Intioduction] 
 
 P.IA'/S or SPEECH. 
 
 thoso Avonls we slioiild require a sepanite name tor every 
 object that we speak ot". 
 
 0'.) Collective iinnns, or iiniuis of iiiultitndt' {mnnhui 
 lo/fic/ini) are such us, tli()U,L;li sin^uhir, yet l)y their 
 nature denote a innnl>er of individuals : £M-rcUvH, jxqinhn^, 
 seiuitits ; army, jtcople, senale. 
 
 (il.) Abstract nouns (nuniind (iln^f rarfa) are words wliich 
 denote some (juality, or state, or action, as ii'ltlnlrairn I'lom 
 tlie pi-rson or tiling in ir/iir/i W(! hw it cnilnxfitil (roiicn fmii), 
 and looked on as existing ht/ i/srif. Thus ,^rrrifiiiiii is tlu' 
 state of " servitudi! " whicdi \\v see existing,' in a nnmher of 
 scrri ; Koufor, "whiteness," the (piality which is deiioteti 
 by the adjective caudUlnn, wherever that (["iiality is found. 
 
 30. (ii.) Ad.tkctivks may b(! divided into -- 
 Adjectives of quality, as hovus, via/iis,/o/'f/M; l;o(m1, bad, 
 
 brave. 
 
 Adjectives of quantity and number (numeral): mnlfi, 
 finici, iliircnti; many, few, two hundicd. 
 
 There is also a large nundter of 2)ro)iomi7tal adjectives 
 formed from or closely connected with ])rononns: ^iii'ifs, 
 fuKs, ullns, etc. ; mine, thine, any, etc. These are more 
 conveniently included under pronouns. 
 
 31. Though tlie adjective is especially fitted for attach- 
 iiiff to or being ^);vY?iVrt.<ff/ of substantives, yet where no 
 ambiguity can arise it is capable of Iteing u.sed by itself 
 as a substantive: honi, good (men); />o?<r/, good (things), 
 the words iiirn and fliini/s being i'e])res(>nted by the 
 masculine and neuter terminations of the Latin adjective; 
 -/ and -a representing the jdural of " he," " it." 
 
 32. Pronouns. — The personal pronouns answering to 
 the English /, you, as also to he, she, it, are essential parts 
 of conversation in all languages to represent the person 
 spcakiwi, the person spoken to, and the person or thing 
 spoken of. 
 
 Wo have nlrondy coon that thoy n^ny bo ex]»res?od in 
 Latin by the termination of tiu^ verb, h'ules for the inser- 
 tion ii\' e(/(), ill, /s, i/ie, etc., will be given below. 
 
i 
 
 8 
 
 PAf^TS OF SPEECH, 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 ii 
 
 Jiil 
 I'"-: 
 
 33. B(!si(h's tlicsc! ]hffiiui<(l jnoiioims, ^vlli(.'h iiidiciite, 
 witliout ii;^aiii iiiiiniiiir, \\w two or llircc jHTsctiis lirfore 
 naiiic'l, llicrc an' a larj^'c mniilicr of woids closely t'on- 
 nccU'tl with thciii, wliicli arc also t-allcd ))i(iiioiiii.s (or in 
 sonic cHHcs i)W)iutniua/s, l.r. words rtist'inbling pronouns). 
 SucIj ar(i — 
 
 Tlic licHcxiv*^ and 
 Emphatic I'ronouns 
 
 The Demonstrative 
 The Interrogative . 
 The Ridative . . 
 The Indefinite . . 
 The Possessive . . 
 The Reciprocal . 
 
 sn'i, sf ; ipac, rt/nnid, etc.,— himself, 
 
 myself, etc;. 
 hie : isfc, is, Ulr ; hlcm, — this; that; 
 
 the same, etc. 
 <jiiis,tpu (a«lj('c'tival), fn/nis ; quot? 
 
 etc., — who] what? iiow many? 
 <l>u, tiviciniqiti', etc., — that, who, 
 
 which, whoever. 
 qu'ulaiii ; qiiU ; <iJiqiiis, — a certain 
 
 one; ; any ; some, etc. 
 niciis, ftms, stius, jiostrr, etc., — mine. 
 
 thine, his, ours, etc. 
 (No single word in Latin) ; each 
 
 other, etc. 
 
 The majority of these are used adjectivally ; but the 
 personal pronouns of the lirst and second person, tlie 
 reflexive (se), quis as opposed to qui, qui'd to quod, are 
 substantival. 
 
 34. There are also certain correlative pronouns or ])ro- 
 noniinids, wliich are used in conesponding pairs. Such 
 are is . . . qui ; tantus . . . quantus ; tot . . . quot. Their 
 use will be explained further on. (See Ex. xii.) 
 
 35. Vkkhs.— The distinction between the different l<inds 
 of verbs must be carefully attended to in composition. 
 Verbs are thus classiul : — 
 
 (i.) Intransitive N'erbs are so called because any action 
 which they denote does not extend or pass over (fr((7isur) 
 to any other person or thing besides that which forms the 
 sul)ject or nominative of th(^ verb. 
 
 Spiro, I breathe ; curro, I run ; cado, I fall ; .onu, I exist. 
 
 Any of these verbs can form a conijdete sentence in 
 Latin, though Jiot in English, in a single word. 
 
Introduction] 
 
 PAA'TS OF S pp. ECU. 
 
 9 
 
 % 
 
 'it 
 
 30. Solium of tluMii, liowfvei, liiiidly i^ivo a rhur scfisr 
 \vitli(iul tlic aid <>F ii noun or ]ironoiin to coinjkK'tc! tin- 
 .statciiKMit wliicli tlu'V niak«'; and this is (inc of the chicr 
 uses of th(! dative case. 'J'hiis nono," I ;ini limttul," ]Knri), 
 "I am (»h('dieiit,"^ive a \ a^'ue sense, \inless we know fi> irlutin 
 " I am Inirtt'id" or" ol»«'dieni"; and tlicse intrunsitive veilts 
 (whicli obviously cctntain an i(U'a resendilinn that of tlie 
 adJt'L'tive) arc mostly joiiu'd with a dntirc never with an 
 acni.sKfiir : tii)i nocro ; mihi jxint. They are often 
 represented in Knulisii l»y transitive vt ms: " I hurt yoii," 
 " iie ohrt/.s uhk" There are many such ai»i»arently transi- 
 tive, but really intransitive, verbs in Latin. (See Kx. I. 5.) 
 
 37. (ii.) Transitive N'erbs are those whicli denote an 
 action wliich lU'cessarily allects, or jiasscs over to, some 
 person or thinif otlier than the snhjcd of the verb: 
 intcrjicio, I kill ; V(ij)i<>, I take. Here / is the suhja-t of 
 the verb, but we ask at once whom, or what, do / kill, or 
 take ? 
 
 38. This otlier person or thing, without which the state- 
 ment is incomplete, is called the ohjcrt of the verb, and is 
 always in the accumtivf case. In English the object 
 follows the verb, in Latin it more often precedes it. 
 
 Fratrem tuum vidl I saw yimr brofher. 
 
 39. (iii.) Both transitive and intransitive verbs are called 
 Active. Their intlexions are similar, and both denote 
 action of some kind. 
 
 For English verbs used both transitively and intransi- 
 tively, as " I move," etc., see 20, 2\. 
 
 40. Many Latin transitive verbs may be used ahsolutdy 
 {i.e. without an expressed object). 
 
 V'mco, I conquer (my enemies), " I win the day"; Kcriho^ 1 
 am writing (a letter or book). 
 
 4L (iv.) By Passive Verbs we mean a form or inflexion 
 of the transitive verb which denotes that the action 
 indicated by the verb takes eil'ect, not on another person 
 or thing, but on the mhjcd oi' the verb. 
 
 Amor, I am lorcd ; interjidtur, he is- killed. 
 
10 
 
 r.iA'Js or SPEECH. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 Ui> 
 
 kill 
 
 / Miul lie WW in» loii^'t!!' (iifi nt.-< or iictors, but nMiipiciifs or 
 snjf'n-rrs (/m/lor, /Kissiriis, a«lj.), uiid tlu( <i;/t h/ is soiii" olio 
 »'ls<» rt'im'sciitol ill r.iitiii liy t.lie Jil)lativ«» with tlic jncposi- 
 
 tioil fi, iih. 
 
 Al) liost*' iiififftrtHs I'sf. lie wus sljilli liy tlic riH'iiiy. 
 
 \'l. lif'iiKMiilK'r tliat it is only triiiisitivc verbs, i.e. verbs 
 wliicli are j(tiiie(l with an accusative, that liave a full 
 }>assiv(! voice. AV'e cannot say no<'t(n\ or curror, or t'iror. 
 
 J»ut there is a very coniinon ns(^ of the third ju'rson 
 siii;;ular of a ]>assive form of intransitive! verl>s, without 
 any noiiiinati\e expressed, to <h'iiote that the action 
 descrilicd by tiie veri) is ]>roduced or etlected ; JIoc itur, 
 there v'.s a t/nin;/, i.e. men j^o, in this direction ; fihi nocetur, 
 h((r7ii is (font; to you, i.e. you are injureil. Owing to the 
 large number of verbs wliich, like itocco, are intransitive 
 in J.atin, this construction is of great importance. (See 
 5.) 
 
 413. (v.) Besides these active and passive verbs, there is 
 a large class of verbs called Deponent. 
 
 These are verbs which, though having passive inflexions, 
 have laid aside {tirpouerr) a passive, and assumed an active, 
 sense. Of these, some are transitive, some intransitive. 
 
 Te sriiimr, I follow you ; tihi irascar, I am angry with you. 
 
 41. Some are called Semi-deponents; they liave an 
 active form in the present, a passive in the past, with no 
 change of meaning. 
 
 Gavdco, I rejoice ; (jansms svm an'ho, I dare ; ausna sum. 
 
 45. It is important to remember that deponent verbs 
 (lif!er from other Latin verbs in furnishing both a past 
 and present participle with an active sense. 
 
 rrvjicisror, I set out ; jirtificiscens, and pvfedus, " setting 
 out," and " having set out." 
 (See 14.) 
 
 46. (vi.) Impersonal Verbs are those which are not used 
 in the lirst or second persons, but only in the third. 
 
 Even with the third person of such verbs, the subject or 
 
Introduction] 
 
 PARTS OF SPFhCH. 
 
 11 
 
 iioiiiiiiiiliv*' \'\\^^^ is iinvor n person, or cvoi; a sijlistaiitive ; 
 
 Idit t'itlirr ('/) tlic vauiH' // (nr he) iiiiplicd in llu' tcnniiiu- 
 
 tion : (ir lim vcrl* is accoiiipani*'*! and cxplainnl Ity (/>) an 
 
 inlinitivc nnuxl, or (r) a wlioln cluiisu, or ('/) a neuter 
 
 tironoiin. 
 
 * • 
 
 I'liilcf. Ii sliaiiH's me. 
 
 Ila.'c tVciMsc jihiit. II is painful to have (lon«? tin's. 
 ^Inidif lit alx'sseni. Jt liapjM'iicd that I was ahseiit. 
 Hue rr/t'i-f. This is of iiiiportaii<"o. 
 
 (S(v 123, and 202.) 
 
 AnioUL,' tiit'sc nnist lio classed the very iinjxutant con- 
 struction mentioned above (1-). 
 
 t7 (vii.) r>y Auxiliary Verbs we mean verbs used as 
 aids (((ii.ri/id) to enable other verbs to tbrni moods and 
 tenses which they cannot express within the conqtass 
 of a single word. Comjiare " I fell" with "1 Juttr fallen," 
 M here "have" has lost the sense of possession, and only 
 serves as an auxiliary veib to the verb fc'l. Such verbs 
 abound in English, because the English verb often re(piires 
 the aid of anotlier word — vuij/, icoiild, should, sha//, ivill, 
 A/, etc. — to express what can be ex])re.ssed in Latin by a 
 change in the verb itself. Compare " I was loving" with 
 oiindxiin ; "lit him go" with eat. 
 
 Jn Latin, the only auxiliary verb is esse/' io be," assisted 
 by the forms, fore, forcm. This is used largely in the 
 passive voice and future infinitive: avditns sum, audi- 
 iurum fore. 
 
 48. lUit nnich resembling these auxiliary verbs are 
 certain verbs which are closely united with the infinitive 
 of another verb, and add to that verb various modes of 
 expressing its meaning, almost as if they were additional 
 iiioods ; hence tliey are called, 
 
 (viii.) Modal Verbs. Such are those of heiriff able, 
 h'ljiiniiiui, ctdsiiKf, irishing, etc. 
 
 Possuin, neqaeo, desino, volo, haec dicere. I am able, 
 tiitable, cease, wish, to say this. 
 
 (See 42.) 
 
12 
 
 r.tA'7's ()/•• sPEi-vfr. 
 
 (Introduction 
 
 t!>. (ix.) Copulative or Link Vcrlis .irr (Ikisc wliirli 
 unite toMj'tlu'r two ii»)u;iH or inonniiiis, oin; i\\ wliicli, llie 
 Ifit'dinitc, is ii.ss('i't<'(l or jirt'dicatctl dl' llic otlicr, tlii! 
 .sul)j('('t. 
 
 Ciirsiir i'Ht IHc/ator. Cacsiir Is I)i<t.it(>r. 
 
 (fliH. Tlic ]>ritu-i|)itl of tlu'sr is tlio verb siiw, wlmsc orli/ltDil 
 iiu'Mtiiii^ wtis " I l»rfiitli«'." 
 
 WIh'H sKiii iiu'iiiis " I am,"" I t'xist," it is cmIUmI a HnliHfiinliiy vcil», 
 iu'Ciiiist' it expresses tlii' idea of I'xistciicc, mtlishnilin. (Sec (l/l 
 
 Whfi) it nicicly j(»iiis tct^'ctlicr tlii' siilijci-t :iii«l picilicat*' i>{' i\ 
 s»'nt('iic»', as al>(»vt', it is calU'd a CDjtiildHve. verl). 
 
 Wlini it supplies tin* passive voire or iiitluitive hhmx] with aid to 
 form tenses, it is called an Hiuiharij verb. 
 
 r>0. 7*(»sidos H)ini tluTO is a larijv^ (dass <d' otlicr vorlts 
 whicli liavo ill sonio cases laid asidt; tJicir oiij^inal 
 meaning, and are used to connect nouns. Su( li an? y/o 
 (us(^d as the ]»assivc of facio), cvafo, r,r/,s7(», and also the 
 ])assivc of verlis of thiiikintf, mnninff, v\c. Of course, as 
 link verl)S they cou})le to«,'e1her words wlii( h correspond 
 as clos(dy as possibh', and the two nouns which they unite 
 will be in the same case. 
 
 Caesar Jif D'ldator. Caosar boeornos Dictator. 
 
 For Verbs called Factitive A'erbs, see 239. 
 
 51. The verb, when its meaning is defined or limited 
 (/liu'.s) i»y a nominative case, Lr. when used as a trne verb, 
 as in the Krst, second, or third person, is called sometimes 
 ajiuite verb. 
 
 Uut sometimes the verb, to a certain extent, lays aside 
 its true nature as the insinnnent <>f imdciini an assirfion 
 hy joinimi toffdhn' fioo ohjects of our fJi()ii</hfs, and takes 
 that of another part of speech, the nonn, both the 
 sifhxtonfivc and the adjcrtire. The verl) is used as a 
 substantive in the injinitire mood, in the (/cn/iul, and in 
 the two sapi7ics. It is used as an adjective in tlie j;fr/'/i- 
 ciples, and in the f/mnulivi', ov participh' in -dus. 
 
 These wiil all form subjects of Exercises. 
 
 52. Adverbs have been alreadv classified. The learner 
 must be again reminded that just as in English we use 
 very freely a great number of ndvcrhial phrases in place of 
 
Introduction] 
 
 PAh'rs OP SPKf.C/f. 
 
 1.1 
 
 iulv('il»H, *'.//. in sihncc, for " >ilt'iitly," ta tlu- hnujif of, 
 iiistcail of " IxMit'lit'ially to/'llu' statr, mo lie must not tliiiik 
 that «'V«'iy Kiii^lisli atlvcrlf or ailvi'rl>ial |»liras»' is to lie icii- 
 (li'itMl litt'ially iiilu Latin. Ftill ^^uidancc, lui\v»'V«'r, will 
 lif ^Mvcii in tlic rnlju\vin,i,' Kxercist-s. (S»m', fur instance, 
 61,63,64.) 
 
 l'i:i:i'n.siTinNs will lu! classilicd fnitlu'r on. (See Kxer- 
 cises Xl.lll, .\i.iv.) 
 
 53. ('oN.irNCTinN:^ nro divided, both in Kn^lish and 
 Latin, into two classes; Ctt-oriliiitt/iiii/ and Sii/i(in/in(ifin(f 
 cdnjniictiitiis. 
 
 r>l. Coordinating conjunctions join to^M-ther sentences 
 on e(|iial tciins ; tiiese sentences iire of eijual ;,q'aininatical 
 rank, or co onlinale (^'/v/n, rank), i.e. each in [/r<(minatic(i//i/ 
 inde|)endent of the other. 
 
 You jio, iiiid, hut. iJn riforr, I shall follow. 
 
 55. Subordinating conjunctions attach to a sentence or 
 clau.scr anotliiT clause wiiich holds (i^ramniatically) a lower 
 or suhordinate jiosition, ([Ualifyin^' the jirincijial clause just 
 as an adverli (jualilies a verb. " 1 will do this, i/'you do ;" 
 the //-senlenci! (or clause) is eiiuivalent to the adverb 
 (■on(fl/i(nui//i/. (See Intr. 82.) 
 
 56. The Co-ordinating conjunctions in Latin and English 
 are — 
 
 (I. Copulative — 
 
 Ef, -qiit', ac, (ifqiie ; ncr, neqnc (when used for "and not") ; 
 
 I'iiain, pnutt'rcii^ etc. 
 And, also ; nor, and not; moreover, etc. 
 
 I. Disjunctive, i.e. they join together the sentences, 
 but they iHsjoiii or separate from i-ach other the thoughts 
 conveyed: " We nnist <lo this, or die." 
 
 Anf, rrl, -re ; ucr, iit'qiic ; sire, sru ; {nn, -ii^). 
 
 Or, either; neither, nor ; whether, or; (or). 
 
 c. Adversative. Two statenu'uts are opjiosed to each 
 other — 
 
 St'd, (iiih'in, rcritni, rem, titmen. 
 
 But, ncvt'ilheless, uotwil listauding, however, etc. 
 
14 
 
 PA A' 7\S Of SPEECir. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 d. Illative or Inferential. The statciiieiit of one sen- 
 tence ' Itrin^s in " {ivfcrt) or proves the other ; 
 
 Enjii, uj'ttur. if.fKpie. Thcrt'tnif, acconlingly, and .so, etc. 
 
 c. Caus} 
 Nam, 
 
 luiwqiic, <!?i'nn, eteii'ini. 
 
 F 
 
 or. 
 
 57. Oitserve that Latin lias a <.freater variety of eon- 
 junctions than EnL;lisli ; for our " and" it lias if, -i/iir, af'jiic 
 
 <((• 
 
 or our or 
 
 (ti( 
 
 t, ri'L -re, as well as tni ; and each of 
 
 thes(! words has a .somewhat ditlerent nicaninu'.^ 
 
 58, Very often also the relative ]»ronoiin qin' may take 
 the ])hice of an Kn^lish co-ordinatinj;- conjunction, and he 
 placed at the head of a sentence or clause where we 
 should use "and," "but," "so." 
 
 QiKie j)ost(iuani audivit. .'ImJ after he heard (his. 
 
 a. 
 
 59. The Subordinating- conjunctions are- 
 Final — • 
 
 Latin. 
 
 English. 
 
 Uf, ijiKi ; and negative iit', That (fdf/dHcd hi/ may 
 
 or 
 
 Huoiiunus. 
 
 might), ill order to, to iriih 
 the Injinitirc ; that not, lest, 
 etc. 
 
 * Latin has three Copulative conjunctions t(> rei)resent our "and," — 
 cf ; ahiuc, IXC ; and -7M''. Et simply couples words and chiuses ; -qui' 
 couples two words as forming one wliole, f<i' .s//"(jue, etc., or connects a 
 jlosely related clause ; utiiiii' connects with emphasis, "and also, " "and 
 1 may say. " 
 
 Ac, the shcnter form of Kiqiii', nuist never be used before words that 
 begin with a vowel. 
 
 Ant. . . Kiif, and vrl . . . rrl, both answer to the English litlicr . . . 
 or, but nxf marks a sharp distincticm : Hoc nut verum est nut falsum. 
 This is citlur true or false, i.i'. if it is true, it is not false. Vrl in') 
 is connected with rrUi' ; and treats the difference as unimportant : 
 "whichever you like." 
 
 Hoc velim rel vi vd clam facias. 
 
 I would have you do this either by force or secretly (as you prefer). 
 
 Hence rtl . . . ni is often e«]uivalent to I't . . . et, and both = 
 aliki' . . . ami. 
 
 \ \v vrl Irf) ingenio vrl (it) virtute insignis. 
 
 A man rci.iai'kablc u/i.i-r Uiv his al)dity iimt his gondncss. 
 
 An is only used for "or" iu (juestions. (Sec 169.) 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
introduction] 
 
 PANTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 IB 
 
 as 
 
 }). ('(iiisec-utivc — 
 
 T-^'i''>^- Engmsh. 
 
 II , nf nan, quia. So that, so as to; so 
 
 not to, etc. 
 r. T('iii])oral — 
 
 ('"'UN, Nhi, lit; qimnidhi, When, as soon as ; wl.ilc, as 
 
 dam; qnn,uJ, donee, prhu- long as; until, hcfore that: 
 
 (lif"ii),>(nfeqN((in;j)<isfquam. after that, etc. 
 (/. ( 'aiisal — 
 
 l,h/nd, qnia, qmniiam, qmimlo- Jiecause, since, inasnuich as 
 
 'piidein, ohiiii qunm; noil seeing that, whnvas ; not 
 
 iiuo. 
 ( 'oiiditional — 
 
 Si, nisi, si null; sirr, ,sV'/. ; 
 also dinii, iiiodo ; diim iie, 
 iiiodo ne. 
 
 tliat, not because, etc. 
 
 If; unless, if not; whctlier 
 ... or; i)rovided that, so 
 long as, on tlie condition 
 that, etc. 
 /. (Comparative and Proportional — 
 
 i>'«iia ; qiKLii, iiuiquaiii, Than ; as, as if, as tliough, just 
 siciif ut, qiiemadmodum, as, in proportion as; the 
 proiiide ar; quo . . . eo, (old abl.) more . . . the 
 with comparatives. more, etc. 
 
 (J. C'fjncessive — 
 
 Etsi, fniiie/sl, qumuquam, Although, albeit, etc. 
 quamvi.^, licet, ut. 
 
 k Defining or Explanatory— 
 
 Q"<vt: but their use is That (He says, or knows, 
 limited in Latin, their etc., that I di<l it. It is true 
 place l)emg largely taken that he <lid it, etc.) Used 
 by the infinitive mood. most widely in Knglish and 
 
 modern languages." 
 /. Tiiterrogativu (with dependent clauses)— 
 
 Cur, iitrinii,aii,niim; qtiein- Whether ... or if- h(.\v • 
 admndum ut ; eiir, quam- why, wherefore; 'whrre' 
 obi-rin ; uhi, qaando. when. 
 
 Observe in how many different senses vt and niunn 
 fiiv used. ^ 
 
 GO. The rehitive qui is used also very cominonly in 
 I'liini ot sub( miniating conjunctions: see Kxercises LXill, 
 
16 
 
 ANA I, y SIS OF SF.NTKhXK. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 ANALYSIS OF THE LATIN SENTENCE. 
 
 i'!!!!l 
 
 '1, 
 
 Gl. liy a sentence, whether in Latin or in KiiL,fli,sh, we 
 mean a graniniatical combination of words, wliich eithtu- 
 (1) makes a statement, or (2) a.sks a questiuii, ov (.'5) con- 
 veys a cotmntind or desire. 
 
 Every sii/;h sentence, however long or however short, 
 consists of two parts : — 
 
 02. F'irst, a subject — that of wliich somethini: is stated, 
 asked, or desired; secondly, a predicate — that which is 
 stated, asked, or desired in reference to that subject. 
 
 He is well. Is he W(;ll 1 May he be well ! 
 
 Valet. Valet mi Vahuil 
 
 In each of these sentences he (expressed in Latin by the 
 termination, or personal inflexion of the verb: see 12) 
 is the suhjeet, the rest is the j^r^'dicate. (See 1 1 .) 
 
 63. But such short sentences are rare in all languaoes. 
 They are shorter in Latin than in English for the reason 
 given in 12. 
 
 The following more ordinary form of sentence is one 
 that occurs in Bk. i. c. 1 of Caesar de Bella Galileo : — 
 
 Hi ojiiues lingua, institutis, moribus, infer se diff'crunt. 
 These all {or all of these) differ from one another in 
 language, institutions, and habits. 
 
 Here in both languages Hi omncs (these all) is the 
 suhjeet; all the rest is the predicate. The main part of 
 the predicate is the verb differunt, the rest being adjuncts 
 or additions to the verb, explaining and limiting it, telling 
 \\^ from wliom all of these differ, and in what joints. 
 
 G4. A sentence of this kind, whether short (as the 
 examples in 62) or longer (as that in 63), is called a 
 simple sentence. 
 
 By a simple sentence we mean one which consist^ of a 
 single subject and a single predicate. 
 
 65. Ohs. — Sometimes there is a single predicate and two or more 
 suhjedn united by conjunctions, as 
 
 You aiul I lifted up our hands. 
 You and I are old. 
 
Introduction] 
 
 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCE. 
 
 17 
 
 Sometimes .a single suhjert with tico or three predicates, as 
 
 Tlie Avmy put tojiiijht iind killed many of the enemy. 
 
 These are sometimes called iiintraeted sentences, as they are a 
 sliortciit'il form of siicli sentences as, 
 
 You lifted up 3'our hands, <ind I lifted up my hands. 
 
 Tt may l>e Letter to look on them as simple sentences with a subject 
 or prediciitc consist ing of two or more words, united l»y the conjunc- 
 tion anil. (See 21.) 
 
 Gf). Ill both laii^tia^i;e.s tlie subject will always ])e a 
 stihstautive of some kind, or its e(|uivaleiit. The equi- 
 valent may 1x3 a siibstaiilival pronoun (3.'i), or an adjective, 
 partieiide, or adjectival pronoun used as a sul)stantive (31), 
 or an iiijinitire mood (51), or some comhination of ^vords, 
 used as a substantive. (See Examides in 07.) 
 
 Til 
 
 ill ab 
 
 ith 
 
 )f 
 
 predicate 
 
 or else of son)e adjective,^ substantive, or combination of 
 words, connected witli tlie subject by a verb expressed or 
 luiderstood (see 49), r.//. .• — 
 
 Cdf'sar vixit. Caesar has Jircd. 
 
 SuplcDli's sunt bcatissiuii. Wise inen arc the hnppied. 
 J/ic rex est. He (this man) is kiiuj. 
 
 yll/ruiii Cdlrre mihi delectationi est. Cultivating the land 
 (or farming) is a diliyjd to nic 
 
 (>!).<. — Where the liidv verb is omitted we supply it (at least in 
 English and Latin i in thought. 
 
 Hai»iiy the good ! Qiiot hotnims tat Aintentwe. 
 
 (There are; as many views as there are 
 men. 
 
 OS. Tlie subject may, even in a simjjle sentence, be greatly 
 fii/drffid or prolonged by the addition of adji'cfivcs, (nljcc- 
 tlt'dl phrases,' /iroinm iis, words in apposition, etc. 
 
 l>(>iii rcijcs aiiKititiir. (foixt kings are lovi'd. 
 
 Cuius, rir optiiiuis et magnac auctoritatis, ////rr/zV/////-. 
 
 Cains, (III. circl/nit iiuui ninl of (jnal iiijltiriiei',iii slain. 
 
 ' 'I'hc adjective is specially a<laptcd for a predicate ; it may evtii be 
 said that the siilistantivi' wiien used as a ]ire(licate is useil adjt'ctivally. 
 - r.y ail ailjc'tival i)lira>JO we iMcan some woiil or condiination of 
 worils ot!i;i' tiiaii an adjective used in ])!ace of an adjective : — 
 rir siuninie foi-titmlinis = rir fortissinms. 
 Iiaee //v //'A' in iguae rrif delectationi = gratissima. 
 
18 
 
 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCE. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 III 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 69. So also the predicate may be enlarged and mado 
 more distinct and intelli,<,dl>le by tlie addition of obliijiio 
 cases of substantives to tlie Verb to express ifs nearer and 
 remoter objects; and these substantives may liavc in thiMi" 
 turn various adjuncts, such as adjectives or <»th(,'r su))stan- 
 tives in apposition. 
 
 I*at« I' fiho, piiiTo (ii'fads tcni'iw ntrix^'nim, lilninn jin'fii>.'<is- 
 siiiii/iti JlitiiKic cniplaiii, il'.nio dedit. Tin' Jiil/irr (/air his 
 muclid<ivod son of tender years d present of a costly 
 hdok bought at Home. 
 
 " The father" is the subject; all the rest is the predi- 
 cate. 
 
 Ohx. — The verb didit say.s of the father that he gave sonietliiiiijj. Tlie 
 d.itive Cii.se dono, clo.sely coiuhiiied with the verb, explains i,l)y a .special 
 use of that case) that what he "^ave he jfave /(.s, or for, n pirKi'iif. The 
 dative case Jilio does tlie rejfular work of the dative, i.r. specitics the 
 remotir ohject of that gift, tlie son who Itenetited l»y it ; the substantive 
 and adjective in apposition, toj^ether with tlu' adjectival phrase (KftttiK 
 tcncnie, },dve some further particulars as to that rciiiotei- ohject. 
 
 The accusative case lihruiti completes the idea vajfiiely expressed 
 by (loiio dedit. It performs the proper function of the accusative 
 case, as it (Completes the idea only half e\|)ressc(l by a tiansitive verb, 
 by sujtplyinj^ tlie (nearer) object of the verb. (See mS. ) 
 
 It is in turn made more distinct by its combination with an adjec- 
 tive, y>)v//o.s'/.'<.s'//(n<//(, and a participle comV)iiied with the lo(^al case nf 
 a noun. Rontav imptum. These tell us its value, and the placo where 
 it wa.s purchased. 
 
 But the main and essential parts of the ])i'ediejite are 
 the verb drdit with its two accompanying cases JiJio and 
 lihnnii. 
 
 70, Again, the at;tion described by llic verb may be 
 explained and made distinct by the afbhtioii id' m/rrrh.s, 
 or of substantives used adverbially (especially the ablative 
 and locative caae^), ntifverhift/ phmsi's, purfici/i/is, (/rrnnds, 
 lierundirc^, or adjcrfircs used adverl>iiilly ; c.;/. 
 
 Diu vi.rif. He lived Iojkj. 
 Vixit nonaginta aim<ts. He lived ninrtij iimrs. 
 Ftiuie iiilrriit. He died of fdiiiiiir. 
 
 Sunnna emu celeritate iriiif (=celerrinie irnif). He came 
 with the utmost speed. 
 
Introduction] ANAL YSIS OF SENTENCE. 
 
 19 
 
 Londini /•/,/;//. He lived at Lwdon. 
 
 Pugnans iiderJicHur. H«3 is killed vhUe fiqhfinq 
 
 Sui hberandi causa ptnimnf. He fough'tVo/zw hhiwlf 
 
 Invitn^hocjm. 1 did tliis w«.W///«/////. 
 
 In each of these sentences we have adverbs, or th.Mr 
 equivalents, fulfilling the proper functi..n of adverbs 
 t.e qiLakfi/m;j a,id cxplaimmj the action dr.mord tn, tin- 
 vrrb. 
 
 71. Tbe verb, instead of being, as in the example above 
 a very importnnt part of the predicate, may serve as little 
 more than a link to connect together the subject and pre- 
 
 Bf/0 coiiml ero. I shall be consul. 
 
 Hei-e the verb ero is a mere link (adding however the 
 Idea ot time) between the sul)ject and predicate 
 
 bo other verbs in a less degree. 
 Rex Nunia appelhitur. The king /.. vamed Nunia 
 (See 50.) 
 
 In such cases the predicate and subject will, ns alrea.lv 
 explained, be in the same case, as it is their agreen.en't 
 or identity that the verb asserts. 
 
 72. The use of the adjective, when it stands iu such 
 sentences as th(> predicate, must be distinguished from its 
 use as an attribute. (See 8.) ' 
 
 Hie rex houu. Qm-dicate) e.st. Reges Imi {attrdnde) amantur. 
 
!IP 
 
 i;i! 
 
 •20 
 
 THE COMPOUX/) SliNTEXCi:. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 ill 
 
 THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 73. Siiii])l(! seiitunoes am in Kiiglisli iiiul in Latin ratlier 
 the exception tlian the rnlc. 
 
 In Latin, as in Kn.^lisli, we can neitluT converse nor 
 write witliout n.sini;' sentences which are eillier combined 
 with, or cAntiiin williin themselves as ]»artof theirsubject 
 or predicate, otlier sentences or chaises.^ 
 
 L CO-ORDINATION. 
 
 74. Sentences are combined together by Co-ordination. 
 That is, two or more sentences are ]>hiced side by side 
 in coml»iniition willi eacli otliei' ; they stand to eacli 
 other on e([nal terms ; one is !4iammatieally as important 
 as tlie otlier. (See At.) 
 
 75. Sncli sentences are connected in English and Latin 
 by co-ordinatinn' conjunctions, ro.w/, hut, for ; rf, ant, nam, 
 etc. 
 
 You <lo tliis, /lilt f do that ; 
 
 I shall t;'o liouie, /<'/' I am tired; 
 
 Either you must go, ar I shall (t;o). 
 
 For a. list of English and Latin co-ordi;iatin<^ conjunc- 
 tions, see. f)!'). 
 
 70. It has been stated that even the relative qui, 
 iimonj^' its other uses, is iVe([Uently used to connect two 
 co-ordinated sentences. (See A.s.) 
 
 In English also this is the case, thon^h uku'c randy ; 
 
 I mcit your son, who told uu^ that you Mere at hoiuo. 
 Here w]io = it)id he. 
 
 ' Tlio term douse is ustul for tlio viU'ious i^iihticuti'm't'K wliich make uj» 
 the whole coiuihiuikI senteiico. 
 
Introduction] 
 
 ■iHE coMPouNn sextence. 
 
 21 
 
 Notice; iiniiiii liow luauy sciilciict's, und (!V(3ii cliiiptcrs, in 
 C'iU'sar iind oIIht J.iitiii iiulliors l)t'L;iii witli a relative. 
 
 O/;.'}.— SuTiictiiiK's co-onliiiiito sentences are | laocd side by side 
 without any i-oiijunction, 
 
 Vi'ni^ ri(li,rici. I cnnie, I saw, I coiKpiered. 
 Contciuj»ii ('(it Hi mil iilii<lii»t, iion jiertiiiiiHviim tnos. 
 
 77. The syntax of the co-ordinate seiiteiice will cause 
 no s[H'cial ditliculty. The characteristic of a co-ordinate 
 sentence is, tliat it does noi: (jraininntindhf dipntil on 
 ((/lutJtcr ; it is a sentence combined with another, but on 
 an inth'paulent footiu<i. The mood and tense of its verb, 
 the case of it.^ noun or nouns, are in no way dependent 
 upon any other sentence. 
 
 II. SUBORDINATION. 
 
 78. Sentences nuay be joined together by Subordina- 
 tion. 
 
 A sentence may consist of different clauses, each contain- 
 ing its own verb, so cond)ined that we have one principal 
 or main clause, containing the }»rincipal verb, to which 
 other Clauses stand, so far as grammar is concerned, in a 
 suhonUnate or dependent position. 
 
 Henuyon the commodin'c, alter he hud cast anchor, .sent 
 some of his wen to land, and ordered tlmn to ask whether 
 provisions and water could be procured, if the tleet 
 that was yet to come should need tlicni. 
 
 Here we have wdiat we may call a douUc vomjwund 
 sentence ; i.e. two co-ordinate main clauses (in italics) 
 conn cted by and, each with one or more subordinate 
 clauses dependent on it. 
 
 79. Such subordinate clauses will answer to the three 
 different parts of speech — the substantive, the adjective, 
 and the adverb, — which form with the verb the chief 
 component parts of a sentence. 
 
22 
 
 THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. [Introduction 
 
 i. Substantival. 
 
 SO. They ma> be Substantival. That is, they may 
 stand in tlic n'latioii uf substantives to the verb of the 
 |»iin('ipal clause. 
 
 Tlie following are three clearly marked instances of 
 ilitlei-ent kinds of substantival clauses — 
 
 {ii) Se regem esse d'mt. He said thai he ivas a king, 
 
 (b) Quid fieret qiiapsivit. He asked vhat tens heinfj done. 
 
 {(■) Ut sibi ignoscerem oravit. He entreated me to 
 pardon him. 
 
 In each of these Latin sentences the main clause con- 
 sists of a single wortl, the verbs dixit, qiumsivit, oravit; 
 but each has ai)j)ended to it a subordinate clause, 
 answering to an accusative case, and containing {a) a 
 statement, (h) a question, (c) an entreaty. 
 
 ii. Adjectival. 
 
 81. Subordinate clauses may also be Adjectival. By 
 this we mean that they may stand in the same relation to 
 the ]»rincipal clause as an attributive adjective. (See 8.) 
 
 They include all such '' clauses " as are introduced by 
 qni in its sim])lest use as the relative; used, that is, to 
 define or specify some previous substantive expressed or 
 understood. 
 
 They are called adjectival because they define more 
 closely such antecedent substantive or pronoun, precisely 
 as an adjective or a substantive used as an adjective, i.e. 
 in apposition, would do. 
 
 For " Boni recjes amantur " we may say " Reges, qui boni 
 
 sunt, amantur.'* 
 For '' ServorM7n fidelissimum misi" we. mny say '^ Servum 
 
 mid, queni tidelissimum habui." 
 For '' Cictro Consul" we may say ^^ Cicero, qui Consul 
 
 est," or " fuit." 
 
Introduction] THE COMPOrXD SEMIEXCE. 
 
 M 
 
 iii. Adverbial. 
 
 82. There also is a orcjit vai-icly of AnvKiiBiAL clauses. 
 By these we mean ihose which add t<> tin? ])riiici|)ul 
 
 clause, <,n"iinnnatically c(»m])lete without them, soiix; further 
 clause expr^^ssiug end in view, result, ti,ne, ranne, condition, 
 contrast, /i/.rucss. 
 
 Tliese clauses ])lay the ])art of adverbs or adverbial 
 phrases to the niitin clause. Compare — 
 
 Hoc cousulto /'cr/, with Hoc frri ut tihi ]i]acerpm ; 
 I di«l t\uii jjurposel I/, with I did this /// unhr that I might 
 
 2)lt'((se you ; 
 
 where the adverbs consulto and purposely are replaced by 
 adverbial clauses. 
 
 Or take an English sentence — 
 
 I will do this conditionally. 
 
 We have here a sim])le sentence, in which the predicate is 
 qualified ..y the adverb conditional ly. Substitute — 
 
 I will do this, if (or on the condifnni fluit) i/nu do that. 
 
 Here we have no longer a simjde but a compound sen 
 fence, the princii)al clause, / ivill do this, being qualified 
 by a subordinate adverbial clause. 
 
 83. These adverbial clauses are divided into seven 
 classes — 
 
 1. Final, those which denote ajJurpose. 
 
 2. Consecutive, „ restdt. 
 
 3. Temi)oral, „ time. 
 
 4. Causal, „ reason or cause. 
 
 5. Conditional, ,, supposition. 
 
 6. Concessive or adversative, contrast. 
 
 7. Comparative, „ comparison or proportion. 
 
 84. They are connected with the main clause some- 
 times by subordinating conjunctions, a list of which has 
 been given above (see 59), sometimes by the relative 
 ipd, the use of which is in Latin far wider and more 
 varied than in English 
 
u 
 
 ORDER OF iyoR/).\. 
 
 f Introduction 
 
 il: 
 
 85. Tim lollowiii},' jin* instjince.s : — 
 
 line veiii, nt te vldercm. 
 
 I came here in order to see i/oii. 
 
 Iluiiii cec'idit ut cms fraiKjcn-t. 
 
 Ho full on tlio ground w ((.s- Ui hn'nlc his leg. 
 
 Qintni hni'c, dixissct, ii))iro voluit. 
 fr/icn he had sjxih'ii thus, he, wished to 
 depart. 
 
 Quod haec fecisti, gratias tibi ago. 
 
 I return thanks to yuwfor (trlnuj thus. 
 
 SI hoc ff'Cf'ris poenas <lal)is. 
 
 If you do this you will 1)0 punished, 
 
 Quonquam fcsfhio, tanien hie morahor. 
 Thou(/h I (Uii in haste, yet I will delay here 
 
 Proindc ac merit us es te utar. 
 
 I will deal with you us you hare deferred. 
 
 Final, 
 
 Consecutive, 
 
 Temporal, 
 
 Causal, . 
 
 Conditional, 
 
 Concessive., 
 
 Comparativ(i ( 
 or Modal, j 
 
 In each case the subordinate clause, or its substitute in 
 English, is in italic letters, the main clause in lioman. 
 
 ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES IN 
 A LATIN SENTENCE. 
 
 86. The order of words in a Lutiii sentence differs, in 
 many important respects, from the English order. There 
 are very few sentences in which the natural ordt^r of one 
 language corresponds to that of tlu; other. There is much 
 greater freedom and variety in Latin, especially as regards 
 substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs. For these 
 parts of speech are eaeli suscei)tilile of a great variety of 
 changes in their terminations, called iitflcxioRS. It is these 
 inflexions, and not tlieir ydace in the sentence, which 
 mark the relations of words to other words. As we have 
 far fewer of these inflexions in English, we are obliged to 
 look for the precise meaning of a word, not to ita for ni but 
 to its j>rwz7zV>M. 
 
Introduction] 
 
 Oh'DKK (>/'• H'OA'/)S. 
 
 87. If wo tiike tlio Eui^lish senti^ice, " The soldier saw 
 tlie enemy," W(! ciiiiiiot iiivLTt the order of the two suh- 
 staiitives, and write " Tlie enemy saw the soldier," without 
 entirely chanuinL,' the meaning'; hut in Latin we may 
 write iiti/r.^ rill it hostcni, hosftni ciilit nii/rs, or mili/i hosfcni 
 ridit, witliout any furtlier clian.<,'e than tiiat of shifting the 
 en)|)ha.sis j'rom one word to another. 
 
 But for all tliis tiie followin;^ rules sliould be carefully 
 attended to in writin<f Latin, and variations from them 
 noticed in reading Latin prose authors. 
 
 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 88. The subject of the sentence, cue nominative case, 
 stands, as in English, at the beginning of or early in the 
 sentence. 
 
 Caesar, or Tnm Caesar exercitum in ylcdiim'vm fines ducit. 
 Compare — Tlu'reupon Caesar leads his army into the terri- 
 tory of the Aedui. 
 
 89. The vn'b (or if not the verb, some important part of 
 the predicate) conies last of all, as ducit in the sentence 
 above. 
 
 Ea res mihi fuit gratissima. 
 
 That circumstance was most welcome to me. 
 
 Ohs. — Stem, when used as a link verb, rarely comes last. 
 
 90. But if great stress is laid on the verb it is placed 
 at the beginning, and the subject removed to the last 
 place. 
 
 Tulit hoc vulnus graviter Cicero. Cicero doubtless felt 
 
 this wound deeply. 
 Est caeleste niimen. There realb/ is, or there exists, a 
 
 heavenly power. 
 
 This position of sum often distinguishes its substantive 
 from its copulative and auxiliary uses. (See 49, Obs.) 
 
26 
 
 oa'/)/-:a' of words. 
 
 rintrodurtion 
 
 01. For it must alwaya bo. remeinbonul tliat 
 
 Tilt! (l(!^'r(!o ot" prominence and emphasis to Ix; •^'ivcn to a 
 won! is tliat whicli mainly di'tcrminus its position iii tliu 
 sent(Mice. And, 
 
 Tlio two ompliatic; ])ositions in a Latin scnttnice are tin? 
 hef/i/i)il nr/ iuid tlm nuf. Ily tlio former our attcMition i.s 
 raised and susptnubMl, wliih; tlu! fidl meanin<,' of tlu; sen- 
 tenc ! is rarely eompletecl till the last word is ri^aelied. 
 
 Hence, from the hal)it of pla(3in<,' the most important 
 part of the piedicatc;, which is <,'en(>rally the verh, hist of 
 all, we rarely see a Latin sentence from which the hist 
 word or words can he retnoved without dcHtroijiufi the /i/r, 
 so to speak, of the whoh; sentence. 
 
 This can easily he illustrated from any chapter of a 
 Latin author. 
 
 92. The more unusual a position is for any word, the 
 more emphatic it is /or t/iat ivord. Thus 
 
 Arbores scret dilif/ctis itgr'wohi, qvariini ad^plriet hucraiii ipse 
 min({i.am. — (C'/V.) 
 
 Here the adverh is made emphatic by position ; in Kn<^- 
 lishwe must express the em])hasis differently, as hy"lhou,nh 
 the day will never come when he will see their Iruit." 
 
 A word that ^^enerally stands close by another receives 
 emphasis by srp((rntion from it ; especially if it be thus 
 brou{]fht near the bemnniuLi or end of a sentence. 
 
 Voluptatcm jH'rrcjd niaxiiuum. J^nqiferea quod idiiid iter 
 haberent nullum. Aedui eqvites ad Caesurt))) onmes 
 revertujdur. 
 
 93. As re;4ards the interior arr-angement of the sentence, 
 governed words, such as (1) the ac^cusativc or dative, ex- 
 pressive of the nearer or remoter oltjects of verbs, or 
 (2) genitive or other cases governed by a noun or adjective 
 or participle, come usually before, not as in English after, 
 the words which govern them, 
 
 Hunc lil)rum tilio dedi. 
 Compare — I gave this bo(»k to my son. 
 
 F enter tieiis tui est siiiidtimus. 
 Compare — V<>ur brother i^ exceedingly like you, 
 
Introduction) 
 
 ()A'/)/:a' <)/• ii'oh'ns. 
 
 tl 
 
 04. Atljcctives, wlicii usimI iis iitti ihutcH, nnMjftcncr than 
 not phu'tMl iifhr tlu! iiotin witli wliicli tlicy ii.i^'rcc ; but tin.' 
 j)i()iii)iin ///'• ainl iiioiiusylliiltic inoiioiiiis jiiid adjiictives of 
 iiiimltcr or (luaiitity, hc/'orr, as in Knijlisli. 
 
 J7/' Ixniiis ; liri/iis «»|>uI«'nti.s.siinH ; liucc opinio; porniulti 
 
 linlltilirs. 
 
 When a .substantive' is conibincd both with an juljective 
 and a ^^enitive, the usual orch-r is tliis — 
 
 /V/v^ (III i ml nia</iiitii(/o. Tiim ^rcatiicsa of mind. 
 
 95. A word in aj)j)osition «,'t'iu'rally stands, as does the 
 adjective, after the word to winch it rehites. 
 
 Q. } furl IIS au^^Mir; M. Tiillliis Clfcnt consul; Pi/thagoras 
 
 ])hil(>s()phus. 
 Lii.nirld <'t ii/nnrla^ pessiniiie artes. 
 
 06. Adverl)s and their equivalents, such as ablative and 
 other cases, and adverbial phrases, come before the verbs 
 which they ([ualify. 
 
 Ilk rex diu vhit. This kin^' lived long. 
 
 Jt/riim ferro et igni lastavit. He laid waste the land 
 
 irlfh jiir iiitd sicitrd. 
 Lilienter hoc feci . I did this cheerfulhi. 
 Triginta annos refjnavit. He reigned thirtij years. 
 
 97. But in all these cases the usual order may be 
 reversed to a far greater extent than in English for the 
 sake of emphasis. 
 
 08. Enim, vero, antem, quoqite, quidem (with the en- 
 clitics,^ -que, -re, n^), cannot be the first words of a clause ; 
 quoque and quidem follow the words to which they belong. 
 
 00. The negative adverbs non, havd, ncque, are placed 
 always before the words which they qualify; nc quidem^ 
 " not even," always enclose the word which they em- 
 phasise : as, nc hie qiiidcm, " not even he." 
 
 ^ An enclitic is a word which does not stand by itself, hut is written 
 atthtM'iidof the word m liicli it ([ualiiirs : -nr (iiitiTrogative), -7((? = and, 
 -cizzzuv, are the toninionest Latin t-iielitics. 
 
 '^ 
 
28 
 
 ORDER OF CLAUSES. 
 
 [IntroducMon 
 
 111 
 
 11 
 
 ■iiii 
 
 IS. 
 
 i-ii; 
 
 ;::i!|l 
 
 
 ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 
 Substantival Clauses. 
 
 100. Substantival Clauses, whetlu'r statements, ques- 
 tions, or commands, usually come before the verb on which 
 they depend. (See HO.) 
 
 Errare so ad. He says Chat he is wrong. 
 
 Quid fiat dic'tm. I will tell you ivhat is being done. 
 
 (Ut) hoc facias oro. I beg you to do this. 
 
 English and Latin here differ exactly as they do in the 
 position of the accusative case, which in English follows, 
 and in Latin 2}'i^<^ccdcs, the verb. 
 
 101. But if the dependent clause is long and important, 
 and the prin('i])al clause short and unemphatic, the order 
 is generally reversed. 
 
 Respondct ille, si velit secnm coUoqui, etc. (introducing a 
 
 long speech). 
 Quaeris cur hoc hoinliic tanto ojierc delecter. 
 Oro ut me sicut ai\tea, uttcnte audiatis. 
 
 Adjectival Clauses. 
 
 102. The relative clause is placed often where it would 
 stand in an English sentence. 
 
 fUit it may be }>lac(Ml earlier and more in the centre of 
 the sentence than is ])()ssible in English. 
 
 //? hi.% quae nunc instant, peii'-ulis. 
 In these dangers which now threaten us. 
 
 This is accounted for by the ]»rinciple laid down in 91, 
 and the relative clause often, for the same reason, precedes 
 the nuiin clause. 
 
 Quani (iiiis<|uc noi'it artem, /// hac sc exerceat. 
 Let each practise the jtrofession with which he is 
 acquainted. 
 
Introduction] 
 
 ORDER OF CLAUSES. 
 
 2d 
 
 Adverbial Clauses. 
 
 103. These, like tlie a(lverl).s in a simple sentence, 
 usually, unless very enipliatic, come hrforc the main clause. 
 
 Tiiey are ])laced, in I'act, much as they would be in an 
 English sentence, but with a greater tenchiucy to place 
 the main and more emphatic clause last. (See 91.) 
 
 104. Temporal clauses such as, haec uhi audirit, etc., 
 together witli aV)lative absolutes {hoc covqx'rto, etc.), and 
 participial i)hnises, id rrritus, etc., often, like adverbs of 
 time find place, turn, ihi, dcindr, etc., form the opening 
 wortl of a sentence. 
 
 So .also clauses introduced ])y (juum (itmi\)OYaV),qi(07iinm 
 (causal), qutniqnam (concessive), .si (conditional), sicut 
 (comparative), usually come before the main clause ; as 
 do final clauses (iit . . . ne . . .), more frequently than 
 in English. 
 
 P)Ut consecutive clauses (id,, so that) usually, as in 
 English, follow the main clause. 
 
 105. The fcdlowing are exam^des of the iisunl order: — 
 
 Having said this, he departed. 
 
 If it is to be, it will come to 
 
 Quum liaec dixisset, (d)iit 
 (temporal). 
 
 Si futurum est, Jiet (con- 
 ditional). 
 
 Ut sementcm feceris, ita 
 mf'ics (comparative). 
 
 Quoniam vir es, congredi- 
 amur (causal). 
 
 Bomani, quanquam fessi 
 erant, tamcii ohriiun jrru- 
 ccdiud (concessive). 
 
 Eniie OJMritct, ut ) 
 
 vivas. V (final), 
 
 llaec ne facias, aid.) 
 (Jiiis fad tdiii fi'nriis, ut 
 
 uiei noi; misererelur 
 
 (consecutive). 
 
 You will reap as you have 
 
 sown. 
 Since you are a man, 'let us 
 
 close in fiij-lit. 
 The Komans advanced to nuH't 
 
 (tlK'ui) in sj)it(! of their 
 
 fatigue. 
 You sliould eat to live. 
 
 To avoid doing tliis, liegone. 
 A\'ho was so hard-hearted as 
 not to pity nie 1 
 
 
fmm 
 
 80 
 
 ORDER OF CLAUSES. 
 
 [Introduction 
 
 106. It may be well to add that a repeated word, or a 
 word akin to another in the sentence (such as one pronoun 
 to another), is generally placed as near to that word as 
 possible. 
 
 Nulla virtus virtuti contraria est. No kind of virtue is 
 
 opposed to virtue. 
 Te-n^ ego aspkio ? Is it youvAxom. I see 1 
 Aliis aliunde est jJericulum. Danger threatens different 
 
 men from different quarters. 
 Timor timorem jjellit. Fear banishes fear. 
 
 We see that Latin has a great advantage in this respect 
 over English. 
 
 107. Of two corresponding clauses or groups of words 
 of parallel construction, the order of the first is often 
 reversed in tlie second : so that two of the antitketical 
 words are as near as possible. 
 
 Fraijile coi'pus aninuis sempUcrnus movet. Ratio nostra 
 consentit ; pugnat oratio. Quae me moverunt, movisscnt 
 eadoti te pro/edo. 
 
 To many of these rules exceptions may be found. For 
 the order in Latin is determined, as has been already said, 
 not by any strict rules, but by considerations of emphasis, 
 clearness, sound, rhythm, variety, some of which sometimes 
 defy explanation, l)ut which may be easily noticed and 
 understood by any one who reads Lntin with observation 
 and intelligence. 
 
 As a general rule, in any but the shortest clause the 
 English order is sure to be ill adapted to a Latin sentence. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 ELEMENTARY AND GENERAL RULES. 
 
 Most of the followin<r rules necessarily follow from 
 what lias been said in tlie Introduction. "Two or three 
 are added on constructions of exceedingly frequent 
 occurrence. 
 
 1. A finite verb (see Intr. 51) agrees with its subject 
 (or its nominative case) in numher and pcrsun. 
 
 Jvis caiiit. The bird sings. 
 Aves canunt. The birds sing. 
 
 2. An adjective, pronoun, or particijde agrees with 
 the substantive to which it is attached, or of which it is 
 predicated, in gender, numher, and cuae. (Intr. 8, 9.) 
 
 Rex ille, vir justissimus, ]>litrimA foedera pactns est. That 
 just king contracted many treaties. 
 
 3. When t(j a substantive or personal pronoun there is 
 added a substantive explaining or tlescribing it, the latter 
 is said to be placed in ajiposition to the former, and must 
 agree in case with the substantive to which it is added. 
 
 Alexander, tot regum aiquc populurum victor. Alexander, 
 the conqueror of so many kings and nations. 
 
 Ofts.— The substantive when thus used resembles an adjective. 
 Alexander is here described by one special quality. i^Intr. 7.) 
 
 SI 
 
32 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 [Ex. I. 
 
 4. A transitive verb, wlmtlior active or deponent, is 
 joined with an accusative «>f tlie nearer object ; that is to 
 say, of the pm^fioii or thiwf (nied upon. 
 
 SacmJos liostiain cecUlit. The priest struck down the 
 
 victim. 
 Alin:^ ahum hortdtiir. One man exliorts another. 
 
 Tliis rule is invariable; every really transitive verb 
 governs an accusative. (See Intr. 38.) 
 
 5. I)Ut many verbs tliat are transitive in English must 
 be transhited into Latin by what are really intransitive 
 verbs, and ar(' therefore joined with a dative of the person 
 (or thing) iiifcrc-^frd in the aetion of the verb, i.e. the 
 remoter oJijed. (Intr. 3().) Thus — 
 
 I favour you, i\\)\ favfo, (I am favourable to you.) 
 
 I obey you, tibi jKireo, (I am olx'dicnt to you.) 
 
 I persuade you, tibi .■oKtilea, (I am jx'rsnasive to you.) 
 I please you, tibi jihiaa, (I am pleasing to you.) 
 
 I spare you, tibi jicirn, (I am sparing (merciful) to 
 
 you.) 
 
 These verbs, in the passive voice, cannot be used other- 
 wise than impersonally 
 
 You are favoured, tibi furetur, (Favour is shown to you.) 
 
 You are spared, tibi ^x/rci/Mr. etc. 
 
 You are pardoned, tibi 'K/noscitnr. 
 
 You are persuaded tibi permadetur. 
 
 You are obeyed, tibi iMretur. 
 
 6. The dative of the remoter object is sometimes, 
 but l)y no means always, marked in English by the pre- 
 position to ox for. 
 
 But it does not express to in the sense of motion to. 
 
 I gave this to my father. Hoc, })atri meo dedi. 
 but 
 
 I came to my father. Ad patrem veni. 
 
 For to in the sense of motion to a town, soe 9, h. For, when 
 it means "in defence of," "in behalf of," is expressed by pro. 
 
 Pro patria mori. To die for one's country. 
 
 I 'i 
 
Ex. 1.] 
 
 GENERAL RILES. 
 
 33 
 
 7. The verb to he, and such verbs as f<> hrnwir, to turn 
 out, to contiiinc, etc., ])!is8iv(' verbs df hi'iinj luinwd, ron- 
 sidcred, chosen, fuinid, and tlie hke, do not n'overn any case, 
 but act as links between the suliject and predicate, and 
 tlierefore have the same case after as before tlieni. (See 
 lutr. 49, 50.) 
 
 Cam?, est jiisluH. Cains is a just man. 
 
 Scio Caiuin jiisfmn Jiari. I know that Caius is becoming 
 
 just. 
 Cuius impemtor salntatus t'sf. Caius was sahited as Imper- 
 
 ator. 
 
 8. (a.) "With passive verbs and jtartici]»h^s, "thetlnn;^' 
 hj/ ichicJi," or " irith which" (tlie instrument), stands in tlie 
 ablative; "the person hj/ irhoui" (the; a,L,'ent), in the 
 ablative with the preposition a or ab. (Intr. 41.) 
 
 Castra vallo fossfKiue a mihtibus muuHa .'<>int. The camp 
 has been fortified fn/ the sn/diirs icifh a nimpirt and 
 ditch. 
 
 (b.) But when " with " means " together or in company 
 with" the preposition cum must Ite used. 
 
 Cum telo renit. He came v;i(h a veapon. 
 Cum Caesare hoc feci. I did this u-ltJi Caesar. 
 
 Obs. — (hun is written after, cind as one wf)rd with, the ablatives of 
 the personal and reflexive pronouns ynircnm, tecnw, st'cum, luilnscuw, 
 vobiscum), and sometimes after the relative, as qnicnm (abl.), qvihvttcjun. 
 
 9. (a.) The ablative also expresses the time at or in 
 which a thing takes place, the accusative tlie time durin<i 
 which it lasts. 
 
 Hoc mense qinndecim dies aegrotavi. I have been ill for 
 
 fifteen days in this month. 
 Tres ihi dies commoixilus sum, quarto die domum red'ii. 
 
 I stayed there three days, I returned home on tlie 
 
 fourch day. 
 
 (b) With the proper names of towns the ablative 
 expresses motion /?'07??-, without a preposition. 
 
 Roma renit, " he came from Kome," but ex or ab Italia, 
 "from Italy;" also domo venit, " he came from home." 
 
 C 
 
34 
 
 GRNERAL RULES. 
 
 [Ex. I, 
 
 ti 
 
 Moiioii to ii town is ('Xiirt'.ss(!(l liy tlie accu:'utiv(; willi- 
 out a i)r('})(jsitini). 
 
 Neupolin rt'd'iH, "he returned to Naples;" but ad or in 
 
 Italkim, " to Italy." 
 
 The accusatives (loinnni, (to) homo, and rufi, to the 
 country, are used in the same way as towns, without a 
 j)reposition. 
 
 10. One substantive in clos(! connexion with another 
 which it defines is put in the genitive case. 
 
 Horii i)atris. The gardens of my father = my father's 
 
 gard(;ns. 
 Laus duels. Tiie praise of the general. 
 Fortium \\v<)vm\\ facta. The deeds of brave men. 
 
 This case corresjjonds often to the English ]»ossessive 
 case, the only true case retained by English substantives. 
 
 11. {a.) Pkonoums. — When a itronouu is the noniin-itive 
 case to a verb, it is not expresse(l in Eatin, excei)t for the 
 sake of cmpltasis or ])articular dlHtlnction. 
 
 This is because the termination of the vei'b contains a 
 pronominal element; therefore, to exjn-ess the jjronoun is 
 really to have the person twice repeated. (See Inti*. 1 2.) 
 
 Ama-i is a compound word^Love-lic, i.e. ho lo\es. lUe aniai 
 moans, As for that man, lio loves. Tliere is a ropt'tition of the 
 pronoun to call special attention to the subject of the verb. 
 
 Ego hoc volo. For mij.telf I wish this. 
 
 (h.) When there is a distinction or contrast between 
 persons to be expressed, the personal pronouns must be 
 used. 
 
 Tu Tarentuni amisisfi, ego recepi. Ytai lost Tarentum, / 
 retook it. 
 
 (c.) Even the possessive pronoun is seldom expressed 
 when there can be no doubt as to whose the thing is. 
 
 Turn ilh' dextram porrigit. Then he (the other) holds out 
 his right hand. 
 
 But it must be used when emphatic, i.e. = his own, 
 
i^l 
 
 Ex. 1,] 
 
 GENERAL RCI.ES. 
 
 36 
 
 or when it„s oinissiuii would (•iiiisc ii (|oul»l iis lo llic 
 
 Suo SQ fihulio vulneravif. lie wounded luniself witli his 
 
 (own) sword, 
 Patrcin nieuia v'ld'i. I liave seen my fatlier. 
 
 {(l.) Hv, she, it, thrji, and tliuir obliijiie cases, wlioii they 
 cany no emphasis, l)ut meivly irfcr to sonui person or 
 tiling already named, should be translated by /.s, ea, id, 
 not by ille. Ille is much more emphatic, and often means 
 "the other" in' a story where two persons are spoken of, 
 and sometimes "that distinguished person." Isfc is " that 
 < >f yours." 
 
 (c.) But when hii)i, her, them denote the same person as 
 the subject of the verb, .s^-, si/i, sibi must be used. 
 
 Ho says he (hiuistjlf) will do it. ILir. se JacfuriDii esse ait. 
 The same rule a])plies to the possessive ])ronoun suns. 
 
 12. The relative pronoun rnii agrees in (jnider and 
 numher with a substantive or demonstrative ])ronoun, 
 which is usually expressed in a preceding sentence, 
 its cKsc depends on the construction of its own clause. 
 The substantive to which it thus refers (re/ero, relati- 
 riim) is called its antecedent {m- f ore-go iwj sul^stantive). 
 
 He est equKs, queni eini. Yonder is the horse which 1 
 
 have bought. 
 Poiitcm video, qmflumeujinii/it. I see a bridge Avhich spans 
 
 the river. 
 
 13. The relative is often used in place of the English 
 coiijunctions and, hut, so, etc., combined with the pronoun, 
 he, she, it, etc. (See Intr. 58.) 
 
 Divitias optat, quas adejitnrus est min'piam. He is praying 
 for riches, hut is never likely to obtain them. 
 
 14. l\uiTlciPLES. — (a.) There is no past participle active 
 in Latin except with deponent verl)S. (Intr. 4.").) 
 
 We can sa.y seeut)is for " having followed," from sequor 
 (verlj dep.) But for " having come," we must say either 
 (j_uam I'riiissct, ov postqunin (ubi) venit. 
 
 I 
 
 ■I 
 
36 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 [Ex. I. 
 
 111 
 
 
 (A.) With a transiliv(; v(!rh the ablative absolute (»t" th(? 
 passive, })arti('ii»le may also Ikj used. 
 
 Tlius for " haviiuf" or "after hdviuf/, liearrJ tliis," we 
 may say either hoc audito, or /*oc quum audivissct, or //r^; 
 postquam (ubi) andivit. 
 
 {().) The ])articiple in -rm is always active, and has 
 
 various meaning's. 
 
 Hoc factuiMis est. He is fjoing to, likely to, intendmij to, 
 ready to, destined to, do this. 
 
 15. Wliere in En<flish two finite verbs are coupled by 
 and we may often substitute a Latin participle in the 
 proper case for one, and omit the and. 
 
 They marvelled and went away. Admirati ahkre. 
 
 They heard and wondered at him. Auditum admirati sunt. 
 
 Voeahulanj 1. 
 
 NoTK. — In the vocabularies hyphens {ejj. in eontem-no, etc.) liave not 
 heen inserted on anj' etymological principle, but simply to mark 
 clearly the inflexions. ;. 
 
 (Ujaiit, rursus. 
 
 aliiuii/.t, seiiii)er. 
 
 awl, et, (iiie, atqne, ac. (See Intr. 
 
 57, note. ) 
 arrirc (<it), I, per-v?nio, Ire, -veni, 
 
 •ventum {nd with arc). 
 
 envy, 1, in-video, ere, -vidi, -visum 
 
 {(lat.). (Sees.) 
 favour, I, f.lveo, ere, fjlvi, fautum 
 
 {(lat.). 
 fire and sirord, ferrxim et ign-is 
 
 iabl. -i).« 
 
 hp(/!n, I, in-clpio, Ore, -cepi, -cep- fortunate, fel-ix, -icis. 
 
 tum. 
 hlockade, I, ob-skleo, ere, -sedi, 
 
 sessum. 
 brave, fort-is, -e. 
 but, sed. vero. 
 chief prin-ce])s, -cipis, m. 
 city, urbs, urbis, f. 
 consul, cons-ul, -illis. 
 day, di-es, -ei, m} 
 daybreak, prima lux (lucis). 
 despise, I, contem-no, fire, -psi, 
 
 -ptum. 
 district, ag-er, -ri, m. 
 elected, J am, fi-o, 6ri, factus. 
 enemy, host-is, -is. 
 
 fourth, quart-us, -a, -um. 
 
 friend, amic-us, -i, ??i. 
 
 halt, J, con-sisto, ere, -stiti. 
 
 hate, I, od-i, isse, -cram. (Perf. 
 
 with pres. meaning. ) 
 hear, I, aud-io, ire, -ivi, -Itum. 
 hour, lior-a, -ae, /. 
 human, humanus. 
 /, ego. (See 11.) 
 (/, si. 
 
 injure, I, n6c-eo, ere, -ui, -Itum {dat.). 
 January, Januarius. 
 lay waste, 1, vasto, are. 
 march {suhst.), it-er, -inSris, n. 
 messenger, nunti-us, -i, w. 
 
 ^ Occasionally fem. in sing. only. 
 
 'Note order. Ferrum, "iron," used for "sword" in metaphorical 
 sense. (See 17. ) 
 
Ex. l] 
 
 GRNF.KAf. KULKS. 
 
 37 
 
 mid-ilay, laeridi-cs, -ei, m. 
 
 mont/i, iiH'Ui-is, -is, m. 
 
 mif, incus. (11, c.) 
 
 ni'Vi'r, iniiii|uam. 
 
 lion; j.iiii III/ til in thiic, can be 
 iisctl ot till' iia»t ; nunc, ttt the 
 jtn-.si'iif, at the moment of sj)cak- 
 ing. (328, l>.) 
 
 oheij, /, iiar-eo. Ore, -ui [dat.). (See6.) 
 
 pf'O/l/r, ]»(')]»ul-US, -i, III. 
 
 rare, gt'^u-us, -Oris, ii, 
 
 r'lijht IhiikI, (lextr-a, -cie, /. 
 
 /'oiiKiii, Konianus. 
 
 Hciul (to), I, initto, Cre, inisi, 
 
 nii.ssuni {(ul). (6. ) 
 send for, arcess-o, ere, -ivi, -ituni 
 
 (ace). 
 
 j ihow, I, nionstro, are 
 : som'titiKs, intcnlum. 
 
 sjKtrf, /, parco, Ore, peperci, (daf.). 
 (See 5.) 
 
 Kpi'dk, y. l('t-(jui>r, -<jui, -efitua. 
 
 stndi-h forth, /, por-rigo, Ore, -rexi, 
 -rectum. 
 
 tdki' !>!/ (i.s.s(ui't, J, expugno, are. 
 
 t/int (/iron.), ili-c, -a, -lul. 
 
 t/irt'f, tres, tria. 
 
 to (motion), ad (arr. ). (See 6.) 
 
 foini, ()ppi»l-uin, -i, n. 
 
 I/on, tu, /il. vos.' (11, a and b.) 
 
 roti', suH'ragi-um, -i, n. 
 
 iniste. (See l<iy.) 
 
 way, vi-a, -ae, /. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1. I have been elected consul by the votes of the 
 Roman people ; you un^ favouretl by the enemies of tlie 
 human race. 2. The town liad ninv been blockaded for 
 thi'(;e days ; it was taken by assault on tlie fourth day. 3. I 
 sent three njesseii.uers to you in the month (of) January.^ 
 4. If you are {j'n.t.) olieyt-d 1 shall be spared. 5. That 
 district had Iteen hud wast«* by tlie enemy- with fire and 
 sword. 0, I am envied, l)iit you are despised. 7. Fortune 
 favours th(i brave (pL), lnit soiuetinies envies the fortunate. 
 8. Having' arrived at the city at daybreak he sent for tlie 
 chiefs. 9. 1 never injured you, but you have ahvjiys 
 envied me, and you hate my friends. 10. Havin,!? heard 
 this he halted for three hours, but at mid-day be,uan his 
 march a.t^ain. 11. Havin<f spoken thus,^ and having 
 stretched'* forth his right hand lie showed him the way. 
 
 * Januarlun is properly an adjective. 
 
 "^ Plural ; the singular liostin is used sometimes like our 
 
 as a collective noun. (Intr. 29, c.) 
 '^ "These things," hwc. 
 
 ' enemy, 
 
 •* Abl. abs., lit. his right band having been stretched out. (14, b.) 
 
 
4»^ %•• '^~ •• >«lt ' 
 
 -* *ylK 
 
 / 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 :r 
 
 I' 
 
 MEANING OF WORDS AND PHRASES. 
 
 TiroUGir Latin words aiisvveriii^if to all the Eii.Lflish words 
 in the followinj,' Exercises will he found in the A''oeahu- 
 laries, yet some care and thought will he necessary, even 
 with their aid. 
 
 16. The same English word is often used in very 
 dilferent senses, some literal, some figurative. It is most 
 unlik(dv that a sin<de word in Latin will answer to all the 
 various meanings of a single English word. 
 
 (a.) Thus we nse the word " country" (connected througn 
 the French with the Latin wy/Z/v^, " ojij)osite to us ") in a 
 great variety of meanings: "rural districts" as o])[)os('d 
 to "town;" "our native land," as opposed to a loreign 
 country; "the territory," of any nation ; "the state," as 
 opposed to an individual ; even " the inhahitants or citizens 
 of a country." Each of these senses is represented ])y a 
 different word in Liitin. Thus : — 
 
 Kus alnU. He went into the cunntrij. 
 
 Pro putria inon. To die for one's (native) land or 
 
 couittrii. 
 In fines or in agros HcJcciiorum exnritwn duxit. He led 
 
 his army into the conjifri/ of the Holvetii. 
 Rei })u])licae {or civitati) iion sihl (•onsNliiif. He consulted 
 
 tlie interests of the country, not of himself. 
 Civihus oiNuibiis ainis fnif. He was dear to the whole 
 
 country (or nathm). 
 
 No A''ocal)ulary or Dictionary therefore will be of any 
 real use, unless we clearly understand the precise meaning 
 of the P'nglish. 
 
 (b.) Again, we might meet with the word " world " in 
 an English sentence ; hut we cannot translate it into Latin 
 till we know whether it nieana " the whole uni\erse," or 
 
 38 
 
r^ 
 
 Ex. 11. 1 .)//'.. I X/X(; ()/■■ IfOA'/'S ^l.\7) /7/A'./.S7-.v. 
 
 n{» 
 
 "tliis ,L,'l<ib('," or "the nations of tlif world," or " ]i('0|(l(> 
 generally," or " mankind," or " I't'c • -^ raitli." 
 
 Nton aisn fiodis r.s/ iniuidus ? Was the tcofld (stni, moon, 
 
 stars, iind o:uth) madt; Ity cliaiMc I 
 LiiiKt, cininn tcljiin'm nioi'itur. The moon moves round 
 
 the irurld (this jdanot). 
 Orbi terrui'inu [or onniibus gentibus) linix rahitnt Jtoinani 
 
 The Kouians were rulers of the ii-nr/d. 
 Omnes (homines) In^ttnlre cnin crrdiiiit. Tho whole ii( rid 
 
 thinks him out of Ids nund. 
 Nemu usquam. No one in the mirld. 
 Midtiun hoiininbus itoniH. He did tlic imrhl much harm. 
 In hue vita nii/iqiutni ciini .sum risiirus. i am ncvt-r likely 
 
 to see him in this world. 
 
 With words therefurt; used in such different senses we 
 must ask ourselves their precise; meaning. Great assist- 
 anee will be given in the ])r('S('nt liook ; but the learner 
 cannot too soon learn to dispense with this kind of aid, 
 and to think for himself. 
 
 17. There are a great nuni])er.of metaphorical expres- 
 sions in Knglish wliieh we cannot i)ossil)lv render 
 literally into Latin. AVe say, "]Iis son ascended the 
 throne," or "received the crown," (jr "lost his crown;" 
 and we might be tempted to translate such ])]irases 
 literally after finding out the words for " to ascend," for 
 "a throne," for "to receive," for "a crown," and so on. 
 
 But the fact is that tliese words when so cond)in('d 
 mean something ([uite different from what they say, and U) 
 translate the actual words literally would be to say in 
 Latin sometliing quite different from the idea which the 
 English conveys. 
 
 Filiics soliani ascendit, or canscotdit, would (exce})t in a 
 poem) merely mean that his son "went u])," or "climbed 
 up," a throne; Fllius coronam curejnt tliat he " received a 
 (festal or other) garland." A Konian wcnild certainly say 
 reipium exccpit, "received in turn (inherited) the swccrcijnty." 
 
 Ohs. — This is only a specimen of the kind of mistakes which we 
 may make by not asking oui-selves what words viean as well as what 
 they say. 
 
40 
 
 MEANING OF IVOA'DS A.VP /V/A'//.S7:.S. (Ex. II. 
 
 Coinitarc such coiiiinon cxpresHionH as "he lit'ld his ju-acj'," " ho 
 took his ih parturc," iinswcriiii; to oiiitiniit, nhiit. Mistakes in siu-h 
 phiMscsas thiscaif more likely to <»cciir in trunslatin^' lon^j-r passaj^es 
 without iheaid allonUid in tliese Exercises; hut tlie warning cannot 
 be too early ;4iven. 
 
 18. Tlich^ life iiiiiiiy Kn^'lisli words wliosi! derivation 
 from Latin words is obvious. We niv iijit to tiiink that 
 if \V(! know lliu piirent word in Latin W(( caimot do 
 itcttci tliaii use; it to reprt'sciit the KiiLjlisli dcsci'iuhuit, 
 wlijfli so iiiiicli rt'Si'iiiltk'S it in sound and apiM'aranc.-o ; 
 lull W(! vMn liai'flly have a worse ^'round than that ot" 
 tlic similarity of tiunnd in Latin and Knolisii words on 
 whieh to inn n (jur Itclief tliat their iiicdvinii \^ ich-nticah 
 Must of these words liave come to lis tliroiioh tjie Frencli, i.i'. 
 tli!oUL;h a lan^iia^e s[)oken hy Konian sohliers and settlers, 
 and horrowed from them hy the (Jauls;the (Janls in turn 
 coiiiiuunieated the dialect of Latin wliicli tliey spoke to 
 their (Icrman eomiueroi's ; from these the Normans, a 
 Scandinavian ])eoi)le, learnt, and adopted, what was to 
 them a foreign tongue, with words from which, after eon- 
 ([ueriiiL; Kn,L;land, tiiey enriched the lan^i^iiaoe spoken 
 hy our Knolisii or Saxon forefathers. It would be strange 
 if the meaning of words had not altered greatly in such a 
 ] )r( icess. 
 
 Wjieii, therefore, we meet HU{;h a word as " ottice " in an 
 Ivxercise we must beware of turning it by officin m, which 
 means " a duty," or an " act of kindness." AVe sluiU learn 
 in tiinc, l)y careful observati(»n, when \\\(\ English and 
 Latin kindred words corres])ond in meaning, and when 
 they diri'er, but we cannot too early learn that they 
 generally differ. 
 
 19. Thus- 
 
 *' Acquire" is not acqmrerc, but adijiisci, amsequi. 
 
 A man's "acts" are not acta, hut farta. 
 "Attain to" is not attiiiere ad, or attimjcre ad, hut pervenire 
 
 ml, or <'()iis('(jiii. 
 "Famous" is not fidnosns, \\ui jyraedarns. 
 "jNLu'tai" (wouikI) is not {ndiitis) iiuirUiIc, but morlifertn^. 
 "Nation" is not unfin, hut civitas, jx'jyidi/s, res pvhUca , ekes. 
 "Obtain' is not uh'liirrr, })ut ro^isfqui, ndipisri, etc. 
 
fJ^.J 
 
 r 
 
 Ex. II. 
 
 A/F.AX/m: o/-' ii'Oh'n.s ,/.\7> rj/h\is/:s. 
 
 41 
 
 "OtHcc" is tiot o(fiiiiiin, but iiiiiijistnitHs. 
 
 *M)|([)rt!.s«" i.s not ojiju'inon, hut rmin^, etc. 
 
 '* I'orctiivo" i.s not y/'/v/yfrr, hut inf'/lit/frr. 
 
 " lioccivu" is not rriijinr, l»ut tirrijirrr. 
 
 "Kuin" (as u niotaithoi') is nut nihio, hut jirrniiits, 
 
 interfttis, etc. 
 "Secure" (safe) is not secunts, })ut liitiis. 
 " Vihi" is not ri/is, l)ut dirjtis. 
 
 These are only Hpdcinu'us. Tlie Vocuhuhirics will he ;i 
 sullicient ;^nii(h', hut the learner cannot too cai'ly Ix; on his 
 guard a;4ainst a rruitl'ul source of hlundois, or learn tim 
 soon to lay aside, as tar as possihle, the use of vocahularies 
 and similar aids, and trust to liis own knowledge as gained 
 
 frt)ni rcadinff Latin. 
 
 Vornhulitrij 2. 
 
 acquire, I, a«l-ipiHuor, i, -eptn.H. 
 
 (Sei- 19.) 
 (itliiiifi', /, achuir-or, firi, -atua. 
 iiilniKtii'jf, uiiKiluinciit-uin, -i, ii. 
 (ill {tliiinjx), (//. jil.), (iiniiiiv. 
 iin ri'ijiinlsz^ f'runi. (///»' ■sli/n of), u, 
 
 ah' I nhl.). 
 iif/i(iii f() = 'irriveaf. Voc. 1. (19.) 
 huth , . . (inil, et . . . c't. 
 boil, pu-er, -eri. 
 en n>. ( See frcr. ) 
 coiiiifri/, rus, ruris, //. ; i)atri-a, -ae,/'. 
 
 (See 16, (I.) 
 rroioii, regn-um, -i, «. (See 17.) 
 iliii, strepit-us, -uh, m. 
 (/(), I, tViL'-ii>, ore, feei, factum. 
 emjtirc, iiiii)eri-uiii, -i, ii. 
 e(vr = "/"■"//•'<'• ^'^lc. I. 
 /(unoiis, praeclanis. ' (19.) 
 fiitlirr, pat-er, -ris. 
 fiijht, I, pugiio, are. 
 for [conj.), nam, enim. (Intr. 
 
 1)8.) 
 for {pn-p.), in-o {iilil.).^ (6.) 
 forefathers, major-es,- -lun. 
 
 foretell, /, ])rac(li-oo, -f-re, -xi. 
 
 free from >' • , Heciirus (19.) 
 
 from, a, at' (nhl.), 
 
 'jlorji, gliiii-u, -ac, ./*. 
 
 'jreiit, iiiii^mis. 
 
 'jreiitlif, iiiaxime. 
 
 Ilnniiilxtl, Haimi})-al. -ftlis. 
 
 hi ihest, siiimiius. 
 
 holil, I, (>l)tiii-e(», rn-, -ui. (19.) 
 
 // /(/ inij ptiiee, I, coiitif-eMcii, i iv , 
 
 -ui. ' (See 17, Oh".) 
 I'iiiij, rex, regi.s. 
 hint, lit, tandem. 
 lonij (iiifr.), (liu. 
 mitili , I inn hi'nni, lio. (St^e heennie, 
 
 Voc. I.) 
 menus, 1)1/ no, liaudriuacpiam. 
 miiiil, anini-u», -i, m. 
 mortal (iruiiinl), niorti-fer, -tV:a. 
 
 -feruni. (19.) 
 miieh, niultus. 
 natii'e roiiiitri/. (.Si-e 16, ".) 
 nation, civit a.s,'' -atis, /'. (19.) 
 nerer, nun(|u;un. 
 obedient to, J am, = iibei/, N'oc. 1. 
 
 ^ Famosii.1 mean.s "notorious " in a bad .sense, " infamous." 
 
 ^ Patres is never used in prose for " forefatlieis." Our use of 
 
 " fathers " in this Hen.se came into English from Hebrew tlirougli the 
 
 Bible. 
 
 * Natio is rarely used of a civilised and organised nation ; it means 
 
 a peojjle, or tribe, sprung from one race, of the same blood [naseor). 
 
 x\ 
 

 42 
 
 MEAMXC or ll'Oh'DS AXD PI/h\iS/:S. (Ex. 11. 
 
 11 
 
 (,^/;Vr, ri::i^'!'-ti;it-iis, -us, m. (19.) xiirr,,,/ hi, I, {•■riir>i)= I iii/i'iif 
 uniliir, tiiMt nr, -or.H. (««■»• 17), rx-i-ipio, rre. -it']'i. 
 
 liltiisiiKi {to), ;:r.itiiH {ilitt.). •cfiduiii. 
 
 ri'iiiljiln, I mil, v<il<). vclli', vn]>ii. '<u'orif (iii'tii/>li.). ;inii-a. -(iriiiii, /'. ; 
 rmiri, I, ;ii-iijii(», I'rt', -»i ]'i. fcrr-uiii. -i, /(. (17.) 
 
 -rtptUIIl. (19.) tills, llic, llJlcc, ll<M'. 
 
 riiijii, I, ri-jii'i, arc. t'liif, <tt iIkiI, ttiiii. (64.) 
 
 li'iiiii =z lull inn (>/, \H)\m\\\-^ lloiiiiiii- rill', turp-i^, -«■. (19.) 
 
 UH. (Sii- 319.) rinl, iii-i, wa, aU. \i, /. 
 
 ruin, iiitcrlt-iis, -iis, //.. ; il;vil-c.s, irlmli-, totiis. 
 
 -\x,/. (19. ) irnrf'l. (16, /-.) 
 
 ■"Ill/, I, (li-<<i. I'Tf, -xi, -itiiiii. irniiiiif, vulnns. -J^ris, n. 
 
 s' i-itn z= siij'i , tutus. (19.) ?/<7, tAiiicn. 
 
 1. 1 Wits iiiiidc kiiiu' l>y tlio votes of tlie wliolc nation. 
 '1. He ;ltt!iinc(l tn tlic liiuln'st cfliccs in (his) native cnuntiv. 
 ;5. I hate llic tiiii of cities; the country IS alwavs nin.->l. 
 jih'a- iiiLT to nie. t, Oui lnrefatljers ac(|uire(l tliis district 
 iiv I lie swtii'd. n. The wliole ^vorhl was at tliat time 
 olMMliclit 1o tlie el))])ire of IJoine. H. He rei^lietl InUuS 
 th(^ crow n uidtdi lie liad a(([uired hy vioh-nco he lield to^ 
 tlie Hjrcat advanlaire of the nation. 7. IT(^ was a most 
 famous oiator. and all the world admired him Liivatly. 
 .'^. lie was nio.st dear to thf whole na'ion, for h(» wa.s 
 ever rea(h- to do all thiniis for the countiy. '>. lie 
 reciMVcd a nutrtal wtiund (while) liL^htin^ for his native 
 land. ill. .\t last he held his j.cace ; hiOiad said niu( h 
 ()ii/'f.ji/.). and (sjioken) lonu'. 11. lie .succt^-ded to the 
 cidu u (w l.ile) u hoy ; (as) kinu he attained to the hiuh'st 
 uh'iv. I'J. lie was now secuic from all violeiii'e, yet Ik; 
 was h\' no means free from care as regards JIannihal. 
 1 :{. lie nev. !• attained to his fathei''s <:lory. hut all things 
 that were vile he always hated. It. lle'foretoM tlie ruin 
 of his countrv. 
 
 ' Use cum with ahl. 
 
 !■ 
 
EXERCISE in. 
 MEANING AND USE OF WORDS-Conf/Vjue^/. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 20. Ill traiislutiuL^r u Verb into Latin, it is most im- 
 portant to W sure ot till' precise sense in whieh the verh 
 is used. 
 
 \\e have in Kn-lish a large immlx'r of verbs wliieh are 
 used ill two senses, one transitive, tlie other intransitive 
 or reflexive. 
 
 We say " lie ehan-ied his seat," and " the weather is 
 chan-in.g;" "he moved his arm," and "the stars move;" 
 "we disjH'rscd the mob," and "the fog dispersed;" "lie 
 turned his i^\i}^l' and "he turned to his brother';" "he 
 eolleeted books," and "a crowd collected;" "Ik; 'j(nno(l 
 this to that," "lie joined his brother," "the two ends 
 jtjined." 
 
 But in translating such verbs into Latin, we must 
 carefully distinguish between these dillerent senses of 
 the same verb. 
 
 If the English transitive verb is used intransitively 
 or as we should say in (Jreek in the iMiddle Voice (as in 
 "the crowd Jispasnl"), we must either {a) use the jjassive 
 of the J.itin verb, or (7>) insert tlie reliexivj; ].i(.noun .s'c, 
 or {<■) use a dillerent verb. 
 
44 
 
 MEANING OF WOknS ( l^ERIiS). 
 
 [Ex. III. 
 
 
 Ill 
 
 21. Thus— 
 (rr.) He iJiiDKjnl his seat. 
 
 The weather is chancfiiifi, 
 or altcr'wg. 
 
 He />?v;/,y; ?/y? the crowd. 
 The fog />/'o/i7; up. 
 
 Tlie moon ?«M'es round 
 
 the earth. 
 He moved his arm. 
 
 He rolled dotni stonc^s. 
 The stones roll dou-ii. 
 
 {}).) He will surrender the ciii/. 
 The enemy will surrender. 
 
 (r.) Kiches hirrcnse. 
 
 He hicretised his wealth. 
 
 He rollerfed books. 
 
 A crowd was coll erf 'nig. 
 
 Sedem mutavit. 
 
 Mil tatn r irwpcsfas. 
 
 MidtHudiiiein d issi] )avit. 
 Dissipata est ricJndo. 
 
 Luna circa teUiirem movetur. 
 Brachitiin movit. 
 
 Lfjiides devolvit. 
 Devohimtiir lapides. 
 
 I.Thciii dr-dot. 
 Se df'deiit Iiosfes. 
 
 Crescuiit diritiae. 
 Opes suas auxit. 
 Lihros C()llr'<i;it. 
 Oonveniohat mvltitndo. 
 
 22. ]\riiiiy English vorhs., nsuiilly intnuisitive, become 
 traii.sitiv(3 by tlu; addition of a preposition: to hope, to 
 ho])e for (trans.) ; to wait, to wait for (trans.) ; to sigh 
 (intrans.), to sigh for (trans.); similarly " to gaze o/i," "to 
 look at," "to smile at," and n)any others. 
 
 To determine M'hether the prejjosition really belongs to 
 the verb, the verb may be turned into the passive; it' the 
 preposition rcmain.s attached, to the verb, we may W. ^mv. 
 that the two words form one transitive verb. 
 
 He waits fw his brother. His brother As vailed for. 
 To "wait for," therefore, is a compound verb; "to wr.it " 
 is converted by the addition of a })re[)Osition from an 
 intransitive to a transitive verb. 
 
 Fratrein expectat. Frater expectatur. 
 
 23. Some of the commonest of such words are — 
 I aim at distinctions (high office). Hoiiores pcto. 
 
 I crave /'/?• leisure. Otiiim dosi<l('TO. 
 
 I h(.pe/r'.'" peace. Faceiii si)cro. 
 
 I listen to you. Te audio. 
 
 I look or wait /or you. Te exjiecto. 
 
 I look round /or you. 2'e circumspicio. 
 
Ex. III.] 
 
 MEANING Oh WORDS {VERBS). 
 
 45 
 
 I look tiip at the sky. Caelvvi suspicio. 
 
 I pray/rrr {jj'. desire much) this. Hoc opto. 
 
 V)\\t tlie nuiiiber of such English verbs is very large. 
 
 24. In Liitin (as in older English I forc^^o, I icspeak) 
 an intransitive verb very often becomes transitive by 
 composition with a preposition prefixed to the verb. (See 
 Intr. 24.) 
 
 Sednu, I sit, ohsideo, I blockade (a town) ; irhov, I am 
 carried, or I ride, \)YixvtvYir]ufr, I ri<le past; ven'io, I 
 come, conrenio, I have an interview with, as, ad te veni, 
 Carsarem conveni. 
 
 25. A single Latin verb will often express an English 
 riiixd 'pJinise, i.e. a combination of a verb with a substan- 
 tive or other words. Thus — 
 
 Titcco, T keep silence ; ahen^ I take my <leparture ; lurrif/o, 
 I take, or have, a voyage; iiisonio, I am out of my 
 senses ; minor, I utter threats ; (•(ilhxpKrr, I have a 
 conversation; tc libcro, I give you your liberty; adeo 
 mortem jJertii/iescit, such is his terror of death. 
 
 Vocdhulary 3. 
 
 ahsrni, I am, ab-siim, esse, etc. 
 
 hi'sh'iie, obsideo.i (See blockade, 
 Voc. 1.) 
 
 be.stow (til <■■•<(■ tli'nujK on you), I (haec 
 tibi) larg-iur, iri, -itus. 
 
 hloodji, ci'iit'iitus. 
 
 carrii on, J =z / wa<je, gCro, C-re, 
 -ssi, -stum. 
 
 rinnitrij, hi the, ruri. 
 
 era re for, I, ck'sidero, arc. (22, 23.) 
 
 fd'sfii, I, deser o, 6re, -ui, -turn. 
 
 (//.s7>f'/-.sr, fn (hitrathH.), di-labi, -lap- 
 sus. (20.) 
 
 (lotnifroin, de (ahl.). 
 
 vhjlit, octo (iiiilt'c). 
 
 i'lulcarour, J, cuiior, ari. 
 
 ('.rile, an, ex-ul, -ulis. 
 
 fatal," fuuestus. 
 
 jlorh together, to, congregari. 
 
 frii'nd. Voc. 1. 
 
 ijate, port-a, -at, /. 
 
 ijatlier tojetlwr, to, con-v6nire, 
 
 -veiii, -ventuin. 
 Heaven (inetajili.), (17), Di Im- 
 
 mortales. Caelum would mean 
 
 "the sky." 
 leisure, oti-um, -i, 7i. 
 /on;/ {adj. offline), diutlnus. 
 look for, I, expecto, are. (22, 23.) 
 look round for, I, circum-spicio, 
 
 -C're, -spexi, -spectum. (22, 23.) 
 look up at, I, suspicio, 6re, etc. 
 man}/, mult-i, -ae, -a. 
 m'uKjle tvitli, I (infrans.), im-misceor 
 
 (20), eri, -mixtus (dat.). 
 morniiKj, in tin', inanG {adv.). 
 
 ^ Obs/dco is " besiege " in the sense of blockading ; opjmgiw, in that 
 of assaultiiiL'. 
 
 ^ Fntali.i is "destined," "fated," and may be used either in a good 
 or bad sense. (See 18.) 
 
 11 
 
 is 
 
46 
 
 MEANING Ot WORDS [VERBS). 
 
 [Ex. III. 
 
 mountain, mon-s, -tis, m. 
 multitude, multitud-o, -inis, y*. 
 noon. See mid-da ij, Voc. 1. 
 obtain, I, aiT-ipiscor, -ipisci, -eptiis ; 
 
 conse-quor, i, -cutus. (19.) 
 one (of), umis (e, aht.). 
 our, nost-er, -ra, -rum. 
 peace, pax, pacis, / 
 prtq/ for, I, {desire much), opto, 
 
 are (acr. ), 
 return (unhst.), redit-us, -us, m. 
 rock, sax-urn, -i, n. 
 roll, J (intrans.), vol-vor (21, a), vi, 
 
 volutua. 
 soldier, mil-es, -Itis. 
 
 struck [participle), ictus, [fr. ico, 
 
 ic6re.) 
 surrender, I, [trans.) de-do, 6re, 
 
 -didi, -ditum; [intrans.) me dado. 
 
 (21, /a) 
 swarm out of, T, elfundor, i, eflfus- 
 
 us [(d>l.). 
 then, tuiii, tunc. 
 foirard--<, ad (ace). 
 turn, I (intrans.), con-vertor, i, 
 
 -versus. (20 ) 
 rain, in, frustra. 
 va.'<t,^ maxirnus ; ingen-s, -tis. 
 xoait/or, 1, expecto. (22, 23.) 
 war, bell-um, -i, n. 
 world. (16, 6.) 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Verbs marked in italics are to be expressed by participles, the 
 conjunction that follows to be omitted (15). 
 
 1. We all were craving for poaco, for we had carried on 
 a long and bloody war. 2. They at last surrendered the 
 city,w)iich-had-been-besie<i:ed (p'oi.) for eiglitnioiiths (9,(1). 
 3. He prays for peace and leisure, but- he is never likely^- 
 to-obtain these things. 4. All the world is looking for 
 war, but heaven will bestow upon us the peace for which 
 we pray. 5. Tlien he tnrncd (part.) towards his friends, 
 and in vain endeavoured to look iij) at them. 6. He looked 
 round for his friends, but all for whom he looked round 
 (imperf.) had deserted him. 7. The enemy had swarmed 
 out of the gates and were mingling with our soldiers. 
 8. The multitude which had gathered together in the 
 morning dispersed before noon. 9. ^lany rocks were 
 rolling down from the mountains, and one of our guides 
 ivas struck by a vast mass, and received a mortal wound. 
 10. On that fatal day I craved for you, but you were 
 absent in the country. 11. A vast multitude had flocked 
 togetlie/, and was now waiting for the return of the 
 exiles. 
 
 ^ Vast us does not mean "vast" in size, but either "shapeless," or 
 "waste," " desolate," etc. (See 18.) 
 
 2 Relative nout. \d. (13) = "which things." 
 
 " "Lilvely-to," participle in -rw« of "to obtain." (See 14, <•.) 
 
 O 
 n 
 
 S( 
 
 ag 
 
 th^ 
 or 
 
 Bn 
 wi 
 
 1 
 
 Cat 
 he- 
 the 
 be, 
 
EXERCISE JV. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE SUBJECT, OR NOMINATIVE 
 
 CASE AND VERB. 
 
 26. If one verb is ])re(licate(l of t^o or iiK^-e subjects 
 of different graiiimatic;il persons, it will be in the plural 
 miiiiber, and a.^rce with the first i)ersoii rather than the 
 second, and Avith the seeoml rather than the third. 
 
 Et e(jo^ et til manas siistulimus. Both you and I raised 
 
 our hands. 
 Et lu et fratcr mens inKinis sustulistis. Both you and my 
 
 brother lifted up your hands. 
 
 (For the analysis of these S(;ntenees see Intr. 65.) 
 
 27. But sometimes the verb will be iu the singular and 
 agree with the subject nearest itself. 
 
 Et til ades, et frater tuus. Both you and your brother 
 are here. 
 
 28. If a single verb is predicated of several subjects of 
 the third person, it may either be in tlie plural number, 
 or it may agree with the substantive nearest itself 
 
 Aiyphis et soror ejus et frater metis manus sustulerunt. 
 Appius and his sister and my brother lifted up their 
 hands. 
 
 But " Sustulit manus Ajypms et soror ejus et frater 7neus" 
 with tlie same meaning, would be good Latin. 
 
 ^ For "Cains and /," the Romans, putting "/" first, said " Eijo et 
 Ca/H.s." When therefore Cardinal Wolsey said " AV/o et Jicx vieus," 
 he was a g()o<l gramtnarian but a bad courtier. Similarly they placed 
 the second person before the third; "Your brother and you" would 
 be, Et fu ft frater tuxis. 
 
 47 
 
 i 
 
48 
 
 AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND VERB. [Ex. IV. 
 
 r;' 
 
 if 
 
 29. After di&ijunctive conjunctions (Intr. 5G, /j), virvy/zc 
 (nee) . . . neqice ; aut , . . aw^, etc., either construction may 
 be used. 
 
 Ncque tu neque fraier tuus adfuistis. Or, 
 Neque tu adt'uisti, neque fraier tmis. Neither you nor 
 your brotlier were present. 
 
 ?)ut the Litter is Tnuch more usual. 
 
 Ohs. — There is therefore ^reat freedom in all thcf5e constrnctions in 
 Latin ; greater than is nsual in English.^ 
 
 30. A sin^^ular collective noun (see 'intr. 29, r) is 
 occasumnlli/ followed hy a ])lural verb. 
 
 Magna pars . . . fugere. A larj^'e pro[)ortion fled. 
 
 But miich oftencr, and always if it denotes a united 
 body which acts as one man, it is followed by a sin-^ular 
 verlj. 
 
 Vult 2)()pulus llomanvs. It is the wish of the Ikoniau 
 
 j)eople, or, of the i)eo])l(^ of Konie. 
 Exercitus e caslris profectus est. The army started from 
 
 the camp. 
 Senatus decrevit. The senate decreed. 
 
 Ohs. — The singular is always used with t^enaina pojnilnsqne ; the 
 two words are looked on as forming one idea. 
 
 In Euifli.sh there is greater freedom; we can use the 
 plural if we think rather of the individuals than of the 
 body as a whole. 
 
 The gentry were divided in opinion. 
 
 Vocahidary 4. 
 
 Alexander, Alexand-er, -ri. 
 arviy, exercit-us, -us, m, 
 before {prep.), ante (ncc). 
 brother, frat-er, -ris. 
 ClituH, Clit-us, -i. 
 countriimaa, civ-is, -is. 
 
 decree, I, de-cerno, fre, -orevi, 
 
 -cretuni. 
 end, lin-is, -is, m. (projierly, Jim'd). 
 ever, iniquam. 
 exile, I (tm in, exnlo, are. 
 Jlock, gre-x, -gis, m. 
 
 ^ But conii)are : — 
 
 " The thought that thou art safe, and lie." — Cowpkh. 
 "Fur thine /,s the kingdom, tliu powi r, and the glory." 
 
1 
 
 Ex. IV.] AGRKKMENT OF SUBJECT AM) VERIi. 
 
 49 
 
 (iauls, the, Gall-i, -orum. 
 
 ijmut. Vf)c. 2. 
 
 hidlth, 1 am hi i/ootf, val-co, ere, -iii. 
 
 Ihhiic, doimiiii [iicc). (See 9, h.) 
 
 hoiinur {^distinction), hon-oa, -oris, 
 
 in. 
 klmlncss, bcnefici-uin, -i, u. 
 kill, I, inter-ticio, f-re, -feci. 
 nuit/i r, II, r<'.s> rei, /. 
 ni'xt diiif, till', postiidie. 
 /iiiniliir {proportion or part), par-s, 
 
 -tis,,/: 
 r<tiirn, I, redeo, redire, redii. 
 reward, praeiiii-uni, -i, n. 
 
 an/e (unharnud), iiic'<»luiii-if<, -o. 
 nenate, seijat-us, -us, tn. 
 settli', f, constit-uo, t're, -m [trans.). 
 I .spare, I. Voc. 1. 
 .sumiuir, aest-as, -atis, y. 
 .sirord, gladi-us, -i, m. 
 third, terti-us, -a, -um. 
 tiine, at that, either turn (Voo, 2), 
 
 or use suhst. , te)njH\st-a,s, -ati.s, /'. , 
 
 ■with is, ea, id. 
 toil, lab-or, -oris, in. 
 iraije, J, gero, Ore, gessi, gestuni. 
 irar. Voc. 3. 
 ((•('//, bf'iie (adv.). 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 1. If the army and you are in good health, it is well. 
 '1. ])otli you and I have waged many wars for our country. 
 3, The Gauls were con([uer('(l l)y Caesar before tlie end of 
 the summer. 4. Tlie iloek returned home safe the next 
 day. 5. Neither you nor your brother have ever don(? 
 this. G. A <>Teat nund)er of my countrymen were at that 
 time in exile. 7. Both you and 1 have been made consuls 
 by tlie votes and by the kindness of the Jfoman peojJe. 
 s. I have spared my countrymen, you the (lauls. 
 '.>. Having settled^ these nuitters, lit; returned home on the 
 lliird day. 10, Clitus was killed by Alexander with a 
 .-word. 11, The lioman people and senate decreed many 
 honours to you and to your father, 12. Neither you nor 
 [ had looked for this reward of all our toil. 
 
 ill! 
 
 * Abl, ahs, (See 14, h.) 
 
EXERCISE r. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 in 
 
 I 
 
 OUATIO Ol{LIQUA. 
 
 31. The iiilinitive takes Ix^lore it (as its siihjcd) not 
 the nominative but tiie accusative. 
 
 Fnitcr ccriilif. His l)rotlier fell : hut — 
 
 Narnd fratrcui cecidisso. 
 fell. 
 
 He reports that his brother 
 
 The accusatives with the infinitive is especially used, 
 where in En<4lish Me use a chiuse begiiniiii«^ with "that," 
 after (a) verlis of feeling, kiwivi/i;/, lltLnlriufj, bcHevin;!, 
 saying (verba sentiendi et declarandi) ; and {b) such ex- 
 pressions as it is certain, manifest, trve, etc. 
 
 In turninj5 such sentences into Latin, that must he 
 omitted; the English nominative turneil into the aecusa- 
 tive ; and the English verb into the infinitive mood} 
 
 {a.) Sentimus calere ignem. We perceive-hy-our-senses that 
 
 fire is hot. 
 Hostes adesse di.r'it. He said that the enemy was near. 
 Fratrem tuuni fortem esse inteJlego. I perceive that your 
 
 brother is a brave man. 
 Rem ita se habere video. I see that the fact is so. 
 Ilespomlit se esse iturum. He answered that he would go. 
 
 * We are not quite without this idiom in English. 
 
 ' ' I saw liim to he a ktiave " { — *' 1 saw f/ud he was a knave "). 
 
 Such a sentence as " nnrravit fi'aireni siiuvi in pntrlio cecidlssr,'^ niay 
 be sometimes translated literally, "he declared (o/-rei)orte(l) his brotiitr 
 to fiai)e/aUen in the battle." At the same time this constant eni])loy- 
 ment of the infinitive, in place of such conjunctions as the English f/iat, 
 the French </«<?, the German ifass, and even tin; vt-ry common (ireek 
 u)5 or ort, is one of the most ciiar.vi'tcristic idioms of the Latin lan^juatje. 
 (Seelntr. 5!», //.) 
 
Ex. V. 
 
 AccrsAiii'i. in/// /.\//.\///\/: 
 
 51 
 
 
 (i.) Mitiiifcafnm est iiiv(3m <'sse album. It is [il.iiii that snow 
 is wliito. 
 Cotis/iif Ivomam ]ion sino labors cniKlit.nn fiiisse. It is 
 agreed th<it ilnnw was not built w itlioiit toil. 
 
 The statement niiule bv tlu; veib in llic iniinitive mood 
 is called indinct predieation, or oratio obliqua ; lu'cau.-c 
 the statement is not made directly (i»r;ilio nrhi), lnit 
 indifeetly, ix. tbi-ough a verb that is ilselt' dependent on 
 another verb or phrase. 
 
 32. Cautions. — {n.) lieware ot" ever using ijinxl or nt to 
 represent tluit after any verb or ])]irase sciiUciuli vd 
 dcdanuidi. 
 
 Never say " Sdo quod crms" "I know that you are 
 wrong;" but always, " te errare scio" 
 
 (b.) In English we often express a statement or rn 
 opinion as though it were a faet, but with such wor>i.s as 
 "lie said" "he thoKf/hf," etc., inserted in a jiarenthesis. 
 
 You were, he said, mistaken. You were al»s(>nt, hr 
 thouijht, from Konie. He is, it is^ phiiu, ([uite mad. 
 
 In Latin this construction must not l)e used ; such 
 expressions as "he said," "he thomilit" "it is phdn" 
 must form the principal verb or clause with the infinitive 
 dependent on it. 
 
 We must write — not " tu, dixit, errasti," but " te errare 
 dixit ;" not " Eoma, credidit, aberas," but " lioma te abesse 
 credidit." 
 
 For the use of inqidt with oratio recta see 40. 
 
 33. The English verb sai/ when joined to a negative is 
 translated into Latin by the verb of denial, ?/ryo. 
 
 He sa;/s that he is iLot ready. Se pandnm cssr. nogat. 
 
 He said he would neve?' do this. Se hoc imqtium. c^.sv fac- 
 
 tiirum negavit. 
 He says he has done nothing. Xegat se quidqiiam fecisse. 
 
 34. The pronoun, so often omitted in oratio recta {eurrit, 
 (lie) xviws), must always be inserted in oratio ohliqau: se 
 currere ait. 
 
5'J 
 
 ACCUSATIVE ii'f'j// iNi-iNirni': 
 
 I Ex. V. 
 
 \\ ft 
 
 JFi\ she, they iimst bo translated by the reflexive pronoun 
 sv (11, ('), wlicnever one of these pronouns stands for tliei 
 stanc, person as the subject of the verb of saying or thinkinj^f. 
 
 I fur H(! feeisse ner/at. He says that he (himself) did not 
 do this. 
 
 I'Jinti. or i//ii'in would bo used if the second he denoted 
 a (lirioi'ciit person from the first he. Latin is theretbre 
 much less anil)i,i^uous than English, as it carefully dis- 
 tinguishes the dilforent ])ersoDS denoted by he, etc. 
 
 Tenses of the Infinitive. 
 
 35. In translating the verb in an English that-clawse 
 dependent on a past tense, we must attend carefully to 
 the following rule : — 
 
 An Englisli pfist tense in a ^A«/-clause will be translated 
 by the prcs( tif infinitive, il" tin; tinu; denoted by the two 
 verbs is the siuuo. 
 
 aSc ill . Isla ('ss(? ' i/i.ri(. lie said that he was in Asia. 
 (When ]-- at th(! time of his speaking.) 
 
 Tlu! perteei intinitive is only used if the verb in the 
 th((t-{:]\u\i^(' (h'uotos a time pi'iur to that of the verl) 
 se7itteii(Ii ri/ iliclivi'diKH. 
 
 Sc ill .Isid fuisse dixif. lie said that he had been, or wax, 
 in Asia. (When 1 — at some time earlier than that at 
 which he was speaking.) 
 
 36. The future infinitive is supplied by the ])articiple 
 in -ras with esse, fore, fuisse, and is used thus : — 
 
 Doth, Ho Miifs that he "j 
 
 And 
 
 1 also, lie said that C 
 e ii'iiiild go. 7 
 
 *S'6' iturum esse ur fore 
 
 dicit. 
 dixit. 
 
 He sai/s or ,sy//V/ that \w innild hare gone. Se iturum fuisse 
 (//V/7 (>v dixit. ■ 
 
 * ThuH tlie piescnt iiifmitivc reproseiits lutth the present and 
 iinjK'it'ect of the indicative, -the inipertVet being tlie tense wliieh 
 ilenotes a past event, not merely as past, Imt as rniifrnijinrdiH'ons irlth 
 /iomet/ihiij else in flit past, (See below, 177, li,) 
 
Ex. V.l 
 
 ACCUSATIVE niTlI INFIMTIVE, 
 
 K3 
 
 Vocnhiilnrfi 5. 
 
 aifdliist^ coiitni {(tcr.). jt/nri, Idc-tis, -i, /n. 
 
 (tnmn r, /, rcHpon-deo, <lC'ro, -di, jilnin (uilj.), iii;iiiifostu.s. 
 
 -sum. 
 aftdck; I, oppugiio, fire. (24.) 
 hi'lht'e, /, cred-o, cii", -idi, -ituin. 
 break, / (nirt.), vioht, are. 
 rump, castr a. -orutn, ri, 
 fol/oir, /, si(ni(ir, i, .socutus sum. 
 tjiiii ral, <lii.\, di'icia. 
 !fl<(fl/i/, lilniitor. 
 ho/If Jhr, /, .sper-d, are. 
 itiicrrii'ir, I liiirc <ni iiitorrint' vith, 
 
 ciiii-veiiio, ire, -vC-ni {tnina.). 
 
 (24.) 
 hill-, lex. Irgis, / 
 line (o/fitttli), aoi-ea, -ei, y. 
 »/«/«, vir, vlri, 
 r?o"'. See \'oc. 1. 
 o«c a»f^ (til, oiniiea {placed last). 
 
 (Tntr. i)l2, !)7.) 
 
 please, 1, J)l;ic-e(), el'e, -ui, ituill 
 
 (dat.). (6.) 
 I'ompeii, roiiiipe-ius. -i. 
 preeidiiii/, jii'oxiliius. 
 remeiiiher, /, iiieiiiiii-i, is.se, (/m- 
 
 peml.) iiieiiieiitd. 
 repli/, I. See aiixwev, 
 repose, oti-uiii, -i, tt. 
 ride past, I, ijraciter-velior, i, 
 
 -vectus {Irmif.). (24.) 
 nay, I, V(k;. 'J, 
 »lijh for (f crare fi>r), <leHidero, 
 
 are [traiiK.). (See 22.) 
 »in, I, peceo, are. 
 Hooii, III. IX, brevi. 
 take up, I, sfim-o, ere, -jisi, 
 
 -ptum. 
 to, ad, in (arc,). 
 
 perceire, I, intel-lego, Cre, -lexi, train, I, exere-i-o, ere. -ui, -ituiu, 
 -lectum. (19.) yt'ar, aun-us, -i, in. 
 
 Exercixr 5. 
 
 1. He had waged, he aiLSwered, many wars, and was 
 now sighing for peace and rcjxj.se. 2. He says that h(^ 
 lias nut sinned. 3. lioth you and your hrotlier, lie replied, 
 wore in good liealth. 4. He perceived that the eiiciuy'' 
 woidd soon attack the city. 5. He says tliat (,'ai!sar will 
 not break the laws. G. It is plain that the place pleases 
 you. 7. It was ])lain that the place pleased you. 8. it 
 was }tl;iin that the place had jdeased you. *.). P()ni])ey 
 believed that his countrymen would, one and all, lullow 
 him. 10. The soldiers said that they had not taken up 
 arms a.Ljainst their country and the laws. 11. Ih-ave men. 
 remember, are trained by toils. 1 2. The soldiers answered 
 that tlu.'y would have gladly attacked the town in the 
 prifceding y<'ar, but that now they hoped for repose. 
 13. Having returned to the cam]), he said that he h;id 
 ridden ]»asr, ihe enemies' line, and had an interview with 
 their- general. 
 
 ^ Sing. (Seep. .37, note*.) 
 
 * (.ien. pi. of /■>■.• why would >iiiiix Ix; wrong? (See 11, '/ and e.) 
 
it 
 
 i 
 
 Bill 
 
 ill 
 
 ! 
 
 t'3 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE 6'o/>t//7ue(/, 
 
 SnMK of (lie vi'i'hn smtlnull ft (kvldnmdi have special 
 constructions. 
 
 37. Tims, after tlie V('il).s sjicnnr (tu ]u)\n'), 2yf'o'iiiff''i'<' 
 {)\' j)i)ll Ifr.r't (to ])r(>iiii.S(',), vvr/y>^7r (to eii^anc <»r uiKlcrtaki'), 
 iiu'iiin-i (to tlireateu), jiinn-c (to swciir), and similar vci'lts 
 rt'l'crriii.Lf /'> f/ic j)((iur,i\u' /'nhur iiijiiutirt: is usud in J^atin 
 with the ((fi iis((f.in'. of the pronoun. 
 
 0/«. In Kii;rlisli we ;,'«'nerally trciit these V(Mb,s us moihd verbs 
 ■see liitr. 4s) uiid j(»in tlieiii with the jiresnit iiitiiiitive ; in Ivvtiii, 
 .111(1 soiiietiiiies ill Kiiirlisj^ they 'ire used iis verbs of thirikinj^ or 
 siiyinji soiiieihmj^ future. 
 
 In Kni^lish \ve say "lie hopes f<> live," r.,id also "he 
 hopes f/iiit lie vii/l live;" in Latin the latter is the regular 
 construction. 
 
 Sperat jdcruiiKp • aihncacniii din <;<, vioturuni (esse).^ A 
 youiii; nuui generally hojx's to Ihr a long time. 
 
 Hoc se facturuni esse nvnatus est. lie threatened to do 
 this. 
 
 N.H. — The \evh jMsse is often used in the present infinitive after 
 s^prro. 
 
 II or ,S'' fiinir posse sperat. He hopes to be able to do this. 
 
 38. With active verbs that have no future in -rus, 
 and generally with passive verbs, and even as a sul)stitute 
 lor the ordinary construction, /o?"(; iif with a subjun(;tive is 
 used. 
 
 Spero fore ut deleatur Carthaiju. I hope that Caitliagc 
 
 will be annihilated. 
 Spcrarif fore ut id sihi contingoret. lie hoped that this 
 
 ■would fall to his lot. 
 
 64 
 
 ' With these cnmi'OiiD'l infinitives csxe is often omitted. 
 
 
Ex. VI.j ACCi'SATJt'P. WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 f'l-A. - Tlifl trnse (»f the v<rlt ufli'V fore ut (IcjumkIh upon that nf tli« 
 verb of lin|)iiiir, t'tc. ; after tln! priHeiil, pcrfiM t with knv,'., and future, 
 tht> prestMit siil)junctive is used ; ufler a past tt-nse, tho imperfect. 
 
 39. Al'tir sintu/in'f^ {{m \)H'U\n(\), tlu; accii.satux'- of thu 
 pioiioiiii must l>u expnissud in Latin. 
 
 Sti /"/^/v/v; .siiniiliit. lit; pr<*t«n<ls /y />/.' iiijid. 
 
 40. TIm! <^M-('iit exccqdion to the construction of varba 
 ilrdiiniiiiH. is inquani, iin/uif, — "say I," "says he." 
 
 Jiiijidf always (juot(;s the cfurt ivon/s itstd, and never 
 stands iirst. 
 
 lh»niiiii, iiKjuit, mlibo. "I will/'sa^.s- Iw, " return home." 
 DoiiniiN, sr. ndi/iirmn usse dicit or ait. He will, he mys, 
 return honu). 
 
 Inqvit thcri^fore is always used with oratio recta ; all 
 otluir words of snijinij with oratio ohluitm. 
 
 41. Tho accusative with the infinitive is also used 
 after — 
 
 (a.) Certain verbs of commanding and 'wishinr/, especially 
 juheo, volo, cii:pio, j^rohibto. 
 
 (&.) Verbs expressing^o/y, sorrow, indiynation, yonder, etc. 
 
 Milites abire y«5.s//. He ordered the soldiers to go away. 
 Te incolumem rediisse gaudeo. I rejoice that you have 
 returned in safety. 
 
 Vocabulary 6. 
 
 assert, T [mabitain), vindico, are. 
 hu.-^iiiasti, tlii\ res, rei, y. 
 roioitry (16, a), ager, agri, to. 
 crown. Voo. 2, and see 17. 
 eriK'l, cruilul-is, -e. 
 earlier than ( = he/ore), ante [ace), 
 jij'ih, (luiiit-us, -a, -uni. 
 find, I, in-vcmo, ire, -veni, -ven- 
 tuin. 
 
 finixh, I, con-ficio, 6re, -feni, -fec- 
 
 tuin. 
 foe = enemy. Voc. 1. 
 force, vis,/, {ahl.\\). 
 freedom, libert-as, -atis,/. 
 ijreatly, velienieuter. 
 hhjhefit, suninuis, 
 home, at, donii. 
 hunband, vir, viri. 
 
 ^ Simido is used of a person who pretends that something exists which 
 does not. Diaalmulo of some one who tries to conceal something which 
 does exist. 
 
 Quae non sunt «imvlo ; quae $unt, ©a distimulantur. 
 
I 
 
 M 
 
 AcctJSA'i ni-: H'lrn imim ri^r. 
 
 [Ex. V!. 
 
 1 
 
 /ff»'/. (St'c country.) 
 
 la^t, <tl. Voc. 2 
 
 Loiiilun, liOiidii am, -i. {9, h.) 
 
 ffiiiij. (Si'ft \o. ) 
 
 ///'/'/, / It in iiuitc, ffir<»/ »re. 
 
 nil ml, I It III nut <if inij, innaii-io, ire, 
 
 •ivi, or ii. (26.) 
 imlioii, |K)|iul-UH, -i, m. ; ur civ-es, 
 
 -imii. (19, ami p. 41, not*; '. ) 
 Itoiu. Voc. 1. 
 nhtnin. \nr.. '.\. (19.) 
 o/ijin. ■<.•<, /, v(!xo, .in;. (19.) 
 jin.si iitl ij = .tnnn. 
 jirifi'inl, /, simulo, are. 
 j>roml.'<i\ I , ])i>llic»;()r," iri, -citu.s ; 
 
 pro-iiiitto, Ore, -iiii.»<i. inissuin. 
 
 rfjnirr^ /, ^'.-iikIco, i-tv, >^a\ ihiis ,*iim. 
 siUi^Jiii'tuni, iiso .'nlvfrlnal liliraMO 
 
 ex 'nitiiiCni, " in act;or<la:i«,i. with 
 
 one'H vicWH." 
 «'•»', /, video, t-re, vidi, visuiik. 
 shiirfhi, }iic\i. 
 Hitifi r, .sor-or. -orin. 
 
 HO luili/, tUIIKtlU. 
 
 Soliiii, Sdl-im, -Miiia. 
 
 Hooii. \'im;. 5. 
 
 Kti'fiir, /, jiiro, iur. 
 
 iii"uril, 1)1/ t/ir Unit). \'iM\ '1. 
 
 thri'iifi'ii, /, iiiiiKir, ari. 
 
 rni/iiii>\ I h'lr' n. iiaviL'", iirf. (26.) 
 
 irin, / = / ulifiiiii. Vijc. 'A. 
 
 yt, tiut, uuiiduiu. 
 
 V 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 'ii 
 
 ^\ 
 
 Kxi rriar H. 
 
 1, Solon prot«Mi()<'!l to lie out of h'\< inind. 2. I will 
 jtrcU'inl, says lie, to ))(' (Hit of iii\ iiiind, ;!. lie jiromiMMl to 
 coint' lo London shortly. •}. I lioju- thai }oii will lia\T a 
 satisfactory voyage a. lie lioocs to olitaiu tlif crown 
 jircscntly. 0. lie was jiii'lcndiuLl to lie (jiiilc I'lad. 7. 
 Caesar threatened to lay was',-- mn country witli tire and 
 sword. 8. lie rcplifd th.it h^- had had a satistaetoi'v voyage. 
 1'. 1I(! swore to tinish tlu! laisin-'ss hy force. 10. lie says 
 iliat he will not return home cailier llian (lie lifih day. 
 
 11. IliM'eplied that he lunl not yet seen his sister, hut 
 (that lu") hoped to find hotli her and her hushand at home. 
 
 12. The army lio])ed lliat t he land of the eiiemv would now 
 be laid wa>te with lire and sworil. 1 ."5. He Iiojh-s soon to 
 attain to th(^ hiuhest honours, hut •'■ I hi'lii'\e tliat lie will 
 nover win them. 11. 1 rejoiiM' -jieatly that your nation, 
 (which ha.s Iuhmi) f'o lonij oppresseil hy a cruel lo(\ has at 
 last asserted its freedom hv the sword, la. I have not, 
 says she, yet sei-n my sister, but I hope to lind both her 
 and her'* husband at home. 
 
 * Furo is a stronj^^r tt'riii r.li.nu iiDntiih): furor ofton im-aiis " freii/y," 
 but it never nu'.uis *' fury '" in the sense ni more " anger,"' 
 
 ^ I'roiniilo, " I ^'ive forth," general word for " 1 uive assuratiee i.r 
 tJic future •" pallicpor, "I gir« aomething tluit lies in imi oiru /loti-tr.' 
 
 ' ii«« 13. * £Jni. Why nut »«;/;.i .' .-.. 
 
 •« 
 
KXF.KCISE VI r. 
 
 NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE MODAL VERBS, 
 PASSIVE VERBS OF SAYING, Etc. 
 
 42. (i.) A large number of verbs are used in Latin in 
 close combination with an infinitive mood without any inter- 
 vening accusative, riiey aiv, in tact, a kind ot' (tnxHiary 
 \rilt, as tlu'V cannot, as ,i rule, stand by thcnistdvcs, or 
 n:aktj fnll sense witliuut t'lc intitntivc with wliidi tlicy are 
 i'tiMc<l ; 1 lic\- arc callcl nioda! Ix'canst; tlicy ^ive, as it wore, 
 a t'r>'-li niMdd (nni'lus) to the otlicr vcrl). (See Intr. 48.) 
 
 CoiiMiaiv the l-aiL^iish " 1 can ^/e," " niU"t </o," "(.uj^lit to 
 '/o," " \s idi (n do," etc., where du and to do are l)<)lh in tlie 
 'ntiniti\(' mood. 
 
 Siicli are vcrl is of 
 {(I.) I'lissihi/ih/ or the irrcrse. russuni, iii<iuc(\ etc. 
 (/'. ) 111 ii'iiiiiliiij^ or n-dsnoj. ('nfpl,iiir'qno^des'mo,deskto,i\tc. 
 
 {c.) ]I(ilii,\ ruiifiiiKawi', hasffii- Snlni, assuesco^ P^'f'i/", fcsthw, 
 
 in 'I. etc. 
 
 {(/.) Many Vfihs of /'/W/.-y^'^r- /e/", /«//<', nuilo^ ciijdi), aiidno, 
 
 jiiisc, iiim, iiidiacoar, etc. stafuo, etc. 
 
 (e.) J) id I/. Di'heo. 
 
 (ii.) W'len a tinite verb of tliis kind is condtined with 
 the iidinit ive, tlie nominative, wol tlie accusative, is used 
 in the ]ii('(licate. 
 
 CV//.S It'oinaniis fieri, vocari, atpio. 
 
 I am .'in.xious to liecoaie, 07' to lie callod, a citizen ofKome. 
 Sold), or i.irijii'i^ or fp^thio, otmsw?, esse. 
 I ani accustomed, <>r I am ])eginning, or I am makin» 
 liaste, to l>e at lei.surc. 
 
 Mori iiudo ([UiDn ,<?^rvus esse. 
 
 I liad rather die than })e a shave. 
 
 * This is soinetime.s expressed by tJie toniiiiiation -sco of the verb : 
 •itiu'sro, I begin to grow old. Siicli verb.s are called inchuafhr. 
 
 •* !:?oiiietimcs cxpre.s.sed liy the termination -iiyio: edo, I r.'.t : *xa,iu, 
 
 Ii 
 
 I ,un liuugry. 
 
 •( 
 

 58 
 
 n 
 
 MODAL VERBS, ETC. 
 
 [Ex. VII. 
 
 43. With passive verbs sentiendi et declarandi, sucli as 
 videor, " I seem," dicor, " I am said," and similar verbn, the 
 impersonal construction, " it seems," " it is said," is not 
 used in Latin. 
 
 "We must not say for " It is said, or it seems, that Cicero 
 was consul that year," " Viddur, dicitiir, Ciceroneiu eo 
 anno consulem fiiisse," but " Videtur, dicitur Cicero eo 
 anno consul fuisse." 
 
 44. But a very common use is ferunt, dicunt, tradiod. 
 tliey or men say, etc., followed by the accusative and iiitini- 
 tive. So tliat for " There is a tradition that Homer was 
 blind," we may either say " Trad'itnv ITomerwH cacc\\?,fi/{sse," 
 or " Tradunt Ifomcrnm caecnm. fiiisse," but not " r?Y^(/itur 
 Homcr\xm caecxuw fnisse.'" 
 
 45. Verbs of purjtosin;/, resolving, and many otliers, are 
 used with the infinitive and the nominative case, only 
 when fJie subject of both verbs is the same. 
 
 ConslifuU Caesar consul fieri. 
 
 Caesar determined to be(3ome consul. 
 
 But 
 
 Consfituit Caesar ut Antonius consul fieret. 
 
 Caesar determined that Antony should be made consul, 
 
 (See 118.) 
 
 46. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 (a.) The past tense of such longer pb.rases is viihi vun- 
 tiatum est, memoriae prod it urn est, and otliers, is used im- 
 personally, and is followed by the accusative and infinitive. 
 
 Caesari nuntiatum est adesse Gallos. 
 
 Neivs was hronfjht to Caesar that the Gauls Avcif .it h;ni(l. 
 
 (&.) Videtur can be used im[)ersonally, but lucaus, not 
 " it seems," but " it seems good!' 
 
 Hoc mild facere yi^um tH't. 
 
 It seemed good, to me (I resolved) to do thiii. 
 
Ex. VII.] 
 
 MODAL FAA'BS, KTC. 
 
 m 
 
 (c.) The impersonal verbs, apparet (not " it scents," but 
 "it is clear") and constat, " it is agreed," are very coniiuon 
 and are followed by tlie accusative and infinitive. 
 
 (d.) Tlie accusative is sometimes introduced after volo, 
 even when the subject of both verbs is the same. We miiy 
 say either (.'t)asui esse vult, " He wishes to be consul," 
 or Se consulem esse vult, "It is his wish that he himself 
 should be consul." 
 
 Vocabulary 7. 
 
 accept, I, ac-cipio, fire, -cepi, -cep- 
 
 tum. 
 (unhasmdor, legat-us. -i. 
 auk/or, /,posoo,<^re,poposci. (22,23.) 
 become, I, tin, Cri, factus. 
 beijh), I. Voc. 1. 
 blame, culpa,/. 
 jreah, I, (See worcL) 
 camlidatejor, I am a, pet-o, 6re, 
 
 -ivi, or -ii, -itum [trans.). (23.) 
 cease, I, de-sino, fere, de-si vi, or 
 
 -sii. 
 chief {man). Voc. 1. 
 clear, it is, appar-et, 6re, -uit. 
 
 (46, c.) 
 coward, timidus ; ignavus. 
 crown. Voc. 2. 
 deceive, I, de-cipio, 6re, -cepi, -cep- 
 
 tum. 
 despair, I, despero, are. 
 destined, fatfd-is, -e. 
 die, J, morior, i, mortuua* sum, 
 
 moriturus. 
 either , . . or, vel . . . vel ; lut 
 
 . . . aut. (See Intr. 57, note.) 
 fne {adj.), lib-er, -era, -um. 
 J'reefrom, I, libero, are. 
 hand, I am at, ad-sum, esse, -fui. 
 jury (jud'jes), jud-ex, -Icis (in 
 
 plur. ). 
 keep, 1 (promises), sto, stare, steti, 
 
 lit. "I stand on my promises" 
 
 (ah/.).^ 
 live, I, vi-vo, 6ie, -xi, -ctum. 
 member of the si ate, civis. 
 nation. Voc. 0. 
 
 offer, I, de-fero, ferre, -tuli, -latum. 
 office. (See 18, and Voc. 2.) 
 once, at, statim. 
 patriot, true patriot, bonus civis ; 
 
 lit. "a good member of the 
 
 state. " 
 prefer, l. (ScvJ rather.) 
 private {pierson), privat-us, -i. 
 promise [thinij jiromised), promis- 
 
 sum (ncut. particijde), -si, n. 
 PyrrliHs, Pytrh-us, -i. 
 rather, J had, or would, mSilo, 
 
 malle, malui. 
 refuse, [. (i>ee iinioHling.) 
 resolve, I, de-ceruo, Cre, -cr6vi, 
 
 -cretum. 
 rich, dives, -itis ; camp, divitior 
 
 (ditior), siiperl. divitissimus (di- 
 
 tissimus). 
 seem, /, videor, eri, visus. 
 slave, serv-us, -i ; m. 
 surrender, I. (Voc. 3, and 21, 6.) 
 than, f[uam. 
 
 totvnsman, oppidan-us, -i. 
 tradition, t/iire is a, tra-do, Cre, 
 
 -didi, -ditum. (44.) 
 troublesome, molestus. 
 Hnw'ltiitij, I (nn, m'llo, nolle, nolui. 
 venture, /, audco, vie, ausus sum. 
 ivrdict, scntentia, _/'. (plur.-) 
 word, I break mi/, fidcm fallo, iTe, 
 
 fefelli. 
 world, in the ( = o/' nil men), 
 
 onmium hominum. (See 16, b.) 
 
 Why not in rnundo 1 
 your (piur.), vest-er, -ra, -rum. 
 
 1 i 
 
 ' Mortmis est is " he is dead ;" " he died " is (e) vita ixcessit. 
 * Plur., because each judex gave his own scntentia, "opinion 
 "vote." 
 
 or 
 
60 
 
 MODAL VERBS, ETC. 
 
 [Ex. VII. 
 
 Ill 
 
 \ h 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 1. I had rather keep my pruuiises than, be the richest 
 man in the world. 2. I Ix-gin to l)e troublesome to you. 
 
 3. Cease then to be cowards and be,«,nn to become patriots. 
 
 4. lie resolved to return at once to Itome, and become a 
 ^ood member of the state. 5. It seems tliat he was 
 unwilling to become king, and preferred to be a i)rivate 
 person. 6. It is said that ])y the verdict of tlie jury }(.u 
 had Ijeen freed from all blame. 7. Having ^ resolved to 
 be a candidate for oihce, I ventured to return liome and 
 ask for your votes. 8. We would I'ather die iVee than 
 live (as) slaves. 0. There is a tradition that he refused 
 to accept the crown (when) offend by the nation and (its) 
 chief men. 10. It was clear- that the destined day was 
 now at hand; but the townsmen were unwilling eitlier to 
 despair or to surrender. 11. lie said that he had neither 
 broken liis word nor deceived the nation. 12. The senate"^ 
 and people resolved that ambassadors should be sent to 
 Pyrrhus. 
 
 1 See 14, a. 
 
 Imperfect tense. 
 
 See 30, Obs. 
 
^m. 
 
 EXERCISE VI 11. 
 
 ^t 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Agreement of Adjectives. 
 
 47. When a single a(lje('tive or participle is used as 
 predicate of several singular substantives, niiicli variety 
 of construction is allowed. 
 
 i^t.) If several persons are spokcMi of, the adjective is 
 genei-ally in the plura/, and the masculine ^render takes 
 precedence over the feminine. 
 
 Et pdci' w////? et mater mortui sunt. Both my father {\nd 
 mother are dead. - 
 
 (h.) But the predicate may also agree both in gender anrl number 
 with the pul)stiiiitive nearest to it.sclf. Thus a brother might say for 
 " Both my sister and I had be^n suiiuiioncd to the praetor," eitiier 
 '^ Et efjn et soror mea ad praeionm vocati rrawnt.s," or " Vocatus erani 
 ad praetor em ego et soror mea," or even " Et ego et soror mea ad prae- 
 toreni vocata eratj' 
 
 The usage therefore greatly resembles that of verbs with 
 more than one subject (26, 27). 
 
 48. (a.) If the sul)stantives are not persons but filings, 
 the adjective or particii)le is usually in the plural, aiid 
 agrees in gender with both substantives if they are of the 
 same gender. 
 
 Fides tua et jnetas hudandae sunt. Your good faith and 
 • ■ dutifulness are to be praised. 
 
 But laudanda est would be also allowabli. (Se« e.) 
 
9i 
 
 AGREEMEr^T OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [Ex. vni. 
 
 V. I 
 
 w\ 
 
 V: 
 
 % 
 ■ ■«li 
 
 i! 
 
 i 
 It 
 
 III 
 
 (h.) If thoy aro of dilfureiit goiidors the adjective is 
 generally iii the neuter. 
 
 Gloria, dlvlt'iae, hbnoi'es iiicerta ac caduca sunt. Glory, 
 richos, and distinctions are uncertain and perishable 
 
 (things). 
 
 (c.) Where the substantives are abstract nouns (Intr. 
 20, d), the ncmter is common in the predicate, even if they 
 are of th(i same uoncler. 
 
 Fides ct jdrlas laudanda sunt. Good faith and a sense 
 of duty arc to bo praised. 
 
 For the neuter laudanda means things to be praised (as 
 iacerta ac caduca in h)\ the terminations of tlie Latin 
 ailjeciive, uh, a, uui, i, ac, a, etc., ex])ress the singular 
 and ])lur,il of man, 'Wjnian, thinr/, exactly as the personal 
 terminations of tiie verb express the personal pronouns. 
 (See Intr. ;31.) 
 
 (d.) JTcnce Mors est omnium extrenium, "Death is 
 tlio last of all tbings," is as good Latin a^s Jiloj's . . . ex- 
 trema. 
 
 (c.) Sometimes, ))ul more rarely, the predicate agrees in 
 gender and number with the substantive nearest itself. 
 
 Spei'nundae ifjilnr su/it diviliiie ct lunuyres. liiches then, 
 
 auil distinctions, ui'c to be despised. 
 Miki jiriiiripnfns afnae impcrium delatum est. Tlio 
 
 sovertjignty and chief power were offered to me. 
 
 49. AVbeie a single adjective is used as the attrihutc of 
 two or more substantives of dilTerent genders, it usually 
 iigivcs ^vilh tlie one nearest itself. Either "Terras omnes 
 it hill rill prrlusiravit," or " Terras ef maria omnia 'pcrlus- 
 traril," lie travelled over all lands and seas. 
 
 It is .Sv)metime3 repeated with each: terras omnes, 
 maria omnia, etc. 
 
 Tliese rules will cause very little real difficulty, as the 
 f;'eeth;m which they allow is gi'eat. The Exercise will 
 be mainlv on what iollows. 
 
Ex.VIII.T ADJECTIVES AS SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 63 
 
 Adjectives used as Substantives. 
 
 »» <i 
 
 50. Wlieu the substantive is "man' "womnti/ or 
 " tJiiiuj" it is often not expressed in Latin by a separate 
 word, lor the reason given above, 48, c. 
 
 Boni^ sa[)ientes^y?<c {ex)' civitate jicUutdiir. The (jiuhI jind 
 
 wise are being banished (Hterally, (hiven from tlie 
 
 state). 
 Jam nostri aderaat. Our men^ or soldkrs, Avere now at 
 
 hand. 
 Hae ita locutae sunt. These women spoke thus. 
 Omnia mea meciim jwrto. I am carrying all mij property 
 
 with me. 
 
 51. Hence many adjectives, pronominal adjeciive.'::, and 
 participles, both singular and pluriil, masculine ami neuter, 
 are used precisely as substantives, and may even have 
 other adjectives attached, or attributed to them. 
 
 (a.) Masculine — 
 
 (Singular) adolesceus^^ juvmis (young man), amicus, 
 inimicus ; uequfdis (a contemjjorary, one oi the same 
 age), candidaius, sin'ius. 
 
 (Plural) nohiles,* optimutis (the aristocracy), mxtjorrs'' (an- 
 cestors), joos/m (posterity), divitcs (the rich), and many 
 others. 
 
 wn 
 
 ^ Boni thus used means generally, "the well-afTected," "the 
 patriotic jiarty ; " opposed to Ini/jrohi, "the disaffected 
 
 ^ Tlie ablative may be used here without the Treposition. See 
 Voc. 8 (baiii'ih). 
 
 * Adole.iceii>i denotes a younj'er age than jiivni!.i—\t enibiafcis the 
 period from boyhood to the prinu of life ; juvtins is used of all iiiun lit 
 to bear arms. 
 
 * Nohiles, "nobles," i.e. men vhose ancestors had borne a curulo 
 office; opposed to novi homlm><, "self-made men." yo'/UiH never 
 means "noble" in a moral sense. (Jpfimatix, the aristocracy, as 
 opposed to the popular T)arty, or populnre.^. 
 
 "' Patre.'i, avi, are never used in prose for "forefathers," but de- 
 note "men of the last generation" and "of the last Imt one ' (See 
 p. 41, note *.) Minores, nepote.<i, etc., are used for "posterity" only 
 m poetry. 
 
94 
 
 ADJI'.CTIVES AS SUBSTA 'T/l'/iS. [Ex. VIII. 
 
 f* til 
 
 
 {b.) Xeuler — 
 
 factum, a (UhhI ; dictum, a saying; hni^a, prnperty ; ih- 
 cri'tuiii, a (Iccrcc ; jtroini.^sa, i)roinises ; eiliriuiu, a pro- 
 clamation ; .^I'lKitus-amsultum, a vote or iv.soliition of 
 the senate, etc. ^ 
 
 (c.) Also the iiouter adjectives lioacstam, utile,, caiii- 
 r/uxfiun, veriim, are us(m1 in the sin'^nilar, and still more 
 in till' plural, tor the Kn,L,dish abstract words, "duty," 
 " ex[)ediency," " advjintaj^e," "truth;" so also 
 
 Sumiiinvi bonuni, the highest good or happiness. 
 
 Ihit the abstract nouns hoiirstas, lUilitas, are oftener 
 used, and always in oblitjue cases, and with adjectives. 
 
 52. Ambiguous expressions arf» rarely used in Latin ; 
 
 licnce "thing" is generiilly exjjressed by res (leni.), 
 when the adjcctivi', alone would leave it doubtful whether 
 men or things were meant. 
 
 Tims "of many things," multi(rum reruni ; very seldom, 
 and only when no mis;ake can occur, imUtorum, which 
 migiit mean, " of many men;" so — 
 
 Futura, the futun;; but rcrnm fuiurarum, of the future: 
 ^o«/, the good, fy/' well-affected; but hunvrum Iwminum, 
 of the well-ati'ected. 
 
 53. The neuter ^>/«/"rti of Latin adjectives is constantly 
 used in the nominative and accusative cases where we use 
 the sinyalar of an adjective or substantive. 
 
 Much, niulta. Very little, i)erpauca. 
 
 Vcnj iiiucJi, permulta. Eceri/lhiiK/, oniniii. 
 
 Little (lew tilings), pauca. yill this, haec omnia. 
 
 So Vera ct falsa. Truth and falsehood. 
 Vera diceJtat. He was speaking the truth. 
 
 54. The neuter adjective is used in Latin without a 
 substantive, where we iniijlit substitute " thiiif/n," ])ut really 
 use some more ajjpropriate nouns, as 2^r()'per(y, objects, 
 pos.sessiojis, perJorDieours, t/iouffhfs, refections, etc. 
 
 The learner must look to the Latin Verb to guide him 
 to the proner English noun to insert in his -translation or 
 
 - I 
 
Ex. VIII.] AD-yECTlVES AS SUnSTAiWTIVES. 
 
 flk 
 
 to omit in his composition. Tlie Latin adjective in the 
 neuter plunil will f,fenerixlly be translated by a substantive 
 kindred in meaninu to the verb. 
 
 Magna spemhat. 
 Multa coijitahal. 
 Haec seqiu'hutur. 
 Ilia ausHs est. 
 Multa mentUiis est. 
 
 His hopes were high. 
 He was revolving many thoughts. 
 He was pursuing these objects. 
 He ventured on those enterprises. 
 He told many falsehoods. 
 
 The singular neuter of the pronoun is used in the same 
 way. 
 
 Hoc secutiis est. This was his object. 
 
 Quid mentitus est f What falsehood has he told ] 
 
 These are some of the many instances in which the Eng- 
 lish substanti\e cannot be translated literally into Latin. 
 
 55. It follows from 51 that we can say odolcsccns 
 optimus, an excellent young man ; praeclara facta, noble 
 deeds; awQn inimicissimi twi, yo\x\ deadliest enemies; the 
 participle or adjective (even a superlative adjective) being 
 treated as a real substantive. 
 
 But many of these words retain a double nature, and 
 are treated sometimes as substantives, sometimes as adjec- 
 tives or participles. 
 
 We can say either " Ciceronis est amicus," or " Ciceroni 
 est amicus," eithei " 3hdf,afuere ejus et praeclara /ac^a," or 
 "Multa ab eo praecliire/ac^rt sunt," for "there were many 
 noble deeds of his ;" i.e. we may treat facta as either a 
 substantive or a participle, in which latter case it will be 
 joined with an adverl). 
 
 This latter construction is the commoner with participles 
 such RSi facta, dicta, respunsa, etc. 
 
 ^f! 
 
 Other uses of Adjectives. 
 
 56. In English we join the mljective mamj with another 
 adjective, "many excellent inen." In Latin we should 
 insert a conjunction, " homines multi optimique,multi atque 
 optimi homines" or ". . . multi, iicjue optimi" 
 
 Of coui'se we can say " adolcsccntes multi," or " amici 
 multi." becaust! liiese words are used as substantives. 
 
(5J 
 
 AnyECTIVES. 
 
 [Ex. VIII. 
 
 ill 
 
 III 
 
 So. too, if the second adjective is so constantly united 
 witli its 8iil)stantive us to form a single expression. 
 Miiltau luu-i'^ lunijae. Many ships of war. 
 
 57. {f(.) The superlative degree of adjectives and 
 adverhs is often used in Latin to mark merely a high 
 (L\nrei3 of a (piality. 
 
 Opt'imns, excellent ; p'aeclarissimvs, famous or noble. 
 
 Sometimes, not always, it should be translated by an 
 English intensive adverb or }»hrase. 
 
 Hoc niolestissinmm est. This is exceedingly, or very, or 
 
 most, troiibUisome. 
 Hoc Siiei>issime dixi. I have said this repeatedly, or again 
 and again. 
 
 (b.) So also the comparative degree is often used, without 
 any direct idea of comparison, to express a considerable, 
 excessive, or too (jreat amount. It may 'len be translated 
 by " rather," " somewhat," " too," et"., or ^y a simple adjec- 
 tive in tlie positive degree. 
 
 Saei)ius, somewhat often ; asperius, with excessive harsh 
 ness ; morbus gravior, a serious illness. 
 
 Vocabulary 8. 
 
 abandon, I,faU of from, de-scisco, cunversation, J have, col-loquor, i, 
 
 6re, -scivi (nhl.). -locutus. (64.) 
 
 accomidhh, I, ef-ficio, <?re, -feci, country, fin-es, -ium, m. (16, a.) 
 
 -fecLum. coura(je, virt-ua, -utis, y'. 
 
 acro^i, trans {ace). , cowardice, ignavia, /. 
 
 alike ( i(h\), justa, pariter. deadlij. (68.) 
 
 alloiri'd, if is, or aijrced on, constat decree, a, decretum. (51, h.) 
 
 (iinper.i.). defile, a, salt-us, -us, m. 
 
 appfar {■■n'.em), 1, videor, eri, visus. deny, I, nego, are. 
 
 (43.) dictator, dictat-or, -oris. 
 
 aristocratic }Kirty. (51, a, n,*.) drive on shore, I, e-jicio, 6re, -jeci, 
 
 attein/)t, I, conor, ari. -jectum. 
 
 banish, civitate pello, expello ; in drive from, I, ex-igo, 6re, -egi, 
 
 cxiliunipello, C're, pepidi,pulsum, -actum. 
 
 or ex-igo, fire, -egi, -actum. duty, honestum. (61, c.) 
 
 broad, Ifitus. \ each other, to, inter se. 
 
 change of pm-pose, inconstantia, /. enemy, hostis, inimicus.* 
 
 contrary, contrarius. enterprise. (64.) 
 
 • Hostis, an enemy in war, properly "h foreigner;" inimicm, a 
 personal enemy. 
 
^m 
 
 Ex. Vlii.) 
 
 Ab'jEcTivts. 
 
 <?? 
 
 /^vfirifthhi'/. (33.) 
 cjii'lleiit, oPtiiiius. 
 
 (87.) 
 
 cjii'iieiit, optiiiius. 
 
 Juithj'ul, tiaul-is, -o. 
 
 fortjiit/nrfi =:niice»t( s. (51 a, w.') 
 
 joi-i till, y, praedi-co, Cre, -xi, 
 
 -ctiiin. 
 nititrc, (62.) 
 ijiorioiiM, iji-aeclcirus. 
 !frtnii//<it/i' >■, av-us, -i. 
 /liiiixcl/, \\>M!, a, iiin. 
 fio/H'ti, I j'vnii = / A**/**-. (Voo. 5, 
 
 aii<l sue 64.) 
 iifiiuridi' of, I am, ignoro, iire 
 
 (rttv.). (22.) 
 hifi'i-cst (subiit.), utilit-as, -atis, / 
 
 (61, r.) 
 Join i/oit, y, me tibi, or ad te ad- 
 
 jun-go, t'TC, -xi, -ctuM 
 kiiiiir, /, sc-io, scire, -ivj, -ituiii. 
 Uixt ((>/ titne), jtroxiiiius. 
 leuil, I , trans(lu-c(j, 're, -xi, -etuiii. 
 Uxt oj\ I write a, perscri-bo, ^re, 
 
 -j)si {fninx.), 
 Jiftle. (63.) 
 "j/^V, ])raealtus. 
 rimrsJi, j)al lis, -udis, /. 
 mcdititta 0)1, I, c'ngito, are, de 
 
 {did ). 
 vierrhdiit i'ex.v'1, navis oneraria. 
 mist (I ken, 1 am, erro, are. 
 niw'h. (63.) 
 name, ijoud, fama, y. 
 iialirr land. (16, a. ) 
 iiohlt', praeclaruis. (61, a, n.*.) 
 )u> (iiic, nemo, nullius. ' 
 ohji'ct. (64.) 
 opprcfti, J. V((C. (). 
 paH, the, jjraeterita, n., plur. (62.) 
 pathlcxH, invius. 
 
 pvrHi'i'uti , /, insei'tor. ari (dep,). 
 poor, paup-er, -t'ris. 
 
 pn/iular parti/, j)opular-efl, -111111. 
 
 }>osti'rity, (61, a.\ 
 
 prained, to he, Iaudand-U8, ■», -uni. 
 (48, c.) 
 
 praisiuDrthii, laiidabil-is, -e. 
 
 proclamation, edictuin. (61, /*.) 
 
 pro'id^Li, J malcr. polliceor, r-ri. (64.) 
 
 propirtij. (61, b. ) 
 
 pnrmic, I, H»'(|Uor. i. secutuH (dtp.). 
 
 raHhnesK, ♦tinerit-a.s, -atis, J'. 
 
 nsolvH, I , stutM-o, Cre, -i. 
 
 rich, the. (61, a and Voc. 7) 
 
 rinr, tluin-i ii, -lius, n. 
 
 ifdijintj, a, dietum. (65.) 
 
 Kcarcfhi, vix. 
 
 tihiitttr, I, (piasso, are. 
 
 nink, I (trans.), deiuer-go, Cre, -si, 
 -Hiiin. 
 
 sometimes. Voc. 1. 
 
 spari', I. \'oc. 1 
 
 spei k, I. Voc. 1. 
 
 storm, tenipest-as, -atis,/. 
 
 itrikini/h/, graviter. (66.) 
 
 think, I (rcjlect), cogito, are. 
 
 threats, J maki =/ threaten. Voc. 6. 
 
 throne {na fajih.). (17.) 
 
 traditio/is, I hand down, trad-o, 
 ere, -idi, -itiim. 
 
 transa( t, ago, t-re, egi, actum. 
 
 nnhealthji, pestilen-a, -tis. 
 
 unjust, iiiKjuus. 
 
 variance with, I am at, pugno, 
 are, ciuu {al>l. ). 
 
 venture on (enterprises), J, audeo. 
 (54.) 
 
 violent (storm), maximus. 
 
 vote of the senate, senatus consul- 
 turn. (61, h. } 
 
 well-affected. (60, H.*. ) 
 
 winter, hi-erns, -Cmis, y! 
 
 youth, a, adoleacens. (61, a, /«.'.) 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 A. 
 
 1. He said that he woiihl nover- hanish tlio good and 
 wise. 2. We are all ignorant of much. 3. He said tluit 
 courage and cowardice were contrary 'o . ach other, i. It 
 
 * Nemo (snhnt.^ne homo) is used in tlie noni. and ace. (neminem). In 
 other cases the adj. (nullius, nulli, nulla, -a, -o) should be substitute*!. 
 ■^ See 33. 
 
 '■A 
 
I' i 
 
 AbiEC7iVE<:, 
 
 [Ex. VIII. 
 
 1 
 
 '■■I 
 
 appears tl»at he was baiiislu'd with you, not by the Dic- 
 tator himself, but by a imiisewortliy vote of the senate. 
 h. He resolved to abandon the aristocratic and to join 
 tilt! poj)ular party. 0. He said that rashness and clian<fe 
 of i)urptwe w(!re not to be praised. 7. He was an excellent 
 youth, and a most faithful friend to me; he had much 
 conversation with me that day about tlie future. 8. 
 Having returned to lionu; he })romised to transact every- 
 thing,'' for his father. l>. The army was led by Hannibal 
 through many pathless defiles, ami across many broad 
 rivers, and many lofty mountains and luihealthy- marshes, 
 into the country of the enemy. 10. Vou will scarcely 
 venturer to (hniy that duty was sometimes at variance with 
 interest. 11. 1 know that your forefathers ventured on 
 many glorious enterprises. 12. He makes many pnuuises, 
 many threats, but 1 believe that he will accomplish very 
 little. 
 
 B. /- 
 
 1.3. You, said he, were meditating on the past; I was 
 attempting to foretell the future; I now [»erceive that both 
 you aiul 1 were mistaken. 14. He tells (us) that he has 
 been driven by th(ise brothers, his deadly enemies, from 
 his throne and native land ; that they are persecuting with 
 unjust'^ proclamations and decrees all tlie ^sell-ft^ected, all 
 the wise; that no one's property or good name is"* spared; 
 that rich and poor are alike oppressed, 15. I hope to write 
 a list of the many striking sayings of your grandfather. 
 16. The.se objects, said he, did our forefathers pursue ; these 
 hopes did they form ; these traditions have they handed 
 down to posterity. 17. It is allowed that many noble 
 deeds were done by him. 18. I rejoice that you spoke 
 little and thought much. 19. It is said that many 
 merchant vessels were shattered and sunk, or driven on 
 shore, by many violent storms last winter. 
 
 See 6. 
 
 *Superl. (See 67, a.) 
 
 Superl. 
 
 See 6. 
 
wm 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 ADJECTIVES Continued, ADVERBS. 
 
 58. Tlie adjcictivt'. Jind tlic j^enitive, rase ot' siilistaiitivcs 
 (st'd 214) are Ijotli used to define the meaning of the sub 
 stantive. So in Kii<^lish, "the A'm^'.s ])ida('e," " the n>//i/ 
 army." Ifenee tlu; Latin adjective is ol'teii used when- in 
 English we employ the prejjosition " ol " with a iioun. 
 Thus — 
 
 Bes alienae. Tlie affairs of others. 
 
 Conditio servilis. 'I'lie condition or state </ .s/mrrif. 
 
 Vir ibrtis. A man of cuunige. 
 
 So often witli ])ropor names — . 
 
 PiKjna Cannensis (not (^annaruni). The hattle (//Cannae. 
 Piipalm Romanus (never Romae). Tiie people of lionie. 
 
 01^. ^n ^' vir fortissiimis,'' 'a iiiini of the yreatest counifre." In 
 Litin tlii.s adji'ctiviil tfenilivc (f (jiuility may be u.^ed only wlun' an 
 a(ije(.'tive is added to the sub"' .;;• l^■i We can say " rrr suuiiiia*- 
 fortitudinis;" not "rtV for itudlniii.* (See 303.) ' 
 
 59. Sometime" we rnuzt 'jr^-j a Latin genitive wlicro 
 the adjective is W'iM^r,^, or •.■ :tdy used, in Latin. 
 
 Corporis, or animi, dolor. H <>lili/ or nicntid pain. 
 Omninm judicto or seiitcntii^. \\} a una niiiioiiK vculu-X, <>v 
 
 ^inavhuoiisliti. 
 In hoc omniutn lurfN. In this universal mourning, 
 Med unius sententid. Bv my ><iu((k vote, 
 Post homhmm m^moruim. \Vithln human tnemory. 
 
 60. Tlie Latin adjective is UHed in nuiiTinent wii ii a 
 substnn'.ivo where we use a partitive suh>tanti\e cxiircs - 
 
70 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [Ex. IX. 
 
 i« 
 
 
 ing wlwh, end, middle, top, etc., followed by the preposition 
 " of." Tims— 
 
 Summns mons. The top of the mountain. 
 
 In mediam riam. Into the middle or centre df the road. 
 
 R('li<]uuTn ojms. The rest of the work. 
 
 I Ida VidViH. The bottom 0/ the valley. 
 
 Novissinium aijmcn. The rear of the line of march. 
 
 Tota Griu'c'uL The whole 0/' Greece. 
 
 Siunnia fcinerifas. The height of rashness. 
 
 Ohs. These Mdjoctives, especially where, as with svinmufi, itniJins, 
 etc., aiiibii^'uity lui^ht arise, {generally stand before tlie substantive, 
 not, as the attribute usually does, after it. 
 
 61. The adjective is often used in close connexion with 
 a verb, where in Enolish we should use either a!i adnrrh 
 or an ad cerhial phrase, i.e. a preposition and noun. 
 
 Invitus haccdico. I say this umdUhufh/, or irith rehidance, 
 
 or againM my ivill. 
 Tacitus hacc ciKjitaham. I was meditating .sd>'idli/, or in 
 
 sdeiicc, on these subjects. 
 Tmprudens hue veni. I came here iinairares. 
 Incolumis rcdii. I returned safehj, or hi safciy. 
 Adversos, aversos, <tggressus est. He attacked them in 
 
 front, or from behind. 
 So — Absens condemnatus est. He was condemned m his 
 
 absence . 
 Totus dissenfio. I disagree ivholly, or entirely. 
 Frequentes courenere. They came together in rrotrds. 
 Finis. In his lifetime. Mortuiis. After his death. 
 Diversi futjere. They fled in opposite directions. 
 
 62. So the adjectives solvs (unns), primnfi (jwior if 
 of two), vltimns, are joined adverhiaJly with the verb 
 to express "only," "first," "last," where we should ikUI 
 a relative clause, or an infinitive mood, and make the ad- 
 jective the main predicate. 
 
 Primus haec fecit. He was the first who did this, or to do 
 
 this. 
 Solus mida iiostni srnsit. He teas the only parson who 
 
 perceived rtur evils. 
 IJltinnis cmissv diritur. It is said that he ivas the lust to 
 
Ex. IX.] 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 71 
 
 63. Certain substantives also, especially those which 
 relate to tiyne, age, and ojice, are used with the verb, where 
 in English we siiould use an adverbial ])hrase. 
 
 Ifiir ]mc\\ or adolescens, or senex, diiUci. T leanu'd this 
 lesson (54) in my boi/hood, or i/onth, or old lujr. 
 
 Hoc consul voint. He made this vow in /lU consalshiji, or 
 as consul. 
 
 So — Victor. When victorious; " in the hour of triumph." 
 
 64. A single adverb in Latin will often re.piescnt a 
 whole adverbial phrase in English ; and on the other 
 hand an English adverb will often require a Latin phrase, 
 or whole clause, or combination of words. (Intr. 19 and 
 52.) Thus— 
 
 Fie. With a good conscience. 
 
 Divinitus. By a supernatural interposition. 
 
 Oninino. Speaking in general, as a general rule, etc. 
 
 So — Easily. Xiillo negotio. 
 
 Indisimtably. iJubitari non potest quin 
 
 Fortunately. Opportune accidit ut . . . 
 
 Possibly. Fieri potest ut . . . 
 
 You are obviousbj mistaken. Errare te manifestum est. 
 
 You are apparently unwell. Aegrotare videris. 
 
 It must therefore never be taken for granted that an 
 adverb in one language can be translated by the same part 
 of speech in the other. 
 
 Vocabulary 9. 
 
 . . (See 133.) 
 (See 123.) 
 
 acquit, I, absol vo, 6rc, -vi, -utum. 
 attain to, I = / obtain (Voc. 3), 
 
 or =: arrive at (Voc. 1). 
 heaidlful, pul-cher,* -chrior, -cher- 
 
 rimus. 
 horn (partic. of 1 hear), natus 
 
 (nascor, J am born), 
 boyhood, in his. (63.) 
 break (a law), J, Voc. 5. 
 
 hrovght up (partic. of / bring up), 
 
 educatus (edfico). 
 chaiiijp, I, niutu, are. (21.) 
 cliithimj, vestit-UB, -fls, in. 
 ro7nf)(()iions, his, siii, suos, etc. 
 conscience, vith a ijoo'l. (64.) 
 consent {snhst.), consens-us, -us, m. 
 crowds, in. (61.) 
 death, after his. (61.) 
 
 ' Pnlcherh " beautiful " in ageneral sense ; amoenus; " lovely tu look 
 on," is applied to natural objects such as a landscape or acenerj'. 
 
ill il 
 
 72 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 [Ex. IX- 
 
 'A I 
 
 W 
 
 . 1 
 
 :<1 
 
 i! 
 
 
 distinction, hon-or (-os), -Oris, m. 
 
 enterprise. (64.) 
 
 entruHt, I, per-mitto, 6re, -misi, 
 
 -inissuin, 
 eijc, ocul-ii.s, -i, //;. 
 /W/r, amoenus. (See p. 71, /'.'.) 
 fnitlt, <joo<l, li(l-es, -ei,y! 
 /'(Crm/ioiifie, villa, _/. 
 J'ood, vict-us, -us, m. 
 fortune, fortuna, f. 
 funeral, fun-iH, -f^ris, n. 
 (father toi/ether, to {intrana.), 
 
 Vi)c. 3. 
 h'njhcst. Voc. 6. 
 honour, I {of external marks of 
 
 honour), onio, are. 
 kind of, ereri/, nmn-is, -e. 
 kiadnesn, l)()nit-as, -atis, /. 
 Idfit, the, xiltinius. 
 l<ite, too {adv.), sero. 
 lifetime, in his. (61.) 
 listen to, I, aiul-io, ire. (23.) 
 look down on, I, de-spicio {trans.), 
 
 fire, -spexi, -spectum. (23.) 
 nianai/enicnt j.rouiirati-o, -onis, /. 
 rnnrb e iadj.), mannoreus. 
 mild, I am out ofr/u/. Voc. 6. 
 mrari//ous interjioxitioii, b)/ a. 
 
 (64.) 
 monument, momimentum, n. 
 netjlecf, I, iiogle-go, fre, -xi, -ctum. 
 >iext, the, proxiraus ; insequen-s, 
 
 -tis. 
 q/j/j'ce. Voc. 2. 
 
 old age, in my. (63.) 
 
 other persons, of {adj.). (68 ) 
 
 panic, j)av-or, -oris, to. 
 
 plain, camp-US, -i, m. 
 
 poet, pot't-a, -ae, m. 
 
 point out, I, nionstro, are. 
 
 ptost up, I, fi-go, Cre, -xi, -xuiii. 
 
 reach, I, pervcnio ad . . . 
 
 read throHijh, I, per-lfgo. fire, -iTgi, 
 
 -lectum. 
 recover myself, I, me re-cipio, 
 
 -cepi. 
 relinquish, I, o-mitto, fire, -misi, 
 
 -mlssum. 
 safetji, in. (61.) 
 silence, in. (61.) 
 speech {to soldiers, or multitudi), 
 
 conti-o, -onis, f 
 spread I eneath, I, sub-jicio (^/vj».s. ), 
 
 fire, -jeci, -jectuin ; subjicior 
 
 {intrans.). (20.) 
 state {adj.), pnblicus. 
 summit. (60.) 
 siijtply you ('•'/// these t.'nngs, I, 
 
 haec tibi sujipedito, are. 
 tomh, .sepuloruin, ti. 
 troublesome, ruolestus. 
 turn to, I. Voc. '^. 
 unanimously. (69.) 
 universal. (69.) 
 whole of. (60.) 
 wholly. (61.) 
 
 write, I, sori-bo, '^re, -psi, -ptum. 
 youth, in my. (63 ; also 61, n.^.) 
 
 it 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 1. Ho said that the mana<ieuient of otlier ])e()i)le's aflairs 
 was always e.xceediiigly^ trouhh'soine. 2. In tliis universal 
 panic your lirother was the lirst to recover himself. 3. 1 
 obeyed, said he, tlie law- in my youth : I will not break 
 it in my old age. 4. I was the iirst to ventu.e on these 
 ent(;r|)rises ; 1 will be the last to relin(|uish them. 5. In 
 his lifetime wo neglected this poet; after his death we 
 honour him with a st te funeral, a nuirble tomb with 
 
 ' To be expressed by superlative adj. (See 67. ) 
 
 ■ I'lural. Lex (sing.) is seldom used in au ab-^lract Bt'iise ; it meaui 
 '.' law. 
 
Ex. IX.] 
 
 AbVEkBS. 
 
 many beautiful' monuments, and every kind of distinction. 
 6. The kin^ liaving been (14, «) the first to rcacli the 
 summit of the mountain, looked down in silenci,' on the 
 fair plains spread beneath his eye (jt>/.). 7. He turned- 
 to liis companions and pointed out the farndiouse in wliich 
 he had been born and brought up in his boyliood; too 
 late, said he, lias f(jrtune changed. S. He ])i()uiised to 
 su[)])ly tlie army of Rome with I'ood and clotliing. '.». I 
 read through the whole of this procL^niation in silence ; it 
 seemed to me that he who wrote and posted it vj) (when) 
 written was out of his mind, 10, He was unanimously 
 acquitted, and returned home in safety; the next yi ar he 
 attained with universal consent to the highest ottice in the 
 nation, II. The soldiers, having gathered t(jgcther in 
 crowds, listened to his speech in silence. 12, I entrust 
 myself wholly to your good faith and kindness. 1 3. No 
 one can with a good conscience deny that your brother 
 returned homo in safety by a miraculous interposition. 
 
 Superl. (67,) 
 
 ^ Participle. (Sei- 16.) 
 
EXERCISE X. 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 65. In a relative or adjectival sentence, each clause^ has 
 its own verb, and its own independent construction. The 
 rcilative pionoim qui is of the same gender, num))er, and is 
 joined wiili the same person of the verb, as its antecedent 
 substantive, or pronoun, in the other clause. (See 12.) 
 
 Ar])ores xerct ililigens cujricdla, quarum adspiciet haccam ipse 
 nunquam,'^ The careful husbandman will plant trees, 
 any fruit of which he will himself never behold. 
 
 Mulierem aspicio quae pisces vendit. I see a vomaji who 
 is selling fish. 
 
 Ubi est puer, cui Ubrum dedisti ? Where is the hoy to 
 whom you gave the book 1 
 
 Adsum qui feci. /, who did the deed, am here. 
 
 lor tiie meaning of the term adjectival, as applied to a clause, or 
 to the sentence of which such a clause forms a part, see Intr. 81. 
 
 66. Where there is more than one antecedent, the rules 
 for the number and gender of the relative are the same as 
 those for the adjective. 
 
 Pater ejus et mater qui aderant. His father and mother 
 who were present. (47, a.) 
 
 Divitiae et honwcs quae caduca sunt. Riches and distinc- 
 tions, which are perishable (things). (48, b.) 
 
 67. Sometimes a relative refers not to a single word, but to the 
 whole stateiiumt made by a clause. When this is the case, we often 
 find id quod, for quod only. (Here id is in apposition to the former 
 sentence.) Sometimes qvae res is found : = "« circumstance which." 
 
 Timoleon, id quod difficilius piitatur, sapientins Udit secundani 
 qiiam adversam forttmam. Timoleon, though this (lit. a thing 
 
 74 
 
 ' For meaning of clause, see page 20, note. 
 * For place of nnnqnam, «ee Intr. 92. 
 
Ex. X.] 
 
 T^E RELATIVE. 
 
 % 
 
 which) is thought the more difficult (task), bore prosperity more 
 wi):ely thiin adversity. 
 Midtie civitates <i (Jtjro defecerunt; quae res viuHornm bellornm 
 causa fait. Many states revolted from Cyrus ; and this (see 
 13) {circumstance) was the cause of many wurs. 
 
 Ohs. — "^s" is often used in English as equivalent to "a Iking 
 u'hich,^^ or " which" in reference to a whole clause. 
 
 " He, an you have heard, died at Rome." IIU, id quod amliisti, 
 liomae mortem obiit. 
 
 68. A lelative pronoun in the accusative case is fre- 
 quently oniiited in English, but never in Latin. 
 
 This is the man / saiv. Hie est quern i^idi. 
 
 He found the books he wanted. Libras quos volnit repcrit. 
 
 69. When in English the antecedent is qualified by a 
 superlativ^e, the superlative is in Latin placed in the rela- 
 tive clause. 
 
 Volsci civitatem, qunm habebant optimam, perdiderunt. The 
 Volsci lost the best city they had. 
 
 The same place is given to any emphatic adjective, 
 especially those of number or amount. 
 
 Equity's, quos paucos secum habuit, dimisit. He sent away 
 the few mounted men whom he htd with him. 
 
 Use of qui with is. 
 
 70. The demonstrative pronoun which corresponds to 
 qni, as he to who, is not ille, but is. Ille is only used 
 when great emphasis is laid on the "he;" "that vcU 
 known, or tliat other person." Is may be thus used of all 
 three persons. 
 
 I am the man I always was. Is mm qui semper fai. 
 
 1\. Where the antecedent and relative are in the 
 same case, qui without is will express "he who;" where 
 the cases are different, is is to be used. 
 
 Qui haec videbant flebant. Those who saw this (the 
 
 spectators) wep*-. 
 Eis, rni ndsfnhtnt, irascebatur. He was angry with those 
 
 who stood 1 y (the byptftiidcrf). 
 
f i 
 
 /t) 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 fEx. X. 
 
 ■- 12. /s, ci (ii), etc., often answer to our "one," " lucu," 
 '■ ii man," when used to denote a class of persons. 
 
 Earn qui haec facit odi I hate one who, or a man who 
 
 does this. 
 Eos qui haec fac'iunt odi. I hate men who do this, 
 
 Qi(i alone (71) will express the same phrases. 
 
 (^ui Iiaec faciimi, j'xijora facient. Men who are doing this 
 will do worse. 
 
 73. The oblique cases, especially the (lenitive and 
 dative, of the participle are often used to represent "him 
 who," " those who." 
 
 Adstantium clamore perterrifus. Alarmed by the shouts 
 of (he hjidandcrs, or of those who stooi/ hi/, or of those 
 standing hy. 
 
 Interrogantibus respondit. To those who qtiestioned him, or 
 to those questioning him, or to his interrogators. 
 
 74. But we must never combine ei, eorum, cis, etc., 
 with the participle to denote a class. Eorum adstantium, 
 COS adstantes, is very bad Latin for " those who stood by," 
 or " those standing by." 
 
 75. Sometimes the force of the demonstrative in is qui, 
 and similar combinations, hie qui, etc., is emphasised by 
 ] (lacing the relative clause first, and the demonstrative 
 pronoun, in the other or principal clause, afterwards. 
 
 Qui turn te defendif, is hodie accusat. He who (the very 
 man who) then defended you is to-day accusing you. 
 Your former advocate is your present accuser. 
 
 This construction is always to be used where a strong 
 contrast is dwelt on. 
 
 76. Observe how often the substantive has to be ex- 
 pressed in Latin by a clause I "ginning with qui, is qui, 
 ra quae, etc., i.e. by an adjectival clause. Thus — 
 
 Qui me ceperunt, my captors; qui me I'icit, my conqueror; 
 (ea) qicae vera simt, the truth. 
 
 (See 175.) 
 
 /.s qui, with the subjunctive, will be treated further on, 
 
Ex. X.] 
 
 THE RF.LATIVE. 
 
 77 
 
 Vocabulary 10. 
 uf/ainandagdiii, saepe (saepissime). | meet, I come to, obviani vonio, veni 
 
 (57. ] 
 agri-oihiit (wiilt), I am in, consen- 
 
 tio, Ire, -si, -suin (cum, dhl.). 
 ((.''■■ilsf((iiCf, I come to /lis, sub-v6nio, 
 
 -Villi (ihif. ). 
 fdiiiirihiifi (pi''}!.), (le {((l)L), 
 (/(.>7//.>i , /. (le>s|iici(),' C've, -spexi, 
 
 -bpuutuiu. 
 direction.-:, ill (lijjiri'iit. (61.) 
 (Hxdiji-d' iritfi, /, (lis-sentio. (See 
 
 »/;//■'■( nil lit . ) 
 
 (/it<iii<ii/i</, J (un, perterr-eor, eri, 
 
 -itiis. 
 i/ixiiiiss, /, (li-mitto, 6re, -misi, 
 
 -niissuui. 
 eiitireii/. (61.) 
 
 fr.'<t . . . till- II, primuni . . . deinde. 
 foot-soli Her, jied-C'S, -Itis. 
 (jlodlij, libeiis [adj.) (61), o?' liben- 
 
 ter {adv.). 
 halt, I. Voc. 1. 
 helj//e.-'snefi.-<, in, m-ops, -6pis {adj.). 
 
 (61.) 
 iiintitiifion, an, institutum. (61, h.) 
 join /liin, /. (20, and Voc, 8.) 
 L-ei'p iiiji Kord, I, fidem prae-sto, 
 
 ;irti, -stiti. 
 know, I {a fact), scio (Voc. 8) ; (a 
 
 person) nuvi, nosse, noveram 
 
 (nOrani). 
 man, tlie, (contemptuous), hom-o, 
 
 -inis. 
 
 \dat.). 
 
 occasion, on that, tiim. (Intr. ID.) 
 one. (72.) 
 
 ojipose, I, advensor, ari (dat.). 
 order, J, jiibuo, trc, juysi. jussum. 
 povertji, paupert-as, -atis, f. 
 prexeiit, I am, ad-sum, -esse, -fui. 
 rather, I iroidd. Voc. 7. 
 reluctantljf. (61. ) 
 I'epieatedli/ 1= ayain and aijain. 
 richex, diviti-ae, -arum. 
 ruin, exitium, n. (18, 19.) 
 scatter, 1 (intraiis.), dissipor, ari. 
 
 (20.) 
 seek for, 1, pet-o, ere, -ii, or -ivi, 
 
 -itum. 
 send back, 1, re-mitto, fire, -misi, 
 
 -missum. 
 set at nought, I, con-temno,' fire, 
 
 -tempsi, -temi)tum. 
 shout, clam-or, -oris, 7n. 
 slave, I am a, servio, ire, -ii. -itam. 
 stand />!/, I, ad-sto, -stare, -stlti. 
 story, I tell a, narro, -are (64.) 
 sudden!;/, sublto. 
 to-dai/, hodie. 
 to-morrow, eras. 
 treat iiijhtly, /, parvi'* facie, fire, 
 
 feci, factum. 
 value highly, I , magni^'aestimo, are. 
 woman, muli-er, -uris. 
 yesterday, heri. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 1, Tho.se^ who were in a,^reeiiR'nt witli you yesterday, 
 to-(lav entirely di.sa'>Tee (with vou). 2. lioth vuu and 1 
 (h'.spise one wlio^ wouhl rather be a slave with* riches 
 than free with poverty. 3. We know that he, concerning 
 
 ' Jiesjiicio, I look down on as hi-neath inyse'f ; contemno, I tliink 
 lii'htly of //( itse/f=: jiarri ftcio ,- spi-riia, I put from me ; aspirnor, the 
 same, with idea of Htrnuif disbkc ; rr/mdld, I put fiom inr w itli <'iiii- 
 tempt ; wgli'ijo, I am inditlcrcut U). 
 
 - For this ;^enitiv<' ';<■'• 305. 
 
 "The relative * ii;i e to eome liist, i< to he used in tlie ■•ther ehiiKe. 
 (See 75.; ' • -.v. 3, /:.. 
 
78 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 if ' 
 
 II- 
 1 
 
 111 r- 
 
 [Ex. X. 
 
 whom you have told us all this story, expects to attain 
 to the highest oiffices, the greatest distinctions ; bnt^ I 
 hope tliat he will never obtain them, for 1 know the man. 
 4. I who''^ rei)t'atedly opposed you in your youth, will 
 gladly come to your assistance in your old age and li('lpl(\ss- 
 ness. 5 I sent you the best and bravest ibot-soldiers 
 that I had with me; and having promised^ to send them 
 back, you reluctantly kept your word. 6. He oidered 
 those standing by (liim) to follow him; but they were 
 dismayed by the shouts of those who were coming to 
 meet (liim) ; first halted, and then suddenly scattered and 
 fled in different directions. 7. The woman for whom you 
 were seeking is present; I will therefore* hear and dismiss 
 her. 8. The best institutions and laws you have set at 
 nought, and this* will be your ruin to-day. 9. The 
 things- wliich I treated lightly in my boyhood, I value 
 highly in my old age. 10. I who^ was the last to come 
 to your assistance ou that occasion, will be the first to 
 join you to-morrow. 
 
 ' The demonstrative and conjunction, 6«<, therefore, etc., to be ex- 
 pressed by the relative. 
 
 ■^ The relative clause to come first, is to be used in the other clause. 
 (See 7B.) 
 
 » See 14. « !jee 67. 
 
 For all swreeding Exercises the Student is referred to the 
 Generul Vocabulary at the end of the Bonk. 
 
EXERCISE XI. 
 
 THE RELATIVE-Co/7t//;we(/. 
 
 Qui in Oratio Obliqua.— Co-ordinate and other uses. 
 
 77. The verb in an adjectival clause is in the indica- 
 tive, mood, unless there is some special reason for the 
 / uhjundive. 
 
 For instance, if the verb in the principal clause is in 
 oratio ohliqua, i.e. is in the infinitive after a verb of saying 
 or thinkinrj, the verb in the qui-iAnMBQ will be in the suh- 
 junctive. 
 
 Thus — MuUerem aspicio, quae pisces vendit. (Oratio recta.) 
 I see a woman who is selling fish. 
 
 But — Ait se mulierem aspicere, quae pisces vendat. (Oratio 
 obliqua.) He says that he sees a woman who is 
 selling fish. 
 
 Exceptions to tliis rule will be explained further on. 
 
 Ofts. — This idicnn extends very widely in Litin. It holds good not 
 only with relatives, but with all subordinating conjunctions, and 
 appliej Jiot only to indirect statements, butidso to indirect comuiards 
 and questions. (See Exercise lvi.) 
 
 78. Besides its use in adjectival clauses, qui is also used 
 vtny larLjely as a substitute for both kinds of conjunctions. 
 (Intr. 53, 5-t, 55.) 
 
 (i.) It is often used as equivalent to the co-ordinating 
 conjunctions a/ul, hat, so, therefore, etc., and a demonstra 
 tive, to connect together co-ordinate sentences and clauses. 
 (See 13.) 
 
 Ad reqem vmi, quem cum vidistem. ... I came to the king, 
 and when I had seen him. ... 
 
 Indeed the Latin rtlative is often used where we should use tlie 
 demnnsfrativc only. Thus nothing i» commoner than for Litiu 
 
 ra 
 

 R«.J| 
 
 M 
 
 THE nELAllVli. 
 
 LEx. XI. 
 
 W 
 
 %\ 
 
 Hf'iiN'iii't'.'i to l)('i,Mii with ',)iiiliiis innlUis, liiiviiij,' Iciiril /A;!s,- (.,)ii()(| 
 }ihi ridit, wlu'ii lie su\v^/'r<; <iu;iiii ob /<//(, ([iiociica, ((/*(/ tlnriforc, 
 • tr, t hi re fore. 
 
 This is call(!(l the ro-ordinatwij use of the rt'lativc, Itcciiiisf! it, links 
 (■()-(»r(liiiiit(' sciitciua's. (Intr. 74.) The n-hitivc so used ih)i!.s imt 
 iiHrct, thf mood of the verb any more than a (h'moiistrative prcjuoiiii. 
 or the coiij unction et. 
 
 Thus, if lilt I used for "and " connects (or co-ordinates* a priiui|ial 
 verl) in ornUn iilili.iiiid with anotlier, it ^^ill introduce an intinitiv • 
 mood. • 
 
 Diiit proih'tinrm esse cum . . . (juein hro'i prritkriim i}f<^e. He 
 said that he was a traitor . . . and that he would soon ju-risli. 
 
 79. (ii.) Th(^ Liitiii relative is also liifocly used in ])laLM' 
 of many uinds of ■'iuhnnh'/irtfinf/ eoiijtinctioii.s ; lU, iti order 
 tliiit, or, so that; qiiamvi'^, altliouoh ; (inod, because. 
 
 'Die verb which follows y^//, when so used, is in the 
 si)l)jnnetive. 
 
 [The followin*^ Exercise will include only its adjectival 
 use as sul)ordinate to oratio ohliqua, and its co- ordinal big 
 use as a substitute for a conjunction. Its use in the 
 sense of "in order to," "so that," etc., will be treated 
 fuither on.] •■ • . . - . 
 
 fi 
 
 in 
 
 Other Uses of the Relative. 
 
 80. ''But" after universal negatives, as nnno, niilhi.% 
 nihil, is equivalent to " who not," and sh(juld be tiaus- 
 lated by qui non, or by quin if the relative is in the 
 nominative (or occasionally the accusative) case. Qui non. 
 or quin will always be followed by a suhjumtirc} 
 
 Nemo est quin tc dementeni pufet. There is no one hut 
 
 thinks you mad ; or the whole irorld thinks, etc. 
 Nemo fud quin riderim. There was no one whom 1 did 
 .. ■ not see (but quern non h more usual). 
 
 ' The explanation of the subjunctive will be given in its proper place. 
 (See Qui with the Subjunctive, Exercise lxiii.) 
 
Ex. XI.) 
 
 THE RELATIVE, 
 
 St 
 
 81. It lias been already said that the Eii^dish rehitivc^ 
 with words such a.s only, first, lai>t,&s its antecedent, is not 
 usually <x)»resse<l in Latin Ity a relative clause, but l»y 
 an ad\frl(ial use of the adjective. 
 
 He was th(j first tchu, or thai did this. Frlmmt huii fnH. 
 (See 62.) 
 
 82. Ilelalive clauses in Knglish, esj)ecially such a.> 
 correspond to a clause bej.>inning with if, are often ex- 
 jtrcsscd in Latin merely by tiie enipliatic order of the 
 woi'ds. 
 
 Ah hoc lioniino infcrjWfiini r.v.sY frafrcm finnn iietiat. lie 
 says that It was not hy this man that your brotliei- ^Mls 
 kiih'd. 
 
 83. When tlie predicate of a relative clause is a sub- 
 stantive, the relative is often attracted into the <fender of 
 the })redicate. instead of agreeing;' with its antecedent. 
 
 Thebac, quod Bueutiae caj/at <st. Thebes which is the 
 capital of Boeotia, 
 
 Obn. - Tilt' same attniction takes place with demonstrative pronouns. 
 Ea (not id) vera est pietas. That is true piety. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 In the following .Exercise the italics indicate the use of the 
 co-ordinating relative, 78 (i.;. 
 
 1. He pretended that he had met the nianMvho had 
 killed the king by poison. 2, There is no one but knows 
 that one who does not till his land will look in vain for a 
 harvest. 3. The exiles believed that they had reached 
 the locality from which (whence) their forefathers were 
 s])rung. 4. I hope to avert this ruin from my country 
 (did tlinrforc I am willing to venture on or endure any- 
 thing. 5. He promised to lead his troops into the country 
 of tlie I]en)i, and (said) that he hoped he should- soon 
 recall them to their allegiance. G. Having heard this he 
 perceived that the ambassadors spoke the truth,^ and that 
 
 i/». (71.) 'Foreut. (38.1 ' That which (pi.) was true. (76.) 
 

 IMAGE EVALUATrON 
 TE3T TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 .<^ 
 
 :^^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 lil.25 
 
 us 
 
 2.5 
 2.2 
 
 
 
 VI 
 
 71 
 
 > 
 
 '^ ■> 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 w 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 33 W<ST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. I4SB0 
 
 (716) 873-4503 
 
 
t^ 
 
 o^ 
 
n 
 
 THE NEI.ATIVE. 
 
 [Ex. XI. 
 
 the danger was increasing. 7, He said that he had never 
 preferred expediency to duty, and (that) thenj'm'c he would 
 not ab{>ndon allies whom he had promised to succour. 
 
 8. Having ascertained this tact, he promised to break up 
 the crowd which had gathered around the king's^ palace. 
 
 9. He pretended tliat it was not for the sake of gain hut 
 of friendship that he }iad given me all the books which 
 his brotiier had left. 10. He said that the friends for 
 whom you were looking round were all safe, and therefore 
 that he for his part was free from anxiety. 11. He 
 pretends to reject glory, which is the most honourable 
 reward of true virtue. 12. All the world'^ knows that the 
 moon moves round the earth. 
 
 'Adjective. (68.) 
 
 * See 80. 
 
EXERCISE XTL 
 
 THE RELATIVE-Co/jf//?i/e(/. 
 
 Correlatives. 
 
 84. The relative pronouns and pronominal words, qui 
 (who), qualis (of what kind), quantus (of what size), quot 
 (liow many), answer resjiectively to the demonstratives 
 is (he), taliH (of such a kind), t itus (of such a sizr), tut 
 (so many). 
 
 When they answer to these demonstratives, all relatives 
 exce])t qui, and even qui with idem, are to be translated 
 by the English " as" 
 
 Talis ed, qualis Kemjicr ftiit. He is such as (of the same 
 
 character as) he has ever been. 
 Tantam' hahco volupUdcm, quantam tu. I have as much 
 
 pleasure Ht< you. 
 Tot erant miliffs, quot maris flwtus. The soldiers were 
 
 as many as the v.aves of the sea. 
 Idem est qui semper fait. He is the same as (or that) he 
 
 has always been. 
 lies peracta est eodem modo quo nntea. The thing has 
 
 been done in the same manner as before. 
 
 85. When thus used, the two pronouns which corre 
 spond with each other are called correlative, or correspond- 
 ing, words. 
 
 As with is and qui, so with the otliprs, the relative or adjectival 
 clause is often placed first, and the other or principal cl. use last. 
 
 ' Tantus is sometinu's used in a limiting sense. " juut as (only as) 
 uiu ;h as;" tantum I'ncict qunntum coactitJi erif, he will do no more 
 thaii he is compelle<l (to do' 
 
 
84 
 
 7//A kELAHVE. 
 
 [Ex. XII. 
 
 This is in iccordaiice with the general tendency of Latin to plac* 
 ine most emphatic part of a se'itence at or near t'nts end. (Intr. 91.) 
 
 (^Miot (vlstdbant lumrmes, tot erant stntentiae. There were as 
 many opinions as there were men standing by. 
 
 (^ualis/x/f dumina, lalem ancillam invtnies. You will tind the 
 maid of the mrm charackr as her mistress was. 
 
 86. " Snrh " ill En^liHli i.s often used where size or 
 amount is nicjuit mtl.fir than kind or gua/itf/. Such — as 
 slioiild ihen l)e translated into Latin by tantus — quant uh; 
 not l>y talis — qualis. 
 
 Wo must therefore alwavs ask ourselves whether "such" means 
 '* of sucli a kind " or " so 'rreat." Thus, in " the storm was such as I 
 had never seen before," " surh " evidently means "so violent" or "so 
 great;" in "his mannei-s were svch as I liad never seen," "such" 
 evidently means "of such a kind.'' In the former case we must use 
 tantus, in the latter talis. 
 
 87. When " sueh " meians "of sueh a kind," the place 
 of the pronominal adjective talis i.s often taken by the 
 genitive of ([uality. (See 58.) 
 
 Ejiisnuxli, hujusnioili, istius modi. Of such a kind, of .such 
 
 a kind as (It i.s, of such a kind as yott speak of. 
 Hujusniodi homines odi. I hat« such men (as these). 
 
 88. " Stich" in English is often combined as an adverb 
 with an adjective, — ''such good men," "such a broad river." 
 Talis aiul tantus cannot of course be used as adverbs. 
 We must say — tam bo7ms vir, or talis tanxjue bonus vir ; 
 tarn latum Jlumcn, or tun turn tamque latum Jiumen, — 
 not, talis bonus vir, tsile latum flumcn. 
 
 Ohs. — But tantus and talis are often combined with hi", sometimes 
 with illcj haec tanta multitudo, this great number of men, or so great. 
 or such a, multitude as this. So the adverb tam. 
 
 Hie tam bonus vir. So good a man a.s this, or, this good man. 
 
 89. The same correlative construction is used with relatival or 
 pronominal adv'rhs, as, i.g. those of place. 
 
 Ubi (where) corresponds to ibi, illic (there), hie (herp^. 
 Unde (whence) „ inde (thence), hinc (henc* ;. 
 
Ex. XII.] 
 
 Ti/E RktAtrvft. 
 
 (^110 (whithiTj cormsponiU to eo. illiic (thithen. hue (liitlicr,. 
 
 ^»aiintlu' direction in which) „ ea, hnr (In that .n this tiinction). 
 
 Inde revistt, iinde ego. You have vnme from tlw muf plm-r ii.< I. 
 Eo rcdiit, uiide profednn ext. Hr returned to lh> jild,:- f'nmi 
 which he had set out. 
 
 90. 01)serve also that witli iih-m, ac^ (n/tfin) fiv(|U(Mitlv 
 takes tlu! place of oui 
 
 Endeni ar. ( = (juae) tu scfifin, my views (54) arc riio same 
 as yours. 
 
 91. With alius, contra, alitr,\ ninl wtniN si'^nilNiiij.' 
 confrasf. >ir, (atque) is the rule. 
 
 .ilihf iic til seiifii). My vi«nvs are (liflVront tVoni yniuv 
 Sometimes qu.am is used. 
 
 h'es contra quain {or atquc) rrpechiri rrcnif. The matter 
 turned out contrary to my expectation. 
 
 See Comparative Clnuses, Ex. LXli. 
 
 92. Where a strong' differenm is pointed out. a repeated ' 
 alius is often used ; aliud est direre, aliud facere, " then' is 
 all f he difference hetv/een speaking and acting;" "speak- 
 in.i,' is one fliinr/, acting another.'' 
 
 93. All that has been said (77) as to the niood of the 
 verh in 7?a-clauses applies equally to every kind of relative 
 
 lause, whether introduced l)y a relatival or )»i-onotiiin;il 
 adjective, such as qimlis, etc., or by a relatival adceih, siidi 
 as v.hi, unde. Thus — 
 
 Uhi tti es, ibi est f rater tuns. Vour brother is in the same 
 place as you. (Dicit) uhi tii sis, ihi esse f rat rem tuihii. 
 
 So- 
 
 N'i\ 
 
 Qualis fuerit f rater tmis, taleni te esse dicunt. They s.n 
 that you are of the same character as your brotliui 
 was. 
 
 ^ Ae is never used before a vowel : see Intr. p. 14, note. 
 
dii 
 
 rilE RF.I.ATIVF.. 
 
 IE :. XII. 
 
 Exercise 1 2. 
 
 Tliis Exercise (A.) contains examples of various rdativf. construc- 
 tions ; instances of relative clauses in Oratio Ohliqun vvili be 
 found in B. 
 
 1. This is the saini; as that. 2. You are of the same 
 cliaracter as I have always l»elieved you to he. 3. All the 
 world kiio.vs that the ])ast cannot Ije changed. 4. Tiie 
 waves were sucii as I had never seen hefore. o. He died 
 in the place where lie had lived in boyhood. G. He was 
 t!ie first who proinised to h(d[) me. 7. I will send the 
 most faitlifid slave I have with me.^ 8. There is no one 
 hut knows tliat tlie (iauls were conc^ueretl by Caesar. 
 '.). Tile island is surrounded by the sea which you (pi.) 
 call oct;an. 10. The Gauls are the same to-day as they 
 have ever been. 1 1. He was the first to deny the 
 existence of god.s. 12. I was the last to reach Italy. 
 l."J. Tiiat expediency and honour are sometimes contrary 
 to each otlier (is a fact' tliat) all the world knows. 14. I 
 believe him to have been the first within human memory** 
 to perjietrate such a monstrous crime, and I hope he will 
 be tlie last to venture on anything of the kind. 
 
 This Exercise mny be also varied by pkicing " he said "' before 2, 4, 
 7, 10, and altering the Sf-ntence accordingly; thus: — "he said tliat 
 yuu were of the same charactei-, as he had always believed you to be.'' 
 
 B. 
 
 1. All the world allows that you are of the same 
 cliaracLer as your father and orandfather. 2. Tlie scouts 
 iiaving returned to the camp In'ought back word that tlie 
 I'lUMUv, who had Hocke 1 to^tlier in crowds the-dav-before. 
 were now breaking up and stealing away in different 
 ilirec'tious. .3. lie said that h^» would never abandon such 
 good and kindly men. who had so often come to his aid in 
 adversity. 4. My objects* are dififereut from yours, nor are 
 
 ' 8, Ohi^. • Omit in Latin and compare 82. ' S«« 69. 
 
 * Ezpreai by neut. pi. of adj. (8«e 54) ; so with "hopea." 
 
Ex. XIM 
 
 rnr nnr.t r/rj-. 
 
 «7 
 
 my liopcs the same as yours. 5. He said that lie liimself* 
 Wis I lie same as he liad ever'^ been, but that botli the 
 state of the nation and the viev.s of his countrymen had 
 ^'iJiihially (than^'efl, and that the kin<^, the nobles, and the 
 whole people were now exposed to dan<j[ers such as they 
 had never before experienced. 6. Many shi]>s of war 
 were shattered and sunk by the violence of the storm ; a 
 siii'jle merchantman returned in safety to tlu; jtoint from* 
 which it had (set out. 
 
 ' Hirnself,--7«/</fm after "he " (he at least, he on the one hand). 
 * Ever '^ ahvava, as iu the preceding Exercise, a. 10. 
 ' -=Wheuce.*(89.) 
 
I . 
 
 EXERCISE XI 11. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE AS SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 94. The infinitive^ mood (see Intr. 51), as doing little 
 more than name the general action or state denoted l»y 
 the verb, is used as a verbal substantive of the neuter 
 gender. Thus — 
 
 Sedere me, deledat. " To sit," or '' sitfnuj" delights me. 
 
 Tlie English word "sitting" is here a verbal noun,- and must he 
 carefully distinj^'uished from the participle, wliich resembles it in fonu 
 only. Compare " nittiag rests me " with " he rested sUtincj on a bank." 
 
 95. This infinitive may be thus used as a substantive 
 in two cases only — (1) in the nominative, eitlier as subject 
 
 ' The infinitive mood is so called because the verb in this form is 
 not defined or restricted by inHexiona denoting person or number. 
 Were it not for its special use in Latin, already noticed, as markiuc 
 statements which are made in oratio obliqua, it could hardly lie called 
 a mood at all; for it is only when so used, as answering to what in 
 most languages is represented by a conjunction (that, etc. ) and a finite 
 verb, that it in any sense acts as a true verb by joining togctlier two 
 conceptions of the mind (see Intr. 11). By a "mood'' we mean a 
 special mode (iiio'Iuh) or mumer in which a verb does this (see 147). In 
 its other uses, as in that mentioned in the present exercise, the infinitive 
 can hardly be called a mood, but, as explained in 94, a verbal noun ; for 
 it m:ikes no statement, but merely wawx a single idea, that state or 
 action which tho verb not only names, but predicates of its subject. 
 Compare xed're with Kchn. 
 
 » The origin of this English verbal nmm in -biff does not come within 
 the scope of this work. From its similarity in form to the participle, 
 it has acquired a participial construction, .i.nd we no longer say "the 
 seeing o/"you," but " the seeincr ?/'>"," etc. Aa such, it is svnonvmous 
 with tue ordinary, or preposit'onal, form of the English infinitive 
 "to see ;" but its use is much wider than that of the Latin infinitive, 
 an I even than that of the gerund. We can say "he went away 
 without unttahinq,^* "instead of nmwprinq" where the Latin gerund is 
 inidmissible (see Oerands) : and it also answers to the supine in -urn: 
 "he sent us out foraging," properly o (i.e. an or on foraging, — not 
 pabulatitm tmisit. 
 
Ex. XIII. 1 THE liWFlNlTlVE AS Sl'BSTANTIVE. 
 
 89 
 
 est, fait, etc., followed by a neuter adjective, or with an 
 impersonal verb, or verb used impersonally; (2) in the 
 accusative, as stibject to another iuHnitive, after a verb 
 sentiendi vel dcclamndi. 
 
 Nihil agere me dclcdat. Dolmj nothing is a pleasure to me. 
 
 Turpe est mentiri. It is disgraceful to lie, or, lyiny is 
 disgraceful. 
 
 iJifif turpe es/ie mentiri. He said that ^i/ing was disgrace- 
 ful. 
 
 For other cases see 99. 
 
 0/«, — The infinitive thus used may be the anteexdent ,o < •relative, 
 which will he in the neuter gender. 
 
 Lautldi'i, quod, or id quod, phrisque gratissimum est, mihi 
 iiiith'titiHsimnm est. To be pniised, wljich is very pletisant 
 to most men, is to me most disagreeable. 
 
 96. But though the infinitive is thus used as a sub- 
 stantive, it retains some part of its true nature as a verb. 
 For— 
 
 (a.) It is qualified, not by an adjective, but by an 
 adverb. 
 
 " Good writing " is bene scribere, not bonum scribere. 
 Bene arare est bene colere. Gaud ploughing is good farm- 
 ing. 
 
 (b.) It is joined with or governs an accusative, or other 
 case as its object. 
 
 Haec perpi^ti, et patria carere, miserrimnm est. To endure 
 these things, and to be deprived of one's country, i: 
 most wretched. 
 
 (<!.) It retains the tenses of a verb. 
 
 Haec facere, ferjsse, facturum esse. The doing, the having 
 done, the being about to do, this. 
 
 97. This infinitive is also joined with a subject, which 
 is always in the accusative case. 
 
 Te Jwc dicere mihi est gratissimum. Your saying this is 
 most welcome to me. 
 
 Qhs, — In Enclish, when an infinitive (or a sentence introduced by 
 "t^*") is the nominative to a verb, it generally follows the verb, the 
 
00 
 
 TirE INFINITIVE AS SVRSTANTIVE. fEx. XIII. 
 
 pronoun " it " being used as its representative before tlie verb. " It 
 IS pleiisant to be praised" *^ It is strangu thM you shonhl (niji gn." 
 This " tT' is not to be translated into Latin. Wo nmat write simply, 
 Ltuxdari jucundum est. Tc hoc dicere mirum est. 
 
 98. This substantival infinitive, with or witliout otlier 
 words, will ol'tnn express tlie nominative and accusative 
 cases of Englisli ((hi^trad nouns for which Latin eitlier liaa 
 no exact equivalent, or for which the intinitive is (often) 
 preferred. Thus — 
 
 (a.) Sihi plarere, "s^lf satisfaction ;" snis rebus cnntentun) e.^M<', 
 "contentment;" meniiri, "falsehood;" cunctari, "nr<icr.isti<iiiti(»n " 
 ( = cunctiitio) ; impmboii Inuilare^ '* praise of the bad ;" /e/icc//i e»se, 
 "success;" prosperU rebus uti, "prosperity." 
 
 (6.) So, too, as Latin has no sinjjle word to expre.ss "happiness" or 
 "gratitude," the ikiHr.liive is mostly used for both. Thus — 
 
 Beate vivere, or beatum esse=vita bcata, or happiness. 
 Gnitiam hiibi're = gratu8 animus, or the feelinir of gratitnrlc. 
 Oratiiis agrre, the returninj^ thanks, or expression oi gmtitude. 
 Gratiam drhere, the beincj under an oblij;.ition. 
 Gratiam referre, the returning; c. favour, or the showiiij; gratitudi'. 
 
 These are instances of the general tendencv of Latin 
 to prefer direct and simple to more general and abstract 
 modes of expression. 
 
 99. But in all such phrases the intinitive is only used in 
 the ncr^inatu'e or in the accusative of oratio obliqua. In 
 other cases, and with the accusative after a preposition, 
 the gerund (or (jcnuidlrc) takes its place.^ Thus — 
 
 Puffuare, to fight, or fighting ; but, pugnandi cuphhts, 
 desirous of fighting ; ad pugnandum paint s, prepared 
 for fighting; pugnando rinccnnis, we shall win the day 
 hi/ fighting. 
 
 Obs. — The gerund governs the substantive with which it is com- 
 bined, the gerundive agrees with it. See Gerund and Gerundive, xlix. 
 
 Gratias agendo (Gerund). 
 
 Ad agendas gratiaa (Gerundive). 
 
 • In Greek the infinitive with the article can be used in all cages,— 
 7-6, Tou, T<jj paffiXfieiv = re(jnare, rtgnandi, rcfpiando, 
 
Ex. XIII.) THE INFINITIVE AS SUBSTANTIVE, 
 
 !ll 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 1. It is ahvnys delightful' to parents tliat tlu'irrliililicn 
 slioulil be praised. 2. He said tlint it was disi^iiictlnl to 
 lircak one's word, but keepin;^ one's promises uns alwiiys 
 lionoural)!e. 3. IJoth your brother and vou- liave told 
 many t'alselioods ;* falsehood is always vili^ 4. It is (mc 
 thin.Lf to be praised, another to liiive (h'scrvcd ].rnise. 
 f). To be praised by tbe unpatriotic is to me almost 
 the sine tidn;^ as to be blanieil by piitriots. G. r«(dinj^ 
 gratitmle, says* he, is one thinL,^ letiirnint,' thanks 
 anotiier. 7. Procrastination, whicli in all things was 
 dan^'(!rous, was, he^ said, fatal in war. 8. rmdonii,^' tlio 
 wicked is almost the same thinj,' as condiinnin;^ the 
 innoctMit. 9. Procrastination in showing' «:ratitutle is never 
 praisewortliy ; for myself*' I prefer tin; rcturninjLi kindness 
 to beini; under an obligation. 10. I^ip]»i'i(ss is one 
 thing; success and prosperity another. 11. Pnive fi;:lit- 
 ing, says* he, will to-day be the same thing as victory ; by 
 victory we shall give freedom to our country. 
 
 ' The intensive superlative may be used here and with many of the 
 other adjectives in this exercise. (See 67, a.) 
 
 » See 26 and note. » See 64. ♦ See 40. 
 
 » See 32, 6. • See 11, a. 
 
FXEPcrrF XIV. 
 
 FINAL CLAUSES. Ut, Ne, QuO, 
 
 100. Tlio Kn^Iisli infinitive mood ("to do, to go,"— 
 projUMly a i^i'iundiul use of the infinitive with the pre- 
 position In) is constantly used to denote a purpose, or end 
 in view (Jinis). 
 
 lint in Litin prose the infinitive mood is never used 
 in ih\H/iin(/ sense.^ 
 
 The Kn<,'li.sh final infinitive is expressed in Latin in nmny ways. 
 " He sent unibiissadors to sue for peace" is never expressed in Latin 
 by " Ugatos misit pacem petere," but in various other ways, either by 
 
 a. legatos misit ad i)afeui petenda**' ((ierundive), 
 
 b. „ paris peteiuhie Ciiiisa (Oerundive) 
 
 c. „ j>aiein petitiuu (Su|)inc), 
 
 d. „ (|ui pacom peterent (Kelative Chiuse), 
 or, especially if the piiipose or end in view is strongly dwelt on, 
 
 e h'ff'itos misit, ut paceni petorcnt. 
 
 The following rules, therefore, must be carefully 
 attended to 
 
 101. (i.) "That," when equivalent to in order that, and 
 followed \)y raaji ov might; also '* in order to "and "to" 
 in the same sense, followed by an Enrjlish infinitive, must 
 often he translated in Latin by nt with the sul)junctive. 
 
 Mnlti aVios laudavf. ut ab iUh- laudentur. Many men 
 praise others, that they way he praisfd by them, or, to 
 he praised by tliem, or, in order to be praised by them. 
 
 Miilfi (dios laudnhimt, ut ah illis laiidarcntur. Many men 
 were i)raising others, in ordir to he praised by them. 
 
 ' Hence such parenthetic clauses as "not to mention," "so to say," 
 "not to be tedious," must never be translated by the Latin infinitive, 
 but by ne dicam, ut dicnm, ue lotKjux dm. 
 
 ' Illis is here used in place of the less empViatic its, as a marked dis- 
 tinction betweep themseivea and othem is intended. (11, d.) 
 
 n 
 
En "IV.I 
 
 FTNAT CI At'^FX 
 
 93 
 
 (ii.) "Tliat"=//i orihr that, followed \\y not, or nny 
 nt';;iitiv(j word (the verb luiviii}^' mini or wiifht lor its 
 aiixiliurv), must Ihj traiisluted hy ne { = list) wiili the 
 sul'juiittivt'. .\'r' expresses a luf/afive piirjtosc ; a purpose 
 uf pinrntinij, luul otteii uiiswurs tu tlie Kuylish phrusu " tO 
 prevent," or " avoid." 
 
 (iti/liimr ni'isipir rcfifprnfi ppvvin fo'Vciit ]nilli'S, iir fr\ij!rr€ 
 lacdiiiitur. J It'iis and other birds clierish their yoimg 
 witii tlieir f«'atiu'rs, tlutt they viaij not be hurt by tlie 
 cold, i>r, til prevent that tlioy bo hurt, etc. 
 
 (htllhote arenipte reliquae peuvDi fovehunt jivHi'K, nv fri(i<nr 
 iaederentur. Ilnis and other binls were chorisliing 
 their y<mn<^ with their featliers, that theij viii/hl not bo 
 hurt by the cold. 
 
 Notice the correspondence of tenses lavdant laitd- 
 
 entvr ; loudabant . . . Inudurrntur ; J'uvenl . . liudan- 
 
 tur ; forehinif 
 
 Iaederentur. (See 104.) 
 
 102. Wlien tlie dej)endenL clause expressing puqiose 
 i.e. the Jinril clause, contains an adjective or adverb in 
 the com})arative degree, ''that "is translated hy qito=hy 
 which; this is equivalent to nt co — that hi/ thin {mfans), 
 but quo must never be used iu this sei^'* without a com- 
 parativ . 
 
 Medico puto aliqnki dondum ease, quo sit studiosior. I 
 think that something should be given to the physician, 
 that he may be the more attentive^ or to make him more 
 attciitire 
 
 103. Ut is never used with a negative \\\ final clauses; 
 "that no one," when a purpose is expressed, is never ut 
 nemo, but nc qnis. (See 1C)9.) When a second or third 
 n((gative tinal clause is added, ncir or neu is use(l instead 
 of ncqite. 
 
 Hoc feci, ne tihi displicerem neve amicis tuis nocerem. I 
 did this to avoid displeasing you, or injuring youi 
 friends. 
 
01 
 
 FINAL CLAUSES. 
 
 (Ex. xrv. 
 
 Sequence of Tenses. 
 
 Tlie tense of tlie verb in a final clause will cause no 
 (iillicultv. The rule is very simple, (liead the Classifica- 
 tion of Tenses, givcMi at 177.) 
 
 104. If the verb in the principal clause is in a primoi-j/ 
 tense, i.e. ])resent, true perfect, or future, the verb in the 
 ul-, quo-, or nc- chiuse will be in the present subjunctive. 
 
 Ilarc scril)o, scripsi, scriban, scripsero, %it bono sis animo. 
 I wrifc, Juine icritten, simll write, shall hare written, this, 
 ill order that you maij be in good spirits. 
 
 If the principal verb is in a historic tense, i.e. imper- 
 fect, aorist perfect, or pluperfect, the subordinate verb will 
 be in the imperfect subjunctive. 
 
 Ilaec scribebam, scripsi, scripseram, ut bono esses animo. 
 I ifa.s vrifiiiff, wrote, had written, this, in order that 
 you mijht be in good spirits. 
 
 1 05. Tlie Latin Peifect discharjres the pnrt of two English tenses, 
 and h.is therefo'-e a doul>l« coiistruciion. (See 187.) 
 
 Laiiilavi te. ut bonus haberere. I praised you that you wight be 
 iiccounted ifond. (Laudavi is historical, nn aorist ttnse.) 
 
 L;iudav i tt'., lit bouus habeare.' I have praised you that you may 
 be accounted good. (Laudavi is primary, a perfect tense.) 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 1. Tn order not to be driven into exile, I shall pretend 
 to be mad. 2. That you might not be puni.shed f(»r this 
 crime bcjth vour brother and you told nianv lalsehoods. 
 3. He pardoned, it is said,^ the wicked, in order to obtain 
 a nqmt.itioii for clemency. 4. He spared the best patriots 
 wIkmi he was^ victorious, in order that his own crimes 
 miuht be forgiven. 5. He praised your countrymen again 
 .usd again in their presence, in order to be i)raised by 
 'iicm in his abst^nce. C. The enemy will, they say,- be 
 here to-morrow with* a vast army in order to'' besiege 
 
 ' But even in the latter case the Romans often wrote haberere, looking 
 i-nther to the past time when the intention was/armed. 
 ■ 8ee 32, b. * See 63. * 6, b. • Gei-undive with ad. 100, a. 
 
Eat. XIV.l 
 
 FINAL CLAUSES. 
 
 9S 
 
 our city. 7. TTiat he might, not be condemned in his 
 altsence he liasteiicd to go to Rome. 8. It is said tliat lie 
 told many falsehoods to make^ himself seem }<iun<ier tlian 
 he really \va$. 9. It seems that he wishes to return home 
 in order to^ stand for the consulship. 10. There is a 
 tindition that he refused to accept the crown to avoid dis- 
 j)leasiiig his brother, or injuring the lawful heir. 11. In 
 order to testify his zeal and loyalty he hastened in his^ 
 old age to Kome, and was the very first* to pay his respects 
 to the new kinjj. 
 
 < See 102. 
 
 • 100, 6. 
 
 See 63. * Lit., first of all. See 82. 
 
EXERCISE XV. 
 
 Ut, Ut non, m consecutive clauses. 
 
 106. Ut with the subjunctive is also used in Latin to 
 • icMiote, not a purpose, Init a consequence or result. 
 
 We see the difference at once in English. 
 
 (a.) I ran against him in onhr to throw him down (Final) ; 
 (6.) I ran against him with such force that I threw him down 
 (Consecutive). 
 In the former sentence, («), nothing is said of the retiidt, only the 
 end in view, or inotive, is mentioned. In the latter, (b), nothing is said 
 of the motive, only the result is named. 
 
 It is tlie peculiarity of Latin that this result, even when stated as 
 
 an actual fact, is described by %it v ith a verb in the snhjuuctire mood. 
 
 Tanta vis probitatis est, vt eaiu vel in hoste diligimius. Such is 
 
 the force cif honesty, that tve love it even in an enemy. 
 
 "That we love it" is stated as a fact, and wouhl be indicative in 
 
 other languages, but in Latin diliyimiis would never be u>ed after a 
 
 consecutive ut. 
 
 107. The Latin nt, therefore, is used with the same construction 
 in two diti'erent senses, but the context will almost always prevent 
 ambiguity, in such a sentence as puer huiiri prolapsus est, ut crvsfran- 
 fjevet, the boy fell down so that he broke {or so as to break) his Kg. 
 intention, would be absurd. Very often ut Jinal will correspond to 
 some such word or i-hrase as idcirco, eo consilio, oh earn causavi, etc., in 
 the princi)>al chiuse ; ut consecutive to adeo, or taw, or ita, or tantus: 
 and thus the meaning of ut is made clear at once. 
 
 Hoc 60 consilio did ut tibi pifodesnern. I said this to be of use 
 
 to you, or inth the intention of being of use. 
 Hoc ita dixi, ut tibi prodessern. I said this so as to be of use to 
 
 you, or in such a manner that I icas of ust to you. 
 
 108. The English as before the infinitive, and after 
 so, such (in Latin tantus, talis, tarn, adeo, etc.), must 
 always be translated by ^^ with the subjunctive. 
 
 Nemo tarn patens est, ut omnia effieere possit. Kohofly is 
 
 so powerful as to be able to perform everything. 
 m 
 
Ex. XV.] 
 
 CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 97 
 
 But w);="as," in coni]>arisoiis, is followed in Latin, as 
 in English, by an indicative. 
 
 Ut muUihuh) solet, concurnuit. Tlioy are running to- 
 gether, <(.< a multitude is "■out to do. 
 
 Here iif iiitrochices, not a rovf^imtiir, but a comparative clause 
 (Intr. 8") , and the construction may l)e compared to that of tanlua 
 followed liy qiiovtnsy as opposed to tantns followed by nt. 
 
 Compare 
 
 Ti\]\nfvit ut nevwii crederet. He was of such a character that 
 no one believed liim, 
 with 
 
 Talis fuit qualem xcwo anten vidcrat. He was of such a char* 
 acter as no one had seen before, 
 
 and note the difference of tlie moods in Latin. 
 
 109. A ne.^ative consfqi/cvre is not expressed by iu, 
 but by lit non. 
 
 Tmita fuit viri moderatio, ut rrjiiifjKanii tiuhi non irascer- 
 riiir. The self-control of the man was f^o great, that 
 he teas vot angiy with me when 1 opposed him. 
 
 The following rule is therefore most important :— 
 
 That nobody ) if expressing j^^'^P'^^'^ ( "^ 1''^]'^ 
 That nothing f and followed by maif or) iie 'iv id 
 Tliat no i viiijht must be translated j ne iilhis 
 
 That never ) by 
 
 But if tliey expres? coiM^equevce, and are 
 folliiwed by a simple English indicative, 
 must be translated in Latin by 
 
 ne unquam. 
 
 id nemo 
 lit 1 ihil 
 I vt niilhin 
 ut nunqnam. 
 
 In both eases alike the verb will be in the sulgunctive 
 mood. Thus — 
 
 The gates were shut that no one might leave the city (or 
 to prevcht any one from leaving, or in order to prevent 
 any one, etc.). Portuc clausuc sunt, ne quis urUm 
 rdinquercf. 
 
 The fear of all men was so great, that no one left the city. 
 Tantus fvit imniuin meins, ut nemo urlem nliqutrit. 
 
 G 
 
oa 
 
 COXSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 [Ex. XV. 
 
 110. As ne (7?4is="tliat no one "in final clauses, and 
 npvp, or ?i^/t quis =•'(??', and, that no one," so also in in- 
 dicative clauses, 
 
 " and no one " is always ncc qnisquam, 
 " and nothing" „ ncc quid quam, 
 "and never" „ necnnquam. 
 
 Similarly ncc /fZ/ws (adj.), ncc usquam, "and no where," etc. 
 
 111. Closely allied to i\\Q consccntive is a limitinr/ force 
 of vf, the negative of which is frequently translated by 
 the English " without." 
 
 ltd bonus est, ut interdum peccet. He is good to this 
 extfiut {or ho is ouli/ so far good), that he makes mis- 
 takes sometimes. 
 
 ^ec pndl potcs, ut non alios perdas. Nor can you be 
 ruined ivithout ruining others. 
 
 Compare with the first example the limiting use of tantus. 
 84, note. 
 
 Sequence of Tenses. Tenses of the Subjunctive. 
 
 112. There is no such simple rule for the tense of the verb in the 
 consecutive clause ns tliit given fnr the final clause, and there is 
 preiter variety in the tenses ; but in practice there will be little 
 difficulty. 
 
 Use the tense of the subjunctive mood which you would 
 us 3 if the verb were, as it would be in English, in the 
 indicative. 
 
 Thus— 
 
 " He if so wicked that nothing has ever called him away from 
 CI iuie ; " 
 "has ever called" is the "true perfect ;" write therefore, 
 
 Tiuii inq^rohus est nt nihil eum unquam a scelere revocaverit. 
 
 vVe have here :i present tense in the principal, a true perfect in the 
 consecutive clause ; both are primary tenses. (See 177.) 
 
 Hoc cum a.l terruit nt vix hodie prodire audeat. This so terri' 
 jied him that he scarcely ventures to come forward to-day. 
 Here one tense is historic, the othei' primary, but the English is a 
 sufficient guide. 
 
Ex. XV.] 
 
 CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 90 
 
 113. The only difficulty is the choice between the perfect and the 
 imperfect subjunctive in the consecutive clause after an historic or 
 aorist perfect in the principal clause. 
 
 The imperfect subjunctive denotes a continuouB sti\te, or action ; 
 or one described as commencing y or as strictly contemporaneous tvith 
 some point in past time. 
 
 The perfect subjunctive represents (a) a state or action as simply 
 a fact in the past (aorist) ; or (6) a fact still producing a result in 
 the mind of the speaker (perfect). 
 
 Th.it tiio army ims flying, or began to fly (imperfect) ; that the 
 army y/c? (aorist); that the army has fled (perfect)— will represent 
 tlie three tenses in English : the two latter would both be expressed 
 in Latin by the words " wt fugerit," as opposed to "ni fugeret exer- 
 citus." (See 184, 185, 186.) 
 
 It* tlie verb in tlie consecutive clause implies con- 
 tinuance, or contemporaneous time in the past, use the 
 imperfect subjunctive. If it denotes a single fact, or one 
 looked on as now completed, use the perfect subiunctivc. 
 Thus— 
 
 Tanta fuit pcstis ut permnlti qnotidie perirent, rex ipse morbo 
 absumptus sit. The pestilence was so greiit that many died 
 daily, and the king himself was cut ofl'hy ihe dises^se. 
 
 Dncis (idcentvs adeo militum redintegravit animos ut impetuvi 
 
 extemplo \ /^^i^"^" [ The general's arrival so restored the 
 
 soldiers' spirits that they charged at once. 
 
 Facerent implies "at once began to ;" feccriiit may either mean 
 "chitrged" as a simple fact (aorist), or in vivid language "they hare 
 charged'' (perfect), as though we saw the fact. 
 
 With the perfect (aorist), the consequence is looked upon as a 
 single result, at once achieved, and not as spread over a space of time, 
 for which idea the imperfect would be appropriate. 
 
 Future Subjunctive. 
 
 114. The only future subjunctive is the participle in -rus com- 
 bined with the right tense of the verb sum. This must therefore be 
 used where the result denoted by the consecutive clause is a future 
 one. Tims — 
 
 Kunquam posthac pugnabimus. We shall never fighl again 
 (after this). 
 
 But— 
 
 Adeo territi sumus ut nunqvum posthac pugnaturi simus. We 
 have been {or were) so frightened that we shall never fight 
 ajjain. 
 
100 
 
 So- 
 
 COXSECVrtVE CLAUSES. 
 
 [Ex. XV. 
 
 Dixit se mho territos fuisse ui nnnquam pontea pugnaturi essent 
 He said that they (hiniself and hi.s companions) had been so 
 frightened that they would never tij^ht again, 
 
 115. The pluperfe .'t subjinctive, our " uould have" is represented 
 In 1 consecutive clause by the participle in -ms with the perfect svb- 
 jundive of sum. Thus — 
 
 Nemo svper/visset. No one would have survived. 
 But- 
 
 Tanta f nit caedes wi . . . wcixn superfuturus fuerit. The slaughter 
 was such that no one would have survived. 
 
 Instances of Sequence of Tenses. 
 
 116. 
 
 Hoc ifa facio, feci, faciani, ut tihi displiceam. / do (am doing), 
 hare done, will do, this so a.s to displea.se you. 
 
 Hoc ita feci, facieba'ii, fecerani tit tibi displicereni. / did, was 
 doing, had done, this so as {then) to displease you. 
 
 Hoc i^t teci nt tibi displiceam (rare). Z did this so as now to dis- 
 please you. 
 
 Hon ita feci nt tibi displicuerim. I did this so as to have now dis- 
 pleased you, or I did this so that (as a matter of fiict) I 
 displeased you. 
 
 Dixit se hoc ita fecisse ut tibi displiceret. He said that he did this 
 so as to displease you. 
 
 Hoc ita feci nt tibi displiciturus sim. I have done this so that J 
 shall displease you ('or so as to be likely to, etc.). 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 1. I have lived, said^ he, so virtuously, that I quit life 
 with resignation. 2. He had lived, he said,^ so virtuously, 
 as to quit lite with resignation. 3. I will endeavour, said 
 he, to live so as to be able to quit life with resignation. 
 4. He said tnat he liad lived so as to be able to quit life 
 with resignation. 5. The charge of the enemy was so 
 sudden that no one could find his arms or proper rank. 
 6. Thereupon the enemy made a sudden- charge in order 
 to prevent any of our men from finding either his arms or 
 proper rank. 7. Thereupon he^ began to tell many* false- 
 
 » See 40. 
 
 » lUe (the. other), 11, d. 
 
 ' Use adverb, made suddenly a charge, 
 * See 64. 
 
Ex. XV.] 
 
 CO .VShCVTll E CLAUSES. 
 
 lot 
 
 lioods with the iiit(^iition of preserving his life. 8. He 
 told so luiuiy falsehoods that no one believed him then, 
 and that no one lias ever i)nt faith in Lini since. 9, He 
 was so ;4()od u kini,' that his suhjccis loved him in his life- 
 time, sighed for him after his death, hononr his name and 
 memory to-day with y;ratefnP hearts, and will never 
 forget his virtues. 10. The waves were such as to dnsli 
 over the whole of- the ship, and the storm was of sucli a 
 kind as 1 had never seen l)efore. 11. The cavalry charged 
 so liercely that had^ not night interfered with the contest, 
 the enemy would have' turned their hacks. 12. You 
 cannot, said he, injure your country without'' bringing loss 
 and ruin upon yourself and yonr (»wn aHairs. 13. 1 said 
 this with the intention of benefiting you ajul yours, but 
 the matter basso turne^d out that I shall injure you whom 
 I wished to benefit, and bei.etit those whom I wished to 
 injure. 14. So little did he indulge even a just resent- 
 ment, that he pardoned even tlmse who had slain his 
 fatlier. 
 
 * Superlative. See 67. 
 ' Nisi with pluperf. subj. 
 
 ' See 60. 
 * 118. 
 
 » See 111. 
 
 i1' 
 
 1 1 
 
 \ 1 
 
EXERCISE XVL 
 Ut, Ne, INTRODUCING A SUBSTANTIVAL CLAUSE.' 
 
 117. One of tlie main difticiilties in trauslatinj; English 
 into Latin is to know when to represent llie English 
 infinitive by tlie same mood in Latin, when to use a con- 
 junction, such as ut or ne followed by the subjunctive. 
 
 We hiive already seen that the Latin infinitive takes the place of an 
 English conjunctional or Ma^clause after verbs of sailing, ihinhing^ 
 etc'. (31-32). 
 
 Oti the other hand we have seen that the Latin infinitive must 
 never be used to express eitlier a purpose or a result (100, 106). 
 
 But besides these clear cases, wliich need cause no difficulty, many 
 verbs which in English are followed by the infinitive require in Latin 
 an ut- or ne- clause. These clauses, though originally advcrhial, are 
 virtually substantival. 
 
 Thus in oro te ut hoc facias, " I entreat you to do this," nt hoc facias is 
 in the strictest sense an adverbial or final clause, " I entreat you, ivifh 
 a view to your doing this ;" but it may also be regarded as ecpiivahnt 
 to an accusative case alter oro; compare, paceni oro; and it is usual 
 to consider those clauses whose final nature is not obvious at first sight 
 as substantival clauses, and to chiss them as such, under the name of 
 indirect commands or entreaties, with the indirect statement and 
 indirect question. (See Intr. 80.) 
 
 118. The English infinitive after verbs and phrases 
 of entreating, commanding, decreeing, advising, striving, 
 effecting, must be translated into Latin by at, or, if a 
 negative is required, by nc, followed by the subjunctive 
 mood. 
 
 Such verbs are nearly all the verba imperandi vel efficiendi, 
 such as oro, pcto, prccor, o^rto (not volo), cdico, impcro (not 
 Jubeo), hortor, moneo, snadeo, video (I take care), pcrmitto 
 
 * For the meaning of the term substantival clause see lutr. SO. 
 102 
 
Ex. XVI.] UT, NE: SUBSTANTIVAL ClAl'SES. 
 
 103 
 
 (not sino or patior),facio, officio, impctro (I obtain by ask- 
 ing), and sncli ])hrasL's as id arjo, " I make it my aim ;" 
 '* operam do," " I tako ])ain.s." 
 
 The Seciiicnce of Tenses, as well as the use of iir in 
 ne^^ative chnises, will be that of ilm Jiiial chiuse (104). 
 Thus— 
 
 Ut hdste/ii terreret, mililibus imperuvit, ut ilijirofi has/ is 
 percuterent. In order to terrify tlie eiieiiiy he (••'m- 
 manded the soldiers to sirike their shiehJs witli their 
 Bi)ears. 
 
 Here tlic first ut introduces an (tdnrhial (final), the sectiml a 
 (virtiiallv'i substnutival clause. 
 
 Mmjiio opere te hortor, ut lios lihros studiose It-^^'us. 1 ear- 
 nestly advise you to rend these books attentively. 
 
 Capnnn nionet, ut in prtituni deseendat. He advises the 
 she-goat to come d<nni into the meadow. 
 
 Iloc.te rogo, ne demittas ouiiinnn. I beg of you not to U 
 disheartened (literally, not to let your mind sink). 
 
 Effecit ne exurbe exirent. He prevented their leaviiKj the 
 city. 
 
 Mild ne quid facerem iraperavit. He ordered me to do 
 nothing. 
 
 119. We must therefore never say Iwc te facere, or non 
 facere oro, sitadco, Jiortor, for — " I entreat, persuade, (!.\li(jrt 
 you iu da, or not to do this," but always hoc ut, or hoc ne 
 facias, Qtc. The tit is sometimes omitted, especially witli 
 the 2nd pers. sing. (See 126.) 
 
 120. P)ut there are exceptions to the rule which nmst 
 be carefully noticed. The commonest of all is Juhco (I 
 bid), which takes an infinitive with the accusative. 
 
 Compare 
 
 Consul militibus ut (or ne) pedeni referrent imperavit 
 with 
 
 Consul milites pedem referre jussit (or vetuit). 
 
 And the infinitive construction is usual with voh, and 
 cvpio (I wish, desire), also with veto, I forbid, prohibco, I 
 prevent, conor, I endeavour, sino, patior, I allow. 
 
 
104 
 
 UT, iWE: SUHSIA.X II\ Al. CI.AlWi-.s. [Ex. XVI. 
 
 II 
 
 ' 
 
 
 12 !• It has iilreaily been said (46' that sonio verbs of purjio^ingf 
 rcsolcin'/, etc., taku the iiitinitive when the subject of both vt'iha in the 
 saiin", but an at- or nr.- chiuso when llic snltjct't of tlif sccoikI verbis 
 dilf" rci.t : tujf) )k:. rediri'in, cumrit, Ik took raro that / shouM not 
 rftiim : me V'tlre curat, and he does not eiire to rctnrn. In the 
 Hecoiid cNaniplt' curat is a modal verb (42). 
 
 122. It is iuiitorl.'int to observe tliiit the suiik; verb 
 iiiiiy lu.! used in two senses, and tlierefore with two con- 
 sLniclions. 
 
 It may be used as a verb sctifimdi rcl chela randl, in 
 wliicli case it will take the accusative and inlinilive (31); 
 Of it may be used as a verb u/t/iera/itU vrl rffiricndl (118), 
 ill which case it will be followed by an at- or nc- clause; 
 (hu — 
 
 (<i.) iMdiiro jidosse hostein. I warn you t/int tlie cnctuy /,s at 
 hand. 
 X(! hue facias vamen. I warn you not to do this. 
 (//.) Mi III pcr.iiKisniit est (5) iinoni adesse. I was pci'suaded 
 that the end teas near. 
 Mi/u persuasHiii csf ne hoc facereni. 1 was [xirsuaded 
 not to do tiiis. 
 (c.) Mihl scripsit se venturum esse. He wrctte ine word 
 thai ho inndit come. 
 Mihl sci'ipsit no ad ttc \tiiirem. He wrote to me (to 
 order or beg me) not to come to liim. 
 ('/.) Fac venias. Vm sui-o to come. 
 
 Fac te venisse. Su])pose yourself to have come. 
 
 The samo vo.bs are used in Eni^lish with a double con- 
 
 O 
 
 structioh , but where we use the conjunction •' thni " Latin 
 uses the infinitive, and Latin uses a conjunction where we 
 use tlie infinitive. 
 
 123. ]\Iany impersonal verbs and phrases are followed by 
 an ■?^^-clau^c' containing a verb in the subjunctive. This 
 clause acts in place of a subject to the impersonal verb. 
 
 Accidit ut nemo senator adessei. It happened that tio 
 
 senator was present, or, no senator happened to be 
 
 present. 
 Ex quo factum est ut belluiit indlceretur. The consequence 
 
 of this (78) was that war was declared, or, the result 
 
 was a declaration of war. 
 
Ex. xvi.i /•/; x/:: sr/isT.ivrfr.if. c/.irsr.^. los 
 
 1^ 
 
 Theso vf- rl.nHea are proporly speaking connecnthr^ ,i«< tlm^o in 117, 
 118, ;irt' propi'ily final ; lienco ni ui mo, not nc </'/m in (lio tiist 
 ♦'\;mi|»lt'. (.St'c 109.) 
 
 TIk' s(.'i[iicnce of Tenses will be that of the conseciitive ilinHc. 
 
 Ohx. — Never translate *' it liapppned to liini to he alisciit" by 
 arriHt ci uhtsio', ahviiys by ei acciiUt ut ((/(cjjs.y, or else by is j'urte 
 iiht'nit. 
 
 124. Taut^nii nhi's^t, "so far from," is always tised imper-ionally, 
 and is fnllowecl l»y two »/^t•lauses, (»f which me is su'ist'iutiiud and 
 subject to ithrnt, tlic other iii mliurhliil, bcin;^ a consecutive chuise 
 ex}»lainin<,' tantain, 
 
 Tantuiii abest ut nostra miremar ut nnhis inin mt'mfavint ijtsr. 
 hiiiio.-slhnii'x. So far ((re ici; from adniiriii^f our own works, 
 th(t Demosthenes himself <loes not satisfy us. 
 
 Kt }io.<frii. niinunur ; a substantival clause, standin;,' in i)lace of a 
 subject to iihist. 
 
 (It nol)l.< mill natisfiirldt ijim: Ih'inoff/n ma ; an adverl)ial clau-ic 
 wliicli, jniiu'd with finifnin, (inalities nhest like an adverli uf dci^frcc or 
 quiiitity. 
 
 The sami' idea mij^dit also be expressed by 'o/«<i mm . . . nl, ni by 
 Hon moilo noil . . . ,s<./, as, 
 
 Adeo non no>i(ra tniraniumt nolii.t nou satisfaciat, etc. ; or, 
 Non iuo(hj non yioMra inlramur, sed nobin uoit satisfacit. 
 
 125. Th ' followiuj; verbs and phrases are followed liy '('', intro- 
 ducing; a sub.>tantiva[ clause. 
 
 (a.) It follows ; tiie next thin;; is, si'qnitur: or ^)n).'»'.;/>/);i rsf. 
 
 (b.) It liai»pens by chance, vasn lurlilit. 
 
 (c ) Henc! it happens, itn fit, lit. thus it happens. 
 
 ((/.) How happens ir \ ([nt fit ? 
 
 {e.) It is possible, /fV/i y*o^>7 tit, lit. it can happen that. 
 
 (/.) it is ('luite impossible, n ullo inodo fieri jjotcst lit, lit. it cannot 
 
 lia[)pen that. 
 (r/.) It remains, r<Ji<f>tnm est, rentnt. 
 (h.) So fir from, taut mil a'i,\<t nt — id. 
 (i.) I will not allow Tiiyself to, non coinmittam ut. 
 ( ;'.) fie succeeded ;iii becoming,' consid), < fi'itrit {nt ronxid firrri). 
 (k.) He c(Mitrived (not to be punished), I'fi'ecit (u<; pocn is d ird). 
 
 'I 
 
 123. Ut is ^'enerally omitted (especially before the i2:iil p>rson 
 sin';:dar when the subjunctive is combined with ojiortct, n.ccsse est, 
 vclim, noliiii, licet. 
 
 Hoc, facias vdlm. I would have you do this. 
 
 Cidpam fateare necesse est. You must needs avow your fault. 
 
ion 
 
 U1\ NE: SVBSTAS'TIVAL CI.AVSESi. [Ex. XVI. 
 
 127. Tlio onliiinrv const met io!i of tlio case of tlio 
 [icrsuii al'UT woi'i-ls of eiilivatiiij- and coiiiinanding, etc., 
 i.s — 
 
 (ff.) Te f^7V), (iJmcrrn, rnffo, mnveo, ndnumeo, Jiurtur, a(lhart(/r, 
 
 jiil'i'i), nil), ju'dhiUo, sino. 
 (h.) Til)i iiii/ifni, /iiiurijtlo, edico, mando, jiermiUo. 
 (r.) A, ill) (al>s) to jx'fii, postido, itnpetro. 
 {((.) J'osro, /I'lfldo, jtn'ciir, both >vith ace. as (a), and a or 
 
 ah with abl. as (c) 
 
 128. JithiD cxpiosscs our ** hid," iind inav he used in a wide sense, 
 and wliorover in nmfin recta wo should use the imperative. Sufnre tc 
 j //u'o = .silve. It may express the wisli of e(jimls, superiors, or interiors. 
 
 Jiiiprro implies an order from a liij^her authority, as from a 
 
 (•(imuiandin;: ofricer. 
 Edii'o, a formal order from some one in oflfice, as a Praetor, etc. 
 l'riticipi<>, a direction or instruction from one of superior know- 
 
 U'djfe. 
 Manilo, n char^^e or commission intrusted hy any one. 
 
 P('7-///y//o ditfers from si//o, as meanini,' ratlier to j,'ive leave actively ; 
 nitin, not to ])revent. Periniito sometimes means "to intrust wholly 
 to," " hand over to." 
 
 I 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 A. 
 
 1. I ontrcatod him not to do this,^ hut siij?f?ested to him 
 to trust liis I'allier. 2. lie exhorted the soldiers not to he 
 dislicartencd on account of the late disaster. 3. He made 
 it liis aim to avoid injuring any one of his subjects, but to 
 consult tlie good of tlie wliole nation. 4. lie gave orders 
 to the soldiers to get ready for fighting, and exhorted 
 them to fight bravely. 5. The senate passed u resolution 
 that the consuls should hold a levy. G. I resolved to 
 warn your brother not to return to Home before night. 
 7. And, to prevent him from telling any more falsehoods, 
 I bade him hold Ids peace. 8. It ha])pened (on) that day- 
 that the consuls wee about to hold a levy. 9. 1 prevailed 
 on him to spare the vanquished (/?/.), and not^ to allow 
 
 Co-ordinate relative. (See 78.) 
 ' iN'eiv or neu. (See 103.) 
 
 See 9, (a). 
 
:v!. 
 
 tlin 
 Jtc. 
 
 Ex. XVI. 1 VT, KB: SUBSTANTIVAL CLAVSES. 
 
 107 
 
 his (snldiors) to innssacru vvonieti an cliildron, 10. I was 
 tlu! first to Wiini Iiim not to jtut tiLith in tliu falsfst m!u1 
 most rnu'l of niankiiul. 11. Vou' and 1 hupjK'ncd tliiit 
 clay to bo in llu; country ; tho consLMjufni-i;"'^ ol" tliis was 
 that we liave been the last^ to hear of thi.s tlisaster. 12. 
 \\i\ said tliat he would uever allow hiiusell' to promise to 
 betray his allies. 
 
 B. 
 
 1. Thereupon ho earnestly implored the bystanders not 
 to obey men* who were ready (sulj., 77) to betray botli 
 tlieir allies and tliemselves in order to avoid incunin;/ a 
 tiitliii<,' loss. 2. lie succeeded at last in persuailin<,^ the 
 Spaniards that it was ([uite impossible to leave the city, 
 (which was'') blockaded on all sides by the enemy, im- 
 hainjcd. 3. He savs® that he never asked vou to pardon 
 the j^uilty or condemn the innocent. 4. I will not, said 
 he, allow myself to be the last to greet my Vwv^ after so 
 heavy a disiister. 5. The jury were at last })i'rsua(lcd that 
 my lirotluT was innocent ; they could not be jiersuadcd to 
 ac(piit him by their verdict, such was their terror'^ of the 
 mob. G. News has been brought to me in my absence 
 that tin; city has been taken : it remains (for me) to retake 
 it by tne same arts as"^ those by which 1 have lost it. 7. 
 So fur am 1 from praising and admiring tliat king, that it 
 seems® to me that he has greatly injured not only his own 
 subj(!cts, but the whole human race. 8. So far Jim 1 from 
 ha.ving said everything, that I could take up the whole of 
 the day in si)eaking ; but I do not wish to be tedious.^*^ 9. 
 It never before happened to me to forget a friend in his 
 absence, and this^^ circumstance is a great consolation to 
 me to-day. 
 
 'A 
 
 * See 26, note. 
 < See 72. 
 
 ' See 33. 
 
 * See 43. 
 
 ' See 123, example 2. » (^gg 52. 
 
 • Omit relative and use participle. 
 ' See 25, last example. • See 84. 
 
 » See 42, ii. " See 67. 
 
EXERCISE XV IT. 
 
 ' 
 
 Quominus, Quin. verbs of Fearing with Ut, Ne. 
 
 129. These two coiiipound words are used as conjunc- 
 tions after verbs and phrases whicli denoU; j;?*t'a'?i<it)/i, 
 hiiiilraiicc, oppoHition, etc. 
 
 Quo miiii's=ut CO (hoc) minnft, "that by it the less," or 
 "tliat by tliis means th(! less." Quin=(/i(i (o\d abl. = ^?<o), 
 and nr, the old form of the negative, " tliat by it not." 
 
 130. Qifo minus is generally, qiiin only, used when the 
 verb oi jjrcvcntiiigy etc., is joined with a negative or virtual 
 negative. 
 
 Ww a virtual neijativc we mean viic, ncifrc, " scarcely," 
 " witli difficulty," or questions expecting the answer " no," 
 " none," " nothing." 
 
 131. Quo minus often answers to the English verbal 
 noun in -iug combined with a preposition. 
 
 Naves venio ienehaniur quominus in portum redirent. The 
 
 ships wero prevented by the wind from ret timing into 
 
 harbour. 
 Per fe 4e/it quominus vinceremus. You were tlie cause 
 
 of our not icinn'mg the day. 
 Non recumho quominus te in vincuhi Jucam. I will not 
 
 object to taking you to prison. 
 
 In all these instances a negative result or aim (two 
 notions so often identified in Latin) is expressed by quo- 
 minus. 
 
 108 
 
Ex. XVII.] 
 
 QUOMINUS, QUJN. 
 
 109 
 
 132. Quin is still more coiiiinon than quominus, but is 
 only usiid after uegiitive words and phrases. 
 
 {'i.) Nee inultum afuH quin interjiceremur. And we were not 
 i'ar //'■ I III Ids'nH/ our lives. 
 
 (h.) Nee ('II in. iinquaiti adspr.rif, quin fralncKhiin cornpelJaret. 
 And she never belield him vilhoiif caUiiuj liiui a 
 fnitricide. 
 
 (f.) Vix iiiliilirfi jiof.iiif, quin sa:ra jactret. He could scarcely 
 be prevented from throiviiuj stones. 
 
 ((/.) Nullo luodo fieri poted quin erreii}. It is (juite impos- 
 sible that I am not mistaken, or hut 'Unit I (ini, etc. 
 
 (e.) Fieri vix pntuit quin (e arcumrein. It was scarcely 
 possible for me not to accuse you. 
 
 133. Qain is aloo used as equivalent U) " hut that" or 
 ''ili((f" after vei'bs or phraser of donhtiag, combined with 
 a UL\uative, or virtual negative. 
 
 Qais dnhittd (piin hoc feceris? Who doubts (=no one 
 doubts) hut that {or that) you did this 1 
 
 134. Q II Lit is also used (see 80) as containing not a 
 conjunction but a relative pronoun (qui, quae, quod, and 
 ne). 
 
 Nemo est quin [ = qui non] mtellicfat. Tliere is no one ///// 
 (who does not) perceives, w all the world perceives. 
 
 In all these uses quia is joined with the subjunctive. 
 
 135. l>nt it is also used sometimes as a direct interrogative =fyu/ 
 
 > 
 
 non : 
 
 Quin hoc iiiihi das f Hoxo (or, why) do yoK not {rive me this/ 
 i.e. give it me ; 
 and sometimes as a mere emphatic particle = " nay ;" (/«^Ht^^<^m = 
 " niiireovci'." 
 
 Ill these senses it can be joined with any mood. 
 
 136. (a.) Recuse {quominns) means properly " I protest ngainst," 
 
 (( 
 
 rive reasons against," [re and causa) ; hence it is eipiivitlcnt to nur 
 <i ..^Ar.M " jt is sometimes lused less emphatically as a modal verb 
 
 ol) 
 
 ijcct. 
 
 witli the inlinitivc (42 j ; but the English "I refuse" in the .sense 
 "I am rtlnctant" is generally to be turned by ?io?o, or, if a refusal 
 expressed in words is meant, ijy nego with future in -rus. 
 
110 
 
 QUOMINUS, QUIN. 
 
 [Ex. XVII. 
 
 (6.) Duhito when negatived (see 130) is followrd by qvin, hut it is 
 also useil as a modal verb in the sense of "hesitate," "scruple." 
 Thus we sometimes find not only 
 
 Nee recuKO quominus hoc patiar. And I do not protest against 
 
 suffer! n<,' tills. 
 Nee duhitat <juin hoc factre audeat. And he does not hesitate to 
 
 venture on doing this. 
 
 but— 
 
 Neque hoc pati recuso, nee hoc audere dubitat. 
 
 137. (I.) Words and phrases followed by quin with the subjunc- 
 tive are : — 
 
 (a.) All the world (believes), nemo est quin (credat). 
 
 (b.) Not to doubt, no7i duhitare (quin). 
 
 (c.) There is no doubt, non est dnbium or dubitandum (quin), " it is 
 not doubtful." 
 
 (d.) Who doubts ? quia dubitat (quin) f 
 
 (e.) It cannot be (it is impossible) but that, ^im non potest (quin). 
 
 (/.) I cannot refrain from,^c»«^erare mihi non possum (qui)!). See (;/.) 
 
 (gr.) It cannot be denied, negari non potest (quin). (Hare : the in- 
 finitive is to lie preferred.) 
 
 (Ji.) To be very near ; to be within a very little, minimum nbessej 
 haud mult um ahesse (quin) ; always used impersonally. 
 
 (i.) To leave nothing undone to, nihil praetermittei-e (7/n!//). 
 
 (j.) I cannot but, I cannot help, /"ccrc non possum (quin). 
 
 (k.) To jestrain, to keep back from, refinerc, tenere (after nerjative 
 words, and nrgre, '" with difficulrv," v/.r, "scaicely," etc.). 
 
 (I.) What reason is there against ? quid causae est (^quin) ? 
 
 (II.) Verbs that may be followed by quominus. 
 
 To frighten from, to deter, deferrtre. 
 
 To hinder, prevent, obst ire (dat.), impedlre (ace). (So ojpcere, 
 obsistere, repvgnare, iuterccdere, etc.) 
 
 Prohibeo and veto mostly take the infinitive. (See 120.) 
 
 Verbs of Fearing. 
 
 138. The construction used in Latin nfter verbs of 
 feariivi is (piite dilltMvnt from that wliicli follows verbs of 
 hopiiKj. (Sec 37. > 
 
Ex. XVII.] 
 
 VERBS OF FEARING. 
 
 Ill 
 
 With verbs of fearing, (hat as well as hsi must be 
 translated l>y nt, that not by id} 
 
 Such verbs are timeo, vidua, verwr, etc., and tlie same 
 construction is used with such phrases as 2)cricuhiiii est 
 (ficit), nidus est, etc. 
 
 After such verbs and phrases the English //</</ /t and 
 the verbal sithstdutive are translated by the present or 
 imperfeet subjunctive, with ut or ne. 
 
 Vereor no re mat. I fear thai ho ic'dl come, or, I fear or 
 
 am afraid of liis coming. 
 Vereor ut venial. I fear that he leUl not come, or, I am 
 
 afraid of his not cominij. 
 Veritas sum ne or ut veriiret. I feared that ho would, or 
 
 W(^«/f7 ;/(>/ come. 
 Perkalam erat ne Aos/^js urhem eyp^igmwent. Tliere was a 
 
 danger of the enemy's taking the city. 
 
 139. But where stress is laid on the idea of futurity, 
 or the sense of likdihoud is introduced, tlie subjunctive 
 future, i.e. the future in -rus with sum (114), is used. 
 
 Vereor ut hoc till profuturum sit. I am afraid that this 
 15 ?/o/ /i/.v/y to do you good. 
 
 OJg.—Verbs of fenrincr are sometimes used Vike recuse and duhito as 
 modal verbs in close combination with the infinitive. 
 
 Nee mori timet. And he is not afraid of dying. 
 
 1 The origin of this use of ne and ut after verbs of fearing is nTot quite 
 clear The 7,e is easily explained. "I fear, with a vish or ann that 
 he may not come " = " 1 tear lest he come or be coming (Kiiglish sub- 
 junctive), compare the French jc crains qu'il ne vienne ; and thus the 
 ne introduces a final clause. . 
 
 On the same principle the nt may mean "I am in fear, with the 
 desire or aim that /te ?««// come " = " I am afraid of his not commg, 
 in French— ie crains qu'il^t; ivV«He2>rts. _ 
 
 The vt may also be explahied as used in its interrogative sense ot 
 "how " "as to how," and thus the nt venlat would be a dependent 
 interrogative clause ; " I have fears as to huw he is coming = "that he 
 
 is not coming. , , . ,i i-/f a. • • i 
 
 This explanation is simple, but involves a totally different origin ^M 
 
 construction from that of the ne -clause. 
 
112 
 
 QUOM/NUS, QL7A', ETC. 
 
 [Ex. XVII. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 1. I never beheld him witliout iniploriiig him to come 
 to the aid of his oppressed and sutlering coiintiy ; but J 
 IV'jii- that he will never listen to niy jjrayers. 2. 1 cannot 
 relVaiii iVom blaming those who were ready to hand ()^•('r 
 our lives, liberties, rights, and fortunes to our deadliest 
 enemies. 3. All the world believes tliat you did wroii", 
 and I am afraid that it is quite impossible that all man- 
 kind liave been of one mind with me in a blunder. 4. \\^. 
 pretends tha.t I was the cause of my countrymen not join- 
 ing the cause of every patriot, i). The soldiers couUl not 
 be restrained from hurling their darts into the midst of 
 the mob. G. He promises to leave nothing undone to 
 ])('rsuade your son not to hurry away from the city to the 
 CDimtry.^ 7. We were within a very little of being all 
 kill('(l, some of us pierced by the enemy's darts, others 
 cut off either bv famine or disease. 8. Nothing,- he said, 
 had ever ]>revente(l hinr'^ from defending the freedom and 
 privileges of his countrymen. 1). What circumstiince pre- 
 venti'(l you from keeping your word, and coming to my 
 aid with your army, as you* had promised to do? 10. I 
 will jio longer the^< protest against your desiring to become 
 a king, but I am afraid you will not be able to obtain your 
 desire. 11. What reason is there why he should not be 
 ready to return in his old^ age to the scenes which he left 
 unwillingly in his boyhood?^ 12. Such was his terror^ 
 of Caesar's victory, that he coidd scarcely be re-strained 
 from ciinimitting suicide. 13. He could not, he replied,' 
 help waging war by land and sea. 14. News has beiii 
 brought me, said he, that the general has been struck by 
 a dart, and I fear that he has received a mortal wound. 
 15. Nor was he afraid, he replied, of our being able ta 
 reach Italy in^ safety; tlie^ danger was^"^ of our being lik<'ly 
 
 never to return. 
 
 j.^-. himself, 11, f. 
 
 1 See 9, b. 2 See 33. 
 » 63. • See 26. ^ 32, h. 
 
 * Lit., that {ille) was the danger, etc. 
 "* Inf. mood, dependent on '"he replied." 
 
 ^ See 67, Obs. 
 •See 61. 
 
EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 COMMANDS AND PROHIBITIONS. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 140. The imperative mood is used freely in Latin, as in 
 En<ilish, in both coniraands and entreaties, in the second 
 person singular and plural. 
 
 Ad me veni. Come to me. Audita ^ )ioc. Hear this. 
 
 141. But, especially in the singular, where one person, 
 an equal, is addressed, there are many substitutes for so 
 pereui[)tory a mode of speaking. A short compound sen- 
 tence containing either a subordinate or a co-ordinate 
 clause is substituted for the siniph^. command. 
 
 Thus : for scrihe, scribas velim, " I would have you write" 
 (126), is often used; or in, quaeso, ad me scribe, or scribe 
 sis (lor si vis) : or again, for ad me veni, fac, or cura ut, 
 ad me vfnias,"he sure to come:" so with the plural, vos, 
 oro et obsecro, attendite. 
 
 Qjjs. The subjunctive is used for the imperative in the second person 
 
 sill' ul'ar ; but only where no definite person is addressed, but a 
 geneial niuxini given. 
 
 Poatremns loquaris : primus taceas. Be (j/ow, or a man should 
 be) the last to speak, the first to be silent. 
 
 ' Theie is also a mure emphatic form, venito, renitote, which is called 
 the jutare imperative ; it is used in both the second and third persons, 
 and is called tuture from its very commou use in lares and wHIh which 
 cunccrii tlie future, and from its often forming the apodosis to a future 
 perfect clause: cum ejo duero, turn vos respondetote, when I liave 
 spoken, then, atid i>of iHore, do you reply. But it is used also for mere 
 emphasis • noldolc, scUote, are often met with. 
 
114 COMMANDS AND PnoniRITTONS, [Ex. XVIII. 
 
 142. In negative commands, or prohibitions, tlio simple 
 im|)i'i'ativo is littlu iiseil. Such ])lir;»se3 as ilc sir^vi, magmt 
 siiccr;Ji>s (Akx. vi.) (' 1)(> not wrotli, iniglity priestess"), are 
 almost entirely conlined to ])oetry. 
 
 In E:i.L,'H.sli also, tliongh in older En^rlisli, and in ])octrv, we find 
 con;t'nr.ly " <f > not," " fear n it," etc., yet we fj'neniily sll^stitII^e the 
 in:i liiive wi^li an auxiliary verb in the imperative : do not j^'o, do not 
 tViir. 
 
 In Latin, in addressing; a sinc^le ]ierson familiarly, nc is 
 often used with \.\\q perfect subjnnetive, 
 
 Ne (I'lliifdirris, do not hesitate ; ///. do not (allow yourself 
 to) lidre liesitated, or beware against hariii/f hesitated. 
 So — yih'd (/I'deris, give nothing. 
 
 The prf>^rui subjunctive is not used in s])enkin;:( to a 
 person; iir miilta discus^^scd midtiDii is a general maxim. 
 (See 141, Obs.) 
 
 
 143. r»ut by far the more common mode of forbidding 
 or deprecating is by a i)eriphrasis ; using, as we do in ' du 
 not do this,' tiuo verbs. 
 
 Noli, holite, nolitote, hoc faccre, or cave, cavete (ne) 
 il/ud Jhcins, facintis. 
 
 The ne is often omitted with the second person. ('See 126.) 
 
 144. For the first and third persons (except in formal 
 documents, see 140, note) Latin employs the subjunctive 
 mood in a jussive sense to express c.rhortatiou, wish, or 
 command, and uses ne to prohibit or deiu'ecate. 
 
 MorlxmwY, let us die ; pereni, mai/ he jierish ; abcat, let him 
 go ; ne sim salvus, mni/ no good befall nie ; ne exeat 
 iirbe, let him not go out of the city. In older English 
 and in poetry we have "/?/?vt we to survey," "hallowed 
 be thy name." 
 
 145. " Nor," " or," " and not," with prohibitions is 
 generally neve or ncu, but ncque is also used. 
 
 Hoc facJto ; illud nefeceris, jieve dixeris. Do this; do not 
 
 do 0/" say that. 
 Seqitere, neque retrospex^ris. Follow ami do not look 
 
 V^hind. 
 
Ex. xvin.] 
 
 THE JMPEKA TIVE MOOD. 
 
 115 
 
 146. There is also a common use of such pi i rases as viiUr'.t, 
 videriht, in the sense of "you, tl>ey, must look to t,'' when tiio 
 responsibility of givinj,' an opinion is declined <»r postitoiied. 
 
 De hac re tu videris, or videiint sapuiitiorc^. I leave tlii.s to 
 you, or to wiser men ; do \ ou, or let wisir men, dicide. 
 
 This is a future perfect indicative, as in the first person ruA'ro is 
 used. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 1. Do not then lose {diifj) such an opportunity iis^ 
 this, but nilher let us, uudt;r your leaileroiii[), crush tli<' 
 eternal eneuiies of our country. 2. l)o not, my coiiiilry- 
 nicn, count the foes who are threatening you with mas- 
 sacre and slavery; let them rather meet tlie same lot 
 which they are preparing for us. 3. I'anhjn (■>///./.) this 
 fault of nnne; and be sure you remember that 1, who 
 have done wrong to-day, have rei)eat(;dly brought you 
 help before. 4. Let us then refuse to be slaves, and liiive 
 the courage not only to become free ourselves, but to assert 
 our country's freedom also. 5. Ami thei'elore- do not 
 object to=^ endure everything in behalf of your sullering 
 coiintry and your exiled friends. 6. And therefore,- my 
 countrymen, do not believe that I, wlio have so often led 
 you to tlie field of battle, am afraid to-day of fortune 
 abandoning me. 7. Let us be the same in tlie held (of 
 battle) as* we have ever been; as^ to the issue of the 
 battle let the gods deci(h\ 
 
 .m: 
 
 •«■ Q\ < />■-■. 
 
 * See C-1. 
 
 - .See 78. 
 
 ' Prep, de with ahl. 
 
 See 136. 
 
 1 
 
EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 REMARKS ON MOODS: THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 USED INDEPENDENTLY. 
 
 147. I>y a Mood'^ we mean a special form assumcrl l)v 
 tlie Vcrl* ill order to mark some speciiil manner Oinxhis) 
 in wliicli that connexion between a subject and predicate 
 which every verb implies is viewed by tlie si)eak('r. 
 (Intr. 1 1, and see note.) 
 
 ^ In the -words of an old grammarian (Priscian) inO'/l sunt ifin-r.stic 
 inclinutioiu's (muni (iziovenients, variations, swayings, of tlie hinnan 
 mind) ([lut.-i raria const' /a it ur dedinatio lintlexion, or form). In some 
 l.inguagc's, cspi'i-ially those ■which liave no written literature, the 
 number of niood.j is exceedingly large, dilferent modilieations of the 
 form of the verb being used to represent many dillerent niootls, or 
 frames, or attitudes, of the mind of the speaker. 'J'hus, i'l addition to 
 thoSu' f(.irms wliich denote lime (tenses), we lind separati^ forms or moods 
 to cx))iess crr/it'iif.//, doiiht, iu'/iuri/, confiiiijoici/, tii'jdtion, connnainl, 
 dc.ihr, etc. P)ut i:i the languages of highly civilised nations economy 
 is practised in tlie use of such varied forms ; the intelligence of the 
 hearer or n^ader is relied on, and a single form (as with the case- 
 inllcxions of nouns) is used to represent various ideas more or less 
 related to each other. In (ireek the two iileas of a command and a 
 Avisli as applieil to a third person are expressed, by two moods, dnoXeaOoi), 
 airuX^LTo ; J^atin is content with one — jiercaf. Both agree with English 
 in having no mood to distinguish a simple question from a simple 
 statement. In modern English prose the subjunctive mood, so exceed- 
 ingly coninion in Latin, hardly exists as a true mood, i.e. a separate 
 ami (list. net fmui of the verb. We I'etain its use occasionally as a 
 contingent moud after thowjh and if, "though he./'r///, " " if it he. so ;" 
 but as a rule we either disregard those slighter, though real, shades of 
 meaning wliich call for the subjunctive in Latin (as often in (Jerman 
 and French), and are content with the indicative, or, if the difTerence is 
 too great to be disregarded, we substitute for a true mood a emnbination 
 of an auxiliary or modal verb with the infinitive mood — ''lit him go," 
 " if he ?/•!/•( to come," " I looii/d not do this," — exactly as we substitute a 
 preposition with a noun for the case-inflexiona of nouns. 
 
 As rcg;irds therefore the use of the Latin sul)junctive, the usage of 
 English w.ll be a most inadequate guide. It would, for instance, never 
 leaci us to susjiect the necessity of such a mood in such sentences as 
 "he was so injured that he di<'d," "it happened that he xrns absent," 
 " I feir th it you are deceiving me," "tell me why j'ou did this," "he 
 said that the man Avho did this should die," "he is one who vi I never 
 fail to do his duty ; " yet these arc among the most obvious constructions 
 in which the use of the subjunctive is required in Latin, 
 
 m 
 
Ex. XIX.] SUliJUXCTIVR USED INDEPENDENT!, v. 117 
 
 i. Thus the Indicative mood is so caUcd bec.iuso it simply points 
 out (i}i(lk(tt) u conuexiou or agreement between a sulijcit ;in(l 
 predicatq. In itself it does notliin<,' more tlian this, and is (juite 
 neutral and colourless, so to speak ; but it is capable of ItciiiLT joined 
 with other words wliieh may ^'leatiy tpialify the meaning Nsliich the 
 verb itself conveys. Tims cntet, "he is well ;" fortasse vuht, "jmt- 
 haps he is well" (uncertainty) ; si raltt, " (/'he is well" (continLrfiKy) ; 
 non valet, " he is xot well" (denial) ; and the addition of a piirticlc in 
 Latin, oi an inversion of the ordt-r in English, or rvcn the nicic tone 
 in whiih the verb is pronounced, may without any alteration of its 
 form (for there is no interrogative m<(i(l in either Latin or Knglishi 
 enable it to :i>l< a (piestion, that is, to suggest instead of stating the 
 agreement between the two essential elements of every .sentence, the 
 subject and the i)redicate. (Intr. f»l, (!2.j Vakt ? rnhfuv! "he is 
 well?" "is hcwellT' 
 
 ii. The Imperative mood is a form assumed by the verb to murk 
 that the agieement between the subject and predicate is not stalnl ov 
 HiKjijested l)Ut conniHinded or willed.' nvde, (i\nlde, "dare thou," 
 "dare ye." 
 
 iii. The difference between these two moods is clear ; and it has 
 already (94, note 1) been explained that the Infinitive mood is lanlly 
 in the strict sense a mood at all, being properlv the verb used as a 
 substantive, as, sedere, "the act of sitting ;" it is however very widely 
 used in Latin as the mood of indirect assertion. (See 31.) 
 
 iv. The Subjunctive is the mood which gives rise to the greatest 
 difficulty in the study of Latin. Its use in that language is constant 
 and manifold, while it hardly exists in modern lOnglish (see note, 
 p. 116). Nor will its name (tnodus subjunctivus or conjunctivus) be a 
 sufticient guide, for though so called on account of its being found 
 principally in subordinate clauses, yet such clausis often reipiiie the 
 use of the indicative, ;ir..i the use of the subjunctive, as will be 
 shown shortly, is by no means confined to them. 
 
 It perhaps was originally used as a separate form in order to add, 
 to the sim[)le statement nuide by the indicative, s-ome further idea of 
 luircr'nintji or co)itl.)ir/i:iicy. Hence its use in Latin to express, not a 
 fact which we indirate, but something which we regard rather as a 
 mere concci)tion of the mind, as that which we purpose or wish to be 
 a fact, or which we refer to as the result of another fact, or as stated 
 on other authority than our own ; and in this way it is used in Latin 
 in a large number of sentences in which the use of any special mood 
 would never occur to any one who was acquainted only with English. 
 
 *^* These remarks will illustrate the term " modal verb'' used above 
 (42), and will be of use to those who wish to understand the meaning 
 of the term Mood ; but the following Exercise will be contined to the 
 points stated in 148-163. 
 
 148. The Latin subjunctive is mainly used in certain 
 classes of subordinate or subjoined clatises : hence its nam.8 
 
! I 
 
 I ( 
 
 I; 
 
 m 
 Is:;; 
 
 I' 
 
 !!|i 1 
 
 iij) wnycxcnvr. ised /xnnrr.x/^rxjrv. [Ex. xix. 
 
 {siiJJinirtlrus). But it is also used l)otli in simpln seiitpiices, 
 and ill tliu main clausu of a cnni})ound sentence, citln'r 
 t(j niiike a sfntnurnl {»(.), or to ask a qucstiun (h.), or to 
 exj)re^s a command or ihairc (c). 
 
 149. ('/.) The subjunctive makes a statement: but it 
 
 diw's this in a liesiialin,^ and uneeitjiin manner ; in wliat 
 is sometinici eidlcd the " jiotcnlial" inond, or moilas 
 >hihi/(i/irtis, i'ovwH'd in Kn.ulish hv the auxiliaries " luuy/* 
 ^'mi-ht," "would," "could," "should." 
 
 it is thus used in the present, perfect, and imperfect 
 tenses: 
 
 i. In the first person: — 
 
 flor. iJlrcre anmw. Tliia I vnuhl venture to say. 
 
 I'll', crci/ido'hn. I <'»iii. scarce believe. 
 
 Hoc (iJJiriiKii'i'nm. This I icoidd or may assert. 
 
 It a])|)i'ars as a ])olite form (Gk. OtXoifi av), in vellm, 
 nolun, J!»iiied, when the wish applies to nnother ])erson, 
 not wiih the infinitive, but with anotiier subjunctive 
 without nt. 
 
 / V/ini <((hk. I wish, or could wish, you tcei'e here (pros.). 
 / "el /em ^fr/esses. I could have wished you had been here 
 
 (used of cont'mums time in tho past, or a vain wish in 
 
 the present). 
 
 IT x- • 7- I I wish you would ) do this, or please do 
 Hoc facms vciim. < j i^ , > ,, . /o i / i \ 
 
 •^ I I Avould have you f this. (See 141.) 
 
 Vellcm f?*/fnisses. 1 could have wished you had been 
 
 there (once for all). 
 
 ii. In the second person: — 
 
 Cirda^, crederes. You (that is anij one, no definite person) 
 would believe, would have believed. (This is a 
 common way of expressing "it seems, seemed as 
 though ".) 
 
 iii. In the third person: — 
 
 Dicat ("/' dixerit) aJiquis or quispiam. Some one Tnay say, 
 i.e. " may perhaps say." 
 
 In all these cases we may supply a suppressed 
 condition, — " if I were allowed," " if you should ask me," 
 and the like. 
 
Ex. xix.) sriiyu.wTiVE vsed i\hi:iu:M>i:\'ii v. iiii 
 
 150. (A.) The subjunctive also asks a question. 
 
 (in\n cri't/iii ] \\'lio \V(iul<l liclifvc ( (a viifiial iu'.^:itiv('.) 
 JJdc lit (I'lrcic iiii(lviiii] Would }<'U (liuo to .siiy tliis ] 
 (iistoiiisliiiiciit.) 
 
 So when ])(r|ilc.\ity or licsitatioii is iiii|ili((l {tiioilns 
 (/, /ihirafinis, ]iiol»aMy an iiitoiroj^ativo I'onn oT tlic jussiv(! 
 
 llM', 151). 
 
 (Jiiid fiicliwii 1 W hat am I to ih)] 
 
 (Jiiid J'ii(i'H't I A\'liat "svas he to do? 
 Note lli.it till St" iirc '' rlictoriciil (|Ut stilus," i.i\ tlicy art' init asked 
 I'di' iiil'nriiiiitiiiii ; lilt citlirr iiniily a iicjiativc answer, " im nriewill 
 luiicve," and are virl iial neL^•lt ives (see 130,', r)r are askeil in mere doalit 
 (ir 1 ciiilexity, ini|il_viiijf of'ti n, " 1 liave," or " lie liad, no resoaree." 
 
 11' the ([iicstioii wcic a>l<('d lor inroriiiat ion, the latin 
 would he qi'id 7iii/il faciendum ost? qi<ul<l racicnduni I'liit? 
 
 151. ('■) The subjunctive also is largely used in a jussive 
 
 sense, to ('Xjirc-s a n'lsli or dmire. It is thus used with 
 or uithout nHiiiiiii ; the neoative ^visll is expressed hy iic. 
 (Jimd j'>l ht'iif vortant ! And may tho (lods hriiig this to 
 
 a ;4()od issue I 
 Qiiiid utinam ni^ faciatis ! And may you noNcr do this ! 
 Ne li'ir (Jhitlits cunetennu'. Let us not linger any longer 
 here. 
 (See 144.) (For ve credideris, ^^ do not helieve ; " ((//m//, " let liiin 
 j,'o," .see 142 and 144.) 
 
 1 52. Vlhuna gan he also used, like Vi Hon, uilli the i)ast : Vliiiam 
 hoc I'ecerit ! "]\lay lie have done this !" J-lat it ;^renerally, as is natural 
 with w ishes almut the ]tast, ex|»iesses •i\,rain. wish, and is so \\&in\ with 
 the inipert'. and iihiiierf. sulijunctive. 
 
 I' ti ittnii iidrxAif^ "would he Jnid been jtresent," conteiiiiioraiieoiisly 
 with some event in ] ast time ; or, eontiiiuously and extendinj^ 
 (often) up to the pH'sent moment, *' would he u; ir jiresei t."' 
 
 Vfi)iiiiii udfvisKcf, "would he had heeii jirest'Ht'' (onee for all), 
 
 153. It is important to rememher tliat Latin often 
 uses the indieiiMve where in Knolish \ve use the compound 
 potential or suhjunctive mood. 
 
 LoiKjinn est. It viiuld I"' tedious, 
 
 Sti/iii.'^, or, tiif'Hii.^ est, fuit. It voidd he, inudd Imre heen, 
 
 hetter. 
 Qai.<i2iii.'<, fiiiiciDKpic cs. AMioever thou be (suhj.). 
 
120 StfirfVXC-nVE rsl'.n INDErEXDEXTt.Y. [Ex. XIX. 
 
 S(i also, \\\(\ indiciitivc. is usitd witli iiiodul verba, 
 posfiinn, ilrhro, vXc. 
 
 PossiMii hoc furor. I rnii^ht do this. 
 I'otui lior fiireir. I ini;;}it liiivi! doiio tliis. 
 Hoc dcliiiisti fiian'e. Voii should (or ou<^dit to) have; 
 d(»n(; this. 
 
 TIk; iMissiltility or duty is (fssninl l)y tlic iiidicutivo ; 
 though it is implied ut the same tiiiu; that the adiou 
 expressed l)y the verh iu thi; iidiuitive did not take phiee. 
 
 Ohs. — In FiD^hsli, ill spt'iikin^' of past thiic we cMHi.stantly say, " It 
 would have ht'cn hcttiT to liavi; done this," wIuti' wc hIhiiiM more 
 correctly say, "to do this." The present iutinitivo is used in Latin : 
 meliuH I'uit hoc facere. 
 
 It 
 
 Kt'crnsr 19. 
 
 1. This at least I would venture to say, that as^ I was 
 the first to uri^e you to undertaki! tiiis work, so' I j)romis(' 
 to be the hist to ailvise you to abau<h»ii the undertakinn. 
 2. What was I to (h» { said he, what to say ? who would 
 eare to bhime m<! because I refused to listen to sueh- 
 abandoned men i '.i. I would neithej- deny nor assert 
 that he had looked forward to all this (/>/.}, but he should 
 have; provided against tin; ('(Mintry beinu overwhelmed by 
 such disast(!rs. 4. On that day m\ broiher was reluctantly 
 al)sent from the batth* at vour sun^estion ; would that lie 
 
 had 1 
 
 )een' 
 
 tl 
 
 lei'e 
 
 For it would hav(* been better to have 
 
 fallen on the lield than to hav(^ submitted to such dis- 
 
 lonour. 
 
 5, In return'* then for such acts of kindness 1 
 
 would liave you not only feel but also show your gratitude 
 G. I could have wished tliat ^■ou had sent nu' the best- 
 
 sold 
 
 lers 
 
 that 
 
 'Oil 
 
 had 
 
 wnli \<iu. 
 
 -» rty 
 
 rh 
 
 S( ) 
 
 Idiers stood 
 
 (inipcrf.) drawn \\\) in line, ea^^er for the li,uht,*' with' eyes 
 fixed on the foe, clamoiuin^' for the signal; it seemed as 
 thonujli they were waitino- for a bancpiet. 8. 1 have con- 
 sulted, as*^ 1 ought to have done, your {/>/.) intcjrests rather 
 than my own; may you not ever impute this to me as a 
 fault ! 
 
 as 
 
 . ao, et . . . et. " Sue 88. 
 
 * pro, abl. * See 69. 
 
 ^ Aid. al)8., " their eyes being fixed." 
 
 " I'se (((/sum. 149, i. 
 « (ierund, 99. 
 " See 67, (>!>■<. 
 
navo 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 I. Direct (Single and Disjunctive). 
 
 154. liit(M'rMu'!itiv(> s<'iit«MU'«»s iiiny lie tliviil<;(l into two 
 cliisscs, 1 )ii('('t ami Indirect. 
 
 liv the direct question wi; iiicaii a (nicstion properly so 
 called, siich as is niarke(l l»y the interrogative sign in 
 English : " Is lie gon<^?" " Are you \\v\\ V 
 
 These senttuiees dilTer from slulrntniU and cmimuinJs, 
 inasmuch as the connexion helwcicn the suhject and 
 tiie predicate) is not stated, or ihsini/, lait <»idy siii/f/t's/cd. 
 
 OVn'. — As thero is no iiittMT(»;;:itiv(' inoixl in t'itlit'r liutin or En^fhsh, 
 in direct (jut'stions other tlian those rlii'torirnl (juestioiis already (150) 
 nieiitionodj tlie indicative mood Is used, unless for some special 
 reason. 
 
 155. In Enj,dish we mark a question t)y the order of tlie words, 
 and snnictinies by the insertion of an atixiliarv verb. Compare "aSViw 
 ye /" ''/.s- he well ?' " I>iil von see r " ll'l'll he come /" with "Ye 
 snw ;" " He is well ;" " Yoii saw ;" " He will come ;" and in French 
 "Vli-t-il?" with"Il va." 
 
 1)111 ill Latin, where the order of the words would luave 
 no such elfect (Intr. 87), (questions are usually asked liy 
 the iiiterroiffitive j)artieles -7i? (enclitic, Intr. i)S, note), imm, 
 III run), an, or by interrogative i^ronouns or pronominal 
 
 iiil rrrhs. 
 
 Tiiere is sometimes no definite word which marks that the speaker 
 is putt Jul; a 'luestion. The tone, manner, and ifesture of the speaker 
 su[)[)ly what in ordinary lanifuai^e is expressed by certain words. 
 
 (rt.) -»^ is used in fpiesiions that ask simply for infor- 
 mation, and to which the answer may he either "yes" or 
 
 " no." 
 
 S(:rib}t)ie Cains? Is Caius writin,2;? (The ])or.>nt) who 
 asks tht^ qiiostion does not expect one .aiiswci more 
 than another.) 
 
 m 
 
122 
 
 IN'I'KNROCA 77]'/-: SKA'TKATES. 
 
 [Ex. XX. 
 
 Pi;ii 
 
 (A.) Nuni^ expects the answer " no." 
 
 Num jnitas? Do you funcy 1 = Surely you don't fancy ] 
 (expected answer " no ".) 
 
 {(•.) i\"c>7mc expects tlio answer "yes." 
 
 Niiiiii(( ]mf((s? Don't you fancy 1 = Surely you do famy 1 
 (ox])ected answer "yes".) 
 
 156. JVe is always attached to the eni])hatic word. 
 Praetorenine (irnisas / /,s // a PniefDr whom you are 
 
 accusing? 
 Meiu' fiKjli^ ? h if from me that you are fl}'ing 1 
 Here, as often, tlie Ki)<j;]is]i expresses eiiijiliiisis l>y a sejiarite fluii-c, 
 of which the einpliatic word is the predicate, and "it" tlie sulijrct ; 
 the rest of the sentence being thrown into an adjectival chu' ;e ex- 
 planatory of " it.'' 
 
 157. Other interronative woids are either (i.) Pronouns, 
 or (ii.) Interrogative r^rtieles. 
 
 Notice tliat ])r<)n<tnns ai-e used either as sulistantives or as adjec- 
 tives, ij'. as attacheci to substantives. 
 Quid /(('if ? What lias lie done ? 
 
 Quod /(u'i?n/s advii^^if f What crime has he committed ? 
 Also that for interroijative particles'- a ])hrase or coniliination of 
 words is often substituted : thus qucmadmodum'^ "in what nianni r ?" 
 = (/(ti.<'"how?" 
 
 The following is a list of Interrogative Pronouns and 
 Particles : — 
 
 (i.) Pronouns — 
 
 QhI.s? qiii-iiirnii? quid? quidmnn? who ^ whal ? 
 QiKintum ? hc-w much ? (followed hy '/fiiifiir, 
 
 qiui n^inu tein})oris ? how much time ?) 
 Qui? what? Quiit? how numy ? VUr? whiihof 
 
 the two ? 
 Quiili^ ? of what kind ? 
 Qitiiutus? how gr(>at ? 
 Quut ? how many :' 
 
 ^ Nmn is jiroperly " now " {iixiic) : conipare fiDii and tni/r. 
 
 -These jiarticles are in fact (uh-: riis, inasmuch as they (jiudify tlie 
 sense in wliioh the verl) is usid, forming' a t-nl).stitute for an iiiteiro- 
 gative mood (see 147, iiofr i.) ; wliiu u.-cd to connect a dc[cn(biit with 
 a iiriiiei]ial chinse they assume the jiature of coiijtnicfion.^, (See Intr, 
 
Ex. XX.] J).K/-C7- (.'./.\(/A/-. ./ /) />.. :, I .\c/n A). 
 
 123 
 
 I 
 
 " 
 
 Pkonouns — continui'iL 
 
 Qnotn.s? one ol' liow niMiiy? (answer " tliird," 
 
 " fourtli," etc.) 
 Knm qni.'^, qua, qind (subst.) ? yunn qui, quae, quod 
 
 (adj.) ? irqUiH ? any ? 
 
 (ii.) rAUTICLES — 
 
 Ubi? where? Undc f whence? Quo? wliither? ^ 
 Cur ^ qihurV-' qianiiohrnii .^^ why ^ wherefore? 
 Qid^ how? (often in the jihrase qidJU id!) 
 Quahi ^ how? (witli adj. and adv.) 
 Qiuaiiudo! ijiiniiiidiiuidiDiiV' how? in what manner? 
 Quant Hin ^. qiandtqycn' ? liow niucli ? 
 QiKiialn! wlien ? (never qi/i'in.) Q/iofirsl how ol'ten? 
 Qnamdiu? qiioii.^qKc ? liowlonu? how far? 
 Cur noli? qifwJ wliy not ? liownot? 
 (fhs.—The adverb ((Duhm (lit. "at last") is (.ften joined with 
 intcirofratives in the sense of "tell nie," " (who) in the world," "1 
 ask/' etc. 
 
 Quonsque tandem. To what point, I asJ: ? 
 Quae, tandem causa. What jtonsiJile eau.se ? 
 
 Disjunctive Questions. 
 
 158. A direct question may he i)ut in anotlier form. 
 In En.iilish two or more alternative questions may he 
 com])ined by the disjunctive conjunction or (see Intr. DC)) 
 so that an atfirniative answer to the one negatives the 
 other or others. 
 
 "Are you going to Germany, or (are you goir'g) to Italy, 
 or to Frai.ce I " 
 These are called altcrnaf'ur, or disjinailvr, or dovhir 
 questions. 
 
 We have here two or more simple sentences jouicd toirether by 
 co-or(Jinnti<ni. (See Intr. 74, 7").) 
 
 In En,L[' sh th" tiist (pieslion has no interm-ative particle (irli,'fi,ir 
 bein^f olisoUte in dinrt (pu-stions^ the sectmd and any turtluT are 
 intrcKluecd by " or," whieh iiowever is sometimes, where the verb is 
 siipjtrcssed, confined to the last. 
 
 "Dill you mean me, or think of yourself, or refer to some one else ?" 
 
 "Did ytiu mean me, him, or yourself?" 
 
 * Words with an asterisk are mostly contined to iinHrx-t (juestions. 
 
f^f 
 
 
 124 
 
 IXri'.RROCAIIVE SEXrr.NCES. 
 
 i'l 
 
 [Ex. XX. 
 
 159. Ill Latin tlio interrogative nature of the first 
 (|n('sti(ni will Ix' indicated ])y utru.m, oi- the appended 
 
 "-//',•" in IIk' .second, (ir any further (piestion, the " e/' " 
 will 1m' translated liy itn, never by <iut or irl, 
 
 rti'uin Jmslcin, an dumii, an msniff ipsus cii/fKifis .^ T.s it the 
 (MH'iny, "/■ your i^icneral, "/* yoursches that you l)lanu'? 
 
 >V/v/nc ^',s7/.s', an Hhcri / Arc you shivcs m' IVccnicn ? 
 
 Ihit in sucli questions there is iVe([uently, as in Eni^lisli, 
 no iiifcrrouative ])arliclc in the iirst ([Uestion, and or is 
 translated hy (//i, or (more raridy l»y) tlie enclitic -)ie. 
 
 Iff rum vliVi^ti, an niirlllatii / Hid you sec the master or 
 
 the maid ? 
 IIni\ ilhiihw fci-hf'i ? Did you (h) this or tliat] 
 
 " (>/• Udt !" ill a direct (picstion should he translated l)y 
 (Uh inni / 
 
 Irihii', an ni>n ? Did lie go, or not ? 
 
 160. Th(> forms for these douhle (piestions are. — 
 
 1. lit rum , .... <i II, (fii noii I 
 
 2. -iir (iiii 
 
 '?>. 
 
 11 
 
 nnc ? 
 
 (The line moans tliat the Iirst |i;irtii'li' is omitted,) 
 
 .\'iiiii. is occasionally use(l for iitnun where a negative 
 answer is expected. 
 
 161. .1*^ is sninotitncs fdinid hcfove a sninl-i question, liiu tliere 
 is jilways an lUijixin, or saj)i)ression of a \nx ' •ii'-: qiu'stioii. so tliat mi 
 means " nr is it that /"' "can it he tliat /" -i'l uence generally expects 
 the answer '* no." 
 
 An scrvi esse ruUis ? Or is it tliat you wish to bo slaves { 
 
 Answers to Questions. 
 
 162. The alliniiative and negative answer is rarely 
 given in Latin so simply as l»y the English "yes "and 
 '"no." 
 
 Sometimes " yes " may be turned by rflamy ita rcro ; and 
 "no'" by mini lite, ini/innfiiKiii, iicii. 
 
 P)ut more often sdine eniphat ic woi'd is rejieated from tlie 
 interrogative seiiti'iice ; such a iiuestion as (hiHiic live iiii/ii ! 
 would lie answered Ity ifo ; (hi rrr(\ ac Jihniter quiilem 
 
Ex. :: 
 
 I iKiA- 1 [Sjm;/./-: .i\/) nisyuNCTiVF^. 
 
 (^— •• \('s "'): or liy iiniiiiiK' tyo t/i'i'i/cni (="110"), imicli 
 more ot'tcn than liy (/l(i//i,nv iniiiiinc .siiii|ily, 
 
 I'lxnc Jmc f((rrn' / vcllc sr, nolle sc, ri>^j>iniiVit. Ai'f you 
 
 ready to do this] he aiiswcrcd " //r.s'," " //"." 
 Niuii, hoc ftrisli/ Have you then done this] Xii/'it. 
 He answers "no." Frri, inquU. He answer.s "yes." 
 
 Sometimes ait is used as opposed to najat. 
 
 Emrisc 20. 
 
 1. Is it possible for a ti'uc patriot to refuse to obey the 
 law^ ? 2. Where, said he, did you come from, and whither 
 and wlien do you inteml' to start henee? 3. Can we ladp 
 feai'in^^tliat your brother will go away into exile with reluc- 
 tance ? 4. What c'inie, what enormity, has my client'^ 
 connnitted, wliat falsehood has he told, what, in short, lias 
 lie either said or done that you, gentlemen of the jury, 
 should 1)(^ ready to inllict on liini either death or exile by 
 your verdict? f). Will any cnt^ venture to assei't that he 
 was comlenmed in his absencii in order to jirevent his 
 ])leading his cause at honu^., or imprt'ssing the jury hy his 
 elo(pience ? G. Was it by force of arms, or by judgment, 
 courage, and good sense, that Home was able to dictate 
 terms to the rest of the world ? 7. l)oes it seem' to you 
 that deatli is an eternal sleep, or the b(>ginning of another 
 lil'e^ S. Are vou I'cady to show yourseh'cs men of 
 courage, such as the country looks for in such a crisis as 
 this ? you ;uiswt>r " yes "; or ai't; you ceasing to wish to be 
 called JJoman se)ldiers ? " no,'' you all rei»ly. ".». Ho you 
 believe that the character of your countrymen is altciing 
 for the better, or I'or the worse? 10. Whom am I to 
 defend? whom am 1 ti> accuse? how much longer shall I 
 jiretend to he in douht ^ was it (156) by accident or de>iun 
 that this murder was committed^ 11. What am 1 lo 
 believe? that the emnny or that our men won the day 
 yesterday? Do not tell more falsehoods on suclr' an 
 im))ortant question. 12, Was he not a prophet of such a 
 kind that no oiu' ever believed'' him ? 
 
 ■ r'l.^ 
 
 • Kx. ix. p. 7-, noti' '2. ' Fiit. in 
 
 " Sii!i])ly /'/'•. tliis man //// nh : ni'Vrr rlii iis. * Sec 43. 
 '■ I'si' pt'rf., not iinpc-rf. : the /act is summed up. (Sci' 113.) 
 
 (14, r ) 
 •'' 88. 
 
EXERCISE XXT. 
 
 .M 
 % 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES-Co/7f/>?we</, 
 
 II. Dependent or Indirect. 
 
 163. Tlio dependent question is a siibordinoic clause 
 introdncHMl ])y an interrogative word (cither a ])ronoun or 
 conjnnetion), and connected by that interrogative word 
 witii tlie main clause. 
 
 Q}u,s es? who are you ? oir hoc jec.ian ? why liave you done this ? 
 are direct (jiiestioiis, and eacli is a simple sentence. 
 
 But ro^fo 7///.S' .siV, I (isk who he is ; die uiihi car hoc fcrerls, tell me 
 why you did this, are two eoiiH)()und sentences. Neitlier tdkeit ^(.s- a 
 whole is a nuestioii : the first is n tdfeiiient, the seconii a roitunaiiil ; Imt 
 each contidiix :in indirect ([uestion, i.e. a suhordinate suhsta?uivid 
 chiuse, aiisweiiii;^^ to ;in accusative case after rogo and die, introchiced 
 in the one cas" hy tiic interrogative pronoun quis, in the other by the 
 interrotfativt' conjunction cur. 
 
 164. The Latin verb in such subordinate clauses is 
 invariably in the subjunctive. It is of tlie utmost import- 
 ance to remember this, as tlie subjunctive mood is no 
 longer used in such chiuses in Englisli. 
 
 Compare the English and Latin moods in— 
 
 Quis euiii, ocddxi 1 \\\\o killed him 1 
 
 Qnis eujH occltlerit, qintcro. I ask who hilled him. 
 
 165. The (lc})endent interrogative clause is recognised 
 by an intcnogative word introducing it (see list in 157); 
 liiit the principal verb or clause on wliicb it dejtends 
 need not be at all of an interrogative character. 
 
 (Jniil fdcieiidina .s'<7 moneo mon('bo([U('. I inini and u-ill 
 
 mini you Avliat you ou<i;]it to do. 
 (JiKiin/i) cssif rcditavKS mctui. I hud fcurs as to when he 
 
 would return. 
 Cur h'li'r ft'Cirii miror. I v'iDider why he did this. 
 
 Tlie words in tlie Latin niurkcd in italics are intcrro'/aflre clauses ; 
 for they iirc cniinccted with the main clause by the iuterroizativc 
 pronoun ijiil I iind by tlie intci rot^iitive adverbs, used licre as coii- 
 jurietioiis. r/'f(// /'I imil riir; but neither /wi^^'f), tiu'fiiOj uny viiror avu 
 vcibs (if <<.-!. niij. 
 1-0 
 
Ex. XXI.] 
 
 DEPENDEM' OR IXPIRECI'. 
 
 1*27 
 
 166. Thi's the dc|K'U(leut ([ucstiou iiiiiy follow not only 
 a wide I'iUigo of vctIks hut also inaiiy plirast's, such as 
 iiicci'tnni est ; uinrdildk est; (lifjlcilc didK est (it is hard to 
 say); iiui'jni rejcrt (it is of great consiM^ucuce), and many 
 others, 
 
 167. A dei)eiideiit question in English is constantly 
 introduced hy the conjunclions " if and " wliether;" hut 
 .Si and s'lve, are never used in Latin to introduce an inter- 
 rogalive clause. 
 
 " If" an<l " whether" are represented in a single indirect 
 (question hy -nc and nv.m, occasionally hy itonnc. 
 
 Xniii ill till" i ltd i lid question does not, as in the (linct. imply the 
 answer "no"' (but noiine still suii'ifests an attirniative answer. 
 
 EiMiiitii(iii(Ji(s iiinirsirit siilnisnv esset cHj't'i-is. E[iaininondas 
 
 asktMl ir/it'//irr his shield ir((s .safe. 
 Vic iiil/ii uuui eaih'iii iiiiae ajo sentias. Tell uie // you 
 
 hav tli(! same oiiinion as I. 
 Quacslt'nis f,/: tix', noinie putai'cni, rfc You had inquired 
 of me ti-JiclIwr I (//'/ /("/ supixjse, etc. 
 
 Disjunctive Interrogatives. 
 
 168, The form of the dUjuiivtin', iiueslion is very much 
 the same in tlcpendent as in independent (j nest ions. The 
 important difference is the substitution of the sabjundive 
 U)V the indicative mood. 
 
 Thus, iitruni srrri estis an lihcril <nr yon slaves or free 
 men ?. will he altered into, utrum -sv/vi sitis an lihcri, nihil 
 refcrf ; it matters not vlidlier you arc slaves or free : and 
 in the dejiendent clause we may substitute for utrmyi 
 . . . cm such forms as 
 
 ScrriuZ fiitis, an lihcri, 
 
 Scrvi siti.^i, an libcri, 
 
 Scrri .sifts, lihcriu<^, 
 without any diH'erence of meaning. 
 
 r>/,,s..— "Or not," "or no" (annon in direct), should be turned by 
 lU'cui) in indirect (questions. 
 
 Itiinia sit. necne, rrxjohimns. We will ask irhrthi'r or not he 
 nirans ;o ■'■'. 
 
128 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTEXCES. 
 
 [Ex. XXI. 
 
 V 
 
 1G9. N<.Lico tliat an is in iiidirt'ct, as in direct, qiicstiniis cinifiiuMl 
 to till' second ]il,icc, and an.swci.s to "or," wliich is never to be trans- 
 lated, \\\\v\\ used interro;.ratively, by aui, r</, or mh. 
 
 In the ])lira.>es hmnl ifrio nu, f'orsildii (fors sit an), there is a sup- 
 pression of a tiist clause: "1 knctw not,'" " it is a chance'' (irlnfhir 
 soiiii'thiiKj else Is the case), or vhiljier (rdtlnr) . , . Jjoth are eiiiii- 
 valent to '' perhaps," and both are followed by the stiUjunctlve, 
 
 J>illicili }inr, c.-if, tdnini hand' scio an Jurl poKAit. This is difHcnlt, 
 yet pcrlidps {I incline to tliinh tiiat) it is possible. 
 
 \\\\i nc^idt) (ji'i.s (suits.), wcsr/o 5'''^" (^i'li-)> " ^^^^i*' oiu; (or 
 otln'r);" ncsclo quo inotJo, or quo j^dcfo (adv.), " SoinclidW," 
 arc taken as siiiulo words, and do not ailect tlio mood of 
 tlic v('il>; acrurrit iiescio qtiis, some one runs up. (See 
 rr(tii()uns, 362.) 
 
 170. Forte is not "perhaps " but "by accident," and is only used 
 for "perchance'' after si, nisi, nc. 
 
 Foite ciciilit is "he fell Inj ('Jkiiicc,'" not ^'jnrJiajys he fell." 
 Forte ahist, "he is ncvideiitnUij absent" [indicative). 
 l''ir>ilan ahsit, ^^ perhaps, it inaij he that, he is absent" (si(hjimctive). 
 !Nescio, 01' hand scio an, ahsit, ^'' perha]}S (I incline to think that) 
 he is absent" {siilijuiictirc), 
 
 Fortasse abest, ^'jwrhajis (it is lihelij that) he is absent "(m(/tVrt<ti;e). 
 
 171. Tliedoul)l(i use in Kiiulisli of "if," "whether," and 
 •"or," must be cai'cfully borne in mind. 
 
 >S'/,- ,s//r, ,s77/, (niti^ Tcl, must never be used as inttrrof/a- 
 tios in Latin. 
 
 (".) Ytju shall die ?/ (conditional) you do this. Morkre 
 si lidcc fcccris (I'ut. pert', ind.). 
 
 (/'.) I ask //' (interrogative) you did this. Kum liacc 
 /('('('/ is (subj.) 7'();jo. 
 
 (r.) He shall '^0, loJicthcr he likes it or no (alternative 
 conilition). Sen riilt sen nonvult, ihlt. 
 
 {(f.) 1 ask wlidJier he likes it or no (alternative tjues- 
 tion). Utrum vdit an noJlt nxjo. 
 
 {('.) He is eWicr a wise man or a fool (disjunctive 
 sentence). Aut sapimis est aut stultus. 
 
 ^ ll'iiitj is mostly used witli w/o and with adjectives and adverl>s in 
 the sense of "far from." when a negative idea is substituted for a 
 positive, as hand (nji!r//ls iuvj'dcl/l.'i, etc. 
 
 '^ For the special use of .s7, " in hoijes that," after expecto, conor, and 
 similar verbs, see Conditional Clauses, 474. 
 
 ^ For the diilcrence between tint and rcl, sec Intr. 57, note. 
 
Ex. XXI.] 
 
 DEPENDENT OR iNDlk'ECT. 
 
 129 
 
 ( /'. ) I (l<»u"t know ifjiitjii r lie is a wise man or a tool. 
 Utniiii suj)icit.s sit au .stiilfi's msrin. 
 
 Ohs. In (ii.) iuicl (('.) " it'."' " wlictlu'i," introduce (nlnrhinl ilatises 
 inertly (HialityitiL; tlie main clansc liy addinii ;i cDuditKin (Inlr. m!i. 
 In ((.'.) "citlier," "or," iiitrodure two co-m/vZ/'/^m/i sentences. In ^.), 
 {(I.), (/.), " wliether," ''or,"' introduce snliMttinlirnl clauses, e(iuivalent 
 in Latin to accusative cases after nxjo anil in\sriu. 
 
 ExcrvUc 21. 
 
 1. AVhetluT Cacsai' was ri.L;litfully put to death, or foully 
 muideivd, is open to question ; it' is jillowed liy all tliat 
 he was killed on the ir)th"- of ^laich bv I'rutns and 
 Cassius and the rest of the conspirators. '1. \{ is still 
 iine(Mtain whether our men have won the day or no ; but 
 whether they htive won or lost it, 1 am ceitain that they 
 have neither been false to their allies nor to their countrv. 
 3. It is hard to s;iy M'hether he injured the world^ or 
 benetited it most; it is un(|U(stionable that he was a niiin, 
 alike in his ability {(lU.) as in his achievements, st eh as 
 we are never (Intr. l>2) likely to see in this world. 4. It is 
 scarcely credible how often you .ind I have advised tliat 
 (friend) of yours"* not'' to break his word; but it" seems 
 
 likelv that we shall lose our laboiu- to-morrow, as ^(■sterdJ 
 
 ly 
 
 and the day before. 5. lie sure you write me word when 
 the king intends^ to start for^ tlie ai'iny ; he is jterhiips 
 lingering purposely in order to raise an army and increase 
 his resources ; I am afraid he will not" etlect this,'*^ for 
 people are either alarmed or disalt'ected. G. Sonu! one has 
 warned me not to forget how mtudi you once injured me 
 in my boyhood: whether you did so (this) or no matters 
 little; what'^ is of importance to me is whether you 
 
 are readv to be mv friend no 
 
 w 
 
 7. Asi"- he felt himself 
 
 sinking {inf) under a severe wound, he asked first if his 
 shield was safe; they answered yes; secondly, if the 
 enemy had been routed; they replied in the atlirmative. 
 8. Thev asked if it was not better to die th:in to live dis- 
 
 lonoura 
 
 bb 
 
 9. He was tlu^ dearest to me of mv soldiers, 
 
 and ]ierhaps the l)ravest of (them) all. 
 
 Illii,i 
 
 I.e. 
 
 the followin 
 
 * St 
 
 11. (/. 
 
 See 138. 
 
 •' See 118. 
 i» Relative. 
 
 fif/hii.^ Miirfii'M. 
 
 See 43. 
 
 14, r 
 
 16, h. 
 
 A</. 
 
 is of importance. 
 
 u 
 
 Lit., the following {illiiil). 
 (Jiiain with imperf. subj. 
 
• z-- 44 o.^^rf^ 
 
 I r«-««« -^Xt*- »* -•♦■■» 
 
 :i| 
 
 EXERCISE XXn. 
 DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE-Co/jf/VyMe^/. 
 
 Mood and Tense. ~Interroga:ive Clauses for 
 Enii'lish Nouns. 
 
 172. S(jnuitinies the Latin vorl) in tli(} iiit(3rr()gative 
 clausu is already in the subjunctive; in tliis case no 
 change will tak(i ])lace in tlie mood, even if we convert 
 tlie direct into tlie indirect question. 
 
 Quid facerenr? What was I to do] (See 150.) 
 Quid facereui dnbitai'iJ I was at a loss what to do. 
 
 In such cases tlie hid)jiuiclive answers to the Kurdish 
 iiijlihiiii'c after an interrogative \V(jrd. 
 
 Qaid faciam, qmiiKlo redeani, duldto. I am at a loss what 
 tu d(i, w\um to return. 
 
 173. The use of the tenses in (dependent) interrogative 
 clauses will cause little ditticulty. 
 
 (i.) The perfect suhjiuictire is exceedingly common to 
 express simple past time in such clauses. 
 
 Qidd eamne fuorit postridie iidellexi. I perceived the day 
 after what ivas the cause (lit. "for a cause"). 
 
 (ii.) But the inq^erfect must be used if the time denoted 
 by tiie dependent verb is strictly contemporaneous with 
 tliat of tlie principal verb. 
 
 Qaid facerent iideUe.ri. I i)erceived what they were 
 doing. (See 185.) 
 
 (iii.) As the only future suhjiuictive in Latin is that 
 
 formed by the future in -rics, " 1 ask when he will return " 
 
 is, quttndo sit rediturus ?w/o; "I asked when he would 
 
 return" is, quando esset rediturus rogavi. 
 
 The future in -rus expresses also the ideas of likelihood, iutodion, 
 etc. (See 14, c.) 
 
 The following remarks require careful attention both in 
 writing Latin and in translating from Liitin. 
 
 ^ Quid facieii'liini i'.>ixcf. would dillbr sliglitly as expros.sinj; lusd per- 
 plexity, and somewhat nioro of delilieration. 
 130 
 
Ex. XXII. 1 nErExni:.\r ixri:RRO(:.\rn'l-:. 
 
 i:^l 
 
 174. 1 )('[)t;iuk'iit intern )<falivt3 c/kksc.^ uitrodiicid by 
 (fiiix {ifni), (/iialis, qiumtas, (jiiot, (jwiiulo, nw, etc., are 
 V(!rv ol'tcii used in Latin \vlu!r(3 in EM,L;lisIi we use a 
 single woi'd, .such as 'untiirc, cJinradcr, amount, .so, uinnhcr, 
 (Idle, (ilijirf, ori'/iii, mofirr, etc. 
 
 liiitiii does Tiot use nearly so many abstract tirma as Enj^flisli. 
 Thus - 
 
 (a.) Quot I'.fscnt hostcs, cnr^ aih'iinriitt, ([uaritas hiihimit ojun. 
 
 (juanilo- (/omo firotecti esscitf, roijavit mote eari'tully tlio 
 
 tciisis^ He asked th(> uniiificr u[ the enemy, tlie rvaxon 
 
 of their ha\iii<^ come, the iiKupiil mle ot" their resources, 
 
 tlie (lafr of tlieir departure from home. 
 (^>.) Quah' Kc quantum sit jhriritJiiiii (Jcninnstrat. He exphiins 
 
 tlie ii'itnn' and I'xtcut of the dan<_'er. 
 {('.) (^nalis .s/7, ((Uemadiiiodiun sciivf rirnt. riilefis. You see th'> 
 
 Li 11(1 of man lie i ■, his ni'nnnr of life in his old a«fe. (63.) 
 ((/.) Ihoc vi'S "[uo iTosiira sit, e-.r/Kcto. I am waitiiii,' to see tht 
 
 ?.s'.s'/((! of this matter. 
 (f.) Qiiam ri'pnitiindii sit lior umlinii infillcijn, nnde orfinn sit 
 
 )irs('io. I perceive the sxiIiIihihss of this danifer, its 
 
 sovrre I know not. 
 
 This is only oik^ of tlie many instances ^vllere Latii> 
 ])r(!rers sini])le and direct modes of expression to tliii nion-s 
 al)stract and ^^cneral forms of noun with which \V(! arc 
 I'amiliar in Kn^^lish. (See 54.) 
 
 175. For the same n^ason, as well as from a lack of 
 siihstantives in Latin to e.'<])re.ss r^^s■.s7•.s of ]>erson.s, jind ' 
 also of yerhal substantives denotin^f af/c?tfs, such KuLflish 
 substantives must often be translated into Latin by a 
 relative or adjectival clause. Tims: — 
 
 " l*()liticians," ipii in rcpuWicd irrsiDifiir ; "students," qvi 
 Uteris (hint Dperam; "my father's nuirdorer.s," qiii ■ptitrciii 
 iiu'um occid/'vunf ; "my well-wishers," (p/i me salrma 
 riiliiiit ; "the govenmient," qui rcijutUirae praetiunt ; 
 "his predeces.sors on the throne," (/«i ante earn 
 rcijnairrant. 
 
 For the use or omission of ci with this use of qui see 71. 
 
 176. The difference between these two kinds of dei>endent clause, 
 the Ttlatii-e {ov adjectival; Jind the interrogative, will be marked by 
 
 ' In indirect clauses cur may be used ; hut '/iKirc, i/iiamo/ircm, t/iunn 
 1,1) ciui.'<(ini. are more common; and <pi('i:ia(hnoduta almost always 
 takes the place of quomodo. 
 
 I 
 
t.rJ 
 
 nr.r/uVDF.A'T interkoga rn v;. [Ex. xxil. 
 
 the iis'j of the liiiliratin: in the one, tlu' siifijniirtirf in the dtlicr. 
 Thiis- 
 
 (a.) in .<!/(«/ (jiii ptitirm tKiim orr/Werunt. Tht'se aro your 
 fatlior's imink'ivrs. 
 
 Here tlio reiativc (jiii introduces an ndjictiral clause, used, as 
 {i(ljecti\es sonietinu-s are, as a sul»stitute for a substantive. (^See 81.) 
 
 (ft.) Qui jiiifirin siiHiit, ocoWerint, miifit. He knows not who 
 wi-re his father's uiurdereis. 
 
 Here tlie 'uterro^Mtive qui fpl. of (fuis) introduees one of the three 
 kinds of substantival elause (Intr. 8(»), viz., the dependent (juestion ; 
 the mood therefore is the sulijunctive. CSee 164.) So — 
 
 (a.) Qiuie vere sentio dicam, I will utter my real sentiments ; 
 here quae is a relative : 
 
 {h.) Quae rr/c sentiani iHenvi, I will tell you what are my real 
 sentiments ; 
 here quae, is interro^'ative. 
 
 The substantival nature of the dependent interm^fative will explain 
 why it generally comes before the main clause. (,See Intr. l(>i>.) 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 1. T jun waitiii<' to see wliat is the meaning of this 
 crowd, what will be the is.siie of tlie uproar. 2. I wi.sh^ 
 you would ex])laiii to me hi.s uiiiiiiier of lite in boyhood ; I 
 know pretty well the kind of man that he is ii(»w. 3. AVe 
 perceived well enouiih that danger \vas»at hand ; of its 
 source, nature, character, and extent, we were ignorant. 
 4. J)o but retlect on the greatness of your debt to your 
 country and your forefathers; remember who you are and 
 the ])osition that you occu]>y. 5. I knew not {wip<'rj'.) 
 whitlier to turn, wliat to do, how to inflict punislinieiit on 
 my brother's nnirderers. 6. The doer of the deed I know 
 not, but whoever he was,- he shall be punished. 7. The 
 reason of politicians not agreeing with the commanders 
 of armies is ])retty clear. 8. I wonder who were tlie 
 bringers of this message, ^vhether (they were) the sanie as 
 the perpetrators of the crime or no. 9. He was superior 
 to all his predecessors on the throne in ability; but he did 
 not perceive the character of the man who was destinetl 
 to be his successor. 10. The government was aware of 
 the suddenness of the danger, but they did not suspect its 
 magnitude and probable-' duration. 
 
 » 149, i. 
 
 'Mood? (See 163.) 
 
 » 173, iii. 
 
 
/■:.\'/-: A'c/s/-: xxii/. 
 
 REMARKS ON TENSES. 
 
 177. Tlif I.iiiiii iciiscs WW ^cncnilly dividid into Primary iiiid 
 Secondary. 
 
 \(<.' Primary tenses me those in wliicli tlie ]inint of time tnken .is 
 the stiUhlaid l)y wiiich we leeixon j.s liie ^'/'(.s*'/*/, the nionietit iit wiiieh 
 we are >[)e,il<in,ir : 
 
 (Siniultiineoiis xcrllm, "[ write," "am writin;.'," at the present. 
 
 moment. 
 (Past I >•(•/•// ,s/, " I liave writim," hij'nrc the present moment (tnic 
 
 pert'fcti. 
 (Fuliirei .-ciifKiiii, "T sliall write," <tftir tiie present moment. 
 {!>.) In Secondary t( uses calltil also Historic, from tiieir ronstant 
 Use in iiistory or nunative) liie standaid of eomparison is some [loint 
 in i)((st time : 
 
 (Simultaneous^ sn-ihihiiiii, " I was writing; (-(ntfcmi oraiuoiislii 
 
 icifJi, some time in the ]iast. 
 (Past) Si'rijiKiriiiii. '" I had w ritten," Iwfon some point in the past. 
 (Indelinite, or aorist i nrrijisi, "I wrote," at some time or other in 
 the past. 
 Ohs. — It will he seen that the La? in srrii)d belongs to both 
 divisions ; also th;;t it is not easy to fix its place under (h.). It is 
 .•-((metimcs explained as denotini,' an event that /f^//o;r.s sonnthituj rlst: 
 that happemd in the past. 
 
 A third division niiiiht he introduced by ta.kin;^' as the standard of 
 comparison ii jtoint in Jut are time : — 
 
 (Sinudtaneous) srrifxon, "I shall he ivi'itinyj' 
 
 (Past) srrip.-uro, '' I shall h(tve irrlltoi." 
 
 (Future) scrij^turus era, " I shall be (joinrj to write." 
 
 The Present. 
 
 178. The Latin present tense coricsponds to two foniis 
 (if the Kiigli.sh present; striho^z" I write," and also " I tini 
 wi'itino," 
 
 179. As in Eufjlish, but far more commonly in Latin, the freaent 
 tense is often in an animated narrative substituted for the ixid. 
 
 This llidnrical /m'^ott is often in the best Latin writers inter- 
 niin;;li (1 witli ])ast ('anrist) tenses ; and is even followed as a historic 
 tense by tlie im|>erfect subjunctive. 
 
 Sidiito edieiint Covsuhs vt ml suntn vestitvvt Scu'ilmrK lodirent. 
 'I'he ( 'onsids suddenly ■piihlish ( = pnli islici; an edict, that 
 t!;e Senators irere to return to their usual dress. 
 
i;m 
 
 'i 
 
 h'KA/AA'A'S OX '//..VS/uS. 
 
 (Ex. XXI I r. 
 
 Tlif prr-'ctif, wlicn tlins used, niiiy lie folliiwcd citlicr ]<y tlic jinsnit 
 siilijiniiUrr nt'cdiilili;,' to tlic i^crH-iiil liilf U>v lli" s('i|lU'iit c of triiscs) 
 (»r l)y tl <• iiii/iirj'icl .fiilijiiiicfiri' jis liciii;^ itself riitnulh/ n p.tst tciisj''). 
 (Sec 104. The latti'r is (Hiitc ;is niiniiioti ;is tlic I'niiiicr. In hliiLjIish 
 Wf .sliiiiiid rillirr s;iy " piililislicd." or niter " were to '' intit '" ;ire t<»." 
 
 180. Ill (Icsci'iliiiin- (lie ]>ast, (lie coiijimci ion i/mii, 
 "wllili','" is culi-^tillltlv used with ii liixfur'nnl jn-isnil ('\rli 
 wluMi ;iM lip' siin'oiiiKliiiLf lenses iire in jMst time. 
 
 I'lnn li'iiiiiitii'i ff'iii/nis ternilt, Sin/ii iifiini. ()l»>i(|el),itlir. 
 While the Ik'i iiiMiis v/v/v tnistiiKj I iine, S;i,m:iilinii wiis 
 lieilltj liesi('L;e(h 
 
 This ididiii is iiliiKist iiiviiri;ilih' wliere the J(a»-el;iiise re|ireseiits, ii.s 
 line, ii IniHji r ji'lioil irltjiiii irliirli tlie dlliei' evelit is enin pi ised, 
 
 181. 'I'o e.\l>r('SS " I /icrr Jii'ni, tldiiif/ if f/n'ii;//ni- a lniitr 
 time," t]i(! leimans said, " / ^o//. (ftu'ii;/ If i'or a loiiu' tina; 
 alrcadw" The (!i'e(d\saml Fi'eiieli liaNc the snnie idiom.' 
 
 in 
 
 Jilni jirhh III (*^v j"li>/ 
 Yocjit iiic ill ill jam. (I 
 
 ^ ciipic 
 
 I / 
 
 'iiirr Iniii^ tli'sirii 
 
 ,1. 
 
 (i>i' jii iitilii'liiiii) ftic'itii ri's/fii 
 ('rpi',iii/i(i. Your sih'iit expectation lias for .some tina^ 
 hf'i II. i-((//iii(/ me to anotlaT point. 
 
 So Jilso they used the Imporf(3ct for onr" liad (Ioiili) heeii." 
 
 Cojii'ii' ([iKtti dill comparabaiit. Forces Avliicli they JkcI 
 long lii'i'ii col !('('( i II ij. 
 
 182. The ])rescnt is used sometimes, hut far less v.idely than in 
 ]!ln;:rlij<h, in an onticijiatire sense lor the future. 
 
 7/ 
 
 ()(' II I jiroju'Ti 
 
 fit. ITnless this is done nt once 
 
 AiilcijKnia 'Jiarc incipio. Before I beyiii to speak. 
 
 But see helow (190). 
 
 The Imperfect. 
 
 183. Tills tense is used far more widely in Latin tlian 
 the Enj^lish coni]»t)Uiid tense "1 was doin^," etc. 
 
 It denotes a time C()ntem])orane(tus with some ])eriod, 
 or surroiindinu', as it were, some point, in ])ast time, and 
 lience it has various meanings. 
 
 It is tlie tense of cnntinnoHs or incoinjilcfc, as oi)posed to 
 )ii(i)iif'nf(fri/, or cdiiiplrhil aetion. 
 
 * TrdXai \iyj3 ; Dcpuis longtemj's je j'u-^e, 
 
Ex. XXIII. 1 
 
 /•///'; iMrr.NhECT. 
 
 \^7\ 
 
 It is till! tcjisc (if ihHn'ti>tiini MS (Hi[)(>sr(l tu IIH ic 
 )iii mil I fi 1)]' sfiih im III . 
 
 Tims ii is (il'irii iiM'd to il«'S(iil)c fill' tirciiiiistiijx'i s, or fcrlin^r''. 
 wliit h iMi iin»iiiiy till' main lait a.s hluttd liy tlii' nciIj iti the 'iiniixl; 
 I»t'rf»'(t :— 
 
 Cnisiir arin'iA niii ijinn' roristitiiit, vidi'liat mini iiiiuiirnriuii in 
 ilii.-< iiii-jin-' in jii ri I ' I icitii ni, rt'|nitaliatry/r( , etc. 
 w'c .■-ImiiiIiI iiNi- the saiiic tctiM' in all liirrc vcil's; T'Snlrnl, sn ir, 
 T'llifiil; lilt tllK two last «'X|)la>M tin- rnnt'inhd Ici'liii;,' wliirli 
 ii( TciMiii'il lor tilt' tiiiii/lf flirt of his (U'cisioii. 
 
 184. l''t»r tin* sniiic rciison, Ii.'' iiiipfi'lrrt ol'icn cxj.ics-cs 
 
 idi'llS ('inii\iil( lit [u '^ III 1/(1 II hi^ '' jniiniiliil hi^' '• li.iil I Ii ihil 
 III," " //■/'( il III," " ir< ri' III fill' Jiiliil III y " lisi il III," " //•/ / ( irniit 
 III."' SdlllclillH'S ('Veil to tlic l'lll,ii,ll.>ll "/rc/'A/." il must 
 tliiTcl'i I'c oi'lcii 1h' used wiicii; wc loosely use l/ir (iioii^t) 
 fill. I II iisr, i\u(] uc iimst iilwjiys jisk (Mii'schcs tlic iirccise 
 ii:c;itiii|o' dl' iht! Kii'L:]i>h ]i;i>t tclisc lici'ore vc t iiiii-liilc it. 
 
 llnrhiiii sii.ni imji nlia (Icvohcliaiit. 'riic Itailiarians hniuii 
 
 il) {{\Y 'jil'iirri'ilid In) roll down llllL^(^ stones. 
 Stiii)at iiii/iiriili r inniiiliix. The Liciicial iniitiiiiinl In stand 
 
 motionless (or nus smi In slnin/, as if in a ]>iitiirf). 
 Jlitir fi r/'. jiiit'i l disceliainiis. A\ lieii a\o avck* hoys wo 
 
 Usui In leaiii ((»i' irr Inininl) sonirtliini;- of this kind. 
 Jfii/iisiHiiili lininiiirs (iifiji'sniis adiniraliai'. 'I'lirsr were tho 
 
 nu'ii whom I admired (or imn/rl uilniin) w :ny youth. 
 
 185. This incaiiinif of the imperfect extends to the siihjmu'tive 
 mood, and must l)e kept in miiul in ti;tii>lal injx siihordinatc clauses. 
 
 '• I asked wliy he did it" is jfcnerally viir iil fdciit ijiimsiri. ,'See 
 173.) Lilt if we mean "why he was doiinj it thut," ve must say cur 
 ill faceret quiimiri. 
 
 It will also explain the difference between the imperfect and 
 pel feet siihjnnctive after vt censecutive. (See 113.) 
 
 'i'iicse ditieicnt shades of meaning; as rei^ards past time are rarely 
 distiiiiaiislied in En«;lish, 
 
 186. What is called the Ilifttnric Ivfnitive is often used as a, 
 sulistitute for the imperfect, especially wInn a .^ivics of mliinis is 
 descrilied, and is always joined with the nominative. 
 
 Interim quvtiiUi ( amar Acilnos frumentiivi, . . . flagitare ; . . . 
 (/iV>H t'.f; (//(' diiceie .lo/'// . . . dicere, etc. ((.'ae.sar, r/r ]!.<!. 
 i. !().) Meanwhile Caesar vnx daily tw/^rtjVv////?/^ the Aedtii 
 tor provisions ; tin y /< t j uitimj ( tf day alu r day, asM rtiny, etc. 
 
i;{f; 
 
 KEMAKA'S ON '/'ENSES. 
 
 [Ex. XXIII. 
 
 The Perfect. 
 
 187. The Latin perfect represciiis two iMi^lish tcnisc 
 '.(,"(; 105, 177.) Frrl is l.otli " .1 <li(l," iiud " riiave done 
 
 1 <li.l 
 
 is tlic pniivili (»r miri 
 
 <f. It 
 
 is tlie ordinary tense ustM 
 
 i:i siiiiply iiarnitinif or iiientioiii ;,r a i)ast event. 
 
 "T have dune" i> the true ptrj'ict, or tense of complckd adion. It 
 ;'.';!r(''( iits an act as past in itself; but in /7s n.<"/^ as coining df»\vn 
 to ilic present, "I havo hccii yn\\\v;f, \\r\(\ Jiow am old." We slionld 
 :; ly of a recent event, with the result still fresh on the mind, "My 
 1" ii'tid has been killeil ;" we shoidd not say, "Cain h s kilh-d Abel.'' 
 
 In Latin the same word (Un may mean " I have spoken," i.e. "I 
 
 !ve 
 
 hni 
 
 died 
 
 niv sneeeli, or 
 
 ihev have lived,' i. 
 
 (( 
 
 ire noir t 
 
 I spok 
 
 Vi.rerunf, "thev lived. 
 
 or 
 
 context will tfenenvlly make it quite clear in whiidi .sense the 
 
 Latin tense is usd 
 
 OVs-. Tlie Kniilish auxiliary am, nri\ etc., with a ])assive verb, in;iy 
 
 mis 
 
 !.;h1. 
 
 A] 
 
 an- slain'' mav be eitlier ocHai sunt, nv orcit 
 
 bud 
 
 11 r. 
 
 ■coi'diii'j; to tiie context. 
 
 138. 
 
 >io'iietime 
 
 t1 
 
 le vei 
 
 b h 
 
 (('-, o. 
 
 I 1 
 
 lave, or posse: 
 
 IS use( 
 
 especially '.\ith veibs of kiio\vlcd'.;e, etc., in i<)nd)ination with a 
 ])articipli' in a use approaching'' that of the Kn,<riisli auxiliaxy "have." 
 
 Hoc (•(iiiipi'iiiim, roriiiitinii, f.r/ili>ratiim habeo. I have found out, 
 
 ascertained, made sure < 
 
 if tl 
 
 >T in s. 
 
 Hnnc homliwm jamdin notum. liabeo. I hice haoivrt this man 
 long. 
 
 'I 
 
 Future. 
 
 189. Latin diftbrs exceedinuly from Eiiolisli in the use 
 <d" the future. It lias thr^-e future tenses: — .^rn'haw, 
 si-ri/)sir(), Hcrljtf Hi'iis si//)). 
 
 ¥\\t. i. Sc)'thtt)!t is ])roperly, [ sliall he, ivrifiii'f {at .some 
 time in the fi'tin'e)- 
 
 Flit. ii. Sr/'ip''^' I'd, r shall /ii/rr inritien {hcfojr some 
 time in the future). 
 
 I'^it. iii. Sri-ij)f)irus mm, I am ahont to, or likcJ)/ to, 
 Wl'ite ; iiilrndhl;! to, ete. ^St'c 14, c.) 
 
 Olia. - Vn\. i. and iii. are both re >resented in the subjunctive mood 
 by the future in -riis, Fut. ii. by tln' perfect subjunctive .■<cn'j)M'rim. 
 
 AVe inusi iiirefully di'^tingiiish between Fut. i. and ii. in all sub- 
 ordii.:.; ^'..,A, - v.'.i'ie l!.e principal ver!) is in the future. 
 
Ex. XX! Ti. 
 
 putukp.. 
 
 \%1 
 
 190. A Latin future is ronstiiiitly to be sul)si itutcd lor 
 tlie Kiinlish loo.sely-usetl present. 
 
 There wns no true future in Old En;j;lish, ami we iir<> oliliLCed to 
 use the Muxili.iiics almU and viU. We still say, "I return lionu- 
 to-iHovrow," for '' rnts donintii redibo," or "rediturus .sum." 
 
 (i.) All Kr"lisli j)/v.s7//^ ti'iise after rrlofivtx, or "irJini." 
 "/■/'," " (iH /(III;/ ry.v," "hr/orc," etc., is to he traiislati'd l»y a 
 fill II re ])iy/'<cf, when the action e.\j)resse(l l»y it is si ill 
 f'lifiirc, \n\\ jii'ior to something .still more future. 
 
 Si fe rogavero ali'/iiid, iidinic resjiDiidrhis / If I juif any 
 
 question to you, will you not answer^ 
 Qiiinii, TiiU'iKs riirr rodierit, ni'itfuni cum <(i/ fc When 
 
 Tullius returns from the country, I will .send liim to 
 
 you. 
 Qiiiii/riiii'iiw iin})eratum erit, Jiel. AVhatever is ordei'ed 
 
 shall l)e done. 
 
 The Latin idiom is correct, as the one action must, 
 tliough iio\\' future, be completc^d (future pi rfrrt) hd'ore 
 the other beoins. 
 
 (ii.) When the two actions or states are sinn/Jftnicoi's, 
 l)ut still future, tlie Latin Future i. is used for an Knglish 
 ])resent. 
 
 Jhun hie ero /(' mnahi). As long as I am here 1 shall love 
 
 y< )U. 
 Fiir.ito hoc, vhi voles. Do this when you p/ca.sc. 
 'J'lini, qui ])otei'unt, reniant. Then let those come who hurc 
 
 the jxiici-r. 
 
 0})s. — Sometiuies the English perfect is used for tlie Latin future 
 perfeet. 
 
 (^uac qnum fecero, lioinain iho. When I have done this, I «hull 
 20 to Rome. 
 
 19L Thi> future perfect, thouirh "arely met with in the form 
 ''shall have" in ordinary Kii;_dish, is exceediii^fly I'oniniun in Latin. 
 It is .sometimes found even in the ^jrincipal clause as a substitute for 
 the first future. 
 
 lAes[)iravero, si tc 'HiJcro. If once I have .seen ("or see) yon, I 
 .s/(.f// breathe freely : lit. shall have breathed ; implying that 
 the relief will be instantaneous. 
 
 Lor r'nUrn^ ri(l< rint, see 146. 
 
h 
 
 138 
 
 kF.MA/x'KS OA' TF.WSF.S. 
 
 [Ex. XXIII. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 192. Tlic ])lii])eTf('ct (loos not difTcr materially from llu; • 
 corresiioiidiiin- iMi^lisli tense, " I had done, or seen," etc. 
 
 I'nt it is u>((l ill L;itiii iit'tcr relative:; and conjunctions to (1( note 
 frdjiiiinij or njnlition in past tense. 
 
 (Jiiiiiit in vciicrat, hico (hhctnJmtur. An oft in (is lie came tliere, 
 
 lie was eliaiiiHd witli tl:e situation. 
 (J}iiis vidcrat ail si' vocubat. ll'hovicvcr lie taw he suninioned 
 
 to liiiii. 
 
 For the use of fliese riirixrfirts s( e 184. 
 
 i 
 
 
 Mi 
 
 Tenses of the Infinitive. 
 
 193. (i.) In tlie infinitive mood the jm'snit (lavdare, 
 t'tc.) answers to liotli tlu^ ^r/vw/// and iiirpcrfvcf < f the 
 indicat Inc. 
 
 It ex]>icss('s time nnifcrDixmiiii'niOi \\\{\\ that of the 
 veili on wliicli it dejiends. 
 
 J>'irn. (11' (111 I, nil' (ifins/im esse. I say, or said, that I an:, 
 irr iriis, at leisure. (See 35.) 
 
 (ii.) Tlu! perfect iniinitive (i^erqh^is^e) answers to the 
 fiDfid jxrjeet, true jx rfi et , \\\\{\ 2>J i'l>('i'J<'et, of tlni indiejitix c. 
 
 It denotes time jirlor to that of the verh on ^vllieh it 
 depends. 
 
 T) 
 
 ten me ol 
 
 fidSNiii fuissc. I say tliat I irns, hrire been, laid 
 
 heen at leisuvo, 
 
 Tlie eontext must dceide lietMeeii the three meanin_uP. 
 (iii.) Tlie future infinitive is formed hy the ])artiei];le 
 
 in -rns. 
 
 J)irif, dixit se venttirinn esse. He says, said, that lie irill 
 
 or triudd oonio. 
 
 AVliere there is no ]iartieiple in -?•?/.<;, and in the jiassive 
 voiee, the periphrasis af fore nf must he nsed. 
 
 Sjtero foi'O. ut cniiraleseKf, fore ut v//7/.s- eiijnaliir. 1 lu \ c 
 
 that ln^ irdi o'ct ^vell, that the ( itv vill lie take 
 
 n. 
 
 I^jirniri fore ut entindi secret, fore ut mlis edjurcliir. I hojied 
 that lie trovtd ^^ot Avell, that the city vovid he taken. 
 
Ex. xxin.] TExsiis OF TtiP. iki'LwitiVh:. 
 
 m 
 
 (iv.) With ^)«,s,s•^Vc verbs the place of the \\\\%'a\\\<^ future 
 ivjiuilire is oltt'ii su])])lied by the supine in -um, with the 
 iiii[)ersoiial iiiHnitive iri. 
 
 Crt'didit vrhcm expugnatiim iri. He boHevod (Ht, tliat 
 there v:as a (/<iiii// (Iiitr. 12) to take tlie city) that the 
 city inuinl he taken. 
 
 Urhem is uovei'ucd by the supine whiidi lias an active 
 f(jicc, and is iiself tlie accusative o^ tnutum to, after //•/. 
 
 (v.) A 2^y^6'?iim/ future inlinitive is formed lor past 
 time, thus : — 
 
 Credo hoc te facturuni fuisse. I believe you inndd have 
 
 done this. 
 Credi) futurum fuisse vt nrhs expurjiiaretur. I believe the 
 
 city Viiidd hore been taken. 
 
 194. As these remarks are somewhat loiin-, it will be 
 well l)efore d(>in<f the exercise to study very carefu^lv 
 the use of the tenses in the folhnving examples on the 
 most important consti'uctions. 
 
 1. iJuiii luier. infer .sr loquuntur, advesperascebat. 
 
 2. Jaindia te expecto . . . expecta})ani. 
 
 3. Yix^i^judhes; ros, cum (ior\?,i}.{\{n'o, jndkate. 
 
 4. S'ujnuni pugnaiidl datum est; stabant immoti m'dites, 
 
 respicere, circunisi»icere ; hastes (pioque jxiruiujier 
 cunctati sunt; iiuix shjiia infeiTc ; et join jirope hdra 
 tell jactum aderant, ciuii salnto in cu'nsj.>ectwii veniunt 
 socii. 
 h. Si mihi j)ar('s, walrus eris. 
 
 6. Si mihi parebis, solvus eris. 
 
 7. Si mihi j)ai'uei-is, solvus eris, 
 
 8. Si hoc feceris, Dwritire. 
 
 9. Veniiun, si potero. 
 
 10. Si hosterii ridero, vicero. 
 
 11. Tni, dum vi\-am, vunquain, oUiviscar. 
 
 12. Que}ncun([ue cejici-at trucidori ju])ebat. 
 
 13. roJliceor me, nun in hoec scripserini, rediturhvi esse. 
 
 14. Pollicdus est se, quum haec scripsisset, reddurum esse. 
 Ohs. — In the two bst examples the 2(1 future indicative is repre- 
 
 sento'd l)y the perfict and plnperfed su])junctive ; these two tenses 
 represent its toree in the sul)jnnetive mood after present iind p;ist time 
 respcctivt 1y. 
 
140 
 
 REMARKS ON rF..VSES. 
 
 [Ex. XXIII. 
 
 Kir r rise 23. 
 
 A. 
 
 1. I have long been anxious to know the reason of your 
 beinf^ so afraid of the nation foruetting^ you. 2. IJotli my 
 father and I had for some time been anxious to ascertain 
 your opinion on this question. 3. When ynu come to 
 ^Farseilles, I wisli^ you would ask your brother the reason 
 of my iiiiviug received no letter from him. 4. ]\Iv sikh'cIi 
 is over, gi'iitlemen, and I have sat down, as^ you see of 
 yourselves ; do you decide on this question. For myself, 
 I ho])e, and have long been hoping, that my client will be 
 ac([uitted by your unanimous* verdict, o. AVhile the 
 Modes were making these preparations, the Greeks had 
 already met at the Istlnnus. 6. Up to extreme old age 
 your father would learn something fresh daily. 7. As 
 often as the enemy stormed a town belonging'' to this ill- 
 starred race, they would spare none ; women, children, 
 old men, infants, were butcb.ered, without^ any distinction 
 being made either of age or sex. 
 
 B. 
 
 1. He promises to present the man'^ who shall be the 
 first to scale the wall, with a crown of gold.^ 2. When 1 
 have returned from Rome, I will tell you^ why I sent for 
 you. 3. The Gauls had long been refusing^'' either to go 
 to meet our ambassadors, or to accept the terms which 
 Caesar was offering. 4. Suddenly the enemy came to a 
 halt, but while they^^ were losing time, our men raised^- a 
 cheer, and charged into the centre of the line of their 
 
 » 138. * See 149, i. » i^^,Q g?, Ohs. 
 
 * See 69. The "your" may either agree with "verdict" or with "ail." 
 « Genitive, = "of." 
 
 ^ Abl. al)s. , "no distinction made." See 72. 
 
 ^ See 58. In ]Cnglish we may use either the genitive, or "golden," 
 or turn "gold" into an adjective, by phicing it before "ci-own. " 
 " Of course dative : "you " is the remoter object of " tell." 
 '° See 136, a. X'>!io here, because their refusal was expressed in words 
 " T^so /in, to distinguish the enemy from our men. (See 70. 
 "Se 186. 
 
 if. i 
 
Ex. XXIII.] 
 
 A'A'.l/WA'A'.V OJV 7-EA'SES. 
 
 141 
 
 iiifantiy. 6. Tlio general had for so. ..v. time seen tliat his 
 nu'U were hard ])ressed l)y tlie superior nundxM's of th(* 
 eiK'niy, wlio hiirhid (hirts, slingstones, and arrows, and 
 strove to I'orce our men from the hilL 7. I have done my 
 s|i('c('h, Judges : when you^ liave given your verdiet it will 
 1 e clear whether the defendant is going to return home 
 with impunity, or to be punished for his many crimes. 
 
 ^ Vos, to be placed first. (See 11, a, h.) 
 
:f: 
 
 ! 
 
 ! ' 
 
 EXERCISE XX TV. 
 
 HOW TO TRANSLATE Oan, Could, May, Might, Shall, 
 
 Must, etc. 
 
 195. Tlie ideas of possibility, permission, duty, necessity, 
 
 art! expressed in English by auxiliary verbs, "can," 
 " may," " ouglit," " should," " Jinist," etc (Iiitr. 47.) 
 
 OLa. — Tliese words have, in modern Enj^lish, o\vin<^ to their constant 
 use as mere auxiliaries, ceased to be used as independent verbs. Itj 
 Latin no verb lias been recbiced to this merely auxiliary state, though 
 the verb s\iin is largely used as an auxiliary. (Intr. 4I», Ohii.) 
 
 The sauie ideas are expressed in Latin, partly (1) by the 
 modal verbs (see 42) pos-v/vi and debeo ; partly (2) by the 
 impersonal verbs licet, oportet, deed, and the im])ersonal 
 ])hiase neceft.se esf,fmt, etc. ; and largely (3) by the so-called 
 partic'iple in -diis. 
 
 N.B. — In all these cases the difference between the nse 
 of the tenses in Latin and English will re(|uire great care. 
 
 196. Possibility is expressed by the modal verb possum. 
 (a.) Hoc ftirere possum, potero. I ca)i do this (notr, or 
 
 in f lie future), 
 (b.) Hoc farere poteram, potui, 1 might hare done tliis 
 (past). 
 
 Ohs. — Fcrws'c, the literal translation of our "have done," would be 
 quite wrong, for it would mean '"'' have, finished doing." 
 
 197. Permission is exjiressed by the impersonal verb 
 licet with the dafire and infinitive. 
 
 {a.) Hoc mihi facere licet, oi- licebit. I may do this {now 
 
 or henafter). 
 (h.) Hoc mihi facere licebat, licuit. I might have done 
 
 this {past). 
 
 Here again notice /acerc in (&.). 
 
 Licet is also used occasionally with the subjunctive. 
 Hoc facias licet. You may do this, (Sc;' 126.) 
 
 142 
 
Ex. XXIV. 
 
 C./.V; (■(''•/'/', .)/./>', ETC. 
 
 14.S 
 
 U/y.s. 1. — "3/'<//,'' " //j,j'(//i^," must be traiislatt'd by puxttnm or //Vt/ 
 uccnnlinjf as they meiin "I have the power," or ^^ have permission." 
 ()hs. 2. — A very fominon construction is : 
 
 IFor ti'ii per iue/<i^vT«3 licuit. Yuu Tni<,'ht have done this, so far 
 
 (f.s / W'i< coiirerned, or, / should have allDwed you to do this. 
 Hoc per mefiicias licebit. I shall leave you free to do this. 
 
 198. To expioss duty, obligation, "ought," " slioiild," etc;., 
 tliru(i coiisLructioiis may be used : — 
 
 (i.) Tlie personal verb dchco. 
 
 {(i.) JLic furore (lcl)os, (le])ebis. You omiht to do tliis, 
 you should do this (present and future). 
 
 (h.) JLic far,',re debuisti, debebas. You ought to, ('/■ 
 sliould, hare done, this (past). 
 
 (ii.) Tlui inipersoual verb ojjortet^ with the accusative 
 and inlinitive. 
 
 {(t.) J[n- te facere oport-et, -ebit. 
 (/>. ) Hoc te facere oport-ebat, -uit. 
 
 ()h$. — (}jiortd is also used with the sulyunctive. 
 
 IJoc faceres oportuit. You should have done this. 
 
 (iii.) (Commonest of all.) T\\(i participle in -dns ; used 
 eitlier iiui»ersonally (i/cru/K/) with intransitive, or as an 
 adjt'c'tive {f/crutidirc) with transitive verbs. (See Exer- 
 cises \Li\'. and L. on Gerund and Gerundive.) 
 
 The person on whom the duty lies is in the dative. 
 Gerun(Hvo — 
 
 (a.) Hiiir f'd'i r.iciendi sunt, erant. You ought to do tliis, 
 
 (jirr.<ri(t and fuhirr). 
 (I>.) Ifui-c tilii facienda erant, fuerunt. Yon ought to hare 
 
 diute this {past). 
 
 Gerund — 
 
 {a.) 7V/// currcmli m e-/. You must run. 
 
 {b.) T'dd currL'uduui///(7. You ought to have run. 
 
 ' Ojxirtct expresses a duty as 1)iuiling on oiu'si-lf ; ddwo tlie same duty, 
 but rather as osved tn nf/tr'rs, "lam bound to," " under an obligation 
 to.'" Tiie particii)le in -du.s includes botli duty and mccssdif, and is 
 far commoner than either opnrtet or iioa!.^s)' est. 
 
1 1 
 
 144 
 
 CAAT, COUI.D, MAY, ETC. [Ex. XXIV. 
 
 199. To ('.\])n'.ss necessity, use citluir, iis abovo, tlic 
 participle ill -^///.s-, which implies both ihif\i and nn-issihi 
 
 (a.) Tihi iiioriciidum est, erit, You iiiusf (Hf, you will 
 liarr to <li(^ ; 
 
 (h.) T'lli'i inoricuduiu fuit, eiat, You Jnul to die ; 
 Or, more rarely and to inii)ly (thsolntf: (proi»erly hxjinil) 
 necessity. 
 
 {a.) Tihi mnr't (somotimes iimridrc) uccessei ,,_^f^ ^-^.//^ 
 
 (/'.) Tihi iiiorl {soinotiines iiKiirrrrc) iicccsse cmf, t"if- 
 
 200. Tlit'ie are no words in Latin ans\vt'rin«i; to tin- uoids 
 "possililc," "inipossililc," " )i()ssil)ility." " iiiipossihiliiy." Tiny iim>l 
 he triiislated l)y substantival chinHCs stiboi'dinatc tu llie iniprrsoiial 
 phrase /fV?-/, poffsf with iit or <fiii)i. (See 125, r ; 132. (/.) 
 
 There was iin ponKihilitu of our eseapiu<,^ Noii tieii |)Mtuit i(t 
 
 I'lfuf/rri'iiivx. 
 It is iinjxisKilil*' for us not to believe this. Non fieri potest qaiih 
 hoc nnJojiins. 
 Or by a personal use of 2>osiiuw, 
 
 Non ([ff'ttijcrc poteranius. Non possumns hoc von crcdi re. 
 Ohs. Viilcut can be only used inipeisonally with pa-si ve and 
 impersonal verbs. "It is possible to ])creeive this" is not "//oc 
 intelletrere j>f»^'.s7," but ^' hoc intellegi potest." 
 
 201. The case of the predicate {ifter lia't and narHsc est 
 should he carefully noticed. 
 
 Aliifi lii'cf ii^navis esse, robis iicrcs.se est viris i'ortihus cs 
 
 '.s'.sV 
 
 Others may l)e cowards, you must needs {t^r pert'orcc) 
 be brave men. 
 This is in ac-ordance with the natural construetion of link verbs. 
 (Seelntr. 71) 
 
 202. The use of the infinitive mood with such inipersoiial \eibs 
 as constat, aji/iant, "it is evident" (not "it seems "j, etc., has bci'u 
 pointed out (46, c). 
 
 It is also used with ini])ersonals, denoting a fecJiiKj or emotion. 
 "Me j)i(jet, jntiJct, taedet, deJectat, jioenitct, inihi lUnt. Thus, Jxtic me 
 fec^sse irndct, jioenitct, taecld, I am ashamed, I rei)ent, am weary, of 
 having done this. 
 
 ^ Necesne est expresses either a piirely logical necessity coiicu'riiing 
 things or ideas, in which case it takes the accusafirr and inlinitive, 
 his hina (ptattKor esse vccesse c^t, "twice two w».sY needs be four;"' or 
 the pame idea of the inevitable as applied to a person, when it takes 
 dot Ire and infinitive, or subjunctive, haec tihi pati, (or haec patiare) 
 necense est. 
 
Ex. XXIV. J C"./.\; .!/./)■, M[\S7\ SHOULD, ETC. 
 
 145 
 
 Also witli prrliiht ail, interest and refert, " it is of inijMJitiiiifo," and 
 \\'\\\\ .niihi) j)lactt, ridetnr, "it secnis gnod tliat," (not it sunis thtit). 
 \N'itli till' I.Mst two tlie xNclause is also iist'd, 
 
 I seixitid ]ilaciiit, risiiin ext. It was 
 Mitti hu/ntnn, ) rcsolvt-d liv, or it sicmed ^ood to, the 
 
 Vt iiiitterontur htjiiti, ^ Senate tliat anil)assadors sliould be sent. 
 
 ( (See 46, h.) 
 
 Krcrrisr 2 4. 
 
 1. Wo oun'lit lonij," ao() to liave lislciit'd to tlie tfueliing 
 of so i^iciit ii pliilo;-;()})liL'i'^ as this. 2. Was it not your dniy 
 to sacrili(,'(^ your own life and your own interests to tlie 
 welfare of tlie nation ? 3.. Tlie eon([iiere(l and the eowaril 
 
 '/.) 
 
 he sh 
 
 th 
 
 iti 
 
 fi'ee(l( 
 
 asserters of th 
 111 list needs he free. 4. I blush at liaviii^f jtersuaded you to 
 ah;iiiil(iii this nohle undertaking. 5. You iiad my leave to 
 warn vdur friends and relations not to run headlon*' into 
 -^ueii (laiiuer and ruin. It was inipossilile for a citizen of 
 Jionie-lo(.'onsent to oheva despot of this kind. 7. You niiuht 
 Inive seen whiit the enemy was doing, but perhaps you 
 ])rel'erred to be ini])rovident and blind. 8. This (is what) 
 you ouuhtto have done ; you miulit have fallen lighting in 
 i aUle ; and you were bound to die a thousand deaths rather 
 than saeriliee the nation to your own interests. 1). Are 
 you not ashamed of having in your old age, in order to 
 ])lease your worst enemies, been false to your friends, and 
 betrayed your country? 10. l)o'^ not be afraid; 1 shall 
 leave you to come to Home as often as you please ; and 
 when you come* there"'' l)e sure you stay in my house if 
 you can. 11. Twice two must needs be lour; it does not 
 follow" that we must all consult alwavs our own interest. 
 
 ^ 98, Ohs. • l-a. * V.3. ••Tense? (See 190, i. 
 
 ■' Vov "and there' use "whither,' (jiio. (.^ee 78.) 
 " Son idcirco, lit. ' ' ■we must not for that reason. " 
 
EXERCISh XXV. 
 CASES. 
 General Remarks. 
 
 203. There is nothing in whicli Latin (liffers more from 
 pjig'lisii tliiiii in wliiit are caUcil its cases. 
 
 liy Case we mean such a cliange in tiie lurm of a noun 
 (substantive, ailjeetive, ])ronoun, or ]);utieiple) as marivs 
 its relation to other words in a senttsnce. 
 
 204. These chanj,'os consist in the substitution of one movable and 
 varidhle tirminaium tor anotlier. Thus Pvirus Pdro carus <;.sf, Peter 
 is dear to Peter ; Pitriis dominnin sirntu.-i (,s7, Peter followed hln 
 mister. We have here three different cases, Pitnis, J\tro, dmninnm, 
 but the same clianj^'e of ineanint,', wliich Latin rejjresents by ditferent 
 terminations, Pdro, domiinxiw, we express in Enjrlisli,' not by a cli.in^e 
 in the termination of the wonL but by introcbicinti; the ])re{»ositi()n to 
 in the one case, and by the order of the words in tlie other ; instead 
 of siiying Petnm domhnxm seentns cut, we phvce Peter before, niMster 
 after, the verb. (See Intr. 14.) 
 
 205. In Latin tlie order of the woids will tell us little or nothin<; of 
 the relation of a noun to the rest of the sentence ; tlu' exact reliition 
 of the noun is marked by its case ; but as there are only six or at 
 most seven cases, and the number of relations which lauifua'je has to 
 exju'ess is far jfreater than six or seven, the case-system is liiruely 
 assisted by a ;jtreat immber of ;>)V7)o.s///(i;/,s', which help to give pre- 
 cision and clearness to the meaning of the case. 
 
 203. The word "case"' is an English form of a L;itin word, rasns 
 (CJk. TTTwo-Li'), used l)y grammariiins to denote n fallhuj, or deviation, 
 fruiu what they held to be the true or pro])cr form of the word. .The 
 nonunative was called, fancifully enough, the enxita mtu^, as that 
 form of the word which stood nprvjht, or in its natural position. The 
 other cases were called casus obliqiii, as sJantiinj or falling over from 
 this position ; and by deeJinatio, or " declension," was meant the whole 
 system of these deviations, or, as we call tliem, iiijlixions. 
 
 ' The English language once possessed, as Oernian does still, a case- 
 sys!:('.m ; but this only survives in the strictly /xM.svN.s/rc case, " Quecn'.s 
 speech.' etc., and in ctirtain pronouns he, him ; ir/in, irlmse, whom, etc, 
 140 
 
Ex. XXV.] 
 
 GENERA L RE MA RK'S. 
 
 147 
 
 207. Tlic Latin cases arc si \ in nninlx'r: t lie Nominative, 
 Accusative, Dative, Ablative, Genitive, Vocative. 1 1< sides 
 these there is a c;isc, nearly obsolete in the chissical period 
 of Latin, tlic Locative. 
 
 208. (i.) The Nominative indicates tlu; subject of the 
 verb. 
 
 Witli'Ut sucli sulijoct, expressed or iindcrstodd, a verlt is iiiciniiii;^- 
 less. The iifiirest ai)|)r()iicli to tlie iiliseiice of u iioiiiitnitive is in siicli 
 impersoiiid forms of intransitive verhs as (•'/?■/•//»/•, "tlicic is ;i iiiiinin^,"' 
 liHiiiKitidih est, "tliere Wiis fii^^litin^f." '.See Iiitr. 4l'. 
 
 It was Ciilli'd the CfM^/.x iiomiiKttiru,^^ a.s deiiotiiij^f tlit; ti'iine of a 
 person or thini^ — Caemrf liotmi, ((om ii.-<, 
 
 209. (ii.) Th(; Accusative completes tlx; nieaninn (d' a 
 transitive vei'b by denotiiiLf the ininiedialc! object of its 
 action. Te clilro, 1 see i/on. (Intr. 37, .'is.) 
 
 It was called the cnsas acciisatirni^^ interpreted ;is lieiiiLj th;it wldcli 
 we use to Hiinie a person wh<iin we hlanie. l»ut the oriinn.d n;inie 
 
 • • • 
 
 I diTiuTiKt]) was prol)aI)ly ;,dven to it as deiiotinjf the (iiTut, or canst- of 
 the action of tlie tiansiuve verb. 
 
 In EiiLjlisli it is usually marked by fcdlowinir th<; verb, 
 as llu> noniiiiative by ])recedin,L;- it. "The siui illuminates 
 the world;" "the worM fe(ds the sunli-ht." 
 
 In Latin it more often ])rt cedes tiie verb. 
 
 Its SI nse, })ossilily its earliest, of nidlion toiray-d.s is sMIl inarked 
 liy its use after prepositions, inii)lyinif this idea, <*(/, in, siih, and l»y 
 its use with the names r)f towns to denote the same idea witliout a 
 preposition : llonnun iho, I shall ;fo fo Home. 
 
 Jt is used also as tlie subject of verbs in the infinitive tiiood, te hoc 
 diccre, ^^ that ijoa should say this." 
 
 210. (iii.) The Dative is mainly used to re|)resent tlu; 
 remoter object, or the person or thing intcirsdd in th(! 
 action of tiie verb. 
 
 It was called the C'li^^Di dntini.'i (TTToxng ^otiki)) as that used when 
 we name a person to irhoiii anythinu; i^; 'jivi n. 
 
 For the ofeut importance and wide use of tlie l)ati\i' 
 witli intransitive verbs which are leiiresented in Ku'disii 
 by verbs really or apparently 1 1'ansii ive, see Intr. ."W'l. 
 
 These tlu'ce cases then, the nnm umti ri\ (Ii-chsuI li-i\ and 
 >l'<tin\ arc; most intimately connected with the /v/A, as 
 
H 
 
 14S 
 
 CtSES. 
 
 (Ex. XXV. 
 
 rcprcscntiiin the oik; its ,s///yVr/, tlui otlicr two llif nh/ic/s 
 lo wliicli its jMttion is prhiuo'ilif iind srn)H(htri//j diiwAvA. 
 
 211. (iv.) Till' Ablative IS iilso closely coiiiicctcil with 
 the veil), l)iit in !i (linciciit iimiiiicr; il is aiu/'/rr/'/z/V^/casc, 
 /'.'. it. is, lik(! tli(! iidvcilt, an attendant on, or snlrUifr of, 
 tlicverli. It ;^ives I'nrtlier )>art icidai's as to t li(! liiodt^ of 
 actimi of the verh in addition to those; supplied l>y its 
 niarei'aiid icin(»ter olij'cict. (See liilr. lO.) Its t'uiict ions 
 are \ery wide, I'or it can ('X])l'l'ss tlie saiirrr^ ci/iisc, iiis/ra- 
 im III, /iiii<\ /)/tfrr, ntfiniirr, clrriniis/tfucis, ol' tho action of 
 the Nci'h, as well as tlu; ]»oint froiii wlncli uiofion takes 
 ])lacf. 
 
 I|i)r,i nnii s('])timri riili. I saw him (if tho scNcntli hour. 
 Kmsc nnii httcrfcrl. 1 slew him /'//// a sword. 
 L'om;i /ii'Dft'ctiis est. He S(;t owt frotii Rome. 
 
 These are only three examples of tho nuiny and various 
 senses ii! whi(di this case is used. 
 
 It u ;is ('itll<'(1 tlic (vr.s'i/:.- fihlatinis {TrrcoiTii (hf)ni^fTiKij) as indicating, 
 aiiKHiLT iis (itlicr iiicaninjf.s, the \H'VH(m j'nnn wlioni anything is takai', 
 or t.,e [ilace//7)j/( wliicli it is rcinoved. 
 
 21.?. (V.) The Locative case {hicn.s), answering,' t(» tlie 
 (pie^tioii, ir/n /•!• ? (if vhat ])lacc !■ remains, as distinct from 
 th(! ahlalive, only in certain words. 
 
 Jtomiic (ai), (if Rome ; Laud'nii, at Lon<lon. 
 
 (( ■oni])are ihi, iihi, there, where ?) It also is therefore an 
 ndrrrliiiil case. 
 
 213. All these cases th' n are closely connected with the verb. The 
 ndiuiuative sets, so to speak, the verb in motion ; its movement is 
 completed and directed (V the Mther cases. 
 
 214. (vi.) The Genitive, on the other hand, is an atten- 
 dant on nouufi rather than on rcrJi-'^. Tlie main use of a noun 
 in llie n'enilive js to detine ;>r (nialify another noun (sub- 
 stantive, pronoim. adjective, or partici})le), to which it is 
 closely attached, or oi which it is ])redicated. 
 
 Compare '" Gallos ricii" with "(Jallorum rirfor," " te 
 arncW with " tui Cif ci'iantissimns," 
 
 ( 
 
Ex. XXV. 
 
 ///A .V(>.]//x.r/7t7-:. 
 
 I41» 
 
 1 1 ' 
 
 1 Iciiic iis ('\i I'ciiicly ('( nullum use as a siilist iiiil'' U>\\ 
 ailjfci ivt'. 
 
 /'//■ siiimiiar \iituti.s = /■//• optiniiis. 
 
 Its ii-ic in comlmiatioii Nvitli vt'i'iis (luniu'iti, oh/in'sn r, 
 iii(/i)/i<i) is (juiic «'xci!pli()iial. (Sec 228, (flis.) 
 
 It uis ciillfil tlu' casus i/i II it I I'liA iis i'('|iivsriil iii'^' ilcscfiit (i' la^ r, 
 
 I'lj^is /'7//^^■ ; l)Ut till' (Jl't't'lx TTTuxriv yfinKij pruliii lil\ lilfaill the ilij\iiin<i 
 
 case, that wliicli aiMf"! the yti'ov or I'lass tn uliicli a word liclouni ,|. 
 
 It was also soiiu'tlint's callt'tl imsmssirn.-i, soiiirl in irs //->//•/.■/(/.-.■ ; |'liili|t|ii 
 
 jiliii!^. 
 
 215. (vii.) Tlic Vocative case, rofatlrns {KXtjTiKt'j), is 
 t.lif t'diiii uscil ill a(ltll■c^ssi^'L,f a jx-rsoii : lili, ui// .smi. As a 
 mere i/i/i r/'rr/iii/i (liitr. '2H) it iloes not al'leet the syntax 
 of the seiiteiice. 
 
 The Nominative. 
 
 216. Tlicru is no special dillicultv in the svntax >>\ 
 tile iioniiiiative. 
 
 The accusative after tli<! aetive verh (tlie "/;/'"/,) heeonn's 
 the iii)iniiiati\ (! (llie •-iiihjtct) ti) tiie jiassixc \t'ili. 
 
 Jlnif //■'< i'ao^iuvm infcr/ecit. Jinitus kilh-d Cai-sar. I'ltt, 
 Caesar <i Jlniln inferfectna a.^f. ("aesar was killed hy jlriitus. 
 Urhem dhsii/irn curju'ridif ; urbs dhsji/rri rmji/d is/, 
 
 (With passive verli.s the jia.ssive of the vt-rli i-m jii i,-> ust d.) 
 
 O/w. -It is t)fU'u advisable in traiislatiii}^' iVoiii Latin into Lnirli.-ii, 
 and rlrc riri<(i, to sahstiiute one voice; for the otlicr. Thus, u, 
 prevent anil)i<ftiity, "1 know tliat Brutus killed ( 'ar.sar " should 1 c 
 translattd by ncio (WcHurcia a Jirufti iiifcrfi rt n m rssr^ not ]ty ( 'nisan . • 
 Unit II III tHtirJecisnc Aio ti', Aiariila. lioinniKis rinrnr jm.-tar is ;i i 
 instance of oracular ambiguity, whicii shoid.d be careftdiy avoided i.i 
 writiiin' Latin. 
 
 217. It. has been already exjdained that niaiiv Kiiulis'i 
 frtnisi/irc Ncihs are repres(inted in Latin by Inl m ih-<il u> 
 verbs, i.e. verbs wliich eoinjdete their sense, not by tli;' 
 aid of the aixusatlvc, but by that of the dative. (See Inti'. 
 3().) 
 
 Tile passive voice of such verbs can only lie used 
 im})crsonnll}j (see 5) ; hence the iwiainat'ivc of an lui-ii.- h 
 
 IS 
 
150 
 
 CASES. 
 
 [Ex. XXV. 
 
 'I? 
 
 ;f- 
 
 sciilciicc IS (tl'icii I'cjircsciilcil ill l.iitiii hy the da/in, cAnii- 
 
 l)i) 
 
 km! wiili a ])iissi\(' \(iii used i.'njK'i'soua 
 
 llv. 
 
 N 
 
 ciiiini II ii'ilns iKict 
 
 'hn: A 
 
 '/ IIIH' 
 
 is liui't 1)V us. 
 
 Pii'To iiii/irrnfiiiii ' sf III rnjciii r.rrifKrcf. The st'vn'vf, was 
 
 oi'dorf'tl to A\;ik(; tlic kiiiti;. 
 
 Til 
 
 )i It II III I (I rrn 
 
 ililiir.^ Ymi arc Ix'lieNcd 1)\- no ono. 
 
 (lIoi'ia(! tii;t<' Inridrlur. Yinir (/Inn/ is envied. 
 OA.s'.— The saiiit' irMi('rs()ii;il cnn-tnu't ioii is \\^i'(\ in tlie ].nssivc with 
 tlutsc iiitr.-iiisilivc vcil'S which coiii|)lctc t'lcir sense \)\ a iiicpcsitioii 
 ;iii(l sulislaiiti\c. 
 
 A.l 
 
 iii'K III iieri'i II mnia. 
 
 'dill IK 
 
 J 
 
 I iirhi 
 
 \\ 
 
 e reachcil the eit v. 
 
 'iv( iituiri est. Tlie city was iiow I'eaclieil. 
 
 218. This iiiij)cis()n:il coiistniclion constat. lly icin'cscnls 
 tlic iioiiiiiiat iv(! of iin English ah.stnict ( i vcihiil iionii.- 
 
 /// iirh/' niaxinie tfepidatiini est. T!ie (jrentcsl oiiijiisinii 
 
 iciii;iicd in th(! city. 
 yli! iirniii sii])ilo conciii-suni est. TiuTo was a sudden ritsji 
 to anus 
 
 yirrllcr ])airiiattini est. Tlie //)/// //// 7 wan Jicrre, 
 /SW//^' amhiiiatiini est. AVe liave liad enoti<di of indl. 
 
 I mi. 
 
 OA.s'. — Til sucli })hi'ases the ]<ai<rlisli lulji'd nr will lie repie.sciite(l l)y 
 a L;'tiii ltd I-' rJ). 
 
 219. AVith this impcisonal construction of the ])assivc wlion nsed 
 in tlie intinitivo, jintist, ])otiiit, etc., arc used ini))ersonally (never 
 otherwise, sec 200, O/as'.) ; a-' .dso an impersonal passive foiiii of sonic 
 modal verbs, as coijiiinn cs'^, <Je.'<itiuii i.'^t. 
 
 Ill 
 
 ir ndpdi' iipiii.^ci, ] 
 
 10 
 
 test. It 
 
 IS poss 
 
 ihlc to pardon this fanlt. 
 
 /.'rs/.s'// tioii \) itiiit. Resistance was impossil)le. 
 Jiiiii ]ii;iiii(iri eoepium (desitum) ei5t. The fii^htintf has now 
 heouii (•.•eased). 
 
 220. The use of the nominative with the infinitive when com- 
 hineil with a modal verh has been ])ointed out: of /onus <'.s's<' nijiii), dilim, 
 inn'jni), etc. (see 42), I desire, am bound, beirin, etc., to be at leisiiie. So 
 also its use with ridcnr, crtdor, narror, etc. : ridniv, cndor, diror .'<('rrn<i 
 
 j!ll.<<', I 
 
 t seiMiis, is believed, said, etc., that J was a slave. (See 43. 1 
 
 These poiius, as well as the indefinite and unex])ressed nominative 
 with impersMiiiil verbs and such ]»hrases as crrdinit, dicinif, etc. '44") 
 have been ahvady mentioned ; so that the following exeirises will be 
 mainly reeaiiitulatorv. 
 
 /.''. 
 
 You are lu'lieved ///, or fnislid, \i\ n 
 
 o one. 
 
 Credo in tlii 
 
 sense is intransitnc aiiil iroxeiiis a, ihitivi 
 
 in tlic sinse of " T IkI'cvi 
 
 or 
 
 think," it follows tlit^ usual eoiistnietion of lu Hut .loi/lrtuli 
 
 \ 
 
 oU 
 
 arc lit lieved bv no one to have done tliis "" woulil be o iin/lt) /mr /' 
 
 ei-edcris. (See 43.) 
 
 See liitr. 41?. 
 
Ex. XXV.] 
 
 'THE NOMIXATIVE. 
 
 151 
 
 Exercise, 25. 
 A. 
 
 1. Your noodin'.ss will be t'livicd. 2. Liars aiv never 
 believeil. \\. lint for voii^ Kv^-)^ ^^~^ >■'"• '"'^ want to be 
 free ^ 4. 1 )o not become .slaves ; slaves will be no niore 
 ])ar(lone(l tlian freemen. 5. It seemed tliat you made no 
 answer 111 bis- ((ucslion. 6. So I'ai' from bcinn bated by 
 us, \()U are even lavoured. 7. For myself,"' it seems to 
 lue tbat I bave acted riubtly; Imt you possibly tak<' a 
 different view. S. I will ask wbicb of tbe two is favoured 
 bv tile kiiie'. 1). Tbe liLibtiuL; bas been fierce to-dav ; tlie 
 
 contest will be lon^L;er and more desperate to-mono 
 
 u 
 
 I^ 
 
 1. 'Ill 
 
 dd 
 
 tb 
 
 leieiipon a suiulen ' cry arose m ine rear, and a 
 ^ti'anec "* confusion reiuncd aloiiiL; '' tbe wbolc line of niarcli. 
 
 •1. Wlien I said " ve 
 
 vou 
 
 bel 
 
 level I me 
 
 J 
 
 cannot under 
 
 stand wliy you refuse to trust my word wben 1 say " no." 
 3. Wlien^* a Itov I was witb diHicultv persuaded not to 
 become a sailor, and face tbe violence of tbe sea, tbe 
 winds, and stoi'iiis ■ as an old man I ]»refer sittiiiL;' at 
 leisure, at bonie to eitber sailiun or travelling : you ])erliaps 
 
 4. You ouubt to bave been C(tnteiit 
 
 li 
 
 lave tbe same views. 
 
 witb sucli <4oo(l fortune as Ibis, and never (110) to ]ia\e 
 made it vour aim to endanger evervtliinii bv niaknc' 
 excessive demands." 5. So far from cruelty bavini; been 
 
 It and rebellion on tbe part 
 
 si 
 
 lown in our case, a revo 
 
 of our foreiatbers lias been twice over ]»ardoned by 
 En|Liland. <>. It seems tbat your brotber was a brave 
 man, but it is ])retty well allowed** tbat be sliowed binist If 
 rasli and improvident \\\ tliis matter. 7. It seems tbat 
 be was tbe first of'-* tbat nation to wisb to become our 
 fellow-subject, and it is said tbat be was tbe last wlio pre- 
 served in old aj^e the memory of (their) ancient liberties. 
 
 * "But for you," Vo^ vero ; "for"= "as for," and is simply (unphatic. 
 The t'lnphasis is ^'ivcii in Latin hy the ».sr ami jjlacc; of ro.s'. (11, a.) 
 
 " To him (pnjstinning. ' h'(/iilil<r)i. 
 
 * AUjectivea will becoinu a(lverl)S. (See 218, Ohs.) 
 
 ^ " Along " may be expressed by the ablative of place. 
 
 •' See 63. * - agreed on, 
 
 ^ " Views," etc., not to Ikj e:!tpresrte<l, see 64 : vf, 91, " (v:, 
 

 
 M- ■ 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ?, 
 
 
 I' 
 
 V r 
 
 I" : 
 
 EXERCISf: XXVI. 
 
 APPOSITION. 
 
 Apposition is not confined to the nominative; but it 
 is more often used with tlie nominative and aceusative 
 than with other cases. 
 
 The general rnle was given in 3; see also 227. 
 
 221. TIic substantive in apposition stands in the relation of an 
 adjcctiv*,' to the substantive with wliich it is combined ; in Thihni', 
 Bot'otiac e;ipur, the words in apposition (h'tine Tlubcs by atlding the 
 s[> ■cial ipiality ol' ils beiuy the caj>it<il of fionotia. 
 
 Ti diieem xoiniiinir. We follow you as,^ or in. thr C(tj)aclfii of, 
 our leader. 
 
 Hence il" the substantive be fiminiiie, use the ftnninirie 
 form, whenever it exists, of the substantive in apposition. 
 
 Vsu>i, niagister ci/rei/iiis. Experience, an admirable 
 tcaclici'. 
 P)Ut — J'/iilits ,j/!/i.i, niagistra nKirmii. rihlosophy, the teacher 
 of morals. 
 
 222. Wlicri' a geographical expression, such as "city," 
 " isl.ind." " promontory," is dctined in Knglisli by of, with 
 a })roper name, apposition is used in Latin. Thus — 
 
 Urbs Vt'ii, the city of ^^Mi : tnsiihi ('y})rus, the island of 
 Cyprus ; ^It/ifinis, urbcm iuc/i/f(Uii, the renowned city 
 of Athens. 
 
 ()')(!.— \ .similar exjjlanatorv "of may be represented in Latin by 
 the word ?'<.n' in apposuion to another substantive. 
 
 Libcrto^. res prdiosinsiniK. 'IMie pi'ecious possession of freedom. 
 
 ^ We must always ask what ((s means. "We follow you as { = (is 
 t/ioi(i//i) a (!od '" is, fr (luasi Deum sci/idmur. 
 
Ex. XXVI.] 
 
 APPOSITION. 
 
 ir»:i 
 
 223. Certain substa .tn-es are regularly used in aiipositidu as 
 
 idjecl 
 
 ive.s. 
 
 Cum fiiio adolescentul 
 ('//)/(. cxercitii tiroiie. 
 
 With a son ir >■ irhj ijimth 
 With a iuirbi Urkd army. 
 
 Nemo' pii'fi>i\ no painter ; always nemo never niillna) Uoimoi 
 
 II a. 
 
 1 
 
 no ivomaii. 
 
 224. The liomaiis did not combine, as wo do, an adjec- 
 tive of })rais(! or hlauH} witli a proi)i'r name (rarely ^vitll a^ 
 rd denoting a ])er.s()n) unless l»y way ot cu'/iKuinit ur 
 
 wo 
 
 (if/i\ as O. L'd'/iii'i Sc pirns. 
 
 They substituted cir (or Jinmo) with an adjective, in 
 apposition. 
 
 " The learned Cato " is " dito, vir dniilssinnis." 
 
 " Your gallant o/- excellent brother " is '' Fmfrr tiiti.'<, vir 
 
 f()iiis.<i III '!■•<, iiplhnn^ 
 *'The abandoned Catiline" is '' Cali/ina, honu) jx'idi 
 
 fisM'uiiK^." (See 57, a.) 
 
 Ohs. 1. — This appositional nse of vir or honin with an adjective 
 
 //- 
 
 often sui)p]ies the place o.^' the aljsent jmrticiple of 
 Haic nil', homo- i)i'doriintix'<innis, pi'rpisti 
 
 ■<t. Tills is what 
 
 he, hiiiig [i.e. in t^jritc of hiiiKj) a perfectly innocent mai 
 
 endureil. 
 0/'.s\ '2. — Sometimes it represents our " xo uood, liad, et 
 
 C. , II ■'t. 
 
 Te hominenr' ievissimum, or, te, virum <)[)tiuuun mlit. lie hate 
 
 so tririmg a person, so good a man, as you ; ur one so gooii 
 etc., as you. 
 
 225. The substantive or adjective is often used in ap[»ositioi 
 
 witii an unexpressed personal pronoun. 
 
 Mater te uppiUo. J your mother call you ; or it is your molliei- 
 
 who calls you. 
 Omnes mjAainn^. All of n.s are here. 
 Quot *'.s'f/x / How many '>/ //()(t are there? Treceiiti oiUininia. 
 
 "'i'lieie are three hundred of »s hero." (See 297.) 
 Hocfu-itis lioncini. Tiiis is wliat //"" Tionians do 
 
 X'mo is a substantive : ini'hri. whicli suiiplirs iiriiio with geii'tivi 
 
 dilative, and often dative, an adjective 
 - 'I'iie word ill annositiou e;on 'raliv follows, uii 
 
 e>s UliUsii;il eiiiplia^is 
 
 IS 
 
 to l)e conveyed. Jii.r comes before the proi)er name Mc a[»plied t( 
 
 nr. 
 
 hcreilitary kings, pro rrji' IJirifuro. 
 
 '^ Homo is "a human being ' as o{)posed to an animal oi' a (iod 
 "a man" as opposed to a woman or child, lieiiee Ikhhu is joined 
 with adjectives of either praise or blame ; )•//• with adjectives <-^ strong 
 praise, yb;V/.s-.s//Hf/x, opfimti--^, etc. 
 
154 
 
 APPos/r/OjV. 
 
 [Ex. XXVI. 
 
 11 
 
 if ' 
 
 i '1^ 
 
 ll \\ 
 
 111 
 
 1 ^t- ' 
 
 . ij 
 
 S ;?' 
 
 'S 
 
 i^^ ;.» 
 
 J 
 
 ll 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 f ■ 
 
 li 
 
 iiji.^^ 
 
 fe:i 
 
 ^i 
 
 226. 'I'lin ])r(Hli('ate nj^i'ees witli tlie principal sul)stiiii- 
 tivc, unless tliat 'ne tlui iiamo of a town in tlic plural, wIhmi 
 it natuially a^ree.s with the singular word iirhs or oirpidum, 
 etc., in a]»[)osition. Thus — 
 
 Brutus ct Cassius, .*</>^s nostrd, occich^ruiit. IJrutus and 
 ("ass'iis, our (only) hope, have fallen. 
 Hut — Tluihac, Ilfit'ti/idc aijHif, jianic ihAatum est. Tlichrs, the 
 capital of I'oeotia, was nearly annihilated. 
 
 227. Single words aio used appositionully in all cases ; phrases, 
 ■i.i. coiiiliinatidiis ot words, only in the nonuuiitive and accusative; 
 in otlio)' casts, and witli jji-cposition.s, a f/»/-clause is substituted. 
 
 J''.itiiiii() I'liihjh io, <(U()(1 JiyjiiK rripufilinie Innicn fnit. 
 All Lnii'Ojiifrdiii, (|U()d (((ji'i Itlugini jiro))iovtoriniti rxf. 
 Nctii I' ill each case tlie attraction of the relative to the j^ender of 
 tlic ],!e(licate. iSee 83.) 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 1. Philosophy, he says, was (32) the inventor of law,^ 
 tlie teacher of nioi'als and discipline. 2. I'here is a tradi- 
 tion that A})iohie, a city of extreme- auti([uity, was taken 
 in this ('ani])aiuni. 3. It is said that your gallant father 
 Fhuninius founded in his consulshij) the flourishing' colony 
 of Placcnlia. 4. Do not, says he, 1 earnestly imjdore you, 
 my count lymen, throw away the precious jewels of freedom 
 and honour, to humour a tyrant's capi'ice. ;"). The soldier, 
 in s])ite of his entire innocence, was thrown into jirison ; 
 tli(^ uallant centurion was butchered then and thei'c. 
 G. 'j'here is a story tliat this ill-starred kin^- was the first 
 of his race to visit the island of Sicily, and the first to 
 have beludd I'rom a distance the beautiful city of Syracuse. 
 7. T should scarc(dy Ixdieve that so shrewd a man as 
 your father would hi.ve j)ut confidence in these^ promises 
 of his. 
 
 
 ' Sec p. 7-, II. -. 
 
 -Use adjt'cti\f "most ancient" for adjectival jdirase (}>. 17, )i.2, 
 and sec 214). 
 
 '' "In liini making {/Kirtidjilr) these promises," (64.) 
 
 r 
 
I-: X /■: h' c I s K xxr/f. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 228. The accusative has liccii alrnidy (hMiiicd as the 
 case of the direct or nearer object of the transitive verb. 
 
 It iiiav be said tliat iht^ (lii'cct oliirct of cvcrv sudi vcrli. 
 inchi(lin,L;' depoiu'iits and iniiicisonals, is a wdi'd iu this 
 case, and in tliis only. 
 
 Te vhh'o, U\ scqatiiiiir, to ]ili/>'f, or jiornifcf. 
 
 Ohs. — Tlie apparent exceptions are not really execptioii.s. Wlien 
 we say that iu Iiatin tlie wonls pur, it, ] oltey, 'nfnr, J use, m-iiiini. \ 
 remember, govern a dnfhr, tdilat iri, and firiiilir,' nsiicctivcly, we 
 really mean that the IJonians put die iilcas which \\v cxpix'ss liy thi >e 
 three verbs into a ditt'erent shape to tliat which wr cinploy ; ami that 
 in neither of the thiee they maile use of a transitive vcil>, conibiiHMl 
 with its nearer oliject. In the tiist case we say, '* I olny i/oii :'' tliey 
 said, tibi i^'irvo, " I am obedient to you." In the sctiuid W(> say, '' I 
 use you;" tliey said, ntor vobis, " I serve miiMlf in'th you." In the 
 third we say, "I reniend)er iion ;'' they said, tui Jihun'tii, " I am mind- 
 ful of you." In a precisely similar way, whi-re the L'omaiis said /»■ 
 seqtiiiiinr, tlie (ireeks said (toI fnnufda, '' we are followers to //m/.'' 
 They looked, that is, on the person followed as nnirlit infiTisfrd 
 ill, but not, as the IJomans did, as the direct ohjcrt nf, the action 
 described Viy the verb (eno^eda). 
 
 229. Many intransitive verbs in Latin, as in Knolish, 
 hecoine transitive, when eoin]»onnil<'(l with a ]ii(']iosition. 
 (See Intr. 24, and also 24.) 
 
 This is especially the case with verbs that express some bodily 
 
 movement or action ; often the compound verli has a special uie.iuiiiu;.' 
 
 Urham oji^nff/z/o, I'spiKjiio, ob.s'/(/(o, eirciimsi r/i o. I assault, stoiiu. 
 
 blockade, invest, a city. 
 rVtc.s'fU'i m conr<;/(/o, circum/'i // /c I have an intii\ie\v wilh, 
 overreach (/?• deframl, ('ae.sir. 
 
 * Praextdre, wlien it means "to excel," is generally used with a dat., 
 though sometimes witli an ace. ; hut uitli si\ pivir-tfiiri' is comiimn as a 
 factitive verb (See 239.) /iirirtujii ■■« a liilioriliii-< praestitit, \\{' ■■</i(jirii/ 
 himself invincible by ("/■ on the side of) toils. 
 
 ii 
 
 '1/ 
 
 'I 
 
 'I 
 
m^ 
 
 •i 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 156 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 [Ex. XXVII. 
 
 (yoiiipiirc "I on\\\\w him," " I occ/'cauie him," etc. 
 Most of these verbs sire used freely in the passive. A te circum- 
 vciituH tiuni. I was lU-'fraiided by you. 
 
 Ohs. Tniiindiircrr, (rdusjicere {trajicerc) are used witli a double 
 accusative. 
 
 (lopias Hellespontum fransdn.rif. 
 
 (yopiae Klieiuim trdjictae sunt. 
 80 also — Transjedo liheno, abl. abs. 
 
 230. Certain verbs of ^eaching {(loceo), concealing {cch) 
 demanding ^poxro, JlmjUo), asking questions {roijo, mfr,rri)(/i>), 
 tiiay he joined with two ucciisatives, one of the ^>c'/'6'o;i, 
 another of the thiiifj. 
 
 Quis inri.^irdin dociiit Epdm.'nuwihim? Who taught Epam- 
 
 iiiondas uuisio ] 
 Nihil nos ctllat. He conceals nothing //v)?m us. 
 Verres jxh'enfcs pretiiiin pro i^cpulfvrd llherum poscehat. 
 
 Verres used to demand of parents a payment for tlie 
 
 burial of their childi'en. 
 Jlfilioni (h'os iiagito, I implore better things of the gods 
 
 Ji(irirni.'< me pri)iiiini rogavit tiententimn} I was the first 
 w]u»m Kacilius asked for his oi)inion. 
 
 231. I)Ut this coiistriietiou is commonest witli the 
 neuter ])i'on()uns lioc, illud, nihil ; otherwise very frcqiioitly 
 (and with some verl)S alirai/H) either the person or the 
 ihi)!;/ is governed ])y n 2))r position. 
 
 Thus, thouj;h doveo always takes the accusative of the person, 
 unlike ilico., uarro, etc. (tibi hoc dico, te hoc doceo), yet doceo, to give 
 information, ]irt'fers the ablative witli dr for the thing told. After 
 jii'to and jxK'ifidn, .'i())ii(tl)iii)i after tlie other verbs of heijijiuf), the 
 pcr.tnu is ))ut in the ahJ. with a: and after rngo, inferrogo, etc., the 
 thituj often stands in the ahl. witli </<'. 
 
 Ilacc abs ie pnpmtci. I have made this re((nest of you. 
 J)e his rebus i^onarcin doiut. He informs Caesar of these facts. 
 De hac re tc cdatnm volo. I wish you kept in the dark about 
 this. 
 
 ^ Scntentiavi i-0(/(iir is a technical expression "to ask a senator for 
 his opinion and vote," and the ace. is preserved in the i)assive : primus 
 sententiani roijntu.-< ,^uin, " 1 was asked lut/ opinion first." 
 
Ex. XXVII.] 
 
 ACCVSATIVE. 
 
 1B7 
 
 But — Hoc t^* nlatinii itoliiit. I sliould be sorry for y<»ti •" '»♦• kept 
 etc. 
 Alind tti ptrt'ioniir. We I'lay yoii for soiiietliinLf else. 
 But — J[(in' omnia a te /Hrcamnr. We prny for all these tliiiij^s from 
 you. 
 H(tc te roijo} I ask you this (jtiestion. 
 But — De hac re ic rmjo. 1 ask you altout th' . (See 127.) 
 
 lliiic a \ol)is poMuJamas ot^in' jhtinnis. We deuiand and 
 chum this of you. 
 
 232. Some verl)s really intransitive are used ot'easionally in a 
 transitive sense ; sneli nreJnirrt'o [(A'tvwev prrlttnrisri)], ''I shudder," used 
 for " 1 fear," and sueh tiuurative ex|>ressions as sitio, '' 1 am thirsty," 
 used as " I thirst /'"',' with accusative. But these constructions are 
 far commoner in poetry than in pros.'. Compare — • 
 
 Pars stupet innuptae donum exitiale Mimrvae. — ViK(i. 
 
 233. The accusative after passive verbs of the thlii<i put on. or of 
 the j)(f/'^ a^ff'icted, \s oritfinally an accu.sative of the oliject combiiu'd 
 with what is called in Greek a niithllc verb. 
 
 Lont^am indntiis vestem. Haviiiu; put on hinii^eJf a Ioult <,Mrment. 
 
 Trajecfioi fennir tia<jnja. Ihivimj his thi^di jii( rrid with a dart. 
 It is exceeilinyly conunon in poetry, both with particii)les and even 
 with adjectives : — 
 
 Os impream toro, with her face inessed U]>on the couch ; 
 
 Os hnmeros(/u«3 I)co Kiniilis, like a (Jod in face and shoulders ; 
 and is extended, with the aid of the cuynate accuKotive (see 236), into 
 a general accusative of reference : as caetera J'ulvus, tawny elsewhere. 
 But it is a rare construction in classical prose. 
 
 234. The accusative of tlie ijersou is used after tlie 
 impersonal verbs 
 
 Dccct atque dcdcirt, 
 
 tacdct at(|ue /iriscni. 
 
 The last five are joined \vitli a genitive of the cause or 
 object of the feeling denoted. 
 
 Eumfadi sul ncque pvdd vn/t«; jiocnifrf,. Uv feels neither 
 shame nor remor.se for his deed. 
 
 1 The verb "I as.-" (a (iuesti<in), may be turned either by rn;/o, 
 intcrro'/o, with tlie acciisative ot" llio person, or l)y (pooro with the 
 prep, ab, a: ex, e. "I asked liim wliy," etc., may bo turned eitlier l)y 
 turn eum interroyavl cur . . ., f)r by timr ab, or ex, eo quaesivi cur. 
 
,! 
 
 V 
 
 I*? 
 
 r 
 
 If- 
 
 
 f 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 158 
 
 .iccf'.s-.f/vr/:. 
 
 [Ex. XXVIl. 
 
 235. 'I"li«' ;icciis;iiivc of iniitlini ttnvttrdtt is found mostly witli pre- 
 positions, ail, ill, .fKli, etc. ; it is also found as cxpressintj tho purpose 
 of motion witli tlir supine in -niii, a verbal noun preserving; its active 
 force see 402 : — 
 
 Ml Ims injur ill ■■< iiiiestum iiiiltinit, tliey send nie to complain 
 
 of tiiese \\ riiiiifs ; 
 Sjiir'tf !■■ Ill loiifectuin iri (see 193, iv.\ he hopes that the atfair 
 
 will lie llnislied ; 
 
 also with certain plinises, as \'enuin (/"/<•, to sell ; intitias co, I deny; 
 and with the ac'usiitive of motion ii. a tmrn^ xtnall island, and the 
 words ilimnnn dioiiie), ms, /(iras lOUt of (hiors\ etc. (See below, 313.) 
 
 J'J,ri rclsr '27. 
 
 1. .As tlic ttfii.y inoiiiilcd up tlu' liiLihost ])art of \]\e 
 rid^o, tlic liiirltaiiaiis attii(d<('d its ilauks with iiiidiiiiiiiished 
 vii^oiif. '2. 1 htivc it'iK'titeiUy wariuHl your brotlier not to 
 conceal aiiylliiui;- tVoiii your excellent fatlier. 3. You 
 ouulit to liave been the iirst to Jiave encountered deatli. 
 and to have sliown yourstdt' the hrtive son of a galkmt 
 father, not to 
 a trillinij' d;in 
 
 have heen the iirst to liave been liorritied at 
 i^er. 4. If ( 'aesar leads (190, i.) his troops 
 ticross the IJhine there will be the oi-eatest agitationthrough- 
 out the wliole of (lerinany. !). Our spies have given us much 
 int'onnation as to the situiition and size of the citadel; it 
 seems thtttthey wish to keep us in the dark asto^ the amount 
 and (diaracter of the gtirrison. (5. Having- perceived that 
 idl was lost, tlie general rode in headlong flight past the 
 fatal m.irsh (j'f.), and reached the citadel in safety 
 
 7. In order to avoid the heavy l)nrden of administering 
 tlu^ goNcrnnient he pleaded his age and bodily^ weakness. 
 
 8. Many have coiistcd along distant lands ; it is believel 
 that he ■* was the first to sail round the globe. 9. I should 
 be sorry for you to be kept in the dark about my journey, 
 but this re(iuest I niiike of you, not to forget me in my 
 al)sence. 10. About part of his project he told me every- 
 thing ; the rest he kept secret even from his brother. 
 
 ' " Wliat is tile amount," etc. USee 174.) 
 - See 14, II. '■' See 59. 
 
 * " lie " is eni{)hatic - "this man " {/lir). 
 
ExKRc/sr: x.Yi'///. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE 11. 
 Cog-nate and Predicative. 
 
 236. Another us(! cif the accusative is calicl ,li(. 
 Cognate acca.sative. 
 
 Even intransitive veihs sut-li as "I niii," '"I livr," dciii.t,. s ,. 
 
 action. The result, or raii;,rt.^ of (liis action, a.hhd lo drlinr th,. 
 mean in I,' mere clearly, is s.iim't'm.'s treated as a illnct ah} ct to tiie 
 verb, and placed in the accusative case. 
 
 7/»a)c cursuiii cnrurri. J ran this ra(('. 
 
 Mnltn pnteUii ])i(i/)i(iri. I have tmiMht niaiiy l)atl]fs. 
 Thus we say in En^dish, "I stnu-k him a hli,n-;' 
 
 It is called the connate accusative Immhusc tli.' sulistau- 
 tive is either in form or lueauiiio' kiiidrcd {,;,'/ /k^ (>/.-<) to 
 the verb. 
 
 237. The sid^staiitive wlieu so used has ovndjiliv, iioi, 
 always, an adjective or its ('(|uivalciit attachcil to it. 
 
 Longam vitam ri,>i. T.ouu- is the life [ have h-d. 
 Has fKifari notas. I set d(»\vn th"se marks. 
 
 But its coninionest use in ])r()se is witli neuter pronouu^, 
 hoc,illud, ufnii,'dUi{ with neutei' ))lural adjeciives, as/^.^/^r./, 
 mulfa, etc., and the word ///////. Hoc /in/nr. lUwl i//nrinr 
 (instead of, liac re A/r/^>r. de ilia re yA'/vo/'), ■• this is tlie 
 meaning of my joy ; " '• this is my l.oast." So — 
 
 Illud //7>/ ^^^^sr///'/r//, in tin's I agree witli you. Nihil n/llii 
 sw'censr.t, he is in no way aii,<;i'v with nie. Mem 
 gloriahtr, he niak.\s tlie same hoa.st. Multa i»r<rat, ho 
 commits many sins. (See 54. ) 
 
 AVitli these verhs tlie accusative of a suhslanii\e cotdd 
 not be used. 
 
1(50 
 
 ACCirsATrVE. 
 
 fEx. XXVIII. 
 
 
 ii 
 
 238. Tliis iicciisfitivc IS tlu' i>ii;:iri of nuiny (■(ttisfnictions : — 
 
 I i. Tlic Milvciliiiil use u\' III II 1 1 II III, iiiiiiiiinnii, ncx.wV ijhi'iJ, <iiinvf\iv\, 
 (\\.j Tlic jKiiliial use (»f till' nciitur siii;^ular iiikI pliiial of iiiaiiv 
 
 ail jcctivcs : (liilce //(/'///<'/(, sweetly Miniiiii!,' ; and even in 
 
 \)\()sc : iiiiijiis iivlii iiiiit^ he raises a louder cry. 
 (ill.) 8nch adverliial ex])r( ssioiis as id fniiiiiiris,n\ that time ; mm 
 
 id acl.il IS yw/( /n, will) a hoy of that aj,fe ; tuain viceiii (/o/«;o, 
 
 I ;;rieve fnr ymic sake, 
 (iv.) It is no ilonlit the ori<.nii of the acciisalive of nimir, of timi', 
 
 and of iliMiiiiri'. Tics aiiiios nhsiiin, \ have liceii away 
 
 fur three years ; tria niillia. [iiassnutii) jiroctu-iHi ^ 1 ;idvaiiced 
 
 thr» (• miles. 
 
 239. Tlir Predicative' iicciisativc is (|iiitc (lilTcrciit IVmih 
 till! ctioiiiitc. Il i> an additiidiiil itcciisatiN'c iK'C'cssiuy lo 
 t'()in)»l('t(! the iiicaiiiiio of a iai'uc (da.-s ol" transitive vorlis, 
 ^vllich ill tin; ])assi\c arc, littli' more tliaii link verbs, and 
 have llu'ndoit' tJn! same cjisc Indnrc and alter tlieni. (Sec 
 lilt. V.).) 
 
 E(ji> mater tiia njijirlliir. I am called your mother. 
 
 Me mat rem tiiaiii (ippr/hint. Tiiey call me your mother. 
 
 Tliese veil).-, as " i oiitainiiio' the idea of imikiiuj by deed, 
 word, or tlioiiolil,"'- are called y)/r/////v \(!rbs. 
 
 ^[e fiiusitleni creaiit. They make me consul. 
 
 Se rinim Ixiiixm pnu^stitit. He proved himself a good man. 
 
 240. To ihisbelon*,' such pluases as 
 
 Hacc res mc soUieituni iiabuit. This made me aii.xious. 
 Marc infest um habuit. He infested, or beset, the sea. 
 Hacc, missa I'ueio. I dismiss these matters. 
 
 And even sui'h uses as — 
 
 Hoc coi;iiiium, conqtertum, niilii persuasum, hahco. I am certain, 
 assured, eonviiicecl of this. (See 188.) 
 
 Obs. 1. W'c may compare the areusative after rolo in such phrases 
 us tc salvum volo, I wish for your safety ; tibi coii.>ultuni voJo, I wish 
 your good consulted, where the link verb cs/ic is rarely found. 
 
 ^ The e.irlamatori/ iise of the accusative luay be classed xnider the 
 head of the ])rc(licative, — nil-icriim horninern! spfin viD/itnihnfnn ! 
 '• wretclied that he is I " *" how vain the hope ! " It may be compared 
 wit'a a similar use of the iiitinitive, — /r, sometimes te-ne, Iiocdicare I 
 
 ^ Dr. Kennedy's Latin (.-lammar. 
 
Ex. XXVIII.J 
 
 ACCi'SATIVE. 
 
 19) 
 
 Oh». 2. In jilmo of this accM^iitive dtlicr plinist's an* common. , 
 [Verbs o( thiiikuHj, t-tc, uri- r.irt'ly tn-att'd as factitive vorbs.] 
 
 I consider y(»ii < • imj /rinnl. T< aniicoriini in nnmcro hulho. 
 
 I look on this on ('•rtniii. IIdc |ti'o ccrfn ' "l»<t. 
 
 I behaved as a ciliztn. A/r |»io cive (Jiski. (Sec 221 and uotc.) 
 
 241. The Kn},di.sli vei'li ' I show" is ust'd in a sense whuh cannot 
 be expressed in lia'in \>\ iiinnsfrn *nnsti n<li>. 
 
 " He slioual himself a man of ctiiiraye," or '' he slhtirnl couraifc'' is 
 
 riruiii (nrti III sc jirni-hlil, oi' /iniilmif: or tnrtissiiin si ijDt.ot: or 
 fnr(issiinui< ext t f it. 
 
 Ej-rrcisi' 28. 
 
 Before <luing tliis Kxercise read carefully 54 ; also, for the different 
 
 senses of "such." 86. 
 
 I. And pcrlKH'S In- is lijinsclf {.^oiii!:,' t(» I'oininit tlic, 
 .same fault as Ins ancestors liave icpfatctlly coniniittt'd, 
 2. lie makes many c(»mj)laints, many lanientatiuns ; at 
 this one thing he rejoices, tliat ' you are ready to make 
 him vour friend. 3. For mvself, I fear lie will Vvv\\ the 
 M'hole army anxious for his- safety, such is his want of 
 caution and ])rudence. 4. P^ngland had long covered the 
 sea with her fleets ; she now ventured at last to carry her 
 soldiers across the Channel and land them on the continent. 
 
 5. The rest of her allies Home left (done; the interests of 
 Hiero, the most loyal of tliem all, she steadily consulted. 
 
 6. AVhether he showed himself wise or foolish I know not, 
 but a boy of that age will not be allowed to become a 
 soldier ; this at least I hold as certain.. 7. This is th«^ 
 life that I have led, jiulges ; you })0ssibly feid pity for such 
 
 a life ; for uiyself 1 wouhP venture to make this boast, ^ 
 that 1 feel neither 1 ime/ nor weariness, nor remorse for i 
 it. 8. He behaved so well at this trying crisis that I I 
 hardly know wdiether to admire his courage most or his 
 prudence. 
 
 ' See 41, 6. 
 
 11, (', 
 
 See 149, i. 
 
 234. 
 
( 
 
 l':l 
 
 i 
 
 EXEh'ClSE XXIX. 
 DATIVE. 
 
 I. Dative with Verbs. 
 
 242. 'V\\(\ iiiiKniil niciuiinu' of tlic Dative has been 
 cxplaiiK'il jiljovc (210). It expresses the person or tliin<; 
 iiifiirslcil III, or ajfcrhd hi/, the stute or action described 
 l>y the verb, otherwise tluin as the direct object- 
 As tlie aeciisative answers the question, /rAo?/6 / what? 
 so tiie dative answers the question, to or fur whom or 
 Avhat? 
 
 
 il 
 
 
 11 1 I 'S' 
 
 m I i^ 
 
 w 
 
 I 
 
 243. In Kti<flisli tlio difference is often oblitenited. " He built 
 iiir a liimsc ;" *' lie saddled //(/// the horse ;'' " I paid them their debt ;" 
 '' 1 tuld In'iii my story" — are ecjually conect sent* nces with "He built 
 a house for me ;" " I told my story to Caesar," He. In translating 
 therefore into Latin we must look to the meaning rather than to the 
 form of the word, and use the tlative of the ra'lpiiiit, or pirtioa ajfeited, 
 with vi'ibs of (/ii'iiii/, tilling (except doceo), and even with those of 
 t(tl,iinf inn(if. 
 
 MiiHa I'i iioUlcltiix ninii. T have madt! liiiii many promises. 
 
 f'of'unx mihi pirKolrif. He shall pay me the penalty. 
 
 (hiiniii nobis (iih'muti} Yon have taken /row fts everything. 
 
 244. A very large nunilier of verbs winch in English 
 are, or a])])e{ir to be, transitive, are in Latin intransitive, 
 and comphite their meaning not by an accusative but by 
 a dative. (Sec^ 228, Ohx.) Such an; — 
 
 (a.) Verbs of aiding, favouring, obeying, pleasing, profit- 
 ing, etc. 
 
 Opitalor, svhrciiid, fmro, sfinlro, parco, ohcil'io, ])J((ceo, p'osmn. 
 
 ^h . 
 
 f. 
 
 p n 
 
 ml. 
 
 ' Compare the French arraclur a, "to tear /row." 
 
Ex. XXIX. 
 
 HATH' I: WITH VENIiS. 
 
 1«9 
 
 (/». ) Vni'l>s of injuring, opposing, displeasing. 
 
 (r. ) Vt'ihs of commanding, persuading, trusting, distrust 
 ing, sparing, envying, being angry. 
 
 Jiiifii'iii, />i'<iiiii>ii>, sHiii/t'ii, Jit/ii^ '/{//'''", J'lii'i'", iijiiosfo, niiiiUo^ 
 
 i'msfiif, Sllffl'IISCit, »'t«!. 
 
 {Coiijiilo {\i\\K'H \\w\'\\r of i)i rsim, [\\A:\\\\r "f llmni idird 
 oil ) 
 
 /uirfihiis Wxvi'i forfmin. It is the l>ravc whom' foitiino 
 
 fiiniiirs. 
 Iliiii- irs Diniiiliits /loiiiinihitK iKM-ct. 'Jill's fact tnjiin's flu; 
 
 w hole world. 
 Lrf/ihiis |>aniit roif^iil. Ho ohcijul the law in liis roiisul- 
 
 .sliip. 
 V'lrtis rirfiir jtoporcit. Ho sjxirnl tfic vjiin|iiisli<'(l in tlif 
 
 hour of victory, 
 Null, fihl Sf'd t'.irrcifn inei) <:oiitisiis sum. It was not on 
 
 you l)ut on my army that / relial. 
 
 (>/*s. It liiis already l)een .■^uid that tlu'.st' \erbs must l)0 used 
 iiM|tt'i>;i)iially in the passive. 
 
 Milii n'i>i(fiiiiifiir. I !iiu resisted. 
 
 Tihi diffiilitnr. Y ai are distrusted. (See 217.) 
 
 245. liiit certaiij verbs of this chiss are trtiiisitivc in 
 Latin also. 
 
 Jki'ii^ adjiivo ; deh-rtit ; hwilo, djlcinlu : 
 
 ,1 (dull, Jnntiir ; ri'hi, jniihibeo; frt/d, f/iiln rim. 
 
 Lihris nil' dt'k'cfo. 1 amuse mysi'lf with books. 
 Otft'ndit iii'iiiiiH'iii. He otlends nol»ody. 
 Iliiic laedunt (*- "A/n. Tht'sc things hurt the eye. 
 Furl iiiiii fiiii's m{\\\\ ill. Fortune helj)s the hold. 
 
 246. The impersonal verbs nccii/if, rinifiii;/if, rupidif, 
 liliif, h'rrf, 2^I'(('('t, are joined with a dative, not. as r>/j^y/'^r/, 
 mill (Inise enumerated in 234, with an accu.sative. 
 
 ll'ir tibi dl'-fre Vdiet. It is your pleasure, suits your fancy, 
 to say this. 
 
 » See 166, OU. 
 
Il 
 
 \i'A 
 
 DATIVE WITH VERBS. 
 
 [Ex. XXIX. 
 
 ti 
 
 n. 
 
 247. Many Latin verl)s rwmire^ to coni])lete tlieir sense. 
 l)()tli an jiccnsative and a dative^, arranued however in a 
 way ([uite diricrent to tliat of nouns joined witli tiie 
 coi'iH'spondiiiL,^ verb in Kn,L;lisl». 
 
 Mortem inilii miiidftis t'sf. He threatonetl nie /'•//// <l<'iitli. 
 Pt'ciiiiiaiii iiol>is niijicntrit. \\k\ ordered us in ■'<>'/>j'/i/, 
 
 (If e.\acte(l tVoui us, money. 
 Frumentuni iis sh^'ijin/ittirif. Ho su])i»IiiMl tlieni irifli corn. 
 Vitaui voltis ii(l'tiiniiit. They are i'ol)l>in<f you nf lite. 
 Facta sua uulli probarit. He won no one's a|)})roval/('/' 
 
 his acts. 
 Hauc rem tihi jifriiil.sl or iiuindavi. I intrusted you icHh 
 
 tliis. 
 Haec ]»eccata mihi coiidonarit. He i)ardoned mo /or these 
 
 olfences. 
 
 I 
 
 248. ^^any transitive Latin ver])S, as mctno, nvifit'Io, 
 (•((reo,pn»iplcio, credo, etc., are air,o used intransitively "■ it)i 
 a dative in a different sense to that which they ]»ear with 
 tiie accusative. 
 
 ('oiiipiirc, te nut no, tiiiien, with nihil tibi met no, etc., I have no 
 fears for you. T(^ ronmdo, I ask your opinion; tibi con>inlo,^ I attend 
 to, consult, yonr intcnatn. Te (or c tc) coiro, I am on my guard 
 a(j(ii)i)tt you ; tibi careo, I am takinji; care for your interests. 
 'renipestiiteiu i-rospicio, I foresee a storm ; sahiti tuae provideo, 
 I provide /or yonr safetij. Te credo hoc fecisse, I beheve yon to have 
 dune this; tibi hoc facienti credo, I believe you (trust , . ii) while 
 you do tiiis. (Udpa vacnt, he is free from crime ; philosophiae vdcat, 
 he has time for (he studies) philosophy. 
 
 2AQ. Tentpero and tnoderor in the sense of "to govern" or 
 "direct" have the accnsatin- ; when they mean "to set limits to" 
 tliey have the dot ire. Teinperare ab ali(pia re is "to abstoin from," 
 anil hence (also with the dative), "to spare.^'' 
 
 Hanc civitatein let/is moderantnr. This state is (jovirned by 
 
 hiw. (216, Obs.) 
 Fac aniiu) modereris. Be sure you restrain your feelings, or 
 
 tempei 
 Ab inermibus or inermibus ((hitive) temperatmn est. The 
 
 unarmed were spared. (The past participle oi parco is rare.) 
 
 ' A very common phrase is t!h! comuUum or cautuvi volo. (See 240, 
 i/bs. 1.) 
 
Ex. XXIX,] 
 
 DATIVE WITH I'Ek'TS. 
 
 \{^'^ 
 
 % 
 I 
 
 250. [JoKo, firciinnU), iUid some other verbs, tiike citlni' n 
 iliifi'H' of tha pcrsnn itml iin arnitnitici', of the thitiij, nr an ii'rnsnfi rr of 
 the jxrson ;uifl all ulilatirc of the fliiihj. 
 
 I'irriiiiKlat iirl)eiii iiiiiro ; or, ci mi iiiihit iimruiii iirhi. lie 
 
 siirroiitKls the city with a wall. 
 Cireroiii iiimiortalitateiii doum-U ; or, Ciceronein iiiiiuortalitate 
 
 il<))iiirlt. (The Ivoiiian ])eii[>lej coiiferred i;iiiiinrtality on 
 
 Cieeio. 
 
 80 imhiit .se veste, or ve.steni sibi iinhiif {i:.nii(\ lie piit.s on (o/' otf) 
 his dress. 
 
 Excrrlsr 29. 
 
 
 I 
 
 1. I liave Ioiil; ln'cii \variiiii,L;- you wiioiii it is your duty 
 to uuiii'd aoiiiiist, wIkjiii to I'ear. 2. I kuow tliat one sn 
 uood as^ your lalluT will always iiiovide lor his cliildnii's 
 safety. 3, It is inij»o.ssiljle- to get any one's iipjirovid loi- 
 such^ a crime as tliis. 4. On my asking"* what 1 was to 
 do, whether and how and when-"' I had ollcndtnl him, he 
 made 110 reply (25). f). Is it^ your country's intert'st, oi' 
 your own that you (/V.) wish consulted ? 0. 1 jiardoiu'd 
 him for many oll'ences ; he ought not to have shown such 
 cruelty toward yc.u. 7. In his" youtli I was his op}»oncnt ; 
 in his age and weakness I am ready to assist him. 8. 1 
 foresee many political storms, but I fear neither for the 
 nation's safety nor for my own. 
 
 n, 
 
 II. 
 
 Ml! 
 
 t! 
 
 I 
 
 -^ 
 I 
 
 1. It is said that he wrenched the l)loo(ly dagger from 
 the assassin, raised"^ it alot't, and Hung it away on the 
 ground. 2. Do not {p(.) taunt with his lowly liirth one 
 mIio has done such good service to his countiy. ,"5. it 
 matters not whether" vou cherish anjjcr ic-ainst nic or 
 n(!t ; I have no fears for my own safety ; you may"^ hence- 
 forth threaten me willi dcatli daily, if you please.'^ 1. \'ou 
 
 ^ Sci- 224. O/w. '2. 2 soe 125. ',./'. ■' 88. n/,.,. 
 
 ■* "To iiic ;>skin,u','' pnrlicipli'. '•' W'liy not iiinnn .' (See 157, ii.) 
 
 •' S,-f 156. ' "63. M'artiiii.lc passive. (16.) 
 
 " .Sim. 168. '" Fiitine of I'lct. (Si't' 197. ) " See 190, ii. 
 
166 
 
 DATIVE Wiril VERfiS. 
 
 [Ex. XXIX. 
 
 Hi 
 
 I 
 
 B'-ii 
 
 ' 5 
 
 were 1)elii've(l, and must liave^ been believed, for all weie 
 atrri^cd {iiii lurf.) tlu.t you had never broken your wdnl. 
 it. He coinplained that the otliee witli wlijcli the nuliou 
 liad just intrusted- liini lia<l lujt onlv l)een shanMl witii 
 others, but would be enliiely taken away from him, by this 
 law. ('». Voii hav(! dejirived us of our liberties autl I'j^hts 
 in our al)S('nei' (61), and ))erlia})S to-morrow you intt'ud^ 
 to wr.'iK'li from us our lives and fortuiu'.s. 7. I'he soldiers 
 were ;ill slain to a man, liut tlie unarmed wei'c spared.'^ 
 S. We are all of us '"^ ignorant of the reason" Ibr so 
 geutle a jtriuee as ours exacting from his subjects such 
 enorntous (juantities of corn and money. •). He never 
 spai'cd any out;" who had withstood him, oi' j)ardoned iiny 
 wlio ha,d injured him. 10. I have always wished your 
 interests pi'otected ; hut T did not wish oiu^ so incautious^ 
 and rasli as you consulted on {de) this nuitter. 
 
 ' [Ise participle in -dux. (199.) 
 
 =* 14, r. •» See 249. 
 
 * See 174, a. ' Use nemo tuiquam. 
 
 * Use mcautm (224, Obs. 2). 
 
 ' Mood ? (See 77.) 
 •' See 225. 
 
 (See 110.) 
 
 #« 
 
 I 
 
o8 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 DATIVE-Continued. 
 
 II. Dative with Verbs. 
 
 251. The verb sum can of course never be transitive, 
 and therefore its sense is natuially completed l>y the 
 (hitive ; we can say, 
 
 Erat ei domijilia, he had a daughter at home ; 
 
 and most of its compounds, mhum, deximi, inU'isiuii, (jhsinu, 
 l^rdesiini, itYOfium, si\\}tivsum, are joined with a (hitive. 
 
 Mihi adfu'iL his rebus non intcrfnit. He gave me tlie 
 
 benefit^ of his presence, he took no part in these 
 
 matters. 
 
 Ohs. — Insum is oftener than not followed by the prejwsition in, 
 absuni by a, ah. 
 
 252. The dative is used with a very large number of 
 verbs compounded with prepositions, such as — 
 
 ad, ante, cvm (eon-), 
 
 in, inter, oh, 
 
 jwst, mh, and prac. 
 
 Also with the adverbs bene, satis, male. These verbs may 
 be divided into four classes. 
 
 253. (i.) Many are intransitive and take the dative alone. 
 
 As, iiniong many others — 
 
 As.s«'»tori, to Hatter ; imminere, to hang over, threaten (infnniK.) ; 
 conjidere (see 282, Obs.), to trust in ; instatr, insitife>-e (some- 
 times with ace), to press on, urge ; interrt;</ere, to put a v«'to 
 on ; ohstare, repiKjmur, to resist ; (Hwurnre, ohvidin iif, to 
 meet ; ohscqui, to comply with ; satis/^<(Y/v', to satisfy ; ni;ile- 
 d'fcrv, to ;ihu.>i'. (^^t■e 244.1 
 
 ' .\ very romnion meaning of ai/siim witli dativ.' "I aiu at liaiid 
 
 In II •il. " 
 
 1,;" 
 
 U 
 
 Hi; 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
Ifis 
 
 DA riVE IVITII VKRns. 
 
 i 
 
 ■ % 
 
 
 [Ex. XXX. 
 
 (ii.) <)ili.'is art! transitive, and complete tlieir inetuiing 
 witli hotli tli(! acciisiitive iiiid tlit; dative. 
 
 Tc ill! i)'i.<llnijiri>. i pi ice you l)eliiiiil liiin ( = illiiia i'lhi ant epono), 
 
 I [H'l't'tT tiiiii ti» y.iii. 
 S(^ pt'riciilis (ihjixit. He ex|)i»seil liiinself to dmiifers. 
 Mortem >sil)i co/t^ctrtV. MI'' <'oiniiutte(l suieide, "laid violent 
 Villi sihi iiifiilit. \ liMiids on hiiiiselt'." 
 
 'J'e exercitiii iirai'/ircntitl. Tliey have placed you at the head of 
 
 the aiiiiy. 
 Tjelluiii nobis iiidixU, hdidit. He declared, he made, war 
 
 a;4aiiibt us. 
 
 (iii.) Some lU'e >imi)ly transitive verbs and tfke the 
 aecusativt!. (Sec 229.) 
 
 Adi'ildii, to fawn upon ; urrrn'iri, to loathe ; ixtfiiKjfix, to >onch 
 liji;hUy ; allixiiil, *,o speak (kindly) to; iiTi(/m, to deride 
 (sometimes dat.). 
 
 (iv.) Otliers iccjnire a jjreposition, in place of the dative. 
 
 Hdcc ir.i ad lue {tu'cc.r mihi) perllnet, or aftitiet. This concerns 
 
 vie. 
 JIdc nii'iiiin rniniinniirai'it. He imparted this to )iie. 
 Ad sceliis //OS iiiijii Hit. He is nri^iiiji' us to crime. 
 Ad urbem perveiiit. He reached the citi/. 
 In reiiipultlicain iurninln'tr. To devote one's-self to the nation, 
 
 or the national cause. 
 
 No universal rule can he uiven, and the usage of //atiu 
 authors must he carefidly watched. 
 
 Exercise 30 
 
 1. Possildy on(! so base as you^ will not hesitate to 
 ]irefer slavery to honour. 2 He says- that as a young 
 man he took no ])art in that contest, 3. He promises 
 never to fail his I'rii^nds. \. To my (lueslioii who was at 
 the head of the army he made no reply, f). .Vll of us 
 i<now well the iiaseness (,!' lailinLj'' <»ur friends in a trying 
 crisis. (). 1 jded^c mys(df not to he wanting eitlier^ to 
 the time, or to tin! general, or to the opportunity, but 
 possilily fortune is opposing our designs. 7. It is said 
 that Marccllus wept cv-m the i'air city of Syracuse.^ 
 
 ' 22t, O/w. 2; /« shouivc 1/' '.xpro.ssoa, (Sec 334, ii.) 
 
 ' See 33. ^ See 94, 96. 
 
 •* " i'jtiK'i'." "(ir." after ,.^7 ..i.'l i n,'<)iic. * S»'c 222. 
 
Ex. XXX. 
 
 DA ^TVE wirrr verbs. 
 
 \m 
 
 1^. For inyself, I can scarcely believe^ that so j^fciillc a 
 ]»i'i!)(<' as ours could liavc acted so stcndy. 4). Tii the lace 
 of tlics(; dangers wliicli are threatening- tli(^ t-ountry, let all 
 of us devote ourselves to the national cause. 10. It 
 concerns his reputation immensely I'oi' us to he assured 
 whether he fell in battle or laid violcul bands on himself. 
 11. ^'ou oiinht to have i^one out to meet your ,uallant 
 brother; vou preferred to sit safelv at li(»nie. 1 •_*. I would 
 fain know wiietlier he is <i(>in,u; to de -lare and make war 
 on his country, or to sacrifice bis own interests to the 
 nation, i.'i To prevent his inuiii'' otliers to a like crime 
 I reluctantly laid tlic^ nuitter before the nuiuistrates. 
 14. He nevcu' consented either to fawn u))on the poweilul, 
 (»r to flatter the mob; he ahvays relied on himself, and 
 W(udd" expos(^ himself to any danger. 1 ;"). Famine is 
 threateniuif us daily; the townsm(!n are uruinn' the ifovei'nor 
 to surrender the city to the enemy ; he I'efuses-- to impart 
 his resolution to me, and 1 am at a loss what to do. 
 
 I!' 
 
 Hi 
 
 149, L 
 
 Imperfect. (See 184. ) 
 
 * See 1.^6, a. 
 
M' 
 
 
 » 
 
 .1 
 
 II 
 
 if ! 
 
 1^ 
 (-1 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 
 DATIVE Continued. 
 
 the 
 
 live 
 
 III. The Dative with Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 
 254. The dative is used not only with rrrhn, but also 
 wifli adjectives (jukI even adverbs), to mark tlie person or 
 thini^ ttjfccfn/ Jti/ I lid qualiti/ which the adjective denotes. 
 
 Sucli ari! adj('(;tives wl^ich sij^niify adrantcf/f, UkcnesK, 
 f(f/r(r(fh/('>trs.s, iis('J)(/n£s.'i, Jitness, facility, etc. (with their 
 oppositvH). So — 
 
 lies \io\)\\\(j^ (jnita. A circumstance pleasing to 
 
 people. 
 Piie7' ])atri siniilis. A child like his father. 
 Con/ilnini omnibus utUe. A policy useful to all. 
 Tempora virtutibus infesfa. A time fatal to virtues. 
 Convenienter naturae vweiuhm est. We should 
 
 agreeably to nature. 
 
 In all these cases the dative answers the question, to or 
 fur whom, or .viiat ? and the English will be a sutHcient 
 guide. 
 
 255. But the construction is not invariable. 
 
 Thus, si III iJ in takes the genitive of a pronomi, and usually of a 
 person (" the counterpart," or *' in the likeness," of). So — 
 Pompeii, tui, similis. Resembling Pompey, or you. 
 Vcri still ih'. Prohjible. 
 
 Nalki rea simiiis sui tiianet. Nothing remains like itself. 
 So also — Ifor (juideiii titiiim, non proprinm senectutis est. This vice 
 is not the special property of old age. 
 
 Ohs. — Many of these take different constructions : ntilis, uptus, 
 idonevs, ad rem ; benevolus erga, or in, aliquem ; alienus ab aliqnd re : 
 assiietiis, assiu'factits, "accustomed to," are joined with the abhitive, 
 insiu'tas with the genitive. 
 
 256. Aequiilifi, afflnis, vicinns, fivitimu!^, propinqv.vs, 
 amicus, inimicusi, when used as sulsfan fives, are joined with 
 the genitive, or a possessive pronoun {mens, tims, etc.). 
 
 * Or in vulgar ; the form rmhjo is only used as an adverb. 
 170 
 
Ex. XXXI.] DATIVE WITH A njECTIVKS. 
 
 171 
 
 Propior, nearer, proMUfUs, nearest, take tlie dative, but 
 .sometimes the ((crttsafivr, es])eeiiilly "n tlieir literal sense. 
 Their adverbs prnpt% propiits, pro.rinie, take the aceusative. 
 
 Hi homines propo to sedi'lHuif. Thosc> mm were sitting 
 near you. 
 
 Thus, nobis vieini, "near us," but, rieini nostri, "our 
 neighbours;" Ciceron-is or -i ini)iiiei,s,si)iii, Cicero's worst 
 foes. 
 
 The construction therefore varies accordin;^ as they are 
 regarded as adjectiv^ea or substautives. (See 55.) 
 
 Exereise 31. 
 
 1. I could not doubt that falseliood was most incon- 
 sistent with your brotlier's character. 2. All ot" us are a})t 
 to love those^ like ourselves. 3. I fear that in so trying 
 a time as''^ this so trifling a ])erson^ as your friend will not 
 be likely to'* turn out like his illustrious father. 4. This'' 
 circumstance was most acceptable to the mass of the 
 people, but at the same time^ most distasteful to the king. 
 5. He had long been an opponent of his father's })olicy, 
 whom in {ahl.) almost every point he himself most closely 
 resembled. 6. He was both a relation of my father and 
 his close friend from boyhood; he was also*"' extremely 
 well disposed to myself. 7. For hajipiness, said he, which^ 
 all of us value above every blessing, is common to kings 
 and herdsmen, rich ami poor. 8. 'Yo otheis he \vas, it 
 seemed,^ most kindly disposed, but he was, 1 suspect,** his 
 own worst enemy. 9. He is a num far removed from all 
 suspicion of bribery, but I fear that he will not be ac([uitted 
 by such an unprincipled judge as this. 10. It was, he 
 used to say,^ the special jteculiarity of kings to envy men^*^ 
 who liad (lone^^ them^- the best service. 
 
 » See 346. "•' 88, Obs. ^ 224, Ohs. 2. 
 
 •Relative. (See 78.) « Mw. ' 96, ^Ms. 
 
 Tense? (184.) 
 
 10 
 
 72. 
 
 "Mood? (See 77.) 
 
 *139. 
 
 » 32, h, and 43. 
 
 
 iif 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 w 
 
 u 
 
 Sf. 
 
 (See 349.) 
 
EXERCISE XXXri. 
 
 DATIVE Continued. 
 
 IV. special Uses of the Dative. 
 
 i»l I 
 
 m I 
 
 ft 
 
 (lutivc .should 
 
 jHi'^scsaivc 
 
 257. Tlic following- idioiiuitic uses of tin 
 lu', carefully noticed. 
 
 The ihitive is used where we .should use a 
 pronoun or the (jcnitivc. 
 
 It thus gives yreater prominence to the person men- 
 tioned. 
 
 Turn Poinpeio ad pedes seprojecere. Then they threw them- 
 
 seh'es at Pompei/s feet. 
 Hoc mihi apem in'muH. This lowered inij hopes. 
 Gladiiuti ei e matiibus extm'sit. He forced the sword cut 
 
 of his hands. 
 Hoc omnibus est in ore. This is on everij one'y lips. 
 
 258. The dative of the person interested is sometimes 
 used where we should use the preposition " by," answering 
 to the ablative of the agent. 
 
 (i.) It is joined with the partici})le in -di(x, when used to 
 imply duty or necessity. The person on whom the duty 
 lies is in the dative. (See 198, iii.) 
 
 Hoc tibi faciendum fuii. " This ought to have been done 
 1)1/ you." 
 
 (ii.) The dative is used with other passive participles where the 
 a^ent is looked on rather as the person- interested tlian as the actual 
 agent ; especially with verbs oiseeiyig, thinking, hearing, planning, etc, 
 
 Haec omimi niihi perspecta et considerata i^unt. All these points 
 have been studied and weighed hy me, lit. for rue, in my ej/es. 
 
 Hoc mihi pr )l)atum ac laudatuin est. This ha.s won my approval 
 and praise = been approved of and praised hy me. 
 
Ex. XXXII. J .SPECIAL USES OF DATIVE. 
 
 \r^ 
 
 259. Tlic last idioiimtic use of tliu dative is tliiit in 
 wliicii it i.s used to ('.\i)ii'ss u /vs//// dr niui ; t\v(( idi-as 
 ofti'ii l)l(Mid('d in Latin. (Sue 106.) 
 
 Ivi'coptiii ciiiii'n: To sound tlic trnnijict A'/' rctroat. 
 Jlmir liirinii doniicilio <;li(j(i. 1 dioosc this })ia('e /('/• my 
 lialiitatiun.i 
 
 It Ih much iiscil with sum, c/o, ihico, verto, eliijo ; and (especially 
 with tiiilitary terms, i\HtiiLi:ill<>, siihsiilio) with verhs of motion ; and is 
 "generally conihined with the onh'nary (hitive. Thus — 
 
 Jltiic ns ei iiijit,nio fnit dedicori. Tliis wa.s (or proved) a j,'reat 
 
 ilis;i;i'ace to him. 
 //.■>•(' si I )i odio tr/7. He will he odious (or, an ohject of dislike) 
 
 to himself = lie Inifnl 1)1/ himself. 
 Is'dii, liKiir mil mihi vitio irrtcrc. Du not imj)ute this to me (/.>>■ 
 
 (I fun It. 
 Qnne ns saluti nobis fnit. And this fact saved us, ^*/-o/»// our 
 
 Cui'Sdnin onirit, ut sibi auxilio copias adducent. He begged 
 Caesar to bring up troops to his aid. 
 
 Ohs. Hence such verViji as ^^jrroves,^^ "serves," etc., may often be 
 translated by .^iitn. with the dafiiw; and an adjective after "to he" 
 may often be translated into Latin by the dative of a substantive. 
 
 260. The fullowiiifr phmses are very commonly used 
 with an additional dative of the person interested. 
 
 (1.) With aiuilio (to the assistance) ; 
 
 Come, Venire, ve:.i, ventum. 
 Se)id, mittere, mlsi, niissum. 
 Set out, proficisci, profectus. 
 
 (2.) With cnJpac, vitio, rrimini ; 
 
 To inijintc a!< n fnulf, culj)ae dilre : with ace. of thing; or 
 vitio vertere, irifli ace. of thing. 
 
 (3.) To (jivi: as a prisixt, dono, or muneri, dare, ivith ace. of thing. 
 To consider a source of gain, habere quaestui. 
 To be wrji dishonourable or discreditable to, magno esse dede- 
 
 con. {Ohs. 1.) 
 To be hated hij ; to be hateful, odio esse, {Obs. 2.) 
 To he a hiinlranre, impediment** e.s.se. 
 To be creditable, or honourable, honori esse. 
 
 I 
 
 III 
 
 (V 
 
 II 
 
 4»l 
 
 '.J I 
 
 >t. 
 
 I • 
 
 ^ Te ducem elig</7////>:, apposition with a permn, " a.s" or for our leader, " 
 see 239 : hirnc Jocnni domiiilio cli'jo, dative with a thimj, "«.•>• or ybr 
 our habitation.' 
 
 lie! 
 
174 
 
 SPECIAL USF.S OF DATIVIl 
 
 [Ex. XXXII. 
 
 tli 
 
 M 
 
 III 
 
 all< 
 
 \-h 
 
 To he hurtful ; to he iletrinirntal, detriincnto, or dainno esse. 
 To he jiaiiiful tn, dcilori csso. 
 To he II, proof., iir;,Miiii('nto, (Idcuinonto esse. 
 7V» j)n>fit, to he iiriifitiihle to, hoiio esHe. 
 ■To hriiKj {ninii^hiiii lit, IVaiidi os.sc. 
 To he a reproiu'h ; to he dmjruce/ul, opprobrio esse. 
 
 Ohii. 1. Tilt' Kurdish adverb wr// will be rcprcst'iited in Latin by 
 the adjective inaijuo or tunuino; "how" by quitnto. 
 
 QwnuU) hoc tihi nit ^\t'd^.'VA)\\ riihs. You see Aow disgraceful tliis 
 i.s to y(»n. 
 
 ()h)t. 2. — The phrase " odio esne" forms a pas.sive voice to oili. Thus 
 Haiiniltal, when at the close of hi.s lift; he expresses to Antiochus his 
 hatred to the Konians, says (Tiivy xxxv. 10) : — 
 
 (hli iiih'oijne suiii lioiininis. J hate the Romans and am Juded hy 
 til em. 
 
 261. Tlu^ (liitivc, ill tlii! pnulicate with licii, etc., lias 
 been noticed (201). 
 
 Limit tiohis quietis exse. Let us be allowed to be at rest. 
 
 So sometimes after uomen est, etc, 
 
 Puero cognomen lulo additur. The surname of lulus is added 
 to the boy. 
 
 But fidus would be equally (i[ood Latin. 
 
 Excrciin' 32. 
 In these Exercises words and phrases marked * will be found in 260. 
 
 A. 
 
 1. He promises to come shortly to the assistance* of 
 your countrymen. 2. Tliereupon he forced the bhxuly 
 dagger out of tlie assassin's^ hand. 3, 1 fear that these 
 tilings Mill not prove very credital)le * to you. 4. I don't 
 quite uiulerstand what your friends- mean (by it). 5. It 
 i.s very hoiioural)Ie * to you to have been engaged in such 
 (86) a battle. 6. Such (87) superstition is undoubtedly 
 a reproach * to a man. 7. I fear that this will prove both 
 detrimental* and di.shonourahie * to the government. 8. 
 Cassius was wont to ask^ who had gained hv the result. 
 
 ' Criiitive 11 it to l)f ust'.l. (Sec 2 37 ) - 338, Ohs. 'J. 
 
 ' Kre(|iieiii.itive t'onii, roi/itn. 'rtu-iO'.'' (See 184.) 
 
Ex. XXXII. J 
 
 SPECIAL USES OE DA I IV E. 
 
 I7r> 
 
 1). It is vilc! to iM»nsi(U>r jmlitit's ii suiirco * of i,'iuii. U>, I 
 would tain in([uir(' what place you have rlioscii lor your 
 dwelling. 11. I am afraid tliat tliis will Itc very painful * 
 and disn;raL'(.'ful * to you. \'l I will warn tho l»oy what 
 {ijiiiinhu'i) a rcjtroach * it i-< t(» lucak one's word. \'-V Ho 
 jironiiscd t(» uivt- thcni the island of ('yjnus as a }>rfsent. 
 I t. 1 hoj)i' that lu' will juMvcivc how odious * cruelty is to 
 all men. 1;'). Then the anibas.sadors (»f the (Jauls threw 
 themselves at Cav'sar's feet. 16. It seems that he hat 's * 
 our nation and is hated * hy us. 17. 1 hope soon to c(('.ne 
 to your aid with three legions. 
 
 
 B. 
 
 1. He gives his word to take care that tlio anihassadors 
 shall be allowed to depart home in safety. '2. To this 
 prince, owing to a temperament (which wa.s) almost intol- 
 erable to the rest of the world, (men) had given tlie name 
 of the Proud, .'i. Ami this circumstance is a proof * that 
 no^ Roman took part in that contest. 4. So many and 
 so great are your illustrious brother's (224) achievements 
 that they have by this time been heard of, ])raised and 
 read of by the whole world. 5. We know that tlx* name 
 of deserters is hated * and considered execrable by all the 
 world; Init we earnestly imploic that this our change of 
 sides may l)ring us neither jiunishment * nor credit.* 6. 
 Not even (Intr. DD) in a time of universal" repo.se were we 
 allowed to enjoy repose. 7. I can scarcely Ixdieve that 
 so monstrous a design as this has been heard of and 
 approved by you. 8. This circumstance, whicii is now in 
 every one's mouth, he communicated to me yesterday ; I 
 susi»ect it concerns vou more than me. 0. When mv 
 
 It/ K/ 
 
 colleague comes "^ to my assistance* 1 can* supply you 
 with provisions and arms. 
 
 I' 
 n 
 
 •1). 
 
 Sli 
 
 ■ ».. 
 
 u 
 
 !! 
 
 ii 
 
 See 223. 
 
 ^ See 69, 
 
 9 See 190. 
 
 * Tense? (190, ii.) 
 
m 
 
 'k^ 
 
 ^^^, 
 
 ■> 
 
 
 ^, 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 .V^ 
 
 ^^^A^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 III I.I 
 111^ 
 
 1^ |28 |2.5 
 
 |50 *^" Bi^B 
 
 •^ U^ 1112.2 
 
 — 6" 
 
 1!^ 1^ 
 " lis lllllio 
 
 1.8 
 
 L25 IIIIIU 111.6 
 
 PhotDgraphic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 

 
i, t 
 
 
 
 i i 
 
 EXERCISE XXSIIl. 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 262. Tlu' Ablative is iimro tlinii a^iv (tllier jui adverbial 
 case; (read carefully 211). It answers the (Hiestions 
 whence t In/ irjuil meetna ? /loiv? from what cause / in what 
 manner ? witen ? and where ? 
 
 Its various ineanin«j;s may be thus clnssitied : — 
 
 (i.) IJeniuval, or departure ; //v^/// {ensKs ahlativus). 
 
 (Answers the questif)n whence.) 
 (ii.) Instrumentality ; hi/, with. 
 (iii.) Accompaniment; with, etc. 
 
 (iv.) Locality ; at or in a place or litne. (Answers the 
 question where or when.) 
 
 Ohs. — It therefore represents four distinct cases, the last of which 
 certainly, others in all probability, once existed as sejtarate forms. 
 
 263. (i.) Ablative of removal or departure from. 
 
 In most instances, either l)y itself, or with the pre))osi- 
 tions a, ah; ex, e ; de, it corresponds to the English //'om. 
 It is so used with verbs expressin«:j literal motion. 
 
 Troja pn'feeii sunt. They set out//(>m Troy. (Name of 
 
 Unen, see 9.) 
 A Pi/rrho, ex Africa, ler/dti reniunt. And)assa(lors come 
 
 from Pyrrhu.?, ,., from Italy. 
 
 2QA: It is thus used also with many other verbs without, us well 
 as with, a preposition. The preposition is mostly omitted M'here iio 
 merely bodily motion is implied. 
 
 Ahstinere injuria, to abstain /rom wronj^ ; ahiir nia;,'istratu, to 
 go out of office ; dtsixtcre conatu, to abandon or cease fmni 
 an attempt ; cafrre patria, to leave his native land ; jh/Zitc 
 civitate, to banish. 
 
 So also with verbs implying " freeing from," and "depriving.' 
 
 Solvit te his legibus Snuitun. The Senate exeinpt.s you /V«m those 
 
 laws. 
 Liherat te aere alieno. He sets vou free from (lel)t. 
 
 But very often the preposition is used. 
 
 JHsee<lant ab arvii.'i. Let them dej-art 7ro?ji arms. 
 A bh or r et iih ejusmodi culpa. He is far removed /Voi/i such blame. 
 176 
 
Ex. XXXIIl] 
 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 177 
 
 265. Not only vin'])s but adjectives^ signifviii^' vant or 
 frniloin from are joined witli tha dblativr, or sometinu's the 
 (ihliitirc \\\\\\ a or ah. 
 
 Mi'tu )"<»(•»(/.'<. Free /row fear. (Compare culpa ram/, lie is free 
 
 from fault.) 
 Lorn aunt ah arbitris iihcrti. The locality is free /rom witnesses. 
 Al) ijiisiiioili scelere (dUuhssimus. Quite inciipable o/ (removed 
 
 from) .such a criuie. 
 
 ■^ '^ I 
 
 III 
 
 266. (ii.) The ablative of source or origin, a very similar 
 sense U) that of ihpartnve from, is used mostly, though 
 not always, without the preposition. 
 
 Consulari familia (nius. Sprung //v)?/i a consular family. 
 Iloiiui optiniis parentibus natm. A man of excellent 
 parentage. 
 
 OhA. — Orfm, orimuius, when used of remote ancestora, are joined 
 with the prepo.sition ab. 
 
 267. (iii.) The ablative of instrument, and also that of 
 (iv.) cause, may be considered as nearly related to that of 
 oriijin. 
 
 Cornibus fauri se iufantur. Bulls protect themselves with 
 
 their horns. 
 J(fi/i vires lassitudine (lejinehaiit. Their strength was 
 
 uo'v l)eginning to fail f/imnffh {or from) weariness. 
 
 (v.) With the agent, i.e. a jhrson as opposed to a fhinfjf, 
 the preposition is neces.saiy. 
 
 (7/7//.S' ab Ale.xandro gladio infcrfrctiis rsf. (See 8, n.) 
 
 Olm. A secondary aj^'ent, i.e. a person used as an instrument, is 
 expressed by pir (or Optra with the genitive or the possessive 
 pronoun). 
 
 H'lrr per expIt»ratores rof/»(7(» .fimt. These facts \ver<' iiscertiiinwl 
 
 by means of reconnoiterers. 
 Titd opera. By your instrumentality. 
 8o propter and o/» are still more often used than the ablative to 
 express the ennxe. The ablative is mostly contined to a bodily, or 
 mental, or other property of the subject of the verb. Tua fortitudme 
 hoc mrrui'iti; but, propter taarn fortitudinem hoc ihertvit tituntus. 
 
 ' In th(! same way advfrtm are constantly joined with adjectives. 
 (Intr. 17.) Compare alHo the use of the dative, 264. 
 
 l« .1, 
 
 I', 
 
 \V'K 
 
 'i 
 
 II 
 
 If 
 
I i 
 
 I 
 
 I J 
 
 1^ 
 
 1' 
 
 n 
 
 ; It 
 
 l 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 178 
 
 r/zn: A/i/..iTrvE. 
 
 [Ex. XXXIII. 
 
 268. (vi.) The ablative of maimer is nearly related to 
 thdt of instnuncni and muse, Jind is very widely used. 
 
 Ilty: ratiime, hoc, nutdo, bij tills means, in this manner; 
 siimnw ojn're, earnestly ; rasti., by chance ; nidlo un)do, 
 hi/ no means ; nmsilio, bi/ design ; jure, rightly ; iiijitrid, 
 unjustly ; iiescio quo p(u:iit, in some way or other ; and 
 many others. 
 
 Obs. — Many of these are used exactly iis adverbs ; they only dilVer 
 f'roni a(lverl)s ;i.s beini? more olniously, what other adverbs were 
 oritiinally, oblique cases of sul)staiitives. 
 
 The preposition in. i.s never used in Latin before words signifying 
 vuDnier : thus, never "in hoc modo.^' 
 
 269. (vii.) The al)lative of accompaniment' when applied 
 to Ihinf/'i can hardly be distin<»uished from that of manner. 
 The rule is to use the preposition nun unless an emphatic 
 adjective is added. 
 
 We can .sjiy, Summfi haee diligent id feci, " I have done 
 
 this with the f/reafest care," and we vun/, but need not, 
 
 insert enni. But we cannot say, ffaec diligentiii feci, " I 
 
 have done this with care;" nor larri)ni% for "with tears." 
 
 Cum difjniiate niori satins est quern cum iffnominia vivere. It 
 
 is better to die with honour than to live under disgrace. 
 
 Obs. — With the following phrases cum is never used. 
 
 Hoc consilio, mth this intention ; aequo auimo, with cahiiwess, 
 or resignation ; jussu tuo, bif your coinniaiid ; iujussu Caesdvis, 
 without ('aesar's permission ; bond tud irnid, with your kind 
 permission ; nulla negotio, without trouble. But cum etnola- 
 uK'uto, or cum damno, meo, to ray advantage, or loss. 
 
 270. Where however the English with is used in the 
 literal sense of ( viii.) " in company with," the prepo.sitiou is 
 required - both with persons and things. 
 
 Qnxwfratre m.eu reni. 1 came icitli my brother. 
 Cum telo venit. He cam • irifh a weaj)on. 
 yVcum, ///wum, /M//>/.scum, robiiicmn, ibit. lie will go with 
 you, me, us, you. (8, i^bs.) 
 
 ' The English preposition with marks the connexion between the 
 •litferent senses of instrumiiit, nuniiifr, and accouijMiuimcnt. "I killed 
 him with A sword," "I di<l it irith ease," "I spoke with sorrow," "I 
 came with you." 
 
 * In military language, an army is sometimes looked on as standing 
 in an instrumental relation to its general : Duj- reliijuo exeroitu contra 
 hostcm projicixritur ; but even here the cum is mostly inserted. 
 
Ex. XXXIII.] 
 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 179 
 
 271. UiKl(3r this hesul o\' accompanimrut is to be classed 
 (ix.) the nhltdive of quality. 
 
 E.xiiniri ///// rttrporis {>ulchiitiuHi)j. He was a man of 
 tn'eat personal heauty. 
 
 Oba. — Here .ig.iin tlie jidjective is necessivry. Sec below, flen. of 
 Quality, 303. 
 
 We have thus fur had instances of the ablative used 
 to denote removal from, origin, instrument, eause, mjent, 
 manner, and areompaniment of circumstances, things, 
 persons, and (|^nalities. 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 1. He replied that nearly the whole of the aiiny was 
 annihilated, and^ that it made no difference whethei- it 
 had been overwhelmed by famine, or by pestilence, or by 
 the enemy. 2. Havin<,' been chosen kin^; not only by 
 his own soldiers, but also by the popular - vote,^ he aimed 
 at establishing and securing by the arts of peace a throne 
 gained by the sword* and violence. 3. Sprung as he 
 was from an illustrious family, he entered public life as^ 
 a young man, and retired at last from office as an old one. 
 4, Freed from the fear of foreign war, the nation was now^ 
 able to drive traitors from its territorv, and show its 
 gratitude to patriots. 5. Whether^ your uui)rincipled 
 relation, has abamloned this attempt, or intends (14, e) to 
 persevere in it, I ki.aw not ; but whether" he means to 
 take one course^ or the other, it seems to me that he is 
 not yet willing to abstain from wrong. 6. So far is njy 
 unfortunate brother from having been freed from debt, 
 that he is even now leaving his country for^ no other 
 cause. 
 
 2 "Of the people." (S»!e 69.) 
 * Why not ./((u/io / (See 17.) 
 
 * Why not ef. nihil? (See 110.) 
 
 * Plural. Compare p. 72, ». 2. 
 
 * " As " not to be expressed; why would relut, ffunsi, }»e wrong ? 
 
 * Jam; nuivc is "at thU present inon»ent." 
 
 " " Whether." (S<ie 171.) * - to do this, or that. 
 
 * Propter (ace.). 
 
 'I! 
 
 bt,!' 
 
 ;:»!, 
 
 
 ii 
 
 1,1. 
 '■■I, 
 
180 
 
 THE Am.ATIVE. 
 
 [Ex. XXXIlI. 
 
 1. I would fain ask, with your kind ponnission, wlM'tlici 
 il ' was Ity acridciit, oi- l»y d('sii,ni that you jictcd - tlius. 
 2. We, sol lorlii IVoiii lionic with tcius, witli wailing, and 
 witli the (U''.'|u^st anxiety; we iiNulied tlie end of" our 
 jourM«\y reli(!ved of a h)ad oi" cares, tree I'roni tear, and 
 amidst, j^niat and universal r(!Joicin^. W. He is a man of 
 the most spoth^ss charaet(;r, and so far renjoved from such 
 a crime that for my part, 1 wonder^ how lie can have 
 htien susp(M:te I of such monstr(tus inii»iety. 4. We had 
 rat her die witli honour tiian live as slaves (42, ii.); but we 
 refus(» to perish in this manner for the sake of such* a 
 person as this. '>. 1 minht have '' faced <leath itself with- 
 out trouhh', hut I cannot endure such a heavy disaster 
 as this'' with resiuuiition. 0. He was so transported with 
 ]>assioii that he threatened not only his brother, but {ill 
 the bystander, with death. 
 
 Seo 156. 
 
 till this : iivoitl nsiiij,' aqerc for "t»» act," Jiiid notice the real 
 
 ineaniilys of iKjirc. 
 
 * See 87. 'raliti is rarely used couteinptuously. 
 « See 196. 
 
 =* Mood ? (See 106.) 
 « 88, O/w. 
 
 1 i 
 
/''.xr.NcrsF. .v.v.v/r. 
 
 1 . ,i - 
 
 ABLATIVE Continued. 
 
 272. OtluT si'iisi's of the jiMat ivc Im'Iohlj 1<) it ;is liiiviii^ 
 taken the \}\hl'v in u gn-iit iK'nice ol' Uw iiciHiv oltxtlctc 
 locative case, jinswering, not the <iuesti(in ir/intci !, luit 
 
 (>/»s.— This case, whirh ciuled in ('. so ofti'ii ivscmhltMl in for in tlu* 
 iil»l;itive litter the latter had h>st its tiiial letter d, that at last the 
 al>hitive jnhh'd to its many nth«'r nitaniMi:s tlmse which ]»r(')terly 
 l)ehtniie<l to the hK'ative, and the s;.nie ease eanie to represent 
 irhevcv and n-fure. 
 
 Local uses of the ahhitive may include those which denote nt a phui., 
 and (it a time. (See », n, and helow, 311 ami 320.j 
 
 /•( //('A.s' AtliPi'is CMwV. Hie sept imo r(///7. 
 
 273. Such too are the phrases, tuni ni<iri<ftN\ by sea and land ; 
 (h'xfrd. (or n. (lt.ifn'i\ sinistrd, (.* the rii,Mit, left, hand , Itcllo it jxur, in 
 war and peace ; n<ictr, hinm', priwn lurr, etc. ; so also hkji r pedihus, 
 sutferin^ in the feet ; altero s((nciu.'< hrachio, wounde<l in one arm. 
 
 Ohs. — The ])reposition in sometimes makes a sliifht difference in 
 tlie meaiiini; ; t«li ttnijmre, simply, (»/ such a time, or moment ; in 
 tali teniiiorc, ronKidtriiuj the circnnist'ivns of such a time, or emer- 
 gency, in sjiifc II f, or in tlic fiwe of, siidi a ciisis. 
 
 For the AbLitive Ah.solute,. wliicli includes tlu^ ideas 
 botli of (i)n<' and lurompitinjimj ci/-i-inii,s(<nt(cs, sue Exer- 
 cise Mil. 
 
 II' 
 
 11'' 
 
 lift 
 
 '1, 
 
 
 274. AVith tiu' /m-tt/ aldalivc^ may he compared the 
 ahlative of respect or limitation; the Imi^IIsIi ///, in tlie 
 sense of " in so far as concerns," etc. 
 
 Sjicrie, in appearance ; ir, ri i/'si'i, in reality ; ninnlnr, in name. 
 Lintiua, morihus, ar>/(o/woH ixmei-e infir se ilisni iKilidiif. They 
 
 ditfered from one another in lanj^iiajfe, liahits, an<l //; the 
 
 nature of their arms. 
 
 Olm. — To this use of the ablative l>elon<,'s the supine in -u. 
 Jforranihun dlcin, IhemlUd in, the tillituj. (See 404.) 
 
 IM 
 
 ^^k. 
 
r 
 
 182 
 
 THE AHLATIVE. 
 
 [Ex. XXXIV. 
 
 ? I 
 
 ^1' 
 
 275. Till! siblative of comparison (or diff'trnur front) 
 hflon^'s (])rolm]tly) to the al>ljitivt» oi </rparfuri' from. 
 
 Ill Knj,'lish, ii cdinparative adjective or adverb is coniiei'tetl by tlie 
 conjniKit' >ii tlittii (^(iri^nually (Inn) with tlie rlauHe or word with whirh 
 tlie coiiiparisoii is made : He is older than he 'vas ; He is more Ihaii 
 twenty years oM. 
 
 In Latin also, iiiiani is the regular particle of compaiison. As it 
 is a nnijiinctiini, and not a prepoititioii, things compared hy <iuam will 
 l)e in the same case. 
 
 Eurnpa minor cxt, quam Asia. Europe is smaller than Asia. 
 />/.< it EiirofKtin minorevi ease (puiiu Asiain. He said that Europe 
 
 was smaller than Asia. 
 A iihUo lihi'iitiiis {[\\i\ui a ft', littcras accipio. I receive a letter 
 from no one with more pleasure than from you. 
 
 276. l>iit ill Latin, whore two nouns are closely coni- 
 ]>ai('(l with one another, the ablative of eoni})arison, or 
 thin.ij: <lijfti<(/ J)om,\s widely used; an idiom (jiiite unlike 
 P^n<.,dish. 
 
 Hoc honiiiie nihil coiifcinptiua esse yvted. Nothing can 
 
 he more des^^icahle than this man. 
 llatc nimne luct, clariara santi Are not these things 
 
 clearer flian the daylight ? 
 
 We shouhl pr(jltaldy say "so despicable as',' "as clear 
 
 as. 
 
 Obs, — This construction however is only u.sed when the comparative 
 adjective is in the nominative, or the accusative after a \erh tmliymH 
 vd dedarandi. It is exceedingly common in veyatire and mtirroya- 
 tiir sentences, as above. 
 
 277. The ablative of compari.son is largelj' used after comparative 
 adjectives and adverbs, with such words as spes, opinio, fama, 
 i'.i}>i'('tafio, ewn JHstmn and anjiinm. 
 
 Spe omnium celerius venit. He came sooner than any one had 
 
 h(»l)ed. 
 Ne plus justo dulucris. Do not feel undue pain. 
 
 278. " Superior to" " inferior to," may be expressed in Latin by 
 this ablative. 
 
 Omnia virtute inferiora ducit. He counts everything inferior to 
 
 (of lower rank than) goodness. 
 Negant qnenqwim te fortiorem esse. They say that n<» one is 
 yonr snperior in courage. 
 Nemo tihi virtute jyraestat would hp also good Latin for *' iio oii*- 
 IS, <t<-, 
 
Ex. XXXIV] 
 
 TUE ABLATIVE. 
 
 \t& 
 
 279. Ai)otli«'i' nbliitivc often joined witlj coinjuinitives 
 is tliat of tilt* measure of difference, and is elearly instnt- 
 iiiintnl. 
 
 Miilto iiir i/iiili(>r. (iiraflfi my superior in leainiiij;. 
 J/i>iiii> jtaulo s(ii)i('iifi(tr. A man of somcir/iaf more wisdom 
 
 than is common; "of fair, or aveiaj^e, wisdom.' 
 Si'iKihis \Ki\\h) Jir<iii('nlii>r. A sitniiir/nif erow<led senate. 
 
 Caution. — Tliese ablative f(»iins. pati/n, nm/fo, co, tmilo, 
 etc.. innst never 1m» used with adjectives or adverbs in tlie 
 )>ositive deuree. Compare :he use of quo (102). 
 
 But iliey may be ustd with words wliich, though not coinpanitive 
 in form, imply i-omparison. 
 
 PutiU) ante. .\ little before, or eitrlier. 
 
 Midto tihi pruestat. He is much superior to you. 
 
 280. The ablative of price, " for," " at sucli a rale." may 
 l)e eitlier local (nf), or instrumental (/>// mams of). 
 
 It is used with verbs of buying and selling, etc., nnrrr, 
 rtii(ft'n\ etc. 
 
 Jlijinli talentis inuim orationcni Tsocrutes vendidit, Isoorates 
 sold one oration for twenty talents. 
 
 So with verbs of exchan<;;inj;. 
 
 Pacem hello mntaint. He exchanged ])eace /or war. 
 
 Ohs. — The adjectives mogno, parvo, nimio. qnnuto, etc., are gener- 
 ally used by themselves, the substJintive pretio being understood. 
 
 riHilitori ijjMit rem venire tjuam plurimo. It is for the interest 
 of the seller that the thing should be sold for, or at, as high a 
 price as possible. 
 
 Multo sanguine rirtoria nobis stetit, or, constitit. The victory 
 cost us much bloud. 
 
 Verbs of valuiiKj, cstcemiwj, etc., as distinct from actual 
 huyiiKj, take the genitive. (See 305.) 
 
 
 ll ! ' 
 
 «1, 
 
 )1 
 
 i 
 
 M 
 
184 
 
 TlfE ABLATIVE. 
 
 (Ex. XXXIV 
 
 ! 
 
 r't| 
 
 » 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 Hi 
 
 III 
 ill 
 
 pi 
 
 
 tr 
 
 rj.irrnHC 
 
 ;u. 
 
 1. It is piw'tty w«'ll h^hmmI oil liyall of voii tliat tin' sim 
 
 niiiiiy tiiii's' laitftT tliaii tlu' niuoii. l'. I liiivf known 
 
 tliis man Ironi hoyhooti ; I l»('li«?V(' liiin to he ^^rcatly 
 
 your superior 
 
 l)Otl 
 
 1 in coura^^' aiul icarmnj^ 
 
 ."{. Tlir l\in«r 
 
 liiinscir, \vliil(» lie was- ti,Lf|iliii_<; in front of tlic foremost 
 line of Itatfle, was wounded in the head, in spite of this-' 
 <,n't!at eonfusjon and universal panic, he refu.sed to with- 
 draw from th(! eoiitt'st. 4. l»y this means he heeanie 
 riL,ditly dear to the naticui,'* and reached the extremity ol' 
 old a^'e in name a private citi/en, in reality almost the 
 [Kirent of his country, f). And'' this crime must he at 
 once atoned for hy your b'ood, for your" {^''I'lty deeds are 
 clear and plain as' this sun li<j;ht, and*^ it is quite impos- 
 sihle that any memher of the nation can wish you pardoned. 
 0. it seems'* to me, said he, that all of you are soldiers in 
 name, deserters and hii^'ands in reality. 7. The battle 
 was now much more desperate; on the left our men were 
 l)e<;iimi!i^ to fail through weariness; the «;t'ner}il, himself 
 wounded in one arm, was the Hrst to become aware of this. 
 
 8. You niii;ht^^ but lately have exchanged war for peace; 
 too late [i(tli\) to-day are you repentini; of your blunder. 
 
 9. J was anxious yesterday for your safety ; but the 
 matter has turned out much better than I had looked for. 
 
 10. How much better would'- it have been in the ])resence 
 of such a crisis to ha;^ held all considerations inferior 
 to the national safety. 
 
 10 
 
 ' " Parts.'' For case, see 279. = See 180. 
 
 * Or country. (See 16, a.) * Intr. 58. 
 
 ' See 276. ' = nor is it possible. (See 110, and 126, /.) 
 
 9 43. '» 218 " 196, 197. '^ 153. 
 
 " 88, Ohs. 
 
 •* Iste. (See 338.) 
 
 i I 
 
EXFRCISE XXXV. 
 
 ABLATIVE Continued. 
 
 281. Tlic iililativc is also used to coinitlftc tlie sense of 
 eeitiiiii deponent verbs. 
 
 Finii/nr, fruiir, ufor (with their (■oiiij)omi(ls), pCitior, 
 irscor, (fif/iior, ff/onOr, take the ahltttivr. 
 
 /Iinniihn/, nun victoria passff nti, fnii imihiif. Ilaiinihal 
 
 at a time when ' (altlioii<;li) lie nii^'ht have used his 
 
 vietc.ry preferred enjoviiij^ it. 
 Mdifis periculo defuneti stuniis. Wv have ;;ot over the 
 
 daiij^'er of death. 
 K(i.'<fri victoria ]>otiti sinif. Our soldiers jiainetl the 
 
 victory. 
 
 O/w. "Tills idjlativc is of c(Mws(* iii't tliiit <il' the iiftnrr ohint ; \n\t 
 these (lepdnent Vfvhn resenihie in llu-ir use (Jreek vi'il» of tlic iniihllr 
 voire, l^tor, I .serve myself tcifh ; fruor, I enjoy myself irlili ; ri.M-or, 
 T feed mys«'M' nn ; jxttior. I miike myself powerfid vith ; fiimjitr, I 
 discharge myself /Vo;/* ; iliiiiior, I lioht myself worthy <»' ."«■'"'/' " i-rirr ; 
 (jlorior, I ifjorify my.self vith: so that the ahlative is in each (use 
 used in one or other of its re<,'ular (kIi'i rhial u.ses. (See 228, 0/;s. i 
 
 •'t;| 
 
 (1,; 
 It , 
 
 * ' ' ; 
 
 !! 
 
 282. of these verl)s, po//o?- sometimes takes the }^eni live, ''I am 
 mastei' o/." (fur is freely used with adverhs ; nidli, pern.r.st, iiii- 
 iiKiilentti, iifiii; " 1 make a had, or immodt-rate ti.se of," = '* 1 ahuse." 
 The Latin adverh nuist he suhstituted for the Kurdish ad|eetive. 
 
 Ti familiarit r, /c amico usns sum. 1 was on intimate terms 
 with yon, I found a friend in yon. 
 
 0^^•. (ilori'iri is ttsed also with in and ili ; niti, "to le.in. or rely 
 on," with and without in. < 'on fiih) with dat. of person /always dat. 
 of per.sonal pronoun), ablative of thinif. Tihi c<inji.su.< .■^niii ; f.n rcitn.'i 
 virtute conjido. (244, c.) 
 
 ' Or, " iiiHtecul q/" using his victory preferretl to enjoy it. ' 
 
 1S5 
 
18G 
 
 THE ABLA TIVE. 
 
 [Ex XXXV. 
 
 Ml 
 
 m 
 III 
 
 it' 
 
 :*! ' 
 
 283. ('(UMpiire also with the Enj^lish idiom the use of 
 tlu! abhitive to compUite tlio sense of certain trjiiisitive 
 ver1).s. 
 
 Hoport', pniemio, le, nfferi. I conferred on you a distiiiction, a 
 
 rewiinl, 
 poena, siipplicio, nimaftu'iam. I will intiict punislmient on him 
 
 (= jKH'HaH (If no hvukiiii). 
 Honnril)iis te. (•ninnlavtinuit. We have heai)e(l or showered 
 
 honours on you. 
 Oumi ohservantia eiivi jmmcntun sum. I have paid him every 
 
 kind of respect, {('f. 247.) 
 
 284. Verbs of nhoundiwj^Jilliwj, hntliwj, etc., an<l their 
 opposites, such as verbs oi hcimi wifhoiU, dtprivinn of, 
 ('mptj/iiui oj\ are joined witli the ahlativc. 
 
 Such verbs are nrrnwflnere (divitiis), comph're, onirare, re/cmri', 
 rniiiiiline (honorihu.s), curere, eyere, vacare (culpa) orhare, privair, 
 fraud are. 
 
 Fhinu'ti ftisclhiDi abundat. The river is /a// of fish. 
 Mortid. nira ft Colore carent. The dead are free from anxiety 
 and pain. 
 
 But of these eyeo and imligeo (especially the latter) ^jovern the 
 (jenHive also ; as also coiiiplere, replere. 
 
 liin via.i iiiie neeensariae von tam artis intllffent quam laboris. 
 The most necessary thinjjs do not reijuire skill .so nmcli as 
 labour. 
 
 Oha.- \n verbs o{ ahonmUiuj, etc., the ablative is no doubt iiixfru- 
 wenfal. Its orij;inal sense with verbs of want is more doubtful ; 
 pro])a])ly that of s<7^(jra/ to*/, freedom /vom. 
 
 285. The ablative is joined .also with jidjcctives, in 
 uumy of its various senses. (See 235.) 
 
 Diffnua, indignus, contentus, jyracdif us, freiuH are followed 
 by an :»i>lative witliout a preposition. 
 
 /'//■ oninl hoHorc dignus. A man worthy of every dis- 
 tinction. 
 
 Diritiis o'pihusifie fretus. Relying on his wealth and 
 resources. 
 
 Be careful not to use a genitive after (Hyuus. 
 
Ex. XXXV.) 
 
 77//; AlU A'lll'E, 
 
 is: 
 
 286. Tlic aldativc ((i'tlw nnim, aniI occnsiiiiiiilly ol" tlu' 
 jiiirticijilc, is iil.so used wiili x^ms (iiiid /'s//,>) ulicii tlu-y 
 Itoiir tilt' .sense <>t nml of. 
 
 ['hi ns iiilsiihl, niiiil ini/il Nt'i'liis ojms tsf/ Wlieii fiict.s jiro 
 
 lieie, what m'c«l liav«' I of irun/s / 
 .tif ^if>i coiisiilto iii>iis. fssi'. Ilr siiy.s lie lius iieetl of 
 
 i/i'/ihrnitiiill. 
 
 Sniia'tiiiH's tlu' tliiiiy iu'»'(l«'(l is the siilijci't to npns est. 
 
 J)iix nohis it aiittur ofms mt. We iit'cd a h-adiT and advis«'r. 
 This iiidci'il is tlic riiU- with nt'iilcr pronouns and adjt'itivos : 
 (,>n,i(' iinhix npiiA Html ; \\,\\\vi\ tihi npiis Htnit ; otiniin, nxuiv ml ritnin 
 oi>iis Huut, "all tln' nccosaiics of life." Tlir intinilivc is also used : — 
 Qiiiil Idiic sciilu'rc itjiiis I st f What iH'«'d is thfic to writ*' this? 
 Olis. -Opus piiipnly nifans " woik ito Itc dune)," and tlu' ahliitivt* 
 is the alilativf of ifspt'ct, — " llieiv is work to be doiit' for lue in ion- 
 snltiitioii." 
 
 Kirrcixc 35. 
 A. 
 1. I liiive now lived ioii^ on most intimate terms with 
 your son; it se.'iiis to nie that lie re.semliles lii.s father 
 in ability and eluiraeter, i;itlier than in either I'eatnres 
 or personal appearance. '1. Do* xmV deprive (pi.) of 
 wt'll-eavned tiistinetion and praise one \vh(t has mado 
 .so mood,- so sensible, a use of the favours of heaven. 
 3. I cannot'^ hut believe liat it is"* by vo\ir instru- 
 menlality that I have i^ot ovei this j^reat danoer. 4. All 
 of us, your well-wishers, make this one prayer, that you 
 may be permitted to discharge the duties of your ottice 
 with'' honour and advantam* to yourself; we all rely on 
 your honesty and self-control, and are all proud of your 
 friendship. .^). JJelyini,' on your sup])ort, 1 have ventured 
 to inflict i-cvere punishment on the rebels. G. He always 
 put confidence in himself, and in*' s))ite of huml)le means 
 and scanty fare preferred contentment (98, a) to restino'^ 
 on "ther nu*i. s resources. 7. He ])referred disj)onsino; 
 wit], dl the nc' »'ssaries of life (as) a free man., to abound- 
 iui"- i riches in fhe condition of a slave. 
 
 n 
 
 •I 
 
 %.x 
 
 ' 143. " 282. » 137, y. 
 
 ■* S.'c %2. 'I'h*- |»«ri liiasis /»/»7//»/ I'sr.i- iit may lui used for enipluLsis. 
 
 •'• 269. '" 273, nhs. " See 94. 
 
188 
 
 THE An LA' il'E. 
 
 [Ex. XXXV. 
 
 Ml ?' 
 
 B. 
 
 1. IFc i»roiiii.s('.s to sii))|tly us witli ovorvtliin^; tliiit is* 
 ii(»cessiiry. '1. We liiivc \wv<\ of (U^lihcratinii I'iitlier than 
 luisto, f'oi' I r»!iir that this victory lias already cost us too 
 uuich. ;}. In my youth I enjoyed tlie tViendsliip of your 
 illustrious lather; he was a man oi' leinarkahle id)ilities, 
 and of the hiiihcst c.iiaiacter. 4. He hopes to visit with 
 condign punishment th(! mnrderci-s of his i'litlier iind the 
 conspirators ii^iiinst their sovereign T). I fciir that he 
 seems tar I'n nil worthy of all - the compiission iind indul- 
 muice of \vlii"h lu; stands in need to-dav. (i. Nothinu' 
 can ever he imai^inj^d nioni happy than my fathei's lot 
 in life ; h(> dischar^XMl the duties of the hi^ht^st oHioe 
 without'* failini;' to enjoy the charms of family life. 
 
 7. iiclying on your ^ood-will, I have not hesitated"* to 
 avail myself of the letter which you sent me by'' my son. 
 
 8. Can any om^ he more worthy of honour, mor(> unworthy 
 of punishment, than this man ? 
 
 ' Moo(i, see 77. 
 
 " Sue 111, "so discharged as to enjoy," 
 
 Taiitus , , . ((iiantus. 
 ^ See 136, b. ' 267, O/w, 
 
i:.\'/:ncis/': xxxri. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 Two of tlie main ust's dl" ihc (Iciiilivc, or (/rjiiiiji;/ case, 
 aio - 
 
 The Possessive ; when; the Liciiitivt* dciioti's the jicrsoii 
 or tliiiii; to whifh some other ikmsou ov tliim; l)floii<;s. 
 
 Till' Partitive; where the ^^enitive denotes tlie ivlation 
 of a whoh' to a. part. 
 
 I. Possessive Genitive. 
 
 287. Tlie Genitive diflers from all other eases (ineliul- 
 inu the obsolete Locative) in hejuo rarely used with verbs. 
 The proper office of a noun in the genitive is t(» detiiie, or 
 give the [/cnus of, another noun. (See 214.) 
 
 288. It (Iocs tlifs in vari'iiis \v;i_vs ; and tlie I'fl.itioii lictwceii one 
 noun and a'lotln'r. as dcnotcil in tiic Latin t:t'iiiti\c, may lu' very 
 variously expressed in En^disli . liy tlie j.nssi .■<.•: ir, ,7(.v , hy \ai'ious 
 pirpositioiix, and by tlie (uljcctirr. Tlius — 
 
 Lihri C'iceroids, Cieero's liooks ; lioiiiinuni njili um^, tlie liest itf 
 men; mortis _/'('f/ (, \\\\i\\\. fnnn death, Ilelvetioi uin iiijiirldf 
 populi lioiiiani, tiie \\ loners done /-// the llelvetii to the penpU' 
 ot" Rome; mortis vi uiuli mii. a rt-meily iii/<iiii<t death; faxsn 
 (|uindecim pedum, a luiilLic lilieiMi feet irid, ; huum ohnliciitia, 
 obedience ^> law ; corporis ; m/////-, //oi///// strength ; aiinssi tilii 
 dolor, j)ain/«/' the loss of his son. 
 
 In these instsmees the L:<'nilives exjiicss ;i close con- 
 ne.\i(jn])etween two siihsttint ives ; hut ;i coniiexioii of very 
 dilVerent kinds: in till the word in the jrenitive explain^i 
 aid defines t 'e other wora. 
 
 18!> 
 
 'I 
 
 »4| 
 
 (I, 
 
 It 
 
 
190 
 
 possF.ssivr. CF.xrr/rE. 
 
 [Ex. XXXVI. 
 
 289. As heiuLj most ])ro[H»rly tliat case in wliicli ono 
 noun is attaclicd, or annexed, to anoilu'r, wlncli it exjdiiins, 
 it may V)o called the adjectival caso, and in fact often 
 coiTes))(»nds exactly to the adjective. (See 58.) 
 
 (Wsaris ravm, iiicii ran m, on behalf of (Caesar, on my bolialf ; 
 tui'i ojwrd, illins opera, with your, or lii.s, aid ; so Siillani 
 m Hit I A = Sullae //* it lies. 
 
 290. Of these, the strictly possessive use will cause no 
 ditticuUy ; it answers to the Knulish possessive case in ,s' 
 (the only real cnae reniainiuLj in the English suhstantive), 
 to the preposition of, to the ijosscsslcc })rotiouti, and to the 
 adjccfirc. 
 
 Pompeii acqualis ac mens. Ptimjx'ifs contemporary and 
 
 mif oirv. 
 Noster (([([lie onniium paints. Our oini, and the idiircrsdl 
 
 parent. 
 Secpfriini. regis (or regium). Tlu; kiiKj's scei)tre. 
 Illiid Platonis. That saying of Plato. 
 
 Ofts. — Under this may be classed .such expre.ssions as tui sinrili.'i, 
 Ciceronis inimici)i.nuii (see 256); also Pompeii caioid, (jrat id, in the 
 interest of, for the .sake o/, Pompey [mea, tini, not nie'i, tin) ; and even 
 sui juris, suae ditionis facere, to bring under his own jurisdictiou, or 
 power. 
 
 291. To this possessive and adjectival genitive belongs 
 also the following construction : — 
 
 The genitive singular of a snhstiuitivr, especially when it 
 can denote a class (as purr, rex) or of an ai/Jidirc used ns a 
 substantive {stidtns, sapiciu^i), or of an nhHtnui, iioitn, {/rrifas, 
 stidtitia) or of a pro)wim, is often used as a predicate 
 with a copulative verb to denote such English ideas as 
 " property," " duty," " part," " mark," etc. 
 
 OliH. 1. — This construction takes the place of the neuter adjective, 
 especially in adjectives of one termination. 
 
 "It is foolish " ma?/ be translated ntnUiun est; hut .'it iilti is much 
 more usual ; "it is wise" is always .^apientif, or .Hapii iitiae. e.ft, never 
 sapie?M, which might mean "a wise nmn." Latin is rarely ambiguous. 
 
 (>hs. 2. — In the place of the personal pronouns the neuter of the 
 possessive is used. 
 
 Meinn (not mei) est, it is mi/ part, or iJiit!/, or it is for me to. etc 
 
Ex. XXXVI.] j'os.s/':ss/r/': genitive. 
 
 191 
 
 {)\>A. 3. — The siune construction is used after verbs sentiendi et 
 (Itildramli. 
 
 Hoc, aupientis esse difit. This, he siiid, was the wise course, 
 (lit. th>- jKoi of a wise man . 
 
 Ohx. 4. This <ietiitive may bo transhited into Eniflisli in various 
 ways : ami therefore there are various Eii«flish phrases that may be 
 reduced to tliis constructictn. 
 
 Such phrases ate: it w clKiravfirisfU' of; it is tueinnf>eut on; it 
 /s for (the rich, etc.) ; it is not cvrrij one who ; any man may ; it 
 (htnands or ir^juires; it betrays, hUows, etc. ; it helongs to ; it de2)ends 
 vjion ; it tends to, etc. 
 
 292. ExampU's — 
 
 1. Iiu}»ecilli aniini est superstitio. Superstition is a mark of (or 
 
 lii'trnjis) a weak mind. 
 
 2. Judicis est Ixjihus parerc. It is the part (or duty) of a judj^e 
 
 to obey the law. 
 
 3. Injfenii hor ma<,nii est. Tliis requires ^'reat abilities. 
 
 4. Cujusvis hoininis est errare. Any man may err. 
 T). Meum est. It is my business, or duty. 
 
 6. Sunimae est dementiae. It is the height of madness. 
 
 7. Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habitnm. It has always 
 
 been held a tcise tiling to yield to circumstances, or to 
 temporise. 
 
 8. Hoc dement i;ie esse summae dixit. He said that this showed 
 
 the height of madness. 
 
 9. Hoc sui esse arbitrii negavit. He said that this did i\oi depend 
 
 upo)i his own decision. 
 
 Obs. — To this belongs ;-. phrase common in Livy — 
 Hoc evertendae exse reipu])licae,' dixit. He said that this tended 
 to the destruction of the constitution. 
 
 
 UxorLsc 36, 
 
 1. Wlietlier you (pi.) will be- slaves or free, depends 
 iinoii voiir own deeisioii. "2. We know that aiiv man inav 
 err, but it is foolisli to forget that «'rr(>r is one thing, j)er- 
 sisteney (98, a) in error another. 3. He brought under 
 his own jurisdiction, sooner than lie had hoped, the 
 privileges and liberty of all his countrymen. 4. Living^ 
 
 ' The various im luings of this phrase res puhlicn (often written as 
 one word) should be carefully notietMl. It should lever be translated 
 b" "republic." b\it by "t'le e'>U".titutii>n.'' "the nation," "polities," 
 "public life," I'tc, accni'.lniL( to tlie (-'outext, and slntuld never be used 
 in tlic plural uidess when it uieau-i iiiore tiian one "state" or "luitiou," 
 
 - 173, iii. 
 
 S»ie 94. 
 
r 
 
 192 
 
 POSSESSIVE GEhnriVE. 
 
 ,Ex. XXXVI. 
 
 for the (lay only, ({uid) making no provision for llie f'ntnre 
 was, h(i siiid,^ ratlicr the cliai'ju'ti'ristic ol' Itarltai'ians tliaii 
 of a, frt'(.'. nation. '). Voui' fathers contcinporarics wcre,- 
 he said, his own, and nnnc (110) of tlicni jiad- hcen 
 dearer to him than your uncle, ti. In my altsencc; 1 did 
 not ceusi! lo do evervthin'4' in your interest and (that) of 
 your exceUent hi-otlier. 7. A sensihh' man will'^ yiehi, 
 says he, to eireuinstaiiees, hut it is tlie iieii^ht of folly to 
 ])ay attention to threats of this kind. S. Whether we 
 iiave won the day or no (168, ()\)s.) I hardly dare* say; 
 it is, I know,' a soldiei-'s (hily to wait for his Li('neiars 
 ordei's. !>. It will he" foi' others to (h'aw up and Iti'ing 
 forward hiws, it is our part tt> ohey the law. 1(». Vou 
 were, h(! said, evading the law whieli you had' yourself 
 got enacted ; a cour.se which, he helieved, tendeil to*^ the 
 overthrow of the constitution. 
 
 1 32, h. 
 
 " = it i.s the part of a, etc. 
 
 5 See 32, h. 
 
 7 Mood? (See 77.) 
 
 - " Were." For tenses, see 193, i., ii. 
 ^ Subjunctive. (149, i.) 
 
 « 291, O'.v. 4. 
 ' 292, 0/as. 
 
 ;«i 
 
i':.\/:Rr/s/-: xxxi'ii. 
 
 GENITIVE Continued. 
 
 The Partitive Genitive. 
 
 293. A woiil ill lilt' U'Miitivc ipficii stands id aiidtlicr 
 word ill tlu' ii'lalitm, iml nt' a itdsscssur. luit I'f a whole t<> ;i 
 part, 'riiis is callfil tlic partitive genitive, and is very 
 widely ll.'^rd. 
 
 'I'lii.s (^ciiitivt' aiLswci's to tlic KiiuILnIi "'(/. .•illrr sid)Nt;iiilivt'.s 
 (U'liiitiii;^' it |>ai't, in siu-li |>lii;i.s(s ;is iiitnjiiii jiin.< cxtitilu.^. ;iml i.s used, 
 like tliiil ltrt'|H».siti(tll, witli shjh rhitiri iKljictina ;iiid ml lu rhs. with 
 iiitorniji'Mtive and othi'V jumi mi iis. witii lunuirnh, nnd with any word 
 which ran denote in anv way n /"irf nf ii lunji r ir)n>l,. siicli ms iniiio, 
 (/y//.s•(y/^(/«, III lilt i\ j)ii iirl. iitirijiii, (jii is(jii, , ('\r. 'I'hu.-^ 
 
 Uiiiix^ oiiiiiliiiii intt'iiois.-<iniiis, tlie ]\]i>st iiMlortanatc <>(' all man- 
 kind ; til niaxinie innniinn, yctu jnnst i>t all ; uter nsfrii'ii, 
 which of yon two ; iiiiihi horn in, many of these ; (hio horuni, 
 two (*/" tliese ; (|notn.-<(|ni.s(jne jiliiloydjilionnn, liow few {nf) 
 phihisophers. 
 
 294. A more idiomatic use of tliis oenltive is with tli(> 
 neuter singular of adject i\ is and ])ron(»uns e.\])ressiiio' 
 ijiidiifitt/ or i/f;/rn\ and witli iiiliil, .sufls, i>innii. Tliese 
 are used a,s quasi- substantives, and are joined with the 
 genitive of suV)stantiv('s and adjectives, an idiom not 
 unknown in English, but exceeilingly common in Latin. 
 
 Compare Latin and Kiiulisli in — 
 
 Quantum roIi(jdati!<, how much plea.^ure ; phi.s ilitriiin nti, fireniet 
 loss ; nihil iirncinii, no reward ; satis, or paium, ririvrii, suffi- 
 cient, or insutHcient streniith ; (juiii iiori ^ what news / nimium 
 tciiiporia, too I'.iuch time ; hoc I'liml mih iiti^ tliis (nf) ijain. 
 
 O/w. - Thi.s (.M'tntiNC is even u.^eil with adverbs: tum tuiijioris, i\t 
 that time; eo iiiidirinr, to such a jiitch nf lioldness ; ul)i (ladium, 
 where in the world .' and in sucii aijverliial ])lu-ases as cum iil aetatis 
 piicro, ad id locorum, up to that point ;of time . (See 238, iii.) 
 
 ii' 
 
 1 1 
 
 « ! 1 
 
 I 
 
 i.i 
 * ! 
 
 »■ ii 
 i; 
 
 i; 
 
 * Note this intensivo u.-c of iniH.-< with tlie superhitive. 
 
 103 
 
i 'I 
 
 k 
 
 194 
 
 PARTITIVE C.EXI Tll'E. 
 
 [Ex. XXXVII. 
 
 295. Cautions in tlu; use of tin; jiiiilitivc j^fcnitivc 
 
 (ft) It is not nsctl with adjectives wiicrt' the ;,ft'iiit ivc li.is im 
 .se|niriite t'onii for tlit* neuter ;^'enih'i' : write a'lhW hiiniilc, not nihil 
 hnmiliit, for " n<»tliin«,f de^'ratUii^." 
 
 (/>) It is not used with adjectives expressitii; the irlmlr, iin'ililli, eti-. : 
 tvtii, iiudiii, urhs, i.ot urhis Uttiim, im IIkhi^ for " the whole," "niidflle 
 of the city " {BO). 
 
 ((•) It is not used with words joined witli jurimnitionx, or with 
 other cjises than tlie nonilnatire and <t<riisaliri'. 
 
 Ad mnltain noctcni. To a late hour, not <((l mnltuin noi-fis. 
 'Tanto s<in(iHi}u\ not Uinto sdiKjidnis. At the cost of 1^280) so 
 nnich bh)o(i. 
 
 296. Willi numerals, iiiul words expiv.ssin^' )U(iiihrr, as 
 iinno, iniilti, niinx, jfiKci, etc., ainl even with suptM'lativt's, 
 the ablativM with *,':, r, i/r, or iufrr with the accusative, is 
 often substituted; i/tdlfi, iirtn-i, itmts e vobis, for u/uifi, etc, 
 vestriiiii. 
 
 0/as.— Where the irholi'. is a, nuineiid, or contains a I'uineral or 
 adjective expressing luiinber or quantity, the jjreposition is always used. 
 
 De tot luillihns vie panel super/Kcfi',. Of so many thousands 
 scarcely a few survived. 
 
 297. Further Caitions. — The ikdiitlre t/cnitlfc is only 
 used to denote a hirger auiount than the word with which 
 it is joined. 
 
 If the two words denote the same persons, or tlie same amount, 
 appoaition is used. (Nos) onnns, " all of us '" ti.r. " we all"). Eqiiite.'^, 
 qui pauci aderant, the eav;drv, few (*/' whom were there (lit. who 
 were there in small nntnhirx). 'See 225 and 69.) 
 
 298. («,) Uttrque. is used as a substantive with pronouns ; but 
 with substantives it is treated as an atljeetive. 
 
 Uterque vestrnm ; but frater iifnqiir. 
 
 (b) To the partitive genitive belong the phrases : — 
 
 Nihil reliqui fecit. He left nothing reiiuiining. 
 
 Nihil pensi habuit. He cared not at all. 
 
 Quid hoc rei eat ? What is the nionning of this i 
 
Ex. XXXVII.] 
 
 PA A' TITIVP: CEXl Tll'E. 
 
 195 
 
 \ 
 
 1, TluM't! was^ nothing mean in this sovereign, notliing 
 liasc, nothing (h'grading; littUi h'arning (hut-) lair ai>ility, 
 some exjterience of lite and a dash of eU)([uenee, mucii 
 good sense, ahumhince of In^nesty and strength of mind. 
 '1. ( )f tlie many^ contemporaries of your father and myself, 
 1 incline to think that no one was more (U'servin<; than 
 he of universal ])raise and respect, 3. Which of you two 
 has entailed greater loss and^ i'M'^iy "'i the nation it is 
 hai'd to say ; I hope and trust that ytui will'' hoth before 
 long repent your crimes. 4. Fate has left wz nothing 
 except either to die** with honouror to live under disgiace. 
 '). The battle''^ has been most disastrous ; very few of iis 
 out of so many thousands survive, the rest are^ either slain 
 or taken prisoners, so that I greatly fear that (l.?8) all is 
 lost. 6. Where in the world are we to" find a man like 
 hini^'^; it woukU^ be tedious to enumerate, or express in 
 words his many^- good qualities; and'^ would that lie had 
 been^* here to-day! 7. So much blood lias this victory 
 cost us that for myself I doubt whether the conquerors 
 or the conquered have sustained^^ most loss. 
 
 I 
 
 ii' 
 
 A 
 
 
 • ?]ither sMra or /«.s</m. - Express by orJer of M(»nls. (Intr. 107.) 
 
 ^ Use tot. (Compare the use of tantits, 88» Ohs.) 
 
 ■• Kepeat " greater ;" this repetition of a word aheady used is very 
 couHiion in Latin in place of a conjunction. 
 
 •■' The fut. in -rtn< oi poenitet rare. What is the substitute? (193, i:i.) 
 " Ut with subj., compare 126, ;/. ^ See 218. 
 
 « See 187, Ohn. » See 160. 
 
 10 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 Use ille, why? (339, iii.) 
 
 Tot. 
 
 See 162. 
 
 11 
 
 13 
 
 Mood. (163.) 
 Qui. (78.) 
 A rcipio. 
 
''' i 
 
 f: 
 SI 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 hi- I 
 
 ■0, 
 
 m 
 in 
 
 m 
 
 A-.V/VAT/.S/-; .V.V.V /'///. 
 GENITIVE Continued. 
 
 Subjective and Objective Genitive. 
 
 299. Tlie (icnilivi; cast^ always iiii|»li(!s a close relation 
 I'titwct'ii tlic; lumii in tliat case aiul aiiotlier iKtun. 
 
 (i.) SoiiK't imcs lliat i-clalioii is sucli that, if tlie other 
 iioim wt'it' coiivciIlmI iiilo a verb, tlie word in tlic genitive 
 would hcconie the suhj^cf to the verb. 
 
 Thus /)nsf fiKiKiii l*oni]M'ii might Ite expressed by fnist- 
 qiudii J'ifj'it ]'oni])eius. 
 
 Tiiis is (*alled the subjective genitive. 
 
 (ii.) Sometimes the genitive as clearly represents the 
 ohjrrt of a verb. 
 
 'J'hus, propfcr mortis fun(>rnii=ijii(K/ mortem tlnndt. 
 This is called the objective genitive. 
 
 Ohii. — Both of tliese i^eiiitives may he coiiibint'd in a .single phrsiso. 
 Helvetioriun Injitriac impnU Honiani. The wronjfs intlit-ted //// 
 the Helvetii on. IJonie. 
 Tn such {(hrases the ituhjictiir genitive is jtlaeed first. 
 We may eompare the Enghsh, "a criinin.dl'n fear of death," or the 
 French, "le danger </c la wcr," "le danger (?« rdismiii" the danger 
 ()/■ the sea, the ship'.s' danger. 
 
 300. The objective genitive is very conmK>n in Latin. 
 It represents not only the (tccusatice, as the nearer object 
 to a transitive verl>, but also the daiirc as completing the 
 sense of intransitive verbs; and even such cond)inations 
 of a jt>/r^)(>.s'///r>M with an (icva^atire, or ahhtfirr, case, as are 
 u.sed to complete the sense of many verbs. It represents 
 therefore many English phrases besides the possessive 
 case and the preposition of. 
 
 Instanc-es are — Litterarnm studiKin (Htiulere litteris), devotion to 
 Hterature ; doloris riiiicdiuin (dolori viederi), a remedy (ujainst 
 pain ; rei i)ubHcae iliio^misio (de r. p. disnenthr), a disagree- 
 ment o??, poHtical matters, or a political disagreement; Pyrrhi 
 regis In'JJnni (cum Pyrrho lu'lbnn (/crerc), the war n-ith, or 
 «//(»(!/( sf, King Pyrrhus; sui_/?(/»cjVf (sibi co^^Wrn), confidence 
 in one's-self. So also, legani oboiiiientia, submission to law ; 
 Deorum opinio, an impression about the gods, and many others. 
 
 196 
 
 III 
 
tx. XXXVIII.] onyi-.crivi: i;h:xrn\'E. 
 
 I'.C 
 
 301. I'liis ()l>)t'ctiv(; i^'ciiitivc is comltiiinl iiui only us 
 al)(»\'<! willi siihstiiiitivcs, hut also \\:ili in. my adjectiv»38. 
 
 (i.)TliiM, iKljt'ctives wliicli si;,'iiiry (/(. •<('/•(, Icmnrldl f,\^ niuilli iil<ii, t'uir, 
 
 jiarti('ijnliini.Mu\ tlu'ir iii)j>i>sitis ; ccitaiii rr'ials in -if., iiinl iniiiiy 
 
 iidjoc'tivt's tliMt v\\)rv.*s j'lthnsK or </»/;///(( s.s-, arc fullowrd liy ,i Lfiiiitiv f. 
 
 Iliriiin nnntniiii ciipiilii-*. dc-iij-nn-* r>y' dnii'^fi' ; inili'i'h i:_f|i;iriis, 
 
 ii^iKHjint (>/' wart'iin- ; inrnrii ciriax, wiili a ta|>.icii\ /'(>/• nilc. 
 
 Tlu'-io adjt'ctivt's have an liiri>iiii>ltti tniniiiiiii, ami ni;iv Im- cnin- 
 ])ai'('(l with tr iiisitivt' vt'ihs, as they rfniiiii! a iinmi to ilitiiic ami 
 c'oiiijilftt' tlicir iiifaiiiiiy. 
 
 il.) M illV lit' thfiii, sM>'li as rn li hi.-<, limiriiK, wi/;m(/', etc.. answer to 
 Kiiulish ailjfdivcs which arc tnllnwcil liy tlic prcpnsitidii o/', and 
 will cause no dilticidiy ; with nlhcis the Katm ^cniii\c represents 
 (as with siihstiintives; variniis Mn^li.->h preiMi.siiiiins and cnnstriictioiis. 
 
 llei puhliciU' pi r'l IIS, inrn iitl.<.-<liini'i, rmlis. Skilled, nmst un- 
 skilleil, unvcr-ed, /// ilic manaLr<'nicnt of the state. 
 
 I'li^natidi insinlna. I 'naccii>t(inied ti> tii,ditiii^r. 
 
 liitteranini .•<tii(li(isi!<.<lniii--i. Must devoted /() literature. 
 
 Hnjus sceleris pirtlc p<, ciji r.s, <i[fiiii<. With part //(, t'rvv from, 
 connected irilli, tins j:m It. 
 
 BoMeticii iinitu'inor. Apt to finijil a favour. 
 
 Ohx. —Ph'nns tiikes both ahhitive and ;;eiMtive, oftener the t'ornu'r ; 
 jt)rM</«'».s jind riiilix, sometimes in with ablative. 
 
 Cert lore III fan' ir = to inform, has a double construction. 
 
 (Kn<,dish) He h;is informed nu> r»/ his plan. 
 
 (Latm) Ci'TtlDiYiii nil- sui consilii /<(■// ; or, Cirtinriiii iiw de 
 8UO consili()/('<77. 
 
 302. The ohjective ocuitivo is comhiiu'd with the 
 present participle of tnuisiiive vcfhs, wlicii tlie h»tt«M- is 
 ii.sod as ail adjective, ix. to denote a jurtnuiit'iif '/i"i/ifi/, 
 not a .suu//c av*. 
 
 Thus re<!;nuni appctnis^"' while !i.spinn<; to the crown," but — 
 
 re^ni (»/*y*(7(/(.s'=: aspiring to kinjfly power ylifJni iialhi, or by 
 character). 
 Such participles are, niiuiiix, paticiis, lUliyeiiii, etc. (cf. also juris 
 consuUiiK, one consulted o>i hiw). 
 
 These present participles, when thus used, admit, as adjectives, of 
 degrees of comparison, tui aiiuintissiinas, etc. 
 
 1 » 
 
 ' . • 
 
 !•' 
 
 4 , 
 
 ,1 , > 
 
 (:,.' 
 
 • ' ; 
 
 il 1 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
r 
 
 I': 
 
 K I 
 
 4 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 198 
 
 77//-; GEXl'nVE 
 
 (Ex. xxxvni. 
 
 1. 1T(^ was always most (U'voted to litcraturo, at tl.'c saiiic 
 time (366) iiM»st uiifomplainiii^ iindci toil, coM, heat, 
 want of tool and (tf slccj) ; for mysflf, my fear* is that lui 
 consents to all(»w liiniself too littld i't'))ose and rest. 
 2. Such was the soldiers' anlour for tju* tii^ht," such tlie 
 uiiivcMsal enthusiasm, tiiat they n^fused to ohey the oiders 
 of their general, (th(»unh) thorou<ihly versed in warfare of 
 the kind, and as,-* full of self-eonli(h'nce and contem]»t for 
 the eneinv.and ciu'erinii' each (ttiier on, they advanct'd as^ 
 to certain victoiy, they fell nnawares into an andtuscade. 
 ."}. In spite of the _iL;reatest disanreemeiit on ])olitii's, the 
 friendshijt^ which existed'' hetweiui your ualhmt father 
 and myself remained firm longer" than either (it) he (»r I 
 had hoi)ed. 4. H(; hacF enout^h and to spare of wealth, 
 hut he was at the same** time most inexperienced in 
 political life, with hut little desire for fanu', ])rai3e, in- 
 Huence, or power, and very averse to (265) all competition 
 for otlice'' or distinction.'' 5. Ihit these"^ men (though) 
 they-have-borne^^ no part in all these toils, cravinj^ only 
 for pleasure and repose, most indifferent to the public 
 interest, devoted to feastinj:^ and p;]uttony, have reached 
 such a pitch of shamelessness, that they have ventured iu 
 my hearing to taunt with luxury an army that-has-borne- 
 uncomplainingly^- all the hardships of a prolonged 
 warfare. 
 
 ' lUioI vereor. (See 341.) " OeriiiKl, 99. 
 
 ^ Note carefully tlie ditt'erent meanings of "as." Ak he does this 
 (time), dum hnec J'avit. Ax (though) to victory (comparison), fini</tiinH 
 
 . . 1 did this </.s a hoy. pucr /(()<•./(/(•/>/<(/»/. (63.) 
 
 ■* Insert /amr«, "yet." 
 
 •■' " Which /rtiA' to me MvV// your," etc. (Intr 49, 0/w.) 
 
 « See 277. '' See 251. » hlrm. (See 366, ii ) 
 
 ' Plural. Latin would not represent either word here hy an (th.stnwt 
 /ewi in the singular. '" /.s//. (See 338, O/w. *2.) 
 
 " Use adjective expert* (301, ii.) in apposition with "these men." 
 " Use a single word, " most uncomplaining under. " 
 
KXFRCISK XX XIX. 
 
 GENITIVE- Continued. 
 
 Quality and Definition. 
 
 303. The iL'seinMaticc of lliu Latin j^i'iiitivc to the 
 adjoctivu is to be I'urtlier noticed in its next use, tlie 
 genitive ot quality. 
 
 (i.) A Latin siiltstantive in tlie genitive is oltcn 
 added to another sul>stantive, in tlie same eianner as in 
 Hnj^lish a substantive vitli "of" jdctixed, to denote s(»nie 
 quality, either jirn/nvfui of, or attaehed as an iiftrihiitr 
 to, that sul»slantive. (Intr. 7, 8.) 
 
 Vir c.^f j)riscue seA'eritatis. He is a man of old fashioned 
 
 austerity, 
 J'ir suunnae fortitudinis. A nuin »>/ the greatest courane. 
 
 (ii.) But this Latin substantive in theoenitive has invari- 
 ably an adjective attached to it. "A man of courage " is 
 not homo fortitudinis, but JinNto fortis ; a num of ^ooil sense, 
 /lomo prudens, 7iot prudentiae. 
 
 This use of the tjeiiitive resembles that of the ablative of (juality 
 (271), but— 
 
 Oh.t. 1. — If the qualifying substantive denotes nnviher, amofDit, 
 prerii^e (liinen.'iioii.'i, <»(/«', or time, the genitive is always used, 
 
 Septuajiinta uavinni rla.f.^i^, a tlett of seventy sliips ; vi^iiiti 
 pecbun irat (i<jij>'i\ the embankment was twenty feet lii},di : }ni, r 
 tredeeim annorun), a boy thiitten years old ; proveetae, exaeta*-, 
 aetatis homo, a man advanced, far adxaneecb in years; tot 
 annorum/t7(r^^^s', so many i/m7-.s' of good fortune ; (|uindecim 
 dierum snp])Iivatio, a thanksgiving of fifteen days' duration, 
 
 Oh.'i. 2. — The Genitive is used mainly to express pentiaiinit and 
 inherent (jualities : optimae spei <m/o,'».sci )/.«,■, a youth of the highest 
 promise ; the Ablative both these and e.rtn-nui eharaeteristics of dress 
 or ap) earanee : ranix ruiillis, r',s7( i-umlidn ; nut (•'.//iiuni c. y;///o; nni, 
 etc. So also the abhitive is u.sed lor anv state cr iVt-liin'- uf the 
 momtnt : fac bono ^is animo, " Ee of gt od cheer," 
 
 190 
 
 '» 
 
 «.■ I 
 
 I 
 
 'I 
 
 ll 
 
 
^m 
 
 {>r.i/.//y .i.\n /)/:/v.\//7ox. [Ex. xxxix. 
 
 304. A wnnl ill the L'fiiitivc is sdiiictiiiics atldcfl O 
 aiKtllnr siilislaiil ivc t<» r.r/)/iti n, or ihfi.ii. nv rrslrirt iis 
 sense: I'ir/i's jiistitiae, tlie virtue <;/' justice ; ylitriae 
 l>iiii iiiiii III . -A rcwaitj nnisisfiiii/ ill ^lniT. 'I'liis is ciiUe*! the 
 genitive "I definition. 
 
 Cautions. Tlie ifst'iiiMiiiicf of tlirsc ast's of the Luliii yt'iiitl.o to 
 
 tliosc <>t I lie |-)ii;.'lis|| |i|'c|)(i.sit ioil ('/ Ih n)i\ ioiis, litll it ]\\\\S\ 1i(! 
 
 rcllK'llllM-K'il tlllll 
 
 n.^ Al'ItT Midi \v()i(1-< lis ((/•/(-•, //(.si(/(>, rtc, iippo.sitioii is iiHcil, not the 
 deflning' L;i'iiiti\( . tn cvim-s ilic KMi.'lish "/' with Uif |>r(i|H'r ii.iinc. 
 
 I'llis S.i'^iiiitiiiii. the city ('/■ Sii;,MintiiiM ; iiisiiln ririt.iiini.i, the 
 island 11/ Ihitiiiii. iSct' 222.) 
 
 (ii.) With thf Miiiiifs iif towns or countries t lie liUiiii adjective is 
 used in plarc ot ll.c possessive genitive where wt- use "ol." 
 
 Itis lioniiiiiiie, the itlairs of llnnie ; ciris Tlitdiami.s, a liti/.eii 
 ()/Tliel»es. (Se»' 98.) 
 
 (iii.) I'eiiieiiihei' also : /Hiv/Za nrhs, the ini<hlle «)/' the city (295,/*, 
 ifHot rsfls/ how uiany of ymi an* there/ (297), and avoid here tlie 
 partitive genitive. 
 
 K.I I' re i XI' .30. 
 
 1. It is said that serpents of vast, size are found in tlie 
 island (d" Leninos. 2. Ny one denies that he was a man 
 ot" coni'aL'e ;^ the real (|n(!stion is, whether he was (one) (d' 
 nood souse,' and experience.' 3. It seems that your son 
 is a hoy of tiie hiniiest promise, and of oivat inlinence 
 with- tliose of his (»wn aoe, 4. After three days"* ])ro- 
 crastinatioii he at last set out with a licet of thirty ships; 
 hut heinn' fai' advanced in lile was .scarc(dy com}»etent 
 to cany out s(j toilsome u task. h. 1 would have"'' y«»ii 
 theridoii' he of n()od idieer, and do not on account of a 
 short-lived panic throw away the result of so many ywirs of 
 toil. (>. II(^ is a person" of (dd-world, a.'^ all of us know, and 
 })erlia)»s of excessive, rigour: but at the same time a man** 
 
 ' Wliat part of speech ? (303, ii.) - Apuil (ace). 
 
 " 303, Ohs. 1. •* Turn by homo in app. (See 224, O/w. I.) 
 
 * Fur or vilim. (141.) 
 
 " /foitio, in a neutral sens<e, with either good or batl (palitie.s ; Y'ir, 
 with marked social virtues. (See 224, Obs. *J, iiott'). 
 
Ex. XXXIX. I i^x.u i/y .i.\/> />///,\///(>.v. 
 
 SOI 
 
 of jiistici! iiml lioiifsty, iuid <'t' tli<' iiinst sjtotlcss lift'. 
 7. (iiillaiit li^ilitinu' ami ail liniKHiiiil'l*' «l»iitli in tlir ti-lij 
 l»o('oni('>( citi/f'iis (if llniiit'; \vl tli<- iVw ihcrcloiv of iis- 
 
 Nvlio SUIvivi' sll(»\V nur.s('l\('s wnrtliv aiiki' of mif imrrstnr.H 
 
 and of tlu' nation of Iloni.'. s. It s.'.-mcd llmi \\\v\v 
 stiHid l>y him in lii^ ^lt't'|» an uM man lai' adNaii'<.l in 
 years, witli wliitf liair. and Kimlly .taint. 'iianci'. w lio hade 
 liiiii l»t' of ^ood clifcr and liopc for tlif l>«'sl;' for (llial) lio 
 would ivacli in salVly tin- islaml of ('.avyia aft.'r a voya,!4»! 
 of somc^ (lavs, 
 
 ' 96. <i. 
 
 • JJ7. 
 
 ' Nciit. j)liir. 
 
 ttll'ilUOt. 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 111 
 
 ■ 
 
 . t; 
 
w 
 
 hd 
 
 
 I'S 
 
 fit •- 
 
 )f. 
 
 N t; 
 
 ii 
 
 
 fH l« 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 ■»-■ 
 f 
 
 M 
 
 EXERCISE XI.. 
 GEUITWE-^ Continued. 
 
 Genitive with Verbs. 
 
 Tmk i^onitivo is also uslmI to coiu])lete or detine llie sense 
 not only of nouns but of certain verbs, 
 
 305. (i.) The geritive of price^ is thus used Nvith verbs 
 of valuing and buying, etc., especially the tVnnier. 
 
 M(ujin, md.iivti., jtluris; parri, iiiinoris, viiiiiwi ; Uitifl, (ii(<i)iti, 
 11 ill Hi, are used with factitive verbs such nsfacio, hahco,ae.MiiiK>, etc., 
 soinetimea with emo and vendo. 
 
 Te. quotidie phiris facio. I rnJi(e you viore highly every day. 
 Rewpublicniii iiiliili habet, siilvttin siiam niaxinii. He .s<7.s no 
 
 valne, on the national cause, the hiijheM on his own .safety. 
 Emit hortos tanti quanti Pythivfi rolvit. He boucfht tlic plea- 
 
 sure-ifrounds at the full (or, exactlii at the) price that Pythius 
 
 wished for. 
 
 Ohx. — This genitive of vahie is also used as a predicate with link 
 verbs, such as Kniii,^fio. 
 
 Ttin luihi aiaicitia, piuris est </?<«m nteroriiw oviiriiiin plaiismt. 
 Your friendsliip is of more value to me than the apphiuse of 
 ail the world besides. 
 
 306. (ii.) Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, 
 
 such as ftccKsarc, irn/nrre, nwiii faare, anHhiinian', ahsolrnr, 
 take a genitive deiining the charge. 
 
 Proditionis occuaare, reuvi facere. To accuse, to prosecute, /or 
 
 treachery. 
 Furti ac repetundarum condeiiinatus eat. He was ccnc^emned 
 
 for, found guilty of, theft and extortion. 
 Parricidii euvi, innisat. He taxes him with parricide. 
 Sacrilegii absolntns est. He was acquitted of sacrilege. 
 
 ' The origin of this genitive is doubtful ; it may possibly liave origin- 
 ated with the locative in -i (at a pi'ice), and in course of time l)een 
 transferred to other genitives ; but is more probably adjectival. 
 •Mi 
 
Ex. XL.] 
 
 GENITIVE WITH VEKHS. 
 
 SO.*? 
 
 This construction may be explained by the omission of rrlmine, 
 "on the charge," or nomine, "under the title." which are sometimes 
 expressed. 
 
 Ohx. — Instead of the giuitivi', the ohlative with <^' is very common. 
 
 l)e pecuniis rcpetundis damnnri. To be condeniii('<l J\>r 
 
 extortion. 
 Aliqitem de ambitu reiaii farvre.. To brin*^ an action aifainst 
 a man for bribery. 
 So— De r/, de savriletjio, de Cdali', de iriiejiciis, etc., sr fturijuir. To 
 
 clciir one's-self 0/ assault, sacrilejjje, murder, poisoninjf. 
 But - Inter sicarios acrnsdtns fst. He was accused of (tsmusinntion. 
 
 307. The punishment stands soinctiines in Hit! (/ruifirr ; 
 t'iir t)tl<3ner in the ahhdirr. 
 
 Capitis, or capite, iJnmnatun eat. He was capitally condemiicii, 
 
 i.e. to death or exile. 
 Octupli coudetnnatiDi eM. He was condemned to )),iy eijihttold. 
 But — Morte, exilio conileninatiis [inultatun) t.tt. He \\;\y- condemned 
 to (punished with) death, exile. 
 
 308. The genitive is .also nsed to complete the sense of 
 verbs of compassionating, remembering, reminding, for- 
 getting. 
 
 Such are minereor, rnemini, c<>nimon(]f((rcn\ oh/irlsci. 
 
 But — (o) Verbs of reminding, adinotno, etc., take an aci-usntive of 
 the thing as well as of the person, with uenter pronoHun; hoc, illud,' 
 te admoneo. 
 
 (b) Memini, an accusative with a person, in the sense of " I still 
 remember him;" rarely otherwise in prose. Ilecordor, '^I recall to 
 my thoughts," is almost invariably u.sed with the accusative. 
 
 (c) Minerari, "to express pity for," "to bemoaa the lot of," an 
 accusative. 
 
 Thus— 
 
 Ciceronem memini; rerum praeteritarum (the p;ist) in> nilni. 
 Nostri miserei-e, take pity on us ; casum nostrum inincriibdtiir, 
 he bemoaned our disaster. 
 But — Illud noH culmonnit, he reminded us of that ; nos officii nostri 
 
 commonefecit, he reminded us of our duty. 
 
 Ohsi. — Even an impersonal phrase equivalent to a verb of remember- 
 ing is followed by a similar genitive. 
 
 Venit mihi in mentem ejva diei. I have a recollection of that diiy. 
 
 1; 
 < 1 
 
 
 M 
 
 \ ¥: 
 
 >i 
 
 ^ This may be looked on as a cognate accusative (236, 237). 
 
II';' ' 
 
 204 
 
 CENiriVE WITH I M PERSON A f. VERBS. [Ex. XL. 
 
 I* 
 
 ■Ml" 
 
 1 * '" 
 
 r 
 
 The Genitive with Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 309. Tho iiiipersoiials, piu/rf^ pi'.l''^, pnrnifi't^ inr^lrl^ 
 ■ini^nrt, tiike an accusative of tlie pminn fccHiri, a genitive 
 of wliat (•((I'sr.'i the fccliu'' 
 
 ly;iiaviiiii jxx'n'iti'hit artquando i<i,iuivi}u\ 'i'lic slotlitiil man 
 
 will one day repent of his sloth. 
 Me lioii fiitlnm '/>i;/rf stultitiae nieae, sni r/ldiii f>iii/rf. \ jmi 
 
 not only sorry for my folly, but also ashame<l of it. 
 Tiicifcf me vitae. I am weary of my life. 
 Tui me in'iserct ; mei jiiijet, I }>ity you ; I am vcxetl with 
 
 myself, 
 
 IVhot rmixi'x tin', feel iiuj iimy also lie ;i rcrh jii llic i ii I'm it ir, .^ m- in 
 an htdicatii'c clanst' witli qKOil). 
 
 Taedi'f ea(k'in auchre militis. Tlic soldicis aic tired tit" licaiitii,' 
 the same thiiijx. 
 
 \ h'lec feeisse, } w ,i , , i 
 
 > H e iiTf sorni th((r ire iii'liil siK 
 
 Pocin'ti't no.t ; , , „ . } n e xi'c sorni 
 
 ( (jnod lioec iefinius. \ 
 
 (>/«. 1.-- The iieiitiT pronouns hoc, illiid, ([ikxI, arc used in plaet* of 
 the i^fenitive with these verbs. Hoc piiiht, iliud jtoi'iiltcf. (_('f. 308. n-.) 
 
 Oh>i. 2. -The trenitive with ptuhi is also used for the person before 
 v'hovi the shame is felt. 
 
 ri((J('t iiiii veteranorum milituni. I blush lufore the veteians. 
 
 310. The construction of the ini])ers(»nals int'rcst unci 
 rrfi'rt recpiires attention. 
 
 (i.) The y)('/\sOM to whom it is of importance is put in the i/niifln' 
 with inti'i'i'st ; hut jW'on'Hxire pronoun x, nnm, ^^^s•, simx, noxtrr, rcxtcr, 
 etc., are used in the ablative fe mini tie. 
 
 Tnteretif onmium reefe facere. It is the interest of all to do riirlit. 
 Qidd nostra inlerei^t '/ Of what importance is it to as 't (oi-, What 
 does it sitfnify to us ?) 
 
 (ii.) The thin{} that is of importance may he either (a) an infinitive 
 (irith or tcithont accusative) or ('>) a neater prononn (lior, i(K illinl, 
 (J nod), or ix eJ a use introdiicMl either (c) by an interrogative pronoun 
 or particle, followed by the subjunctive mood, or (</) by nt, nr. 
 
 (iii.) The tJeiiree of iaiportemcv is expressed either by the geni'/ire of 
 price {ni'Ojni, tanti, plnris), or by an adrerl) or nenler adjeiiire ntiuj- 
 vopere, nheinenter, magis, par am : ninJtnm, p!as, nihil, niininni, 
 qnantnm, etc.) 
 
 (iv.) The thing with reference to which it is of importance is some- 
 times indicated by ad. 
 
 isi 
 
Ex. XL.] CEXrnvF. WITH IMPERSOXAI. VERBS. 
 
 eof) 
 
 i 
 
 Examples. — The followiti;^ cxiiiuples sliould tli('r<>'"()r«' Ik- will stiulicd 
 and analysed : — ■ 
 
 n. Matfiii iiitmxt ad IniuJoii etritatlK Jkh'C (v*;; faccre. Yimr 
 
 iloiiKj this is ut" (ir(((t iniportauee tti the vnillt ot" the state. 
 //. Muhiuii //(/( /•( .sV (jiios (/(a.svy^c aiidial (y»((»^((//(. [t o{ ijruit eon- 
 
 sc(|ii('ni(' wh(ini ii man hstens to every (hiy. 
 c. lUmV unit pliiiis iiitin.sf tc ut vkUmhi. Jt is of more eonse- 
 
 t|uence lo tin' that 1 sliould s e you. 
 (/. Vestiii uitivoit^ cniniinl iloiitx, ne iiiijxiiitoirm jussinii faeiaiit. 
 
 It is ()t" importance to //<>'<, my conuades, tlmt tlie worst 
 
 sort should not elect your conunaiuler. 
 _/'. //(**' it tna it rei jtuhlicae intiiist. This concerns Ixith iiniirsilf 
 
 anil the miliiiii. 
 i\ yihil nu'a iiitinst (juanti nii facias. Yimr isfiinnti of me is 
 
 ol no concern to me. 
 
 The constructions of n/irt, it conriruK, are similar to those of i)i- 
 /(;•(.>./, except that ri'frrt is rarely used with a ^fcnitive of the person 
 concerned, hut with the feminine pos.sessive, or <iil. 
 
 ii 
 
 ■■A I 
 
 i 
 
 
 ( 
 
 Kit'i'cisr 40. 
 
 1. He was a man of moderate abiliti(\'<, but of the 
 lijohe.st character, and in tlie j^reatest crisis of a perilous 
 war lie uas valued more hiuhlv in his old aije than 
 any- of (his) Juniors. 2. He was a man of lon^-tried 
 honour and rare incorrui)til)ilitv, vet at that timi- he was 
 taxed with avarice, 8us})ected of hriherv, and prost'cuted 
 for exloition; you all know that he was unanimouslv 
 ac([uitted of that char,^e ; hut whu^ is there of you but 
 remembcis the (that) day on which he refu.sed to deprecate 
 the und(!served disgrace of condemnation, and not oidy 
 cleared himself of that indictmiuit, but expo.sed the malice 
 and falsehootls of his accusers ? XonC* (d" tho.se who were 
 jtrescnt in the court that day will easily forget his magni- 
 licent address, nothing evei' nuide a deeper impression on 
 his audience.'" '^. The whole nation has long'' been weary 
 of the war, reurets its own rashness, and Idushes for the 
 
 ' The snli.stantival ?//-c]ause is es[)efially common after ilhtd or lioc 
 at the beginning of tlie sentence. 
 
 ■^ Q(tis</uam. (.See 358, ii.) 
 
 ■' To wliom of you does not, etc., 308, Obn. * \( mo. 
 
 * " The mind (/)/.) of his audience." Either genitive participle of, or 
 relative clause with. f(«(//o. (73,76.) 
 
 "- Tease? (See 181. J 
 
m 
 
 '^» 
 
 n 
 )* 
 
 It 
 
 ' « 
 
 1 ■ • 
 
 , 
 
 l" 
 
 ,, ' 
 
 l»i 
 
 rt' 
 
 K!! 
 
 1$' 
 
 P'" 
 
 iJf 
 
 |l 
 
 f 
 
 'V* 
 
 0^ 
 
 '■!' 
 
 0* 
 
 * 
 
 r 
 
 
 ^f? 
 
 
 
 
 i w 
 
 
 - 
 
 r 
 
 ^ r 
 
 i: 
 
 20fi 
 
 GENITIVE WITH IMPERSONAL VER/IS. [Ex. XL. 
 
 folly and incompetence of its general. 4. I remember 
 well the man ^ whom you mention ; he was a person of 
 very low origin, of advanced age, with white hair, mean 
 dress, of uncultivated and rustic demeanour ; but no one 
 was ever more skilled in (301, ii.) the science of war, and 
 his being made genenil- at such an emergency was of 
 the utmost im})ortance to the welfare of the state. 5. It 
 makes no difference to ns, who are waiting for your Vv^rdict, 
 whether the defendnnt be acquitted or condemned; but 
 it is of general interest tliat he should not in his absence 
 and unheard be sentenced to either exile or death. 
 
 ' J lie. (339, iii.) 
 
 ^ 310, ii. a. 
 
 r.\ 
 
 
EXEiiCISE X/.l. 
 PLACE, SPACE. 
 
 Locative Case. 
 
 In answer to the «[ue8ti«m.s, irlinr ( irhitJu r ? u'hcncr / we 
 t'inploy in Englinli the prepositions nt or ///, fa, /'nun, etc. 
 
 In Latin all these ([uestions eiin sonietinies be answereil 
 nieriily by case-endings; but -x preposition is often 
 necessary. 
 
 31 L Place at which; answer to " where ?" 
 This is generally expressed by the fond ablatiVij 
 (272, 273) with or even without a preposition. Thus, 
 in Itdlia, in iirln' ; and so generally where an adjective is 
 attached; but media nrhc, tota Ifalid. 
 
 (>/«.- Of course other prepositions of place are useil with their 
 jiroper cases. Thus — 
 
 Ad^ arbem est. He is in the n'ighbourhood *>i (outside) the city. 
 Ad {soiiu'tinieH apud) ('i/imts pu'jndtum ixt. There was a 
 battle at {near) tJannae. 
 
 312. But with towns and small islands as opposed to 
 countries, the old rule is as follows : — 
 
 If the name of a town, ((t which anything is or happens, 
 is a simfular noun of the first or second declension, it is 
 put in the genitive; if not, in the ablative. 
 
 Vixl Boniae, Titrenfi, Atlwins, lUrndx, Tibinv (or TUnin). I 
 have lived at Kome, Tarentuni, Athens, Kiiodes, Tibur. 
 
 The explanation of this is that Romne (for older form Jioimd) 
 Tarciiti, lihod'i, are remains of the locative case in i, which in other 
 declensions was supplanted by the ablative. (Tihnr'i, (Urtlmgini are 
 perha[>s old ablatives.) In the plural the two cases coincide. 
 
 Other instances of this ca.se are domi, at home; hiimi on the 
 ground ; bdli, mditicie, in war (only used in contrast with domi). 
 Rwi, in the country, veq)eri, in the eveninjr, may be old ablatives. 
 
 Ohs. — Pemh're animi, "to be in suspense," as also the j^enitive of 
 value (306), may be locative cases. 
 
 ' This is often used of Roman generals, who could not enter the 
 city without laying down their im{wrii(in, 
 
 207 
 
 I I 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
t 
 
 
 
 \i 
 
 tf)' 
 
 'id)* 
 
 
 
 IT 
 
 r 
 
 HI 2- 
 
 jj; i ♦* 
 
 It ;■ 
 ii I. 
 
 208 
 
 PLACE -STAC E. 
 
 [Ex. XLI. 
 
 313. Place to which — whither? 
 
 As ii iM'.U' tlic prepositions '<*}, In, etc., ar»' used with tlie 
 ;ic(Misiiiiv(! ; Imt 
 
 Willi lli(! iKiuit's (if towns, etc., Jis alxtvc, ilic accusative 
 is used witliout a })iVjH»sitiun : thus, in i>r ad Ildlinni, 
 ^{J'ricdiii , iii/>iiii, iiarc//i,\){\t, Syi'aciisas, Ifoinaiii. etc. rid ill. 
 
 ()').'.■. -The same construction is used with doiniix -mmX r>i.<: doiniiin 
 rudif ; vn^ fiifiit. 
 
 314. Place from which -whence ? 
 
 As a rule tlui ablative is used, joiiu'd witli tlic preposi- 
 tions '■, ('■''> << {"^')' '*■ J*l/''''f(<J, ^^ I/'i/i'f, al> yij'rii-(i, c intrr, 
 al) i/rhr. 
 
 P)iit with fnir/is, etc., tlic ablative ah>in' is uciu'rally 
 used, as also with (lout as and rus. 
 
 Komri scrilnf, he writes fnj/ii I'oine ; Tdrqiiinias C'oi'iiitho 
 J'(i(/if, ho MvA, or wont into exih', ta Tai'ciuiin'i //v;// 
 ( •orintli : so, rure, or luri n'l/iif. 
 
 Tlu'se rules are ([uite simple, but the t'oliowinn idiom 
 must 1)0 carefully observed. 
 
 315. We cannot, in Latin, say, as in I^nglish, "He came to his 
 father at Rome," or "from Carthage in Africa." With verbs of 
 motion, all such phrases must follow the rules for motion to or J'nnn, 
 id veil above. Thus — 
 
 He returned home from his frionds at Corinth. Coriutho ah 
 
 ainiciii domvvi rediit. 
 He sent a despatch to llie Senate id Kome. Jiaimnn ad Si iiatam 
 
 litiran misit. 
 He returned to his friends //( Africa, bi Afrirnm ad ann'ron 
 
 nuh'it. 
 
 In such sentences Latin connects both nouns closely with the verb 
 of motion. 
 
 316. None of the rules given above apply to the names ol" towns 
 when joined with adjectives. 
 
 (i.) We cannot say totiux, or toti} Corinth i, for " in the whole of 
 (Jorinth," but must use with both words the local ablative, tota 
 Corintho. (311.) 
 
 ' T)iis is l)ecause tlie old locative case no longer exists in any but 
 certain words. 
 
Ex. XLI] 
 
 PLACES PA Cr. 
 
 im 
 
 il 
 
 (ii.) When lu/w, or o/ipiduvi, conies before the ])roji«'r niinie, the 
 preposition must V)e useJ. 
 
 In urhi' JjdihUihi, in tlu' city **/' London ; ad iirhim .HIk ii(ii<, vx 
 nrhf Homii. (See 222.) 
 
 I'iii.) A\'ith */((J/m/.s' the locative constrnction is extenth-d to ^'onsins/cc 
 jniiii<iini.'<. AVith other adjeetives tlie i)reposition is usvi\. 
 
 J hniii ineiie ; (\r ajnid )iir) rDiintuinit lot cat. He stayed at ni ji house, 
 lint — Jii Vitiri (loiiiii, ad lutcniii ihniiKin. In, or to. Ins nld liome. 
 
 317. When an adjective is joined with tlie name ofa town, the con- 
 struction reseinbh's that used with the names of persons. (Se»' 224.) 
 
 The name of the town is phtced first, in eitiier the lonitii'r, 
 iici'it!<'itirf^ or alil'ifir*', according to the meanint: ; then follows the 
 word ///7>s or (ipiiidnni cond)ined with the adjective, with or without 
 a prei)o,sition accoidint; to the rules already given. Thus — 
 
 Archias Avtiorhine natiis est, celebri tjvojidain urlie (local ab- 
 lative). Archiiis was born in the once famous city of Antioch. 
 Atlinias, in urhem praeclaiissiniani roii. I readied the illustrious 
 
 city of Athens. 
 Sunmisis, ex urV)e opulentissima, profirtns est. He set out from 
 the nourishing city of Syracuse. 
 
 318. (i.) Space covered (jiiiswer 1<> tlie question how far?) 
 
 is ^t'lieially exju'essed Ity the accusative. 
 
 Tndni \[ev pnicissit. He advanced a two days' march. 
 Ah njlicio ciiir transversum, ut niunt, digitum disrtdn.'^. I>o not 
 swerve "a tinger's breadth" from your duty. 
 
 (ii.) For distance from ((iuesti(»ii, how far off?) «'itli('i' the 
 
 accusative or ablative is used. (238, iv., and 279.) 
 
 Ari<)rlsfii>< rir ])lns duo milia jxi.-isiium (or duobus inilibus) 
 ahi'Vid. Ariovistus was at a distance of scarcely moi'c than" 
 two miles. 
 
 Olm.— After /)/(/.s', aniplin.'i, in inns, qviin is rar«'lyused with numeials, 
 lint the case of the numeral is unatiected by the comparative. 
 
 (iii.) Dimension is ueiierally in the accusative. 
 
 M ditis (i.jijrri'tn Idtnni jiedes trecentos ( istrn.irrnnt. The soldiers 
 thicw up a mound three hundred feet broad (or in Ineadth). 
 Ofcasionally the genitive of <piality, or de^diption, is used and the 
 adjective omitted : Jossa (piindecim pedum, a ditch fifteen feet diij>. 
 (S('e 303, 0//.^■. 1.) " 
 
 319. In En^lisli tlie name of a town or countrv is 
 often personified and used for the nation or jx'oplc: 
 "Spain," " PVance," " Endand," etc. This is niueh rarer 
 in Latin ]»i(.ye, (( f. 17, and end of 174.) 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 I 
 
 ■ Ii 
 
f 
 
 ■ 
 
 210 
 
 Pr.ACE— SPACE. 
 
 [Ex. XLI. 
 
 " Tlie war between Romv, and Carthcuje' is Belli' m, 
 qifod popnlus INinianus cum Cartliiiginiensibus (jessii. 
 
 K(»r "liomc" in this sense we may u.se rapid ita lioinanus, res 
 pttUiva Jioiiuina, or liamani, but nirely lioma. 
 
 m 
 
 \\ 
 
 0:- 
 
 
 i ^ 
 
 ,, ' 
 
 
 
 T ' 
 
 ,j,i 
 
 i'*< 
 
 m-^ 
 
 1'! 
 
 HI-"' 
 
 ; B 
 
 ■* 
 
 il 
 
 
 , A 
 
 :I»»' 
 
 
 ■?'" 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 1. AfU'i- living^ many^ years at Veil, a town at that 
 jHM'iod of great jjopulation'* and vast resources, he removed 
 tlienee late in lite to the city^ of lionie, which was at a 
 distance of abont fourteen miles from his old home. 
 2. His parents, sprung originally from Syracuse, had 
 been"' long resident at Cartlmge; he himself was sent** in 
 boyhood to his uncle at Utic;a, and was absent from home 
 for fidl three years ; but after his" return to his mother, 
 now^ a widow, at Carthage, he passed the rest of his youth 
 at his own home. 3. The enemy (^>/.) was now"^ scarcely 
 a si.igle day's march off; the walls of the fortress, scarcely 
 twenty feet high, surrounded by a ditch of (a depth of) 
 less than six feet, were falling into ruin from age; Doria, 
 after waiting^ six days in vain for reinforcements, sent a 
 despatch by-' a s})y to the governor at Pisa, earnestly im- 
 ploring^*^ him not to waste time any longer, but to bring 
 up troops to'^ his aid without delay, 4. Born and brouglit 
 up in the vast and populous city cf London, I have never 
 before had permission to exchange the din and throng of the 
 city even^- for the repose and peace and solitude of rural 
 life ; but now I hope shortly to travel to my son at Rome, 
 
 » "After living," ;.f. " having lived. " (14, a.) 
 
 ■ Case? (See 321.) 
 
 ^ May be tnrned either Viy " nourishing (superlative of Jlorens) with 
 a multitude of citizens and vast resources, " or "most popidous and 
 wealthy." 
 
 * Vrhfi may be removed into the relative clause, " which city." 
 
 * Tense? (See 181.) 
 
 ® Participle, and omit "and." (16.) 
 
 " \}9,e vevh a,ni\ postqiKim. (14, a.) 
 
 MVhy not »MHC .^ (See 328, />.) 
 
 9 Why not uh .^ (See 267, O/w. ) 
 
 '" "(in) which he implored." Why not participle? (See 411.) 
 " For construction see 269. Is "his " ei or sihi .^ (See 363.) 
 " = not even. (Intr. <M>.) 
 
Ex. XLI.] 
 
 PLACES PA CI-:. 
 
 •-Ml 
 
 and from Italy to sail, before the miihlli' of wiiitfr, t.. tlie 
 city of ConstantiiKiple, Mhich I have Ioiil; Imtii ciiuri- to 
 visit; you, I faiK-y,' will winter at Malta, iin isljiiid- 
 wliich J am not likely ever to see. in iIk- lie^iimiuM of 
 sprin.u' I have deeidetl to .stay in tlw lovely ciiy of Nuplcs, 
 and to Ix'lake myself to my old iionie ;it I. liidmi in tiui 
 month of May or.Iiiiie. 5. ('aesar shows liimseH, I fancy, 
 scarcely less tenacious of his ]»ni|(o^e at home than in 
 the field; it is said-' that he is outside the city wailin,«; 
 for his triumph, and wisiies to ad(hvss the ].eo).l(" 
 <■». Kxaspei-ated and i)rovoked hy the wron-s and insults 
 of Napoleon, Spain turned at last to Kn^land her ancient 
 foe. 
 
 See 32, />. 
 
 - "Which ishuul. ' 
 
 See 43, 44. 
 
 I 1 i 
 i 1 1 
 • ( 
 
 I 
 \ . 
 
 M 
 

 
 Hi i 
 
 i 
 
 01 
 
 ir 
 
 m 
 
 1 1 r 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
 
 Kxr.Rc/sr. xi.ii. 
 
 EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. 
 
 320. Ill iin.swvr to tlic; (lucstion when? at what time ? 
 tlit^ local ablative (272) is used with words which in 
 theiiiscKcs ilciioU' thiic. 
 
 rcrc, inic/imniii, imr/c, salis orrai^u, priiiii'i Jiirt', etc. 
 
 \\'itli Words \vlii<-li do not in tJiciiii^ilvis dciKiti' tiiiio, the pieposi- 
 liod /h is iiinstly iiistittd, iiiilos ;in jidjcctivo is iittaclu'd : in hilhi, 
 ill time of \v;ii' ; lnit IhIId I'miii-o kicii mln, in \ho second Punic war. 
 {('\'. 311.) r>ut the iidc is not uiiiversjil. 
 
 (fh.<. fii fiiiipitri' means at the rinlit nicnit'iit, Imt Alcihiailis 
 It iniKirilnis, at the //(/*('- (in tlie (/rt//.s) of Ak-iliiaih-s. 
 
 For the ditlcrenct' made ))y the preposition in, see 273, ()Jn>. 
 
 321. In iiiiswcr to tlie ipiestiiMi how long ? the accusa- 
 tive is us('(L (St'c 238, iv.) 
 
 Multos /r//// uiiiios Ilif i/diiilcirnini Jidhro. I liavc now been 
 jiviui;- (181) here /i"/' nitiny y(>iirs. 
 
 OI)!<. 1. Sometimes tlie idea of dnration is emphasised hy the 
 addition of ju r. 
 
 Per fiihtiii tiorti III, ])er Iiiniii'in. 
 (fliK. -2. Till' answer to for how long past? is often expressed hy 
 an ttnliini! adjective (of course in the sinu,uljir). 
 
 Ainiiini jdiii (or, hniir) vicesimum irfjiint. He has been k\n<r for 
 tin' last twenty yeai's. 
 
 322. Ill answer to how long before? how long after? 
 
 two constructions ni;i}' l»c used. 
 
 ((/) The wold, or words, expressinj^f the leniith of time may he in 
 (lie ahlative of ///c'/s/zvy of ilifi'miici- (279), an<l jiost or <n//(' may he 
 used as adverbs. Or 
 
 (h) I'ost and cm If may lie used as prepositions with the accusative 
 of the amount of time. 
 
 l"'or exani]»le, for the ])hrase '"the tleet riturned after three 
 Vi'ars." we may write either, trilms jtn.^l aiiiiis (tertio j>i>.<l anno) rhis/^ln 
 ruliit, or /'(*.s/ tres annos, etc. 'Jlieie is the same variety in Mnglish : 
 '* Three years ofUr, the fleet retuined "' is Kniihsh, though " After three 
 years" is less amliitiuons. 
 
 Ohx. Kven when joined with this ahlative, patit, ante, may still 
 {govern a case. AV'e may .say for "a few days before his death,'' either 
 *'' paucis dicbns ante ejus mortem," or ''^ ] an iris ante dii'lma, quain e vita 
 excess i I." 
 
 211 
 
 > Hi 
 
Ex. XLII] 
 
 /■:x/'A'l:.s.s/i)\s of i imf. 
 
 !i:{ 
 
 5 i 
 
 I'fllSUtlVt* 
 
 323. Tlu' lollti\vili;4 fXilliijilcs Ili;i\ l)t' liotircil: 
 
 \tt) " TlirtM' liuiidrcil atnl two v<'iiis iit'tt-r I lie f'niiiiiliitidii nf Kdiih 
 
 I. Anno tn'c«'nti'siiii(» iiltcn 
 
 /.' 
 
 //»/. 
 
 ' ..<r Or, 
 
 rem n'lii III ikniiiii I niiii 
 '2. |V)st troct>nt(>siiiiuiii .iltcnini aiiiMiin ijiniin I,', mm minliln 
 
 \l)^ I'riilii fiitniii i.rfissll < i-ih'i. Tlu' ila} lictoir lii-^ ilciitli 
 I'itHtriilii iiii nil o rnlii.t (linriHKi, 'I'lii' day atiri I lift \nii 
 f'dsti ri) iiintii iiiiiiin, <7c. 'Pile year at'tcf, »'t''. 
 I'riiiri' iiiuiii ifimm^ itr. 'I'lii' yi ai' lifCurc, i tc. 
 (o) {Hr A'\i\ \[ < thr. I ili'irs wfti'V III Iniil iJunml. 
 
 I. I'list ties aiiiKis ((»/• ttTtiiim amiiini) / ,. 
 
 •2. I citiu anno' \ ' 
 
 W. Triliiis fiost aiinis (nr tcrtio aiinoi ifiiiim itilicral. 
 4. TtTtio anno, '///o ie(lienit. (I{ar»'.) 
 
 324. How long ago?, ivckoniiii^^ I'lom tlic jticst'iit time. 
 is iuiswci'i'il hy Kbldnr witli tlio accusative; tlic dhliinr 
 always ('(iiniiiir jirst, 
 
 Ahliiiic aniKis <iiiiiht(ir J'in/i/'niiii rii/i. I saw \'iii;il f'ntii' 
 ycuis a^<». 
 
 325. Within, <>r in, what time? is aiiswnvd Ity t In- 
 ablative, or tilt! ])n'j»ositi(Hi i/i/ni with tlic arnisatiNc. 
 
 The sini^iilar of tlic Or*////^// '"scrond," " tliiid,'' etc.) ottt-n takes 
 the place of tlie plural of the i '(inliiKil ("two,' '* tliiee"). 
 
 Vic decern iiiiiiis, or deciiiio anno, ar intra dcciimiiii aiimini, 
 
 iirhiiD vKpiniiiis. We shall scarcely take tlie city //', ov fur, 
 
 or in'tlii)!, ten yefrs. 
 
 (^Iis. — ///.s" trlhiis iliiliiii<, III or for the last tlirce days ,rrnm the 
 
 )iri!<iiit time); illis, ctr., from a jmst time; Imc liii nn in, \v\[\\\n two 
 
 years from this time. 
 
 326. /// with the accusative denott'S a time J'nr which 
 jirovisioii or arranocinent or cahuihitions arc iiiadc. 
 
 In dietn rinn', to Vive fur the day (only) ; in sex dies iinliitin,, 
 ii truce /'or six days ; it<l rniiiniii vie in posteriim dii'iii inritarlt 
 (ail, an exact date in the futiirei ; ad rnh ndas sdlruni. J will pay 
 on, or hii, the 1st ; ad hwi)nn,i\t tliea|)pointed time, jmnctiially. 
 
 Kr, ah, startiiiij fro)ii the time at which a i)eriod l)c;rins. Mx nt 
 die ad eiiri iimin w^qiie ritai dii m. 
 
 ^ It might 1)0 supposed that " firf/'o anno i/ninn {or '///") rnfJirnf'' 
 ■would mean "after two <;ompleted years fiom his rctui r>, and before 
 tlie completion of the third." This however docs not apptsar to be so. 
 ''Orfiiro mensi'^ifitain rocptiim opftiii/iiuri, ra/)ti/iii Siujuiitinn,'' etc. (Liv. ); 
 eV ovru) fJ-yjffi (Poi.YB. ) ; " TiiriiK siptlmo i- I'n.sr captu i-sl^' (t'l KT.) j 
 
 7ro\lOpKU!l> CTTTO. /li^J'ttS (IM-I'T. ), 
 
 I > 
 
 I I 
 « I 
 
 4 , 
 I I 
 I 
 
 I 
 
rr 
 
 I 
 
 * . 
 
 a 
 
 i;' 
 
 *'* 
 
 t^y 
 
 'J 1 4 
 
 I'.srKEssioMs or tim'-:. 
 
 |Ex. XLII. 
 
 327. Ill iiiiswcrlo llic (|m'.sti(»ii how old :* tli<' iisiuil nui 
 slnirlimi is nnhis willi (lie iirnisulivt'. 
 
 i\u\ins iiiiiiii/in tl iirliii/iiifd liaflis r.ri'issif i nlii. \\v ilii'il 
 ;it t lir iiur nf ci^lity li\r. 
 
 I'llil niiinii jiiiius (fiiiiuini il iiilniii iihi liiilini'l, nf iiiiinn .iiiiiiuii 
 (M'lii;^ri>siiiiniii i|iiiiiliini iKjint, would lie n|ii.illy n I Liitiii. 
 
 Till' iiiljt'ctn ;il ;,'fliiliv<' (303, < H>.<. I < iiiiiy ;iU(i lie ii^cil : jiiii r iinin- 
 ihiiiii iiiiiiuniiii. 
 
 " I ■ ruler, iiviT, I wciily vrjiis. ' iiiiiv ln' t'\|M»'s-»'l liy iiinmr ninjiir'' 
 /•////»// minis, or iiniins notns nnnur tnidiitr riiiinli^ ;iinl livscvcr;)! 
 tillicr tiiiii'iis v,iri;ilioiis, such jis 
 
 Minor rlifliifi ;i!iliis iniln. ( 'ic. 
 .\///M»r (lict'iii iiniKHiiiM. Li\v. 
 
 " Wlu'll uiitliT," t'tc, l>y ijKiiiii ii(>ntliiiii ri(jiiiti huliint mi inn*. 
 
 Notes on Adverbs of Time. 
 
 328. TIh' cornM'l use (d' ('riljiiij julvcrlis ol' time is 
 iiii))i>rlant. 
 
 {a^ "No longer" is only von (lti(tliiK when u Ion;.' tiiiic liiis Mirriuly 
 |»Mss»'»l, otiu'lwisc noil join; "no one jtny longer "' is in hid jain, or 
 (with *((((/) nic (jiiisijnnin jam. 
 
 (h) Now. yiinic is "iit the ])resent moment," or '*:is things are 
 now." It ciinnot he used of the past. "Caesar mat mur tired of 
 war" is, jam ('lUKdriin hilli tiinlelxit. Occasionally, if the " now " of 
 the past is veiy juccisc, iviii. Jam can ho used also of the future : 
 <liii<l Inn' n i sit,y,\\n iiitiUiijiif, "you \\ill soon be aware of the inean- 
 ing of this." 
 
 ((•) "Dally." Qm'ldiii as a rule; in dies only with comparatives, 
 wi verbs of incirasinff or tlie reverse ; in, niin/nlox th'if< is more em- 
 phatic : Diem dc die, day after day ; de, iioefc, after night has Ix-giin. 
 />/»/•/(».< (adj.) is "daily" as opposed to noctnrnvs; qnotidianaH is 
 "daily " in the sense of "every-day." 
 
 (d) "Not yet" is iiandiim, lucdnm ; " no one yet " /m7/(o 7/ //(/««?/(, 
 or. when' the ]>n'sent is opposed to the future, adfiiic in iin). 
 " Still " (_ = evcn now) is etiam nunc. 
 
 {(') Jam, din is " now for a long wliile " sini))ly ; jam pridnii looks 
 back rather to the bir/inniiuf of the time that i.s past ; jam dttdnm 
 " for Komc, or a considerable, time." 
 
 (/) Again. ]liir)<n)i, "once more ;" ittrnm, " ii scrimd time," opposed 
 to sinii'l or pi-iniinn ; de intcijro, "afresh" as though the former 
 ai'tion had not taken place ; "again and again/' sacpn, sacpisiiime, 
 (57, a.) 
 
Ex. XLII.] 
 
 i:xph'/:ss/()xs of time. 
 
 215 
 
 H.nrrlsf I'J. 
 
 I. Milliri<l;it)'S, n\I;(> in a siii;^'!)' (l;iy liiid lnilclii'icd so 
 iii;iiiy cili/t'iis ol' l»(»iii(', liiid now liccii on (lie tln'oiic Iwo- 
 ;inil I Went y \ (MIS tVniii t li;it diilt'. 2. It st'ciiis tliMt liric 
 liHitlic swmIIoWS illr idisclit ill ill*' Nvilltt'l' IMtiiitlis ; I at 
 least liavc stTh iml a single' oiif t'ur the la>t tliicf weeks. 
 '.\. lie died at tlie a^t' of tliree aiid-tliiity ; w lieii le>stliaii 
 thirty years old lie had idit-aily j»eil'ornied aelii«*veiiieiits 
 niiet|iiall"(| ' Ity any either (»!' his jiicdeeessors or successors. 
 I. The lainiiii' is Itecoiniii^ sorer daily ; exhanstetl hy 
 ilaily toil (y/.) \v<' shall sooii lie compelled'' to disc(»nt iniie 
 the sallies which ii|i to this day wo have made li(»th hy 
 
 iiiuht^ and 1>V dav 
 
 I>i 
 
 \\ alter day we 
 
 lo(»k 
 
 in vain lor 
 
 the arrival (»l our troops. ;">. He )»roniised to he ity my 
 side hv the first old line; lor the last t»'n v«'iirs I havene\er 
 so much us once known'" him to Ik; ]tresent in nood 
 time. (i. Nearly three, years a_iL,M> I said that I had ne\er 
 yet seen any one" who sui'pa.ssed ' your hrother in <liar- 
 actcr or ahilitv, hut in the last two v<'ars he .seems to Ik; 
 L;rowin^" daily sterner and harsher, and 1 no huiLjer osti- 
 mate him so highly as 1 did hel'ort'. 7. I saw yoiu lather 
 ahoiit thre(; we(d<s alter^ his return I'roni India. \'ears" had 
 not yet dulled the keenness ol' his int(dlect or the vi^;(»ur 
 of his spirit ; in sjtite ol' his advancijij,' years he had com- 
 manded an army within the last six months, and wiis just 
 jireparin^' to l)e a eandidatt' for otliee. X. Misled by a 
 mist.'ike in the date,^*' I thouuht you had stayed at Athens 
 more than six months. 0. ] have spoken enou<^h on this 
 (juestion, ami will detain you no longer ; six months ago 
 I might ^^ have si)oken longer.^- 
 
 '• = not even one." (Intr. 99. ) 
 "Sucli as (86) not even one (had performed)." 
 "The sallies must be," etc., part, in -ilits. (See 199.) 
 Use adjectives. (328, c.) 
 
 Coijiiosro, "I find or ascertain. " '' 328, d. 
 
 Mood? (77.) " See 323, c. 
 
 i.e. age. '" (ienitive. (300.) 
 
 "See 196, 6. »» "Said more." (88.) 
 
 4 , 
 I I 
 
■5^ 
 
 1 ") 
 
 /■: .V /■: A' (7 \ /■: xi.i ii. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 Prepositions with Accusative. 
 
 329. Witli the us(i of Cases is cl(»sely connecteil that 
 of Prcposittonx. 
 
 (i.) Prepositions arc iiuleclinablo words wliicli, besides 
 other ust's, are placed before substantives and pronouns to 
 define their relation to other words. (Intr. 20-24.) 
 
 (ii.) Tlit'ir use tlierefore is precisely tlie same as that of tlie caae- 
 I'lniinifs {si'e 203\ but as the miiiiber of causes is not nearly surticient 
 to mark all the (bH'ereiit relations of a noun to other words, preposi- 
 tions' are used to aid the e.ises in makini; their meaninj^ more 
 (h'Hnite and clear. Thus, to take the simph'st instance, the use of the 
 preposition distinji;uishes the relation of the a/t'iit from that of the 
 iiistniiih lit i^2*'7). 
 
 (iii.) In Jjatin. as in modern lantr ia,ues, they come, as a rule, before'-* 
 the noun, and are useil almost exclusively with the accnsatiir. and 
 dlihitlri' cases. 
 
 Ohx. Tlu' ablatives ijrafid, caiiad, are used as qii.anl-prepoitifions 
 with the ijcnifiri., and resemVde such EnjfUsh jmpotiitioital ^j/rm.s-t.s' as 
 " in consequence of,'' " in spite of," etc. 
 
 330. The following pre[)ositions are used witli the 
 
 acnisi(/lrc : — 
 
 (Those marked with an asterisk are used also as lulverhn, i.e. without 
 being attached to a noun, but as (pialifying a verb or adjective.) 
 
 atiu'*, (tn/'i/.^ in/, adrcrsifS*, 
 (•i/'cinii*, el /■(■(I*, cUi'o*, cis, 
 <T;/ii, c.iiifr;/*, iiitrr, c.ffrd*, 
 ■uij'm*, ih/ni*, J/f.c/a*, oh, 
 
 ^ Pri^positions wore <louUtle5s or!_,'inally adverl)s formed from nouns 
 and iirououns; in sonii' lauLtua.fi's, a-s occasionady in Latin, they foHow 
 tlie noun ; the ease-eudiugs m ly have had their origin in prepositional 
 words a(hK;d t() the noun, of. whereby, where/*//, there/o?r, etc. 
 
 - F<»T the position of ciini in ttirinti, etc., see 8, O/w. ; tcnuK also follows 
 it.s noun {A//>'hii>< tonus, as far a*- the Alps), as does vemua, and 
 ocwisionallv proj^ter and others, 
 -10 
 
Ex. XLIII.] PKF.rosrnoxs wrrif accusatii'R. 217 
 
 pcnrs, jxinr*, po^f* and /irarfir, 
 ■prop*'*, jn'opfrr*, pii\ sim ikI h m . 
 sifpni*, rcr.siis, iiltra*, /'-mis. 
 
 Tlie followiiitf iU'(\ji>intMl witli the (irrnsalirr wlicn tlicy 
 express inofio/h titirni'dx; ollici'wisc \\'\[\\ the nh/nfln: ; — 
 
 Sid) aiid sifhfir*, s//j>i /■*, in. 
 Tlie rollowiiiL,' are followed by the nhhilirf : — 
 
 a {lib, ahs), with ntm and </r^ 
 corant*, pro with ir or c, 
 ti'nus, siiic, also /imc ; 
 and where /;/n!<,v' at, not nioficii finnariU is denoted — 
 svh and siihtrr*, .sh/x/'*, in. 
 
 331. Their meanings ar(> so various that no attempt 
 will be made to illnstrate more than some of the most 
 im})()itant. 
 
 The local meaninjjj is the earliest, but from this many 
 others are dedneed. 
 
 1. Ad, "towards," "to," used after vci'lts of iiioiioii, and traiist'cncd 
 to various otiier senses. 
 
 (a) Ad te scripsi (to); (h) ad Int'C v.x n/^f///, " in Miiswcr to;" 
 (r) ad (^anuan, "in the neij^dilioii. liond ,if," "ikmi';" u/) hoc ;\d 
 110H couserntmloA /)'rfinif/''l\\isfiitils tn oitr incsfi'vatioii ;" 
 («') (lii'K ad urhi!< liilt'n'finii fafdiis, "tlx' d;iy destined to tlie 
 ruin of the city " (Jiwil) ; (/') ad innmi, " to :i man " :dl. 
 
 2. Adversus, "opposite to." 
 
 {a) Adversus (•(infrd Ho-^lni ; (h^ "at;ainst." "with," ;idversns ^; 
 voiitiixliiiii —rim fro fc or trnnn ; (o '" in answer to " ci speeeli), 
 adversus Juii'r rn^i'ondit. 
 
 '.\. Ante. " hefore " {phin), ante a cum : l»nt niostlv " I iiih ," ante nir, 
 " hefore my 'Jme ;" often used adverltially ; see 322. 
 
 4. Apud, "close by:" apud (■iiiiiki.'!, "near, <>r at, ('aruiae," hut 
 inn.stly in siu'li phrases as : 
 
 {(i) Apud //,(', "in my hdiise;" [In apud .\'i no/iinniti m. " \i\ itlie 
 irritiiltfii of) Xi'lioplioii ;'' (CI apud cos i-onriinnil n^ i sf . '"he 
 made a speeeli in iionr Iiki n ir' ,' 'ih apud un , "in my 
 judLrment ; " apud im jil n^ ruht, "has ninrc i'lthience n-ilh 
 me." 
 
 5. Clrcum, circa, "round;" eirea liUnmn, '"riaind the eartli ;" 
 circa rirtm, " ()» both slilcx ()^!,(ili>ii>j,i\w road ;" often used adverl)ially ; 
 ftnvi and circiUr, "about," with numerals. 
 
 il 
 t 1 
 I I 
 
 « { 
 
 1' 
 * i 
 
 I t . 
 I 
 
i 
 
 I 
 
 It, 
 
 |Q ■ 
 
 
 Km i 
 
 ?:■' 
 
 
 ?« 
 
 •» 
 
 » » f 
 
 ! i 
 
 ft 
 
 ill 
 
 I i 
 
 ;i 
 
 it 
 
 218 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE. [Ex. XLIII. 
 
 6. Cis, citra; trans, " this side," " the other side :" tis, citra, trans, 
 JJiiiiioi, Jiln mun. 
 
 7. Contra, "facinj^:" contra urhcm ; oftener "a;:ainst," contra 
 raiq)iihllr(iin fiiiTn\ "to act unconstitutionally;" contra iioshiUam. 
 gcrit = iiohlsniiii , L'onira (praeter) ttjx'm, (yi>lnumv.m, etc. 
 
 8. Erga (local sense obsolete): erga me hencvoUntha'uii ha, ''full of 
 kindness tomtrds me." 
 
 0. Extra, "outside of:" extra vrhem ; extra eulpaw, "frn'. froin 
 hlame ;" extra urdiiicvi, ''out of his proper order ;" "extraordinaiily." 
 
 10. Inter, " anionj^st :"' inter /Hw^/»»»^t7a ;" between," inter )iii' ae 
 von hoc (or iliii.d) iiitnrxt ; " this difference between ;" inter se <lili(fV)it 
 (reciprocal), " tliey love earh other." 
 
 11. Infra, "below :" infra ?»oj>^f?s. 
 
 12. Intra, "within :" intra tcJijncfum, "within the cast of a javelin ;" 
 intra diem deeinni))) (325). 
 
 13. Juxta, "close to," "near:" juxta miirum; often adverbially, 
 juxta count it i ; sometimes = pariter, and joined with ac. 
 
 11. Ob, "before, opposite to:'' ob oculon ; "on account of," ob 
 delictiiDi, qiiiiiii ob ?•<»(=" wlierefore (therefore)." 
 
 IT). Penes, "in the power of:" penes te hoc est, ''''i\m drpeiidx on 
 you." 
 
 IG, Per, "throuj^h," (place and time). 
 
 (a) Per provincidm ; (b) per //os dies, " during the last few 
 days" (325, (>/>s.) ; (<•) " (causal)," per me licet, "you have my 
 leave, you may (do it) as far as I am concerned ;" (il^ (in- 
 strument or secondary agent), per sj)ecuIntores, "by means 
 of spies ;" («') (manner), per rrw, "by violence, violenthj." 
 
 17. Post, "behind," "after," = pone. 
 
 (a) Post terf/itni : (h) (time), post h&niinnm mevumxtn, "since 
 the dawn of history," "m^/tin human memory ;" oftni aci- 
 verbial (see 322). 
 
 18. Praeter, " ])ast." 
 
 (a) Praeter coatni : it>) " beyond," "more than," praeter ceteron ; 
 (c^ "contraiy to" — cotitrn, praeter s]>eiv ; (</) "except," 
 praeter /*■ nuinii onnnn. 
 
 li). Prope ipropius, proxime), "near to : ' prope me, propius urhan, 
 (often adverbial). 
 
 20. Propter, " close to." 
 
 {a) Propter miir:n)i: (h) "on account of," propter se, "for its 
 own sake ;'' "thanks to," propter te Kalrnn suni = tii(i openi. 
 
 
Ex. XL 1 1 1 . ] PREPOSITIONS WITH AC C US A TIVE. 
 
 219 
 
 21. Secundum, "aloiii,'" (following). 
 
 (n) Sccundiiiii ^ffniinii ; [h^ .'^eciinduin iinhirow, "in accord- 
 anii' witli ;" ic si'i'iindum piujuovi, "next to, iumwdiatehj 
 affrr, the Hj^lit "' (time) ; (d) secunduni Deo.t, "next to the 
 
 (Jods." 
 
 22. Versus, oidy with dounuti and Iniriiit ; j)laced after the substan- 
 tive : LoiiKiiii veisus, "in the direction of Konie." 
 
 23. Ultra, "hey.)n<l." 
 
 (a) Vltni Jill III til ; (/>) ultra viren, "beyond his strength." 
 
 In, sub, super, 7t"V/; accusative. 
 
 24. In, "into," "to." 
 
 (a) Afliiiiiix in (fnuriavi e.rnlatiim abiit, "went into exile at 
 Athens in (ireece" (316) ; exercitum in naves impmu're, in 
 terrain I'.ijioiinr, "to embark," "disembark," an army; in 
 orhi'iii «'■ 11)11 iijiiiit, "form a circle (for deience) ;" (6) (time), 
 in qua it II III. ilinii. in hortoK ad ratuam invitavit, (326) " /o 
 supper ill his jrrounds four ilai/s from that time ;" in 
 ]yrai!iiii.<, •' for the present ; "' in dies, "daily ;'' in posterum, 
 "for the fiituie ;' (c) "against," in iiieinvirtitaeat, "inveighed 
 , aijaiiiM nie ;" {d) "towards," in ?•('»(;)«/*/«'<■«/»« //(♦'r/7a, " ser- 
 vices /() the nation" (but dt r. p. mereri) ; (c) {luanner), 
 "after ;" in Innic nioduin lucatus est. 
 
 25. Sub ("motion"), "up to." 
 
 (a) Sub 'ijisiis iiiiiro.'< adei/iiitaiit, "they ride c/ose up to the 
 walls ;" (//i ^tiiiir), "just before;^' sub lacem; sub Aaec, "just 
 a/frr this." 
 
 26. Super, "above," 
 
 (a) Super i])!<inii, " (next) above the hod at table ;" {b) alii super 
 alios, "one after another.'' 
 
 Exnrise 43. 
 
 1. Next to lieaven,^ 1 ascribe*! tliis^ great favour mainly 
 to you iuid your cliildien. 2. 1 hope that when once^ 
 he has iciiched IJonie h«' will stay in my house. 3. It 
 seems that this year is destined for tlic ruin of tlie nation. 
 4. He is generally belicvtMJ to 1h' free from blame, and no 
 one sup[)oses that sucli^ a '^ood patriot would have*'' done 
 
 1 in 
 «!< : 
 
 
 ' \N'liy not cailiiiii ? (See 17.) 
 
 •' Kxpress "once" by the right tense. (190, ii., (>/«.) 
 
 < 88, 
 
 * 88, Obs. 
 
 * 193, V. 
 
220 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATP^E. [Ex. XLIII. 
 
 anytliiiiL; niiconstitiitionally. 5. Ww dnjw \\\\ his line on 
 the oilier side tlie J)iinuh(!; our men, who liiid ncnv for 
 some lime heen^ maridiinL;' ah»ni^ tlie river, iiallecl (d(»s(i to 
 tlie otli(!r hanlv o[)posite tlie eiKunies' camp. 0. Voii liad 
 my h'.ave to return home to your fricinds in Lon(h)n. 
 Wiietlier you liave ^njne"-^ away or no depends on yourself. 
 7. There is this difference hetweeu you and others : with 
 them (339, iv.) my clieiit has, thanks to his many^ services 
 to the nation, great weight ; with you, for the same reason, 
 he lias absolutely none. S. It seems that he invited your 
 son to su[)})er with him three days from that time at 
 his house; since that date none of his friends have 
 seen him anywlnu'e. 9. The enemy had now disem- 
 barked, and had come within the reach of missiles ; our 
 men hurled^ their javelins and tried to pass by between 
 them and the river. 10. Such was their jov for \\\^\ 
 present, such their hopes-'* for the future, that no one 
 suspected the real state of the case.^ 11. Having in- 
 veighed against me with the utmost fury, he sat down ; 
 in answer to his long speech I made a very few'^ remarks. 
 12. Having ridden past the many*^ tall trees which stood 
 along the road, I halted at last close to the gate. 
 
 > 181. 2 g^jc 171 
 
 •* JCistorio inthiitive. (See 186.) 
 
 Ro many, tot. (Cf. 88, 0/«.) 
 
 * Singular. In Fjatin prose xpca is very rarely u.seil in tlie plural. 
 " "What was really liappeuiiig" (fio), see 174; or '^tluil which 
 etc.)"' see 176. 
 
 " "Sai.l very little." (See 53, 54.) 
 » See 56, also 69. 
 
KXF.RCrSE XLIV. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 332. Here also the local meaiiiii^L;' is the earliest. 
 
 1. A (before consonaiit.s iindy, otherwise) ab. 
 
 (tt) " From," ab Africa ; (/>) {time), •A.pturo, " from boyhood ; " ab 
 nrhe conditd, "from {after) the foundation of the city;" 
 (c) "from the side of" = "o7/,,'' a (hxtrocvrnu ; -a f route, '''in 
 front ;" so, (</) a aevatu stare, "to take the side of tlie senate ;" 
 (e) securns ab hoste, " free from care as to the enemy ;" a re 
 frumeiitarid lahorare, "to be in distress /or provisions;" 
 (/) a te ineij)iavi, " I will be^in vith you ;" (f/) coufestim a, 
 p-ae/io, "immediately <»//<?• the battle," Cf. (/>). 
 
 2. Cum, " with " (opposed to sine). 
 
 (a) "In company with," tecum h'owam redii; hence "having," 
 "wearing," cum gladio, cum sordida r.(ste ; even, cum febri, 
 "suffering from;" so, cum itirperio esse, "to be invested 
 with military power." 
 
 (h) " With," of friendly, or unfriendly, relations : tecum mihi 
 amicitia, certainen, etc., est : tecum (or contra te) hell am ijtro ; 
 hoc wccum commuiiicavit , " he imparted this to me." 
 
 (c) Accompanying circumstances, or results : maximo cum damno 
 meo, " to my great loss." 
 
 3. De, " down from." 
 
 (ft) De moenibus detvrhare, "to drive in confusion from the 
 walls ;" (b) de spe dejicere, " to disappoint ;" («•) " from," homo 
 de plebe, "a man of (taken frow) the people ;" (d) "ccm- 
 cerning," etc., de t> actum tst, "it is all over irith (concern- 
 ing) yoii ;" (e) ("time," 328, c^, de via lampare, "to be tired 
 after a journey ;" (/) de industria, "on purpo.se ;" ((f) bene 
 nureri de , . . , " to deserve well of," " to serve ;" (h) 2)oenas 
 snmere de . . ., " to punish.'' 
 
 4. Ex (before all letters), e (only before consonants), "out of;" many 
 
 uses. 
 
 Ex equo pugnare, ^^ on horseback ;" e rebus fvturis pcndere, "to 
 depend vjyon the future;" ex soitentia, '^ according to one's 
 wish or views;" e repnhlicd (o])posed to contra r. p.), ^'in 
 acco7-(/a?ic«; with the constitution;" ex iviproviso, "unexpect- 
 edly," etc. 
 
 221 
 
 i! 
 
 « ] > 
 
 I 
 
222 
 
 PRKPOSITIOXS WITH 77//'. ABI A/'/V/-. [Ex. XLIV. 
 
 "in,'' also "iiinontf," otc 
 
 r I 
 
 r 
 
 6. In, ..., 
 
 (a) Fn houh (li((rir, "to reckon ninoinf bless i Ji^fs ;" (Ij) {tltih'^, 
 in (hlihinindo, " wliilst (li'libt-rMtiDj,' ;" («') f/^rtc in onilis 
 sunt, ^'' hi fore our eves ;" ((/) in uniiis (.s.sr, " mtdir iirnis ;" 
 (t;) )[iii<l'm iiohif fi'cH ? "<».s coiici riiH, (U\ iritli us;" (/") in 
 *'^ /c ?m7i/7 poti'statlx lidlxf, "no jKiwcr o/v/' you ;" dj'^ ijiunitinn 
 
 ^ in inc. t'nt, "to the utmost of niy jxtwcr ;" (//^ (of ciicuni- 
 
 stiinces), .s'a/>.s ut in 7V ircpula itiijKtriihis, "with fiiir courjiiie 
 conmlerhifj the rritical state of tiiiiiizs ;" (/"i "in spite of, in 
 face of," in tan to (liscrimiKe. (See 273, (fhs.) 
 
 Prae, " in front of ; " commonest uses metaphorical. 
 (a) Prae se fn-re., "to an)ii\^'' "make no secret of;'' 
 
 (M 
 
 as a 
 
 prt'ventive cause," prae cJanntre rix ini<l!n' iiotnit, lie could 
 s(!arcely be heard /o7" the shoutinir = " his voire inis ilron-ind 
 ill the shouting." 
 
 7. Pro, also " in front of." 
 
 (a) Pro tribnnali dicar, "to speak (in front of) from the magi- 
 .strate's tribunal;" {h) "in defence of," pro (tri.f it focis : 
 (c)"in place of," " as good as," 7rH».s' illi'. niilii \)vo I'lxrcttn 
 est; (d) "as," pro certo hohvrc, "to feel sure of;" (t) "in 
 proportion to,'' pro mcritiH iJiih (pat huh nddiir ; (/) "in 
 accordance with," pro 'prudentia tnu: {</) "in virtue of," 
 pro potcstate ; (h) "in proportion to;" with comparatives, 
 caedes minor quam pro tantd viiiorla, "small in proportion 
 to the greatness of the victory." 
 
 8. Sine, " without," but not nearly so often used as the English 
 preposition. Its place is taken by many constructions. 
 
 Nullo negotio, " without trouble ;" re infecta, " withont restdt ;" 
 7mllo repngnante, ^^ without resistance ;" imprudina, " ivithout 
 being aware," (See 425.) 
 
 Compare also — 
 
 Stetit imjjavidus neque loco cessit. He stood, etc., irithont yield- 
 ing ground ; 
 or — Noupotes mihi noare quin tibi I'^wi noceas. You cannot hurt me 
 withont injuring yourself. 
 
 333. There is nothing difficult in the use of the othei prepositions. 
 
 Tenus is used occasionally with the genitive, and follows its noun ; 
 it should be noticed in such forms as Aactenus, aIiqnatGi\ns, and 
 verho tenus, " as far as words go." 
 
 Sub must never be used with the ablative after verbs of motion 
 towards; its metaphorical use, "under a leader or king," is rare in 
 Latin ; " under his guidance " is eo dnce, 
 
 ffl 
 
Ex. XLIV.] PREPOSiriOiVS WITH TFfE ABLATIVE. 
 
 223 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 1. Ill the midst ot" this dirt; confusion and tumult, tlie 
 emperor wiis seen with his stiitt' on tlie left win<^. He 
 was now' tree from care as to tlie enemy's cavalry, and 
 his words of eU('ouraL;('ment were drowned in shouts of 
 joy and triumpli. 2. 1 fear that- it is all over with our 
 army : for'* ten successive days there lias been the "greatest 
 want of provisions; in front, in tiank, in rear, enemies 
 are threatening' (them); all the iieighbcuiring tribes are 
 in arms: on no side is there any })rospect of aid : yet, for 
 myself,"* in the face of these ^gn^at dan^ners, 1 am unwilling 
 wlioUy to despair. ;>. Immediately after the battle they 
 bring out'' and slay the prisoners: they begin with the 
 general; none'"' are spared; all are butchered to a man. 
 4. 1 will begin, then,'^ with you : you pretend that your 
 countrymen are lighting for their homes and hearths: 
 and yet"* ou avow that they have re])eatedly made raids 
 upon our territory, and wasted our land with fire and 
 sword without provocation or resistance. 5. I have 
 known this young man from a boy: both his father and 
 ho have again and again in your father's lifetime stayed 
 under mv roof; and I consider him wanting in nothing 
 either in ]>oint of knowdedge or natural powers. 6. In 
 virtue of the power with which my countrymen have 
 intrusted me, I intend to rewai'd all who have deserved 
 well of the nation : the rest I shall punish in proportion 
 to their crimes. 7. I will aid you to the utmost'* of my 
 pt)wer; but I fear that it is all over with your ho])es. 
 8. I should be sorry to disappoint you, but I fear that 
 your brother has returned without result. 9. Considering 
 the greatness of the danger, he showed great courage, and 
 we ought all to show him gratitude in proportion to his 
 many services to us and to the nation. 10. We shoukU*^ 
 all of us look at what is before our eyes ; to depend on 
 the future is useless. 
 
 * See 328, h. ^ 138. =» Turn in two ways. (See 321. Obn. 2.) 
 ■• 334, i. ^ A<ji'us:itiv(' of pa-isive participle. (See 16 ) 
 
 * [sii iiciiin : raso ? " Why imt //(;// .' =: * tlieretoro." (Intr. "»(>, </.) 
 ** I'se li/<ni. (Sfc 366, ii.) " ^ (Sue 332. ."), ;/.) Tense? (See 190, ii.) 
 '" npjrtd. (See 198, ii.) 
 
 iii 
 
 • I 
 
 • I 
 
' i 
 
 If, 
 
 * * 
 
 EXERCISES ON PRONOUNS. 
 
 I'hefollov'inii Krctrisrs — XL V. to XL VI 11. — hixy either 
 he done eo/i.seeiif/ire/i/, in the order in ivldeh thej/ dnnd, 
 or any one of them may he tnheii •finy/y at any time 
 after the Jirst twenty-Jimr Keercises hare oeen done. 
 
 I« 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 fit : 
 
 m if 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 EXERCISK XLV. 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Personal and Demonstrative. 
 
 334. It lias already been stated that the English 
 pronouns, /, you, he, nr, etc., when used as subjects to a 
 verb, are, in the absence of any special emphasis, suffi- 
 ciently ex]»ressed by the termination of the Latin verb. 
 (See 11, a, h.) 
 
 But many causes will account for their insertion. 
 
 (i.) ]i!(io often l)ej,ans a sentence in which the speaker is ^'iving an 
 account of his own conduct or feelings. 
 
 Ego cum prliuum ail ri'tnjnihlicam accessi. {Foi' myself) yfhen 
 first I entered on political life. 
 
 (ii.) Tit (especially) is often used indignantly. 
 
 An tu l^raiforoii itrnoitfK? Or is it that you {o7ie like yon) are 
 bringing a charge against a Praetor? 
 (iii.) J^'go, til, and even lllc, are often inserted without any special 
 emphasi.s side by side with the oblique case of another pronoun. 
 (Intr. 106.) 
 
 His ego piriciilis nir ohjiri: ^; ille siinpir roiitnnpsit. These 
 were the dangers to which I exposed myself ; he always had 
 a contempt for you, 
 
 (iv.) They, especially ille, are often joined closely with quidem, 
 and inserted in a clause where an admission is made in contrast with 
 a statement which follows, 
 
 Vir ofjtimus ille (juideni. xril vicdiocri ingenio. He was an 
 
 excellent man but < f im dor.itc abilities. 
 224 
 
Ex. XL V. ] /H'lAfOXS 7 A'. 1 77 1 'E Ph'O NOUNS. '22r* 
 
 Tlu' r(»ll(»\viii<r an- tlie iiiaiii uses of tin; Demonstrative 
 Pronouns, tlios(i wliicli point out (ilniiDUHfro), witliout 
 luiiniii^', the jieisoii <>r tiling ol' wliicli we in- s|)('iikiii,u. 
 
 I: 
 
 Is, ille, hoc, iste. 
 
 335. Latin lia,s iiiiiny words wliicli aiiswjT to our "lie," ''slie," 
 " tlu'y," in addition to th«' termination of lln' tliird person. In "//» 
 says that /**' ha.s not done \vron«f," the seeond " he " might he expressed 
 in Latin hy )n(iat se, »'un), hun<', istnin, or iihini jiKrnssc, aceordiiiif 
 to the precise nieanini; of lie in tlie Knt^lish sentence. The tirst "he" 
 niijfht he either nnexpresseil as above, or traiishited by is, hie, iste, 
 illi\, accordint,' t(t circnnistances. 
 
 336. Is is the pronoun (»f mere reference. It i.s icoulmly 
 u.scd, e'si>ecially in Mr; oblicjiic cases, for "tic," "sl'i'," 
 "liini," "her," "it," as an uncmpliatic ])ronoun referring to 
 some person or tiling nhrady mnitio7icd,i)Y to hf rnvniwuid. 
 
 /s is, in all cases, the re»^ular pronoun corresponding to 7 »»". The 
 other demonstrative pronouns have each a special force of their own. 
 in addition to that of mere reference to some penson or thing indi- 
 cated. 
 
 " Th 
 
 IS 
 
 337. Hie is the demonstrative of tha first person 
 person, or thing, near me " (the speaker). 
 
 Haec patria, this our country ; haec vita, this jmscnt life ; huic 
 omnia, everything aronnd us ; jiujd haec perjuti, it is painful 
 to endure the jtresnit atate of thingn ; hit sex diilnis, in the 
 last six days; his cognitis, uHer learning this (irhirh 1 have 
 just related). 
 
 338. Iste on the other hand is tlie demonstrative; of the 
 seeond person (the person addressed), " tliat near i/ou." 
 
 Cnr ista quaerifi? why do i/ou put that, or this, question I opinio 
 ista, that belief of yours ; Epicurus iste, your friend Epicurus ; 
 casns iste, your present disaster. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — In the language of the law-court///*' is often opposed to iste. 
 Hie then means " the man near me," " my cli< nt^ and friend here,' and 
 is opposed to iste, "the man near you," "my opj)onent," "the dif end- 
 ant." ^^ Iste" has this meaning because the jury aiv addressed, and 
 the accused .sat near the seats of the jury ; so iste has its proper mean- 
 ing, " the man beside you." 
 
 ^ CUens is never used in this sense ; either hie, or, if more emphatic, 
 hie cujus causa7ii suitcepi, hie quciii. difendo, etc. 
 
 V 
 
 li 
 
 « 
 
 i i 
 
 '.i 
 
 n 
 
226 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PKONOUXS. [Ex. XLV. 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 !«i 
 
 i* 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 Oft«. 2. — This lueaninj? "that of yours" often, lnit Ity no incans 
 xlwiiys, ^ives iste a incaiiinj^ of contempt : ista norinnis, we know (hni 
 »tortj ; isti, those friends of yours (whom J think li;;litly of;. 
 
 339. Ille is the demonstrative (tf tlie third jursou., other 
 tliiin those present, or enifiij^'iul in eoiiversiitioii : "lh;it 
 i/ontfcr," "that out there." llenee come various uses, 
 
 (i.) The remote in tinif as opposed to the present : " Illis ti inporihns, 
 "in those days ;" antiquitaa iUa, "':he far-oH" past," "the <{oo(l old 
 times." 
 
 (ii.) The "distinguished," as opposed to the common: ('<ifi> ille, 
 " the great Cato." 
 
 (iii.) The emphatic " he," the "he" of whom we are ali thinkinj,' or 
 speaking ; whom we all know ; ///(; is substituted for y's, where a well- 
 known jierson is meant, even with qui; illi qui, tliotic (whom we all 
 know) who, not merely " irieyi who." 
 
 (iv.) So, " he " in the sense of " the other " of two parties ; often 
 substituted for a proper name in a narrative. 
 
 340. Hie and ille are often opposed to eacli other. 
 
 (i.) Of two persons or things already mentioned, hie relates to the 
 nearer, the latter ; ille to the more n mote, the former. 
 
 Romnlum Ntima excepit; hie paee, ille bello imltor fnit. To 
 Romulus succeeded Numa ; tlie latter excelled in peace, the 
 former in war. 
 
 (ii.) So, of persons or things already mentioned or implied. 
 
 Neqne hoc neqne illud. Neither the one nor the other. 
 Et hie et iWe { = iiterq lie). Both <)»« and the o^/ar. 
 
 (iii.) Sometimes they answer to "some," "others." 
 Hi pacem, helium illi roiimt. 
 
 341. Itlnd is often used to introduce an emphatic statement, or 
 a quotation. 
 
 Illud vereor, ne fames in vrhe sit. My real fear is, or, what I 
 
 fear is, lest there should be a famine in the city. 
 Notum illud Catonis. The saying of C^ato is well known. 
 
 It will sometimes answer to the English " this," " the following." 
 
 Ne illud quidem intelleijunt . . . They do not even perceive this, 
 that . . . 
 
 342. Is, as the pronoun of reference, is the regular correlative to 
 qui, and is used with all three persons. 
 
Ex. XLV.l DIIMOXSTRATIVE PKOSOUS'S. 
 
 m 
 
 Kt'iul iit,'!iin 70-76, iind oxpltiin the following «'xiiiiii»lt'« : — 
 {a.) i}\\\ h. jWrrint (190, i.) jkuikih iliihitnt. 
 (/>.) />(■ eis ({tii h<»' fii'irint, fK»naM Hiiiiiaia. 
 (<•.) i^hii olltii tcrrdrinii orhi imjurtirinniii, vi (ii) IkhUi Hi'irinnis. 
 (d.) In e(»H (|iii «lett'c»'riitit mivitum ext. Thf itIhIh^ [175) wen' 
 treated with severity. 
 
 S^S. For the ditl'eience between nnn to rm cut, qui nos ninipir 
 rnnti iii}ist:rit (.subjunctive), Jind the same sentence with cout> miisit, sre 
 606. 
 
 It will be enouj^h to say here that 
 
 Is siitii niii feci, is, " I am the man ivho did (it)." 
 Non is sum qui faciani, is, "I am not such a person as to do it," 
 " one to do it." 
 
 344. A7 is, isque, idque, etc., are often iulded wilh 
 some (letjiil to vvhicli attention i.s drawn. 
 
 Ikcem avpti sunt, et ii Iiomtnii. Ten mm have ])een taken, 
 
 ami flio,se too Koinans. 
 IJtfcria opt'nini ilcdi, idque apiuro. I liave been a .student, 
 
 and iliiit from n»y boyhood. 
 
 345. The pronoun " that," " those," is most rarely used, as it is 
 constantly in English, to represent with a genitive case a noun 
 already ment: ,ned. 
 
 "Our (jwn children are dearer to us than ihoAe of our friends," is, 
 nostri uobis libiri carionH .^unt quavi aniicorum ; never, ei (ii) 
 a in tear urn. 
 If the second substantive represented by "those" is in a different 
 case it is repeated. 
 
 Libd'i nostri ainicornm liberis cartons sunt. 
 
 346. So also it must be again noticed (see 74) tiiat 
 neither Is nor iUe can be used like the Greek article, or the 
 Knglish demonstrative, to define a participle, adjective, or 
 phrase. 
 
 "He ordered those near him" is not eos ]>rtij)c sr, hut 
 I'os qui projje se erant or stulmnt; "to thost' (juestioning 
 him" is not iis interrogantitms, but either inti'rni(j(uitil)iis, 
 or eis qui internxjaljunt ; "those like ourselves" is not 
 eos nostri similes, but nostri siniih's, or cos qui nostri sunt 
 similes. 
 
 * Observe that the Latin substantives in -tor, -sor, express a nui--- 
 permanent and inherent quality than the J^nglish in -tr : yuUrimtor 
 is not the " steerer" of the moment, but Win 'jrroj'ixHional pilot. JJe/eitor 
 is first used in Tacitus. 
 
L'S 
 
 />/'.. \/(). WSJ h' A 771'/': PA'OA'itrXS. (Ex. XLV. 
 
 347. wilt 'I I /s', /iii\ <»!• i/in\ (itc. stands as tlic snh/nf nt' tlif 
 V(m1i " to 1)1'," nr soiiM* link verb, tlic |ir((iiuuii ;^('ii('i;ill\ 
 a<4i'('('s with tlif |tit'(licat(' wlu'ro wi» niiylit litivt* t-xpcctt'tl 
 it to Im- iiiiiti r. (Sec 83.) 
 
 I"!;i ihiinim i si n r<i fi'(iii(iis. This an*! this iml} is tint* 
 LCoud foitlllM!. 
 
 ,V. /». Filii'itiis lu'VtT iiic.ilis " li;i|)|)iii('s.s " (^»'C 98, /' . Imt "j/odd 
 JlU'k" or " t'liilunt' ;"' not*' nlso the us*- <»t ilninini: tills "fit lfii;ftli,' 
 " ii(»tliiii<,f //// "•(• i-Diiii to this," 
 
 348. liutli ///(■ and /s somctiincs rcjircscnt llir KnuliNli 
 " articlti " ///r, itscH'a slKnlcncd tlcnionstratJNr. 
 
 1 it'iii('iiil»('!' tin day on which, /V///7 in'thl in im iifrni dlci 
 
 illiiis, <///(/. 
 The tVit'iidshiji which existed l»«'twe«*n you sind ine. Ka 
 
 ([iiiif iiiihi hciiiii ifid (iiiiirifia. 
 
 So "tlic sayin^n' (d' (.'ato ;" sou above, 341. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JfJ.irrcisr 4.'). 
 
 1. Those IVicnds of vouis are in the lialtit of tin(lin<j 
 fault with the men, llie institntious, tlie manners, of the 
 ])resent^ day, and of sighin<i for, and sounding' tlie praises 
 of, th(> uood ohl times; iiossildv vou vourself have some- 
 times fallen into tliat mistake. 2. There is tlie ^n-eatest 
 disagreennuit on- political matteis in my liouse ; one 
 party wishes everythin*;- changed, the otlier notliing. For 
 myself, 1 Itelievt; neitlier of tlie two jiarties to be in the 
 ri''ht. '.\. lie-' always showed himself iiroof a^iinst these 
 perils, thes(! l>UL;beais ; do* not yon then appear unworthy 
 of your noble foiefathers. 4. Of this at least I am eon- 
 vineed, that that belief of yours as to- the antifpiity of 
 this eustom is <.ii'onndless : it is for you to consiiler'' its 
 origin." 5. The sayin.t^' of Caesar is pretty well known, 
 that chance has the <'re{itest influence in war. 6. When 
 just on the point of pleading his cause, my client was 
 
 ' See 337. Repeat the pronoun with each word. (See 49.) 
 
 " See 300. ' 334, iii. * See 143. 
 
 ^ Sec 146. « See 174, e. 
 
\'l 
 
 Ex. XLV.I DEMOXSTRATlVh: PKOxorxs. 
 
 oo<J 
 
 ij'ndy to })n rcfoncilfd with the ticf'ciKliiiit , ami tliis (Ifsi.jn ' 
 lie shortly iicc(iiii|tlisli('(l ii'^aiiist my will, and in the tcfili 
 of all his rrit'iids. 7. To tin- (jm'stioii why he idchTivd 
 Ihmiil; ail cxilr t(» livim,^ in his own homr, the othci' ii'j»lird 
 that \\K\ could not ictiiiii yet withont violaliii!^ thr law, 
 (and) must-' wait lor the kind's death, s. 'I'hi> oidy, it is 
 said,'' is trim wisdom : to (-((mman i "nc's-scU. !•. I vahic 
 my own rt'pMtation more highly than yon (do) yonrs, hut 
 I am rciidy to saciilicc my I'rn'doin to that of thr nation. 
 10. I who* twenty years ii^o never <|nailed even Iteloic 
 the hravest I'oe, now in the face' (»f an inconsiderahli; 
 dani^'cr am alarmed for my own safety and that ol my 
 children. 11. To those who aske(l why tlx'y refused to 
 conijtly with tlx' royal ca|irice, they repliecl that they were 
 not men" to quail hchtre pain or daiiLiei-. \'i, ^'ou have 
 ht'cn praised hy an exctdlenl man, it is tiiie," hut hy ono 
 most unvei'.sed in thes matti'i'.s. 
 
 > IdntHtd. (See 67.) 
 '^ See 32 A, and 44. 
 * 273, U\m. 
 
 ■ 198, iii. 
 
 ^ See 76, and 342, r. 
 Swe 343. ~ 334, iv. 
 
 ^ .{ 
 
 ii 
 
 M 
 
 Taff 
 

 
 ! 1 
 
 1. i 
 
 i * 
 
 • 4 
 
 u 
 
 V 
 
 ft 
 
 t 
 
 fi'J 
 
 f i 
 1 
 
 f> 
 
 EXERCISE XLVl 
 PRONOV NS-Continued. 
 
 Reflexive and Emphatic Pronouns— 5e, suus, ipse. 
 
 349. Se, sese, sui, sibi, as also the possessive suus, are 
 used vvlieie tlie ])er80ii vvlioin they denote is the sauie as 
 the «;i'aiinuatieal subject of the sentence in whicli thin' 
 occur, i.e. as tlie nominative to the principal verb. 
 
 They iire used of the third person only. In the tirst and second, 
 me {memet), le (letnd), are used with ipse. (See 366.) 
 
 Brutm juKjione se iuterfecit suo. Brutus killed himself with his 
 
 da<f<rer. 
 Ah tenaet ipse rontcmnis ? Is it that you despise yourrAf? 
 
 Obs. — Suus is not expressed wherever we use his, theirs, etc., but 
 only for emphasis, or to avoid ambiguity. 
 
 Animum advcrfit, "he turned his attention ;" ^/i;' mortem de- 
 plorahat, " 1 was lamenting his son's death." 
 
 But it is often used emphatically, as opposed to alienus ; suo tempore, 
 "at the time that suited himself;" or in combination with quisque, 
 siiaiih (piisque virtutem laudant ; and always in the phrase sua spouti: 
 Sui is often used for a man's " friends," " party," " followers," or even 
 "countrymen :" ad suos rediit. 
 
 350. Sr (sinifi), when used as the suV)ject to a verb in 
 the infinitive, refers to the subject of the vt rb on wbicii tlie 
 infinitive veib depends. 
 
 This use will cause no difficulty, though the English idiom is 
 diti'erent. 
 
 Ait se haec vidisse. He says he saw this. (See 34.) 
 
 Obs. — Where there is no danger of ambiguity, the se may refer to 
 the object of the principal verb. 
 
 JicJiquo,'^ sese covrertere cogunt. The rest they compel to turn. 
 JUpidiiiti m reJiiiS suis coiiHrmavit. He cheeicil linn wliilf dis- 
 trusting (against his distrust of) Ids own position. 
 
 For the insertion of .se iftcr verbs of /troiuising, etc., see 37. 
 
Ex. XLVL] 
 
 A7t, Sf:rs, /f'SE. 
 
 o 
 
 2S1 
 
 351. Soinetinies, as with the Eni,'li.sh "one's self," " one's own,'' 
 the sul)ieet must lie supplied from the context ; Latin, like En^fJish, 
 haviiiLj no such indeHiiite word as the (ireek rt?, or the Fn-neh on. 
 
 Alunix hijnriia nJniihidius ([Hnin suis r(»//n/*or« /•/. The hfinji 
 ninre deeply moved '»y other mens wronj^s than by ohi'a on n. 
 
 So si(l jHunilirr, sibi planre, "self-reproach," " seli'-satisfaciion." 
 
 352. Very common uses of .s'c, .s //*/>■, are — s(/'/ sy;<»//^', of his own 
 accord ; xiriim Iniherc, to keep to one's-self ; /(W/'c/(f .sw</. self-contidenee ; 
 j)er se, jirojitcr sc, jiro .sc tpiixijiic ("each in turn"); sui riniipus, master 
 of himself, his reason ; (piantiim in se J'i'lt, to the utmost of his 
 j)0wer. 
 
 These i)hrases are freely used without any reference in the s, to 
 any other than the nearest word. 
 
 Tinii lUiiiii rl.r jam sui compoteni c.«^'e r('(/(7. Tlien )ie sees that 
 
 he (^^the other; is scarcely any longer master of himself 
 lldi'C (Diniid per se ac projtter se v.ipitiinla (X.sv; ait. All these 
 things are, he says, desirable in tfuvimlri ■< and for tlnir oim 
 sake. 
 Ob)>. — iSo .sr, ,s'«(/.s', are constantly combined with qn'iKtiac., either in 
 a difl'erent case or with a different construction. 
 
 M'dites ad sua (piemque signa redire jnasit . . ., "to thdr n. <])(•(•- 
 tive, or several, standards." 
 
 353. In dependent clauses introduced by qni or a conjunction 
 no precise or mechanical rule for the use of .se (suns) can be given ; but 
 
 (i.) In adjectival clauses itc geiuralhj refers to tlie subject of the verb 
 in its own clause. 
 
 Mil ids, qui se iiwaqne omnia hottti tradiiii'iroif, lanthri' iiolnit. 
 He objected to praise soldiers who had surrendered tluintnivia 
 and all that belonged to tluru to the enemy. 
 
 (u.) In all other subordinate clauses .sr qeinraUn r''fers to the 
 subje( t, not of its own, but of the principal clause. 
 
 i'iiuro iffi'i'trat, u\ Q. (^nrin.-i <-oii.<ili<i (^itilimii' sibi proihrif. 
 Cicero had contrived that (f. Curius should betray to liim 
 ((^icero) the de.><igns of Catiline. 
 
 But neither rule is universal ; sometimes in suln.rdinate rhiuses 
 ifnc represents the subject of the ])rincij»al >•<', .^ini.-<, that i^i' the depen- 
 dent vetus ; the general rule is the opposite of this, 
 
 354. Soinetimes, and constantly with i)itii\ >■<' supplies the place 
 of the reciprocal pronoun, which is wanting in Jiatin. 
 
 Fv.rfim inter se attjiifiihaiif. They would l.>ok stt'althily at 
 lach otln r. 
 
 Otherwise c(//i(.s aliiiin. (See 371, iv.) 
 
 : I 
 
 ■y 
 
 < 4 
 
 h 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 * >» 
 
 \ J 
 
23'2 
 
 SK, saUS, IPSE. 
 
 [Ex. XLVI. 
 
 I 
 
 355. Ipse can be used of any person (witli erjo, tu, etc.) 
 .and in any case; it may also enipliasise .sc ands//</.s, and is 
 joined freely with sul)stantives. 
 
 Qidd ipsi !<iiitl(t,tis r.livi fatamini. I would fain have you 
 confess iioiir own sentiments. 
 It answers to various English e\:[)ressions. 
 
 {a.) Ipsis .sv(// iiincnihaa, close beneath the walls (place) 
 (/>.) fllo ipso (//(', on that /''/•// day (time). 
 (('.) Adfrntit ipso lioMi-a tcrniit, "by liis iiwre arrival." 
 ((/.) Ipse hoc ciili, ''with my own eyes," or, as with inveni, 
 "unaided," or '"of my own accord ;" sometimes "on my 
 ])art." 
 
 Oli'i. 1. —Ipnc is often inserted in Ltitin for the .sake uf clearness or 
 contrast where we should harilly express it. 
 
 />i//K.s'.s't.s anU ipse luwctit ron.'iriiKlit. He dismissed his followers 
 and embarked. 
 
 0//S. 2. -It very often denotes the leadinij person, the host as 
 opposed to tlie j^niests, " the master " as opposed to " the disciples." 
 
 356. (i.) When used to emphasise huuk ("own"), it is added to it 
 in the possessive genitive, singular or plural as the sense requires. 
 
 Mf<i ipsius I'liJpn, vestra ipsorum culpa. Through my own, or 
 your own, fault. 
 
 (ii.) When ipse emphasises the oblique case of se or a persona! 
 pronoun ("self," "selves"), it SvMuetimes agrees with that case — 
 
 Nos ipsos onines natnra (liiigimns. We all of us instinctively 
 love ourselves ; 
 but more commonly it is used in the nominative as subject to the verb — 
 Me, or nit'niet, ipse consolor. I console myself. 
 Virtus per se d propter se ipsa expetenda est. Goodness is desir- 
 able in itself a!id for its own sake. 
 
 The most emphatic combination is egomit ipse, teniet, or semet, ipse, 
 rostiu't il»si, etc. 
 
 I 
 
 Kirrclsi' 4G. 
 
 1. Many evils and troubles befall us throujjli our own 
 fault, and it^ is often men's lot to atone for the offences 
 of their boyhood in mature life. 2. Having thus spoken, 
 he sent back the (tHicers to tlieir S(!V<>ral regiments, and 
 then, telling- the cavalry to wait for liis arrival under 
 shelter of (he rising ground, he started at full gallop 
 
 » " It" eiiiphiitie (341.) '•' Why not present participle ? (See 411.) 
 
Ex. XLVI.] 
 
 SE, SUUS, IPSE. 
 
 2'^:^ 
 
 and encoiiraj^'ed by voice and gesture the infantry, vvlio 
 had retreated ([uite up to tlie canij), to turn back* and 
 IbHow liini. 3, You are one wlioni your countrymen 
 will intrust- with olhce from the mrre im])r('ssi()n of 
 your «foodness. 4. It is a kin^^'s duty (291) to have 
 le^ard not only to himself, but to his successors. 5. I 
 heard him with my own ears deiiloriniJ the untinu'lv 
 death of his son, a calamity wliiclr* you ]tretend that lie 
 treated yery liiihtly. 6. We ouu'ht, says he, to be scarcely 
 more touched by our own sorrows than by those of our 
 friends. 7, Havinj^ returned to his countrymen, he ]tro- 
 ceeded* to appeal to them not to surrender him at the 
 conqueror's bidding to men who were"' his and tlieii" 
 deadliest enemies, to his father's murderers and their" 
 betrayers, but rather to l)ra\e* the worst, and perish in 
 the liekl. 8. He intends, he says, to lead his men out to 
 tight'^ at his own time, not at that of the (lermans. 
 9. Any one^ may be dissatisfied with himself and his 
 own generation; but it requires^ great wisdom to per- 
 ceive how we can retrieve the evils of the past, and treat 
 with success the national wounds. 10. To those who 
 asked what advantage he had reaped from such numerous 
 friends, he replied that friendship was to be cultivated in 
 itself^ and for its own sake. 11. Taking*" his seat, he 
 sent^ for the ambassadors of the allies, and asked them 
 why they were ready to desert him, and betray their own 
 liberties at such a crisis. 
 
 * Participle, see 16, (for mood of " follow " and " perish " .see 118). 
 
 2 Mood? (343.) ^ "Wliich calaiiiitv." 
 
 •* See 184. " Mood? (77.) 
 
 " Use iftsf for " tlieii" " in l>oth places. " Ad witli (Jeruud. 
 
 » See 292, 4, and 291, O/as 4. '^ See 362 
 
 '<* Use consido. Why not present participle ? (See 411.) 
 
 » 
 
 I 
 
 « 4 
 
 : 1 
 
 • -4 
 
E XE R CISE X L VI l. 
 
 PRONOUNS Co/jf/>jwe(y. 
 Indefinite Pronouns— ^w/s(7wam, aliquis, etc. 
 
 TllKiiK i.ic niaiiy pronouns wliichniay be c.ilU'd indefinite 
 demonstratives in Latin ; but their main distinetions are 
 eiisily }»(>inte(l out. We may divide them into (1) tliose 
 that are of a negative as well as of an indefinite nature 
 ("Any"), and (2) those that are mainly affirmative 
 (" Some "). 
 
 if* 
 
 357. " Any," after si, nisi, num, ne, quo, qHi'jito, is the 
 very indefinite quis (qui, when used as an adjective, i.e. 
 as attaclied to a substantive). 
 
 Si (juis ltd fecerit, pocnas dahit. If antj one does (191, i.) 
 
 so, he will 1)0 ])unished. 
 Nuni quis irascitiir infantibns ? Does aiujlnnlii feel auger 
 
 towards infants 1 
 Ne (juis aedes iiifrcf, januam elamilinns. We shut the door 
 
 to prevent (101, ii.) any one from entering the house. 
 (^Hio (|uis rcrsiitior, eo fivsprdior. The more shrewd a man 
 
 ((1111/ one) is, the more is he suspected. 
 
 jV.IJ. Quis in this sense can never bej^dn a sentence. 
 
 Ohn. — In place of qui)i, in all but the last sentence, qiiisiqnam might 
 be used. "Does any one nt all, any thongh it be hut one, feel anger?" 
 
 358. (i.) A more emphatic "any" is quisquam (subst.), 
 (nllus, adj.). It is used after a negative particle {ncc, vie, 
 etc.), or a verb of denying, forbidding, preventing, or a 
 
Ex. XLVII.] QUiSQUAM, AIJQIUS, ETC. 
 
 235 
 
 question implying a negative, or si, where the negative 
 
 sense of " any " is empliasised. 
 
 H(ux aio, nee quisquiun negat. This I say, amino one denies it. 
 Neifiuit xe cnjns(juain imperio ennr ohtcmjHratxros. They refuse 
 
 to (136, a) obey any ones coniniiititl. 
 AV ('.s« (inisquiinj ? And is therein// o/m; / (It is implied that 
 
 there is no one.) 
 I'dtit lex ulhini rem ♦'.f.te cujus(juani, qui legihux parcre nolit} 
 
 The law forbids that anythiwj should belonf,' to any one who 
 
 refuses to obey the laws. 
 
 OA.S. — Nee quisqnam is always used (not et nemo) for "and no one." 
 (See 110.) 
 
 (ii.) As qnisfjiiHvh (ull7is)=" nuy at «//," it is naturally 
 used in comjiffrisoms. 
 
 Fortior erat quam amicorum quisijuam. He was braver than 
 
 any of his friends. 
 Soils candor illnxtrior ext quam uUius npiis. The briifhtness of 
 
 the sun is more intense than that of any fire. 
 
 359. "Any," in the ajfflrmafire sense of "any one (or 
 thing) you please" almost equivalent to "every," is quivis 
 or quilibet. 
 
 Quodlibet pro patria, jMrentilnis, amicis mlire pericvhiin 
 
 oporfi't. We ought to encounter any danger {I.e. all 
 
 dangers) for our country, our parents, and our friends. 
 
 Mlhi (juidvis satis est. Anythlny is enough for me. 
 
 Ohs.—Qiilvis expresses a more deliberate, qvllihd a more blind or 
 
 capricious choice {voluntas compared with libido). 
 
 360. "Some" is aliqim {-qui), quispiam, quidam, nesv.io 
 qais. We might say for "some one spoke," loeidus est 
 aliquis, quidam, nes(;io quis, according to our precise 
 meaning. 
 
 (i.) Aliquis (qui) is " some," ^ "some one," as opposed 
 to " none," " no one." 
 
 Dlrerit aliquis. Some one (no dejiniie person thought of) 
 
 will say (have said). 
 Senes qiiihus aliquid rohoris supererat. Old men who had 
 still some strength remaining. 
 
 1 For mood of nolK see 7V with Obn. 
 
 ^ Hence with sine in a negative sentence aliqui, "some," is used, just 
 as with nine in a positive sentence uUux. "any : " vifmo ext .sine aliqua 
 virtute, there is no one without mme virtue (or other) ; homo est mtw 
 uUa virtute, he ia a man witliout any virtue. 
 
 i^ 
 
 « 
 
 ' 4 
 s 
 
 I ( 
 
 I 
 
 i * 
 » , 
 
 (■ 
 
236 
 
 QUrSQUAM, AIJQU/S, ETC. [Ex. XLVII. 
 
 (ii.) Quispiam is not so often used, and is vfiLruer. 
 lYwil <juis|>iiun. ^ome one will say. 
 
 (iii.) "Some," whim used in an enipluitic and yet inde- 
 finite sense is often ^imt qui, rranf. qui, witli the subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 aSV»/ qui d'uuuit. S()in«^ say. Enint qui dircrviit. Sonio said. 
 
 (iv.) Nonnuir is "some few," "more than one," as 
 oi)))()sed to "one " or " none." 
 
 Disertos roqnovi noiniullos, eloqneuUnii ncmineni. I have 
 met with scr/'nd clever speakers, hut not a .sins^le man 
 of el(Kiuence. 
 
 361. Quidatn is "a certain one," or simply "a." It 
 exi)resses some definite person (and therefore differs from 
 (i/iquis) sutfiuiently known to the speaker for the purjjose 
 in hand, but not further described. 
 
 Quidam ex (or de) plebe oratiomm haha'U. A man of the 
 
 common.s made a speech. 
 Quodam tempore. At a certain time (I need not go on to 
 
 give the date). 
 C«V/n" quidam Roirmiuis. A (certain) citizen of Rome. 
 
 Ohii. I. — Qaid'im also is very coniinonly used to qualify a stron<j 
 expression, or to introduce some metaphorical language ; it corre- 
 sponds in use to ut dicim, " so to speak." (100, note ^) 
 
 Erat in eo viro divina quaednni inxjenii vis. There existed in 
 that man almod a divine, or, a really heroic, force of character. 
 
 Progrcdltur respablica naturali quodaui itinere et cursu. The 
 state advances in a ivitural path and progress. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — As the English language admits of the use of metaphorical 
 expressions much more readily than the Latin, the Latin quidam, or 
 some qualifying phrase {tanquam^ "as if," etc.), will often be used 
 where no answerinjr phrase is required in English. 
 
 332. Nescio quis (qui) fs also used as a single word 
 with the indicative, or even without a verb {c.f/. contra 
 nescio quern). (.See 169.) It does not merely decline 
 to nanie, as quidam does, but asserts ignorance. When 
 used of a person it is often therefore contemptuous. 
 
 Ali'idamas quidam, "one Alcidamas," whom I need not 
 stop to describe further. 
 But — Alcidamas nescio quis, "au obscure person called Alci- 
 damas." 
 
 
 
Ex. XLVII.] 
 
 QUISQUAM, ALIQVIS, ETC. 
 
 237 
 
 363. The phrases iicsno quid, ncscio qiiumodo, quo j^nfio 
 (also quodtim modo), are used where ther<' is au}thiii«j; ex- 
 pressed tliat is not easily defined or accounted tor. 
 
 IiH'sf nescio (|iiid /// aiihno ac scnsii inco. There is sonie- 
 thinjf (irliir/i J caum>t di'Jiue) in my luiiid and ffcliiius. 
 
 littn'i sunt nescio (juonio(h) tarditircs. CJood jteoplf are 
 sonirltoir or oliuf rather sluggish. 
 
 Nescio (juo i)acto eviiiH lit ... . Somehuic nr other it 
 hapix'iied that .... 
 
 364. Quicunque, quisquis (substantive), "wh(»e\er," 
 thou^^h occasionally used as indelinite denionstrativ<'s, as 
 a rule are indetinite relatives, and as such are followed 
 by a dependent verb in the indicative; by the subjunctive 
 only when required on other grounds. 
 
 Crcus till quodcunque voles dkere licebii. To-morrow you 
 
 may say irhaterer you like. (190, ii.) 
 Quisquis hue venerit, vaj)idahit. Whoever comes (190, i ) 
 
 here shall be beaten. 
 
 Caution. — Beware of thinking that quicunque governs a subjunc- 
 tive. (163.) 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 1. Do not,^ says he, be angry with any one, not to men- 
 tion - your own brother, without adequate grounds. 2. 
 Scarcely any one^ can realise the extent and nature of 
 this disaster, and perhaps * it can never be retrieved. 3. 
 Your present disaster might have^ befallen any one, but 
 it seems to me that you have been somehow more unhicky 
 than any of your contem})oraries. 4. No one ever attained 
 to any such goodness without, so^ to speak, some divine 
 inspiration, and no one ever sank to such a depth of 
 wickedness without any consciousness of Ids own guilt. 
 5. Some believed that after the defeat of Cannae the very 
 name of Eome'' would disappear, and no one imagined 
 
 * Use cave. (143.) 
 
 ^ Ne. dicam (the dicam does not govern the case of *' brother "), (See 
 100, note.) 
 
 ^ 291, O/w. 4. •»=" which i)eiluii>.s." (See 169.) 
 
 * Sen 196. « 361, O.Vs. " Adjectivt;. (68 aii'l 319.) 
 
' 
 
 ])}■■ 
 
 'I 
 
 !, 
 
 r 
 
 238 
 
 Qir/SQl/AM, AlIQUIS, ETC. [Ex. XLVII. 
 
 tliat tho nation would have ^ so soon recovered from so 
 cru.sliin,i( a calauiity. 6. It seems to me, to express- my- 
 self with more accuracy, that this nation has long heen 
 advancing in learning and civilisation, not of its own 
 impulse, but hy^ wliat I may call an engrafted training. 
 
 7. Some one of liis countrymen once said that my 
 client was naturally disposed to laziness and timidity; to 
 me it seems that he is daily becoming somehow braver, 
 firmer, and more uncomplaining under any toil or danger. 
 
 8. In the * army that was investing Veii was a ^ lloman 
 citizen who had been induced to have a conference 
 with one or other of the townsmen. He ** warned him 
 that such a teirible disaster was threatening the arniy 
 and people of Home, that scarcely a soul was likely to 
 return home in safety. 
 
 1 See 193, v. 
 * See 348. 
 
 2 See 100, note. 
 * 361. 
 
 * Quidam. (See 361, Obs, i.) 
 
 • 339, iv. 
 
 '5 
 
 If 
 
*„j* The ne.rt Rmrise (XLVIII.) /,s on certain inin/.s nt^nr/// 
 a/lirti to PronoiiuH {Honu'tinwH cnllrd Pronominalia), 
 arid is dicidcd into two iiarta, A uikI B. 
 
 EXERC/S/i XLVIII. 
 
 A 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 Idem, alius, alter, ceteri. 
 
 365. Idem. It has been already said (84) that " the 
 same as" is usually expressed in Latin by itlcrn qui, 
 occasionally by idem atque, or (before consonants only) at: 
 (90.) 
 
 Lhm Slim. (|ui semper fui. I am the same as (or that) I liave 
 
 alwiiys been. 
 Eademyos quae, or atqiie, ego sentitis. Your views aie the same 
 
 as mine, 
 
 366. Idem has two idiomatic uses. 
 
 (i.) It joins together two similar ideas in the sense of 
 " also," " at the same time." 
 
 Qnicquid honestum est, idem est utile. Whatever is ri^'lit, is also 
 expedient. 
 It is sometimes repeated : — 
 
 Idem vir fortissiimis, idem orator eloqnentissimvs. Af ovcc a 
 man of the highest cournge and the most eloquent of spoakirs. 
 
 (ii.) It also unites two contrasted statements iis regaids 
 a common subject. 
 
 Accusat me Antonius, idem laudat. "Antonius accuses and at 
 the same tim£, or not the less, or in the same breath, jmiises me." 
 
 367. Alius. To express " different /?vwj., or to," alias 
 ac, atque, is used, (91.) 
 
 Alio ac tu est ingenio. He is of a different disposition to you. 
 So with the adverb alitery so also with paritcr, juxta, etc. 
 
 Alifi'r atque sentit loquitur. His language is difl'crent to liis 
 (real) sentiments, 
 
 •233 
 
 411 
 
 'i 
 
240 
 
 IDEM, Alius, ALTER, CETERI. [Ex. XLVIII. 
 
 I 
 
 368. A/ufs, "other" (of any nunilM'i), is ojuMtscd to 
 a'ter, " otlicr of two," or " si'^oiul" or "oik;" of t\vo, as 
 o)»[M»si'(l to th(* other. 
 
 (\tiixiiluiii iiltor ilomi, alter mil idoi, fdiiKi III sihl jtnidvU. Our 
 
 of (lie coiiHuls won t(l(»ry lit homo, tin ittlnr in war. (312.) 
 hiiitnnii fratrviii n\ivv vim'tiiUH est. Oin oi' tlie two lnotlicrs is 
 
 .Irad. 
 Aiiiiriis est t>ni(/imiii altor iihiii. A frirnd is a sicnnil xM. 
 
 (361, (fhs. ±) 
 hiix minx, altiT, /iliins ivtirceHxermit. One. tiro, several, days 
 
 had passed. 
 
 369. A repeated alius is used in faiir comiiioii con- 
 structions. 
 
 (i.) In a distributive sense, "some . . . some . . . others." 
 
 Turn, alii liommn versus, in Etrnriarii alii, alii in ('tiinjiiiviinii, 
 (Ionium irll<iiii ililnhuvtur. Thereupon they disperse, some 
 towards Rome, some, etc. 
 
 Of course, of two persons, alter . . . alter, or mrux . . . alter, will 
 he u.sed for "one . . . the other," sometimes hie . . . ille. (See 340.) 
 
 370. (ii.) When used as a predicate in separate clauses, 
 a rei)eated (dins marks an essential difference. (92.) 
 
 Aliud est maleilivere, accusare aliud. There is a vast difl'erence 
 
 between revilinji (94) and accusing'. 
 Aliud loquitur, aliud facit. His language is irreconcilable with 
 
 his actions. 
 
 371. (iii.) When (dins is repeated in different atscs 
 in the same clause, it answers to a common use of the 
 Enn-lisli "different," "various." 
 
 Hi omues alius alia ratione rewpuhlieam av:fervnt. All of tliese 
 by different methods promoted the interests of the nation. 
 
 So with adverbs : alii aliunde congreejant ur ; oinnex alius alitor 
 sent ire videmini. "They flock together from various (piarters;'' "all 
 of you, it seems, have different views." 
 
 Ohx. — The singular of the doubled aliiis is generally used in 
 apposition with a j?^«raZ subject. 
 
 Caution. — Avoid using diver sus or varius in this sense. Diverxus 
 is lather "opposite ;" varinx, "varying." 
 
 Diversi fugiunt, is, speaking strictly, "fly in opposite direc- 
 tions." 
 
Ex. XL VI 1 1. J IDEM, ALIUS, ALTER, CETERI. 
 
 241 
 
 (iv.) SoiiH'tiiiies a ropoato«l <i}\iix ((»rol7/'v> jtcrsons nld v) 
 supplies tlie jtliuu' of the reciprocal " encli otlier." (354.) 
 
 Turn oiiiiiiK alius aliuin iittnihitmiir. Tlu'rtMi|tf)n :ill of us lM't,'iin 
 
 to look at t'orJi other. 
 At frutris alter alttTUin wlhnrtdri. . . . lltit the (two) lirotlicrs 
 
 lK'j,'an to ciu'ouraj^t' ^xcli other, etc. 
 
 372. Ceteri is " the rest;" as is reliqu-us, i. 
 
 Reliqiil is opposed to "the ninss," those who (or that whirh) rniuiiu 
 after many have been dechicted. 
 
 Ceteri, "the rest," as contrasU'd with some one or more already 
 named, or incHcated. 
 
 Thus either t'lteri or altir will answer to our "others," "your 
 nei^dil)ours," "fellow-creatures," as opposed to "yourself," 
 
 Qui ceteroa, or alterum, odit, ipxe cm, or ei, oflio I'rit. He who 
 hates his neij^hbours will be hated by them. 
 
 Oha. I.— Ceteri has no singular masculine nominative; in other 
 forms it may be used in the singular, but only with collective imuns ; 
 *'th'r(i limit It ado. 
 
 Ohs. '2. — Note the phrase, nee qui<l(pmi)i iinhin Fortinxi reliijui f('<it 
 rtt.s/ lit strviamun. (AH else is lost,) and F'ate has left us nothing but 
 slavery, (298, h.) 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 A. 
 
 ]. Huiiiaii beings pursue various objects; of tliese 
 Itrotheis, the one devoted him.self to tiie same tastes aiul 
 stii(li<'s as liis ilistinguished fatlier, the other entered 
 })oliti(';d lii'e in (piite early niaiihood. _. Voiir jiiduineiil 
 (91) ill this matter has been (piite dilVereiit to nnne. \\ni 
 might' have shown" yonrselt' a true ])atriot, and lixcd in 
 freedom in a free eountry ; yon ]>referred richer and 
 ])leasnre-^ to the toil and danger whi(di freedom invi.JNcs. 
 .'5. All of* these men in different modes did good .service 
 to the human race; all of them ju'eferred being of use to 
 their neighboiu's to studying tluur own interest. I. We 
 form different aims; sonn^ are devoted to wtaltli, others 
 to pleasure; others place happini'.ss in holding'" otlice,'' in 
 
 ' 196. - 241. 
 
 •■' l^hn-nJ, as also for "toil," "t'langer," " office ;" why? Latin uses 
 ii'>slrin-t ternis mmh less than lMiglis|i, (Sec 174.) 
 
 * 1:97, ' (ieruudive. (389.) 
 
 ■ -I— > 
 
C12 
 
 IDEM, ALIUS, ALTER, CETERl. [Ex. XLVIII. 
 
 
 |)()NV»M', in the administration of the state, otlnTs aLjiiin' 
 ill iiopiilarity, int(M'e.st, inHiienci;. 5. Ilearinj,' this, tin; 
 sohlicrs h('Lj;in to h)(»k- at oacJi other, ami to wctndrr 
 silently what the general wished them to do, and why he 
 was anj,ny with them rather than with himself. (>. Von 
 pay me eomplime.nts in every other (377) word, at tiu^ 
 same; time yon tax me with the foulest treachery. 1 would 
 hav(v' you renuMulxu- that speakin;^ the truth is one tiling, 
 sp<ud\in^ l»leiis;intly anotluM-. 7. The enemy now fhMJ- in 
 op))osite directions; of the fiij^itives the <fr(>ater ])art were 
 slain, the rcist threw down their arms* and were taken'' 
 prisoners to a man. Few asked for quarter, none ohtained 
 it. 8. We, most of us, came to a stand, looking' sihuitly 
 at each other, and wondi^ring which of us would he" the 
 lirst to s|)eak. But Laelius ami I hehl our peace, each 
 waitiiij^^ for the other. 0. After raising^ two armies, they 
 attack the enemies' camp with one, with the other they 
 i;uard tlie city. The former (^/.) returned without success, 
 and a suilden panic attacked the latter; thus in both 
 dircH'tions the campaign was must disastrous. 
 
 ' />i'iilf/u>'=:\a. v,ly, used often in enumeratjons 
 
 ■' Hi-t.(.ric inf. (Seelgr.; "149,1. ' All. aba. (See 16.) 
 
 * Present, 179. '^ 173, iii. and 62. ' Ahl. aba. 
 
EXERCISE XIAniI.-{Contimmi.) 
 
 B 
 
 PRONOUNS Continued. 
 
 Quisque, uterque, singu/i, etc. 
 
 373. Quisque is " cacli," ";iiiy," or "every one," ..I a 
 lar.ut' miinber. It so rar(iii classical prose) resciiililes an 
 nic/iflc (p. 27, /«..) that, it always comes ajhr the word to 
 which it most nearly Ixilon^s. 
 
 Such words are relative, interrogative, and reflexive pro- 
 nouns, superlatives, comparatives, ordinal numerals, and ut. 
 
 It is very raroly used in tlie plunil in pros*-, Imt often sfMixls in tlie 
 sinifuliir in apposition to a pliiial noun. (('[. (ilin.'i ami <ill,i\ 371. 0//\ , 
 and 371, iv.). 
 
 Koniani ilonnttn, rmn sua (piiscpie pranld, trdi iint. 
 
 In the neater, ifnldtfiu; is siiltstantival, tiiKxh/ii, a<ijertival. 
 It is sometimes emphasised by preHxiiit,' /om/.x . (o/z/s (/*//.s(;(/( , " eiuh 
 and every one." 
 
 37^-. With pronouns its use is simple, if its proper place in the 
 sentence is rememliered. 
 
 Mlllti'K, (piem (piisipie riihraf, tritcidnhdiif. The soMic is wonlil 
 
 liMtcOier whomever niiii of them saw. (192. i 
 JS'dii niriini rst sfafihir (|iiid euitpie (lihi((.'i. It is nut for me 
 
 (291, Ohfi. 2) to ijetermine your deht to Kirh. 
 Sumn cniipie trihnito. («ive to iirrti o//< his due. 
 
 Its other uses are nnjre idiomatic. 
 
 375. It is used with superlative (most rarely with positive) ;id- 
 jeetives, almost always in the siiKjnlnr,^ to expre.ss "all,' or "e\erv." 
 
 Iliur optimus- (piiscpie xciitif. These are the views (»f all ij, mil 
 iiii'ii, or, of ircri/ ijoinl iikui. 
 
 Beware oi h(uii(.-< (jiiUtjin-, or, oiitinii <iiiiqiif. 
 
 ' In the iif'ufi')' the plural is occasionally used, f(>rll-<s'nna (p/an/ni' 
 cousi/id tiitis.shiKi xinif : masculine and feminine most r.irdy. 
 
 ■^ This phrase is generally used in a poUtivaL sen.se, := all good patriots, 
 all the " well-disposed." 
 
p 
 
 » 
 
 244 QUISQUE, UTERQUE, SINCrr//^ ETC. [Ex. XLVIII. 
 
 376. (i.) If the superlative is repeated., we have one of the Latin 
 modes of expressing j'l'oportioii. 
 
 Optiniiiiii i/nvh/iie rarissimuni rst. Thing's, or all thinj^s, are 
 rare in proitortioit, to their excelleiiee. 
 
 fii.) The same idea is sometimes expressed by quisque with at 
 and ita. 
 
 Ut ((uisiiue rs^ soUertissinius, it:\ ferme lahnri.'i eat patientissimus. 
 Ill pniportum to a man's skill is, as a nile, his readiness to 
 endure toil. 
 
 (iii.) Sometimes by qiii'^que with quo, co, quanto, tanto, and a 
 comparative. 
 
 Quo (j';isque e^ft sollertior, eo ed lahoris patientior. 
 
 Quo, "in proportion," <y)<a?t^^, "in exact proportion." 
 
 377. Qiimjiie is also joined with ordinal numerals : quinto quoqiie 
 ainio, "every five years;" decimns ipafiqne, "every tenth man;" 
 qii(inis<jnis</iie, "how few" (lit. each, one only of how large a number, 
 — "the thousandth," or "ten-thousandth," that you meet). 
 
 rrimnm. quidqne rideamuH. Let us look at each iu tarn, take 
 
 each (in turn) as first. 
 Priiuo quoque tempore. At the earliest opportunitj' possible. 
 
 It is also joined with at in n frequentative sense. 
 
 L^t cujusfjue .sovv e.rciderat, alacer arma cajiietxit. As each man's 
 lot fell in turn, he took up arms with enthusiasm. (See 192.) 
 
 378. (i.) Uterque is "both," in the sense of " each oftvH)" 
 and denotes two thinos or persons as looked ;ii .scparatc/i/. 
 
 Propter utranicjue caumni. For both reasons, i.e. for each of the two. 
 
 Ambo is "l)otli,"lmt it is used of two individuals as 
 loriiiino oiif ii'Ji(>/c ; " liotli togetlier." 
 
 IJiii ulruimjue y*r(>/>((^ anibobus deliet uti. He who approves of 
 ((((7/ of these (separately) is bound to use them both (totjether). 
 
 S(» (iltir <niibi)rt\ "one or both." 
 
 iji.) I'tiiqne (like iitiin)^ is used with the genitive of proiioun.^^, 
 but iu api)osition with substantives. 
 
 liorum utruiiiqne, "each of these ;" so vestruni utrrque, l)ut filius 
 utir(jiie ; so horum nemo, but nemo pictor. 
 
 (iii.'^ I'feniiie is used iu Latin after interest inter, where we .should 
 use " the two." 
 
 Quantum inti^r rem utramciue iutersit, rides. Vou see the great 
 dilfereiiee between the tivo thiuijs. 
 
Ex. XLVIII.] QC7SQC'/% UTERQCE, SINCril, ETC. 24A 
 
 ,e.s of 
 ler). 
 
 ON NX, 
 
 HI ins 
 
 (iv.) UUrqiu' CAW he used in the plural only where il denotes not 
 two sinjfle things or persons, but each of two jKirfiis or rlnssis 
 alreaily represented by a phiral word. 
 
 Stahdut instrnrti, acie Roinani Sainnitesipie ; jmr ntris(|Ue 
 piiguuhdi studium (each f(>ll the same anhxir for the ti>,dit). 
 
 379. As nfcrfiiic unites two, and = iiiikh et (iltn; so utervls, 
 uterlibet, (Jisjoin them, and=: ////«.< vel dlfrr, "whichever of tlie two 
 you "like," i.e. exciudinjr th? other. (See 369, O/w.) 
 
 Uter is ifener.dly interroj^ative (occasionally a relative) ; it is often 
 lepeated. 
 
 Uter utri plus uonorit, dabito. 1 doul)t which of tiie two injured 
 the other most. 
 
 380. Singuli (as, a) is only used in the plural, and has 
 two main uses. 
 
 (a) A distributive numeral, "one apiece," "one eaih." (See 532.) 
 
 Cum, sinffulis vestimentis excaiit. Let them <ro out each with 
 
 one set of jiarments. 
 Ejusniodi homiwii vie sinjfuli sinifidis saicnlis tinscioifnr. Such 
 
 men come into the world scarcely once in a century {nm in 
 
 each century). 
 
 (h) As opposed to universi, " tlie mass," "all,'' looked on as forminj^ 
 one class, .'iinguli denotes "individuals ;" "one by one." 
 
 Romanos sinjrulos dUvjimns, universos avermrnvr. While we 
 
 feel atfection for individnal Romans, we loathe the nation, 
 
 or " them as a nation." 
 Nee vera universo .'<olum hominnm generl, sed etunn sinj^ndis 
 
 provlnnm eat. Nor is it only mankind in (jitieral (as a whole), 
 
 but the individual that has been cared for. 
 
 381. "A single person," where the .^hufh' is emphatic 
 may be tuni^nl by unus cdiquis : ad ununi ali(piem rn/iunii 
 detnJcrvnt, " ottered the crown to a sini^de person ;' " not a 
 single, "~an empliatic " no one," is 7if unna qiiidon. 
 
 Obs. — Sin'jnlaris is generally used of iinallties, and denotes " rare," 
 " remarkable." 
 
 I 
 \ 
 
 « < 
 I . 
 t 
 
 ( 
 
 \ 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 ould 
 riH-at 
 
.'4(5 
 
 QUISQUE, UTERQUE, SINGULj, ETC. [Ex. XLVIII. 
 
 3 J 
 
 \iv 
 
 t ;■ i * 
 
 Exercinc 48. 
 
 B. 
 
 1. As a society \V(> praise tlu' lujet wiioiii as iiulividiials 
 we iu'<^li'(*(('(l. 2. All true ])atriots and wise men are on 
 (iiir side, and we would lain have those whom we love and 
 aduiii'e liold the same sentiments as oursi^lves. .3. Men 
 ar(^ valued by their countrymen in ])ro[»ortion^ to their 
 pultlic usefulness ; this miUi was at (Uice a brave - soldier 
 and a consummate statesman; lor both reasons therefore 
 he enjoyed the lii<.;hest i)raise and distinction. 4. It is 
 often the case that men are talkative and obstinate in ex- 
 act'* l)ro[)(n'tion to their folly and inexperience. 5. It is 
 a hackneyed sayin<^f that all weak characters'* crave for 
 different things at dilferent times. 6. It was now evident 
 that the enemy intended •'' to attack our cam}> at the first 
 ])ossible opening, but that at the same time they would wait 
 for a favourable oj)portunity. 7.We aie oneby oned(\serting 
 and abaiuloning the man who saved ns all. 8. All good 
 ]>atriots are, 1 believe,^ convinced of this," that it is cjr.ite 
 im})ossible for us to effect anything by hesitation (94, 99), 
 procrastination, and hanging back; so that I feel ^ sure 
 that there is need of haste rather than of deliberation. 
 9. He found a difficulty in persuading his countrymen 
 that'* their enemies and allies weie powerless separately, 
 most powerful in combination. 10. Thereupon all, each 
 in turn, answered his questions ; this done, ^^ the greater 
 ])art besought the senate, appealing ^Mo the whole body 
 ami to individuals, that one or both the consuls should 
 at the earliest opportunity bring them lelief. 
 
 ' May be done in two ways. (See 376, ii. and iii.) 
 
 '' 67, (t. ' 376, iii. 
 
 * " Characters " is of course not to be expressed literally in Latin, 
 it = men. (See 174, end.) ^4,0. 
 
 " 32, h. ' 341. « Mood? (106.) 
 
 » See 122, /^ '" Alil, alis. " Past participle of o/>/w'or, (See 413.) 
 
 % 
 
*^* The five next Exercises {XLIX.-LIII.) vi/' oc on the 
 Gkrund, Gerundive, Supines, and Partic? ;)l€s. 
 
 These, like the infinitive mood (see 94. and note) are all verbal 
 nouns fintr. 5). They are all derived directly t'ntni *he Vtrl) ; hut thry 
 are none of them true verhs, for they ca?in(»t hy L..eniselves make a 
 statement or predication (Intr. 11). But they retain in other respects 
 more or less of the nature of the verb from which they are formed, 
 combined witli that «)f either the substantive or the adlective. 
 
 KXEKCJSK XI./X. 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.' 
 
 Nominative Case. 
 
 Till-: GEiiUNi). 
 
 382. Tilt' Geiund is a verluil .sulistiuitive in -rnhnit, 
 Ibrined from tlie i)it'Seiit teii!?e of the \eib.- 
 
 It has no pUiral, but is declined throuehout the singidar like other 
 neuter substantives in -vin. Its eases are detennined by tiie same 
 rules as those of other substantives, and are often cond)ined with pre- 
 positions : reirnandi stndimn, "the desiie of reijrning ;" \d regnandum 
 iiatiis, ''born to rule," or "a born, ruler." 
 
 383. But it resembles a verb in so far as it is (a) 
 ([ualified by adverbs, rot by adji cti\( s, and is {h) iollowed 
 by tlie same ease as the verb iiom wliieli it is derived: 
 <t(l bene vivciidum, jw?yhh/o liostibiis, orbem fcrnrrvm 
 suhif/endo. 
 
 1 These are names given l)y grammarians to a substantival and an 
 adjectival form of what is often called the jarfii-ijilr in -(/us, sometimes 
 the j'utKre ]i<irt!ri}il(' jxiK-sivf. Their origin and precise nature are much 
 disputed. Whether the (ierund arose out of the (lerundive, or ricf. 
 nrsa, ia a (piestion which lies outside the scope of this wurk ; it will 
 be taken for granted lure that l)y the Gerund is meant the wliolu 
 substantival declension, itirliidini/ tin' noihiiidtirc, of the singular neuter 
 U>rm,/ori(iithi7n, -i, -o ; by the Gerundive the whole adjectival deden- 
 sion, as seen in jaciin-dux, -(Id, -dum (when attached to, or predicated 
 of, a noun), through all cases and genders, and in both nundjers. 
 
 - 'J'he word Gerund is derived from this active sense, as expressing 
 the (iction of the verb (<» ijvroido, (j<rundo), the verltaf/r/r being alieady 
 a] [iro)>riated to the term artire nrhs. Most grammarians lin, t the 
 term (Jeiund to the oblicpie cases; it is perhaps more reasonable to 
 include the nominative. 
 
 •J17 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
If'* 
 
 i 
 
 24S 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVFL 
 
 [Ex. XLIX. 
 
 384. Th»' genmd therefore, like the infinitive mood, conespoiuls 
 to the Kiijflish verbal substantive in -in\f : "for lirliKj well," "by 
 t^imriiiij ihe eiieiny," " by xuhilning the worhl," (see 94) ; soinetiines 
 to the Kii(,'lisli intiiiitive in the form " ^> do," '^ to see," properly itsel*" 
 a f/eniu'lial infinitive. 
 
 !>iit as the Latin infinitive is not used as a substantive in the 
 ^fenitive, dative, or ablative, or with prepositions, its plnce is taken 
 by the ijerund in -udi, -mlo, -ndani. (See Examples in 99.) 
 
 385. In the nomiiative (aiul accusative in ordth obliijim) 
 the two vcihal iioiiiis, tiie infinitive and gerund, exist side 
 by side, but their uses are quite ditlereiit. 
 
 (//) The nominative gerund has laid ((side its ])Ower ^ 
 of L^'overnin;^ au accusative ot" the nearer object, and lias 
 ac«iuired the sense of duty, necessity, obligation. 
 
 (h) Thus ('»n-'7" = runnmir, and we can say, ciirrere inihi jucniuhim 
 i'st, ruaniiiij is delij^htful to me ; but we do not use furnndaiu in the 
 same sense ; for niihi currenduiu ed {lit. there is a rinining for me), is 
 only used in the sense of " I mnat run.''^ 
 
 386. P>ut this use of the iioininKtirc of tlie ucrund is 
 oidy found witli intransitive verbs, or transitive verl»s 
 used absolutely. (Intr. 40.) 
 
 We cannot say, hostes nohh rinrcmhim est, we nuist conquer the 
 <'?i('/« 7, but nuist use the gerundive, fioxti's . . . vincendi sunt ; but we 
 can say. rinrcndviti est, we nuist win the day ; and we can si\y hi)stihvs 
 P'lrcenduin est, we ought to spare the enemy, or occasione nteiiduni 
 fait, the opportunity .should have been used, for parco and ut or are 
 intransitioe verbs. (See 228, OhA.) 
 
 387. The person on wlioni the <Uity lies is in the dative. 
 
 P>ut with verbs wliich are combined with a dutire ns tlieir object, 
 the ablative with ((, <ib, should be substituted to avoid ambiguity : 
 civihus a te consnIcHdum est, you must consult the interests of your 
 countrymen ; tlhi woidd leave the mcunintf doubtful ; but, ,s«o cuique 
 judicio iiUudaia est, each should follow his own juil<fment. 
 
 Ohs. — The <i;erund therefore, thoujfh properly active, has sometimes 
 the construction of passive verbs. 
 
 ' There are still traces of this construction in classical Latin : — 
 Aeternas poenas /// »i<irt< fniv luliim est — LrcHE'rrrs. 
 Quam (v'iam) itohis i/Koifuc iiiijirdiciidiini .sfV. — CicEKo. 
 
 - The reader may be referred to a very ''nteresting discussion of the 
 whole (juestion in Mr. Koby's preface to the second volume of his 
 l.'il/ii a ram nut r. 
 
Ex. XLIX.] 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 240 
 
 388. By the aid of the gerund and tlie verb mm, a 
 ^vll()h^ conjugation can he formed to express the idea of 
 what is, VMS, will he, etc., a duty or necessity. 
 
 Mill!, tlhi, ci, etc., srrihrndnm est, fuit, erit. I, yon, lio, etc., 
 ninat write, ithonlil have written, xhall or irill have to write. 
 So also — Ne uohix inoriendnm sit. To prevent our having to die. 
 Or — Dirit Hihi seribendum esse, fui.s.se. He said that he had, had had, 
 to write. 
 i)hx. — This is the connnonest of all modes of expressinjf duty, oblijra- 
 tion, etc., coninioiier even than oportet, dcbeo, or necesse est. (See 
 198, iii.) 
 
 Thk Gkkundive. 
 
 389. Wlien we wish to use a transitive veih vit/i ita 
 r/inrt ohji'd, i:q)/rssc(/, we cannot use the gerunii, l)ut must 
 liave recourse to the gerundive. 
 
 Tlie gerundive is a verbal adjective in -iirh/fi, and as siu'h is 
 used in agreement with (Intr. 9)substantives and jjronouns. 
 
 Though probably not originally passive, it has assumed a i)assive 
 meaning; tlie object of the transitive verb will therefore, where a 
 duty is asserted, be in the nominative, and the gerundive be used as 
 a pri'd init ive adjictivr. 
 
 The person on whom the <luty falls will still be in the dctfirr. 
 Iloate.t tihi timendi crant. You ouqht to harr feared the enemy. 
 
 390. \n the nominative (and nccusiitive of orafio 
 ohh'ii/ta), tlie gerundive, like the gerund, denotes nfccf^-^ihi 
 or dutji ; in other cases it, like the gerund, denotes merely 
 the action of the irrt), the Erinlish verl)al in -ini/. 
 
 Nam. Amii'i fifii rou-^DhnnU sunt. You (un/hf to console 
 
 your friends. 
 Got. Tni cinisiildiidi raiim. For the f-.iike of (•(ni.-inliiii/ you. 
 
 391. The use of the gerundive is confined to transitive 
 
 verbs, inc^luding deponents. 
 
 N.H. — We catinot .say fit jiarcitiilns cms, "you ought to have b.rn 
 spared, ' hut we can say ijldrin voiimiiiiiiid-A rsl. 
 
 \Yith V('rl>s which govern iiiiy case but the accu.sativc. 
 
 the gerund must be used, not the gerundive. 
 
 Tibi jxunndnm^ en;/', tibi p /•■!*/'((/( //(// rnn<a. 
 
 ' Such exceptional use^^ as haec nfi nihi, fritt ntln, jmdi uilit, etc., sunt, 
 are to be accounted for by the fact that in older Latin the.se verlis wtMc 
 occasionally tiansitive, i.f. were used with the accusative ; it is luttrr 
 to write. Iiis rebus utindum "st. 
 
 I 
 I 
 t < 
 
 « 
 
 « : 
 
 •* ■ 
 
 t 
 
2r.o 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. [Ex. XLIX. 
 
 ()/>.s".— The difference will be shown by the double use of ronxvlo. 
 Just as a>7/.s7//o ('iiinni, means, "I ask Cnius for advice," rnnsnlo Caio, 
 '' I consult the inten sts of Caius," so we must say — 
 
 (''iiius coyisvh'VfhxH eat. Caius nuist be consulted. 
 I5ut^ — Caio rohsiihiKlwrn eat. The interests of ( 'aius must be ('(.nsidted. 
 
 So also tibi vrt'dimlwrn fnif ; hacc rrcdentia si/?//, for, "you ouj^lit 
 to have been believed (trusted);" "these (statements) ouf^ht to be 
 believed." (See 248.) 
 
 Coni]»iin? tlio iiiijK'i'.sonal use of tlic i)fissive voice of 
 intransitive^ veibs. (217.) 
 
 392. As witli the gerund, a wliole conjuj^ation may be 
 formed by tlie (/cruudive and verb sum. 
 
 Hoxff.^ turn debellandi fuere. The enemy ahonlH hare heev con- 
 quered then. 
 
 Dixit rem perflciendam fuisse. He said that the matter shoidd 
 have ( = ouifht to have) been finished. 
 
 393. Tlie i>enindive is sometimes used as an nttrilv/irr 
 adjective with a sense of nfcessity,fihicss, etc., e\en in tlie 
 ohliqne cases. 
 
 Cum haiid irridendo hoste pigimri. I have fouglit with 
 no (hspaihle foe (no fit object for ridicule). 
 
 394. Caution. — Neither gerund nor gerundive denotes 
 possibility; our "is to be" requires caution, as it may 
 mean either possibility or dnfy. 
 
 "Your son was not to be persuaded" is not Jilio fuo 
 non fuit persuadendum ( = your son should not have been 
 persuaded), but, _^/?o Iko 'pcrsnadrri non potuit. 
 
 lint sometimes with a neyatire word it aj>pronches the 
 idea of possil)i]ity. 
 
 Cuhiruitits vix toleranda. A scarcely eitdimihle calamity. 
 
 
 ..» .. 
 
Ex. XLIX.] 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 251 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 The Gerund and Gerundive to be used exclusively for " ought," 
 
 " should," etc. 
 
 1. He ou<»lit voluntarily to have endured exile, or else 
 died on the field of battle, or done anything^ rather than 
 this 2. Ought we not to return thanks to men to whom 
 we are under an obligation ? .3. The soldiers should have 
 been ordered- to eease I'lom slaugliter, and to slay no un- 
 armed person ; women at least and cliildren ought to have 
 been sj)ared, to say nothing^ of the sick and wounded. 4. 1 
 do not object to your exposing your own person to danger, 
 but you ought in the piesent emergency to be carelul for 
 your soldiers' safety. 5. This is what one so sensible'* 
 as yourself should have done, and not left tliat undone. 
 6. Seeing^ that he must either retreat, or come into colli- 
 sion on the morrow with a far from contemptible enemy, 
 he decided on forming line and fighting at once. 7. Nor 
 should we listen to men (72) who tell us that we ought to bt' 
 angry with a friend who leluses^ to flatter and fawn upon 
 us. 8. Your son was unwise enough" not to be persuaded 
 to confess that the matter should or could be forgotten. 
 9. We shall all have to die one day: when^ and how 
 eacli will have to meet the common and universal doom, 
 is beyond'' tiie power of the wisest of mankind to foresee 
 or to foretell. 10. It seems that you have one and all 
 coiiie to me in^° tlie king's jtalace from two motives, partly 
 for the sake of consulting me, partly to clear yourselves,*^ 
 you must therefore .seize the o])|)(»vtunity, and })lead your 
 cause while tlie king is present {ahJ. ahs.). 
 
 
 ' 359. - Do in two ways, /.f'. use l)«)tli /«/>f'o and /w/^rro. (See 120.) 
 •* Tse i)e iliram (lOd, note); it is used .-ilinost as an adverb, i.e. any 
 case may be used by the side of the iliratn (364, Ex. note '). 
 
 •* 224," </i>.'<. 2. * •'* Qiiuvi. videret. (See 429.) 
 
 " Mood? (See 77.) 
 
 ' Tvini "your son, being most unwise, was not," etc. (224, oIim. 1.) 
 
 " 'Sot <iiiiim. (vSee 157, ii.) 
 
 ' " Not even the wisest of mankind can," etc. 
 
 "• See 315. " See 393, O/w. I. 
 
" i- 
 
 
 i 4 
 
 li-i 
 
 lw»| 
 
 
 nl 
 
 EXERCISE E 
 GERUND AND GRRUHDIVR-Continued. 
 
 Oblique Cases. 
 
 395. In other cases than the nominative (iiiid accusa- 
 tive of <mitio obliqtui) neither tlie Gerund nor (with tew 
 exceptions) the Geri'.idive conveys any sense of duty, 
 MccHsitj/, etc. 
 
 Tliey merely denote the general action of the verb, and 
 correspond to tlie infinitive mood used as a noun, and to 
 tlie English verbal substantive in -int/. (See 384, 390, 
 and 99!) 
 
 When thus used, the gerund retains its prop(>r verbal 
 jtower of f^overnini;' an accusative (385) ; we can say 
 " patres vestros rit/rn(/i," of se(Mn_n' your fathers; "vera 
 judicando^' by forminu- u right decision; but oftener than 
 not, and especially in the acciimticc and dative, it gives 
 place to the gerundive. Thus — 
 
 Ace. Ad Gallos hisequendos is far moie common than 
 ad Gallos hisequcndmn, which is scarcely ever 
 used. 
 
 J}((f. Bello (jerendo is always used, rather than, helium 
 
 (larendo. 
 Ahl. Ej)is(<>/ii scrdx'iidh is connuoiier than f'pisfohim 
 
 srrdit'ndo. 
 (h'u. Kp'idi)lin^. .'icriheitdiie is commoner than (•j)i,'itoliiin. 
 
 scrihi'ildl. 
 
 Of course with intransitive verbs tlu^ gerund is invari- 
 ably used. (391.) 
 
 Ad siKriirmidum ?/?/.srns. parrriido fi'iiiinh, hostihns persua- 
 de iid'i, etc., never ad niiseros siieeiirreialos, pareendis 
 fe minis, etc. So, miseris mieeurritur, not tniseri siiccur- 
 ruidar, etc. 
 
 2^2 
 
Ex. L. 
 
 GFA'rxn AND CERUXDIVE. 
 
 25.T 
 
 396. Tlie accusative <»i' l>otli the gerund ami ^cniiidiv*', 
 is used with (ul, as a siibstitutu lor a scparati! final via use, 
 with at, (p(o, etc. (See 100.) 
 
 " To," " ill order to," " lor the purpose of," is eoustantly 
 thus expressed ; soiuetiines also ))}• tlie genitive with (((usd 
 or (/rat id. 
 
 Genui<L — A<1 ronsiilfinidmu, or cdiisiilftnidi <'ausii, liiir 
 
 rcniitnis. We have oonu! here to i/ilihntifc. 
 
 U I' run I life. — Ad pdccni peti'inlaiii, or, jiaris jntciiditc caiisa 
 
 ////.s'.s/ siuHiis. We have be»*n sent fur the purpos*^ of 
 asking f<»r peace. 
 
 Sometimes we titid the participle in -rus : conxultaturi (uhiiiiinx, 
 we are here to deliberate. 
 
 Its use with other prepositions is rare : inter ludeiidum, ob judi- 
 canduin: " in the midst of play," " tor tlie sake of givin;^f a verdict.'' 
 
 397. Tlie dative of both forms is used after certain verbs 
 antl adjectives such as j)7'a('Jicnr, praci'ssc, dare o/nrdin, 
 impar, etc., and also in the sense of aim or pirrpoac. 
 
 Gerund. — Legendo dabat opcram. He was ^riving his iittention 
 
 to readintf. 
 Gerundive. — Bello gerendo me praefecv^ti.t. You made me presifle 
 
 over the carrying on the war. 
 Ger'indive.— Comitia consulibus creandis. The meeting for the 
 
 election of consuls. 
 
 No;,ft also, solvendo nan esse, not to be able to pay (one's debts . 
 The gerundive is almost invariably preferred with transitive verbs. 
 
 398. The use of the ablative is mainly instriimenial aud 
 causal. 
 
 With transitive verbs the gerundive \>i more common 
 (except with neuter pronouns) than the gerund; alicpiid 
 atp'ndo (by doing soimiJiing)) but, bello trahcndo rinccs (b\' 
 prolonging the war). 
 
 Obs. — It is also ocojisionally used with the ])reposition in ; but it is 
 not used with pro and sine to represent our "instead of," "witliout,'' 
 followed by the verbal substantive ; you cannot say pro sefjvendo, 
 sine sequcndo for " instead of," or " without following." (See 332. 8.) 
 
 399. The genitive of both gerund and gerundive is used 
 in most of the senses of tlie genitive ; with transitive verbs 
 the latter is to be preferred, unless ambiguity, or a recurrejict: 
 
 
 \i 
 
254 
 
 GERUND AND GFRUXP/rE. 
 
 [Ex. L. 
 
 t 
 
 of tlie same sound, would arise. Thus discendi ali([uid 
 {alicHjuH would be ambiguous); vera judicnndi ; pat res 
 vestros vidaidi camd (to avoid /v.stroruni ridcndxnum). 
 
 Ohii. I. — The genitive niwjuUir of llie jjcrundivi' is nseil with nui^ 
 t'ven when it denotes a number of persons: .sw/i piirj^andi vama 
 alminf, thoy arc here to clear thiniiidves, so iwdri, no.stri. 
 
 Ohn. 2. —Notice such phrases as rcspirnndi spatliim,ii breathini; 
 space ; nai colligetuli fdcalt w, an opportunity ot raliyin;; ; fxyit 
 /'K'ientlac, aiirtor et princeps fui, I was the siiir^iestor of, and the U-ader 
 in rnakini^ peace. The idiom hoc cniiHc.rv t luUw liherfdtu est, this tends 
 to the preservation of freedom, has been noticed above. (292, Ohs.) 
 
 400. The accusative of the gerundive is used predica- 
 tively (239) in a Jinal sense iEi combination with certain 
 verbs : do, I give, euro, I take care of, susripio, 1 undertake, 
 etc. 
 
 Ohsides Aednis custodiendos tradit. He hands over the 
 
 hostages to the Aedui, to keep in guard. 
 Afjros eis habitandos dil. He gave them lands to 
 
 dwell in. 
 Caesar pontem faciendum curavit. Cai.sar had a bridge 
 made. 
 
 It thus retains the idea of obligation, and often answers 
 to the English infinitive {to keep, etc.), itself originally 
 a dative of aim or purpose. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 1. These men came, it is said, to our camp for the 
 purpose of praising themselves^ and accusing you (pL); 
 they are now intent on pacifying you, and clearing them- 
 selves of a most serious indictment. 2. The matter must 
 on no account be postponed ; you must on this very day 
 come to a decision, as to whether it tends to the destruc- 
 tion or to the preservation of the constitution. 3. Such 
 gentleness and clemency did he show in the vc v hour 
 of triumph, that it may be questioned whether lu; won 
 greater - popularity by pardoning his enemies or by 
 relieving his friends, 4. There can be uo question that 
 
 1 399, Obs. 1, 
 
 Flux, (See 294.) 
 
 fr 
 
tLX. L.. 
 
 GF.Kr.VD AXn GERUXDTVF.. 
 
 255 
 
 in [)oiiit' of consuUiii;^ his country's interests rath- '' tlian 
 liis own, of sa(M'ifi('in;^' his own conviMiicnce (y// ) to tliat'-* 
 of liis fri'-nds, of kccjMn^" in cJu'ck alikf his temper iin<l 
 liis t(»n;4iu% this vouiilj niiui fir outdid \\W the old. 5. All 
 tlw; spoil wiiich the def«*ndant liad obtained by sacking' 
 t«'niples. by contiscatirM^ the j)rop('rty of individuals, and 
 by levying' contributions on su many communities, he 
 secretly haiP carried out of the country. (>. It was by 
 venturin^^f on -omethinif, h«' said, and by pressing' on, not 
 by dt'lav and iian^iuLj back, nor by much^ discussion and 
 little action, that they had effected what they had hithcirto 
 achieved." 7. It was I who su^*;ested the following' up 
 the enemy (.sv'm//.), in order to leave ^ him no breathinj^ 
 space, no" opj)ortunity of rallying;, or of ascertaining the 
 nature'* or number of his assailants. 
 
 ' Simply aV)l. of limitation, or reference. (274.) 
 
 " Use quDiiiHe.. (376.) 
 
 * "Much," "little," with gerund. (See 63.) 
 
 " Repeat the same verb; mood? (vSee 77.) 
 
 " ITse tht pa.s8ive. (216.) 
 
 '' I'sc uUii.< after ne, as more emphatic than qui, 
 
 " See 174. 
 
 » See 348. 
 
 * C'uro. (400.) 
 
 (See 367, 358.) 
 
 
EXERCISE I.I. 
 
 Ml:' 
 
 THE SUPINES. 
 
 401. TIk; s()-('iill(l Supines in -um and -u are tlie 
 
 aociisaliv(i and al)lativ(! ca.s«vs of a verbal substantive of 
 
 the fdurtli di'ch'rision. 
 
 This siilistiiiitivc is t'(»nm'(| in the siuuc nuiiuu'r jis the pjMsivt' 
 piirticiple {HKilltits, furtiis, I'tc), and tlu' iiiiiiio sufn'iii' is a Liifiu 
 traiisliitioii of the (Jrcck vnTms (on his hack), wfiich, Ity ii metaphor 
 iKdiowcd iVoiii wnstU'is, was I'aiicifully applied to the passivi' as 
 (listiiit,MiislRMl tViMii the active voice. Neither, however, of the supines 
 lias a really passive si;j;tiiHcati()n. 
 
 402. Till! Supine in -um is tised only in coniltination 
 with v*'rbs of motion. It (sxpresscs the pnr})!)se, ilesioii, 
 or fin.((l cm/sc, of the motion. It is thus included among 
 the vai'ions Latin modes of e.\j)ri!ssin,u puipose or design 
 mentioned in 100. 
 
 It so far keeps its verhal nature as to govern the case 
 of the verb from which it is formed. 
 
 Pacem iios tlagitatinn irtienmt (230). They have come 
 
 to impoituno us for peace. 
 ral)ulatinii oiiisif )tiUifcs. He sent his soldiers out to 
 
 forage, or "a foraging" (a = an, on). 
 
 Ob.'i. — This supine is one of the few instances of viotioti towdnh 
 heinjf expressed by the accusative without a preposition. (See 236.) 
 
 403. It is used with ire (to go) oftener than with any other verb, 
 and forms with this (sometimes a kind of additional tense, thouj^h 
 rarely, if ever, in Caesar or (Mtero : "I am on the way to," "I set 
 about." lb thus <,'ives the action an intensive force, sometimes almost 
 equal to our "^'oes out of his way to." 
 
 Video te patris tid injiin'ds ultum ire. I observe that you are 
 on the 7C(iif to aventje the wrongs done t ) your father. 
 
 ForttUKtft .s-»a.s- perditum it. He is on fhe way to ruin his own 
 fortunes. 
 
 Sibi nocitum it. He is on the way to damage himself. 
 
 Ofts.— Its use with the impersonal passive of iri to supply tiie place 
 of the absent passive infinitive future has been noticed (193, iv.). 
 
 Injnrlds patriii idtuni iri dixit. He said that the wrongs done 
 
 to his father wuidd Ije avenijed. 
 
 i'6C 
 
Ex. LI.] 
 
 THE sen MS. 
 
 '2r.7 
 
 % 
 
 404. Tin- Supine in u is tli*' ablative of u similiir vnhiil 
 siihslaiitivc, It is ill liut iiii ;il>liiti\«' ol I iiiiihilii>ii (21A). 
 It is mostly ((Mirnit'd to I'oriiis flciivrii t'loiii Ncihs ol" 
 speaking and ot" tlic senses, siu li as il'n I n , im mm'ulti , ainHtu, 
 risH., etc., l)Ut includes /W*//' and //"//'. 
 
 It is (»tily \\>vi\ witli adjectives iiioNtly siuli ;is rxpirss illjlirnllii nml 
 oiHi\ niilihilllii (i>id till n n r-o \ iiinl :i lew substantives rt'»i'iiililiiiy 
 jHlj«'('tiv('s, siicli iiM /'(M, tiifiiK, xii hiM, aiiii tlif verb fiiiilit. 
 
 IMtliciU' ( s/ tiiclu ijiKiiitii xinnis in mlio. it is hurd li> •>(»// Ik nv 
 
 liiitfd wf iiic. 
 Ncfji.^ I st (lictii full III Si nut till III ni'ixi I'll III fiiiKHi'. It la mii'iili'ijii 
 
 to siiii that >ia'li an t)l(l ayu wa.s wrt'tched. 
 
 Note that the fii/iiiw in -n (hn's not, as that ir> uni, ^^t\v^•n a case; 
 but it may, as in thrsc two «'xain])h's, liavt- t'iilur an intorro^alive 
 clause 160 , or an iiiHiiitivc dcpiiKit lit ii|miii it. 
 
 It may 1>«' c<im|);in d with tliu (iiet'k. intinitivf active xuAov tfifli', 
 or the Kntflish "fair '<; .sir.'' 
 
 JC.i'iirisc, .51. 
 
 1. Aniha^'^adors cann^ I'njni tli»' Athenians to I'liilip 
 lit Olynlhns' to coniplain cil ^vl•()nJ;s done to tlieir t'ountiy- 
 inen. 2. He started io his t'athur at Marseilles IVoni his 
 uncle at Narhoiiuc to see the «>aines, l»iit w ilhin the last - 
 lew days \\a^ hilled, either hy an assassin, or by Ini^ands, 
 whihv' on his journey, .'i. \)n you (/</.) remain within the 
 cani|) in oiver to lake i'otal and rest and all else that you 
 re(juire; let u«^, .\ lio are less exhausted uith tiuhtin^ - tor 
 did we n'>i .urivi: M'esh and untouched immediately after 
 the cont> I { — '.-o - iit to int food and foiaue. 4. AVe have 
 coi:w^ t( depreraie your (y/.) iiii;^er, and to entreat for 
 peac'- \\i: o^\T.ai\y ho})e that we shall ohtain \\\\;\\ {pi.) 
 we seek t'oi -». lie sent ainbtissadors to the senate to 
 eoiiL'iatulate iJone' on her \ictory. 0. It sounds in- 
 credible how repeatedly and how urgentl\ i have warned"' 
 you to lace no reliance in that niaii, 7. it is not easy 
 to say whether this man nliould be spared, and be^ sent 
 away with his cninpanioiis, or whether he should at once 
 be either slain (►r cast into jaisun. 
 
 ^ For this and the " itf^ " in tin- Mfxt Hentence, see 318. 
 
 - See 326, i)t).s. ' Kithi r ,tinii (set; 180), or jiresent partieiph- (410). 
 
 -• Wliy not Jioiiiii ^ (See 319,) 
 
 •'■Mood? (St e 16ft, 166.) " ///st. (See 355, 0?/.s. 1.) 
 
 i !• 
 
 I 
 
 % 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
|H.t 
 Is! 
 
 'I' 
 
 i 
 
 '. i 
 
 » t 
 
 n 
 
 ! 
 I 
 
 I! 
 
 * 
 
 a ij 
 
 ii 
 
 EXERCISE L/I. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 General Remarks. 
 
 405. Participles are verbal udjeclives, or rallicr verbs 
 used as adjectives.^ 
 
 Hence their name, participia, as sharini^iii {iHirticljriri) the nature 
 of two parts of speech. They (Utter from the Gerundive as they m;iy 
 <f()vern all cases precisely as finite verbs, an<l also as represent injf 
 more distinctly tcnae and voici' : but they are inflected as adjectives, 
 and, as adjectives, are both attached to, and, as in c(jmpuund tenses. 
 predicated of, substantives and pronouns. (See Intr. 8. ) 
 
 Hes abstrusa ac recondita (attriV>ute). A deep and mysterious 
 
 question. 
 Mufti occisi ^ant (predicate). Many were slain. 
 
 406. (i.) But their most characteristic use is tliat in 
 which they stand in apposition to the subject or object of a 
 verb, and form as in English, but to a still Ljreater extent, 
 a substitute for a subordinate clause, either adjectival or 
 adverbial. (Intr. 81, 82.) Thus— 
 
 Caesar liaee veritus. Caesar fearing (= who, or as he, 
 
 feared) this, 
 Haee seribens i/iterjjellatiis sini>. I was interru})ted irliile- 
 
 I was writiui; this. 
 Urbem oppugnaturus eoiisfiCtt. He halted irh( a ~ he was 
 
 on the point of assaulting the city. 
 Nobiles, Iniperk) sua jaindia repuguantes, una jnyicfio 
 
 oppressit. He crushed in a single Itattle the nt)])les, 
 
 who fuid long been c<»ntesting his sovereignty. 
 
 * The a'ition or state which the verb in its finite form {i.i-. when used 
 as a true verb) fircdicui'x, is looked on as a quality embodied in, and 
 attached by lanj^uage, or attrilnttnl, to some person or thing. " Caesar 
 seeing this, etc.," — we add to (»ur general idea of Caesar the special 
 quality of uttiiaj t/iis. 
 
 * In English the tem}»oral conjunctions n-htn, vh'de, can apjKireuthf 
 be closely connected with i)articii)U's, " vhen coming," "while 
 writing. " These are really elliptical exprest ions, "when (he was) a 
 (ou) cowi/h;/," "while (he was) r» irritititj ;" ancl the apparent /wj/7/Vv///f^ 
 was originally a verbal noun. In Latin such comltinations as ''dum 
 imheuA, *'<p(nm v^-rtCfw/'ftre of c(turse ftbgglutely iaaduusaiblo. 
 
 »8 
 
Ex. LIL] 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 2ri0 
 
 
 (ii.) Sometimes tho Latin particij)!*) represents not iisnIi- 
 onlintffr, hut a vo-ordinaU, clause. (Intr. 7 4, 7").) 
 
 Milif^'in arroptuin tnihcJxil. He si-iuul the soliher, din/ 
 
 l)egan to (h-ag him otf. (See 15.) 
 Pafn'm sccutus ad Jlisjxiniitin nacujarU. He Jnl/uircl liis 
 father, (///'/ sailed to Spain. 
 
 407. Some ])articiples are us(!d precisely as adjectives, 
 and as such admit of comparative and superlative decrees. 
 
 (i.) 8iu'h |)iist piirtii'lples as doduii, mnritns, pKnituHj i nrtus, etc., 
 are constantly so used. 
 
 I ii.) So also such |)n'st'iit })artU'i|)k's as ahsti in >•■•<, iiiiKui.f, ujijxfi ii.<, 
 jidens,Jiorens,U(M'('n>i, etc. ; these when transitive are otten j(»in((l uitli 
 the u'enitivc in place of tiie accusative : patriae ((tif(iifi.-^-<iin ii,<t. i See 302. i 
 
 (iii.) Some even, as adjectives, admit the negative pretix ///-, which 
 is never joined with the verb ; inuoo'us, iiupofi iis, 'insi.j[neiis, inilomifii.<, 
 iniddus, intactus. 
 
 (^fis. — At the same time, thou^di this use of the participle is conunon 
 in hoth lan^uai.'es, we must l)e cautious in translatini,' Kn;^dish jxirtl- 
 t'ipial ailjn'tlirs literally : "a thrtrittuhnj letter,'' is " litmii minaces ;" 
 "a morihff speech," '^ornfio tlehilis ;" "a sniiliiHj landscape," " as;y,y> 
 fn,i amoernis ;" '■'■ hurniiuj lieat,'' "ar.s7».s fervidus."' 
 
 408. Oihers, like adjectives, an^ used exactly as sub- 
 stantives: ((dc/rsniis, iiijuns, scnatus-con,sii//iiiii , iuiiidiihitiis, 
 ji/'tfft'ffiis, etc. (See 51.) 
 
 Such Avv^ laxtitutKiii, "fixed course,'' "piinciple" 'sin^r.), "in. 
 
 stitutions" (pi.); octiiy "measures,"' " proceedin«:s ;' /((c^i, 
 
 "deeds ;" iiit*rita (in), "services" (towards' ; jmrdfuin, dclir- 
 
 tunt, " ^\ ron^-dointr," "crime;" ihi' Jut nrt partiriiilt is only 
 
 so used in the word/*(/(tr*n/i (-(», pi. . 
 
 Ofts. — It has already heeii said that many of these still retain their 
 
 true participial, t.c irrlal, construction : inidta al) eo [irmrlnn' Jiuia. 
 
 , See 55.) Hut we may also say iiurita ejus, Jncta, acta, ilirtd, 
 
 prtiict j,t,i^ tllirtd, ejus, etc. 
 
 409. There are in Latin three ))articiples, exclusiNc ol 
 the gerundive, wliich is not here included iimong the parti- 
 ciples as it cannot o<)vern a case. 
 
 Arihr verhs have two: iJ'iccn.^. (pres. ). dirtmuis (fut.). 
 Dcjioii'id Verhs have three : i>c(//ir!ts {\)iv>^.), scciiliis (past), 
 
 scciifiirvs (fut.). 
 I'dssicc verhs have one : I)'n-fi(s (past). 
 
 0/(.<!,— Tliia last has occiwiuuuUy u luiddk' signiticutioiA, (See 233 
 and 413,; 
 
260 
 
 PARI ICII'I.ES. 
 
 [Ex. LII. 
 
 Hi 
 
 I* 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 410. I'liis piirti('i))lt' is always active. When used as 
 a jiaitiriplf (not as a iin'ic adjcctivo) iL (leiioU's uncompleted 
 action contemporaneous with tliat of the veil> to wliose 
 suhjcel or ohject it is in a|»j»osit,ion. 
 
 llntc ilir'it niorit-ns. He sai<l this irkUc (Iijiikj. 
 
 J'luriiii'id (leceih'iis* Ii/kkJiiiii /irdftcnrcfii.s stim. /// flu' act 
 
 (if (oi", /rJiili') retujiiiiig home from my i>ro\ince, 1 
 
 saih'd past Khod's. 
 ^1(1 iiinrfcin einiti nhihuii farfiis skid. I met liim us lie ims 
 
 iroinir to (h-ath. 
 
 Ohs. 'I'lius jit'tcr " to licjir,"' and "* to soc," tlic prt-sciit icirticiplo is 
 usi'tl wlit'H the actual picst nee of the lu-ait'i' or si'cr is emphasised. 
 
 I heard yon say. Andiri tc dieenteiii.- 
 
 He saw tlie house hhi/e. Jnhs Haniniantes ridit. 
 
 411. Hence (especially in the nomiiiative) its nieaninj^ 
 is tar mere limited than that of the Knolish presmt 
 pai'ticiple, which is often used vv///#<(7//, as regards even time, 
 iind ivl(/(/i/ to rejtresent other conjunctions than those 
 of mere time. Thus — - 
 
 '''' Mount iii(j {i.e. after niountinir) his horse he ^allojied off to the 
 eanii) ;" ^'' <irrirliiij (i.,. havinir arrived) in Italy lie caii^dit a 
 fevtr;" ^^hvarliKj this (i.e. in ectnsecjnence of hearniL'';, he 
 ordered an inquiry;" "' throiri/nj themselves at his feet (i.e. 
 havinir thrown) they made a long speech." 
 
 In all tliese cases the Latin present ])articiple would he entiiely 
 wrong ; {([Ukiii ctntsn nihns would mean that he galloped to thee; ip 
 while /// the mi of mounting; i)i Itnliavt, })err('iii<')iit,{\int the fr r 
 was caught at tin' nioiiimt of ntirhiiKj Italy ; liihc (indiai.'i, that iiie 
 inquiry was ordered »7r(7t; he was listening to a story ; .se jirojirii iitis, 
 that they made a long speech nhilst in the very act of falling prostrate ; 
 ■ — all of whii'h would of course be wrong or al>surd. 
 
 In the iirst three instaiu'es (iitnin shou! 1 he used with the ])lu])erfect 
 subjunctive : quum iquiiin conscendissct ; quum pervenisset ; (juuni 
 hiU'C .aidivisset {or his auditis) ; and in the last the passive, or rather 
 viiddh', past participle, — ad pedes ejva j)rojecti. 
 
 * Decederc is the technical word for to rrluru homt- from holding the 
 government of a pntvince. 
 
 * Sometimes, aiuiiri te, cum diceres. (Sec 429.) 
 
Ex. LII.] 
 
 PARTlClPl.t-S. 
 
 •2»U 
 
 412. So too, wluMi the EtiLjlish jin'scnt puiliciplt', wiiilc 
 ('XprcssiiiL;- time contemporaneous with a verb in the past, 
 iiii{)li(^s also ii (-(nisr, qiiKin witli tlic imperfect subjunctive 
 
 should Itc used. 
 
 ''(';i»'sar, hi>/>iii'i sDivM to will tlu' day, UmI out liis iin'ii," slioiild 
 
 e, f'.NSf/-, (|iiiiin .•,•(■ /*/•(•/•/ rictiiriini (Xsv s|ii'rai't't, >■//(».< » 
 
 ihi.rit 
 
 not 
 
 ('cN.sv//- sjx'raiis, t'tc. 
 
 'riioiiu'li this nik' sliould 1)0 strictly obsci vod, it is not witlioiit 
 exceptions, csiu'ciully in ( 'acsar. 
 
 Oh.-i. Tilt' iircscnt ))ai'tici|tlc soniclinics rcpicscjits a cn/zc-xs/c, oi' 
 <//(>(<;/// -clause. (Intr. .")!>, //.) 
 
 Hi coiiscntit'ntcs, ri rl>i.'<, or in,'(iliiil Is^ illnrrr/HDii n.'i. Tlniih/li \vt' 
 ;im-('c irliilf a>:jivcin;4) in sulist mce, wediHcr in words. 
 
 413. On the other hand, the past participles of deponent and 
 semi-deponent verbs [ntr. 44, siu-h as virttntf, rdtnii, <»//.-;*/.•.•, ronfisn.':, 
 iHlli.oi.-i, (/sf/x, pn> jn.'<.-<ii.< advancini;', (irrraatus (expressinn- disgust at , 
 i)idi'jiiiifn.-< (t'eelinji indiiin it ion at ', and those of passive veri>s us"d in 
 a middli' ov Vi fit .1 irr .MMise, as ro/(c.'/'s//s I'tiirnin^f^ pnijirtiiA throw in^- 
 himself;, Jnuitl prorol ittn^ (rdlin;^' on the j^n'onnd', are us(>d much in 
 the*^anio sense as the En^lisli participles '"fearing," " tiiinkinif," 
 "ventui'ini:,'' " tiiistiiiu'," " advancinif.'' 
 
 "Caesar/r /;•//(•/ this" should he I'i tiler, C wAiirhnrc veritus, or, ( '<i,fiiir 
 quuni //(/(■(• tinieret ; "'tKDilii'j to his friends" should be either, (puiin 
 (((/ s(/os se convertis.-et, or, <((l snos conversus. 
 
 414. I>iit the oblii[iie cases, especially the dative atid 
 genitive, are used with oi-eater ffeedoui, atid often taki^ 
 the ]»"iace of an adji'cti\al (or adx'ei'hi.il) clause, or of a 
 stthstautive. (See 73.) 
 
 rrnnii (or rnii) diccf.tihus /Wc/A' ri'dttm. I nill always 
 
 yiclil /" ///".N" irh., speak the truth ; or, to ineii if they 
 
 s[)('ak the truth. 
 i*u_nii:nitiniii rliiiimri' p' /ifrrifit.^. Alaniieil hy the shouts 
 
 of the CDitihiifdiifs, or ot" those irliu were, tight iui:;. 
 X^'srii) (jiii'iti prupi' adstaiiteiii iiifrrnx/dri. 1 (piestioiuMl 
 
 s<Hnt' one //■//() was standing hy. 
 
 (}}>.■<. Flven here a relative clause is etpially coninion, and in the 
 nominative, "men doing this," or "those who do this," shoidil lie 
 transhited hv »/(((' hoc fur i nut ; /(oc facientes /(((/(/(f/(/»r would nu'an, 
 not " (/(,'// "-.'m) do this are praised," l>ut 'W//«v are praisc^d '/•////. il<tni<i 
 this," antl ii hoi' farii'utt:<, in imitation of "those doing this" {ol ravra 
 ■n-ounvTf,-^ is not Lit in at all. (Sei' 346.) 
 

 
 !|t 
 
 if 
 
 262 
 
 PARTlClPr.E.'i. 
 
 [Ex. LII. 
 
 415. These two oblifpic cases of tlie present ]).'irti('i])le 
 very often take tli(! jilace of an English noun. 
 
 (a.) Iiitcrrojfjinti wihi ir.-i}in)i<lit. lie n'l.liod to my qin'stlon. 
 So Ifmr int('rro<,Mnti hoc rti^jinnilit. To this <iui>^ti<iii lie iiiiide 
 this (iiisin r. 
 
 {!>.) fiUiijcntiiim lurrhiiac, tears of ntouruiinj. ( Jnitiihintiuiii 
 cliniiiin .•<, >i]ii)[\\s u( r<)ii(/ratul<(fi(m. 
 
 (t\) Notice also, rm; epm morientis, liis thjiiuj voice or words; 
 adhortantis vrrha, his vharinij words, or words of oironmtii- 
 iiii lit. 
 
 Caution. — Beware of sueh Latin as liictus lacrlindi', voces doloris, etc. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 416. Ti:e past participle l)eloii<;s entii'ely, exee]it in (Jr- 
 poumit verl»s, to tlie passive voice. We caniir)L sny nilinitiix, 
 "liiiviiit^r arrived/' /'///f/vVy/.s, " liavin.t; lieard," liiit must ns<^, 
 (pi mil (r'('e Elementary IJnles, 14.) 
 
 The use of this participle to form tlie compound tenses of the 
 passive is ohviors ; its u.-e with lialiii) [lioc. coj^nitum litilhoj has been 
 pointed out (188) ; also the phrases, fihi considtum ro/o, "J wish your 
 interests consulte<l" (240, Ohs.), and, properato, or consulto, ojikk mf, 
 " there is need of liaste or deliberation." (286.) 
 
 417. (i.") The passive participle combined with a substantive often 
 answers to an English verbal or abstract noun, connected with another 
 noun l>y the preposition of, and used to denote a fact in the past. 
 
 PoAt urbem eonditam. After the fonndat ion o/ the city. 
 Violati foederis poinas dabis. You shall be puni.shed for the 
 
 vi(dafion, or bieach, of the treaty. 
 Nuntiata cliidis. The urns o/ the disaster. 
 
 (ii.) Oceasionally tlie gerundive is nsed in a similar way 
 as almost tlie et[iiiv.ilent of a present passive partieiple. 
 
 Qui violandi.s looatis infcrfucn'. Those who took part in 
 tlie (iiitnuji' on tlir amhassa<lors. 
 
 Ohs. — We have here (and in 415) another instance of 
 the comparative poverty of Latin in substantives, es])ecially 
 in those of ;iT) i/h^f /•((<'/ and rfrnrrnli^^iuii nature, (See 
 54, \1V) 
 
 ' i 
 
£::. MI.l 
 
 /• [Riiviri IS. 
 
 '■y^^ 
 
 Future Participles. 
 
 418. Till' future participle ill //'sis iilwuys active; I'm' 
 its \aiiiiiis iii('iiiiiiiL;s licsidMS tliosc of lucre j'lit in it v, si'(, 
 14, c. It Idiiiis (witli ,s7////) n, siilistitr.tt' for llic future 
 subjunctive (114) aii<l for lie future infinitive (193, ii' ) 
 Tlic t'ullow iiio' cxamplt's will recall some of its more 
 idiomatic uses. 
 
 ('f.) //'<(• ,s-( iiiHiiKiiii fiit'tiirmii fnisso imjal. He s;iys lie n-milil 
 
 lU'Vcr }i(iri (lain tliis. il93, v.) 
 (/>.) Sii iiijiin III fiiliiniiii i'uisso (// iirha ntpiri Inr rif/ininl it. Wv 
 
 rv\)\\vd tlint the city hoiiIiI Ui'Vi'V hurr hun t;iki'ii. 
 (r.) I'i'ri'or iic (loiuiini iiinniiitnii sis n(litiii"s. I fcir lliat \o\\ 
 
 arc never iJi.^iiiinl io return linnie. '139.) 
 ((/.) Pinvii locMtunis iliiiiisif. He sent them a\\;iy, as tiicy W'l'c 
 
 on fill' ji'iiiif n/" s|>eakiM<,f turtlier. 
 («'.) Adm iivriti xiint nt aritui farili traditnri fnerint. Tliey wi're 
 
 so terrified that tliey >n>uUl hni-f easily (h'liveieil ii|i their 
 
 amis. (118.) 
 (/.) ///(■ niansurus fui. Here I infDiilnl^ or "■".-• jinjiiirfil, to 
 
 remain. 
 (y.) Fief, quod futuruni est. That which /.^• to lii\ will he. 
 
 Kn 
 
 rnsr ;)'J. 
 
 The asterisk* means that, the j'artii'iph' is tn take tlie ])hMce of tlie 
 
 rilidiri' or coitjiiiii'tnni. 
 
 1. Are ^ve ^ then to spare those Avho* resi.st (us), and 
 hurl darts at us ( 2. Arc we to spare these men even 
 thounh* they resist us? 8. I heard you a>k more than 
 fuice whetliei' we mci'c uoinn' to return to- my home, or to 
 ^Lio to your father ill J.ondon. 4. 1 heard the whoh' city 
 riui^witli the shouts of joy and triiim]»li. Ti. iJet urninn' 
 ill his old aue from India, he dieil in his own house; 
 his sous and urandsoiis stood round his siek-hed, ^a/ed 
 sadly (61) «»n his dyin^' eounteiianee. and retained in their 
 memories his ])ro])hetic words. 0. I'o my complaint that 
 he had broken his word, he said that he had done nothing 
 of the kind, hut was ready to jiay the jieiialty of having; 
 eausetl* such a loss. 7. I saw the soldiers hrandishinii^ 
 
 ' Cenuid with ';■;/. (See 338.) 
 
 "^ 316, ill. * 'it the laiising .'l' . 
 
 ■' 416. r. 
 . . (417.) 
 
284 
 
 pARriciri.EK. 
 
 [Ex. Lll. 
 
 th(nr wotipoiis throughout tlio city; 1 li id lh<^ voices 
 of joy and triuiiiph ; I r(H,M)gnisc(l the clear profd's of the 
 aiiiiouuceiuent of a victory. 8. Tiirowiiin' tliemselves at 
 tlie kind's* fet^t, they soh'iinily a|)|ieal(Ml to liim not to 
 j^ive over to certain (lestruction men who* were not uuilty 
 uj) to that time, and wlio* were likely to he of tht! utmost 
 value, to the nati(jn one day. 0. KniharkiiiLf at Xajiles, and 
 feariiiL,' for the safety of himself and his family,- he took 
 refuge with my father at .\rai-seilles. 10. His words alik(^ 
 of i)raise (415, '') and of rel)uk(^ were drowned in shouts of 
 indi'inatiou, and in groan . and outeri(^s of disa|>])roval. 
 
 11. 1 )isti'usting my own senses of hearing, I asked sonuv' 
 one who* was standing nearer you whether I had heard 
 aright; Ik; answered my <|uestion in the atlirmiiiive.'* 
 
 12. Are you not ashamed"' and sorry'' for the abandon- 
 ment of your undertaking, the des(Ution of your friend, 
 and the, violation of \'our word I 
 
 * See 267. 
 < Sue 162, 
 
 Sill, 349, UU. 
 
 ^ ScM'io 'iilis, 362. 
 " 202. 
 
Exr.NCisi: I.J 1 1. 
 
 THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Onk of lIk! coiniiioiitist uses of the Lai in iJiirticiplc is 
 til at ('ill led the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 419. A participle and substantive (or pronoun) joincil 
 together in the ablative, and standing Ity thcinselvcs, ot'ifii 
 in a Latin sentence form a substitute for a subordinate 
 clause, (.'itcsfr, acceptis litteris, projici.^i'i coiixtihdt. ./r- 
 <v'/;//.s liffi/'is is here the exact eipiivalent of such a ilausc 
 as qinnii lit f ma a(rej)is.srt. 
 
 '420. (i.) This ablative absohite is represented in Enj^Misli, sumic- 
 'inies by a participle in apposition, " receiving" or " havinif received ;" 
 sometimes by such phrases as '' ot)," "after,"' "in consetjuence of," 
 "in spite of," " witliout," " instead of," followed by a verbal siibstan- 
 tive,.as that in -Inrj ; sometimes bv a >uborilinate clause intrnduced by 
 "after that," "when," " while," "" l)ecause," " althouiih," "if," .'tc, 
 sometimes by a co-ordinate clause (406, ii.) ; very rarely by the 
 almost obsolete English absolute case, once a dative, now a nominative : 
 "this said," "this done." 
 
 Thus — (ii.) ///.s- aaditis, havinif heard, or, hearing' this; t( jivae- 
 seiiti'., in your presence; mc iaritu, against my will; Jioc cottijnrto 
 srdere, in coiiseqmace of discoverintj this crime ; (>■ rcpKiitKdifi, in 
 .s'v/7(' of, in the teeth of, your lesistance ; illo matuiiti-, ax hiinj as he 
 remains ; Antonio 0[Jijrc.sso, if Antony is crushed ; his (fictis ohiit, 
 this said, he went off; patefacta jMvfa ernpit, he had the gate 
 opened and sallied forth. 
 
 421. The ablative, th srefore, is occasionally that of mere 
 time, as rcffminte Tibcrio, " in the reiij;n of Tiberius," but 
 much oftener of atlendiint clirHinstunirs and cu/isf. 
 
 Ow'uhj; to the a1)sence of a past partici])le activ*; in 
 Latin, the use of this idiom, as of tlie qunrn (dause, is 
 exceedingly frequent. 
 
 It is a good rule never to translate it into English by an absolute 
 case, or by a clause beginiiiug with " when." 
 
 26ft 
 
 
2«i(; 
 
 /•//A" . / /.'/. .•/ ri I '!■: A />S( )!.(' IF.. 
 
 |Ex. LIII. 
 
 m- 
 
 i 
 
 r. . 
 
 11 
 
 If 
 
 I 
 
 422. Cautions. — Tlu; ablative absolute, liowevcr, is not 
 iilwavs .'uliiiissildc. 
 
 ('/.) It can of couisc only Ih' used in tlic passive willi tnnisitin: 
 vcrlts ('416'. ^'(Mi cannot, say ('iirxarr f-nrniito fur "('acsar liaviii;; 
 airivcd,'' av ('ihsiirr pcrsii <!.■<() for "( 'acsar liavin;^' Itccn pcrsnadcd,'' 
 Itiit ('iiiKiir i|iiiini iK'-rirtiissd, (\iisiirl ipniin jiirKiitisiini cssi'l. 
 
 (/*. ) It must never lie nsed if the |htsoM denoted l»y its substantive 
 (ir proiioiiii is eitliei' the siiltjcct or ohjcct of the jtriiu-ipal verl) of the 
 chnise, 
 
 "(.■at'.sar havinj; taken the oinini massacred thiin" is not captis 
 hostibus ( '/(,>•(//• (MX triiciilitvif, but CiKsur captos liostes trnriihirlf. 
 ■' As r was readintf this I saw you " is not, nie hair hij^ente tr riili, 
 lint hihi' h';Lfens ^' ridi. 
 
 -+23. I'c.l It iiitil not b(> used when a ])ast particijile active is 
 upjilied by a <leponent \erb. 
 flaec, locutuH is as j^ond Latin as liis ilirtia. 
 
 (*(.) It is run I II used to re])resent niitre than a substantive and 
 verb, or verb with its accusative : June iiic ilicoifi ; but for so loii^f a 
 condnnalion as ('mstd-c n niilifHiHS iinjicrdtdrc sdiutato, a 'y/n/ ///clause 
 should be substituted. 
 
 (/'.) Its use with a future participle is very rare in the best jn-o.-o'. 
 The phrase ( 'tu'sarc nntiiro is from Horace. 
 
 424. Suini'tiiiies (as the \vy\\ sum has no iiiirtiri[»h') 
 tlie ])Ia('e of tht' ])ai'ticipk^ is taken l>y an adjective or 
 substantive, wliicli is joined in a ])i'eclicative sense with 
 anoth-r snb.^tantive or pronoun. 
 
 Me invito, against uiy will ; ^ duce, with you for leader (under 
 your leadersh'i* (333)); ///c anctore, at my suij;,festion ; salvis 
 /((///»//>•, without violatinj^ the law ; honestis y//(//>/7///,s-, if the 
 jiid^'»-s are honourable men. 
 
 Otm. — Sometisiies the participle is u.sed alone with a dependent clause. 
 
 Missis f///i nxjaixvt. Havint: sent people to ask. 
 
 Coinperto einn lU'ijnitiirc. Havin<r ascertained that he was ill. 
 
 425. Witli a negative the p.bhitive absolute ol'teii 
 I'ejiresents the Kn^lish "without" joined to tlie verbal 
 noun. (See 398, Ohs.) Tlius— 
 
 Tt non ailjur<(iiti', irithoat your assistance ; nullo e.rjnctato dnce, 
 trithont waitinif for any guide; ?r u\f\ct(i, trltJunit success; 
 nullo rtspondinte, W'fhont receivinij an answer from any one ; 
 caiisd [nciMjiiifd, ivithuut hearing the case ; iutJldd cdKsu cw/t- 
 demnatur^ he is condemned mthmt pleading his cause, 
 
Ex. LIII.I 
 
 THE Afil.ATlVE APSOl.UTE. 
 
 2()7 
 
 426. Tlio proptu' pliicc for tlic ablative a])S(»liit(' is early 
 in, or ([uite at tlui lM'L,'iiniiii^M»r, a sentence, (hitr. KM.) 
 It is only w'len extremely empliatic that it conies last. 
 
 
 y.H. I. " And "' eiu'liiseti in braikt-ts is to be oinitU'il ainl a parti- 
 cipial ctiiistriiction subslitiUcd. (406, ii.) 
 '1. The asterisk* marks tiie use of the participle as in Ex. h'l. 
 
 1. Thereupon, alter sahitin^f the; enemies' oei.cral, he 
 turned to his companions, (and) .setting- spurs to his horse, 
 rode ]»ast the ranks of the (lernians \vitliout either waiting 
 lor his stall' or receiviuL; an answer' from anv one. 2. It 
 was at my sUL;;i;estion, to j)revent your voice and strength 
 failiuLj you, that you sus])ended for a while the speech 
 which* you had be<nui. 3 For mvself, fearin<' that oloiy 
 and the pursuit of honour had hut little effect with you, 
 I abandoned such topics- (and) tried to work upon your 
 feelings by a different method. 4. All this he »lid at the 
 instigation of your br(jther, without either receiving or 
 ho[>ing for any reward, f). it was most fortunate for me 
 that, lighting^ as I did against your wishes and advice, 
 not to say in spite of your opi)ositioii and resistance, 1 
 trained the victory without the loss of a single "^ soldier, 
 and with few wounded. ('». After attacking the camp for 
 several hours, the Ijarbariims wer^' so exiiausted by the 
 heat and with thirst and fatigue, that having lost mon; 
 than iL'OO men they abandoncMl'"' the attem[>t and returned'' 
 home without success. 7. It was at your suggestion, not 
 only against my will, but in spite of my opposition, resist- 
 ance, and appeals to heaven and earth, that your cou.itry- 
 men were })ersuaded to condemn a whole })eo})le without 
 a liearing. 8. This I am persuaded of, that you will not 
 ])ass this hiw without violating the constituti(tn. \). As 
 I was thus s})eaking, the news of the enemies' arrival, and 
 the handing in of a despatch fiom the king, filled my 
 
 ^ = or any one replying. 
 
 " Present participle. (412, 
 
 * Use differ^jut tensee, (Seo 113.) 
 
 Oh>i. ) 
 
 -' Siinplv isin. (54, ) 
 ^ ,See 381, 
 
it 
 
 L»fi8 
 
 / 7/ A' .•/ /.' /. .4 TJ VE A HSO A (J I A . 
 
 [Ex. LIII. 
 
 aiuiic.iicL'' witli iiiiiiL,'ltMl mge and jKinic ; but .soiiu'.-jiKiijin;^^ 
 t.liiit liaslc, was lUH'-cssary, seized their arms (and) hastened 
 ((» Ljo down to meet the !'()(;. 10. So Ioiiil,' as you survive 
 and jire unharnitid, I leid sure tliat my ehihh'cn will never 
 lie oi|ilians. 11. Under your leadership I was jdcpariMl 
 (418,,/) to tak(! u|> arms, hut h«'arin,i;'' that you were, ill, 
 I nssolved to remain hehind at home! without'* taking part 
 ill that rontest. 
 
 ' 'Tilt! niiiuls {ttnhiii) (tf my aiulieiu-e." (Scl- 17, (>/w.) 
 
 * Vnii rnnif (/III. (360, iii.) •' 424, O/ts. 
 
 * Use 'juul not to," nc'iio: (332. S.) 
 
 
 ill 
 
 
 If, 
 
 
EXERCISE LIV. 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 427. Temporal cliiusus Jin- lliosi; which (lualiiy llio slute- 
 iiiciiL iiiiidc hv the verl) in the main chiusf, in some 
 ]taiti(jular as to previous, contemporaneous, "i subsequent 
 time. Jlu'V are tlicretore ^/^/ivWmif/ clauses. (See Intr. ^'1.) 
 
 Tiiey are intnxhiced in Latin and Eii<^lish l)y various 
 temporal conjunctions, such as those frivol in Intr. .')!), r, 
 and ot lie. s. 
 
 r>/>.<.- Tlieir place i.s often taken by the participial cnnstrnctidn.s 
 jiiven in tlie last two exercises, e.ij. haec IochIuh, his didis are exactly 
 ecpiivalent to liaec qiuuu di.risset. 
 
 428. Of those conjunctions wliich answer to th«^ 
 English " when," all hut quvm (ctnn) are as a rule used 
 with the indicative mood, precisely as in English. 
 
 Thus in past time — 
 
 Quae •poxtquam (jxhslca t/ixnu), iihi, .siiniil (iftjuc,^ audivit (or 
 audiverut), al/tif. " When lie heard (or liad heard) this 
 he. took his (lei)arturt'," or '^ no sooner had he heard this 
 fhaii," etc. 
 
 Ohii. 1. — 'J'liis use ()f(o/(/('r(7 (aor.) in place of the more strictly correct 
 aid/itrai is even nuHe common in Latin than in English. 
 
 So also with present and future time — (Jin/c sii/w/ iit(jiie 
 audit, ahit ; quae posfqiiarn, iibi, qiioties, slniid alqne, audi- 
 erit (190, i.) ahihit. 
 
 Obs. 2. — Thou<ih the indicative is the rule with these conjunctions, 
 the subjunctive must Ije used if the principal verh is in oratlo obliqua : 
 dicunt eu7n, postquam, haec audiverit, abiisse. (77.) 
 
 ' Siinul uc only before consonants. 
 
 mt 
 
 \-\ 
 
_jr 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1^128 12.5 
 
 ■^ yi 12.2 
 
 S 1^ IIIIIM 
 
 1.8 
 
 !|:-25 11.4 111.6 
 
 
 z. 
 
 V] 
 
 ^ 
 
 /2 
 
 m 
 
 %;^V 
 
 > 
 
 '^:? 
 
 >' 
 
 *V">-^ 
 
 
 /: 
 
 y 
 
 f 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. M580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 I 
 

 w 
 
 6^ 
 
if ^ 
 
 S 
 
 
 li 
 
 f:(» 
 
 TEMPORAL CI. A VSES. 
 
 [Ex. LIV. 
 
 Quum. 
 
 •42f). Tlu' cxroption to tlic nilc is <jii,im, or r?n/J, the 
 (•(Miiiiioncst of all tli('S(? conjunctions. With the imperfect 
 or pluparfect tenses ijmnn is joined with the subjunctive. 
 
 Ciir.^iir, tjuinii liiirc vidci't't, nii/ih's iitijifimn /(imf jussif. 
 
 Ciiesjil', seci!!!^ lliir,, ;;r(len'(l liis tl'()o|is to cjiai ;!,'«'. 
 Lrtjiili, <|Uiiiii /i<nr iioii jiiip't rasseiit, tlnnnnu rriHrriiiif. 
 
 The jiniltiissiidors haviiij^ failed {m' on failing) to ohtaiii 
 
 this, returned home. 
 
 Tlie rt'as(»n of this is tliiit, whilt? tlie etlier conjunetioiis f xprpss tli»> 
 ri'iatioii uf lime, iiiiil time •mly, qmim introdnct's the circumstances 
 wliicli led up to, nr accompanied, the fact statrd l»y tlu' principal vcrlt. 
 These circumstiuices are looked on as not merely prccedin}:, or accoiu- 
 patiyii);i, Imt as atfectiiiij and arroiintiw/ for the fact, like our own 
 participial const ruction : ''^ aeeiixj that 1 could be of no use, I went 
 away." 
 
 Now whenever (pium ('cojijunction formed from >jiti) implies in any 
 way nniAf tor roiitfiitt) the tendency is to use the siihjiuiclive, precisely 
 as with the relative itself (sec 501). Hence in describing pi.s/ events 
 Hitum is hibitually joined with the subjiuictive mood, as the previous 
 circumstance ini'-oduced is looked on as more or less intluencinj.;, or 
 even caiisiiii;, tlie main event which followed it, even when such 
 causal relation is scarcely discernible ; hence such a sentence as— 
 
 Quum //( porfii;}} venisset, vita «'./(Vs,s'i7. He di»d <ift>'r reachin*j 
 the harbour. 
 
 430. Sometimes (pn(7)i expresses more clearly still tlie 
 idea of cause. 
 
 QiKir (|uahi iiii »' naheant, or liaheront. Srehifj fhaf, or 
 (i^ the ease stands, or stood, thus ; flik hciin/ fhe caxe. 
 
 In tliis purelv causal sense it is n'oiilarlv joined with 
 the sulijunttivc mootl in all tenses. 
 
 431. Sometir.u^s also qimm, without laying aside the 
 idea of time, answers almost to "although," and points 
 a contrast, /.''. is used as almost a roinrfmiir conjunct ion. 
 (Intr. r>i», //.) It is then also joined with the subjunctive. 
 
 (.^>uum lihfr cs.-.y posset, ni'rvire nialitit. At a time when, or 
 n't'io't'ih, lie m'^lit liave Iteeii free, lie preferred to be a slive. 
 
 t,)iiiim ill ■! !■!■ d'licier, ciinti. uit. At a time when, or nlt'ioin/h, 
 lie nu.;lit to havi' spoKi n, he li"Id his peace. 
 
Ex. LIV. 
 
 rEMPOR.M. C[ ACSl-.S. 
 
 271 
 
 ^yA.s. — This is an obvious iMotU; of turning' tli«! Knulisli 
 "instead of" witli tin; vcrhal iinun in -///;/ (s«'o. 398): 
 " Instead of Immiji; free," " instead of speak i lit,'." 
 
 It can, lioNvever, only l»e ust'd wliero the iieul,.ct of a 
 dKfi/ m' opiuuiiiiiifii is ini|»lied, ((therwise we niav use ((dnt 
 nun . . . Hi, or nu/L lauiu nun . . . sal. (See 124.) 
 
 Quum rt'//// f/ic Iiuiuatii'c. 
 
 432. Qiiiini however is frequently used with tlie indica- 
 tive. Thus, if simply temporal, it is regularly used with 
 the indicative of \.\\i.t pre sent ov /nfiirc tenses. 
 
 Quum in portuin dico, in urhrm dico. "When I say into 
 the harbour, I .say into the city; nr, In saying into the 
 harbour, I say into the city. 
 
 l^K'UHin lues (|uuni venerit (190, i.) salrr,. '/ <//>>•. You 
 shall pay the j»onalty when the day of payment amns. 
 
 (tim. — 8o also Jhrtiii sunt <unii, or ilecimuti hir mf ainnm, (jiuim 
 hacc focis. You have ban, doin^' this (181) for tlic l;ist ten yciir.s. 
 
 433. It is used also with the indieative even of past 
 tinui in certain cases. 
 
 {>() \Vhen two clauses mark strictly conti iiijnu'iniiunH 
 events. This is often impressed on tiie leader l.v the 
 presence ot a tuni in the prin(;i[>al clause. 
 
 Quum tu ibi eras, tuni >';/<> i/oini I'la/n. At the time, or 
 at the moment, when you were there, I was at home. 
 
 As the cause must come before tlie etti'i-t, the j)resence (A'tnm ex- 
 cludes from the qnum uiiy notion of (•(»».>«/ circumstances, ami fixes 
 it down to a purely temporal meanniji,'. 
 
 434. (/') In a frequentative sense, where a number of 
 rej)eated acts are d(*scriln'd, fpn//n in the sense of" wlien- 
 cv(n'," "as often as," is joined with the indicativi-. 
 
 If the principal verb is in past time, iikuiic (•»//() i.s used with Ihc^ 
 pluperfect; if in present time, with the perfect. 
 
 Cum ro.S(j»i viderat, ^o>^ rer «.•.>. arliitrahalur 184. ll'lnmnr 
 
 lie saw the rose in bk'om year aftii year , lie jiiil;4t<l that it 
 
 was st)riii^'-time. 
 Cum cut villdiii veni, hoc ipsam nihil wjere me delectat. .J.-.' i>ffi n 
 
 as I come to my country-house, this mere doin;.; nothinj,' (94t) 
 
 hag a chiirm for inc, 
 
r/'.A/n ) A\'i /. ('/ A( 'SF.s. 
 
 [Ex. LIV. 
 
 (>/;.s. — The same t-onstnu'tion is used witli .si quando, uhi, ut ipiis- 
 «/»n, ;ui(l the nhitire qui, ijiiinniqiie. 
 
 Ut <|uis(|ue hi'c venerut, hiifc ]<)({ucbatiir. li'himnr ;iriy one 
 
 viinn' here, lie vniild use this hin^^uaj^e. 
 C^tiKS .•('.ssd ;•<; videnit, verbin eastij^ahiit. M'hoiinrtr he xaw hanj^- 
 
 iii^ l»iick he wade, a point of reliukiiij^. 
 
 lint in liivv often, in Tacitus re^uhirly, the sultjutictive is used, in 
 acrordiime with the Greek use of the optative. 
 
 Jd fi'flalin tibi dixisset, hnxtam iniitiittehiit. As soou as (in i rnij 
 C(isi) the lierahl liad uttered this, lie would lauuch a si>ear, etv. 
 
 N.H. — Qnotirs is only used where the idea of '' iirnj tiuu' that " is 
 stroiit^ly emphasised. 
 
 435. (c) The indiLiitive is also ii.setl wlieic, 1>y an iu- 
 vertml t'on.stiuctioii, what wouUl otherwise l»e the prineijKil 
 assertion is stated in a .subonlinate elause introduced 
 by (juiim. 
 
 Jam rrr ajqwh'hat, quiini Ifunnilml ex ItUwrnis niovit.* 
 Sprinji; was already approaching, when Hannibal left 
 his Avinter (juarters. 
 
 This sentence would stanil with the siime sense almost n.ore 
 naturally— 
 
 Vere jam appetente IJannibal ex hiberniii vioi'it. 
 
 The indicative is natural, for quiun here = "and suddenly,'' "and 
 at once," and may be compared with the co-ordinaiiny; use of qiti. 
 (See 78.) 
 
 Krercise 54. 
 
 The asteri.sk * means that one of the various constructions of qiinni is 
 to be used. Where " and " is in brackets use the participial 
 construction (406, ii.). 
 
 1. This* being the case, he was reluctant to leave the 
 city, and openly refused,- in the governor's i»resenee, to 
 do so. '2. As* I >vas wearied with n»v iournev, I deter- 
 mined (45) on staying at home the whole day and doing 
 nothing. 3. No sooner was he niade aware, by the hoisting 
 of a ilag from the summit of the citadel, that the advanced 
 guard of the enemy was a])])roaching, than, tal ' 
 taL'e^ of the darkness* of the nioht, he causec 
 
 !«' 
 
 * A military term : crnttra must be supi)Hed. 
 » See 136. ^ Vtor (413.) < 
 
 night and darkness. 
 
Ex. LIV.] 
 
 TEMPOKA I. CI. A I \Si:S. 
 
 mi 
 
 be, tlirown open (aiitl) sallied out ])olilly into their midst. 
 4. No sooner had he heard of the landiii'' of the enemies' 
 forces, tlian, instead of runainin^ «nii('t]y at home, lie 
 determined on taking' up arms and doini; his utmost' to 
 n jH'l tiie invasion, f). Seein<;* tiiat his prayers ami 
 entreaties wv.v*' of no avail with the kini;, he hroii^ht Jiis 
 speech to an end ; no sooner was he {qui) silent, than the 
 door was o})ened (and) two soldiers were introduced each - 
 with a sword. 6. At the moment when * the (Miemy was 
 entering the yates of vour crushed and ruined citv, not 
 one of you so much as heaved a <j;roan ; when * even worse 
 than this {pi.) befalls you, who wiiP pity you ? you will 
 bewail, I fear, your* destiny in vain. 7. When(>ver* he 
 heard anythin'2 of this kind, he would instantlv sav that 
 the story was invented by some nei^rhbour. S. Whom- 
 ever he saw applauding; the conqueror he would blanu\ 
 and exhort not to couL^'ratulate their country's enemies. 
 !>. For the last five years the enemy has been-'' sweeping 
 in trium))h through the whole of Italy, slauj.i;hterin«; our 
 arnues, destioyiULf our stronnholds, setting lire to our 
 towns, (hu'ast at inn and ravauini^ our fields, shaking the 
 alleu;ianc(! of our allies, when* su«ldenly the aspect of 
 allaiis is chani,fed, (iind) he sends ambassadors, and jtre- 
 tends lo sis^h for })eace, tranr^uillity, and friendshii) with^' 
 our nation. 
 
 ' See 332. f), 7. 
 « Lste. (338.) 
 
 ' Vshy not (iuis(itie ? (378.) 
 " 432,' Ob.s. 
 
 ' 309. 
 
 * (jieuitive. 
 
 (288.) 
 
EXERCISE LV. 
 
 
 |!i 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 TEMPORAL Cl^h'JSES ^Continued. 
 Dum, donee, priusquam, etc. 
 
 436. TIk! otluT li;iniM)riil coiijuMctioiis will cause little 
 ♦lilliculty, if th(^ rcisisirks (tii Tenses are carefully read, 
 es[)eci;illy those in 190. 
 
 The j^'eneral rule is that the indicative is used unless 
 (") the clause falls under oratio obliqua (77), or (h) some 
 other idea than that of time is introduced. Thus — 
 
 437. Dum, as also ilnnrc, (jHtnmfln, quoad in tiie sense 
 of " while," "as lou*,^ as," where they connect tou'elher two 
 jteriods of time of cquid iew/f.h, are usetl with the indicative 
 in various tenses. 
 
 y/ff/vr /cr/, dum licuit. I did this as long as I was per- 
 mitted. 
 
 1'iirf I jus lufuwria, dum erit htu'c cirifits. His memory 
 will hve as long as this country exists. 
 
 (>!>.•<. — (Jniiiiiiliii implies ii lonij period; doner generallv in )»r<>so 
 "iinlil,"<)r " up to ///<' lnKf monunt tliat ;" (piniKl also "to tlie Ijist 
 inomt'nt that," Imt not limited to time: qiKnut potiii, "to the utmost 
 extent of my power" = tponitum in mefuit. (332. 5.) 
 
 438. i)iit uj/irn duni,^ " while," denotes a longer period, 
 during part of which sonietliing ehse has happeneil, it is 
 joined with the present indicative (historic) even when past 
 time is r(»ferred to (see 180), and even in or/'fio ohliqua. 
 
 Allutiuu est jn'ueddforcs, «lum latius vagantur, ah Iiosfihus 
 iutiri':'j)t<>< fiiissr. News was l)rought t hat the plunderers, 
 while they urrc wandering too far, ha<l heen cut off l)y 
 the enemy. 
 
 ' "\">'^hilo" is constantly used in Eni^lish M'ithout any idea of ^wr, 
 simply to place two statenu-nts side hy side, generally M'ith the idea of 
 contrast, "wiiilc you liatr him, we love him." J)nni is never used in 
 this sense in Latin : we nuist write either, tn «[uidem rwm otti^ti, nos vero 
 amamus ; or sim|)ly, In inni oilinti, nos tinunniis. (See also 406, note".) 
 •j:4 
 
■Jipl^l 
 
 Ex. LV.] 
 
 TEMPORAL CLArsES. 
 
 r7.» 
 
 ii 
 
 439. Wlicn (hni\ is iiscil for "soloiiir as," in tlio sense (»f 
 "it," " provided tliat," it invariiildy takes llu; subjunctive, 
 and witli ne^iutivo clauses is joined with ne} 
 
 rniidiif i[i'ihn\ diini no ?/(w interiM'lIent. Let tlu-ni coiiio 
 tlien, provided tliey «l«ni't intornipt us. 
 
 440. When <hnii, </i>nrr, tjiannf mean "until," their 
 mood is deteiiniuetl hy llie rule in 436. H n<ttliin^' luore 
 thiiu time is indicated tiu'y take the indicative (except in 
 oral to ohliqiin). 
 
 7l/^n»^ ///V, duni ^7/(M"o<lieio, rodiho, (</• ^'/v// jedeo. Jteniaiu 
 
 here till I return. (182 and 190.) 
 /// si'iicfn fii'il (juoad ("/• donee) sniufiis dinnssus est. Ihi 
 
 was (as we should sr.y) in tlie House, till tlie monient 
 
 when it was adjourno(l, 
 
 441. r>ut if some further idea of r.rpn-fdfiiin, piirposr, or 
 mifr/ii/i;/ is introduced, the subjunctive is usimI, as tlie, 
 moo«l ])roper to final clauses. 
 
 Niiin, t'.rjh'cfdfis duni fi'sfiiiiiiniiiin di< at ? Ai'e yoii waitint,' 
 till he gives his evidenco I i.e. iri/k a nnr of h« aiing 
 him. 
 
 Tims — JjjKiiii(iioii(l(ix ft mini in ntrjioii' nliiinif, (|iin.id n mint ml mii. 
 est r/c/ssc JlimtfioK. Kpamiixunlas letaiiit'tl tlu' s|)r;ir in his IhmIv, 
 till it was r('|Mirtc(l to liiiii tliat tlie I'urotiiins wwv victminiis. 
 
 Here tJK' two facts are related as c-oiiiifctcd to^etlier in tinic, Imt 
 hy iiotliiiitr else. 
 
 I'Jssif id place of rs/ would imply that li«' rcfaiiifd the spear irllh 
 tin' /lurjiiisi (*/ waitiiijr till the news should he luiMi^^'ht. 
 
 />///'(;•('»/, donee ini deferveseat. Let tlu'iii put nfftill their aimer 
 cools; i.t'. let them put ott' with the iniri>i>.<f that their aiio;er 
 may cool, till tlwif J'nl their aiii^er «(»ol. 
 
 Jkfiri'>xi'it would mean simjtly till the fime nhia their aii^jer shall 
 be CDoliinf ; ili'/irhiarit, " has cooled." (180, i. ii.) 
 
 442. ytnfi(/if(i/n- and prinsiju/mt follow tlu^ same prin- 
 ciph'. To denote sinn)lc jn-inrihi of' /Imc the indieiit ixf 
 is used. 
 
 Qiiitrlii auto d'u' ([Uam Jmc veni. Foiu" days (323, /'.) 
 hefore 1 came here. 
 
 ' Modo HI' is often used in the Maine .sense ; hterallv '" oiiiv let (tlieiii) 
 not." 
 
27(] 
 
 TE. \tpoKA r. CI. A I :s7:s. 
 
 [Ex. LV. 
 
 ;: 
 
 But wlien the idea of an oid in view, vwfirr, or rrstt/f, 
 jnrvnifrif, is addt'tl to that of time, tlio sulijmictivc, of 
 final and consecutive clauses (sec 106) is invarialilv used. 
 
 iViiisiinjiiii r y«»ro/T n'cip«'rciit tniiinos, inipitHni fmriait li(mti.<. 
 TIk' •'in'iiiy iiiiulc ii cliiirj.ff lu'ton- {hry <u it hi nrnn r fm.n (lie 
 piinir, j'.c. to pn iriit (hi in, fntiii recovfiiii^ (iinl In, rii'ir). 
 
 Piiiis<|u.iiii ])uiiii!in'liir imr infirriiiif. lit'fore tlie fii^lit roiild 
 hiifiii iii^flit jjitcrposcd riKiitt ]>nnnti:t}). 
 
 The subjunctive is also wsod in jjeneral n)axinis, fsptTiiilly when 
 the Hocond person is used in iui indoHnite sense. fMl, Ohx.) 
 
 PriiiKiiiiiiw iucipias, rovuHlfo npim vsf. liefore nii'ii hegin, they 
 require delihenilion. 
 
 Ohs. In tiiese wider senses jinumiinint, is more common than 
 
 fH)fi'qiliHV. 
 
 ■44-3. Priiii«iiiiiti> fas n)itiujiifini) is properly a jihn'.fi' of two words, 
 which may he placed in separate clauses, especially in nej^ative 
 sentences. 
 
 (i.) So Used, they are often equivalent to imf . . . until. 
 
 Xoii piius irspoHilihii ([iiani Innii'iix. I will not answer idttll 
 you ai ' silent. 
 
 (ii.) They ma ; also s<»metimes translate irithmit. (See 426.) 
 
 Frills irr inihili t\\ii\\i\ jinlintni sciiti'ntids iiiiilivis.^it. He refused 
 to ^o irithoiit luiirinif the verdict of the jury. (Ainlli'lsxi't is 
 rlrtiial orntlo ohliiiuu. " .svnW hi' would not j^o." See 448.) 
 
 Ohtt. — "Not until' is often expres.sed l»y tiiin ihmuui {or diHtque). 
 
 Tum deinuni )r.<pon<li'ho, quum taniiriK. 1 will not answer till 
 you are silent. 
 
 11 
 
 E.irrcific 5.5. 
 
 The asterisk * means that dmn is to he n.sed in one of its various 
 constructions. ** Antiifninn or jirinsifniim is to he used. 
 
 1. 1 am I'eady to ]»ay yoii tli(^ greatest possible honour, 
 so* Ittiii,' as you are ready to estimate, at its ]>ro|»er value 
 all the slander and detraciion of my rivals. 2. Tiie* 
 launching' <d' this handful <d' e.ivalry a.yainst the enemies' 
 hd't wini;- caused smdi univt'rsal ])anic that, while* 
 the kiuij; was iutiuiriuL!: (d' his stall' what was hapj)enin^, 
 oven the centre hei^aii- to tall into confusion; before 
 
 417. 
 
 Kvtiii in the centre confusion l)egan." (See 219.) 
 
Ex. LV.l 
 
 TF.A/ri )A'. / / ( •/ . / / .VA.S. 
 
 'J77 
 
 \V(»rs«'' iM'ti'll us, iiii^lit inU'ivciHMl, so tliiit li^lit iiiL,M cast'd"- 
 uii li(»tli sidi's. '.\. Ami imw lidorc \\v cotild reap tlu' 
 IViiit t>t' a ciiMtcsf, wliich liail cost us s(» niucli '(IuckI- 
 sIumI, a sccKUtl iiiiuy vM\\y\ on tin- seen*', sn t Imt , wliilc* 
 our j^iMU'iiil was sl»M'|»iii;4 in his tent, tli«^ l)attli! had to lif' 
 ht'^un anew. \. llr will lif dear to his count rvnirii as 
 hui''* as tiiis uatioii exists, nor will Ids innuorv die i»ut 
 of the licarts of men till** all thiiii^s arc ( 190) for^'niicii. 
 T), H(* did not cmUm' jiolitical lifi- tilH l>y the (h'ath ' of 
 his father lit* was ahh-, as" Ik* had hui^' dt'siicd, lo join 
 the ranks^^ of the ;i!istorratic i>arty. (5. Let them vt'Utun* 
 on anvthiiiii,^ itrovidcd * thcv do not injuro the iidlucncc 
 and authority of th<«st» with whom rests the adiniiiistra- 
 tion of th«i nation. 7. .Vs lon<4" as I helieved you to he 
 studyinj^f these; matters for their own sake, so lon^' I 
 honoured vou hii^hlv ; now I estimate vou at vour true 
 value. 8. As loiin*as those who are to '" command our 
 ai'nues are chosen either hy chance, or on i^^'ouuds o| 
 interest, the nation can never he served successfully. 
 
 
 ' Neut. i>l. - IiiiperMonul loiistnu'tiou. (219.) 
 
 * (termulive ; tense of mtin us ii 116. * See 443, (fhs. 
 
 * Al)l. aba. witli mortidi.t. " 67. 
 
 7 Why not onliiirs { (See 17.) « See 389. 
 
 * Quamd'm (437, Obn.), tamdin. '• 418, g. 
 
/.WA'/v'rV.s/; I.VI. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES IN OfiAJlO OBLIQUA. 
 
 'f44. It liiis liccii iilrt'iiilv said (77) tliiit in all subor- 
 a*^^te clauses in uratii) nh/iijiin, whether introduced by a 
 riijtirr or a »oii/inir/inn, the subjunctive mood takes the 
 place of the indicative. 
 
 'iljis iis.i^'c is si> uiilikf Kii;,f|ish tliat it is t<.n.st;iiitl_\ uvtM'odknl hy 
 tilt' yoiiri'; sclinlnr. 
 
 111 Kii^'lisli, if wi' alter "iln' iiiiin \vlii» ilitcs tliis is fimlisli" inln 
 *'//(• jiiiis t'i<if the iiiiiii wlio (liM's tliis is t'iKilisli ;"' or, it" to "as soon as 
 tlu'V saw tlic t'l'ciiiy l\n'\ ffnl," we prefix the wonis, ^'thuj smj tlnif,'' 
 IK) i'!iaiii.H' takes plare in tlie IikkmI ((feillier of tlie veilts. 
 
 In Latin not only does the prineipal verb, " is," "'ftnl,' pass in siieli 
 eases into tlie intinifiri' liiood, but it earrieswitli it, so to speak, all 
 verlis really siilMudinate to it into a fresh mood, the snhjnnrtirf. 
 
 (hut it) nctii. (hdtid tthlii^iiii, 
 
 Stiiltiis est, (ji(i liiir facit. (Ait) stultum esse, iiui hnc faciat. 
 
 Siiinil atnui' hitstdii viderunt, ;^I)ieiint eos) simiif dfijiif hostnti 
 
 fiiLjere. viderint, fiijiisse. 
 
 (Jui h(jr fecerint,' paciiits dabnnt. (Divit^ xis (jni hoc fecissent,/'0('»a,>{ 
 
 daturos esse. 
 
 445. Tlic Siiiiio mil! a]»idi('s to indirect or dfjicndciit 
 (fiir.s/idiis and foiii iii'Uk/s tis niU(di as to indirect sfi>/' mnifs, 
 for tlu^ term oriilni (ihh'(jif(( in its lull sense includes all 
 three kinds (d'sneli substantival sentences. (Iiitr. c^O.) 
 
 i)rntii) lii'lu. ')rntio ohliijtni, 
 
 (i>l'KSTION. 
 
 f*///' iniiis(jiiinii vidistis hostciii, (Ifoj^avit) cur jirinsiiiut in vidis- 
 jxilini rif iillstis / sent hostoii, jnileni rctnlissciit. 
 
 Command. 
 
 Qui adsunt, iite siqiiniitur (Jussit) cos ijiii adcssent, sc setpii. 
 
 ' For tlie tense of j'lririf see 190, ii. Tiiis future /icr/ti/ will )h-. 
 n'presciited after a j.ast verb of sdi/imj by the j/hi/wr/Wt snl>Jiiiic(ivc, 
 (See 471, ''!>■'<.) 
 
Ex. LVI. 
 
 OfCAT/O OM/ /OCA. 
 
 446. It will li«' rciiH'iiilu'nMl tlMTi'toH' tliiit mirs as 
 Id jxisliiiiiini , ijiioil, i/funiifinnn , etc.. Iiriti^ joiiu'd N\it|| 
 llir iinlicMt ivr, <lu not ii|i])lv to claiisrs (lisit iiic il«-]M>ii<l('iit 
 (•II any lorni <•! nmtio uh/ii^nii ; in mk li clausrs tlio 
 indicative is inadmlBsible. 
 
 447. Thf prinriplc is th*> sjinic tliroiiulioiit. ].v\ A lu« tin- jiiitlior 
 n( tin- Imnk of tlu' spcjikci' ; li jiiiy diH' »'ls»' thrntnjh whom A m.ikfs 
 :iiiy .stiitniit'tit, or wlimn Ii«> inciitioiis as iiskiii^ or ( oiiiinaiiiliii;: .soinr- 
 tliiii).' : iKi \v\\\ tli.it loiiiis iiiiy part of wliat W s\\\s \\\\\ In- in tlu« 
 imlicativr mood. In tli«> cxaiiiplcs 444, 440/ oil on t)i«- Ict'l liaiiil, Imt 
 on dif ri;,'|it iiaiid oidy fnV, ilicnnf, intjiirlt, jiisxit, nrv As woids ; tlie 
 H'st of »'a(li st'iitrntr rxpiessrs tlic ideas of the suhjiMt of oacli of those 
 verhs, or of it, and tlic Indicative therefore Is excluded. 
 
 Ohn.- In<l('«'d, the f*n<hncy is to introduce the sulijnnctive into the 
 sultordinale ehinse when the prineipal verb N in tht- intiniiixr or 
 sidijnnctive for (»/»// i-atise ; and thon^'h surh nxsiviihitiuii dots not 
 amount to a rule, it will soinetiines help tu aeeount ft>r niiexpeeted 
 siihjiinetivi'S. 
 
 Jloc fti'i, vl IDS ijiii lilt se(|iierfnnir, iiiniliiiiu.< jniiisliin in. I 
 did this to secuie the safely of my followers. 
 
 t ! 
 
 Virtual Oratio obliqua. 
 
 448. The sul»jiMK'tivc also takes tlio place of the 
 indicative, n(»t only where the I'o'-ni of the sentence shows 
 that the writer is reportin;^ what .suvic one else said, tlionoht, 
 asktid, or ordered, l)ut ^here in the ahseiict; of any verh 
 (fii'/drainfi, st.nt'mnH, ruf/tnufi, or pnniipiiiuli we ha\e 
 oiiisidves to sti]>]dy the idea, "as he said," or even "as I 
 thought." 
 
 It is a short mode of distinyuishiii;,' wliat the writer or speaker (A) 
 states on his own responsibility, from that for \\hieh he de( lines to be 
 responsible, and whieh he tacitly shifts to \\. 
 
 Thus in the fable, "The vulture invited the little birds to a feast 
 which he was j:oinji to give them," ^^ ipnul lllis ih 1 1 ii r ii a vrnl" would 
 mean that he really inm going to give them the feast : but ^^ijnixl illis 
 ilaturns vssvi'' would (»idy mean that hi' »<iiil lie was going t(» do so. 
 So with the verbs (»f arnisi:iif, the charge olleii st.inds with tiimd in 
 the siihjitudiri., becati.se the arrimrrs (tie iinnti' to nss<rt that the crime 
 has been committed ; the iiuNi'ntiir would make the historian or 
 speaker as.sert, and be rtxjwiisihle for, the truth of the charge. 
 

 280 
 
 SUHOKDINATE CLAUSES AV 
 
 Ex. LVI. 
 
 1 
 
 This Ims Itt'ori liiippily niiiiiHl the Hulijuiictivc of virtiuil nratin 
 oltliiiiiii.* 
 
 SitrraltH tu'ratuiujk-*fnt tfinul (;nrriiiii|H'ri*t jinriitiiti m. Sofrut«'s 
 was uccumimI of c'oniiptiii^ the yomij^ men. 
 ljfiin<l I'orrumjunt tlirowH the res|H»i)Hil)ilitv of tlie (ihiir^e on the 
 Hccnser. Citrrniit/ubnt w(»uUl imply that the hi.storiun a;,Meeil with 
 th«' I'harjje. 
 
 This (MMistniclioii is especially conuium with c/"'"^- 
 claiist's. (See Ix'low, 484.) 
 
 E.XCKI'TIONS. 
 
 449. Sometimes the subordinate clause,', tlioui^h grani- 
 7H((fi<'ft/h/ suboi'diuate to a verb in oratio ohlhiiia, is really 
 an explanatory i)arentliesis inserted by the writer, and is 
 therelore in the ihc^cative. 
 
 ThemiModfA certiorem evvi fecit, id agi, ut ponn, (|uem ille in 
 Hellesponto fecerat, disHoitwretur. ThenmtoeU's 8ent him 
 Word that it was inteniied to break down the bri<l^e, which he 
 (Xerxe.s) had made over the Helhspont. 
 
 The words ^^ quern ille in JhUcHpoiito fecenit" are inserted by the 
 liistorian, they do not belonj? to the words reported its nsed by 
 Themistocles. They belon^j to A, not to B. (447.) 
 
 Simihirly, in snob a sentence as ''he ordered him to .send for the 
 troops who were in the rear," the w/»o-clause would l)e in the HnhjmK'- 
 tire if it were part of the order ^iven, in the indicative if a mere 
 definition of the troops were meant, and inserted a.s such by the 
 hisiorian. 
 
 KvcrnHe 56. 
 
 I. Then turninj^ to Cortes, lie made a veliement attack 
 upon the Spaniards, who, without any- ade([uate justifica- 
 tion, were invadin«f his tenitory, and were either invitinj^ 
 or compellin<f his subjects to rebel. 2. He gave orders not 
 to spare a single (358) ]»erson who liad been present at the 
 massacre of the ]»ri3oners, or the outrage on the ambas- 
 s.'ulors. 3. Then the gallant and undaunted chief, though 
 surrounded on all sides by armed men, turned to the 
 
 ' Dr. Kennedy. Such curious constructions as quod reUijionilnis 
 iniiit'itlrl xc »liceret, for i/uod impediretur, though by no means uncom- 
 mon, will not be noticed here, 
 
 '^ fcjee iC6, note. 
 
Ex. LVI.1 
 
 OK AT 10 OlurOUA. 
 
 281 
 
 coii(|U«'ror and denounced the cowiirdicc of liis coiintrviin'n, 
 wlio Uy PuiTend(n'in<; liini to tlie Sj»jiniiinls had tluiii,' awiiy 
 the ])ii(',('los.s jxjs.m^ssions' of tVtM'doin and nl" lioiiKiir. 4. lie 
 iironiised not to h»ave tlie city till they had hi ii«jlit 
 safely Nvithin th(» walls all Nvho luul siirviycd from the 
 inassuere of yesterday, 5. II«' asked \\\y\ many- hy.'itander.s 
 whether those who wished lor their kinj^'s satel}' were 
 ready to follow hiin, antl iisin;,''' all sjmmmI to iidlict 
 eiiastisriiieid on those >vho luul yiilated their alh'uiance 
 and their oath. (». On reaching,' the summit of the 
 mountain he (;alhMl to him his stuil, and ])oiiit(>d out 
 the streams whieh (he saiil) flowed tlown towards Italy. 
 7. Ho said that he would n<»t allow himself to j)ut faith 
 in men who had not only showed themsehcs cowardly 
 and disloyal, hut were still, in the face of such a ])olitical 
 (Muer^ency, on the ])oint* of sacriticin«; everything to their 
 own comfort and interest. 
 
 
 » Sue 222, r>/w. 
 
 • AI>1. ahs. of adhihi'or. 
 
 « See 69. 
 
 * Either fut. in -rnx, or in ro cmmc vt. 
 
' 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 $: 
 
 EXERCISE LVir. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Rules for Mood and Tense after si. 
 
 450. Conditional clauses are tliose Nvliicli iiic iiilnMliiced 
 l»y tlu! Liiliii and Kn^lish coiijuiictions ,s/, "if," etc., 
 ('iiuiM('rat«Ml ill Iiitr. 5!), c. Their ((ihrrhlal relation to the 
 ])rin('ii»al clause is explained in Intr. 82. 
 
 The use of tlu' rit,'ht mood aiui ri^ht tense in sudi chmses will 
 nvniiri' Homo care, owing mainly to tlie almost entire ol)literation in 
 Knjilish of the siihjvndiv)' ihoo<I, and the want of a true future tense. 
 
 (190.) 
 
 A. Mood after si. 
 
 451. The construction of such clauses, as regards the 
 mood to he used alter .s/, will be j>erfectly clear If the 
 followino; observations and rules are home in mind. 
 
 Ohn. In all conditional or hypothetieal sentences, v.i. such coniitound 
 xintiiins as contain an //'-clause, or it -i equivalent, it is (|iiilf true 
 that tl>e tnitli of any assertion made in the principal clause depends 
 upon tl'at of the c »iiilition contained in the //'-clause ; as a matter 
 of rrtiKoiiitHi or infill in'i\, the principal clause, called also thf aj^oih is isy 
 is dependent on the suhordinate clause, or ]>rf)tasi.'<. 
 
 Thus, in "//'it has li.fhtened there will l»e tlunxler," that "there will 
 be thunder" is dependent, as an in far net', on whetlier or no "it has 
 li«,ditened." 
 
 P»ut [irauimni'udlUj "there will l)e thunder" is the principal clause, 
 (jmih'Jial hy the secondary or subordinate clause, "if it lias lij^htt-iu d." 
 
 It is this gratii/niitiail relation, and tliis only, which we need con- 
 sidei' in writiu}^ grammatically, and we shall find that in conditional 
 sentences the mood of the verb in the j;/-clause will depend, as a rule, 
 on that of the verb in the main clause. 
 
 Tlie toUowing two Itules must he carefully observed. 
 
 452. KuLK T.-^ If the verb in the princijtal clause is 
 in tlie indicative or imperative mood, the verl* in th« 
 conditional clause will be in the indicative. 
 
 *SV hue dicis, eiras ; si ahiir vis, ahi. If j'ou sai/ this you 
 lire MTong ; if you icish to depart, dcjinit. 
 
 282 
 
Ex. LVII.] 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 28:J 
 
 
 Oh». 1.— Dismiss all idea that si "governs a subjunctive" because it 
 siiffffitits a (litnhf, iuu\ \hv subjunctive mood implies a doubt. The M'ord 
 .SI (^"if") in its very natiue implies doubt ; but the mood with which 
 it is joined depends upon the nature of the whole sentence, and this 
 is d('cide<l by that of the )>riiin'j al, not of the subordinate, clause. If 
 the jtrincipal verb is in the indicative or imperative, this shows that 
 th«' whole sentence l)elon^'s to the sphere of practical and real life, and 
 the indicative is the appropriate mood for the qualifying si-clause, as 
 well as for the main clause. 
 
 0/;.s'. 2. — Nor does the mood of the .'?i-clause depend upon the 
 lihlihootl, Hiilikvliho(>d,2)OA)iilnlitki, OT the reverse, of the supposition 
 made ; but sMni)ly on the viood (that is to .say, the general tone) of the 
 priurijHil douse. Cicero says, excitate eiiin, xi potest is, at infer is ; he 
 dill not think it possible that they could raise a man from the dead ; 
 yet he says at jujitestls, not si 2>ossitis.^ 
 
 Caution. — lieware then of .such Latin as — 
 
 Si h(ir dicas, crmhh. If you were to say .so, you irill be 
 
 Mlt>Hg. 
 
 The Latin here is as unnatural as the Engli.sh ; half the sentence 
 l>elongs to one sphere of thought, the } radical, "you irtV/," etc., half 
 to that of mere conception, " if you ivere to," etc. (But see 463, 6.) 
 
 
 ue 
 Is 
 ■r 
 
 IS, 
 
 ■<•', 
 
 453. IJuLK II. It' the veil) in the )>iiiici[)al clause is 
 ill tlie subjunctive niciod, the verb in the .-^'-clause will 
 be also in \hv. subjunctive. 
 
 .S'/' hur (licas, ern'8. If you nrrc t(» fmy this, or, //v/v you 
 to .say tliis, you iitm/d he wronj^. 
 
 Erres is in the subjunctive mood because it does not say "you are 
 wrong," Itut only (hat you vould be in certain imagined rondition^. 
 on a certain hi/jiothesis ; it shows that the whole sentence has left the 
 sphere of fact and iiractice to which the Indicative and imperative 
 belong, and entered that of concejilion or itinujinatiou. 1'he ,s/- 
 clause therefore will, as the subordinate clause, follow the mood of thf 
 
 IS 
 nil 
 
 1 Cii'ero says, I'arcite Lent id! dhpiitnti, si ipse famoe siiftr vnqiKii. 
 pepercit. This is in acc«»r(lance with Hule I. Of course Cicero did 
 not mean thut Lentuliis //»/'/ .shown ten(U;rn«;ss to hitf own reputation, 
 but the very reverse, yet he ii.>-es the indicative after si. So he says, 
 Si es Roniiii', rl.r ciiini }iut<>, ^in es, ... he uses the indinifin' because 
 he goes on to make a jinictlral reifutsf. The indicative mood is, so 
 to spciik, ciiloiirhss : it makes a statement (Intr. 11): l)ut colour may 
 l»e given to the statement it makes by another word. Kortasse hoc 
 dirii ; si hoc dicit : the doidit and condition are expressed by /ortanna 
 and si, the verb is left unaltered. 
 
284 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 [Ex. LVIl. 
 
 rulinj/ or principal clause, untl may be called a hiipotlidical as dis- 
 tinct fnnn a rondUioiKil clause.* 
 
 Si hue dixisses, crravissoa. If you had said this, or, had you said 
 this, you v'oiiUl hdir, boon vroiifr. 
 
 If tlicsc two ItULKs, T. Jiiid II,, are <»1)S(M'v»m1, i\>\v niis- 
 liik(\s will iiris(! as to tin; mood of the; Latin verb. 
 Kxercisu A (page 280) should now be done. 
 
 B. Tentje after si. 
 
 454. Under Hulk T. tlie main ditliculty as regards tense 
 will l>e in the use of the future. 
 
 (i.) Kcad carefully 190 and exaui[)les 5-10 in 194, and you will bee 
 that tilt' best mode of translatiii*,' 
 
 "If you do this you will be punished," is, hoc si feceris, ^>o«;?rt.s- 
 (lahi'i. 
 
 Si fun's would be " if you are now doinj.:," or, "intendinjj to do" 
 (an (iHtiripatiri'. use, 182) ; .ri Jdcivx, " if you shiill J)e (hniiij," i.e. at the 
 time (189) ; but .si facias would be entirely wrong, "if you were to do 
 this, you will be punished." 
 
 (ii.) ]ieniend)er also that, if a command regards the 
 fiffiirc, as most command;-" do, the future must be used 
 with si. "Come (to-morrow) if you ('(Hi" will be, triii 
 (rn(s) si ]>oteris, Ix'cause "can" is really future time, 
 and contemporaneous with the tense denoted by "come;" 
 pafis wohld mean, "if you can tioir" 
 
 (>/«. This future is especially common with volo and itossum. 
 (*/v<s Ti'tiidni (imperative) or vcnitnt (fut.), si salri esse volent. 
 Let them come, or, they will come, to-morrow if they (then) 
 Irish for safety, 
 
 455. Remember also the idiomatic use of the Latin pluperfect 
 indicative with si to express rtjxl ilioii ov frciinnirii ; it corresponds 
 with the imperfect in the prituripal clause. (See 192 and 434.) 
 
 Si <jiuni i'l'ssare viderat, utoi nrhl.-< sol n in. stul efioiii, rerhfrihns 
 castijraliat. If he saw that any one was hantfint,' back, he 
 would airrcci him, not with wonls only, but with stripes, 
 
 * Tiie word " fo«f//7 /oh " would he used in sucli practical matters as 
 .•V tirntii or Ivasc, etc,; " lijiimtlosis"' Me apply to an assumption in 
 seienee on the triitli of \vhi«'h we base an unproved theory. The 
 ii/xxlosis to tlie coiii/ition is naturally in the indicative, to the liypothtsia 
 in the subjunctive. 
 
 ■;■,, I 
 
Ifl 
 
 Ex. LVII.] 
 
 co.vn/r/o.v. i / c/ .ir.sY-:.s: 
 
 m 
 
 jerfect 
 
 [ponds 
 
 lei'.s as 
 [on in 
 The 
 
 Ahesis 
 
 456. riulcr lill,K II., tlu! niily ditlicultv as n 'partis 
 'I'cnsj's will 1)«; ill tlic use (»t' tlic imperfect subjunctive, as 
 tiistinrt from tiiatorthc pluperfect and present of tin- same 
 mood. 
 
 (i.) TIr" imperfect ro|»ri's«'nt.s in flic snlijnnclivo, as in tliv indicative, 
 roi(tiniioii>i (litiim in tlie past (183> ; the pluperfoct simply past time. 
 
 //<»(• ,s/ (lixisses, erravisses. IhttI y^n [In/Dir some past time) 
 said this, vou would Imn Im ii wiontr lonce tor all), 
 lint — Hoc Si diceres, eiiares. H;id you In in siiiiiiiij this (tliirimf some 
 past time), you would (ihiriiuj tfint tinii') Imn hn n in the wroni^. 
 
 (ii.) But sometimes the imperfect suhjiinctive extends up to the 
 pii'ient inuineiit, and hoc si dici irs, crron -t, meiins, " Ha<l you been 
 stiynij^ tins Hoir, you would have heen noio wronj,'." 
 
 The niejinint,' of the imperfect subjunctive in a Latin sentence must 
 therefore sometimes be decided by the context. 
 
 457. The more ordinary form in speakin<j^ hj/jxifhrfirn/li/ 
 of the present is, Ikh: si ilicas, erres ; but, ('S|»ecially when 
 we wish stroiijj;ly to iniply that the snpiiosition is false, 
 we may use in Latin, as in Knulish, a past I'orm. r>ut this 
 use of the imperfect can never, either in su[>}>ositiuns or 
 wishes, extend to the future. 
 
 Utiuam adsit. Would he icerc here (now, or for the future). 
 Utinam adesset. Would he had been here (either j/cstcrdaij, or 
 
 even to-day). 
 Si adsit. If he were here {to-day, ')r in the future). 
 Si adesset. Had he been here, or were he but here (previously, 
 
 or to-day). 
 
 458. The sense sometimes calls for a difference of tense in the 
 two clauses. 
 
 Ego nisi peperissein, Koma non oppn^naretur. Had I not 
 become a mother, Koine would not now be under siej,'e. 
 
 Peperissem, merely past time, oppugnaretur, a continued state, 
 extending to the present moment. 
 
 Caution.— Kemember that si is never used in Latin as 
 ail interrogative particle, " He asked him if he was well," 
 is, €x CO, num valerct, qiiaesivit. (167.) 
 
 06«.—^'^ begins a sentence less commonly in Latin than in English. 
 It often follows a name or pronoun : < \i< sac si, etc., K^jo si, etc. (Kten 
 quod is prefixed to connect it with the previous sentence : ([nod si~ 
 ^^but if," sometimes "ami if," properly '" as to tvhich, if." 
 
! 
 
 286 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 [Ex. LVII. 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 459. The following examples sliould be carefully 
 studied. 
 
 RULK I. 
 
 (S'i ({Hid habebat, dabat. If he (tliiring a past tiiin') had Miiything, 
 
 lie gave it, or would give it (habitually). 
 Si quid habuit, dedit. If he {at a past time) had anything, he 
 
 gave it (aorist). 
 Si qneni viderat, irascebatur. If hi' saw any one (firqiientativey 
 
 434, Obn.) he would get angry. 
 Si opus erit, or fuerit (see 190), adero. I will be there if need 
 
 arises. 
 
 RuLK II. 
 
 Turn si hoc dixisseni, non auditus fuiaseiu. If I had said this 
 
 then, I should not have found a hearing (aorist). 
 Tuni si hoc dicereni, non audirer. If I had said {i.e. been saying, 
 
 183), I should not hiive found (been likdy to find) a hearing. 
 Si hoc dicain, non audiar. If I were to say this {now, or at any 
 
 future time), I should not be listened to. 
 Si hoc dicerem von audirer. If I were to say (or had hem 
 
 saying) this noUy I should not be (or have hem) listened to 
 
 (as I am). 
 
 E 
 
 vxrnM ;)/. 
 
 A. 
 Mainly on the Moods to be used with Si. 
 
 1. If you love me, be sure to send a letter to me at 
 Konie. 2. If you are at home — I am not yet sure whether^ 
 you have returned — 1 hope soon to receive a letter from 
 you. 3. Were your country to use this langua,ue to- you, 
 would she not have a claim to obtain her request? 4. If 
 I am speaking falsely, Metellus, refute me ; if I am 
 speaking the truth, why do you liesitate^ to put confidence 
 in me ? 5. Were virtue denied this reward, yet she would 
 be satisfied with her own self.* 6. Time'' would fail me 
 were I to try to reckon up all Ids services to the nation. 
 7. If ever any^ one was indifferent to empty fame and 
 
 vuliiar 
 
 gossip. 
 
 it* is I. 8. If anv one were to make this 
 
 request of you, he would be justly ridiculed. 9, If you 
 
 1 167. ' " With you" {tecum). 
 
 * See 3B6, ii. » "The day," «/ic«. 
 
 '' (i^U, pf valgus. (See 69.) 
 
 ^ 136, h. 
 
 « See 367. 
 
 " "lam /a,"/*'. (Sec 70.) 
 
Ex. LVII.) 
 
 COXniTIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 287 
 
 are desirous to enter political life, do not^ hesitate to 
 count ni(! anioiiL'- vour friends. 10. Had lie been a man 
 (tf- courage, he would never have declined tliis contest. 
 11. If vou have anv regard, either for your own safety 
 or your jtrivate property, do not^ delay your reconcilia- 
 tion with the conqueror. 12. P»nt if you are aiming at 
 tli(^ crown, wliy do you use the language of a citizen,^ 
 and ]»r(^ten(F' to sacrifice everything to the judgment 
 and inclination of your countrymen? 
 
 f 
 
 at 
 
 )m 
 
 If 
 
 hce 
 uld 
 
 )n. 
 
 md 
 
 Ihis 
 
 'ou 
 
 no.) 
 
 On the Moods and Tenses used with .Sii. 
 
 1. If the enemy had with a veteran army invaded our 
 teriitory, and routed our army of recruits, no^ German 
 would have survived to-day. 2. If I either decline the 
 contest, or sliow" myself a coward and a laggard, then 
 you may** taunt me if you will, witli my lowly birth, then 
 calP me, if you choose, tlie basest aud meanest of mankind. 
 3. If once^*^ Napoleon throws his army across the Rhine, 
 I am afraid that^^ no one will be able to stand in his wav 
 on this side the Vistula. 4. If we have had^- enough of 
 fighting to-day, let us recall the soldiers to their several 
 (352, Ohs.) standards, and hope for better things for '^ 
 the morrow ; if to-morrow resistance'* is manifestly no 
 longer possible, let us yield, howt^ver'^ reluctantly, to 
 necessity, and bid each take care'^ of himself. 5. If, 
 when you have got to Rome, you care'^ to receive a letter 
 from me, mind you are the tirst'* to write to me. 
 6. When once Italy is reached,^'-' I will either lead you {pi-), 
 said he, at once to Rome, if you wish, or having let you 
 
 » See 142, ^ 303, ii. ^ Cave. (143.) 
 
 * Adj. cU'ilU (.See 58.) ' 39. * See 2'J3. 
 "^ PntflxQ. (241.) ' /v/tW with subj. (197.) 
 
 • Fut. iniperat. o{ tliro (p. 11.3, ». ). 
 
 '" Noetl not be e.xpresseil otherwice than by the right tense. (190, i.) 
 
 " rt qiiitpinm. (See 138.) '■ See 218. 
 
 »•' In. (See 326.) '♦ 21 J. 
 
 ^^ (^tiKiiirh (iSO. 0/>s-.) ^ Vsii conmlo. (248.) 
 
 '7 \'oh. " rrior. (See 62.) '* 217, Oba. 
 
288 
 
 w 
 
 CONDiriONA I. CIA USES. 
 
 [Ex. LVII. 
 
 sack .such' ^v('illtlly cities jis Miiiiii and (Iciioa, will .slmkI 
 you lionic, if yon pivfc!- il, latlcii willi ^tlundcr aii<l spoil. 
 7. II' tlicy s;i\v any of our soldiers runniiij^' I'oiward 
 from (r.< ) tlie line of niaicli, or lelt l»eliind Ity liis couiiinies, 
 tliey would all hurl their darts at him. S. It is liaste,- 
 said he, net deliheration, that we iiee«l ; liad we used it'' 
 earlier, we. should have had' iio war t(» day. 1). These 
 men, had you jx-rniitted it, would have heen alive* to-day, 
 and heen niaintainiuin- with the; swiu'd the national cause. 
 10. Had y(ai asketl ww. yesterday if I feared so worthless 
 Ji ]>erson as your lirother, I should have answered no; 
 to-day the news of this deleat makes'"' me so anxious, that, 
 weri3 yo;i to ask the same i|uestion, 1 should answer yes. 
 
 ' Apposition, iiritx used ;i.s lunuo in 214, '//«. "J. (See 317.) 
 '^ Vho jiri>]tt'riifiiiii, ;ui(l see 286. " Kehitive. 
 
 * Use .sf/m. (-61.) " .See 240. 
 
 ( 
 
 I 
 
/':x/':a'C7sk i.vin. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES Continued. 
 
 Exceptional Constructions of si. 
 
 460. Exceptions will Ix^ tound to Itrr.KS I. iuui II. us 
 f^'ivcn above in 452 and 453; thcst^ exceptions, however, 
 ;ne in many cases ))art of the remilar construction of 
 Latin, Jind are ahvavs easily accounted for. 
 
 461. Apparent Exceptions. — AVith the modal verbs />fw- 
 siun, (/th,v, oportct, etc , and with periphrastic tenses, formed 
 either hy the <j('niiiih\v (/rrii/u I in; {to express i/i/fi/, etc.), 
 or by i\\k^ future jMrticipir (to express intrntiou, etc.), with' 
 the verb sum., the indicative is regularly used in tlu^ oih)- 
 dosis or princii»al clause in place of the subjunctive. (153.) 
 
 The place of those iiMMliil verbs and p:iiticipi;il phrases is taken in 
 Kn^dish by the auxiliary verbs tiixtj, viitjlif, ironhl, .,hnvl,l, vnist, 
 onyht, am to, have to, etc., which often form a substitute for our 
 nearly obsolete subjunctive mood. Thus — 
 
 Quid, si hostca ad tirhcm veniant, /.t/m?-?! estis? Tn case the 
 
 enemy should come to the city, what would i/on (lo/=r\v|);,t 
 
 do you intend to do ? 
 Hnnc hominem, si nlla in te essct jn'etas, coJeni debebas. If 
 
 you had had any natural atfection {ax you had not), you ouqht 
 
 to have respected this man. 
 Dthri tot us excrcitus potuit, si fu;/u)itrx jhrsirufi victim's essent. 
 
 The whole army might have been destroyed, if the victors had 
 
 pursued the fut,'itives (u-hich thitj did not). 
 Hos nisi niann misisset, tormtntis diam dedendi fuerunt. If 
 
 he had not set these men free, they must have hten jriven up 
 
 to torture. 
 Bonus votes poteras es.^e, si voluisses. You viitjht have been 
 
 a jrood prophet, had you cared to l)e one, 
 Aliter si fecisses, idetn eventurum fuit. Had you acted 
 
 otherwise, the result would have bent the same. 
 
 These are exceptions to, but not real violations of, Rulk I. Thus 
 fadnri estis is another form of expressinu; faeiatis, cokrc debebas of 
 coluisses. These modal verbs, and the other periphrastic forms, 
 supply the Latin verb with, as it were, fresh moods, or modrs of 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 
F 
 
 
 i 
 
 4^ 
 
 290 
 
 COI^DITIONAI. CLAUSES //. 
 
 [Ex. LVIII. 
 
 statement. (See 42.) They add an assertion of Intention, duty, pro- 
 bability, etc., to the idea conveyed by the verb. 
 
 Thus in, Si quu haer loqiiatur, vir puto enm impetratiiruvi I'use, 
 '* if any one were to use this hinj,niage, I satrcely think he would obtain 
 his recjuest," the vi.c puto, etc., is ecjuivalent to a subjunctive mood, 
 vix impdri't, 
 
 i^ofaduriufni is almost equivalent iofecissan, cnljMiii potni to 
 culpatHH fuiiiHi'ia. 
 
 AQ2. Nor is, »Si hoc dixi, nolim dictum, " If I said this, I am 
 sorry," a violation of Rule II., for nolim is only a polite form (»f the 
 indicative. (See 149, i.) 
 
 So, moriar, nin hoc verum est (may I perish, if this is not true), 
 is no real violation of Rulk I., for moriar is practically an iiii]nriitlir, 
 not "I should die," but "let me die ;" nor is, Si in hoc erravi, fy^/s 
 mihi irascatur (if I have done wron<.( in this, who would be an<;ry 
 with me?) a violation of Rule II., for the question is a virtual 
 nej,'ativo, e(iuivalent to nemo mihi irascetur. (See 180.) 
 
 463. Real Exceptions. — Sometimes, yiowever, Rules I. 
 and II. are really violated. 
 
 (a) Perierara uim tu accurrisses. I should have perished 
 if yoii had not run' to my assistance. 
 
 Compare the English "/ had perished had you not ruti 
 
 up. ^ 
 
 (h) Si. fracfus illabatur or/yw, iinpavidum ferient ruinae. 
 Were the globe to be rent and fall upon him, the 
 fragments will strike but not dismay him. 
 
 In the first example {a) what is unreal (he had not perished) is 
 stated as though it were real, for the sake of making the language 
 more emphatic : " I all but perished." 
 
 The second (6) is from the poet Horace, who in ferient passes from 
 the ordinary form of the conditional sent<;nce to that of strong jissertion 
 or prophecy. These idioms, at all events the second, should never 
 be imitated by the young composer. 
 
 Exercise 58 A should now be done (page 293). 
 
 Nisi, si non, sin, si minus ; siue, seu. 
 
 464. The rules for mood and tense are tlie same as 
 those given for si. 
 
 * In using this pbiperfecc we are re?tlly, though unconsciously, 
 using the now obsolete form of the English subjunctive. 
 
V 
 
 Ex. LVIII.] CO!^nniOXAI. CLAUSES If. 
 
 19\ 
 
 IS 
 
 AV.s/, " i{' not," " unless," negatives a whole r/nnsr ; with 
 si iii'ti the ru'gativc applies to a siniflr word. 
 
 Mnrltiin; nisi ini'tlicinn (ulhibwrit. Unless he rails in, or, if lie 
 
 lines not rail in, a physieian lie will die. 
 Mnttitiir, n'\ iiiiilinivi untx adhihturit. He will die, if lif /(»//.s-to- 
 
 eali-iri a physieian. 
 
 465. Sin {si nt\ piojterly " if not ") = " Imt if," and is used 
 
 to iiitioduce a fresh .s/-clause, amfrnvji in sense t(» one 
 
 alrciidy expressed or implied. If the fresh elause is 
 
 /hifx/iir, si von Nvilli a vrh, or simply si minus, takes the 
 
 j)]ace of ,s'//;. 
 
 »S'/ inun cinra ist, dnino extunt, sin nhsciirior, donti mamnt. If 
 the ninon is hrijfht, they leave their houses, hut if it is at all 
 <liiii (67, b), they stay at home. 
 
 Si hate ffcerit, qaniubo, { ■ . •' * I aequo nnuno ferani. If 
 
 •' ' -^ ' ( SI minus, 5 ' •' 
 
 he '^x.s- this, I shall be <;lad ; if he dos not (or if not), I shall 
 
 take it quietly. 
 
 4-66. SI, )ilsi, HI 7J0H, xi inlnnit, are sometimes like some other 
 conjunctions (^Intr. 27) joined with single words in place of clauses. 
 (<f) Jiiramt .sc, nisi vietorem, niivquam nditurnm. He swore 
 
 never to return, unless victorious. 
 (/>) Nihil nil nd di.<('»-)r (.s7, nisi recordari. Learnin*,' is notlim;; 
 
 else than recollecting. 
 ((•) Cniii api', si non optinu'i, at aliqad tamen vlrere. To live with 
 some hopes, if not the highest. (Note order of Eiiqllsh.) 
 Caution. — It is only in such phrases, where it emphasises 
 a sinj^le word, that at tamni should be used ; it should 
 never begin a sentence, as it so often does in later Latin. 
 
 467. Sive, sen, though translated l»y " whethei," " or," 
 
 an; never used as infrrrot/itfircH, never, that is, as identical 
 
 with iitrim , an. (See 171.) They introduce tw(j or more 
 
 alternative comHtions, between which the speaker makes no 
 
 choice ; they affect the principal clause, or ajjodusis, eijually. 
 
 Sive adhihucris mnliciniu sive iion ndhdnifm, convalesces. 
 
 You will get well, irhffher you call in a physician ar no, 
 
 i.e. ifyoxi do, and if you do not. 
 
 The rules for the mood are the same as the two given 
 for si (452, 453). 
 
 Sen legit, .sr*t scribit, nihil tempoi'i.^ terit. Whether he rends or 
 
 nrltes, he iraste.^ no time. (RuLK I.) 
 Sen legat, seu scribat. nihil teinporis terat. Whether he vere to 
 
 read, or were to iirrite, he would naste no tinie. (Rule II.) 
 
 i 
 

 
 202 
 
 CONDITIONAI. CI. A USES //. 
 
 [Ex. LVIII. 
 
 Caution. (Ircat (.'aro must be takcni to (listin;,'uisli .s/r** 
 
 . .s'//v, .sfM . . , .sr/<, from utriiiii . . . an, iiiid (iiif . . . nut. 
 
 Hfii introduce adverbial clauses (conditioiiiil). 
 iin „ lubstantlTal claiiseH (interrogative). 
 
 co-ordinate clauHes. 
 
 IVhrther he reads 
 
 (a) Siir . . 
 (h) Ctrinti, 
 («•) A lit . . . ant 
 
 (a) Sen li'fjit, sen nrrihif, nihil tnnporig Orit. 
 
 or writes, he wastes no time. 
 {h) Utnim i,iiat an ncvihnt iiesno. I do not know irhtthrr he i.s 
 
 readinjj or writinj;. 
 (r) Aut liijit aut ncrihit. He is cither reading' or writin;,'. 
 
 The manner, tlieref(»re, in which "whether" and "or" are to l)e 
 traiishited into Latin depends entirely on the sen.se in which they are 
 used, that is, on the nature of the clause which they introduce. (See 
 171.) 
 
 468. /h(Ni, modo (dtim modo), ita . , . vt (con.secutive), 
 wliiMi ii.scil in tlie sense of "})rovi(le(l that," "on the eon- 
 tilt ion tiiat," will cau.se no dittieulty, as they are invariably 
 used with the subjunctiye. 
 
 (rt) Oilirint dum vietiiant ; (h) ituineat, modo taceat (jussive) ; 
 (r) ita vuDn.dt ut ' mihi parent, ut ne ijuid vie invito faciat. 
 
 (a) is " Let them hate me, .so lonjj as they fear me ;" (//) " let him 
 remain on condition of beinij silent ;" (c) "let him remain on con«li- 
 tion that he obeys me, (and) does nothinj; a«j;ainst my will." 
 
 Hut ita . . . ut {comparative =aa) is sometimes used in a similar 
 sense with the indicative. 
 
 Ita vivam ut te amo. May I die if I do not love you ; lit. may 
 I live so far (only) as I love you. 
 
 Jil.irrc'Uc 58. 
 
 A. 
 
 Exceptional uses of the Mood with SL 
 
 1. Had he listened to your warnings, had lie endured 
 everything in silence, the result would have been the 
 same then as to-day. 2. Had you been in office during 
 
 ' The ?/< here is of course consecutive, "so as to," and hence 
 equivalent to a co/^W/on ; but it approaches al.so a final sense "with 
 the intention of ;" hence the ?"' in the next clause. Cf, the Gr«ek 
 
T^ 
 
 Ex. LVIIl.] CO\n/T/OXAf. C/.A['S/:S 1 1. 
 
 W3 
 
 (ii\) tlio sanip ypur as iny fiitlicr, had yoii I'licoiuitcnd tli<! 
 saint! )K»Iiticiil stonns as In* did, you would liavc slicwn,* 
 if nut - as i^rj-at s»'lt' cnutrol, yet as uiucli ;^oud si'iisc as 
 he did. 3. Had 1 said tliis with the intention of Ix'in;,' 
 of use to, and of ph-asini,', \\\x\\, yet 1 sliouM have lia<l to 
 I)Ut up with his uhuse and insults. 4. Had your fathrr 
 said this with tlie intention of disidi-asinij: vou, vet you 
 slutuld have renienihered that lie was your father, aiul 
 have endured his aie'iv mood caliulv and in silence. ;"). 
 This is the eouise, which, had I )»cen horn in the same 
 position as y(Mi, I sh.add iiave liad to take; l»ut liappily 
 1 luive never had to untlertak«f such a task. (». Had the 
 son l»e(Mi of tli(! .same charatter as the father, I mi_i,dit 
 liilve touelu'd ids jieart hv praNcr'' and eiitieatv; hut in 
 
 • 1 • * ' 
 
 trutli lie is so inhuman, .so cnud, that, had all mankind 
 euvleavoured to soiteu him, no one wouhl* have ]»revailed. 
 7. If you wish to see me hefon; I leave the city, J would 
 liave^ you write to your father not'' to sumnjon me to the 
 army till you have come to llonie. 8. If you nave heeu 
 ]>ersiiaded® to ])ardor him his offences, and not to exact 
 })unishment for s(» many eriines, would any''' one imjuite 
 that to y(m as a fault, or taunt you with your cle.nency 
 and gentlene.ss ? It mi«rht perhaps have heen** hetter not 
 to have listened to prayer; but error is one thing, wrong- 
 
 doing another. 
 
 :-i 
 
 B. 
 
 Ni»i^ si non, sin ; sive, seu. 
 
 1. If you fail to return at the end ot a week, you will 
 greatly injure your own^ cause. 2. I should not have 
 written thus^^ had not I been convinced that your father 
 took the same view on this question as I. 3. He was 
 a man of the highest ability, the highest character, of 
 respectable, if humble origin. 4. If I obtain my request. 
 
 1 
 
 Use adhiheo, I employ, call in. * See 466. 
 
 358. 
 
 ' fieruud. 
 « 163. 
 
 * See 116. * 141. • 122, c, h. 
 
 » See 366, i. 
 
 '* Naec. So hiu'c, or hoc,facere, ia "to act thuf," never ita ayere. 
 
1^ >' 
 
 2<>4 
 
 CONDITION A I. CLAUSES II. 
 
 [Ex. LVIII 
 
 I sliiill be most grateful ; if not, I will do my hcst' to li'iir 
 it with rcrsij^iiiitioii. f). Fti tlu^ morning' \\v.- promised iii A 
 l)oiin(l Iiims«;lf l»y oath m'v<!i' to return from the lit ' I. 
 unless victorious; yet'* in the evtMiin^' I siiw him wil'i 
 my* own eyes walking' in tiie j)ark, with counteiiame 
 nnini)V(Mi and calm, it' not cheerful. (I. Let him speiik 
 out, his whnle miiiti, his whole wishes; provided that lie 
 is silent hu* the futun;, it matttsrs little what he say^ at 
 present. 7. Vou shall ohtain your re«juest, hut uidy •ii*' 
 couditifui that you (lepart at once, and never nior*' return. 
 8. WhetluM" you were ahsent intentionally, or hy chiince, 
 concerns yourself, and is of no snudl importance to your 
 own reputation; what*' we have to decide is whethei- you 
 wer»i ahsent^ ur preseni ; if you were ahsent' during '^ the 
 battle, wlu^ther it happened Ity desi^^n or by nu-re chanci', 
 you will be condemned, and that" deservtully, by a unani- 
 mous verdict, for you ou^dit never to have*" left tlu? camj). 
 D. Whether you will do me this favour or not, I do not 
 yet know, but wlujther you consent to do it or no, 1 shall 
 always be grateful to you for** your many kind deeds, and 
 will show my gratitude if 1 can. 10. Whether this bill is 
 constitutional or unconstitutional may be questioned ; 
 but whether it is constitutional or unconstitutional, 1 
 venture to say this, that if not indispensable, it is so bene- 
 ficial, so useful to the nation in the face*- of the present 
 crisis, that it has been approved of by every patriot. 
 
 » See 332, 5, j/. (p. 222). « Ute. (See 338, Obs. 2.) 
 
 « hlem for "yet him." (See 366, ii.) * Ipxc (366, (/.) 
 
 _« Ua . lit. (468, c.) « 341. 
 
 •'•'' Tenses? one tlie mere fact, the other continuous time, (173.) 
 " "Then . . when tlie fight was going on. " (218.) Mood? (See 433.) 
 » fdqHe. (See 344.) «> Tense? (198, i., ii., b.) 
 
 " Propter tot. " 273, Obs. 
 
F 
 
 /':x/':a'C7s£ I. IX. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES Continued. 
 
 ^/-clause in Oratio obliqua. 
 
 4-69. If :i veil) of xiiiiniij or thiiikinij is iiisrittil ln'foic tln' prin 
 clpal claii.sc of a coiuiitionMl sciitciicc, the vcrl* of that ihiiisr will of 
 c'oiii-sc pass fioiii tti«' Indicative or subjunctive mood into tli«> inflnltlve 
 (81), wliich rc)»i»'SfTits tlic Kii;.'lish fmit*- vt'il» witli "tliat" |inti\t(l. 
 
 (i.) With th«' ii| odosis, or iiiaiii clause, of snilt lut's uiid*! Ki i.i. I., 
 tills will ;;ivc no dirtitiilty ; in tltose tliat fall iindtr iJi i.k II., the 
 auhjnnctiv*', ans\v»'iiii;j t(» the Kurdish irmihl, mnild hoi'i , will lu" soiiit'- 
 wlmt lou^hlyj represented hy the future in -nm with i ssi and 
 f Ilium respectively. (See 36.) 
 
 Amem {\ would htve) will he repre.sented hy {ilico) wf aiimi in inn 
 
 ISSI\ 
 
 Aimirem and arnaviiigem (I would have loved), by (ilifo) im: 
 miinfininn fniMxe. 
 
 (ii.) Tlie vltU in tlie» S/'-clause will, in all sucli Lasc.*^, W in 
 the subjunctive mood; the indicative lias no pro|t('i' ]da('(' 
 in any claust' dependent on a verb in uratio ohiiquu. (444.) 
 
 470. (i.) Tlins with sentences \nider Kule I. (452.) 
 
 Oratio recta. Oratio ohliqiin. 
 
 (a) Si hoc dico, erro, will become (ilii'it) me, .tihor dicain. errare. 
 
 (/>) Si hoc (heebam, errabam „ {dicit)\\w, si hoc dicen'in, erra- 
 
 visse. 
 ((•) N/ /»or dixi erravi „ {(licit) n\e, si hoc ili.nr i in, vrny- 
 
 visse. 
 (</) Si hoc dieani (fut.) errubo „ (dicit) me, si hoc dieam, erra- 
 
 turum esse. 
 
 (ii.) If, as in narrative is more usual, the verb of saying 
 is in a historic tense. (177, b.) 
 
 Oratio ohliqua. 
 (a) and (6) will become (dixit) me, si hoc dioerem, errare. 
 
 (c) „ (diiit) nie, s('/'0(' dixisseni, i'lravisse (o/'dixeriiii). 
 
 ((/) „ ((/t.u7; me, i»t/«t>cdicereni, erraluruni es.se. 
 
 •J9.'. 
 
29(5 
 
 CONDrriONAT. CLAUSES iir. 
 
 [Ex. LIX. 
 
 ilfr 
 
 ^ 
 
 J i 
 
 !■ 
 
 
 M 
 
 471. liiit wlicii, as is inon; iisiiul, tlio future perfect is 
 used ill iIm' protasis to a futility clause, care must be 
 taken. 
 
 Onitii) nrfn. Oratio ohJ'upia. 
 
 N/ lioc (lixfin, iTialto, will lieconic (dicit) iih\ ai hoc <iixeritn, prra- 
 
 liiiuiii I'sse, liiit 
 (dixit) ////', si line (lixisseni, irra- 
 turiiin c.s'.sr. 
 
 Tliat is, after a ])ast verlt, expressed or iiuidied, of 7^t?'- 
 rtifit;;/, i]\i'. future perfect of omtio rccfn ])asses into the 
 pluperfect, alter a pn.^int vi'rl) into the perfect, suhjuiic- 
 tiv(^ 
 
 Ohii. — Tlio future jhrfref of tlio iiidicat ivc of oritio reeia luis ii 
 double sens*', /»/»?•(' and jnisf (sIhiU Imee) ; lioili caiiiint be ri'prcst'iited 
 in the snlijunctive ; acconlintjly Latin represents only the past sense, 
 Kn<^lish sometimes only the future, sometimes tlie past very 
 vaguely. 
 
 Oratio re.eta. Oratio ohliqiui. 
 
 Emj. If 'o.Vfv he (/ocs this he .«(//<»//, He said that if he xhould once do, 
 or will, die. or onee iliil, this, he shoiM, ov 
 
 would, die. 
 Jjt/. Si line fecerit, inorivtnr. Kuin ti lioe feoisset, moritii rum fore. 
 
 Or A7, .s7 ,, ,, viorieudumrrit. Ei, ai ,, ,, moriendunij'ore. 
 
 »> >» 
 
 4'72. With sentences under \\v\.v. II. (453^ there will he no change 
 in the mood of the .vi-chiuse ; the tense will of course vary with that 
 oiihe \*}vh oi nay ing ov thiulciuij. 
 
 Oratio reeta. Oratio obliqiia. 
 
 Si hoc ilieaui, erreiu, will become (dieit) me, fii hoe dicam, erra- 
 
 turum esse. 
 (dixit) nie, si hoc dicerem, erra- 
 turum esse. 
 
 >S'i /((»(• dicerem, erratem : ■! '. .' i < '"<' ** /'"<^ dicerem, erraturinn 
 ' ' I duit I 
 
 fuisse. If I had hee/n saifituj this. I should liave been in error. 
 
 (Si hoe dixiasem, erravissem;^ ,■ -A vie si hoc dixisseiu, erratu- 
 ' ' ( dixit ) 
 
 rum fuirt.se. If I had said, etc. 
 
 ' Remember how often our " //' ouee. " is expressed by the Latin 
 future perfect (a* »)»7 need rarely be in.serted), and this tenae and its 
 representatives in tiie subjunctive must always be used if tlie time in- 
 dicateil is. tliougli still future, prior to that of the principal verb. 
 
Ex. LIX.] 
 
 coxDirroxAr. clai\ses in. 
 
 2()7 
 
 * 
 
 ■473. The poriphnisi.s for the future, iirid cuiit itiiiciit futun-, 
 passive must not he forj^otten. (193, iii. aiul v.) 
 
 ('i) '' He said tliat the eity iroidd In ttikriiy if Caesar <//(/ imt come 
 to its aid." {Ui'.iif) itrhnti, nisi suhveiiisset i'<iisni\, eaptum 
 iri, or, fore ut vrltK aipiirtiir {riii>finii fine is found, hut 
 rarely J. 
 
 (Xisi siihiiiiirit \\iH\\il mean, »< /c «'ominj,', or ifrn rnnhi to come.) 
 
 {!>) " He said that the city would hari hnii taken if ("aesar had 
 nt>t conu' to its aid,'' or '' hnt for ('{wxnr Im rim/ come," etc. 
 (Dixit) Ciwiidr nisi .suhvenisset, futurum fuisse id i.rlis 
 cupentnr. 
 
 In orntlo trrdi we should have u() iirhs, nisi suhveiieiit ('msur, 
 capietnr, [h) urhs capta fuisset, or niiii potnit (see 461), nisi suhvenis- 
 set <\hsnr. 
 
 474. Siirh appaivnt violations of Kui.K 1. a.s {tf) niorhin 
 tnilil dommliavit j)t(tir, si ])Uoiiassein, {h) cxiM'ctahat 
 Caesar, sl hash's ]ios5;et aj>/>)'ii/a'ri\ are botli instances ot 
 virtual oratio ahliipia. (Sfc^ 449.) 
 
 ((») is *' IMy father threatened me with death, if I should Ji'jht, or 
 fonf/ht :" (h) "Caesar was waiting, in hopes of In in<j aide to crush the 
 enemy." 
 
 In (a) si puynasst ni is not really the protasis or adverbial clause 
 U) dinKnti<(vit, wiiich is quite iniipialiHed : it heloni^s ri-ally to a su))- 
 jtressed chiuse contained in inortf in, such as /'on id jhriirin ; it is 
 therefore a perfectly reijular instance of a .st-clause in orntio ohJiqiitt : 
 " He ,svii(i that I should die if I fou<^dit" (his words were "st putj. 
 /((iveris moriere"). 
 
 In [}}) si ]ioss(t does not qualify cipectidxit, which is (piite uncjuali- 
 fied. It is u.sed in the sen.se " in hopes that,' and it answers to a sup- 
 pressed clause expressing what ?<;a.s in ('(nsitr's mind, "intendiii'^ to 
 u.se the chance, in case," etc. It is therefore virtual ondio obliqna, 
 ami the mood is quite regular. 
 
 475. How to express "would have" in the principal 
 clause ot" a eonclitional sentence after consecutive ///, or a 
 dependent interrogation. 
 
 The pluperfect subjunctive is not used, but gives place to the per- 
 fect subjunctive of the modal verb possuin, or of the ]»eriphrasis 
 formed by Ov^ future in -riis, or gerund or gerundive with sum. (461.) 
 
 Quid tu, si t:niL adtsscs, dixisses, will become rogo, quid tu, si tnni 
 
 adesscs, ilictuius fueris, 
 Si id fccissi'in, periissem, will become id (" so that ") si id 
 
 ylctW/H, periturus fuevim, or pereundum inihi fueiit, (115.) 
 
298 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES III. 
 
 [Ex. LIX. 
 
 
 Some a<l(litional examples of more or less exceptional 
 const ructions are added for careful observation. 
 
 1. Dclmisti enim^ eliam si faho in Knupicionnii vcnisscs. viihi 
 
 vjnoKcere. You o\XfrY,t io have i'ora'ivf'n me, or \t von hi fnnr, 
 lu'cn your <luty to forgive me, even if you had Vjeen falsely 
 suspected. (461.) 
 
 2. A hit I cirUvnifM aderat, ni Fnhivn rem expedisset. A desjterate 
 
 contest was at hand (ironhl have taken place) bad not 
 Fahius solved the difficulty. (463.) 
 
 3. I hi ernt wansurvs, i^i ire perrexisset. It was theri' he tmiihl 
 
 hove stayed, had he continued his journey. (461.) 
 
 4. l^hiid enini fvtvrnm fuit, si res ayitari cmpta esset. For 
 
 what irould have happened, if once the <juestion ha<i Ix'jfun 
 to be discussed. (461.) 
 
 5. IS\'<ine hoxtem snstiiure potersint, ni cohnrte.t illae se objecis- 
 
 sent. And they could iwt have maintained them.selvos 
 airainst the enemy, but for those cohorts' exposure of them- 
 selves. (461.) 
 
 6. Virijines si effugissent, im])leturae nrbem fnvivUn erant. Had 
 
 the maidens escaped, they would have spread disorder 
 throu<jh the whole city. (461.) 
 
 7. Praeclare viceranuis, nisi fvgienfem Avtotiium recepisset 
 
 LijiiduK. We should have won a splendid victory, had not 
 Lepidus given a reception to Antonv when in full flight. 
 
 (463.) 
 
 8. Si in hoc erravi, id niihi velini ignoscas. If I have blundered 
 
 in this, I beg you to forgive me. (462.) 
 
 9. Circnmfundmitnr hostes, si quem adifnm reperire possent. 
 
 The enemy swarm (historic pres.) round, in hopes o/ finding 
 some means of approach {with the view of breaking in, if), etc. 
 
 (474.) 
 
 10. Praeiiiium proposuit, si quis dncem interfecisset. He offered 
 
 a prize, i.e. said that he would give a prize, in case any one 
 should kill the leader. (474.) 
 
 11. Nmitium ad te wm, si forte von audisses, I .sent you a 
 
 messenger, in case you had not heard. (We must supply 
 nt audires^ etc.) (474.) 
 
 12. Noil recnsavit quo minus ret extremo ."(piritii, si qvain openi 
 
 reipuhlicae ferre posset, e.rperireiur. He did not flinch from 
 trying even with his latest breath whether he could not give 
 some aid to his country — lit. from making the experiment 
 in hopes that he could . . . (474.) 
 
Ex. LIX.] 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES III. 
 
 im 
 
 i \ 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 A. 
 
 1. Did you imagine tliat, if all the rest were cut oft" 
 either by the sword or by lainiiie, you alone would be 
 saved ? 2. He feared, he said, that unless he consented 
 to do everything that the king should command, he would 
 never be allowed to return to his native land. 3. He wili 
 bear, he says, cheerfully his own destitution and that ' of 
 his family, if once he be freed from this degrading suspicion. 
 4. He warned them of the extent- and suddenness ^ of the 
 crisis, that they could win the day if they were ready to 
 show themselves brave men and worthy of their forefathers, 
 but that if they hesitated or hung back, all the neighbour- 
 ing tribes would soon be in arms. 5. He felt convinced 
 of this, that if once he crushed the barbarians who had 
 long been^ infesting the mountains, the way to Ilaly would 
 be open to himself and his soldiers. 6. He said that he 
 would never have imparted this story to you, had he not 
 when * leaving home promised his father to conceal nothing 
 fiom such dear friends as^ yourselves. 7. He felt con- 
 vinced, he said, that unless they had placed so experienced 
 a general as yourself at the head of a veteran army, the 
 city would have been stormed within a week. 8. He said 
 he would never have pardoned you so monstrous a crime, 
 had not your aged father thrown ^ himself at his feet and 
 implored him to spare you. 
 
 B. 
 
 The following Exercise is recapitulatory ; the sentences contain various 
 
 kinds of i/-clauses. 
 
 1. n you are at Rome, I scarcely imagine you are, but 
 if you are, please write at once. 2. H" the enemy reaches 
 the citv, there will be reason^ to fear a dreadl'ul massacre. 
 3. I sent you a letter of Caesar's, in case you wished to 
 
 1 See 345. » See 174, b and e. 
 
 •'Tense? (See 181.) Mood? (See 444, 449.) •» St-e 406, «o^e '^. 
 
 '' 224, Ohx. 2. * See 267. Use passive (or middle) participle. 
 
 ' " must (fe>j«€ ?) be feared." 
 
:v)o 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES III. 
 
 tii 
 
 i« 
 
 -ii? 
 
 i 
 
 ill 
 
 'I' I 
 
 [Ex. LIX. 
 
 read it. 4. He (Icclarcd tliat, il was altsolutely iiii|n)ssil»l(' 
 tor \\\K\ (Icniiaiis t<» win tlic day, if tlicy ('iinaL;('(l in liatllc 
 i»('f"(»r(» the n(!\v iiiouii. T). If ytui arc ready to make some 
 exertion, von will lake tli(! ('it\^ (J. If yon once exert 
 yourselves, yon will take tiie city. 7. lie said liiat it' tliey 
 onc(^ exerted llieniselvcs, tliey wonld take tiie cil\'. J*'. As 
 the nei!i4lil)ourin,tf tribes wkww all jealons ot" his tame, ho I'elt 
 that it" he and his ])eo]»le surrcndei'cd their arms, their 
 doom' was certain. 1). If anything falls out amiss,- we yliall 
 inak(^ you responsihle. 10. \\k\ threatened him with vio- 
 lence iind every species'"' of ]>unishment, if he entered the 
 senate-house. 11. It was certainly ' a wonderful sjteech ; 
 I coidd not imitate it if I would; |)eihai>s I would not if 
 1 could. VI. Tlu! Dictator announced a heavy i-enalty 
 in case any \\\w. should tiuht without his permission. 13. 
 They t"eared that if they oncc^ departecl without success, 
 they would lose everything fortlm sake, of which they had 
 takt'n uj» arms. 14. Thc^y now at last ]terceived that if, 
 at his suggestion, they had consented to abandon the ]ioi>ular 
 party, and join the nobles, they would have lost all theii' 
 ])rivileges and their freedom, if not their lives, IT). If you 
 do this, you will ])ossil)ly incur some loss; if you do not 
 you will undoubtedly have acted dishonourably; it is t"or''* 
 you to decide which of the two you ])refe:' to do. IG. If 
 any one evades nulitary service, he shall be declared 
 int"amous; if any one has fears for his own safety, let him 
 at once lay down his arms, and leave his native land safe 
 and sound. 
 
 ^ " were doomed to certiiin destnietioii." 
 ^ Seem, otherwise than ircl/, •' Simply ojiinis. 
 
 * Sdiir, " certainly," in the sense of making an admission. 
 » 291, Obs. 2. 
 
 l.^ 
 
i I 
 
 EXERCISE LX. 
 
 CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 Quanquarn. quamuis, etc. 
 
 476. r*}' concessive clauses we mean such adverbial 
 
 clauses as are introduced in Enjjjlish by "although" 
 
 and the like, in Latin liv the conjunctions ctsi {tanwfsi, 
 
 ctiaiitsi)) (juaiKfiitiii, qmnnvis, licH. (Sec Intr. T)!*, ^.) 
 
 Siicli clauses are called ronrenxire because they a(hnit (»r coiu'nJr, 
 soinetliin<;, in sphe of which the statement made in the main clause 
 is true ; its truth is emphasised by the contrast. 
 
 477. Their syntax is not diflicult. 
 
 RuLK. — When the point conceded in the concessive 
 clause is admitted as a fact the indicative is used ; (Other- 
 wise, when only conceded for the sake of argument, the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 The ditt'erence is still occasionally marked in Enirlish : "though he 
 ?.s- guilty,'"' "though he he guilty ;" "though he tv<iH guilty," "tlu/Ugh 
 he were guilty ;'' but the nearly obsolete use of the English subjunc- 
 tive is a precarious guide. 
 
 (a) In the sense of the Latin indicative we constantly use such 
 phrases as, in spite of, or notioithstanding, his guilt, or, guilty .t.s- he 
 is, etc. 
 
 (b) In that of the subjunctive, whatever his g\n\t= however guilty 
 Ije is (l)e), ivtre he guilty, etc. 
 
 478. i^As^ {tamctsi), when it contrasts one fad with 
 another /hr/, is joined with the indicative. 
 
 i*itsi mous Ci'veinui Iter iiin)ediebat, tamen ad fin('i> Arrer- 
 iiorum pcrvoiit. Although the Cevennes were in the 
 way of his nuirch (or in spite of . . . heiny in the way) 
 lie reached the territory of the Arverni. 
 
 r>nt when both the concession and the other statement 
 are ])ur(dy imaginary, the subjunctive is used, 
 
 Kijo etsi abesst'in, fumt'ii nnn ceteris iiie eonileiiniasses ? 
 Though 1 lidd been absent {all the time), irould. you yet 
 Jiare condemned me with all the rest ] 
 
 That is, the etui clinse follows the mood, as a rule, of the main 
 clause, precisely as the ;>/ clause, of which it is only another fnrm. 
 
 Mi 
 
302 
 
 COS^CESSIVE CLA USES. 
 
 [Ex. LX. 
 
 I 
 
 r'lS !. '. ■ '■ 
 
 
 479. Qtimqurcm (a douljled qimm), which contrasts one 
 fitrf, vvitli another, naturally takes the indicative. It 
 mIiouM never be joined with the subjunctive unless in 
 oratio obliqua. 
 
 Homani (|iiiin(iuam itiaeir d ciistu fffmi erant, tamen ohviam 
 
 lioxtilnis procrdunt. Tlioiii^h the Rnm;tns were fjitif^Ufil with 
 
 tlie march and the h«'at, yet they advanced (historic present) 
 
 to meet the enemy. 
 
 Ohserve how often tanun, "yet," "still," is inserted in the main 
 
 ciaust^ to mark the contrast; Init <it tamen should never bo used 
 
 except witli sinj^le wonls. (See 466.) 
 
 Ohn. — QuatK/naiib is often used co-ordinaUhj ' to introduce an en- 
 tirely fresh sentence in contrast with what precedes it, and is then = 
 "and yet ;" cf. the co-ordinate use of quuhi. (436.) 
 
 480. (i.) QnHmvis, on the other hand, requires a sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 QiKinivis sit magna e.rpedafio, fatmn earn vinces. Although 
 expectations are {or, may be) great, you will surpass 
 them (or, Jwwever great are {be) the expectations formed 
 of you). 
 
 QaamviA = quam vlx,"^ "as you will," must have a subjunctive from 
 the nature of the case, as the above sentence would origmally be, 
 " Li't expectations he as great an you please, you will surpass: them." 
 
 Oha. — Qnamvis, like yiisi (466), is sometimes joined closely with a 
 single word {qiMtttvin audax, "however bold," "whatever his bold- 
 ness ''), without a verb. 
 
 (ii.) Licet, " although," is simply the impersonal verb, 
 " it is granted" (197). It should therefore never be used 
 with tlie indicative. 
 
 Licet inid'Kpie 2>er}cnla impendeant, tamen siihibo. TJioin/h 
 dang«'rs threaten me on every side, I will face them. 
 
 481. As in English, so in Latin, the same idea as is 
 denoted by the concessive conjunctions "although" 
 iiv.anquam, etc., may be expressed in many other ways. 
 
 ' Cf. tlie opening of the fine passage in fieorgic I. 469 — 
 "Tempore qunnquavi illo,"etc. 
 
 ^ QiKiniris is properly a separate clause, "as you r/(oo.sv'," and the 
 subjunctive is /».sw(v (144) ; it is sometimes even inflected : i/nn}v volet 
 nuicti'tur. ilit. ) let liiiu delay "•»' nnicfi a.'< In- i'/ionsi.'<. Hut in later Latin 
 its oriyin, and tliat of //c^ l»ei aine obliterated, and they were used 
 freely with the indicative, juiunjua))! witli the subjunctive. 
 
"T 
 
 
 Ex. LX.] 
 
 CONCESS/VK CLAUSES. 
 
 3()3 
 
 Thus "Though he is an excellent man, he does wrong sonietiincs," 
 may be translated not only by, Quanquam hoiuo optininn rsf, tanien 
 inhrdnm ptccut, but by {n) Homo optiinus ille (luidem, se«l iiitinhim 
 pecait (334, iv.) ; or (ft) tit ''"granted that") sit homo ilh' opfitniiK, 
 taiion intirtlum pecrat ; or (c) lt<i homo opt imnsisf ut intinlum pectet, 
 i.e. "«o/rtr onlj/" etc. (Ill) ; or (rf) ISU (jussive) homo ilhoptimuK, 
 taiiuii intenlum percat; or {e) very commonly by the use ot mtin' 
 in one clause, followed by an advirmtiiy coujiDiction (Intr. HO, <•) in 
 the other, — ren sane difficUis, scd tntiioi inriMiijanda, *'' thoiujh a 
 difficult (juestion, yet afill one that demands investigation ;" or (/) by 
 the mere participle, — hoc crimine absolutus, /itW/ tnmni condniniotnK 
 <;.s7, "//to M^/t acquitted on this charge he was found guilty (tf theft." 
 (406.) 
 
 For the use of qui for " although " see 609, h. 
 „ qnum „ 431. 
 
 „ sicut . . . ita „ 492 (i.). 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 1. Though he feels neither remorse nor sluinie for tliis 
 deed, yet lie shall pay me the penalty of his crime. 
 2. Even though it were quite impossible to pardon his 
 fault, yet you ought^ to have taken into account his 
 many services to tlie nation. 3. Whatever his guilt,'-^ 
 whatever his criminality, no one has a right to indict him 
 in his absence and to condemn him unheard. 4. P^ntircly 
 guilty as he is, and absolutely deserving of condign 
 punishment, yet I cannot help comparing his present fallen 
 and low condition with his former good fortune and 
 renown. 5. Miserable as it is for an innocent man to be 
 susjiected and icharged, yet it is better for the innocent 
 to be acquitted tlian for the guilty not to be accused. 
 6, However criminui he had bt^en, however worthy of 
 every kind of punishment, yet it would have"^ been bctt'Tfoi' 
 ten guilty persons to be acquitted, than for one innocent 
 to be found guilty. 7. In spite of his having had th(! 
 sovereignty and supreme power offered and intrusted to 
 liiui by the unanimous vote* of his countrymen, he long 
 refused to take any part in politics, and was the only 
 person in my day who attained to the liigliest distinclions 
 
 ' Gerundive. (389.) 
 '^ Moody (163.) 
 
 '^ I'sc adjectivL'. 
 •* ^' umber. 
 
 (477. h.> 
 
304 
 
 COA'CF.SSrVF. CI. At 'SES. 
 
 [Ex. LX. 
 
 jij^iiinsMiis \vill,}in(l aliiinst uimIlt (•(>iii])nlsi()ii. 8. 'rii<»iii;li' 
 I'nu'd froiii this jijtpKilicusion, I Wiis soon susjx'ctvd oT a 
 (liirkcr ciiiiuf, iiiKl ])(!rliJi|»s Iml I'or your li;iviii^' couu' to 
 my aid, nii^lil liuve ralUiii a vicliiir^ to llic liaticd ami 
 S('ii(Mii('s (»r my (Muniiics. I). Many' as arc tiu^ evils iliat 
 yoii liav(^ ondnrcd, you will one day, 1 still liclii've,'* not 
 oidy cnjify good iortuue, but a rarer gift," liapiiiness. 
 
 » 481,/. ^ Metaphor. (Sou Vocab. ) 
 
 ' Mftaphor; (17)="be«!n cnishcdby.'' 
 
 * " Although ... HO many " {tot, 477, a). » 32, h. 
 
 * " Lift," iiutaphor: "that which (67) more rarely falls to men's lot. 
 
EXERCISE LXI. 
 CAUSAL AND EXPLANATORY CLAUSES. 
 
 482. \\y 11k'S(> arc ineiuit siu'h subordinate' iulvcrMr.l 
 cliiu.ses as \i}\(' a reason or explanation of tlio staicimMit, 
 etc., made by the verli in the ])i'iiu'ipal clause. Tliev are 
 intro(hice(l in En<.;li.sli hy "liecause," "inasmuch as," 
 "scein*^ that," " whereas," "considurinj^ tliat," etc. (Intr. 
 59, d.) 
 
 483. The conjunctions quod, quia, "because," qvoniam 
 (i.e. ij/'umjam), quandoquid^m, " since," are followed by an 
 indicative mood. 
 
 Vos, inqiiit, (juoniam jam vox est, domwn disced Hr. Do 
 you, says ho, since it is now night, depart home. 
 
 (>/>.s.— The.se conjunctions are all formed from the rdniirc, and like 
 tlie relative (84) often have a ihmonstmiire jtarticle or phrase corre- 
 spondint,' to tliem in the other clause. Cf. taiuni in concessive, itidrco 
 in final, I'lauses, etc. (See 107.) 
 
 Idcirco, eo, haiic ob causam, etc., ad tc srriho quod iiii id fan re 
 ji(.<.ti)iti. The rmson of my writin*; is (hat you told nu> to do so. 
 Nvllam aliani ob causam . . f/vmw quod, etc. The one und 
 only cause, or wofice . . is that, etc. 
 
 484. All of these conjunctions however may be joined 
 with the subjunctive, on either of two orounds. 
 
 (a) The i)rincipal clause may be in ora/io oh/i- 
 qua. (446.) 
 
 Jussil cos, (juoiiiani iti>x esset, discrdcrr. 
 {!>) T\\v quod clause may be in virtual oroflo oh/iqua. 
 
 (See 448.) 
 
 That is, we may supply in thoui;lit the words "as he (they) said," 
 or "thnuulit," after the cau.sd conjunction; or translate (jiiod hy 
 ''a.ssertinj^i^that," "under the impression that," "in the l)elief that." 
 Ahire rain it, (luoniam nox esset. Since it was, as he said, ni^dit. 
 
 ' 'I'lie connexion of cause .and etfect may be .stilted by a ro-(>nliii<ilr 
 clause with causal or inferent';i1 .•..njumtioiis (hitr. ')(), d and i ) : 
 h'l'dlisfl : iiiniih (> \i.'\tuv\ ov ijaiid nd'iisti vw'wn; but the coustrjicticm 
 of .sucii lo-onliiiate coiijum tioiis presents no diHioulty, as they luivt- no 
 etfect on tli.- i.ioi.il of t'- v' 
 
!!' 
 
 
 \'0 
 
 SrW CMLSA I. ANP EX ri.ANATOKY CLAUSES. (Ex. LXI. 
 
 0/;.s. This use (tf till! sultjmiftivc in a </*/<>(/-clau.sc' is t'Xf(>tM|in;f|y 
 com null after words of praiHing, hlimiintj, accusinij, adiniriiuj, nnii- 
 pInluiiKj, iiumilvrimj. 
 
 /ill' ririhiix <idin t'rnt. <(iio(l ht/ix violasset. The kinj^ was hated 
 l)y his siil»jerts, httMiise (thfif filt tliaf) he had hrokeii the law, 
 »/•, iix haviii),', or, for liavin^ {<is tlh't/ thniujhl), Itrokeii tlie law. 
 
 Violarat would he a statement Diade and accredited by the historian, 
 *'f()r haviii},' (as he had) broken the law.''" 
 
 It is naturally most comnum after verbs of complainimjf hlamimj, 
 etc. 
 
 MUii irancitnr, (piod earn nej^lexerim. Becau.se (an he. ndijK or 
 fanciex) I have neglected him, (ih having neglected him. 
 
 Tlic. ruspuusiUility of the statement is .sljifted from tlio 
 speaker or writer to tlie subject of the principal verb. 
 (See 448.) 
 
 485. WluMi a reason is mentioned only to be set aside, 
 7U)ti </!((), " not tliat," n())i qiiiu, " not but wliat," an; used, 
 always with the subjunctive. 
 
 S(»iiietimes the reason avciptal follows, with ai'd qaoil and the 
 Indicative. 
 
 Non (|Uo in'i vie taedi'at, or, non (piin me ames, sed rpiod ahiir 
 cupio. yof that 1 am tired of you, or not hat what you love 
 me (or, not that you doiiH), hut hecanxe I am anxious to depart. 
 
 Qnnm with the subjunctive is often causal (see 430). So also is 
 (/»/■ (see 609,1. 
 
 m 
 
 '■nil 
 
 486. (Jii'x/ ("that") often answers to tlie Kniflisli " tiu- 
 fact /liiif," or, " (;/," and is used to explain tlu^ ubjcct or 
 subject o\' a verb, especially in apposition with a neuter 
 pronoun. 
 
 Ma</iiiiin <'sf Jinc, ijuod rirfir)' vir.fis p.-percit. This is no 
 small tliinu;, I moan the fad of his havini^ sjtarcd the 
 vaiKiuished when victorious. 
 
 (hiiiffo ill ml, ((uod /vv/r;// pafriaifuiiic pnxlidit.^ 1 pass 
 over flic fad if his haviug betrayed his kiug and 
 country ; or simply, " his betrayal of," etc. 
 
 ' Sometimes a kind of virtual oratio obHi/ua is use<l, where there is 
 only a single speaker, who looks on himself as. so to speak, /iro ftfvsoiis : 
 Oinitto . . . ipiod prodkh'rit, I pass over my belief that he betrayed. 
 
r' 
 
 Ex. LXI.] CAUSAL AND EXPLANATORY CLAILSLS. 
 
 :«07 
 
 Ohn. — Tlii.s Y'""' with the irulicative (or sul»iim<'tiv«'^ will l»p foiiixl 
 very usct'iil in translating the Kn^lish verbal subBtantive of tin- intMiit 
 f>r pt'it'cct tens*', t'.ij. "your no iiitifj or hnviinj X'liil this,'' aiiil such 
 abstract nouns as "oirfiinistance," " fact," " reason," " rctleMmi. " 
 
 Of conrHc it cannot Iw used for "that" after verlts sentlendl et 
 declarandi. (See 32, n.) JIhtd dico, (juod iKifrinin fniHliilisti woiiM 
 mean, not, " I ntii/ tlmt yoii liave betrayed your country, ' but, " 1 iimin 
 //<»'/i'«7 of yctur having' betrayed,'' etc. 
 
 ■487i Notice also the phrases — 
 
 (a) I'tnipfuniinii' accidit ({Uod vetiuti. Your nniiini/ was f. /// 
 
 fortunate (only substituted for at (123) when an <tilr,rl> is 
 joined with luridit). 
 
 (b) Accedit quod tloiiii non fst. There is the lulditiomil irai<int 
 
 that he is not at home. 
 (r) Quod scribis enm ndiissi', niihi virum sit diihito. Ax to ijimr 
 writing to say that he has returned, I doubt its truth. 
 
 OiVs-. — Witli verbs of rejoicing, etc., there is no perceptible ditfeien«e 
 between the intinitive (41, h) and the (/»of/-clause : 'J'e rediisse ijandio 
 = (luod rediisti (jandio. The latter emphasises i\w Jnvt of the return. 
 
 E.ivrriHi' Gl. 
 
 1. Tho reason of my .soinewhal dislikiiii' in iiiv voiitli 
 one .so attai'lu'd to me as^ yotn- excellent relative, was 
 \\\y beino unable to bear liis want of .steadiness and 
 ]»rincij»le. 2. 1 am hated by every- bad eitizeii for 
 iiaviiio' been the very hist to uphold tlie national cause, 
 and beeau.se I liave con.stantly disdained to liatter tlie 
 conqueror. 3. I received-^ the thtinks of pinliiniieiit jind 
 tlu! nation for liaving been ahnie^ in not dcspnii Iulj of (lie 
 commonwealtli. 4. It was scarcely ]io.ssil»le' for you not 
 to incur tlie hatred'"' of yom- countrymen, not that you hiul 
 been J4uilty of belrayin*,' your countiy, but because you 
 had tlie couriioe to be the advocate of a burdensome and 
 dista.steftil, liowever" nece.s.sary, peace, f). All honoured 
 your uallant father for having sacrificed the unanimous 
 offer** of a throne to the true and more substantial ^lory of 
 
 ' 224, and nhs. 2. 
 
 ' = 'thanks were returned to me by ..." 
 5 132, «'. '^ PL, why? B«'cause 
 
 " Vse either lUe (/itidem (481, a) or si . 
 t/iitnnriK. (480, iths.) 
 
 " Same construction as that in 417. 
 
 - 375. 
 
 ■* See c2. and 484, O/m. 
 
 ' countrynien "' is plural. 
 
 . at tamiii (466, c) or 
 
 m 
 
 t '^■' 
 
91 
 
 SOS CAVSAI. ANr> EXPI.ANATOKY Cl.^WSES. (Ex. LXI. 
 
 ^'iviii^' trccfloni to his country. 0. Tliouj^h tlio wliolc 
 world is iiii^'ry with iiic lor haviiiLj piinloiKMl (as tli«\y 
 Siiy-) my ("iithcr's iiiiinh'n'rs, yt't I shall never he ashamed 
 of tlic rellexion' ol havinii s|»ared the vaiujuished in the 
 hour of victory. 7. As lor your havitij^r slill fi ^'rud<j(e 
 against nie, under the im|tression* that six years a<,M) I 
 injured you in your ahsence, and saeriliced your interests 
 to my own t,Min (/>/.), my only motive in wishinj^' to 
 reliile such a charge is heeause 1 count your fiiendshijf 
 worth seekiuLr. S. Ami now, in spite of his hein;^; inc^ap- 
 ahl(! of any such haseiu'ss, he was the ohject of universal 
 unpojtularity, as liavin,u- supplied the enemy with funds, 
 and treated the ollice with which the nation liad intrusted 
 him as a sourc(^ of disj^racelid ji;ain ; though no one was 
 ever m(»r(! in(iii)ahle of so hhick a crime. 
 
 " Siuiu' coiistructidn as that in 417. 
 • 486, O/w. anil noU. 
 
 " Sec 484, b. 
 
/■: x /•: A' c / s /•: i.xii. 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 Proportion. 
 
 488. r>y comparative clauses wv mciiu \w\\\ sik li lulvcr- 
 bial clauses (iiitr. }^'J-84) as cxpivss lihnrss, injiiinnuf, or 
 the (tppo.sifc, witli what is stated, asked, or ortleicd, in the 
 principal chiuse. 
 
 Ho noted an I had nrilcred him; why was he treated worse ihtiti 
 he di'Hcrrt'd f Do «.•< [hid ijon ; he hehiived an thoitfjh he iKirt' mad; 
 ure insliinces of such clauses in Knjjlish. 
 
 In Latin the niunher of conjunctions or conjunctional phraseB u^cil 
 to introduce .such clauses is very X-AXgv ; nt {xicat), qininadnn-ilinn, 
 atqnv, («c), qiiain, quasi, vtlnt (si), tanquam (si), quasi, or nl. 
 (Intr. 50,/.) 
 
 They correspond also to a number of demonstrative adverbs or 
 phnwe.**, which stand to them in the same relation as is to qui, tautus 
 to quaiifus, idrirro, or adro, to ut, tanon to quaiiquam, etc. 
 
 Such are ita, .stV, pro co, periade, paritcr, potius, alitir, sirus, etc. 
 
 489. AH such clauses, both in English and Latin, fall 
 naturally into two classes. 
 
 Class I. — Those in which the comparison made in the 
 subordinate clause is stated, or jrrniinttal, as soinethin<,' 
 real, as for example : — 
 
 He was punished as he deserved. Pcrinde ac meritus est, poenas 
 pcrsol'vit. 
 
 Class II. —Those in which such comparison is intro- 
 duced as a mere conceptmi of the mind, something 
 imaginary or uyircal, not stated as afad; as — 
 
 He Wiis punished as though he had desirved it. Periude ac si, or 
 ut si, or (juasi, meritus esset, poenas persolvit. 
 
 In Class T. the indicative is the rule (except in oratio 
 ohlujua), in Cla.ss II. the subjimctiye. 
 
 309 
 
310 
 
 COM PA RA TIVE CI.Al KSES. 
 
 [Ex. LXII. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 Class I.— Comparative Clauses with the Indicative. 
 
 490. ()lisci'V(! tliat. tlir ideas of ///yv/cs.;, fV///^//////, 
 dHJ'i r(iit(\ etc., Avliicli arc ot'tcii cxjd'essed by mln rhial or 
 (•(iiijiiiictiiniiil clauses, may be othei'Nvise expi't'ssed botli 
 ill Kii^lish and Latin. 
 
 (i.) In li.ititi tlic ])liic(' of ih«> conjunction is often takcii by tlic 
 relative, /.<. we Imvc an acljectival (i'(»rivrativt') instt-ad of an advi'i- 
 l)ial clause. 
 
 Taiita rst ti iiijtisfax (]iianti*iii nnniquuw (iiitat vitli. The storm is 
 greater fh m I t n r sdiv hifoir, or, is unparalleled in my experi- 
 ence. (Sie 84, 88.) 
 
 (ii.) Tn Latin, ^iit to a far j^reater extent in Enj,dish, the phice of 
 tlie adverbial clause of comparison is takyn by an adverbial phrase 
 included in a simple sentence. (Litr. 70.) 
 
 Thus in the compound sentence, "he was punished rrs hi' thsirrnl,^' 
 the adverbial clause may in both lantruages be expressed in three 
 ditlerent ways: (1) by an (Klnrhiid clause; (2) by an ailjictival 
 clause ; (3) by an culvirbial phnise, or an adnrh. 
 
 (1) i'lriiiiic. ac meritus est poruaH jxr.so/yif, He wa.v punished 
 
 (IS III', (li'si mil. 
 {'2) l\)iiias (|uas del)uit j«t.s'o/i'*7. He paid the penalty irliirh he 
 
 iinrifiil. 
 (3) Pro meritis, nr Uierito, or pro scelere, jweiias persolvit. He 
 
 was punished m accorilance n-ith hia (/nilt, f»r, ili'servedly. 
 
 Jn Eni,dish one of the last of these modes, the mlrerhinl phrase, is 
 far commoner than in Latin, and must constantly be translated by 
 a Latin aihurhial clause. 
 
 General Rule. 
 
 491. lu Class L — To express (a) likeness, ut ("as") 
 corresponds to ifa, sic, sometimes to ^^rrmr/f' ; atque ((Yc) 
 eorres[)oiids to pcrindv, 2^'^^'^^^i\ fifqti'^jti't'to, pvo eo, etc. 
 
 To express (/-) difference, atrjKc {ao) cori'esponds to alitvr, 
 .srcii.s ; ar niu\ qiumi U) cuntm ; quam to ^>(>i'!^^^', and otlier 
 conipKratinx. 
 
 (a) Ut sunt, ita iiominantur scyus. Their title "old men" rone- 
 sj)i,,iiis to the fact. 
 Pro eo ai', or jterinde ac, dchni. feci. I have acted /// urmnl- 
 Kinr with >nif iliitij. 
 (h) Aliter ac, or non perinde ac, 7H<Tt^i sumas. laiHlniiiiu: We 
 are not praised in proportion to our desirta. 
 ('ontra (piam poJilcitiis cs fecisti, You have acted in viola,- 
 (ion i>t ijoxr jiroinisi's, 
 
Ex. LXII.] 
 
 CO MP. I A\l Tl I '/•: CI. A L 'SES. 
 
 WW 
 
 Ohs. 1. — N.)it' tli»' rfcurn'nco of tlu' indicative nioofl, iin<l the nin- 
 stant siil)stitiitii)ii of tlic Ktij^lish adverbial and other phrases tor 
 the Latin adverbial clause. 
 
 Ohs. -2. — ^A vt'iy stronjf contrast may Itc inarkt'd l)y a dou]>\r nlif> r. 
 
 AWU'V tinii /()C/////.s- (N, alitcr fr i/i rlx Inxlic. Your Ix'liavioiir to- 
 day is iinKst incdiisi.-iti lit irith your lanirnage at that time. 
 
 Special Idioms. 
 
 492. Ut as a eoinpamtive conjuiictiuu ( = "as') lias 
 iiKiiiy list's. 
 
 (i.) Sometimes with itii, lit (or sicnf) marks a contrast, "as, or 
 vhtli: (j>. •21 i. note) one fact is true, so, on the ntlicr limid, is aiiotlier,"' 
 and is virtually fonOfi.^iri\ 
 
 IJi fiirtasse houistiiin est hoc, sic parum utile. Thuiujlt tiiis is 
 perhaps rij^dit. //</ it is scarcely expedient. 
 
 (ii.) Sometimes, with it<t, it is useil in a restrictive sense, and is 
 virtually roinlitioiKil. 
 
 Ita rintiii ut te nino. May I live safiir onhj as T love you, i.e. 
 May I die if f ih> not love ijou. (468, ml fin.) 
 
 (\u.) AVitliout ifii, it introduces a general reimirkin accordance with 
 which a j>articular fact is noticed. 
 
 Tiuii re.r, ut erat natura benignus, ownihii.^ reniam. ihtJit. There- 
 upon the kini:, //( arrorddnee ' vith the kindness of his nature, 
 forjrave them all. 
 
 (iv.) It introduces, as the Enj^dish "as," parenthetic chius^s : ut jif, 
 "as (often) lia]>iiens." ut aiimt, "as the proverb says."' 
 
 But such parentheses as, ut credo, vt arhitror, nt ridetnr, are far 
 rarer in Latin than in Eni.dish, and are used in an ojxdixjitie and >v\['- 
 depreciatory .sense, " (f.s at Ay/.s( I think," or else are irouieal, as is 
 almost invariably the parenthetic cndo. (See 32, h.) 
 
 (v.) It is used even xrithont any verb in two senses. 
 
 (a) "As you would expect." 
 
 M(((iiiu.'< paror, ut in re imprnri.'<a, fnif. The panic was i^rcat, 
 0. ira.-i natural in so unexpected an occurrence. 
 
 (b) In a restrictive, sense, " so far as could l»e expected." 
 
 iJatis intrcpide, ut in re improvisa^ se fjessit. He showed consider- 
 able presence of mind, c< tsiderinij the unexpected nature of 
 the occurrence. 
 
 ^ The same idea might be exj»resscd by (jinl erat iiiiirni li ii!i/ii!f,ifr, 
 ov pro solitd ('JH'< hpn\<ji)it(ite, or homo natura hfiiUiiiissiiiiii.'i. All these 
 aru sul).stitutes for the much nceilod pvesent participle of esnc. (224 
 Ohs. \.) 
 
.•{12 
 
 CO MP A A'. I TIVF. CI. A CSF.S. 
 
 p. 
 
 [Ex. LXII. 
 
 493. Quam {^^'v 275) L^^tiiierally introduces a clause of 
 i!k' satuc const ruction as that (jf tlic main clause. 
 
 A. <• iiltr<( siit'viit 7»'0/( sa</s cnit. Nor did lie show iiiori' severity 
 
 til. Ill Wiis iit'(X'ssiiry, — any iieiMJU-ss severity. 
 .\i).< fxili IIS liiixfiiii a^;frL'iliaiiiur qiiaiii ijixl ciini propiilseiims. Let 
 
 us take an a^i^ressive, rather than a iiu'i'ely defensive, attitude. 
 
 I»ut where design or result is indicated, a sultjuiutive is of course 
 necessary. 
 
 yihil nltrt CDiiiniotas i.s7 iiiiam iit <//>//•<: ('(wjuheret. He was only 
 so far moved as to hid them di'iiart 
 
 0/;,s. I. -A subjunctive clause is used wiiere a course is mentioned 
 only to he rejected. 
 
 (hiutlit potins tnitaiula quam hoc faciamus. We ouj^ht to try 
 any course laflnr tlian (allow ourselves to^ net finis. 
 
 With f((i)i, (jiui.iii cxpriis.ses ec^ualitv^ vi' (h'(/)'ee. 
 
 Taiii f'nitii/iis hnilic csf quaiii fiini fiiif tiinJu.r. He is as 
 cn\vai'<lly t()-(Uiy as he was then over hold. 
 
 oh-:. 2. — When two adjectives or adverbs are contrasted hy the 
 comparative de<,'ree followed hy ([ndm, Latin often uses tlie com- 
 parative dei^ree with Jioth. 
 
 I'liitlhntia ininnclor filit (jhiuh perniciosior. The pestilence was 
 
 more alarming; than" fatal. 
 Hoc hAln III fortius ifiutiii felicius ifissistls. You have carried on 
 
 this war with more couiae;e than t:ood fortune. 
 
 494. Quum, turn. These are often used, in the sense of 
 "whereas," "so especially," to unite two clauses, of which 
 tlie //^?//-clause is always the most n/qJuffic in ,syw-', <as 
 well as the main clause in grammar. 
 
 Quuiii omiii.'< >!crrifii.'< niis/'rit rsf, tuni hiice oiinnniii csf i/t'isci'- 
 ■rlmii. .Ix all slaver\' is wri'tched, m) is this the most 
 wretched of all, or. all slavciy is wietched, but this, etc. 
 
 Oils. — The indicative is used with qiiinn when tiie time of the two 
 verbs is the same; but wlieii the 7»(0(/-clause denotes a time prior to 
 
 ' In Livy the comparative clause is often introduced in a way im])os- 
 sibU; to imitate in Kngliyh, 
 
 CojiiK ri'l null tarn fiiislni fanfnui rlnnii 'nixUniihirr . . . quam ra 
 Kiispirio hdiid xdiic piiri/ii/d rt^t. T/ioiii/h J. would not venture 
 , , . i/if that suspicion, etc, 
 
Ex. LXII.] 
 
 COMPARA TtVE C/.AL'^F.S. 
 
 %V^ 
 
 .ill 
 
 thiit of tliL' /u//«-claiise tlie usual idiom is followed, iuui the s\il)junclive 
 used even thouiili a fact is asserted in the former. (See 429.) 
 
 (hun ic aemih r MWiWX, tain itui oinantii^iiiniiDt) eoi^novi. Not only 
 
 have 1 aiwi.ys felt ati'eetion for yon, liut I have foniid you most 
 
 affection ite towards myself. 
 But — ('u)n tf siiiij)! r (Ule\rnm, tinn hoilii iniilto pha diligo. 1 liave 
 
 always loved yctu, l)Ut 1 love yon far more now. 
 
 Class II.— Comparative Clauses with the Subjunctive. 
 
 495. Ill conipiirisoiis inadc with ;iii unreal <>r imaginary 
 
 case, tlie adverbial claii.si! is iiiti'odiiccd hy rchif, iaiiijiKdn 
 (often with sv' added), /// .s/, i/iitisi, <ic si. 'J'jje C(»n'es))()iid- 
 ino- demonstratives are sir, i/n, jhrimfr, proindc, )io)i snus, 
 or siicli plirases as simi/rs smi/, simi/ifcr fuc/iinf, etc. The 
 subjunctive is always used in tiie adverbial claii-c. 
 
 Sic t'lnii niiics rc/iin ut fii fiufcr essct hnis. 1 woidd have 
 yon love him ns if he were your own hrother. 
 
 Ita Si' ijcssif (piasi consul essct. lie l)ehave<l as tlinnijli iir 
 wore consul. 
 
 498. These conjunctions are often used with a single 
 word (suV)stantive, ailjective, or participle) or a phrase. 
 
 Emu tan(|uani hostein, r*/- tanqtiani jtatriae proditnicni, ml'i. 
 I hate him as (thoti^h he were) an enemy, or, a tiaitoi-. 
 
 They are constantly so used in Latin to qualify a strong expression 
 or metaphor, and must often he inseiteil wlieie there is nothint,' 
 answerinu to them in Knu;lish, where metaphors are much more freely 
 
 used. (See 17.) 
 
 "The soul flies forth from the jtn'fion-lioii.^f of the Itody."' 
 
 JlJ <'<)rpio'<\ vehit e carcere, i rolol an iin nx. 
 JVVr.' /(' nhnil. tain|uaia tluctu, sit- nKKjnifndim' lugotli, ,s///(».<. 
 
 And do not, suffer yourself to he overwhelmed by (In fiili nf 
 
 In the same sense (la'uhim (361, O/ix. j, -2^, ijinnlninniniln, niid nl 
 (lint in are often used. 
 
 497. Proportional clauses. SikIi ideas as ar<' expiessed 
 in Fiiiolish by a clause introduced liy "in j)rnp(iiti<in as," 
 or i)y the jihrase " in ])rop(»rlicn to," or by a double //ir w iih 
 the Ciunparative (" ///r more . . . ///< more"), may be best 
 translated into Latin by (uieoi'two constructions. 
 
 C(t't rt ijnt.<iini' with a miiuilntir, in one clause may eorrevpniid to 
 ita with a si,pi rhitin hi another i,376), nv J>} Tunlo, or (m, the al>lative 
 
 i.^ 
 
I 
 
 il 
 
 i^ ' 
 
 li 
 
 a 
 ■1 I 
 
 nu 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 [Ex. LXII. 
 
 of niensnrr. of iJiffi renre (219), joined with a rnmjmratirt' adjoctivo. or 
 iiilvcrl), in one clause, may coirespond to qiKHito, or qao with a 
 coiii]>(ir((lin' in an(»ther. 
 
 (a) Ut quis(|ue t'xt rir optinnis, ita difficillinie uliofi rs.<r i tirprnhaa 
 an spin I fur. In prni ortion to a man's exteliencc is his 
 flitticidty in siispectinjf others to he evil-minded, n?-, ///(' 
 Ijetter a man is, tlir Kieiiter his difti' ulfy in, etc.. or, those 
 whoso character is fhc liit/lh'.ff will tind most (h'jliralti/, etc. 
 
 (h) Quo qiiixqii': est vir melior, eo difticilius, etc. 
 
 The same constructions would express such !i sentence as, "A man's 
 readiness to susi»cct others is ///, ixrcrse itroportio)/ ^» his own <,'ood- 
 ness." 
 
 ()l).<. Toiito . . . ij)in)ito mark a more pnn'sr corresponden<'e thnn 
 en . . . tjKo. Tile latter is identical with the Knsilish ihr . . . flu: : " the " 
 is the old ablative of the thinoiiafrafiir. pronoun, which in the form 
 that came into use as a relative earlier than the interrogative "who," 
 
 w 
 
 hich. 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 The asterisk (*) indicates that the PJousrs are to be translated by a 
 
 Latin ddiiai'. (See 490, ii.) 
 
 1. The soldiers having now readied the snnimit of tlie 
 mountain, and seeing a vast h'vel ])lain, f<'vtile teiTitorv, 
 and rieh cities, spread lieneath their ey(\s, crowde*! round 
 tiieir leader, and as tliough they had alreiidy triiunplied over 
 every ohstnele, ('ongratulated him on tlie con([uest^ of 
 Italy. 2. He beliaved far diflercntly to \vliat I hoped and 
 yon ex})e(;ted. For in violation * of Ins i-epeated ])roniises,- 
 as tliongh he made no aeeonnt of the ancient ti(^ wliich 
 had long existed hetween his own father nnd mine, instead"' 
 of coming to my aid in my adversity, he has rej(^cted n]) 
 to tliis day my friendshi]), and has pnid no attention 
 to my moi'f than once re])eated and solemn a])]ieids.^ 
 
 3. May entdi and eveiy one of you, when the hour of hattle 
 arrives, conduct himself in accordnncc^* witli liis duty, 
 and may each fare in accordance* with his deserts. 
 
 4. Let us endure evervthincf rallier than act in this matter 
 contrary to* our ]n-omises. .^). We sliould'' ahide hy the 
 
 1 See 417, i. 
 
 - 491, // , "repeated " will of conr?ie be turned by an atln rh. 
 
 * See 398, Ohs., and use one of the constructions given in 124. 
 
 * i.i'. "to rue more th.an once solemnly (ippfoliiiij." (415.) 
 
 * Gerund, and for second clausti see 493, O/v. J. 
 
^p 
 
 Ex. LXII.] 
 
 COM PA RA TIVE CLA USES. 
 
 315 
 
 most oppressive conditions, rather than break our word 
 and brand our country with dislidnour. G. Then, with liis 
 usual ^ passionateness and want of self-control, he orders 
 the anibassa.dors to be brnuuht before him ; as thouuli their 
 mere sldit had added fu(d to liis i'urv.- after roariiej out that 
 their king had acted in defiance* of his promise and oath, 
 he ordered them to be draj^j^cd to prison. The next day 
 he showed more <^fentleness tlian was consistent-' with the 
 ferocity of his lan^nuage of the day before, and, after apolo- 
 gising for his outrage on the rights of hospitality, invited 
 them to a baiKpieton ■* the next day as thoui^li he had dune 
 nothing strange ^ or unusual. Their answer showed ^ 
 more daring, considering the " perilous ground on which 
 they stood, than caution. 7. Then, putting s)»urs to his 
 horse, he dashed, with his usuaP eagerness for battle, into 
 the thick of the contest, as thougli it were the ]»art of a 
 good general to act with spirit'*' rather than with dehijera- 
 tion. 8. Tlie longer the war is protracted, the more 
 oppressive will be the conditions of peace which will ]>e 
 imposed upon us ; do not wonder tluMi at the ^eason ""^ of 
 the truest patriots being the most ardent advocates of peace. 
 9. The more hidden a danger is, the greater will be the 
 difficulty ^^ in avoiding it, and those ^- among our enemies 
 (//r?i.) are likely to be the most formidable wlio are readiest 
 in dissembling their ill-will. 10. And it seemed tome that, 
 considering the innutrtance ^'^ of the mattei', he spoke witli 
 some want of energy, as though he were asliamcd to sju-ak 
 in the presence of the conqueror with greater warmth and 
 emotion than became-' either his former rank or his n^'ent 
 dis.'ister. 
 
 * 492, iii. - Participle f)f »f/v/(((. (415.) 
 
 •' V""" /"-". (Sfi' 332, 7, /'.) ^326. •' A'o/v/.s. Case ■;' (Si'('294. ) 
 
 * "SlidWt'tl." Avoid oa/c/kZ/V. (See 241. ) "They aiuswcrtd witli innif 
 ilariug {m/r.) tliaii caution." (493, Ohs. 2.) 
 
 " "Orouiul," etc.. a mere metaphor. (See 273, 0//,v. , ;iim1 492, v. f>.) 
 
 •* Use itf with sitiiftrr. (492. i-.i. ) 
 
 » Two comparative adverhs. (Intr. I!t.) '" T///-. (See 174, <'.) 
 
 " Substitute (tdn'rh, " will be avuideil /'■//// i/nafir i/lj^'ralti/." 
 
 '" Use lit (piifi(iu('. (497, (/.) '■' Simply taiita nx. 
 
! ! 
 
 EXERCISE I.Xlir. 
 
 Qui WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 498. (i.) Recapitulatory. It li.is l)t'cii already saiil lliat qui, when 
 used .simply u.s tlu; relative i)n)ii()uri, to intrndiicc wliat arc callfd 
 adjectival clauses (Intr. cSlj, is re^'ularly followed l)y the indicative 
 mood. (See 77.) 
 
 Qui honi sunt, iiih in .s(//// Ixati. Those who are oood are (ili^o 
 haiti)y. (366, i.) 
 
 Obs. — Here tjiii is used in its widest ami most iiidijinitt sense, 
 = (pikun(jur, l»ut for all that is joined with the indicative in classical 
 Latin, as is iiniriiiniiir. (364.) 
 
 (ii.) It has heen also ])ointed out, that if such adjectival clauses 
 are subordinate to a \ 'rb in onitio uhliqnii, the mood must be the 
 subjunctive. (444.) 
 
 The saiue principle applies ecjually to virtual itnilio oliluinn. (448.) 
 
 Omiiitiy quae jniter sans reli(|Uisset, hiihi Uijui-lt. He be(jueathed 
 to nie everything,' which his father Jmil left. 
 
 Lcfidvit is, " he bcMjueathed in the ti mis of Jiis will," cy/zar r('Ji<{insi<i'f, 
 
 which the will spoke </ as left l)y his father. 
 
 But 
 
 in such cases the subjunctive is iisi-d, not as ijonriiri 
 
 <} hy (j 
 
 lit. 
 
 but on the j^eneral prim'i))le that in oil clauses sul)ordinalc to onitio 
 obliqiKf, whether adjectival or adverbial, tiie indicative is inadmissible. 
 
 499. Qui also, in its co-ordinating use. when it stands in the place 
 of an En<ilish roiijuiirtioii and demonstrative y^co/zo/o/, or even of the 
 latter alone, can of course have no eflect on the mood of tlie verb, 
 which will (h'pend entirely on the nature of the clause which it 
 
 111 
 
 trod 
 
 uces. 
 
 ili 
 
 III 11 III, ndi, (jUi hrcri, coiisn 
 
 ,1 
 
 FnitiYin tiniiii, riiinn jinmliirissii 
 
 fiet, or, (jiii iitimnn hrt ri coiisitl fiat, or, (piem hrevi coiisiilrin 
 
 tactum iri sjh 
 
 ro. 
 
 ( 
 
 Sim.' 78.) 
 
 500. IWit llu'i'i' aiv iiiiiiiy cases in Avliich (jid, I'vcii in 
 oratio recta, imi.st be joiiicd n<it with tlic imticativc Iml 
 with tlic subjunctive. 
 
 Th 
 
 ,'liil( 
 
 for 
 
 IIS IS because iiiii, while in form a mere relative, yet in addition 
 
 lati 
 
 diti 
 
 to reterrini!' to smiie antectM 
 
 lent 
 
 word otteii eoiivevs some a< 
 
 Idit 
 
 loiia 
 
 idea of eitlifi/*//;y»(t.N( , rfsiiU, i-i; ii si , {)V rout rust, ll then takes the plact 
 
 :iii'. 
 
Ex. LXiii.) ()r/ wrrn rin: sunjrxcriVE. 
 
 31' 
 
 of such ciinjimctidiis ns »/, (/"'", '/""//'///(M//, ;iiii1 iiitrodiu't's »I;iiis«'.s 
 wliic'li, tli()iin;|i ill tuiiii adjectival, ;iic adverbial in st'iist- ; iind in 
 l»ri>jMirtion to its (lt'|);,rtiirc t'loiii its proju'i' iiMtiHf ;is ii |»nn' rchitivc, is 
 tlio iir;it'ii(y will) \\\\u\\ it cills tor u subjunctive iiiooil to iiiaik tlie 
 aiiioimt ot" tliiit lifpaiti'T '. 
 
 501. Kri.i;. ~ WIkmiovpv 7?// is used in a final <»i' con- 
 secutive st'iisc. it is iiirdriiilihi, inid wliciK'vcr in a causal or 
 concessive sense, it is vr//r/v^////, followed l)_v the subjunctive. 
 
 Qui final. 
 
 502. (i.) Qui iiiiiy express a purpose; it is then QA\m- 
 valent to /// /n, and is always t'oll(»\ved l)y 11 subjunctive. 
 
 Ij'ijntoH itiisif, qui 2>("'''>" ]H'terent. He .<ent uiiil)assa(loi's 
 to silt' for peace (lit. v/ia imr fo siir for j)eace ; jussive, 
 see 151). 
 
 E<{iii*f's in riislrls rrliqiilf, (jui eriuii])('rent. He left cavalry 
 l)( (lind in the cainj), fo make a charge. 
 
 With this coinj)are 7/// with iiitJIfdtirr. 
 
 LcijatoK minify qui jkici m {n'tiiiunt. Tie sent anibas.sador.s, irlio 
 
 sued for ix'ai'c. 
 E'lnitrs in (tf.-ffr/.s' vrliiiin't, qui crupt'rnnt. He left cavalry 
 
 behind in the camp, vlio viiuht a chai'^fe. 
 
 In these cases qni i.s e(iuivalent to d il, "and they," and therefore 
 has no effect on the mood. 
 
 It will be seen at once that the ditference of meaning between two 
 such uses of qui is very gieat. 
 
 Qui consecutive. 
 
 503. (ii.) Qi'i nifjy ex[)re.ss a consequence, and somdimrs 
 even be translated by a ronscciifirc pluvsr in Kno-lish ; but 
 whenever the Knulish " who " or " that " implies " such us 
 to" " 0/ such a h'iiul as to," (pd must be joined with the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Darius crciri/aiii, (jiieni ihitia nsa jilanifics ri.r rapcirt, com- 
 jiararit. "Wliich could not be contained, "=". s7<t7i «i- 
 icas )i(if ((I ^x' contaiiuMl within,"' etc. 
 
 ■*''^* Thi.s use of qui cxtetids very widely ; the commonest of the 
 less apparent examples of this meaning may be thus arranged. 
 
II I 
 
 I ■ 
 
 ii 
 
 111 
 
 31S 
 
 QUI u'/T/r TifF. sunyrxcrivE. [Ex. LXIII. 
 
 504. Tlu' subjunctive is used iiltcr sunt (jtii, n-anf (jui 
 ( = " soiiH! ") n jhi'in III II r ijh i, i/iii)(i(sijHisqin: est ijiii, und sncli 
 negative iiiid interrogative lornis a.s in/itu est ijui, tjin's i;sl 
 ilin ! Ill nihil III liiihiii uni, clc, Tlius — 
 
 En\u\ ipii piitiirciit. Suniu fancit'd (tliiTf wore people of such a 
 
 kind <(s to faiiey). 
 iVi7//7 t'.d ipioij din re veliin. There is nothin<,' that I care to say 
 
 (of such (I kind ns for me to, etc.). 
 Qiiotnstfuisijiic est (invcnitur) qui hare fnccrc audeat. How few 
 there are (are met with) who venture to do this (one of how 
 jrreat a ninnber ["one in a tliousand,'' " tlic thousandth "J is he 
 who is such as to, etc.). 
 Flence the use of the subjunctive after 'inia ( = qui ne [non]). 
 Nemo (sf (piin scint. All the world knows (134;, i.e. there is no 
 one of such ci kiiul as not to know. 
 ()l/s. — When est, sunt, etc., are joined in an attirniative clause with 
 a iiunieral or pi I'.al adjective of number the indicative is used. 
 
 Multi, trecenti, duo, quidani, sunt qui haec dicunt. There are 
 nian.;/, three hundred, tiro, certain, persons who say this. 
 Qui is here used in its proper relatival sense, "the people ichu say 
 this are tliree luindred, etc." 
 
 But after .udus, unus, used as predicates, with snm as link verb, 
 the subjunctive is used. 
 
 Solus es cui oinnes ])areanius. You are the only person whom all <)f 
 us obey (somewhat more emphatic than, tibi soli yaremus onines.) 
 
 505. Qui is also used with the subjunctive — 
 
 (i.) After diijnns or indvinus. 
 
 Diijnus est qui ametur. He deserves to be loved {lit. He is 
 
 worthy that he shoulil be loved). 
 IndignuH eraf cui sun.nius honos tribueretur. He was not a 
 
 j)roper person to receive the highest mark of distinction. 
 
 (ii.) After comparatives folknved by qmuii. 
 
 Quae hrneficia nuijora sunt quam quihns gratiam, referre possim. 
 These favours are greater than I can requite {too great for 
 me to re(pute). 
 
 (iii) Alter negative and interrogative clauses, <pn may 
 take the place of ut in correspondence with ta7n, sic, adeo, 
 and even tantus. 
 
 Quis tani, or nemo tani, ferreus est qui haec faciat. Who is, or 
 
 no one is, so liarddiearted as to do this. 
 Nulla vis tanta est quae hoc etficiat. Ko force is .so yreat as to 
 produce this result. 
 But you cannot say with an ajfirinatire clause, hie homo tam 
 
 Jerrcas est (pii 
 
 but must use ut. 
 
Ex. LXiii.i Qr'r wiTir r/rn svnyuxcTiVE. 
 
 319 
 
 506. Is is lar^M^ly used (both attirinativcly and iH:';;a- 
 tivcily) vvitli ipii \\\ a conscjcutive sense. 
 
 Noti is suni (\u\ hiii'i' fiiciaiii. I am not tlir man toilo this, 
 
 or, I am not oin' tn tla this. 
 VjII rsf /I'miiiiiKi (/t'lis (^iiae rii'tii iin'irxrrrc nesciat.' The lace 
 
 of Komatis /.s ovc (of a kind) that kjiows not iiow to 
 
 rest under <h'feat. 
 
 Tlie difl'crcnce lictwccn /s (jiil witli an indicative and ix 
 qui witli a subjunctive must he earcl'nlly notieed, as it is 
 one wlucli is often not at all markt'd in En<>lisli. 
 
 o 
 
 {a) When i,s' and qui denote itli'iititif, the indicative is always used 
 (in oral to irrfa). 
 
 Is Hiim. qui feri. I am the nian who did tliis. 
 (Jiini. eo lio.'ife piujnmiins ciii )ihIIo niodn ]K(nrii(liini est. We arc 
 Hjfhtinjr with an enemy who ouj,dit in no wi.se lo lie sp.M'ed. 
 
 In both these cu.ses i«* and qui ure cn-extmsirr ; the qui- imd cui- 
 chiuses apply to the person denoted by is and eo, and to no oiif ( />•<•. 
 
 (/>) Bat when the '/(a'-clause is used (jon'Hi'nlly, denotes a lunjir 
 cla/tt^ to which we say that the is belonj^'S, the subjunctive is used. 
 
 When we say, non is xiim qui Itaer taciam, we mean, "I do not 
 hdoncj to flic Idrgi'T class ((ir qcnns) of men who do this."' 
 
 By cnni eo piujuatimn Iwiite cui )ihIIo modo parrnidiDii sit, we mean, 
 " we are titrhtin^^ with a foe who is one of those who ought in nowise 
 to be spared ;" not a sinifle person who in himsitf does not deserve 
 quarter (indicative), but omc of those who do not de.serve <iuarter. In 
 such sentences therefore we may use either mood according to the 
 precise meaning of the English ; the subjunctive is far more conmion. 
 
 507. Qui also, like consecutive ///,- is used in a correc- 
 tive or lunitintj sense. 
 
 Nemo, (juod sciam ; nemo, qui (pihlem ])aulo pnnJetifinr sit. 
 No one ft) mf/ knoicledi/e ; no one, of oil erenfs no sensil je 
 man. (57, /'.) 
 
 Ohs. — But qaa)itam scio, quod attinet od ; because the word 
 qaantmn and the phrase quod attinet ad express linjitation by their 
 own meaning, and do not need a change of mood. 
 
 508. All tliat has been said of the final and consecutive 
 use of fjici applies equally to relatival adverbs, vhi, iim/c, 
 
 * Kesciat is here a modal rorh f42), equivalent to non posait, or nequraf. 
 Compare the Englisli " I can," projierly " I know " (keiil 
 
 - Conqjare Iti so pirns <. 'if nl. hitrrditni frnt \\v. is misc with f/iis 
 lirnilutiun, lliat he somctjuies makes a mistake ; and see 111. 
 
 :ii! 
 
.'120 
 
 oui \vi I'll rill', sriijrxcriri-:. (Ex. LXiil. 
 
 ' 
 
 /*///*, (!t(;., wlicn used as liiial oi' coiiscciiliN c conjunctious.' 
 Mii^!<'iliiiin irif iil»i c.rii/iinf. Ho wuiit to Muisoillcs /<< lin 
 
 ill cxilt! fhrrr. 
 Ciijiit h)il>rrr imdc sn/raf. lit; uislx's to li.'ivc iiiraiis A' ]tuy 
 A'lhil I'st ciH' ini^fiiir. N'du liiiNc MO misini f<> lir aii,i;iv 
 
 .rrrrisr 
 
 (i;j. 
 
 iin 
 
 1. Caosnr, si'ciiii; tliat the inW. ol" liatllc- was tuiiiiiit:, 
 (I that lie iiiiisf taki! advai.law of tli>' critical'' iiioiin'iit, 
 
 scut forward all his ca\alrv to attack the enemies' iid'aii- 
 
 try ill the reai 
 
 Ik; 1 
 
 lllllSl 
 
 \i\ 
 
 with th(( res 
 
 t of 1 
 
 lis soldiers. 
 
 wiioiii wounds, iieat, and i'atinue left' scarc(dy cuitalile (»f 
 sii|>j)ortin^ their arms, hastened to charge them in front. 
 2. lie was one who was worliiy of every kind of distinc- 
 tion, tor nn one, within my knowledge, has governed the 
 
 nation m this generation, wh(tse ))Ul)lic services liiive heeii 
 equal to his, and who has Ixhmi satisfied with so moderate 
 a reward of his exertions. How few there are who have 
 lieen, or will he, like him. .'J. The chiefs of the enemy 
 easily ])erceived that in the recent reiiellion and mutiny 
 their offences had \)v.v-\\ too ^reat'' to hi' jtardoned; at the 
 same time (366, ii.). in s])ite of this ;^reat defeat, they 
 were too hij^h-spirited to ask I'or mercy, and too powerful 
 to ohtaiii it. 4. H(! is not, so I'ar as I know, one who 
 hesitates to follow his own line in a discussion, or })refers 
 to bow to the opinion*^ of others. .'). AV'ho is there in the 
 whole world so stony-hearted as not to he ashamed of 
 haviiiL!,', in order to |)lease his worst enemies, ahandoned 
 his friends, and of havinu' hetrayed his country to win the 
 favour of its most ancient foes ? (5. AVe have'' to carry on 
 war with an eneniv who has no resi)ect for ai'V treat v, or 
 armistice, or promise, or aj^reenient ; unless we c( ii(]uerhim 
 in the field, there will he nothinu which can k{M'|i him hack 
 from our shores, or repel him from our Malls and homes. 
 
 * When used, that is. not tiM|nalify the \ erh, oi' jutdii ate, of asiinple 
 sentence, hut to conmc t tojietlier two clauses. (Iiitr. 1(1 and 2").) Mr. 
 Kohy uses the term ((.nn< rtirr adn rhs. 
 
 Use the plnase res hic/iiiatiir. Why uould tin use of this English 
 
 metaphor be less admissible in Latin 
 •' Simply temjutx 
 
 I so fiostiinii with Jinn . (332, (i, b.) 
 
 ITse majora (h'/ini/in n , or )i('CC(trc. (See 64.) 
 " A iirlorHos, As an opinion which claims to //tuv uiiyhl, 
 ^ Ueruudivw. 
 
/•:xr:h'c/sr. lxiw 
 
 Qui— CAVS'.L AND CONCESSIVE. 
 
 509. Qui is ;il>o iisci 1)1.1 h in ;i causal iiiid a concessive 
 sense; mid in ea«li of these is joined with tlie subjunctive 
 on llie [nineijih' stuteil in v500. 
 
 {a) Ml nii.ti nun, i|ui //"«'• mni vidcriiii I I'lilmpiiy tl:;iL 1 um 
 ^^239, iioti '; //* /'"' Iniriiiij null tills. 
 
 TIerc Y'"" is olividiisly causal (jikkI h<i,r iimi vidi. 
 
 {h) iuji), <|ui Si I'll. •< ;nlv('iiisst'iii, imii hiiinn ih sfu m iiilii m issf, 
 (irhilnitiis sum. For iiiysrlt', (liniiijli / lunl nninil lute 
 (or in spiti iif nil/ linrimj, t'tc), yet I (h»l not think 1 iict'd 
 (Ifspnir. 
 
 Here (jni is us ohviously concessive = (iiiiiiHHi!ini .ii'rns Mdvcncrjiin. 
 
 510. I'lit in noitlicr of these senses is the subjunctive (thou<,di it 
 sliould he used l»y tlie youn;^f seholiii'j so inviiriiilde ;ii'ter ipti ;is in its 
 coiisii-ntirr and _////'(/ uses. 
 
 'J'he wiitiT souieiiines i)refers to enipliasiso the reality of tlie state- 
 ment ^^hil■ll qni iiitro(hu'ts, and to leave the reader to infer the 
 relation of cause or contrast in wliich it stands to the other clause. 
 
 (fi'<illii III tihl liiil'i <i, i[\n riliiin niiiini servasti, is as ij;ood Jiatin as, 
 thou<,di less usual iUaw, i/rdtidin . . . servaveris, for, " I am ijjrateful 
 to y<'U,_/'iir you have saveil my life." 
 
 So, Ciiisiir frrtnr in. niihnn, qui fmifni fi lnHnni eomparavit, 
 "Caesar is extolled to the skies (l»y you), nlfhoiii/h In (or, anil ijit In) 
 levied war airainst ynu : '' cnnijirn-drrrif wouM he more usual, iiut the 
 indicative emphasises the fact, and leaves the reader to draw the 
 contrast. 
 
 511. An L'xceediiioly eonunon use of qid witli tlie 
 subjunctive in cither its causul or eoiicfssive sense is to 
 represent the circumstances inidn-, or /// spite of, which 
 the action of ihe principal verh takes phice. 
 
 It corresponds therefore exactly to the use of iiinim (429) or to 
 ahl. nhs. (420\ or the y/'f.s^ jxirtiiiitli of ilipunuit verljs i413), and to 
 common use of the English ])artici[ile f411 . 
 
 Tnin i'lhsiir, (|ui Im r mnnlii irphirntn haheret, mlire sfafnit. 
 
 Then or tlu'veupon ( 'aesar,//'N'///;/ full knowledge ofall this, etc. 
 T'':.i ill', i|ui Inniio tssi't jiistissiinns, t'tc. Then he (the otlicr) 
 
 li. ill'/ a j'l ; man, etc. 
 
 X 
 
.T22 
 
 Ql'f CAl'S.A/. AiVI) ro.VCKSSIV'E. 
 
 [Ex. LXIV. 
 
 
 i 
 
 0/(v When' \\ (iotuu'HMive nvnso, nr inli'irHiitiri- cirtMinistiiiu't's, urn 
 
 iiM|»lM .1, tins is ;,rt'n<'iiilly iiiatl*' c'lc'ir l»y ;i ^'//(^ ** in llic iiniin ••laiisc, 
 
 rl'. tin' use of idiinn, mlrn, »'tc., to liiiirk flic |(r»'cis«> snisc of nt. (107.) 
 
 '/'/(//( i 'ill .I'll,, If III' liiii' hill l/iifint, taiiH'M niliri' Hliiliiif. Tln'ii 
 
 ('iifs;ir, in sjiilr of kin bi-iiij^ awaiv of this, yt-t, etc. 
 
 512. Th(^ causal foriM' of y"' is SDiiiclimcs iiiiidf iiidh' 
 clciir l>v' |»i'(^li\iiiLj '/!''/>/'', sKiiK't iiiK's ii//)ofi\ or ///. 
 
 Ill ( 'iccrn i/iilf)j>r ijiii ( -^.fm' or hrciinHC li(!, (fL«'.) is iilwiiys 
 lollowcd l»y \\n\ sultjuiictivt'. 
 
 Ellin siiiipir jirii uniiiu huhiii, (|uip|K.> <|U<'m scircin nui ftsc 
 iiiniiiifis»iiiiiini,. I always looked on him as a tVit'tnl, /"(»/• [ 
 knew that he l)ort' iiic the wariiu'st atiei'tioii. 
 
 h\ Sillust ainl Livy ifuljiir ijni is tisi-il with the irnlicat ivo as 
 tlmn'^'h •'//('«/, hut lif ii'ii with tht' suhjuiiotivt.' \^ vrry coiuiiioii ia 
 Livy. 
 
 Nil' I'oiimiJ, \\\i i[\n III I'/ixinii ([iia"sisset, ni,orain, cirlainini fn'it. 
 Nor (lid the ( 'oiisiil, Its this was the very uhjoct at which he 
 had aiincil, delay the contest. 
 
 513. VVIu'U iitd, or i/in'ri(fi'/iie, expniss'-^ jiu action 
 repeated in past time, a diii'ereiicu of usage ' uud in the 
 lu'st I.atiii \vi'it»M's. 
 
 (1) Tn Cicero and Caesar it ia followed by an indicative of the 
 phiperfect. 
 
 (2) In Livy, l;>y a subjunctive. 
 
 Qaii'itiHine venerat, ihiiunnhiitiir. — {(Hrero and Cacxar.) Who- 
 ever came (frmn fime to tinic), was condemned. 
 
 Q nor i( mill*' eiiitcH iinpitiiut tiflisset, lioitmal mhltanf. — (Lit'ij.) 
 Wherever the rider char»'eil, tlie Romans yielded. Cicero or 
 Caesar would have written fidinif. 
 
 This ditterenoe hits been already noticed under Temporal Clauses 
 (434). Nor in the best writers is qui used with a subjunctive, 
 because it means "any^ who," "all who," 498, Obs.; this usage came 
 in, as in the frequentative sense, under the influence of Greek. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 The asterisk* indicates that qui causal or concessive is to be used. 
 1. Thereupon the messenger, seeing* that it was im- 
 
 ^ In Livy's description of Hannibal's chmacter, id quod i/erendln 
 rebus superesset, quivtl datum (Bk. xxi. 4), "Any time tliat remained 
 (or mvjht remain) after active work was done, was given to repose," the 
 mood of ^uperesxt is no doubt due to (Jreek iaflutiuce. 
 
Ex. LXIV.I QC/ CACSA/ A. VI) COiVCF.SS/f'F.. 
 
 .123 
 
 |MHsil»l«» liy I'liir' words to sucimmmI in juTsiiadiiii^ iIm* 
 S|i;iiii!ir(is not to iidviincc t'lirtlicr. uiiiicd ;it iiroiliiciiin'- 
 the siijiu' rrt'fct l»y in«'ii;ict'.s (i/i rini</). uiid ;i|t|)i'als lo fear. 
 Tlic rorccs. 111! said,"' uliicli wen; ^jatlicrin^r mid cniuiciilt'd 
 
 oil tlic titlicr side ol" tll(! llioiuilaill, WcHf t<»o nilllU'lnns 
 
 (505, ii.) to he couiitt'd, while' tiiosf who wt'ic already 
 asseiMhh'(l, and were visible eh)S(> at liaiid, were veteran 
 soldiers, too hiave and well triiiiMd to he routetj, as' thi? 
 Spaniards seemed to li«)}»e, in thu tirst onset, of a siiii^le 
 tinhl. 1', Who is thei'e of you, who in aiiv wav is 
 worthy of this assenToly and this nation, that does not 
 cherish and \alue ]ii;_:hly the niemories*' of the heroes'" 
 of the jtast, even tlioue'li \iv has never seen them.* 
 .'{. There are thinij;s which I fear still*^ more; in his 
 altsenc(! his Itrother, since* his iidhience with that faction 
 is unrivalled, will Ik; still inoi'c formidable; as lon^ as 
 h(^ lives, will the party" of disorder, do yon-' suppose, 
 ever lack a standaid round which to lally f 4. Tliere- 
 iil)on he dismissed the council, and ordered the Indian''' 
 chiefs to 1t(H)rounht hefon/ him ; the unhappy men, as* 
 they had no suspicion or fear of his intentions,'^ hurry in 
 joyfully,^- for there was none amon^'-' them who had 
 any fears either for^' his freedom or his safety, or was 
 aware of the extent^*'' of the dan^M-r whicdi threatened 
 them, or of the^'' character of the lujst with whom he was 
 to have an interview. Kven he, thoui^h* he Mushed at no 
 treachery, and felt remorse for no crime, was, it seenunl, 
 S(»mewhat touched by the confidence and friendliness of 
 those whom he (felt^*^ that he) was on the point of be- 
 traying. 
 
 ' " By pleading gently." ^ /<lfm 'jliri'i-e. (See 64.) 
 
 '* Beware of this parenthesis. (32, h. ) 
 
 •* Why nut (linn/ (438, note) : if or vito would do. 
 
 ' 67, <Jfi.s, • Mcmoria is never used in the pi., ef. sjhs, 
 
 ■^ Why not Iicros / a (ireek word = demigod : say of "ilhistnoiis 
 men, and tliose (344) aneient (ones)." ' Rarely expressed in Latin. 
 
 " Use prr-lKl, or improhl, rm'N ,• the latter is Cicero's usual term as 
 opposed to the hon!, or n/ifimus ijui-ii/ui'. 
 
 '" " Of the Indians. ' '' " As to what he would do.' (173, iii. ; 174.) 
 
 " Adj. (61.) " Gen. or ex. (296.) '^ 248. 
 
 " 174. »« See 448. 
 
y 
 
 ■w 
 
 f 1 
 
 
 F.XERCrSE T.XV. 
 REPORTED SPEECHES IN ORATiO OBLIQUA 
 
 Preliminary. 
 
 514. In r('i)orl inn" auotlicr jn'ison's liUiL,ningo two 
 met !i(»(ls may bo used. 
 
 (i.) Tlie historian may name tlic spcalaT, aiitl u^ivc wliat purport to 
 he tlu' wolds ho iisL'd in the ]>r<'t;is(.' I'onii in which he spoke tliein, as 
 [f.(J.) in a phiy of Shakespeare, 
 
 'J'o tliis Caesar replied, " I will eome if you are ready to follow." 
 
 In sueli professedly rivhuiini reports the whole speech may he 
 Bpoken of as bein;; in orafio ndn, as comintf, as it were, directly troiii 
 tlie lips of the speaker. 
 
 (ii.) This method is used in Latin, sometimes in a formal report of 
 long speeches in the senate or elsewheie, sometimes in ri'portinii; a 
 short saying, if very memorahle or strikint:. Iji the latter case it is 
 marked, as liy iiircrtid cnnimdn in Kiiiilish, so by the insertion of 
 iii<ii(it after the first or second word of the speech or sayinif. Such 
 speei'hes should never be preceded, as in English, by verbs like dliit, 
 ait, r(.<iioii(lit, etc., which are as a rule reserved for the second and 
 more usual mode of reportin;j;, the indirect ratb.cr than the direct. 
 
 " [ will come, he said,'' " i will conu', he replii'd." must be trans- 
 latecl either by " se venturum esse di.eit, re.'ijtoiidit,'' ov by " veniani, 
 iiHiiiif." (See 40.) 
 
 515. I'.ut the more usual method in Latin, Jiiore common even 
 than it is in Kii^ilish, is not to profess to give the speaker's words in 
 the form in which they were spoken, but to uisert (or imply) * a verb 
 of N'r ///"// f/, ('.s/.///'/, etc., and then to report what was said, or its sub- 
 stance, in the third peison, that is, ii oratio obliqua. All the jM'in- 
 cipd verl)s will now be de|»endent on a verb of litniiiu/^ ex})ressed or 
 understood. Thus, iiistca<l of Caesar's own vvoids," I wiiiyo. if you are 
 ready to follow," we should have " ' aesar irplied that he would go, if 
 he were ready to follow." 
 
 ^ The actual vcrl> is often omitted, the infinitive or sul)junctive moods 
 being siitlicient evidence of the construction. 
 
 Lcijttos ml ('(icsarem mittitnt: "'.scsv puratos <■•>!<(' portas aperire." 
 They send amltassadors to Caesar : (•'«•"//"'.'/), NVe are ready to 
 open the gates. 
 Colonic tristi' viKpoiiainii redditnvi est : fit eiasc rent jrropere ex urhe. 
 The colonists received a iievere answer : * ' ]iegone at once from 
 the city." 
 
Ex. LXV.] SPEF.C/I/'.s /X OKAT/0 OA'/./Oi'.-t. 
 
 516. Tlic f;rc';it (linVreiu-e Ijctween the two iiictlinds will be scrn 
 at a ^daiu'e. 
 
 (h'dfio vii'tii. Ordtio I'hl iijim, 
 
 Tutti ('(ii.<(tr. il)o, iii([tiit, .N'/ tu T''^;, ^ '<»(>■"/•. it iiniiii St' rcspondit 
 1110 fiijiil vis. .s'i, ille sc Siijiii vt'llct. 
 
 Oh.f. Tliis iiicthotl of reporting,' spccclifs. im' I'vcii ict!c> ions, in flic 
 tliir«l piT.^nii is c'oimii.on in Kiiifli.sli as lor instance in rcpoitiiiu' 
 speeches in l*;irlianient ), Imt tar inoie ((initiKin in I>atin, and slimilil 
 utten li(> used in 1 1'anslatiiii,' into I.atin what in Kiiiilisli is reported in 
 ti!i.^ more (Ir'iniiitif f'nrni lA' nrntin ,iiiii. 
 
 The f(>ll(»\\iiio' arc tin- ]iriiicipal rules for tlic; coiivcrsion 
 of oralio iL(ia into ortilin iiUlhiiKi. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 517. Tlie first and second ^icrsoii will cnlircly disap- 
 l)t;ar; botli will lu; coiivcitcd into tlic third. 
 
 ((') K<ji>, ///'/'•v, //r/.s, iiiixhr, will Iti'coinc .sr,^ ,siiii.< (in the 
 iionii native ipse). 
 
 {})) Til, TVS, li'i/s, rrsfcr, will licconie il/r, ill I, illi /'.•<, 
 i/lonan, ij)sii(s, etc. 
 
 Til T(t)rnf>nii otiiisixli ; ajo irrefii, will heconie, ?v's/»o>n^/7 illiini 
 Tari'iif niib (uii isi.-^.<,\ so rcrij>isn( ; or better i,216, OAs.}, ali illo a iiil.<.<tnn 
 <'.s,s«! 'J^arnitii III, a se ricij>linii. 
 
 Noatrniil jiiifrimn- riritati rcstnir <i}ifijn>)i(iini.<, will beeoine, stlain 
 se^ jxitriaiti illoruni cirifuti (Ditijunnrr. 
 
 So Jiid and is/c will <;ive place to illc and is. 
 
 Obn. 1.— Latin lias liere a irreat advant;i',M' over Kn;;lish ; "1 and 
 you " luive alike, in KiiLrlisli omtio iilili(jiia, xo Ik- expressed liy //. ; 
 lience constant oUscuritv. in Lutin tiie '" I "' will heeoine xi , tlio 
 "you";//.. 
 
 OhK. •I.—llii' will he in very constant use in place of i.<, as it is niort; 
 di'^tir. 'five, and "pposes the ofin r jxirtji to the sj)eaker ; soinetinies 
 as ill Knifli>h, a propei' name will l)e introduced. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 518. As speeches arc generally reported in y/'/.s/ lU' 
 hisioric time, adverbs of present time ?nnst be chanucd into 
 those of past time. Xinic, Jiodir, will heconicyro//, tinn', 
 illo (lie, etc. So with place, hie will liecome /A/, etc. 
 
 i"! 
 
 ' 'I'he insertion of the ■•<'' will often he necessary where, no pronoun i;4 
 required in tu'iitio rirlii : compare tlli! jiarco with <fi.iif se I'i fmn'in. 
 
I-*"" 
 
 Bi 
 
 n2e 
 
 sp/-:/:c///-:s /x o ratio obijqva, [Ex. LXV. 
 
 \'.\\\ ;ill tlu'sc rhiinges iirc (-0111111011 to Ljitin with Enu'lish. " 7 sny 
 tli.it / will s|i(';ik to 7/0?/ tiov and hivir' would in Knu'lisli Ik- converted 
 into " lit said tliat hr would speak to tin m tlnti and flinr." 
 
 The, rules more jxMMiiinr to Latin arc connected witli 
 the use ol' Moods in principal and subordinate clauses. 
 
 SI ■'-. 
 
 Principal Clauses. 
 
 519. In all tliese the indicative Avill entirely disa])]>eav. 
 
 Statements and denials inade in T.atin l)y a verb in 
 llie indicative \\ill ofcfiuisc ])ass into the infinitive. JKihil 
 (fo/co, '' 1 I'eel no ]iain," ^vill Itcconic, ;////// sr dolnr, " lie I'elt 
 no ]»ain;" lioc Jacia m, will become, vV/ Si' fidhiruin cssr, etc. 
 
 Obs. 1. — This intinitive \vill even follow qui if strictly co-ordinate. 
 
 Adsuiit Inisfix, instat ( 'atilin.i, (lui Im ri arclcrittn juwikik dahit. 
 Adesse lioHfcs, instare ('atilinani, quem hrevi scclertnn 2>ocii((s 
 daturuni esse. (499.) 
 
 Oha. 2. — Statements (hy]iothetical) made in the subjunctive, because 
 (juaiitied by a .>>w'-elause, will ])ass from the 
 
 Present xKhjioietire into the future in -''•us with esse or fore. 
 Imperfeet or plnpei-feet suhjimetive into the future in -riis with 
 fnisse. (See 469, i.) 
 Thus, l^iele<tt si adsit into risnrnvt evmfore, si aeJesset. 
 
 lUderet si enhsset ) into risnrvni enm J'uisse, si adesset, or, 
 Jiisisset si lul/uisset ) adfnissct. 
 
 520. Questions asked by the speaker in the indicative 
 mood will ])ass into the subjunctive ; and it, as is usual, 
 tlie narrative is in past time, from thi' present into the 
 imperfect tense. 
 
 KoHiif aaditis 1 wiU hcconie, iioi/nc au<liro)it 1 
 IJiiid Niiltis/ fy///r/ ojttatis ] will beconie, (////'r/ \<dlciit ' (/iiiil 
 optarcut i 
 
 Questions already in the E'lbjunctive (150) will remain in tli»' sub- 
 junctive ; the ti use only bein<;altered if, as is usual, it is neeessary, and 
 of course the jx /-.son. 
 
 Quid faciam I "what <nii 7 to do?" will become, ry/n'*/ faceret ? 
 
 " what mis lie to do ? " 
 (,';/() oanius !* '*\\1 iti iv c'e vc to 1:0 ?" will 1 eci-n.e, iiuo irent / 
 
 " whither au ri lln 11 to iro / " 
 
Ex. LXV.j sn-KCHES IX OkATiO OBLIQIA. 
 
 'JOT 
 
 ii 
 
 521. lint questions that do not expect an answer 
 (rhetorical fjiiestions, 150), esjieeially fluise in tlie first nnil 
 third persons, \\\\\ Dass iVoni riie indicative nr subjunctive 
 to tlie infinitive, loi sucli questions are really denials in 
 disuuisr. 
 
 Ecfjuis im<p(am rjvuivotJi inonsifvui vidit ? 'Slid :i,)v ciii»> cvrr 
 see such ;i monster / ' will become, Kc(jiiem luiqvavt ciiisiiKidi 
 onoiistrnrii vidissc / 
 
 Kuiii haec tohrair (IoIr'Hius ? "will Ltcoiiu', uN'frm ilia t^i' tnhnirc 
 del)ore ( 
 
 So 7?'o camus I will oftfii bt-romo, r/j/o silii ciiiidiim esse? for (lie 
 meaning is often nieiely, "we have nojihu't to go to.'' 
 
 522. Commands, prohibitions, and wishes, e.\]iressed \y 
 tlie imperative or subjurctive, ^vill jass into the subjuncti\e 
 ^vitll the necessaiy alteration of tense and person. 
 
 Oratii) Ticia. Oratio oJilupin. 
 
 Festivalc; nihuivi salxi sitis. Fcsiiimreiit ; vtiiKim s;dvi es>ent. 
 
 Kolitr cioirfiirt ; vc despexeiis. Ke cnncfannhir ; V( d.e.q)ie( ret. 
 
 OJ>s. — The hortative Ist person (and even other forms of ((immand'i 
 will be easily converted into a .statement by the aid of the gerund or 
 gerundive. 
 
 Kihil temcre agamus. Kihil sibi tcmere agendiuu esse. 
 
 Subordinate Clauses. 
 
 523. Moods. — The indicative will entirely disappear. 
 
 Even the exceptional indicative after qui mentioned in 449 will 
 hardly find place in the report of a speech of any length. 
 
 RuLK. — Subordinate clauses, whether intnductd by the relative 
 (except where strictly co-ordinatei or by an\ suboidinating conjunction 
 (excei)t occasionally ihiiii\ will always be in the sutjunctive. 
 
 This has been fully explained liel'ore. (>^ee 444.) 
 
 524. Tenses.- As re})orted speeches are nsiially ]iart 
 of a narrative of past events, the most nsnal and reuiilar 
 tenses in subordinate clauses will be the imperfect ;ind 
 pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 (i.) The imperfect, as the tense of time co7it(mporave<^ii)i vith d ilate 
 now past, will take the place of the present, imperfect, and even the 
 future i. of oratio recta. 
 
 Qui adsunt, fiiifinvt. will become qui adessent.,/V.'/' ?T/(^ 
 
 JHrirroj'iii/i, i/nni/ tirwe^KUn ,, Jiii/lssi- sr, 7///<(/ tiiiicK t. 
 
 Qui Jior dicet, irru'nf ,, niii ■>/, cr /7/^(/, dn c rri , irnd/n in <sse, 
 
 il 
 
.^(ifi 
 
 s/'/:/:c///:s /.v Of: \rio orJ.ioc i. 
 
 HX. 
 
 LXV 
 
 I 
 
 (ii.) T>nt future li. (future ix'rt'ecl; will lie cIlhiliciI into tlit^ pluperfect. 
 (Sco 471, 0//S.) 
 
 (^hii liur tlixi'rit, crnthit will Ikh-oiiu' ([iii illmj dixissct, rrr(ifiiniiiirs.>r. 
 
 (iii.) T\w perfect as wt'll as tlic pluperfect will generally be 
 ri^pi-esenlid liy tlic pluperfect sulijiiiict ivc 
 
 //!(' I'fit /ofiis (/III HI ostt'iidi. J/hiiii ovr Im-tnii '/in in ostnuliast't. 
 
 525. I>nt tli(HiL;li l!i<' cNclusivc its(> (»f tlic, imperfect 
 and pluperfect sul»juiict i\(' wdiild l>c grjuninaticiilly 
 (UMicct, yet lli(^ present, perfect, and future perfect an' vi'iy 
 ol'tcM iiilrodiiccd into onilin ah/ii/iiK (just as in (nutfio 
 rccht the lilslorif pnsnil oil en takes the ]tla('0 of tlie 
 \<lin'isl^^ /irrj'irf), in oi'dcr to uix'c ^icatcr ///v7/y/c.s.s' to tho 
 rcjKtrtcd spcccli 1)V icpicsi'iitiuL;' ])arts of it in tlie actual 
 toiise used, as tliouuli llic sjicaker wvw, in our prisonr. 
 
 ImVuiinini r'ldcn oh lis si' olisiilcri iiuonnu cirrrifits sacjw 
 
 fuderint. Tlicy sniiJ tliat it s/rincd degradiiiij; to be 
 
 l)esi('i((Ml l»y men whose armies tlioy liad (lit. hinr) 
 
 oiU'U loiited. 
 
 In oi'dlio irrfii the word used would have hcvAi /ndimus 
 
 — " nr ]i(i re routed." 
 
 There are few reported s])eeches in Caesar or Livy in 
 which this rhetorical use ot' ](resent tor past, peifect for 
 pluperfect, tenses will not he Ibund. 
 
 526. The I'ollowing examples should be carefully 
 
 studied : — - 
 
 1. " Voui- cliildicu liavt' ^(iiio; ■wlicii will tlity loturn ? (rhetorical 
 question\ try le aveii;;c tlieiii."^ 
 
 Oriitii) Ti (in. 
 Profecti sunt Id'eii vestri; (|UaiHl(p 
 re(Htui'i .sunt I ves^ quanUmi 
 ])ote,stis, ultuni ite. 
 
 Onifio ohiiijiia, 
 .TaiH hlttios illoiiini jirofectos 
 esse ; (lUaiido rediuiios fore S 
 (luantuni possent ultum irent. 
 
 ' lu Kii^lish onttio <)hl!(fii(i tiie passages would run thus : — 
 " Tficir ehildn'ii //(/(/ gone ; ulu'U iroiiUI they return? LH them ivy 
 to avenge them." 
 
 " Away then v itli sueh follies ! JVid thi'ij not see that thch' liberty and 
 lives wer»! Iliat day at stake? Why (//(/ tlici/ obey a few centurions, 
 still fewer tribunes, mIio could do iu)thing against ///*'/;• will ? W^heu 
 V'ouhl tlicii dare to deniaiul redress? It inix of the utmost importance 
 wiiat tliiii (fiif. Lit tliciii awak? at last and follow ///'/?/, remendtering 
 the ancestors from whom tin ji vcri' sju'ung. If tliri/ let slip this oppor- 
 tiiuity, //"// iroii/il deservedly be slavi'S, and no (uie innild give t/inii a 
 ii-niirlit, HI' I'onci.iss'ouate tliiir present eoudition." 
 
Ex. LXV.J Sri.l-AlfES JX OR A no OB/Ji^H.l. 
 
 320 
 
 2. Awjty then with such tollies ! Do you not see that your liherly 
 and lives iire at stake to-day \ why do you ohey a few centuri' ■■^' 
 still fewer tribunes, who can do nothin<^ ai^'ainst your will / When 
 will you dare to demand redress! It is of the utmost importance 
 whnt you do. Awake iit last, and follow me ! remcml)er the aiieestors 
 from wh(tiM you are sprtinu. If yon let slip this opjiortunity, you will 
 deservedly be slaves, and no one will <five you a thou^dit, or eoni- 
 pissionate your p csent condition. ^ 
 
 Or<ttio rifln. 
 
 Pellantur hjitiir, incjuit, uicjititK' 
 istac ; noiiue ridi tis dc lll/cr- 
 tafe, tie rifi.s ri'ifris, aiji liodic ! 
 Cur yauvh (•('tiU(nuiiilni!<, jkiii- 
 ciorihus trihimSx, i/iii nihil itn'ilis 
 vobiti Jure re posximt dirto (tudi- 
 enles estis? i/xando rtnicdio 
 exposp-^re (nnbhitis ? Mn.rimi 
 quid j'dciatix n'Jirt. K.rpir- 
 t/iscimhu aliqudtxlo ; mnjormn. 
 ijuihus orti estix rcmiiiisrimiiii : 
 lue. sequiiiiini. JIaiir orrtisioin'iii 
 lii. prdctcrmint'ritix, tmrito scrvi- 
 hitis, iK'c (jitixi/iumi rcl rafioiinii 
 restri linhchit, rcl istiiixfortanao. 
 miserehitur. 
 
 Oni/io oldiiiiKi. 
 IN'llerentnr iijltiir incptldc illae ; 
 iKiniK' viderent <li' lilxrtdtc iji- 
 sonun, df rifis, to die mji / Cur 
 /Hiuri.t ceiitiirioiiiliiix, jxturiorihiix 
 trihuiiix, ([ui iiiri/is illis iil/iil 
 j'accri'. ])Osst;iit, dirto (iiidiviitcH 
 essent? ijiimido ronrdid r.r/tOH' 
 cere ausuros ? iiidjivii referre 
 '////(/ facereiit. Kxpcigiscerentur 
 dlii/udid/o, ct ae seqiierentur. 
 Mdjorinn ijiiildix orti essent re- 
 niiniscerentur. Kam orrdsionrin 
 .si /irdi'tcrniisixxoit, incrito servi- 
 tiiros esse, nrr. (iuen(|uaiu rcl. 
 Vdtioncrn eonim hal)itunim 1 >re, 
 rcl I'ortiindc illiiis miserituruni. 
 
 Caesar atwl Livy will furnish abundant instatices for practice, and 
 the learner should translate every "reported speech" in either, into 
 English oratio recta. 
 
 E.rerrine 05. 
 A. 
 
 The followinjf sentences are all to be converted into ordiio oJ)Ji(jii<( ; 
 the tenses to be altered tluouu'liout fmm ']>rinidr>f to }n.-<tor>r. 
 (See 177.) It luiiy be well to begin by converting the sentences 
 into English ordiio obliqua. 
 
 1. Can any- one endure tliis ? oiij^lit we to alumdun 
 this great nndertakinu ? it -woidd liave been better to 
 have fallen on the Held witli honour, tliun to sulmiit to 
 such slavery. 2. Do not delay then ; a few .soldiers will 
 suffice; we have no otlier allies anywliere, no otlier ho])es, 
 whither can we turn if you tliink of aliandonino; us? but 
 if you wish^ for our safety, you must away"* with all 
 
 ' See 626, note. 
 " See 240, Ul>s. 1 . 
 
 ^ Cse crt/iiis. 
 
 *llso jic'l,,. (See 626. 2.) 
 
330 
 
 SPEECHES IX OR A TW OPUQUA. [Ex. LXV. 
 
 !'! 
 
 \ 
 
 niceties of aTminiont ;^ it is haste, not delibemtion, that is 
 n(!e(l(^fl. 3, What are you doing? what aie you wisliiii,i( 
 lor { \\\\\ you waiting,' till the enemy is at hand, till you 
 hear their shouts, till you see their standards? Even 
 now- resistance is possiltle, })i(»vi(led you do not lin<4er or 
 hesitate. 4. It is jtossilde that I on my part'* have made 
 the same iiiistake as you ; \l the ease is so, 1 pray, forget 
 liie itast,* and in union with your king consult tlie national 
 interests. Is there any thing in the world which we 
 oiij^ht to value more highly? 5. AVhat am I to do? 
 whither to turn ? do you bid nu; to go to meet the enemy? 
 1 would do so most gladly, if it could be done without 
 ruin to the nation. ])Ut what could be more foolish, what 
 more fatal, than with'"* an army of recruits to engage in 
 conflict with V(iteran soldiers^ trained in twenty years of 
 battle?^ (). How many of you are there? whence do 
 you conu' ? M-hat do you demand or hope for ? when do 
 you expect to^'* be allowed to enjoy freedom, (and) to 
 return home ? Possibly the time is even now at hand, 
 provided you do not let slip the opportunity, or injure 
 your cause by putting off the contest. But if you refuse 
 to take u]) arms till'* I assist you, you will ruin the 
 common cause, aiul sigh in vain for the^^ freedom which 
 brave men assert by arms. 
 
 B. 
 
 I 
 
 To be translated into or alio obliqtta : a Spaniard speaks. 
 
 In yain therefore do you appeal to Spain ;^^ it makes no 
 difference whether you intend to make an alliance with 
 the rebels, or to threaten them with war. I shall neither 
 rely on your friendship, nor do I dread your enmity. 
 For what could be more despicable than your policy 
 antl schemes, seeing that within the last five years you 
 
 1 Gerund. * See 618. 
 
 * "What is past." « 270, jiote \ 
 
 ' "Battles of twenty years." (See 303, Obn. 1.) 
 
 « Fore vt, etc. (193, iii.) » Prius , 
 
 " 348. " 319. 
 
 » See 366, d. 
 « Sing. 
 
 . quam. (443, i.) 
 
Ex. LXV.] SPEECHES IN ORATIO OBIJQUA. 
 
 331 
 
 have tliiice abiiiKloned your allies, twice joined your 
 ciK'niies likc;^ deserters, ami have not now sent anihassa- 
 dors to me to sue I'oi a. }>eace of which you an; so 
 iinwortliy, till- you had niaile sure that, unless witli our*' 
 aid you can L;et over this danger, you are doomed to 
 inl'allil)le destruction? ^Vould any one have ])ut trust in 
 sucli allies? would any (»ne in the future feel gratitude 
 to such friends? \{ you wish to find a remedy and 
 shelter against^ your ])resent''' dangers, return home; lay 
 down your aims; throw o])en the gates of your cities 
 and strongholds, ])lace yourselves entirely at the mercy of 
 the sovereign against wliom you have been so long waging 
 an unnatural war. Tossildy I may be touched by youi- 
 prayers; I sJiall pay no attention to your envoys and 
 orations. 
 
 1 VcUd. ■ 443, oh^. 
 
 ' Use for cltvirness tlie proper noun and abl. al»s., "The Spaniards 
 helping." (517, 06s. 2.) 
 
 ^ fcjee 300. '' Hie nx or alio r tela. (337.) 
 
m 
 
 EXF.RCisr. r.xvi. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 Numerals form in Latin, as in iMiglisli, a spocial class of 
 adjectives; in certain cases, as in tlie ])lm'al of ntllir 
 {(Itio nviiuii niilia,^ cf. liundrcdN, tlionsand.s), they liaxc a 
 substantival diameter, iiiid tliev an^ all acttonipain'ed l»v 
 aj)])r(»j)riate adverbs. 
 
 TluMr two main classes are, as in English, Cardinal and 
 Ordinal. 
 
 527. Cardinal (cardo, liinge), or primary, numerals 
 answer the question " how many ?" qiiofj 
 
 Unns, duo, hrs, qnaftnor; viiderim, daodecini, trcdccim (dcccm d 
 firs) ; dttodrvKjinti {(hcciit d odo), uiidei-ujiiifi {dfcnn, d iioniii) ; 
 vujiiiti, uni(x it vigiuti {ri>/iati niniit), di(odt'tri<jinta (28), iiiutdra- 
 (jiutd, noH(((jinta odo (odn d notKKjhita), centuvi (d) ntiiis (101) ; 
 dureuti, -a>;-a,trece)iti, -ne, -<(, qitailrhitienfi, quhKjniti, sfii-(i<i:r-)cc)ifi, 
 scpiiiKjeiiti, odivf/end, nouf/inti, tnllle (snbsttintive), duo tiiilio^iniinn 
 et viyinti viilia, cenftim viilia, qintujciita viilia, dccvs coitoia milia 
 (1,000,000). 
 
 Tlie full list will be found in nny Grammar ; those enumerated are 
 examples ^iven for special reasons, the alternative forms are adiled 
 in brackets. 
 
 528. The first three are (as in many kindreil languat;('N) 
 declinable; the rest, including rit/inti, are indeclinahle up 
 to ducniti, -ac, -a : this, and the series of hundreds, are 
 plural declinable adjectives ; mllle is indeclinable in tlu^ 
 singular, cxcrcitut^ mille militiim, "an arniy of 1000," but 
 declined in the plural {ciini dvohvs milibus) as a 
 substantive. 
 
 As in English so in Latin, from 20 to 100 u com}>ound number 
 may be arranged in two ways, " one-and-twenty " or "twenty-one ;" 
 above 100 the higher number stands tirst ; 28,455 is, diioddriijinla 
 miliii qiuulrinycnti quinqnaginta (et) qninque {d is rarely expressed). 
 
 ^ The second I is usually omitted in the plural, as t(»miug bcfon; /. 
 332 
 
Ex. LXVI.l 
 
 A7M/AAV//.V. 
 
 ut\n 
 
 Unus. 
 
 529. The Eiif^Mish nnmcnil " one "' gave rise to the indefinite article 
 ('//, (^ I lint j)i(j\)ably to tiie indefinite "one" in "one knows," ete.^ 
 Tile uses of Hints in I^atin are very diflerent ; thus {a) our ** none" is 
 III' " not '" Mild lilt ((s " (jiie,' but iidii units is tlie very opposite of null us ; 
 it nieniis '' iiioir tlittn oiu' ; " non \u\o jmicl in ilivictns sunt: "not 
 one" is //( mills qiiiih m^ or even iieino tin its. So [h) uniis is a stron«; 
 form of sill Its: iiniis Imc Jccisfi^ "you are tlie oitlij one ■who has done 
 this." ((•) Jt is used to strenjfthen ijiiisijiii\iiitiis ijiiisiiin, v.wU one, 
 "each and every'' (373), and {il) to enipliasise superlatives: the 
 J^atin siiiMiintive often not retaininj; its full force (87, <i). Thus 
 J)nirin jinii sluiifissiiiiiini luiilslnins, "we h.ive lost oin' of iiiir best 
 leaders, or n ili'sliiijitislinl ]ea(h'r," but J>ii<iin. uiiiini prihstiiiitissi- 
 iitiiiii, '* we ii.ive lust the rerif hrsf of our leaders." (<) Jt often, however, 
 represents tiie J-jiLTlish "one of " (a class) with(»iit iiny stress on tiie 
 numeral: uinis »./• rn jit iris, "(»»«' of the jtrisoneis." (^(') In the 
 pre<licate it often nnswers to our "l)elon<,'ing to the class of :" unus 
 e\ fort II nut is lioin inilms i-ssi' viihtitr, "he sevins to be one of (/.*'. to 
 belonji to the number of) fortune's favourites." {g) "One, two, three, 
 several,'' is in Latin, mi its, nlfi'i; tertiuSj jj/wrtis. *'Oiie or two" is 
 tiiins vcl (tiut) alter, untis ultirre. 
 
 Ordinal Numerals. 
 
 530. Tlu'se answer to the ij^iiestioii " in wliat order?" 
 
 (jHii/l'S ! 
 
 Tliey are all (/((■//// "Wf^ adjectives; only a few will be enumerated. 
 FriiniiK {prior) ; snitiultis or alter ; tertius derimns (13th), diiodevitisi- 
 WHS (nrtariis deriniits) (18th\ anus (primiis) it riresimiis (iJist), alti r 
 {secantlns} d trinsiinas ..triresiinns alter) {'.i'2rn\,) iindetrieesiniiis (2!)th), 
 quadragesiniHs (4()th', quinfns et nonaijesiiniiii (nonaijesinuis qtiintiis) 
 (!).")th ', fiiitesi inns prim IIS (priinns et reiitisintns) (lOlst), ntillesiintis, 
 bis iiiilhsintns ■•2(Hn)[h), ilicii's inillesinius {lO,{)00t\\), seinel et rieies 
 ■ntillisiiiuis y-2\,{)0[)\.h}, etc. 
 
 531. Notice thiit (a', as in Eni^lish, the two first ordinals are not 
 derixi'd from the corri'Spoiidiny cardinals ; ;ind th;it nlli r, as " other" 
 ill older Kiii^lish, is lai'ifely used for ".second." Secnndns is rather 
 " followiu^f "' next in time or in ran]:. 
 
 " Alt( r idem " is "a st'cond self," altera tant-o, " by as nuich aLjaiu." 
 
 (6) Units often takes the place of our " first '' in enumeratin«,'. 
 
 Jliijus rel tres sunt causae, una, altera (or alia), tertia ; "'Jirst, 
 second, third." 
 
 ((•) The ordinal is often used in reckoning time. 
 
 Undevicesimum jam annum hi Hum gerebatur. The war had 
 
 Uuw gone on/u/- 19 tjears. i ?5ee 321, Ohs. 2.) 
 
fl.14 
 
 NUAfPiKAT.S, 
 
 [Ex. LXVI. 
 
 
 
 id) "After," " since," witli an orrlinul is expiv.s.sfil hy n\>. 
 
 Ainin ,i\> u)hi' i-ntiilifa niill(siiiin. fn the liMiiitli year furtho 
 yciir 1(K)()) jifter the t'ouiifl.'ition of tlic city. (Sec 323, '^) 
 
 (/) The finiinal is iilways used in j,nvin<f ihifix, as in the last ( \aiiij»Ie. 
 
 532. Another class is tlic Distributives, aiisNVt'iiii'j to 
 tlic (|ii('stioii " liow many at a time i*" ijin>/r,ii/ oi-"lii\v 
 many (mcIi ?" "hi/ tn-o^^" " fim rtirli'' Anion^' these are — 
 
 tSiiKjnli, bini, mnd ((5); terni daii (l'>)) ; rictiii xhiijuli (21'^; 
 (rtiteiii, hiii'/kIh iiiilid, ceiitinm mi Ho. 
 
 (<i) Ex sint,MiIis, (>/• Itinis, /(///( (7//x siiij,qilos, liiiios. fcrnos, oIisIiIim 
 el('(ji)iiiiti. We selected oik, tiro, or thnu, liostaj^es from lOch niiHU'.ilf 
 iioiiseiioM, or titrh ]> lir of lionsehoMs. 
 
 {!)) Tiiey are also used t\n cardinal ntnnerals with names that have 
 no sin<(nlar, vtn', -ac., -a takinjf the place of Ki'iHiKli. 
 
 1)1 xuuH (I I (I ihiiH hmne fiicre nuptiav. There ■were iiro weddinLTS 
 in o)n' house. 
 
 ((■) For the special uses of slii'iiili as opposed to iniir,r.u a!id 
 fiiiufidarin (imjicriam siiiyuhire is used fur " a ^^^ rxo?/((/ despotism ,'' 
 see 380. 
 
 ('/})ii. — The distributive numerals are used with multiplicatives. (See 
 below.) 
 
 533. Tlie numeral adverbs are those tliat answer to 
 the ([U(!stion "how often?" " how many times;'"' /jno/iis, 
 (qiwtictis)! Such lire — 
 
 St'ini'l, his, fer, scrtcs, ter ilcrica, virirs, /»/.< (t I'irirx, tricics, etc. 
 Once, twice, ];'> tiiui's. 20 times. .'iiMiiiit's. 
 
 (a) Tiiese arc both adverbs of time, ami also simple tnidliplicu.l i ri s ; 
 cf. the Enjflish six iitiws, ten tiiius. 
 
 Sexies conxal factiis i'st. He was made consul sir (inns ^biit 
 
 s<'.rtiitii,for the si rfJt titnc). 
 Quin(plies iinduiii qiiniii nHoitiinii liriiit ririidlihiis i iiiixni lit. 
 
 He ordered tlie states to furnisli /I'c*' tiiiiesus laiirli <».n' was Ic^al. 
 
 {}>) They are coupled with tlistributives in the nudtiplicatiuu table. 
 
 Bis bina sunt quatiuor. Twice hoo is four. 
 
 ((•) With sicmcJ as an adverb of tinm, it^rum is used in place of Jna. 
 Jtf.ram means not "again," but "for a second time;" ki'iiii I atiiue 
 it ram is not "once and again," in the sense of " frecpuMitly," but 
 "once and even tirlrr :" "once and again," *' m 're than once," is s incl 
 at' siu'pius; "again .ind again," ^arpissimc. 
 
Ex. l::vi.i 
 
 xr.)/fi:A\tis. 
 
 335 
 
 534. Ordinal adverbs <»t' t imc urc prinnnn, ih ruin Jn-li inn, 
 «'(<'.; tlic.sc, aiiswiT tt» tlu! I'liiu'lisli " for the lirst, sfcdiid, 
 tliini, t iiiit',"' etc. 
 
 lUTiiiii, iinaitiiiii. < 'i)ii>iiil firtn.i est. He w;is iiiiuh' Consul for 
 
 till' s.i.diil or t'luuili liiiu'. 
 Tiiin \>vimnm JK.-ito pi-iiiliii intir/idf. Tliat was tlio first occtisiim 
 
 on wliioli he took part in a rt';,nil,ir «'n),M;,'«'int'iit. 
 
 f>/w. — "In tlif tiist plact'," " secondly, ■'" lastly,'' is expressed in a 
 narrative oi' arn'unieMt, prliini -i(in\ (IcliKlr {(li'iiicrjn<\ tinn, t^v jm.-tl^ 
 ill nil/Ill', jiiiKfritiio, ml citriimi ' ; d iiiijii' is often inserted in an 
 eniphalic ;md liii;d clmise. 
 
 535. Fractions are expressed thus: ((f) Oiiedmlf. illin'nJunti or 
 iliiiiiiliii y/'f/s. [hi ()thers, where the itninrrator is 1, \iy ordinals with 
 jiirs: ^, tertia pars, | ,,},,,» iiiillt'!<iina pnra; "tithes," ihriiimii' 
 {.v. piirtes). (r) rj, (Inae ptrtcs; ^, ^rx jmrhs; ;.}, tirx iininfiw (nc. 
 partes). ((/) Diinidlo plnrcA, "lialf as many a},'ain;'' dnpln plitn.s, 
 " twiee as niiiny." 
 
 Diniidiuni imritK.'i (juain (juod, or quantum accipcnii, rediuU. 
 He brought back half the army which he had received. 
 
 536. The followinjf are the common modes of expressinj^ numbers, 
 (n) Xostrorniii, or, «• iiosfris, drcem, triyiiitd, durenti, ad niille 
 
 ducenti (li^OO, ad is here adnrhial and j^overns no case), trui milia 
 qnimjiidl (IjotMP i)ttir/i'ifi sunt. 
 
 (/>) Xostroruin, sometimes uosfri fthe numeral beini; occasionally 
 used in aiipoaition), duo iiiilia caisa, or ruixi {milia being treated 
 Sometimes as masculine where men are concerned), aid desiderafi sunt 
 (were missiiijr . 
 
 (c) Mih'tc'i jiraeiiiisit daccutos vi'jiiUi; pcdiks ad iiiille ducmtos 
 aim ampliuf^ mille eiiaitum jo/viewm^, or ptditiim tria milia 
 diu'iutiM, etc. 
 
 Obn. — Large ind* finite nund)ers are expressed by sex-(ses-)centi, 
 -a, -ae: sexcenta alia, "a hundred other things ;" milies vioripracatat, 
 "'twere better to die a thoitAund deaths;" ne millesimam ijuidcm 
 partem, iutillijo, "I don't understand a particle (of what he says;." 
 
 Exercise GG. 
 
 1. Ill liis iiinety-serond - y(\T.r lie was still ^^ able to 
 answer those wlio'* asked liis opiiiioii. 2. 1 ask tirst 
 
 ^ Uemejuber tluit with numbers qaain is i-arely expressed after /y/i<s, 
 ampfi (!■•<, etc. (318, 0/».s. ) 
 
 ^ Either a/ino ai'tatis, or as iu 327. 
 
 '^ "Still"' need not be expressed. * Part. pres. (414.) 
 
r 
 
 :vMi 
 
 .yr.]//-:A'.i/\. 
 
 lEx. LXVI. 
 
 I 
 
 k^ 
 
 '!(, ,i 
 
 if 
 
 '* 
 
 
 wIh'iicc you ccunc, s<'c»»ii(llv wliillicr voii arc Lfninnr, 
 (iiirdly, wliy y<>ii arc armed, lastly, why yoii arc in my 
 lioiisc. .'{. Tlic nciicials md at llic rivci- side, racli wiili 
 an interpreter and ten s(»ldicrs. I. ( )ne, Iwu, three days 
 liad now jtasscd, yet ' no a,L;recmcnt. had hecti enme \t> 
 as reL;arils the conditions of peact'. r». hi jtmsjici'ily I 
 thought yoiir lather oiMMif Foi'Iniic's favoiirit«'s, in these 
 dariv- days I sec that h(! lu'hMiLjs, and always has 
 ludonj^M'd, to tlu! chiss of ;^M'eat men/' (5. lie stayi'd at 
 Mihm, one of th«^ richest and most jtojailoiis of cities, 
 one or two days; yet out of 100, (too citi/ens, not one 
 thanked him for the preservation'* of the city and the 
 rej)ulsc of the enemy from its walls, and iierhaj»s'' not 
 one single soul felt tlie gratitude wliieh lie (twed. 7. 
 
 Tlam; has liccii Ji disistn 
 
 m- 
 
 »attle ; i\,")0o" (tf our men 
 
 hav(! been slain; it is said that half as many a^ain are 
 takcii ])risoncrs, and that one or two^ of the four ;4'eiierals 
 are inissinii. 8. We have lost an excellent man ; if not 
 tlie very best of his class, yet at all events one of thos(» 
 who c(Uno but once" in a, i^cncratioJi. S). I have, received 
 two'^ letters from you to-day, one ye.-^tl'r(lay ; the rest I 
 have looked for in vani • tho>i<ja i ha\i' waited I'oii'eiii 
 one or two day^., ;nid sent to in.juire,'' lutt once,'- but 
 twice. 10. This is the nineteenth day from the eom- 
 mencemei.;. ot the .siei^e. 'I'he commander of the garrison 
 is demanding' two hostaees from every^'' bousehold, to 
 prevent^'* any rising on the part of tlu^ towns[)cople, wlio 
 armed, and who outnund)er his troops by 
 
 ar 
 
 evei 
 e mos 
 
 two to one. 
 
 ' Xi'C fnmen quid(/Kain. (See 110.) - S'un\)]y fcinjiont. 
 
 * Use rlr with tfuinmii.'<. (See 224, tiofc ^ ) * '•(■•• 417, i. 
 •' llm /land ncio on. (169.) '' linj)ers(^ual, 218, O/w. 
 
 ' 636, a. * Kx, e. (296, 0'/,v.) ' 380, <i. 
 
 '* 632, ?». " Supine of .s'7.sr'7(/ri. '402J 
 
 " 633, 0. " 632, (I. 
 
 " "That no (J 03) rising o/ . . . may take ])lact." 
 " Vse plrrh/itc. in app., often so used '.vhere fh' iciiolc and n. jtii't are 
 not contrasted. (297.) 
 
Lx. l:;vi. 
 
 x: Ar/:k.t/.s. 
 
 In 
 
 J'J.ri'/'cisf r»('t. 
 
 K 
 
 At tlic jinc, of scarce!}' nineteen lie liad a^jain and nijain 
 taken jiiirt in rej,Milar en^'ai^eiiients, and liad more tliiin 
 once sliiin an enemy in sin;4le eondiat, and was now' on 
 tlic jioiiif- of fn^aLtinLj an army lialf as lar;;e ai^ain as tliat 
 Mliicli lie'' commanded. Yet in tin; I'aee of sneli a crisis, 
 lie did i:.)l licsitjite 1o drliuli m«tre tluin KJOO infantry to 
 di'tciid' Ids allies a;^aiiisL nn irrnj'tion of the Indians, 
 altlioii;:li twd-iliirds (»f Ids aimy consisted of recrnits/' 
 wlio" were now to li^-lii tlieir iirst liattle. lint lie ])referrcd 
 to die a thous,'ind" deatlis, rather thiin tniu his hack on 
 a liarhiiriiin foe, who if once he won'' the dsiy would, la; 
 widT' knew, afllict his country with every kind of wrong. 
 
 2 418, il. 
 i-niiulive) from liia ullius.' 
 (406.^ 
 
 1 328, //. 
 
 ** " To vv]w\ (gf 
 
 « I'iiit. ill -Ills. (406.) 
 
 ^ Aloud and tense V (471, Ohs.) 
 
 " 366, Ohs. 1. 
 
 * 'J'iro viih's, tiiiig. (223.) 
 
 7 636, Ohs. 
 
 » 32, b. 
 
if'Ulff 
 
 14: 
 
 PI 
 
 ts 
 
 
 EXERCISE LXVIL 
 THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 
 
 537. The Itoinuu iiioiitlis consistt'd (iiftcr the reform 
 of the CahMi<l.ir 1)V Jidius ('a(!s.'ir) of the saiiu', iiuiulicr of 
 days as tlie Kii;^lisli months; ])ut tlie days were iiuml»i;red 
 ([uite differently. 
 
 538. Tlie jin^l day of the montli was caUed Kahmlac 
 (the Kale.ids) ; tlie Nones {Nonac) fell on the fifth or 
 t^rrruth ; the Ides (Id-ns, -uum, f.) were always eight days 
 after the Nones, that is, the thirf.icnfli or Ji/kenf/i. 
 
 " In March, July, Oetoher, Ma}', 
 The Xoues were on the seventh d!\v." 
 (The. Ides therefore on the 15th.) 
 
 To these names of days, the names of the month were 
 attaehed as adjci'iires :'^ ad Kalcmlna Maias, " /'// the 1st of 
 Mdjl" (326); Iti Xoiiofi Junias, "/o/- the 5th of J/nic ;" 
 Idus ^lartiae, " the 1 5tli of Mairhr 
 
 539. From these three fixed ])oints the othei' days of 
 the month were reckoned hacfimri/s, and iiid usirih/, i.e. 
 hoth days were counted in. 
 
 Days hetween the Kalends and the Nones were reckoned 
 by their tlistanee fron? the Nones; those between the 
 N(.)nes and the Ides by iheir distance from the Ides; 
 those after the Ides by their distance from the Kalends of 
 ihv. J'ol/iW'i ,if/ jimnfJi. 
 
 To suit this Ikonian way of reckoning, we musl sul)fi'act 
 the given day from the n>nid>cr of f/ir do/f on which the 
 Nones or Ides fall incrrasrd hi/ o)u\ If llie day Ite one 
 
 ' 'I'heso fi)nn3 are, Jamiariiis, Kel>ruarius, Martins, Aprilis, Maiu.s, 
 .luniua, Quintilis (or Julius), Sextilis [or Augustus), Septoni-, Octc-, 
 Novt'in-, Dt'c't'in-, l)ri.<. 
 
 'I'lie inoiitlis ot .1 al y and Aiigu.st were calh'd <Jiiiii/i/ls, ,sV.i//7/.s, 
 respectively (— the /»/?/* and si.rf/i niontli, reckoniiig from Mnrrh, tin- 
 old Iteginning of the year), till those names were exihanged for JkHu-s 
 a id Ai(i/ii-'<fO't in honour of the two first Caesars. 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 

 ^w^ 
 
 Ex. LXVII.l 
 
 77//f A'OA/.IX CAI.F.XDAR. 
 
 339 
 
 before tlie Ivtileuds, we must suljlrucl fioiu ////• hisi, ihn/ 
 of the month increased hy two, as the Xalends fall within 
 the next month. 
 
 Thus take tlie 3r(l, Dth, 23r(l of Juno :— 
 
 (1) In June the Nones are on they///// ; iht'icfoic tlirec 
 must be su'htraeted from (5-1-1=) ,s/,/' ; and the rciiiaiudcr 
 l>(*in«f 3, tlie dav is "the third day before Die ^^'<>n>s of 
 June." 
 
 {'!) In June tlui Xones beini; on tlie tilth, tlie ides aic 
 on the thirteenth, and the subtraction must hv. from J'tmr- 
 tcen. Henoe subtract 9 from 14; the iciiiaiinU'r lu'lii^ 5, 
 the day is i\\o.ji/fh day before the Ides of June. 
 
 (3) SiiR-e June has thlrt// days, we must subtract from 
 tliirty-two. Hence snl)ti-act 23 from 32; the remainder 
 being 9, the day is the ni/ith day before the K(ilrni1>i of Jidi/. 
 
 So I)eceml)er 30th is not the seeund, but the third day 
 before the Kalends of January. 
 
 540. The names for days are thus expressed in L'ltin. 
 
 " ()n the tliird before the Kalends of ]\rarch " is by rule 
 *" die iertio ii\){e Kalendas ^Martias," which was shortened 
 by the omission of die and c/ite into " tcrtio JOi/endos 
 JIartias," or iii. /w//. Mart. 
 
 But another form is used (almost ex(dusively ) by Cicrro 
 and Linj ; this form is '' (iidi- dirni trrtinin Ktiliinlnx 
 jLirtid^,'' shtn'teiied into " a. d. iii.^ K((J. Afrtrt." 
 
 'J'his (i/iti'-i/iciir came to be treated as an iiKh'i-Jinable 
 substantive, and tlie |)rej)ositions nd, in, ex were pivlixed 
 to it, as to other substantives of time. 
 
 The last day of the month is i>ridii' Kali mln m in or 
 'pridie J\alendrix. 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 1. I\afnti cat Ainjnutus ix. Kill. Oct. (noiio Kalondas ("♦ctdli'fs, 
 
 l.t'. 11)1 till' :?:>/7/ of Scpfi'iiihfr. 
 
 2. Knlcndis Au^iustis ujidis int ('luitdl ii.<, iii. M. (let. icriiM Idiis 
 
 Octobrcsi ('.cry.s'.svV. (1st of Aii;^ii>t ,iiiil OctnKiT |;;tli. 
 '.',. Ml )in')iistl inr a.il. xii. Kal. Nov. .■iititriitiiiiii ilici lu in S. nnfn ! 
 Do you reiueiuber iiiv .speaking in tlu- Seiialt- im \\n lMn/ 
 of Octoha- / 
 
 * For a!i exiilaiiatioii of tliis form see HoBV, L. <•'. vol. i. p. io4. 
 
(■ 
 
 % 
 
 it 4^ 
 
 
 R'. 
 
 1^40 
 
 7'///s A'OALiy C A LEX DAN. 
 
 [Ex. LXVII. 
 
 4, Qii'fttiu)7' durnia siijqilirnfio ituJicta est ox a. d. v. Id. Oct. 
 
 A four (lays' jpiihlic tliaJiksjfiviii;,^ lias liccii procliiiiiu'd from 
 
 the lith of Octohn: 
 T). (Uniaid coivHin in a. .1. iii. Nmu. St\t. nlii It. Tin* Consul Hxt'd 
 
 the .'in/ <;/" .1 cf/csV lor tlic elect mus. 
 (i. In ante dies dctavuiii et septiiiuiiii Kale iidas Octitlires cninUil.^ 
 
 (lirtii. tllix. Tlie date fixed fur the elect iitii.s is the 24th and 
 
 "J^itk of Si'ptcinber. 
 
 1. A\'o l:av(> Lccn lookiii.i;' i'«'r yon ''ay ^ after day from 
 the tliii'd of March to tli<' tciitli of April : your father and 
 1 - hci^iii to feiir tliat soiuclliiiij^f lias happened amiss. 
 
 2. Your father ]»artcd i'roni us tit'* IJhodes on the 14th of 
 July: ho seenicMl to he sulferiuL!: seriously hoth from sea- 
 sickness and home-sickness; we have not* yet received 
 any letter from liini, hut we hope tliat lie will reacli home 
 safe and sound hy '' the twelfth of AuLjust. The day after*' 
 lie h'ft us W(; heard that he. oii^lit " to htive started three 
 days earlier^ if he wished •' to ht> at home in yood time. 
 
 3. Yoti ])roiiiised six months aiio to stay in my house ^^^ 
 from the 'M^\ to the LMst of Apiil. I hope that you will 
 do your utmost to keep your Avord ; you have heen looked 
 for now these ti'ii " days. 4. instead^'- of keeping liis 
 wtu'd hy startinj^f to his father at K'ouie on the last day of 
 Auj^ust, he ]»referred to lini^cr in the fail- city ^-^ of Naples 
 for over twenty (lays. He scaicely reached home hy the 
 2r)th of Scptemher ; a circumstance'^ of which, as^"' it 
 was I'atal also to liis own ]>rospects ;in(l his lather's good 
 name, lie rejxMited, 1 helieve, from tiittt day ^" to the latest 
 
 dav 
 
 ol ins 
 
 lif. 
 
 ' 328, <•. - See 26, imtr. 
 
 ^ Xk/Iiis (lilhiir. (See 328, </.) 
 
 « 323, //. 
 
 '•' .\l..o(lV (444.) 
 '■- 431, O/w. 
 '^ qititm. (430.) 
 
 < iermiil. 
 '" 316, iii. 
 '■ 317. 
 5" 326. 
 
 (388.) 
 
 " See 315. 
 
 •' A<l. (326.) 
 
 * Aiitr witli al.I. (322, a.) 
 
 " 321, (H,x. '2. 
 
 '^ (,hutc res. (67.) 
 
 1 
 
 m -' 
 
 ;i^ 
 
 rw" 
 
 '& 
 
 i'''k 1 
 
SUrPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 
 
 541. The lollowiiii;' Siip^tlenieuliiry Kxercises are added, 
 partly lor tlic pinj)o.se of culargiug tin- raiini; of }»ractice 
 in applyiii^L;- the rides and remarks eoiitaiiu'd in llie earlier 
 ])orti(>n of tile book, partly also with a view of introdneinif 
 a few specimens of continuous })assau('s ada})ted to at 
 least the standard of an ordinary Entrance or "Pass" 
 Exannnation at the Universities or elsewhere. 
 
 The last Kxercist^ (Xo. in) is recapitulatory, and consists 
 of a hundred short sentences bearini'- mainly on the same 
 portion of the work (Exercises i.-xxiii.). Peference here 
 and in other Exercises is fre<iuently made to later 
 sections. The sentences, though necessarily limited in 
 their range, will l)e found to illustrate a large nund)er of 
 tlie most fundamental ])oints of difference between the 
 Latin and English languages. 
 
 Ohs.~Jn attempting; any more continuous pns.sarjo it shouM he 
 borne in mind tliat the connexion in thought In'tween each fre.sh 
 sentence and that wliicli precedes it is miuli oftener indicated by 
 some word or phrase in Latin than it is in Kiiulish. Hence in writin-^ 
 Latin we must often inseit some co-ordinating conjunction t Intr. 5(j), 
 answerini,' to "moreover,"' '' biil," "for,"' "therefore,"" etc., which is 
 WMiitintf in the En!,di>li. or cli;iii^r,. '■ not " into "nor,"' or the demon- 
 Btrative into the rel:.tive. See 78.; 
 
 m 
 
m.' 
 
 .'?4'2 
 
 .S7 77V./:.]//:\\"/:iA' )• /':.\7:RC/S/:S. 
 
 N(.. I. 
 To follow Exercises 1 and 2. 
 
 1. Not Rvcii' till- vilist of inaiikiiid would liavo i'uvicil liis own 
 fatlier, 2. ^'t^stt■r(l;ly ho rt'tunied from Naples, to-morrow lie is to- 
 stt out from Italy to Spain. .S. No one in the world is more sccuri' 
 au'aiiist'' violence, for no one'* ever consulted to suelr' a degree the 
 interests of the country. 4. Having tdjtained the throne l)y violence, 
 he yet became before long" most dear to the wlujle nation, for no one 
 ever U;s3 consulted Ids own interests. />. On the fourth day after his 
 father's death he ascended the tlirone, on the fifth he was saluted 
 Kmperor 1)y the soMiers, on the sixth, having led his army into the 
 enemies' countiy, he was wounded by his own sword while he was 
 mounting" his Imrse. (>. No one was ever more famous, and no one 
 ever attained to jiighei- {i/rca/ir) rank, or acciuired such (87) wealth ; yet 
 he was dear to few, htated by many, and no one ever did his countrj' 
 greater harm. 7. You are obeyed by no one, yet your father was 
 the ruler'' of a mighty nation. 8. That" deed of yours will never be 
 pardoned l)y your countrymen. 
 
 1 liitr. i)0. 
 
 Fut. ill -i-Ks. 14, 
 
 •* «(''/»(■ niim qHif'iKinii (sec 110); ii"n is !iut liircly used licrmf niiui. 
 
 5 tdiitiim, :ii\v. •i.= "s()(iii." " Tc'ii.st':' See 1£0. Cf. 411. 
 
 y imjiiji'o, -uri'. 8t't' 25. I' islr. 11, (/. 
 
 il.^li 
 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 No. 2. 
 To follow Exercise 3. 
 
 1. ]\)r three days^ we waited for you (yV. ) and ho])ed in vain for 
 your arrival : on the fourth day the Indians, who were blockading our 
 camp, disjiersed and- took their departure ; a-* circumstance which 
 yave us freedom from long-continued fear and anxiety. 2. You {/>/.) 
 crave for freedom, and are going* to light for' your native land, for 
 your altars and hearths ; these (men) ])ray for j)eace, and are afraid of 
 tlie hardslups and toils of war. You I honour, them" I despise. 
 3. Vour riches increase daily, l)ut they neither increase your leisure, 
 nor l)ring you (243) either hap[uness or peace of nund. 4. Your 
 native land, whi.'h was once the ruler of many nations, is now most 
 criicllv o''pressed l»y the vile.st eneu'iy, whom lately she both despised 
 an I liaS'<l. ;"). I am waiting here in vain for the airival of the soldiers 
 whi> II I sent for yi'sterday, the enemies' forces are increasing daily, 
 and we shall soon despair of peace. G. P>y .a bloody and bing-continucd 
 war we have freed our country, and repelled from our wails a haughty 
 foe ; we now pray for ]»eace. 7. Having" advanced into th«' thick** of 
 the battle he received a mortal wound ; while" dying, he foretold the 
 ruin of his nation and the triumph of the enemy. 
 
 1 9, ((. 
 
 •• I'l-u, So G, 
 
 - r 
 
 406 
 
 ■•1 Set- 67. 
 11. 't. 
 
 4 14. 
 
 Ill list III'." !5ec69, 
 
.SY VV7 /•;.]//•. .\'/. ; h'Y /-.XKA'C/S/CS. 
 
 ;{4:i 
 
 No. ;?. 
 To follow Exercise 4. 
 
 1. r>i»tli your lii'dtlhT :ui(l you wni' ;it tliut tiiiu; in rxilo ; idv 
 fatliL'f ;iiiil I \N ch' at lioiiif, I'Xiin-iii to the tury ami cnii'lty of (Hii- 
 dcadlirst' I'liciiiii's. Wf hail juoMtUcil ii<> niic ritlicr \'\ \\ui<l.s or acts, 
 yt't w 1' fiHliiiud iiiii'li, and loni; and soitdy- siulitd in vain lor fi('t'<l(ini 
 and satfty ; now \dn and 1 ai'i- srenit' and ticc Ironi care, and no' om- 
 will any loniici'' intlu't on ns injury oi- wrong. 'J. I''rt'rd Iroui the 
 barliai'ons tyranny of an alien laif. we liaxc s[iarfd thox'' who liad 
 most (.-rindiy ojiprrNSfd oni' counny, land) wu lia\t' pardontd iho^c 
 who in the t'acc'' of national inin iiad ncglccti'd' the wt'lfarc of the 
 nation, and w ere consuit in^; merely their own interests; Imt neitlur 
 you nor 1 will any longer^ consent t( I'ori^ive the offences of these'' 
 men, or to listen to those wlio, having olitained rank and riches by 
 the vilest arts, aie new urging upon us a dishononralile {)eace. 
 
 1 55. - hi iiltii III ili iii/iu'. 
 
 6 ;,s. 70. « /// (.ii.i.). 27;i, oiis. 
 
 8 il tut ins. Sfoc 3'-28, <t. 
 
 ■' 110. ■• jam. Sec ?.2* II 
 
 ' \\i\. ,ll>S 14, h, 
 
 y iiitc, ciiiilt'iiiiiliuii.is. fcieu 338, (''»■>. i.'. 
 
 X.'. 1. 
 To follow Exercises 5 and 6. 
 
 1. You and 1. were, he replied, in the country with' yuur lirotlier, 
 but wouhl return to Naples on tlie first- of August ; I l)elieve that he 
 made'' a great mistake, and thav* not designedly hut hy jiure' accident, 
 for I do not iunigine that he would have ende.i. (Hired to deceive a 
 friend and guest ; hut we shall, it is ]>lain, he looked for in vain hoth 
 hy y(mr father an<l my relations, *J. lie ascertained that the wealiier 
 had changed," and that the crowd, which had gatiu'red together in the 
 moi'ning, W(ud<l soon dispt-rse ; he hoped thei'efoit; hi-fore ni<;lit to he 
 al)le to leave his hou.sc, and reacli our camp in safety ; havini: arrived 
 there" he wished t.) h:iv;' an interviev/ with Ciesar, ^' iio;n ne had lomr 
 heeu jiretending to wish to join, ami from whom lie was an.xioiis to 
 oljtain"" safety and assistance. l''or he hoped hy his-' aid to attain to 
 the highest rank ami office in his' ow a nation. 
 
 ' i.e. "in till' liciisi' of," (ipral. 331, \ n. 
 >* Use nitillmii ov rvlii tiiiiilrr willi m xcvh. "^ 
 S Usi? two ii(lv('ilis with ac. See Vocab., uiiil 
 6Abl. alls. 14 Mil. i ir.. 
 8 i.e. " by askiiitr. " Sec Vocab. 
 
 - I\'iilniili.< S,j-tilihiix. .Sue 538 
 •1 iH-ijiic ill. cr. 344. 
 cr I'liii iii-i'. 
 
 Wliitberwlien fii'lia 1 arrivi i|." 14 n. 
 
 y !Sfe 11, (/ and «, ; "aid" is oi^i ro, 
 
i! 
 
 
 '4 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 :;;r 
 
 ! 1 ' 
 
 344 
 
 SiTri.EMl.X I ARV J.XEKCIsr.S. 
 
 No. 5. 
 To follow Exercise 7. 
 
 « 
 
 1. News was now hroiiglit to me that my brother, having been 
 struck by a javelin, and exhanste 1 by many ' serious wound-*, was no 
 longer able either to keep'-^ the saddle, or lead his men' against tlie 
 ene;ny. Having* heard this, [ was much affected, for I could neither 
 hurry to him las' I wished to do, nor did I hope tiiat he wouM l>e able 
 any longer to kee|» the en,!my in ch ?ck. ItHeenu"' moreover, tliat the 
 soldiers who were with" me were liHing heart, and it was said that the 
 ciiemy was expecting large reinforceniei.ts bciure niglit, and would 
 soon take the aiigressive. I resolved therefore to try to linish tlie 
 matter by a single charge. 2. Yoir brother was, he said, a man of' a 
 kindly heart, and almunded** in wealtli and resources, and he was sure 
 that he would never desert his friends, nor wish such a blow to be 
 iuflieted on his own relations. 3. It seems that he had resolved to 
 become consul in that year, but that he pretended to be craving for 
 re|)ose and (piiet. 4. He was unwilling, he replied, to despair, but 
 would rather be in exile than be a slave. 
 
 1 See iK'low, 66. 
 6 67. 
 
 '- \n vi\..it haervrc. 
 « 8, Uhs. 
 
 •' sui. 
 
 7 Abl. 271. 
 
 4 Iiitr. .""iS. 
 
 s ciicumjluu, 284. 
 
 No. 6. 
 
 To follow Exercises 7 and 8. 
 
 1. He talked very little about the i)ast ; about the future his hopes 
 were high, but he perceived that he was at variance on this (juestion* 
 with many excellent men, and he preferred being- silent to disagreeing- 
 with these, and agreeing- with his own enemies, and his country's 
 foes; neither you nor 1 can thiuk that he was mistaken, for M'e know 
 that his good sense, honesty, and courage were worthy of all praise. 
 2. He prouiised to seud me' a letter on ihe 15th of March,* and made 
 mauy other Hue pretences,^ but he lias neither kept hisj promises, nor 
 does lie any longer venture to mike a secret of having i)urposely 
 broken his word. 3. He t'.ireateus. th'^y s ly, to take from me all the 
 distinctions which I have obtained froui the Senate and people of 
 Rome; for myself,** I ii.irlly tl.iok h'! will succeed in tins'" design. 
 
 4. He would rather, he replied, oli-y t!ie most unjust laws, than l)e at 
 variance with true patriots, and disagree with every sensible^ man. 
 
 5. We scarcely dare to hope that your brother will return to Riune 
 and imitate the noble acts of his forefathers, but all his contemporaries 
 can guarantee^ that he -will never desert his friends, or break his word, 
 or join the enemies of his native land. 
 
 1 i)i hac causa, lit. " in this suit." 
 
 ^ i((l me. St'c 6. 
 
 fi (T/o or (•<piiiU-m. 11, a. 
 
 S fSujurlativt' with iii(i.<.ifue, 375- 
 
 2 Intinitlve i!i each case. Si'i; 94, ami 42. 
 * «.■»' 538. •> .Sue 54. 
 
 " (/((('(see Iiitr. ,>S), early in the clause, 
 C Use spnndfn, 
 
SUPPLEMENTAK Y EXERCISES. 
 
 345 
 
 No. 7. 
 To follow Exercise 9. 
 
 1. You {pL) have come liere^ manifestly witli ruluetaiuc, ."xml yon 
 say that you will not- wait any longer for the arrival of your friends, 
 ■who will, you think, ^ be far frorn^ secure in our camj>. For myself, I 
 have promised you again and again to say notliiu:,' alimit the past, and 
 I have resolved both to pardon you, and to s[»are them. But "^y^v 
 a]>parently expe(?t that in the hour of triumph, I shall break my word, 
 and act' towards" you and them with the height of treachery. I know 
 that you can scarcely believe that I am speaking the truth, and that 
 you are silently despairing both of your own and your children .s 
 safety. What falsehood' have I ever told? When have 1 ever broken 
 my word ? 2. It is said that the king himself was the ordy one of"* 
 the whole of his army to ride in safety j)ast the fatal marsh {pi.), and 
 the first to reach the foot of the inouutaius, whence on tin; next day 
 he mournfully and reluctanily leil back his troops and never'-' again ven- 
 tured to form such high hopes or embark'" on siich great enter[)rises. It 
 seemed that as" he had been the first to hope for the best,'- so he was 
 the Hrst to abandon his undertaking ; he preferreil to appear Hckle and 
 cowardly rather than to bring ruin and destr.ietiim on his country. 
 
 » Why iiol /((■(• y hue after verbs of motion. 2 33. :t 32, h. 
 
 4 ])iinim, " but littk'." 5 jitnr, "employ troai'liiTv" <\vitli atil.). 
 
 6 ill rohia, " in your case." 7 See 54. >^ c, cr, "out of." 
 
 8 )ur nniiH'impii'itnt. N'rver juiu it witli niin'tti'im, or any ne^jative word. 110. 
 
 10 Aletaiilior. U.se iiuihri, aiul see 54. 
 
 1' skat . . . Un,uv it . . . et. '■- Ncut. pi. 
 
 No. 8. 
 To follow Exercises 10 and 11. 
 
 1. As' I was making my way through the lowest part of the valley, 
 I fell unawares into an ambush of brigands. AW captors- had, it seemed, 
 been long expecting my arrival, and having seii:ed'and made-* me fast 
 with chains, and dr.agged me from the road* into the neighbouring 
 forest, they again and again threatened nie with (247) torture and 
 death. At last, when I promisid to send a large amount' of gold 
 within four days, my chains" M-ere struck olF and I was set at lii>erty, 
 and in company' with tw<» armed guards, returiu' I to the jdace** whence 
 I l:ad set out. 2. He had now, he said, ceased to hope for much, for 
 he had lost (he said) the best friends he had,'' and was going to live 
 with men whc ha<l always been his deadly enemies, by whotn he had 
 b .'en both acci sed and condemned in his ai)sence, and who had 
 reluctantly spare I his life. ,3. Yo'.ir accusers'" will, 1 expect, nach the 
 city to-morrow; I ho[K' that you wiin)e (193, iv.) iinaMimously .acijuitted. 
 4. You" who once set at nought bodily (59) pain (/</.), are now apiiarently 
 dismayed by it. It is'-' with reluctance that I say this of ((/■ ) the son of 
 so great a man. f). You obviously treat lightly the affairs ot others ; I 
 hope that you will value lii^'hly the good opinion of your countrymen. 
 
 1 dum with pres. See IJO. 
 . 4 fie. rill. 
 
 7 8. ''. 
 IW 14, c. Not iiccHsatiir. See 70. 
 
 2 73. " r>f:c. fif imrtieij)le pass. 15. 
 
 5 ;io/(f/)(.s', n. •• Al)l. abs. 
 
 ■•< .1, 11,1 V. See 89. '■> .Mood? See 77. 
 
 11 See 75. 12 See 82. 
 
r 
 
 f: 
 
 Ff'! 
 
 11 
 
 
 p. SR.l >!•■ f 
 
 l'> 
 
 :{4(; 
 
 57 ri'IEMIlX lAh'Y /■X/h'C/S/'.S. 
 
 No. 1). 
 To follow Exercises 12 and 13. 
 
 1. It is ;;MicralI\' mlmci'iI .'iiiiodl' lii.stnriaiis tli;it tliis kincr, trainofl l>y 
 toil {jil.) ami ai'cMstiiiiicil to ln'.-u' with |iati<'iic(' tlif ti(p\Mi«-' ot fortunt'. 
 slinwid' ill tlic iiiul.'-t (if ilisa>ti'r (/'/. 1 and iiiiii tlic sanif cluiraotor as in 
 |ii(>s]iciit.y. As In: liail lin-n tin' fii>t t<i liclji liis (;<tiintry in its Iniut' nt' 
 (listless, so lie was tlic last to <lc^]iair of it ( w iicii) conijncrcd ami (lowii- 
 trodilcii. I'«ut In- picfciicd liciiiL' an exile in liis old agt- to liviii'_' in safety 
 at honie, and olteying (Hie wlioni tlie rest of the world, almost w itlmtit 
 (!\ce|it !oii, lirlieNi'd to lie liUely to keep his word. 2. 'I'lierc is all tlie 
 diU'ereiice liet Weill iitiirniiiLT tliaiiks and sliowing gratitndc. As I 
 was tlie last to lielievc that you would liavt" set at iioiight honour, 
 honesty, and the lidod o)iinioii of ymir couiitryincn. so to-day T refuse 
 to think tli.'it you have ju'ox'eil" to he of siieli a chai'aetfr as the I'fst of 
 the World re|(ic-ent' you to l>e ; and it is with reluctance that T yield 
 to tliose wii(j deny that you are the san>u man as I once fancied you 
 to )>e 
 
 1 Willis 111' /i IV' 
 
 H Sif 241 
 
 f' S^iv 14, .-. 
 
 •i I'sc ixisln. Sc. 
 
 '-' Mil.iiiliiir, " ;iil\crsi' rdilMiif." 
 ^ Siiiiplv |i,irt JIM'S, (if /i(/)ii;ii, -((/( 
 " "assert. " 
 
 ^... 10. 
 To follow Exercises 14 and 15. 
 
 Oil the next day the Uin<_'. to avoid weary in<; l»y a long march his 
 soldiers (who weif) exhausted with a long and indecisive hattle, kept 
 his men \\'ithin their lines. Meantime the enemy having sent for 
 reinforcenitiits were waiting for an attack (on thi' oart) of our men, 
 so that tin y seemed liy no means desinms of tighting. Afti'r noon- 
 day the king, seeing' that the streiii^th and spirits of liis men were 
 jiow so much lestoicd. that they were likily to shrink from no 
 danger, and stond (upi ])re|iared f(U' lighting,- thicw open'* two gate.s, 
 and having made a sinlih n ' sally surprised i'le enemy (wlio were 
 taken) unauares and lonking for nothing of the'' kind. ( licat nnnilier.s 
 they surround'' and sl.iy, and so gre.'it was the slauijhter that out of {r.r) 
 more than*^ .'^OOO soldiei's scarcely ;"()() escaped unwounded, and that. 
 
 had' 
 
 not iiiudit mteri 
 
 (Mscii, not cvcM tnese wonh 
 
 li;ive .survive( 
 
 (entii-ely) in short did fortune eli;in','e (sidcsl, that thosi' who (|\iite 
 latelv" were nil the pniut 
 
 w inniii'' tlie da\', were now s 
 
 teal 
 
 lUL' a way 
 
 an( 
 
 1 pr.iying for niuht ard darkness. an<l tli 
 
 ose w 
 
 ho luit latelv 
 
 1(1 
 
 were 
 
 despairing of their safety, and looking iov death or slavi'i')', were 
 exulting in victory and frcfdoiii. 
 
 1 Sec 412. 
 « 14, 1-. 
 
 ■Oft 
 
 S .Mil iilis 
 
 •< I'si- ,'lclvi'I'll 
 
 lis, (//..• 
 
 witli iil.-)ii rt. 
 
 • r 
 
 I lilf II nil 
 
 ill 
 
SUPrLEMl: X TAR \ ' EXERCISES. 
 
 347 
 
 No. 11. 
 
 To follow Exercise 16. 
 
 Thereui)on, he scut' for their chief men, ami exhorted them not to 
 be ilisheartencd on aooonnt of such a serious disaster. He had Mariied 
 tliem, lie said,-' that tlie enemy was at Iiand, hut it hail heen impossilih' 
 to persuade theni not to {tut faith in idle rumours and fictitious messages. 
 The Indians earnestly implored him to forgive them ' for this grciit 
 error ; they suc^ceeded at last by their prayers or t»'ars in jtersuail- 
 ing hiui that they would never again^ allow themselves to he so easily 
 overreached .and entra|)ped {(■(nn/lif). \Vhih'" they were tlins" con- 
 versing, it happened that a'^ ])risoner was Itrought to Cortes, who 
 professed to he one** of the kings'' bodyguard. The "."■iieral onh-red 
 Ids'" fetters to be struck otF ami himself to be set at lilierty, and scut 
 him back with a h'tter to the king. He did this with the intention of 
 appearing to be an.xious for a truce ; but so far was he from wishing 
 for anything" of the kind that he was ready to reject anv'''* con- 
 ditions, and ])referred to ]>ut the fortune of war a second time to the 
 test (rather) than to accept from the king even the most honourable 
 peace. 
 
 1 A 
 
 ■(■ |iMit. |iass. 15. - .\vc>i(| p.iiviilliL'sis \i'i. -^ I'loiiduu '.' Scr 353, ii. jiiid 247. 
 s/('(j. ''(htm: tense? 180. <> Inn'c " i^uidain. 361. 
 
 «i<»i/.se, .See 529, e. " Ailj. 68. 
 11 qUl"q^tam. 358. 
 
 'f Relative. 78. 
 ii' 359. 
 
 N... 12. 
 
 To follow Exercises 17 and 18. 
 
 I am afraid that this letter will not reach you across the enemies' 
 lines. We have now been' invested here for a whole month (321), and -' 
 I cannot help beginning to de,spair of the whole state' of affairs. The 
 numl)ers'* of the enemy are such as we had never dreamed of,"'' and ;is'' 
 all the roads are closed, no sujiplies can be biMuglit up; scarcely any 
 letters reach us, so that it is inipossil)le to doultt that we are in\<)l\c d 
 in very serious danger. Do yi>u therefore n<>t jiesitiite \i> write to the 
 general to hasten to bring us assistance, and do net allow yourself tn 
 think that [ am writing thus with the intention of calling "^ him away 
 from his great designs and bringing him here f.tr the s.ake of our 
 safety. I fear that the enemy (if once) victorious, here, will soon 
 become formidable to him also, and T do not think that we can be 
 crushed without^ drawing others into the same ruin. 
 
 1 Tense? 181. 
 
 4 tit nil it lido (siliu'.). 
 
 «i Abl. alls. 420. 
 
 - vriitte. etr ; ef. 110. ^ snmma rig. 
 
 •'' .Metaphor, "laneiecl wdiiM eoine tnu'etlier." 
 V R'lrt. jiass. 15. » .See 11 L 
 

 11^ 
 
 - 1 
 
 -ti:; 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 nts 
 
 .S7 7'/'/. /■:M/:A' I A R J • EXERCJSI.S. 
 
 No, 1.1 
 To follow Exercises 19 and 20. 
 
 Are wn to H;iy that (Jiiesar was foully' iiiunlcrcil or that he waa 
 lij^htfully - .slain? 'I'liat fitlicr one-* or the other is tni«' is most 
 ci-rtaiii. Do yon [x'ui\u) tht-n ohoosi! whichever* you likt; ; hut «lo not 
 say now tills, now tiiat, and ' <lo not to <lay hiok oa HnitiiK as a patriot, 
 tomorrow as an assassin. hid ('acsar pay tht; |n'nalty of his crinu's ? 
 Yon answer "No ;" then li-t liis slayers he eitln-r hanished or jnit" to 
 death as traitors. Or*^ ilid Brutus apeak the truth,'* wlien (while) 
 raising aloft the; Moody d:i^^'er, li(( exclaimed that the nation's 
 freedom was recovered? " Yes," you reply. 'I'iien why do you heap 
 ahuse <n\ oiif to whom alone" y<»u are indebted fui- your freedom? 
 Or' do you think that what Brutus did was in'" itself ri<,dit and a 
 henetit" to the nation, hut that he liiuiself aeted criminally, and 
 .•<liould l)e ]»uiiished'- with Itanishment, or imprisonment, or death? 
 For mysolf I decline to med<lle with so ni(te'' a (pu'^tion ; I leave it 
 to philosophers (116). 
 
 1 "< riniiii.iUy." 
 
 2 " juri' cm.. ,s," a lc^;,il j lir.i- niswi'iiiij,' to <itir " jiistili.ibli' liiiiiiiridf." 
 
 Shir, ill,: S.M'340, ii. 
 fi " He is imt ti> ili'.i'V, cd 
 K(X)iirt,'iiiK anil lnlicjuli ik. 
 
 Ill 
 
 jiir si\ 
 
 IS UfllUlilivr (i| laiilln, .((;•(•, with .'llil. 
 
 ■■■rr,.< 379. •'• 14.5. 
 
 ,' iiiore iiKijiiniiii in iii^Mir'ijiuiilfrrtHur, n i'iii>lii'vii!fm f'T 
 " .1/1. 161. >* tinii . . . nuiim. 433, a. '* iiniin. 529, ''. 
 
 'I I'si" i/^(7(s, iiviiiil III mtiriiim in tliis sense 
 
 '■' )iuhiilis, or diJticiUs, 
 
 X<.. 1 }. 
 To follow Exercises 21 and 22. 
 
 The kinj4 summoned his staff and set hcfore them the nature and 
 extent of the daniier, tin; iiuinl)ers of the tMiemy, tin; magnitude of 
 their resources, their aims,' tlesigns,' and liopes. Kor my part, said 
 he, I will utter my real sentiments and will not hide the fact-' that I 
 have no doubt that both all (of) ynu ami I myself are to-day involved 
 in the greatest danger. I know that it is dittii alt to say-' whether 
 the reinforcements which wt; look fi'r will ever riMch ns, or whetlier 
 we shall perish tirst' overwhelmed iiy the weapons of this enormous'' 
 host But whether we are'' to live or die, i Venture to feel sure of 
 this at least, tiiat no uiie of ns will allow himself to think it a light' 
 matter, whether our countrymen are to be giatefid to us in our 
 graves^ or to scorn (despise) ns in our lives ; .so that we need only 
 deliberate on (Uie sinole question, by what" course uf action or of 
 enduran<'e we shall lie.st .serve (332, .S, */) our • onimon cuumtry. 
 Possibly we can consult our own safety by n tnainir 4 here, sheltered, 
 and preserved by these walls ; and pi'rhaps tliis'" iti tlie safer plan ; 
 but it sctmetimes happens that the most daring" course is the safest ; 
 and I hope to ])ersuade ycui that it will so turn out to-day, 
 
 1 174. Use the verbs p'ln, and vml-ior, -iri. - illinl. ."541 
 
 4 ;))■/»,<. 
 
 ^ .Simply tuiitiia. 88. 
 
 *• Mt'tiiiihor, use moitnits. 61. 
 10 Relative. 
 
 •' Siiniiie in -11. 404. 
 •' Kilt, in -ma. 7 ]iiirri fnri'ri: 305, i 
 
 !* " I5v iloin^; what, fmiuiing what." 398. 
 " See'375, not,- 1. 
 
.sY 77'/ /; \r/-:x /.th-v a a'AVvVVs/i.?, 
 
 341) 
 
 No. ir>, 
 
 Th« following' Exercise is mainly recapitulatory ; it, 
 or any part of it, may follow Sections 1-194. 
 
 1. The \vli(tl« world knows wliy you .ire fnvic<l. 2. \\v asked if 
 you hiul f\< r spurtd :i siiii;lf ciK-my. .'{. H<' licpcd, lie s.iid, tluit tlit; 
 matter would turn out I'litiaiy to Ids i'xjm . tatioua.' 4. Ilavo you 
 not uoine from tlie samu jdatf - as I ? ft. lie w.is tlie (iist to reaeli 
 tlu' sumudt of tlie mountain, tlie last to ileseeiul. G. ile was revoh iut; 
 many thoii^lits (64) la silenee. ". He said tliat lie was no longer' smh 
 as he had once been. S. 'I'liere had l)e»n, he replied, as many opiidons 
 as there were men standing liy 1' It seems that \ ou were the lirst 
 within liunian memory to venture on this enterprise. |U. Havin>^ 
 promised to settle these niatt»rs, lie lield his jteare. 11. In my youth 
 I travelled over many lands and sea8, in my old age I remain at iionie. 
 12. He came home with a weapon iiiten iing* to kill your father; 
 fortunately •' no on. was at honn'. l.'i. It steme<l that he Mas return- 
 ing thanks unwillingly ; lut it is most certain that he feels grateful. 
 14. All the world know s tliat you are xinder an oliliyation to me, no 
 one believes that you will show gratitude lA. I who was onee your 
 advocate am to-day your aecuaer. Kt. So alarmed was he hy the 
 shouts of the Itystandeis that he could scarcely answer his questioners,'' 
 17. Both you and 1 have lost an excellent friend, w honi we are never 
 likely to see again in this world. IS. Neitlier you nor I are likely to 
 believe that the world was made by chance. 1!>. 1 know not whether 
 you wish to l>e a friend" t<> me or an enemy. 20. 1 did this witli the 
 intention of pleasing you ; I eaincstly beg you tlierefore not to be 
 angry. 21. He wrote me word* not to leave the city ; 1 liapjtened by 
 chance to have'' already set out. 22. 1 know not wliether I am 
 likely to deter him from '" injuring his frieii' 2;{. I fear that we 
 
 have lost the city ; it remains to see if we can retake it. 24. Three 
 months '* ago the city'-' of Veii was invested by the troops of Rome ; 
 it has now been (181) long blockaded, it will .soon l»i- assaulted, and 
 there is danger, '•' they say, of its being storrjnd. 2."). The weather 
 was now changing, and the sailors were <h"ead,ii_ the violence of the 
 winds. 26. I liave silently resolved to be at lei.sure to-ni<urnw, but 
 periiaps this is '* impossible. 27. I asked liim first (534, Ohs) if he 
 had committed that monstrous crime ; he answered " "^'es ;" secondly, 
 why he had ai ted so ; next, when ; lastly, with what weapon. 28. He 
 turned to hi companions '■' and aske<l them uhen they intended to 
 return home. 29. That your friend is fortunate is indisputable (64) ; I 
 
 1 S.'o91. 
 
 Mood, 77, <'ihs. 
 
 -^ 89. 
 
 Sjftm. 328, a. 
 
 •« 14, c. 
 
 
 5 6». 
 
 6 73. 
 
 ' 46, (/. 
 
 
 *< 12'2, c. 
 
 tfl'^S. 
 
 10 137, ii. 
 
 
 11 ; 4. 
 
 12 22J. 
 
 13 138. 
 
 
 n 1 I). 
 
 IS 349, 065. 
 
vm'. 
 
 
 
 'X,0 
 
 srpri.EMF.\'rAK v exercises. 
 
 ontinly diHiij^Trf with tlnisf who Hay tliat In* is liappy ; liJi|»|>itii'HH ' in 
 <Mit' tiling', |»r<)S|nTity aiintlHT. WW. Ilaviti;,' «tartril witli his t't>lhi\v«i'H 
 (349, 0//S.) tin- iH'Xt tlay, lu; fell iMiawan-H iiil<» an aiiilnish ; iimst 
 fnrtiiiiiitcly - I caiiu! to liin aHHi->tancc, ami attaik<'il the uiu'iny from-' 
 hchiml. .'U. linth he and you, it iH jthiiii, wcif pi r.siia(h'(l to iMlicve 
 iMfU \vln> wcm (lt'ct'i\ iiig yon, W'l. I fear that in liis ohl n;4f he no 
 h)nj^'«'r lias tho Hatio virwH as in his youtli. WW. Yon a^^k luc if* lie 
 
 is of tli<' Hanu! fliaractur as In 
 
 liroti 
 
 UT. 
 
 I 
 
 tinwilliii'. 
 
 answir 
 
 .'{4. I lanifstly iniiihnnl iiiin to warn lii.s_fath<r not to juit cmiliih nee 
 in that man. .S5. I'mH-ivint; {<iiiinn, 412) that he was unwiMinj^; to 
 trust nu;, I ccasi'd to urj,'f him to go with iru;. .'i(>. lie snre yon coino 
 to int' at Konii; (316) tliat we may botli" liavu an iiitcrvn \v with 
 Caesar. Wl. So cowardly and im-an-Hiiirittd was lie, that I t/iink I 
 have never seen any one like liiinJ WS. I have stayed here so lonj; 
 that I begin to believe 1 shall never go away, W'.h So dear was he to 
 his friends that they nevei ceased to si^li for hint in his absence, to 
 atlmire him when ])reseiit. 40. What wa-s 1 to do? •whither to turn ? 
 I could have wished you had stood by nio ; but both my friends and 
 yon were absent. 41. It would !>« tedious to tell all tins'* story, 
 but I cannot help praising one of (r./) his exjiloits. 4'2. Do not be- 
 lieve, judges, that 1 am ( f the character^ which this man attributes '" 
 to me. 4.H, It is of great consecjuence whether (166i you inflict ])uni.sh- 
 nient on men who deserve ])\:nishment, or on the innocent. 44. 
 Whether you have devoted me to death or" nf>t, 1 know not, nor does 
 it matter much. 4.'). Do you not perceive that it is absolutely impo.s- 
 sible for the privileges and liberty of the nation to be outraged by you 
 with iiupunity. 4(>. I asked him if he wished to make me lesponsible 
 for a brothers'- crime. lie answered in the aflirmative. 47. He 
 jvsked if I was willing to aid men '•* who were aiming at giving 
 freedom to their oppressed and duwn-trodden country. 48. A (in) 
 massacre followed, tin- like of which I had n<'ver seen ; of such an extent 
 
 ami character that 1 can hardly dare to recall to mind the scent 
 
 14 
 
 4i). I 
 
 have spoken thus with the intention of j)ersuading him to pardon you ; 
 whether he w ill do so or not is uncertain. SO. He succeeded '^ in 
 jjersuading tlie king to forgive"^ him this great error, ol. It has 
 repeatedly fallen to my lot to be suspected of many crimes ; T have 
 never before been toiiilemiied in my absence and unheard. /)'2. Pos- 
 
 sibly your I'on 
 
 ntrvnieii, fn-ed fro 
 
 m an alien despotism, are going 
 
 to offer you the supreme ]>ower ; what they doubt is (341) whether 
 
 you \\ I 
 
 11 
 
 accej) 
 
 t it. 
 
 5,"}. He said thr.t he had never take 
 
 n any ])art 
 
 17 
 
 in ])'ilitics, or made it his aim (118) to attain to any distinctions, or to 
 acciuiie laidv or riches. r)4. You are, I see, victorious and most fort>ni;ite ; 
 
 that 
 
 you enjoy ha))piness 
 
 I d 
 
 o no 
 
 t all 
 
 ow, 
 
 >5. I 
 
 mi 
 
 rht h 
 
 ave 
 
 \H 
 
 said 
 
 1 98. ((, I. 
 
 4 1„7. 
 
 7 255. 
 
 10 ••pvetenils(yi/i(;if> that f am." 
 13 " (i)iif) lil<e wliicli." 255. 
 15 1'.!5./. 
 
 2 C4. 3 61. 
 
 5 162. 6 ,nnl>n. 378. 
 
 8 54. y (alis: lii. 
 
 11 168. Uh.<. 1-' Adj. 58. 
 
 !■• •• Tic things wliUh I s:i\v." 176. 
 
 17 L'se eitlu'-r nr.stiri i it njiidiitt m )'• iii^'uIjUkiiii utti.hj, n . 
 
 l» 196, b. 
 
 J'i. 
 
slt/'/./:a//:.v7:ia' y F..\'/:k'Cis/:s, 
 
 af)i 
 
 Uiuch more on (df) the vilcnrss of those men ; l>ut I do not w ish t<i ho 
 
 nthfi trilimiM or l)ur<l»'iiH(iiiM' to you. ')(». Muir tli.in onct' (833. '•) ho 
 tixik Ji<lv;iiitii^'f (»t" my gfiilli'iicsH iiml i;ltim'ni\ ; in my .ili.stiK «■, ht 
 
 lonilfd mu with iihu8»! aii*l iiimiltH. 
 
 oi . 
 
 1 tear tli.'it (iiir ,sii|<iu-r8 havu 
 
 heon iiic.ipiilil.' of Miist.'iiiiiii^ thi; nii.^ft ol' hiuIi' .i wtll-tniiiH'd host. 
 
 r)S. 
 
 Th 
 
 ificc with IMS an..y ot iteruits- lit' .iilvauciM 
 
 .1 
 
 ai{.'nii 
 
 <t th. 
 
 enemy; thrice hfi retreate.l ; at hist his Holditir.-i <li.sj)crHtd, and tied in 
 o|i|>o«ite dirt'ctiniis. a!*, llo wa,s at ]a>t junsiia.hd to .spuif the 
 iniiooMit (/>/.! and niiarint'd ; liiit lie li*ii^' refused to <h> hh. (U). As u 
 youii^ iii.'iM, lie att.'iiiied to the lieii^ht of fame, ill lii.s old age he \va.s 
 lliide.ser\ (illy disLiraeed. (II. Oveneat lied and deeiixcd l>yiiieir'wlio 
 pieteiiili il to 1m- lii.s friends, he euiild no longer put eonlidiiiie in tlms*' 
 who wisiied liis intt'iest cnnsiiitid (240, OAs I). »'>'J. It is ainiost in- 
 credihie (166) Iidw selihuii it has Iteeii iiiy lot to Hee ao fatnoiiH a |m rson, 
 <).'?. l)o iHit ohj^ct' to he free. Let eowaids a<t Ho. and tho.si- u ho 
 dread de.ith. <! J. 'l"he manner' of his death I have ii'Vcr heard, all 
 the world know.s t hat lieiHdead. ii.'i. H.'i\ in^; returned home in hi.s 
 tdd aj^e, he heeaiiie dear to many exeellint nicmheiN of the state. 
 
 am anxKoiH to d* 
 
 fend 
 
 linn against'' Ins 
 
 (>0. So far from hariiig him 
 
 (leadlie.st eneii)ie.s. (>7. I could never see your Itrother without' ealiing 
 
 to mind his lead father's coiintenancp. (>S. I c 
 
 miin 
 
 t hel 
 
 |r wonderiiiL; 
 
 at thit rea.soii^ of your having come here. (lit. He .sw(.re (37; t<. coiifes.s 
 to no oiH". the motive^ of his having told these falsehoods. 70 It ia 
 almost incredihle (166i how often \n: h.is Ikcu warned again- 1 ' doing any- 
 thing of this kind (§7). 71. 1 was so foolish as to healnoist |ieisu;id(><l 
 (6) tt> turn I'.iek"^ to llie jdaee from whence (89/ I h.idseto/it. 7-. No 
 one in the world (16, l>) could have spoken with more prudence," or 
 ireoand' ir 7.'{. What yu have done is jiossihly (64) in accordance'-^ 
 
 m( 
 
 with lav\, i gri-at'y doiiht'' whether it is < on.stitiitional." 74. I >o 
 you think th;-'. >iic- a man iis this'' can he reHtrained from"' using 
 
 violence 
 
 is exifu- 
 
 I v.; ow that this i;* 
 
 ni'li 
 
 t an 
 
 1 1 
 
 loiioiira 
 
 Id. 
 
 hetl 
 
 er it 
 
 ;n 
 
 t Ok I'O leave'' to wis«i men to (let iih^ 7(). Voii pret.'iid 
 to he .1 .'.ti/eii of i. line ; for myself I cannot help'"* siiHpecting that you 
 
 are r »t o 
 
 i« ••;:'•.■■" 
 
 :v a 
 
 ^mr. hut one of the stddiers of ("arthau'. 
 
 I I ■ 
 
 It 
 
 o; -'1 ' V. doiiht (200, (>}is.) that he has injured the nation; 
 whetlier ht ,ia-< done this accidentally or th signeilly, I leave to 
 hiiii!i?lf to deeitl' 7H | was tin- last to perceive wliat you weie 
 aiming.it; I shall In Iht- liist to oppose yoii in tint aim'-' (416i. 7'.>. He 
 
 l»aile t 
 
 stdiliers drag their own i356, i.) geiieial to eNet;ntioii 
 
 re 
 
 hjctani , * an<l mournfully they (dteyed his onlers (418, </) .SO. Hoymi 
 go to meet the enemv in frmil (611, I will t-hargt liim from In hind, ami 
 
 ifri 
 
 us uiian 
 
 I. HI. Tl 
 
 le w 
 
 ho 
 
 e woi 
 
 i.l k 
 
 no\v s now-a-tlays that the eartli 
 
 irth 
 
 moves round the .sun ; it is (C2) into the nature,-*' properties, ami 
 
 I 08. 
 
 (!>'• witli iiit'. 13G. 
 
 7 132, '-. 
 
 n 174, .. 
 H 174, (I. 
 
 i-r ;-, " I turn '"D I.," I'l'llini 'V itlri-;t ceiiiiiU t: 
 
 11',' 11 
 
 11 .\ilv. irudrntir. S4. 
 4 332, 4. 
 
 ir 14^ 
 
 .S, t- 174. Use qvi I, iinak, etc. 
 
 I- ik>l. '"■ 
 IS f.7. 
 ' 137.;. 
 
 3 72. 
 
 « nil. 
 
 '■> 118. 
 
 1 ■ LSI. 
 
 'i.i 
 
 :i.y. 
 
 ■iiuiilir. 
 
 !i:i. 
 
 a t'.iit 
 
w 
 
 ■t! 
 
 'ii. 
 
 
 I 
 
 ( 
 I I' 
 
 352 
 
 srrri.i-.MiiXJARV kxekcises. 
 
 Tnagnitiide (»f the sun tli.it pliilnsopliers are inquiring. 82. I never 
 fcarcil that you were not (138) (loiiiLj to consult my interest ; tlie real' 
 (lanijer was that fortune would clianue. S.'{. So ehangcd was your 
 brother's face and features that I hardly knew that he was the sarue 
 |irrsou that I kiu'W in my ycuith. 84. 'I'o morrow we are to tight ; 
 l)e sure to (141) take jiart in the contest, if you can (190, ii). 85. What 
 was I to do (150) ? \\ liat to say ? m hither to turn ? no one was coming 
 to nsy aid ; it seemed that the whole world tliou;.dit me out of my niind. 
 S(». He was unanimously (59} aci|uitted. l.ut at the same time (366, ii.) 
 universally condemned. ST. ^ «'ur father rtfuyd to leave liis own 
 house; wonhl he had heen liert^ (152) to-day. SS. Tlie weather, I 
 fancy, will clian<_'e to-nioi rdw ; l)c sure, thei-efoic, to cross tlu^ channel 
 to-day. SK. I.et us no longer ohey a n aster of this kind, it would he 
 hetter to die a thousand- deaths than enduic such disgrace. IM). 'I he 
 whole of tlie city echoed with voices of %\cei)ing' and mourning ; you 
 woulil have thought ' that there Mas no one hut had lost a parent or 
 children. iM . So earnestly did he implore me to spare the unarmed 
 that 1 could no longer witlisiand his entreatits.'' 92. Having com- 
 ui'inicated" thi.s matter t<t me, he warned me to he on my guard' against 
 an ^ enemy of my hrother. !),'?. 'J"o this advice'' of his I rejilied that 
 I had no fears for myself, hut was an.xions to provide^ for the safety 
 of my friends. 04. I liave heen informe<l, said lie, hy ''' my scouts 
 that you ha\ e long heen (181) supplying"^' the enemy M-ith corn. flo. It 
 seems that you are threatening'" us with imprisonnient and death; 
 ])erhaps" it would have been hetter (153) i<' ]irovide for your own 
 safety. 9(5. It is said that iie intrusted'" you with the whol(> of thi.s 
 mattn' ; jierhaps he relied '- on yon too much. 97. Three days'-' ago, 
 1 ai-ked when you weic to come here , it seenied that no one knew. 
 98. Your father hapjiened '' that day to he ahstiil; lie })oped to 
 return within a'' veek. 9i>. In the study of nature your son liaa 
 made gfcat progress ; in everything that relates to literature I incline 
 to think that many of his contejnjiorari«s have outstri})]>ed him. 
 100. It is uncertain whetlier at that"' time he jueferred to he .•\ 
 l>oliti>ian or a student (175). 
 
 I ."41. - .5,%. o/ix. 
 
 ■I Hit, ii. .■•. 415. 
 
 " '248 0'"' (liis .Mill iH\t scnii'iii rV 
 
 !' /'. /■. '2«;T, ";,... 1" '247. 
 
 y- '244, c. i:i ^'2\. 
 
 i5 •• lli>' .sfvuiilh ila\." 3!J5. 
 
 :' 415, h. 
 '! 'iX<\, iv. 
 ■* ,%1. 
 
 1 ' liii ml srhi II II. 170. 
 
 M I '2.3. 
 
 "f linn Utniioris. 284, Ois. 
 
GKNI^RAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 H 
 
 Caution. It ^IrnnM he miilt'istucMl lli.it tlic Latin wunls (^ivt'ii ii> tliis N'maliiilaiy 
 an iHit liriissMiily ciniivalciit In tlif Kii;;listi wln'ii tlic lattiTarc iisci! witli a iiifaniii;^ 
 ami ciiiitcxi ilitlVrciit it> lliat in wliiili tln'V tMciir In I lie Kxcniscs. (Sii' 17 1^ ) 
 
 Fi'jurrg rrfir Id sictiunx, ira pi ulnir j,. (— j<iiii)fr /■.i-. (r- /■.'.) rcr /'<,■«) is I'njijiil. 
 
 ii/xi/iiliDi, I {a prr-soii), dt'scr-o,' (Mv/V// ///,/<//, ciisii ; fnrtuitn. (268.) 
 
 iiX', -tii, -tuiii; (Ic-suni, essr, inroni/i/is/i, /, «•(-()/• coii-Hcio, ire, 
 -fui {iliit., 251); flcstitii-o, Ow, etc. 
 
 -i ; tU:-scis(.:o, Ore, -s(i\ i, ;il) <>r <irriir<l<iiicf n-itli, in, pcriiule iw, 
 iihl. (full ofjro7H a jiiirfji). i;tc. (491, <i) ; ]»n> (332, 7,./'). 
 
 ((Iitni(lii/i, / {(I thiiiif or inir/i'), o- on-oimt of, on, propter ('"■'". ). 
 
 iuitt(», Ore, -iiiisi, -inissinii (see (irroinit, on no, nullo iiwjdo ; mini- 
 note under uihIoih-, / Imn ) ; de- nie. 
 
 sisto, Ore, -stiti, ;vl), or uhl. account, / /uk'' info, i"iti<tMeni lialteo 
 
 ahandonid (n-ickid), jierditu.s. (ijtn.). 
 
 nhiiiitlonmcjit of', tin, use o-niitto, nic/irnii/, n'ith more, vvvina. (Intr. 
 ore, etc. (417, i.) .VJ. ) 
 
 (ihldr hi/, /, sto, are (nhl.). (ircnxr, 1, afruso, aw. 
 
 (iliilit./, or nhHHi(:<, iiiLreniuni, n. Hrcn-f('r,=: In n-/io iicnis,.\ (76.) 
 
 (■>•///(/.). iiccKsfoimil, I (tin, soleo. Ore, suli- 
 
 (thlc, I am, jtossuni, posse, jtotui. tus. 
 
 (thoniid in, 7, eireuni-tluo, Ore, ar/iirn tnciifs, re.s gest;ie. 
 
 -riuxi. (284.) (icliiircincnfs, I fxrj'vrni, res gero, 
 
 ahout (ddr,), circa, cireiter ; fere. Ore, ge.ssi, gestuiu. 
 
 fernie. ac(jnir(', /, ad-ipiscor, i, -eptu.s. 
 
 ahoid [prep.), de. (332, 3. <l.) (See 19.) 
 
 aliaeiicfi, inwi/. (61, antl 420, ii.) ar(jiiif, /, absolvo. Ore, -vi, -utuin. 
 
 306.) 
 
 arroM, trans (arr.). 
 
 <ih.<('nf, I a}n, alisuni, esse ; j'nnn, 
 
 a, al). - - , , 
 
 ahsohilcli/, plane; orsiiptrl. 0/ ailj. art, / (lirltan). me gero, oi-e. 
 
 ahsoiiifeh/ impo.-isihlr. (125,/'.) art riijhtln, I, ivete faeio. 
 
 abstain from, I. (264.) act thns, /, Uaec faeio. 
 
 (///(///(/^(//rc o/" plurimum. i294.) action, l>>/, ageiidn, ;ilii|uid (398); 
 abii.-ii', maledieta, //. jil. (LI, h.) nont. agere (96, 99). 
 
 accept, 7, ac-cipio, Ore, -eepi, -cej)- acts, facta, n. pi. (61, /'. ) 
 
 tum. a<hl r( ■■<.■< [z^zKiitirh], orati-o, -onis,/', 
 
 acciptahlr to, gratua, (Sn^ note (/(A//-< .^.^• (///r /x-tz/y/r), /, verba (apud 
 
 \\m\vr dili(jhtfvl.) populum) facio. 
 
 accidrnt, cas-us, -us, 7n, adifpialr, justurf. 
 
 1 litUnq'^o, I aliandoi), in miitral anil >:tncral ai'vsf of "It-avinK;" <^.v'^■(^ I unit a 
 Iilace or }K-rson wlun' i<v willi vlioni iluiv bids ni»' stay; ihstilnu, 1 liavt' 'Mn tlm 
 hu'cli" one who witl ■>iit mo will hv unai It-il ; i/i.sio/i, I iail tu be jTcsent where my 
 jireseiiie is desinibh >'r liglit ; iht<ilo(idi Mr ace), " 1 fail" vv "fall ott from," tho.'^w 
 wlioni I have hitheilo ^t^".Ml by. 
 
 z 
 
f 
 
 354 
 
 GENERA L VOCA />' L 'I A R V. 
 
 HI 
 
 I) 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 It 
 
 I! 
 
 (I 
 
 .'II ' 
 
 11 
 
 (i((mhi!sf(rln;f ffir i/onriuiii nt, yva 
 
 jmKlicai! ])n)ciir;iti-rt, -onis, J. ; 
 
 ii'iiijtul)li(jaiM : iilii iiiarc;. 
 <iil iiiiiiislnitiini. |iiiM uiatio, -oiiis.y". 
 <iiiiii//-r, /, adiiiii'dr, ari. 
 (tih'iiiii'i', /, jiro-ccdM, ('re, -ceHsi, 
 
 -ci'ssiiiii ; |)f() j^ri'ilior, i, -j^rcssiis. 
 ii(/rinici ill /< It rii'iiij, /, dortiiii" tiu. 
 ■ fdniiii-i il {(iif(), i>i'(jVL'cta (aetas). 
 
 (Scc! 303, hhs. I.) 
 lid I'll iiciil ill /if'r nr ifi Ill's. (303, 
 
 Obs. 1.) 
 itilriiiiii il i/iKinf, pi'iiiium agiii-i'ii, 
 
 -iiiis, II. 
 ((ifrmifiiiii , ciiiohiiiu'iitiim, //. 
 <;ifniii/(ii/,, /,, i/fiin: (269, '-'/■..) 
 (ii/nuifin/r, ir/itif .^ H\\'u\ oiMoliunenti? 
 
 (294.)" 
 iiiln fs, , advLTSus {m/j.) 
 tiili'i rsitji, re.s advcrsae. 
 (d/firr, ii(/iiiiist i/oiir, turn liij iiri's. 
 
 jKiti. vj tlis.siiadeo, ei'c, (JSec 
 
 420, ii. ) 
 itdrist , /, niojieo. 
 (i(/i'i)iii/i'. d/' (jiriio'), auctor. 
 (iilronili ()f\ I (till (III, snadt'o, r-rc, 
 
 ii'ith ace. (t/t/iiiii/. (See 247.) 
 (idrocatc, I dm your, te defcndo, 
 
 ("■re. 
 (ijl'idr, res, rei,y'. 
 ajf <'(('d {(iifit(df'd). J (1)11, cdin-move- 
 
 or, eri, -motus. 
 (I'liriiiiifirr, to rcpJji in the. (162.) 
 (nHirt iritli, 1, atlicio, ere. (283.) 
 Kjniid, 1 mn, tiineo. 
 afraid of, 1 am, = I fear (26), jier- 
 
 tiuieseo, ere, -tiinui (<""'■., or ne, 
 
 ut, 138). 
 nfti-r ijirrp.), post ((tec). (See 
 ■ 322, 323.) 
 ajhr [iritli varhal subsl.), use. cjiiuni. 
 
 (429.) 
 ai/ain, rursus. (328,./*.) 
 (ti/din (irit/i ncij.), postliae ; postea. 
 uijaiiiandaijaln, saepe, saepissime. 
 
 (67, a ; see also 633, c.) 
 «(' '.int, contra. ((/'•<•.). 
 iviainM {mn wis/ien) = " /'// spiU' q/' " 
 ' (420, ii.) 
 
 (ii/( (tiiiii' of lif), aet-a.s, -atis, /". 
 ",'/'' ('ftli'ni.ii^), vetu.st-as, -ati.s, y'. 
 mil', (dd, Sv tieet-u.s, -uti.s, ./! 
 ".'/'■, ofthaf. (238, iii.) 
 aifc, f/iosc. of' hi.-i oirn, ae(jiiales. 
 
 (51, a.) 
 ".'/'' ';/", af till'. (327.) 
 (/./'''/, exactaeaetatis. (303, O/^^. 1.) 
 iiji/n.-isin, I tiiL'i' till', ultr'o arnia 
 
 or l)elluni, iiitVro. 
 (iijitntioii. fliri'c is, trei)idatur. (218.) 
 a I/O. (324.) 
 (ii/ric irifli, J do not, p;ii'iiiii (/■"/, 
 
 /ift/c) eonse,n-tio, ire, -si (euiii). 
 aijri :'d 1)1/ [nil), it is, eonstat inter 
 
 ■("'•'■.).' 
 (ujriiil on till, it is, con-vOnit, veiiit, 
 
 inter. 
 aijri vnu nt, an, pactum, ii. 
 aijncmcnt is ronu: to, an, convO-nit 
 
 (impcrs.). 
 aijrc: incnt irlfli, J am in, consen-tio, 
 
 Ire, -si, -sum, cum (aid.), 
 aid, jf.uxilium, n. 
 aid, J, opem fero (dat.). 
 aid, 1 come to i/oiir, til)i sul)venio. 
 aid or assistaurc, / coma to your 
 
 (Ex. 32). (260, 1.) 
 aid, liy your, opera tua. 
 aitn at, I, or I form aims, pet-o, 
 
 (•I'e, -ivi, -ii (-isti), -itum ; ap- 
 
 peto. t^re, etc. (trans.), 
 aim at (doinij, etc.), I, or I inal'c it 
 
 my aim, id ago, egi, ut. (118.) 
 alarmed, I am, tiineo, ere. 
 alarmed (anxious) for, I am, nietuo 
 
 (u'dh dat., 248). 
 Alexander, Alexan-di -clri. 
 alien (ailj. ), externus. 
 alien (suhst.), i)efegvin-us, -i, m. 
 'tlike (adr.), juxta, pariter. 
 alike . . , and J or . . . as, sicut . . . 
 
 ita ; vel . . . vel (p. 14, «.). 
 (dire, f am, vivo, ire. 
 all, omnis, <jAsocunctus,universus.' 
 all (t/iinifs), n. pi. o/"omn-is, -e. 
 all is lo.st, de sumnia re actum 
 
 efit. 
 alleyiance, ,id-ea, -ei, /. 
 
 ' Universi, .all as a IkhIv, np(i(isi'(1 to siiiouli ; nmnc:^. all witlioiit. fxci'iiticni, oiijiosed 
 to »i('»ii(i or 1i> vims ; riiiicli. a stroiigcroiiuics-, " all tcigetlier ;" oiiiiiif (.siuy), i-vun' Liiid 
 of; cviictiis{ii\n^.), all as .i whole, nearly =c totus, the whole as opposed to a pari. 
 
GE^ ■/•; K.M I 'O CA B UL A R ) '. 
 
 .S55 
 
 nllldiny irif/i, I iinik<, .sf)i'i('t;itfiii uniK'Hiiri iii< iil, iif\ use iiuntio, ar't'. 
 
 iiieo iro, -ivi, -ii, cuiii. (417, i.) 
 
 iilloir, /(/'/), ]K'i-iiiitti), iTf, -iriisi, tnin'/nr (n s<roii(l), iilt-cr, ij<ii. 
 
 -iiiisfsuiii ('/-//., 128, < //(/). -ci'iiis. (368.) 
 
 ii/hiir, / i'lriiii/), coiircdd, t'l'i'. (iii.-nrir, I, rrsjxm-iU'o, wv, -lii, 
 
 iill<iii\ I {riiiii'isK, (iihiilf), f;it('ni', -sum. 
 
 t'lM, fasslls ; coli-ccilu, r-Tf, -ci'ssi. ii ii.^irr,-. I iiiiiki llii, =^ I <ni-<ii'i f 
 
 tilloir iiii/-'<i/f to, J irill not, lion iii>lliiii<i. (54 aii'l 237.) 
 
 cfiiiimittaiii lit. (125, /'. ) <insir< r to, in. (331, i, A, ami J, <•. ) 
 
 (i/luira/, I (iiii, licrt milii. (197.) n nti'/iiili/ {n/n t/iiihj < .i /■^t//i;/),\vt\iHt- 
 
 (illnind, it is, ml niitli il , or (ii/nii/ as, -atis, /". 
 
 (<//, I'Miistut (///'/"/■>'.) : ii/hiin il /)>/. nii.iiitii, snl!ic-itu(l-(>. -inis, /'. 
 
 idiistat iiitiT {<ii-r.). (46, c. ) (iii.i !< Il/, j'n I j'roni, st'ciiriis. 
 
 '(////, nil, soci-iis, -i. ///. mi. lions /'or, I Jul, <lif-li<l(), • re. 
 
 It I most, iVrt',' paciic, propc. i -Hsiis (ilnt.). 
 
 iiloj't, altc. '■ II n. I ions to, / iim, cupid, rrc {ini.}. 
 
 iilniii' in iloiiKj this, I tun, solus or mii/ injti r nii/dt. }.iiiii/ mn ,(iiii/tliini/, 
 
 uiius (529, /<), hoc tacio. (62.) (piis(|Uam, ipiidipiam, ullus. (.Sec 
 
 ii/oii'j. (331, 5 and 2 1.) 358.) 
 
 ain (III ji, y,\\\\. nii'/ / (ini/nissioni il Inti rroijntirt ), 
 
 also, (|Uo(pU' (Intr. !)S) ; or (sonn'- (■(•(pii, ecipiis. 
 
 tiiiii s), '\{\v\ii, idriiKpm. (366, i. ) n iiij Ininjir, ultra. (Sec also 328, </. ) 
 
 (iltttrs (iiiil /u iirt/is, ai'Ho at<iuc tori, mii/ innn iimii, (.'ujusvi.s fst. (292, 
 
 allcri/iij, I iiiti (intrinis.), inutor, 4.) 
 
 ari. (21, n.) , mii/ onr {in nnnl n ml mnsi r. t/n nsr s). 
 
 alira i/s, avniiifV. I (109.) 
 
 iuiiliitss(((lur, k!_!j;at-us, -i, in. inii/t/iimj ii/on /ifiiisi), (pud\ is, ijf n. 
 
 (ti>ihi(s/i, ainliusniili, iiiaid'iav, j'. /i/. 1 cujusvis. (359.) 
 
 II miss, secus. i (i/ii/irlnn- {ajh-r in 'jnt.), us((ii,im. 
 
 iimonij, inter (ac". ). | Apioliic, Apiolau, arum. 
 
 (Uit'Cd'/oyx inajor-es,-iiiu. (51, ((,//.."> ) npoloijisi fur, 1, vcniam ]iito, n-itli 
 
 (inrii'i;f, pristiaii.s,- vet-us, -eris ; ([Und or ijin. 0/ jui rlifij,l< . 
 
 VL'tustus, a, uni, siijurl. vutus- iijipiiniitli/. (64.) 
 
 tissinius ; antiqvius. (•Sec'//o^'.) appeal to, I, o])test()r, ari {nn'.); 
 
 anil, et, -(jue, atque, uc (p. 14, to i/on, not to,tii()\>U'^U>r, ai'i, ne. 
 
 note, ; see r.iso 110). (See 118.) 
 
 f(/(^'»', (le intv'gro. (328,./.) upjitid to i/on, I sol> mnli), titlein 
 
 ani/ir, ira,,/! ; / rinrisli, sue-eenseo, i tuaJii inijtloro, are, ut or ne, 
 
 ere, -censui, -eensuni {ilat.). uppial to fmr, to, deterr-eo, t re, 
 
 anijr// iritli, 1 am, ira-scor, i, -tus 1 -ui. (25.) 
 
 {(Int.). appiar {sum), I, videor, eri, visus 
 
 a//.'//'// mow/, iraeundia, ./'. ! (43.) 
 
 an<jri/ oiilcrii's. {Si'n outcries.) a/i/ilniitl, I, plau-(lo, iie, -si, -sum 
 
 an 'liilati, I, del-eu, ere, -e\ i, {'Int.). 
 
 -t'tum. ii/i/irt Illusion, niet-us, -us, :n. 
 
 1 Frre (ferine in Livy) is "ninri' or lo^s." ";il"'iit ; " imiif, /inipr, Irss llj,]!] hut lior- 
 (leriiii; on. Hi'iire ipnnl IVrt- fit, :is (iituriiUi/ li.-iiiiicns ; In it, iiv"]"' 'llvinu.s, nil hut iliviiie, 
 'heroic." 
 
 '■^ .1 III iipiini, iihl am] no liiiijj:i'r existing'; irliix {frui. .•niij in'iit . nff'ii Impi Kr.viid IVom 
 riiio-lii^), iAi\ iiiKi still I'sistinir Tims ilniini.< uiit'uinn, " what wa.~. Ion;: ;i^o niv h<iiiif ;" 
 ill nun ■ ((•('/ u.-i or) rrliislii, '' what }ilis Ion;; lni'H my hollif ;" iiiii.ftintiiiuii^i. an oil! riistotii 
 now ohsok-t*- ; vvlfvi vuht, in ;ii' oidanci' with loni^istiililislii'il iiiston: .-i 11 1 1' 111 11. < — 
 "of the goo<l old tinifs," ollci; iisnl in piaisiv ,''/•/ ((/.s- — " oiit-lV.,shioiii'il," " nin.'ly 
 uteu now ;" 2>i'iftinns, siniplj' " urluT," as opposed to " the present," 
 

 !| 
 
 !' 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 M { 
 
 14 
 
 J 
 
 3r)i; 
 
 GENERAL WC A BUI. ANY. 
 
 <ilii>i(i(trli, I. .'nlvmito, ;irc. 
 itjijiriiiuil fW this, I iji I i/iiiir, III) 
 tilti prolx). (247.) 
 
 (hi/ II nil) 
 
 (258. ii. 
 
 it ix, (tilti) 
 (';;/ irniit. 
 
 (t 
 it/i/irorc'l i[l 
 
 pniJi.'itur. 
 iilit til, I 
 
 snlco. 
 ii,il( iitl If, \ clicimiit-fr, -iii.s, -iHsiiiic. 
 iirildiir fur, stiidiimi, //. (iritli iji'ii.). 
 
 (300.) 
 'ii':li(> , /, <li.s H'To, I'lX', -surui. 
 iiriij/it, n-ctc. 
 II risfi/rriitir /nirt;/, tli>\ n|ttiiii;it-f!S, 
 
 -iiiii or -iniii, //(. jil. (Sec, 51, »f, 
 
 (w/ iinli'. ) 
 drill {mil), ^|•;u•^•^illlIn, )i. (altcr- 
 
 iiiM, 368). 
 iiniirii, ann.atus. 
 iirni.'<, ariiia, //. y//. 
 ii'-iiii.stiri , nil, iiidutiae, /'. /*/. 
 iiriini, cxt'i'uit-us, -fis, //). 
 iirririi/, ;uivuiit-u.s, -fia, ///. 
 iirrli'c. (lit), I, por-vt'iiio, iti', -vtiii, 
 
 -veiitum (;ul iritli nrr.). 
 iirroii; sa^itt.-i, _/! 
 mi, ars, artis, /'. 
 IIS, Of ii.s , . . .so, sicut (irifli ita /'w 
 
 inn ill r/iiiisi); et . . . ft. 
 IIS ((IS f/iiiiiif/i), uuujuain. (496.) 
 lis (= ir/iiii), (hiiu. (180.) 
 lis of'li-n as, (luotie.s ; cum. (Stn^ 
 
 192, 434.) 
 IIS ri'/iinis, or as to (= aliout), tie 
 
 (»//>>.). (332,3.) 
 (/•< to (j'ri'i' froiK citn as to), ab 
 
 (332, I, (') ; (from t/ic siili' of, its 
 
 riijnrils), ihiil. 
 IIS to (Inf.) (SfolOS.) 
 iisri ml till' tliroii" I (st-i- 17), rex 
 
 lio, or regnuin accipio. 
 (isnrtiii/i, I, coji nosc'o, vrv, -novi, 
 
 -nituiii ; ciTtior lio. 
 iisrrihi- to i/oii, I, til»i acceptuin 
 
 rt'ftTo. (>>(•».' iiiililiti'il to ijoii.) 
 ask {ijoii), I ((» iiiii'stioii), te rogo, 
 
 iiiti-rrogo ; ex, ahs, te (juae-ro, 
 
 (•re, -sivi. (Seep. 157, noti-.) 
 ask (»/<"'), ^ (rcijiii'st, heij), te rogo, 
 
 oro, are ; a1)s te pet-o, fre, -ivi, 
 
 -ii, -ituiu (lit). (See 127, c.) 
 ask for, /, ])oseu, ere, pu'posei. 
 ask i/(iiir o/iiiiiiiii, I, te lonsul-o, 
 
 ore, iii, -tuui. (248.) 
 
 asim-t of af'iiirs, tin, renim faci- 
 
 cs, -ei, /'. 
 iissnilniits, — l/insi ir/io ilssili/ (ag- 
 
 g'.-tidior). (See 175.) 
 itssiissiii, Hic.iii-n.s, i, ///. 
 iissiiii/t, I. Cf^vv attiirk.) 
 iissi mlili , to (iiitraiis.), coiivenire. 
 iiss iiilt/if, eoiiveiit-lls. -\i.s, iii. 
 assert, I ( jinti'iiil), dictito. arc 
 iissi rf, I (as a, fart), alliritm, are. 
 assirt, I ii'oiilil. (149, i. ) 
 iissi rl, I (iiiiiiiitnlii), viiidico, ari". 
 iissi rt iiiij (•niiiitri/'s fri Ilium, I, 
 
 patriaiii in liliertateiii viiidico. 
 assirlor.s of (j'riii/oiii), =r tlmsr 
 
 ir/io fiarr assirtn/, itr. (175.) 
 assist, /, adjiivo, are. (24^5.) 
 iisslsfaiiri , I liriinj i/mi, til)i opiMii 
 
 fero. 
 iiHsistanri , I nniii tn his^ silbveiiio, 
 
 ire, et«^ (ilnt . ). 
 iissiirn/, I am. (240. ) 
 Allii iiiaiis, Atlieiiieii.s-c.s, -iuiii. 
 atom' for, I , luo, ere ; jKieiias do 
 
 attiiilii'l to nil, iiiei ainantissinms. 
 
 (302.) 
 attark, I {i/iiii'ra/ snisi), ag-gredior, 
 
 -i, -gressiis (an-.); (a riti/ or 
 
 jilaci), oppugiio, are (see 24) ; 
 
 (siiilili iilji), a<l()rior, iri, -ortus. 
 attack, I (ill irorils), iu-vehor, i, 
 
 -vectus, in (arr.). 
 attark, to (of a /n'sfilrnre, jmnir), 
 
 inva-dere. si, -sum. 
 attain to, I (= arriri' at), jiervejiio 
 
 ad. (19.) 
 attain to, I (= ohtain), a<lipiseor. 
 
 (19.) 
 atti'infit, I, Conor, ari ; id ago lit. 
 attitn/it (siilist.), inceptiim, n. ; 
 
 conat-us, -us, in. 
 author it I/, j>()test-as, -atis. (See 
 
 Infianrc, note. ) 
 a rail mysvlf of, I, utor, i, usus 
 
 [ahl): 
 a rail irith, I am of no, nihil valeo 
 
 apud. (331, 4, d.) 
 arariri', w vpiur.. f. 
 arcrf frroi, J, puiliib-eo, ere, -ui, 
 
 -I'.'ilr., :d>. 
 ami I, 1 (a > in\hi>. /■'.■.). de-fugio, 
 
 ere, -frig- 
 
6'A'A'A'A'yl /. / '0(?A AV 7 .-/ A' \ \ 
 
 iiraiil, I ((I iliiniji r), vitfi, art'. 
 (iro'iil, to {z=zhi onlrr not to, ■fr.). 
 
 (101, ii. ; of. 109.) 
 (irotr, I , {>r;u; me fern. 
 Kiniri' of, 1 <iiii, or hicoiiir, sei. tio, 
 
 ire, -si, -suiii 
 
 '/'iirk:;, tin if turn tlnir, terga tlaiit, 
 (li'ilcnint. 
 
 fiiiiiil, iiiaii-us, -fis, _/'. 
 
 /)inil.s/i, I, ci\ itatc pcllo, oxpello ; 
 111 t\ilii:iii [x'lld, t-n;, jit'imli, 
 ]»iilsuiii, (>/• exigd, (VKi, exegi, t'X- 
 ai'tiiui : I'll iiislniii-iit, t;xiliuiu, //. 
 
 till II k\ ri|ta,,/". 
 
 Iiini'/iirt, 11^ fpul-at', -aruiii.y'. 
 
 1)11 rlid rill n, it, l»arbar-iis, -i, //(. 
 
 /hi rhii roils, siijiirl. of rnidfli.s. 
 (57, II.) 
 
 fiiisi' (iiilj.), turpis. 
 
 Ititsi^iii-ss, turj)itU(l-u,-iiii.s, _/'. ; t/n 
 Ita.-ii'iii'.'is of', ■~^- lioir ttiisr it ix. 
 
 (174, r.) 
 
 I'litth, jnoc'liuin, n. 
 
 Iiiitt/i', in, in atiie. 
 
 hear, I , fern, fcrre, tuli, latum. 
 
 }n'iiu*ifii1, jdil-flu'r.-rhrior, -clierri- 
 
 Iti'/it ri', I, crtd-o, tie, -iili, -itum : 
 
 ii'itkihtt. I trust. (248.) 
 hfloiiij to III' r/iis.-i o/\ I , iiiiiis sum 
 
 ex.' (339../) 
 Iii'iii-nriii/, .saliitaris ; utili.s. 
 heni'tit yon, /, tilii prosum, pi"- 
 
 desse, jirofui. 
 Iii'.'<i'ir/i, I, oni, are. (118.) 
 In'.slfi/i', I (lilorkiiiu), ()li-sitli'(i, rre. 
 
 -.setli, sessiiui ; (/<// ii.imi/ < ttiiik\, 
 
 oppugiit), ail'. 
 fust, till' n ri/. (529, il.) 
 Iirsti ir {t/ii.si' t/iiiH/s on //I'"). A liaei- 
 
 tihi laij/iiir, iri, -itus. 
 tiitiiki' iiii/si/f' to, I, WW eoiifero ad. 
 Iiitrui/, J, pro-do, ere, -didi, 
 
 ■dituiu ; hrtnii/ir.'', = tliosr irlio 
 
 hiiil hi'traijiil. (.See 175.) 
 hittrr, j'or tlii\ in melius. 
 Iii'tti-r, it iriHild liiin lii-i'ii, satiiis, 
 
 melius fuit. (153.) 
 Iirtiri'i'il. (331, lO. ) 
 
 n ll'lll 
 
 /. /. 
 
 /(/(/, /, iu-l 
 
 eoiuploro, are 
 
 (120. 
 
 heo, ere, -ssi, -ssum. 
 
 hiili/ini/, lit t/ii', jussu. (269, O/*. 
 
 mus. 
 
 (See V 
 
 oe 
 
 ')i'riiu.'<i', (iiiia, (|UO( 
 
 69, (/. 
 
 M' 
 
 .) 
 etc; 
 
 Hiiti 
 
 heroine, I, fu), fieri, factus. 
 heroine.^ (m.n')i ''. (uos) deeet (234) 
 or ijen. irit/i est. (291, Oli.-<. 4.) 
 
 HilL 
 
 a, rogati-o, -onis, J. 
 
 hind mif-'ti f/, I, me obstrin-go, er«v 
 
 -XI. 
 
 hliiik {ini'tiip/i. of" rrinii), .-iiniiihi 
 
 tautus ; or tam atrox. 
 
 Iihnni', culpa, J. 
 
 hill 
 
 nil', 
 
 J, viti 
 do. f^re, -di. 
 
 iii)ero, are ; r» 
 
 prelieii 
 
 -sum. 
 
 he/nil, to, a'.ci-dere, «li (iliit.). 
 
 he/ore (iii/r.), antea ; antehaf ; ■ hhssinij, a, bonum, //. (51, c.) 
 
 ante (322) ; ipreji.), ante [urr.]. | I, inil, caeeus. 
 hej'orr lonij, ~ ■•<oon or .shortli/. 
 hi'ij, I, rogo, oro, etc. (See (».>/.•.) ilooil, 
 
 kitili', I. (See hisii'i/i .) 
 
 h, 
 
 iioi, 
 
 h, 
 
 sangui-s, -nis, in.\ ciii-or, 
 
 in-cipio, ere, -eepi, -eep- oris, in.; .^otniirli. (296, <•. ) 
 
 turn ; coej)i (/ hii/in) [iiin.-<tiii hloO'/.ihi'il, caed-e.s, is, /". 
 
 iiioi/iil), eoei)tiiiu est (219) ; of'tin lilijoili/, eriieutus. 
 
 i'.rpri--<sii( Jill iin/iirf'. tinse (16^) ; lili)ii\>i (nii tiipli.),cii\:t.ui\t-;iH, atis^/'. 
 
 hri/in iiiiiir, rediiitegro, are h/iiiii'i r, eri'-or, -oris, ///. 
 
 (iirr.) ; lii'jiii irith. (332. 1,7'.) i lilii.'<h ut, or for, I, me joi'let, ('•///( 
 'ii'liiiiiini/, till , initium, ii. 
 
 Iiiliiilfof, on, pro (iihl.). 
 
 hi'/iiire, I, me gero, ere, gessi. gea- 
 
 tum (inth iiilr.). (.See 241.) 
 hiliolil, f, a-spieio, ere.-spexi. -.spee- 
 
 tum. 
 Jieliif, «/, opiiii-o, -onis,^/'. 
 
 ////. (202) or ijin. (309). 
 hoitut, I riiiki' II, glorior, ari. 
 huilif, till ii'holi, uuiversi. (380, A.) 
 
 (See note uihler nil.) 
 hoilii-ijiiiinl, II, satell-es, itis, ///. 
 holilli/, aiidaeter ; ferociter ; '■/'/■// 
 
 iiilj. (61), ferox.' 
 
 ' Ftinr ' ; iiiit iisi'.l in tin- sflnsf nf " femcioiis ;" it Jciiotes "liigli spirit" 
 
 I'lll I H'il Id 
 
 excess. 
 
:m 
 
 (/AW'AV.//, iVCABl , ?A'r 
 
 
 'ii. 
 
 m: 
 
 iij 
 
 I 
 
 H 't 
 
 /^oo/', f/, lihcr. -li. ///. hriiKj (ini/ .-/icrr/i) /o iiii (ml, I. 
 
 Imr/i. iKitus ui.'i'^<'>i|. I liiicin li'icio ir///i iji'ii. of' (/iriiin/. 
 
 hnr/i iiinl liriiiiij/if ii/i, iiatiis cilut'.'i- : IrriiKj ini'/<i\ /, fucio. "'/'/'/ (/<•/. nf' 
 
 t'.IS(|tlC. 
 
 lni//i. ut(li|l|c ; illlilin. (Sec 378. 
 
 |I1S (|Un:' 
 
 290. nlis. 
 
 or ;iripitnuiii. 
 
 I.nf/, 
 
 'I. ri 
 
 ■t, vr\ 
 
 Vcl (p. M. /'. I 
 
 liriiii/ II /I, I {i>t siijiiiHi n, it''.), siili 
 
 VC ll 
 
 (P, ('Vi\ -\i. -ctlllll 
 
 /. / 
 
 iiiii ill 
 
 iliiljl] (|). \V,\. Jinrt 
 
 (I, ;iri; : o 
 
 /'.■<i,/i/ 
 
 siip- 
 /'/•v, ;iil(liir(i. 
 
 lift mil 
 ,11,1. 
 Iiiiir III. I {ill' lii/i/i. ), clisci jiior. i hrliii/ir o/' <i uii'ssiKjc, I mn tin 
 
 V\X\ 
 
 (il.il. ). 
 
 'mil. |>ll-fl-. 
 
 til. 
 
 nC Irmil 
 
 iiiintio, :ii'('. 
 I /'rniiil, l;itiis. 
 I11J1//111111/, ;i liriil/ii r, fr.'it-tT, -v\> 
 
 ]tu('r(» ; irlii II ii-<i I 
 
 tillr, ;i plH'I'is. 
 Iinll/iniii/ , ill. (63.) 
 
 / '-/■ 
 
 iimri' 
 
 lllilll /irnlKj/ll I /I ( hml), ciliu-.'itus 
 
 liniiiil \iiiiii) ii'i 
 
 III ilish 
 
 iiiiiiii )', 
 
 (eihiuo, ;uv). 
 hni/lii'iir.-<, ternirt.s, 711. j 
 c'ulii, /;. ]>l. (Livy). 
 
 1/. ; ti' 
 
 rn- 
 
 i;iiniMiiiii;i( iiotairi (tilii'i iii-iiio. himli'ii (d/ iiil)iiliil.-<li'fliii/), ii.^i' rt"< 
 
 tTi', -iissi. -u.stum. 
 hriiii'lixli . /, iacto, ai< 
 
 anuridsissiiiia ni ii/i/> 
 
 (222, 
 
 <)l,> 
 
 ) 
 
 hnirr (iiilj.), t'oi'tis, (■ ; mlr. forti- hiirili'n.^nnu', Tiiolcstii.s ; ^I'axis. 
 
 tcr, 
 
 hii.'^/iirs.-<, till', I'fS 
 
 th' 
 
 IH'l, /. 
 
 h 
 
 III. 
 
 It'll re I III II'I 
 
 in. 
 
 -JK'lt 
 
 /. /, lilt iiiia ex [ici'iiir, liiit, sod ; veniiu (nnphtitii'). 
 
 I'.S. 
 
 hri'iik, I {iiiflii/ili.), \i()l(i, art'. 
 Iiriiik mil ii'in''!. I, liilciii tal 
 
 fofflli, talsiiiii. 
 hri'iik ii/i, I [I I'll 11^.), dissi] 
 
 luitrlii'i; f, tnicido, arc 
 hjixtiii)ihn\ hi/stiDii/i'i'-'i, ii'<i' adsto or 
 111, crt'. cifcuui.std. (StH- 71. 73, 175.) 
 
 hnitk 
 
 ili'iii 
 
 111. ari!. 1 rnlii mill/, calainit-as, -atis, _/'. 
 dissi|Mir, rail nini/i, I , a\(ir<i, arc. 
 
 an. 
 
 hrcatliiiii/ ."/iiii'i: (399. "/'<. 1'.) 
 
 Iirll. 
 
 rilii'i'i/, ainhit-ii.s, -us,' in. 
 
 I, 
 
 n'lijiui 
 
 •I, a, lat 
 
 r-o, -oin.s, /;/. 
 
 I'lill to nil'. 
 
 I, ad 
 
 uu' voco, coin'di'o. 
 
 ire ; mil In iiuml, sci- ri rail. 
 ralli'il, f II 1)1, V()Of)r, aii. (7.) 
 rahn, {lul}.). trainjuillus. 
 
 Iirimj, I, duco, ere, diixi. ductir.ii. ruhtili/, ae((Uo animo. 
 
 I, 
 
 I, 
 
 mill [i/oii 
 
 tills), I , line tilii af-t'cn 
 
 t'l-rrc, attuli, ••dlatuii 
 
 miip, castr-a, -oriiin, ??. ; 
 
 1/. 
 
 nil If 
 
 hark 
 
 iron 
 
 L I. 
 
 I'fiuiiitio, arc. 
 
 rani/iiin/ii, = I'l iir, aiin-us, -1, //'. 
 
 I'll III /III, i/ii ii-i 
 
 r//.>v/.s7/'n//.v 
 
 hrlinj (it pi'r.foii) In I'orr ;/o,i, /, ad | pr(i.'</irroiis, res iufclicitcr (is- 
 
 te a<l-<lmii. ovi', ct( 
 
 1. 
 
 rilHJ I',: 
 (260, 
 
 'III 1 1 
 
 /„ 
 
 1 1 It'll, I' I 
 
 sunc), i>r()S]iero, gcst.i est. 
 
 '). ('(///. 
 
 /, 
 
 inssnill. imssc 
 
 aiiill'l. lil 
 
 ])()t>ii. 
 
 KT, 
 
 hrliiij I'orini ril . I [a liiir). (cm, I'lnnllilati' /or. I am a. ]H't-(>. crc 
 
 f. 
 
 rrc. tuli. 
 
 -ivi, 11, -itimi. (22, 23.) 
 
 /, 
 
 etc 
 
 l"!„, I, 
 
 t'cni. tcrrc, <'at>,iai'. o/', ( "aiiiicusi.- 
 
 (58.) 
 
 ra ,,),(> 
 
 ^ /, 
 
 iic<|U-ci), lie, ivi, -11, 
 
 hrli/ii li<.<-< on lion, I. tihi daimiuiii (■//y;/v"c(', liliid-o, -iiiis. _/'. 
 
 iu-t'eiii, trii-c, -tuli, illatiiiii. 
 
 arr, cura, /. 
 
 brim/ out [jn r-ioii.^), I, pro-diicn, rari, I'ri i' I'roin, securus. 
 
 cri'. 
 
 I'll rv 
 
 to, I, \(ll( 
 
 o, \ cllc, VlllUl. 
 
 briiKj (raiisi ) iHiiilxInin nt to. (260, rarifnl for (i/oiir ■"'n./'it;/), J a 
 
 III, 
 
 ?•) 
 
 tilii -avcii. (24f».) 
 
 I .\mh\i., lit. " I 1;" li'iiiii 
 
 lllilll' f.il illi, ll raii\;i>-,.iit t»r luilii-lV. 
 
(;/\\7-A'.i/. rocAprr.AK v. 
 
 369 
 
 rnn-fi ii<ro-<s, /, transportfi, are. 
 
 (2'j9, (>!>.s. I 
 run-)/ on, /, = / n'aijt', gero, f-re, 
 
 ni rrij out, /, iix.siMjiior ; coiificio. 
 rarfji out of the roiintri/, /, exportn, 
 
 are. 
 ('(irt/iiii/r, ( "[ K ]artlia,2-(>, /<>r. -iiii. 
 ruse, ill our, ill lluliis ( " /;/ //.<"). 
 (•</N>', /■/ is the, lit lit. (123.) 
 rust, I , cuiijicio, ('TO, etr. 
 I'll tell, J , cajiio. 
 niiisr, (I, causa, ./'. 
 (•(/(/.s( (/((.N-.v), /. iiifcro, forrt', I'tc. 
 ciiiisi' ijiiiiiir), I, iiijic'io, vw, etc., 
 
 ii'Hlt (irr. iniif ilut. 
 rouse of', I am tin-, per me fit uL, 
 
 stat (jUoiiiinuH. (131.) 
 niiisi' to ill' t/iroirii ojirti, I . (See / 
 
 O/li II. ) 
 
 ciiiitiuii, iniiit (>/', teiiieritas, -atis, _/! 
 I'liitiuii, witli, eaut-e, -ius. 
 raritlrjl, {n\\\\t-vfi, -uiii, >//. /*/. 
 ci'iisi', /, »lo-sino, ere, -ivi, -ii, -itiiiii; 
 
 (*;' (le-sisto, ere, -stiti. 
 ccrtdiii, certiis. 
 cirtdin (rirtori/), e.xploratus. 
 rcrtdin, a.s, pni certo. (240, oIim.) 
 ccrtaiti, I (tin, certo (lufr.) seio, 
 
 -ire. 
 ri'iidiiiJi/ (= / i/nnit t/idt), sane, 
 (•('litre of, the. (60.) 
 ventre (q/'<(rn)>/), media (60) aci-es, 
 
 -ei. 
 eentur'ion, ceuturi-o, -onis, m. 
 chain ((jeneral term), vinculum, //., 
 
 and stm fetters. 
 Chance (/lersonincd), Fortuna, ./*. 
 chance, la/ mere, forte ac casu. 
 
 (268.) 
 ch(ini/e, I {trans.), iinitt), ettnimiiti), 
 
 are (see 20, 21); (intrans.), 
 
 mutnr, ari. 
 chaiKje of purpose, incoiist;intia, ./". 
 chaiK/e of sidis, tiaiislti-o, -onis, 
 
 channel, fretum, n. 
 
 character, often tiirneil (as in i'.r. 
 'I'l) 1)11 a (Ivjicndcnt clause. (S .-e 
 
 diarurtir {natural), in^eiiiliiii,' //. 
 chdraitir (.'/"("/), virtus, -utis, /'. 
 
 (See vote.) 
 chanictir {mode of' lif), nior-es, 
 
 -mil, ///. (See noti . ] 
 cfairiictir, hiij/nst, ojitimi nioirs ; 
 
 virtus summa. 
 chdCdctir, (f the saiin, as, talis, 
 
 . . . qualis. (Sfc 84.) 
 cliiirditi ristic (f, it is the. (291, 
 
 (His. 4.) 
 chan/e, a {oj'troops). impet-us, us,>«. 
 chari/e, / inaki' a, inva-do, ere. si, 
 j -sum (in) ; imjietum facio (in). 
 
 chdn/ed, I am (irifh), in criineii 
 I veiiio {i/en. ). 
 
 ' charm {snhst. ), dulctil-o, -iuis, ;'. 
 chastisement on, I inflict, aiiimad- 
 
 vert-o, <'re, -i, in {ace.). 
 
 \ checic, I keep in {temper, eir.), 
 
 moderor, ari (249); {troops), con- 
 tineo, ere, -ui. 
 
 cheer, a, clain-or, -oris, m. 
 
 c/ieer, I am of ijood . (303, < >l>s. •_*. ) 
 I cheer on, I, hortor, ari ; adhortor. 
 1 clieerfnl, liilaris. 
 
 rfieerfnllij, facile. 
 
 cherish, I, tueor, en. 
 
 c/wose to, I {or like), niilii Iil>et, 
 (246.) _ 
 I choose (for), I, e-ligo, ere, -legi, 
 I -lectum. (See 259, note.) 
 ' chief a {chieftain), regul-iis, -i. 
 ' chief {cliief man), a, prin-ceps, 
 I -cipis. 
 i child, a, pu-er, -eri. 
 
 children {ojl's/iriiii/). lilxr-i, -onini, 
 
 circiiinstanre, ri'S, i\\,J. 
 
 I cirCUIIIstdlires {/ l/ii Id to), Icllip-ll^, 
 
 ! -oris, n. (292, 7.) 
 ritddel, arx, arcis, /l 
 citii, ur})-s, -is, /'. 
 
 ciriH.-<dtion, I adrance in, liuin.ini- 
 or Ho. 
 
 1 I iiil('iiium(iiiiiiijii<i), " natural },'itts," mo.stly used of /H/c^/d'O'ii? as f »'^''(^•.• of natiiriil 
 mnrii/ gifts ; iiujoiiKtii moiisque soiiit'tinies expifsscs the wlmlf idi'iv of '• <haiai'ti'i" 
 as natiir.-il ami afqnirfd by li.-iMt. Innrniinn oftin — " ;iliilitii--,," ''^'i iiins." a-: lii- liiu't 
 fi'o:ii i It dill' > iir rhtii.<. It is iii'vor um li iu tlir jilui.il d a >iiiKl<' I'l'i'-^oii : mi re ( ut-ro 
 iw,i..s till' two wnnls, siim.ynn itifioih I'/iJoVs, "the liiglu'^t natural gif1>. ' Wlirii 
 ' (•i,umi-ti'r"=g()i)il cliaraiter, virttis should be used. 
 
^1- 
 
 r 
 
 "•'i..l 
 
 18, 
 
 .'{«;() 
 
 CENEK.ll. I 'OC.UU '/.AkV 
 
 cuinii. 
 
 I h 
 
 .Irl. 
 
 rlitiiiinir /i>i\ /, tl;iL;iti>. ;in' {(trr.). 
 
 cliiss, iffii-iis. cris, //. ,■ of 
 
 Hiii gnieris. 
 flittr, ('(irtiis; iiiiiiiiffstu.-*. 
 
 r'litr </. 
 
 in-or, -U.S. 
 
 '/^X I'llISS 
 
 CJTe. 
 
 •/<(//•, /7 /.v, .'iitpiir-ft, T'Tt', -nit (sec 
 
 46, 
 
 (*/• iiKimlfstuiu est. 
 
 r/rtir {llll/sr/f) (;/■, /, (lllf) |llll'L,'(i, 
 
 iil't!, tU- (306, <>/«.), or irilh ah/, 
 siiiifih/. 
 ch'iiii'iici/, ilciiu'iiti;i, /'. ; "'//. clc- 
 
 lllfllS. 
 
 r/!,ii/, lilt/, h'w. (338, "/<>. I.) 
 
 I. 'HI KM, (flit-u.s, -i. 
 
 rfosc ( I'riiiitl), siipi-rl. of amit'ii.s. 
 
 (55.) 
 r/iisi', I (s/iiif lip), iiitiTcIii ili>, ci'c, 
 
 -si, -sum. 
 cloMi' III liiiiiil, |ii-<»[»e ; liiuid jirocul. 
 vloxe lo. (331, 13 or I9. ) 
 cIuxpIij ri'sriiihHiiii, iini' Kiiiti'rJ. ol 
 
 siiiiilis. 
 r/ol/i/ii'/, ve.stit-us, US, 7)1. 
 i'oiihI iiloiiij, I, (iiiivu) pr;iett!i-vu- 
 
 hor, i, -vtictii.s (lu-r.). Willi 
 
 ]>raefcerveli()r. nave nml (hjiki nn' 
 
 nffi'ii oniilli'il. 
 "0^4/ {si(h.-<l.), frig-US, -<n'is, 11. 
 >'iilhrfifi/i', follr-ga, -at', 7/(. 
 ro//!sio)i [ir'ilh), I cniiii' ///('(). ('((U-Higii, 
 
 f-re, -Hixi, -Hictuni (I'uiii). 
 ro/inii/, cdlonii, y". 
 t'mtiliitinfloii, ill, conjuiK'ti. 
 roiii/itrl, cdinuinila, ii. til. 
 
 riiiniiiiniiriilr /<;, 1(1 hii/imi to), 
 <'<itiiiinini('<i. ar'\ cum. (253, iv.) 
 riHiiiiiiiiiilii (riril), civit-as, -ati.s.y". 
 rniiiixiiiioiis, /lis, sui. (349, Oli.-i.) 
 iiiinpiiri., /, I'Dii-fiTit, ft-rre (cum). 
 colli fiiissiDn, miscrii'iirilia, /, 
 
 '/. /. 
 
 itMrn, t''r»\cori'i, coac'tum. 
 
 ' hill, I inn, =z I 
 
 inn II 
 
 1,/r 
 
 nun jirlilioil lor, cnntcutld, -ollls, 
 
 _/". {iril/i i/i n., 300). 
 rniii/i/iiin, nnih-f roiiifi/iiiiils, /, 
 
 ijiu lur', i, (|iicstuH ; concjueror. 
 (•<iiii.ji/iiiiiiil-< III, //((///, ('(illauilo. (25.) 
 roni/i/i/ iril/i, I, «il»-sc(iU()r [ilnl.). 
 
 (See 263, i.) 
 rioiifiii/siioi, iinifir, c(>a(;tus (cogo). 
 I'oiiiriii/i s, /lis. (Sw. I'liiii/iiinioiis.) 
 roiii-i'ii/, I, celo, are. (See 230.) 
 roiii-rniini/ (j>ri'/i.), «le {nhl.). 
 rinirrrns, il, pertiiiet (263, iv.) ail ; 
 
 iisi'il irif/i inf. 
 ronili'iiin, I, coudemno, are. (306, 
 
 307.) 
 loni/i'innation, coudemnati-o, -onis, 
 
 i-oinlii/n {punifilniieiit), gravissimus. 
 rnntli/ii)ii (/ill), fortuna, y. ; (ti'rin), 
 
 conditi-o, -iiuis, y". ; ronilition of 
 
 s/iirrr;/. (58.) 
 ritiiiliiii iiijisi'/f (if solilii'rs), 1, rem 
 
 gei-(». 
 roiifi'i'cnci' (iril/i), I liiirt' u, col-lo- 
 
 ([uor, i, -locutus, (cum). 
 ronf'i-ss, /, fateor, eri, faasus ; con- 
 
 fiteor, eri, -fessus. 
 
 romiiunii 
 
 I ( 
 
 (iliit., 251) ; duco. 
 
 oil aniiii), I, praesum •■ondi/i'iifc, Hducia, /". ; I jiiif ronf- 
 
 rniniinnii 
 
 / in//si'/f, I, niilii impem 
 
 ileiH'cin, con-tido, ^re, -Hsus (282, 
 
 01,! 
 
 tid 
 
 em (til)i 
 
 liab 
 
 are. 
 
 I'lUII 
 
 inoiii/ir (of ijo rrison, I'lr.), p 
 
 lae- 
 
 tcctus. 
 
 (408. 
 
 ■).=//' 
 
 'lUf'r 
 
 riHiiininii/irs (i;iiii nt/ s 
 
 ir/io li'iii/ (du('i>)- 
 roiniiiinn nil III of, initium, )i. or 
 
 (See 417, 
 
 /iiirl. pass, of lucipii 
 
 ».) 
 
 roiiiiiii 
 ere 
 
 t, I (' 
 
 '""•), 
 
 )m-mitto. 
 
 tacK 
 
 roiiiiiiil II fun It, I, peiHM), are. (26.) 
 rmiiinoii {/n/nni/iiH/ to inatij/), eom- 
 
 m 
 
 uuis ; linn moil to i/ou am/ 
 
 nil', 
 
 confisriiti', J, pul)Iic(), are. 
 roiifii.<ion, trepiilati-o, -ouis, ,/*. 
 roil fnsii III, ri'iijns, I'tr. ; iisr iiii/irrs. 
 /HISS. (;/'trepid(>, are. (See 218.) 
 roiK/nitii/iiti' i/oii on t/iis, J, lioc 
 
 {"• 
 
 liaiicrem, or o]t iianc rem 
 
 >r de liac re, til>i gratulor, ari. 
 
 roiii/ 
 
 inr, 
 
 /, 
 
 vnico, ere, vici, victuin. 
 
 commanis til»i mecum. 
 
 cuinmonicia 
 
 nil. 
 
 respi 
 
 uiilica. 
 
 roiiipii ror, tin', vict-or, -oris. 
 I'onsrii'iiri', irit/i o f/ooi/. (See 64.) 
 roiisrionsniss, seiis-us, -us, /«. 
 rotisriil (sii/ist.), coiisens-us, -fis, 
 consi'iil to, I (nioiliil rirli), xolo. 
 
 /». 
 
 ronnK 
 
 In- /. 
 
 arhitror, 
 
 an. 
 
 Dote uiularfitnii/.) 
 
 (See 
 
GEXERA L VOCA B Ul. .1 A' ) ' 
 
 :m 
 
 ,///. 
 
 I n ri/t/ihiij. 
 
 t'liiisiili riifiii Nj 
 
 (63, 61.) 
 roii.sii/i r/Nii, lit in (492, v. /<) ; 
 
 roiisii/rriii'i till iimt/iit s.s i>j\ iit in 
 
 //•//// taiitus. (332, 5, //.) 
 (■()//.\/\7 (//', /, cnll.stn. ,Ui'. ••, <'\. 
 i-Diixiiliitiiiii . ix (I i/riiit, nia^mi vnt 
 
 sniatio (i/iil.). (260, ^.) 
 roiis/iin, I (iiijiiiiisl), I'onjiiro, arc 
 
 (contra) (m-c). 
 rdiisiiiriitur, turn f>i/ (|ui irif/i n rh. 
 
 _(176.)_ 
 ( 'i)iislaiiflii(>/>li', (Jnnstantinojxtlis, 
 
 (ii'r, -iin. Inc. -i. 
 iniistiiiif/i/, scnijxT**/" iiuiKiuatn non. 
 roiistitiitioii. f/ic. ri'S|)ul)lica. (Sci; 
 
 292, (Jhs. (I ml note.) 
 ronxtitufiitiiiil ; iDironsfifuflomi/, v 
 
 repnblica (332, 4) ; contra rcin- 
 
 puMicani. 
 I'oiisii/, cons-ul, -iilis. 
 rniisii/.s/i/p, c(insnlat-us, -iLs, m, 
 I'inisii/f, I (= I iisk fill ofi'niion 11/), 
 
 oonsul-o, Ore, -ui, -tuni (/r/7/* ui'r.). 
 roiisitU till' ijooil or hitci'st nj\ /, 
 
 consulo, irltli lid/. (See 248.) 
 rftiifniinnintr. (See .ftnfi'sinmi.) 
 rniifniijtoriiri/, (t, aeijualis. (61, '".) 
 
 rntiriiirnl af' /Ills, I mi). itV f'lil. lln,' 
 niilii |>rrsMasiini lla^H•^, (240.) 
 
 rorii, trunicntiini, //. 
 
 ( 'nrti ■-<, ( "orte.si US, -i. 
 
 rns/, /, consti. (280, "/'.>•.); rusts tun 
 niiirli, if, niinio cniistat. 
 
 riMiiiril. (I, ('(insiliuui, n. 
 
 luiiiil, I iniiiiilx r), nnniero, arr. 
 
 r,iinit, I (=: / lin/il), lllllitd ; dllru. 
 riiiiiit iiiiiDiiij, I. (240. < )hs, •„'. ) 
 ri)ini/i iniiin., vnlt-us, us, //(, 
 riHiiitrij {lull's), patria, /'. (sec 16, 
 
 It) ; (till), rcspiililwa. 
 ri)initri/ (ti rritnni), tin t's, -iiini, tn. 
 
 (See 16, II.) 
 roinitri/ {lis d'lst'nirt from tin fiuni), 
 
 rua, ruria, 11. (see 16, c) ; /'// tlir 
 
 coinifri/, r»wi. 
 roiuitn/iiiiiii, i'i\-is, i.s. 
 roiiriii/i', \ irt-u.s, -utis,y'. ; eonslaii- 
 
 tia,./!; furtituil-o, -inis.y! 
 
 roiinii/r, ii lililil lit'. (68, Olis.) 
 niiinii/i , I s/ioir. (241.) 
 CDuriiiit to, I liiiri' thi,-=l 
 
 fiirr. (26) ; audeo, ere, ausiis. 
 roiirsi', I tiiki this, liaec I'acio ; 
 
 rationem ineo. 
 roursr irhirli, a, id (juod. (67. 
 
 /•i II- 
 
 Mane 
 
 roiifc7ii/)t j'or, eontemptus, -fis, m, \ rourf, thr, judieiiini, /( 
 
 {iritli lien., 300.) 
 ruiiti'iiij)tihU', fur from, hand (169, 
 
 II.) conteinnen<lu.s (393). 
 ronti'iif iritli, I din, eontentns sum 
 
 1,'thl.]. 
 roiifi'st, d, certam-en, inis, «. ; or 
 
 ii.sc iii.fii rs. pass, of eerto, are. 
 
 (218.) 
 roiitiiii'iif, fill', eontinen-H, -tis {■•«■. 
 
 terra). 
 roiifrari/ {("Ij.), contrariiis. 
 roiitrarif to, centra qnain. (491, /».) 
 ronrciiiifiici', cdUinKMla, ri. jil. 
 rimrerxdtloii, 1 lain', col-loquor, i, 
 
 -locutiis. 
 voiircrse (u'itli), 1, colloi|Uor, i (cum) 
 
 (of two or mo ri', inter se, 354). 
 coiiriiicfd, I dm,z=I iim jn-rsiiddiil. 
 
 (See 122, l>.) 
 
 ronr, I (irifli iiriiiii's nrjliifs), in- 
 
 festuni liaheo. (240.) 
 coHHiril, timidus, ignavus ; niininls, 
 
 ignavi. 
 rijini riliri', ignavia, J. ; tiiuidit as, 
 
 -atis,y". 
 roiraril'ij, igna\ us ; tiniidu.s. 
 rrare for, I, deaitlerd, are (drr.) 
 
 (mostli/ fur irliuf I /urn' liml nml 
 
 lidve lost) ; in Kr. 48 c. //-•(: 
 
 appeto, ere. 
 crdvimj (/nirtir.) for, appetens (irit/i 
 
 Wn'). (302.)" 
 rri'dilili', it is srarrilij, \ix creili 
 
 potest. (20Q,(>l>s.) 
 rri'dif, d, ov rn difdhli', it is. (260,3.) 
 crime, a, facin-us, -oris, //. ; tlagi- 
 
 tiuni, II. ; seeluH,' -eris, //. ; de- 
 lictum, //. (See note.) 
 
 1 Sreinx, a. crime; otteiici' iiKiiin.st a fellnw-crcaturt', a6tKT)^l.a ; also the guilt whii'li 
 canst'S overt (.'viiiie.s, a&iKca ; ritiiun, a fault, that which iiiai'ks iiuiici tVctioii ; ptiradiia, 
 a sill or oHVmici' which ili'servcs hlauR' or punishnieiit ; di.tutnm, an oiiiissiuii, or coii- 
 traveiit' III, of soiiu' duty ; Ihtyitiiuu, a crime as a breach of 'tijty tuwarils oneself; 
 fvfiinis, ;iii (((7 of heinous crime (sometimes a great exjiloit) , ii''(nitiii , wnikedness iu 
 the sense uf " worthlessuess.' 
 
Hfl'J 
 
 GF.iVF.KA I. VOCAlWr.AK Y. 
 
 rm 
 
 
 m 
 
 Tr 
 
 r1 
 
 
 I 
 
 1^ 
 
 critnliiii/, Hci'leratus. 
 
 <'r!iiihi(i/f;/, lu'f.'iiic. 
 
 (•/•/.sv'.v, ((, ilisci'iiii-cii, -mis, //. ; 
 
 ti-mp-iis, <iiis, //. 
 crlflni/. 'nniiii iif {xiir/i a), iisr siiiipli/ 
 
 tcinjiiis, nr occaHio. 
 iriiss, /, trajicio, <t<;. 
 n-iHi'il, ,t, iiiiiltiluil-u, mis, /; 
 rrmnl, fn ('nil ni lis.), iMHi^'ic^ai'i. 
 I'roin/s, ill. (61.) 
 
 rmini {k/mi/i/), rc^fimtii, ii. (Si-e 17.) 
 iniini {i-!rc/' /), coifnia, _/'. 
 
 iTIli /, rlll<ir|is. f, 
 
 rriiil/i/, cnidcl-itfr, -ins, -issiiiic. 
 rrni If I/, iTiiilelit-as, -atis, /! ; / .s/ioir, 
 
 sat'v-io, iic, -ii, itiiin. 
 friisli, /, ()|)-|ii'iMH', (Tc:, -j)rc.ssi, 
 
 -]ircssiiiii ; rnialird {(nt-s.s. /mr/.), 
 
 0|»|M'CSSI1S. 
 
 misliiiKi {I'li/diiilf//), //.sr taiitus or 
 
 taiitus taiii(|Ut' ^M'avis. 
 (■/•//, / /7//.s(' II, cDiu'lanio, are. 
 nilfiiuitril, to he ( = ,soii<//if, J'or), 
 
 ('Xpctciidus. 
 cii.^foni, (I, inos, TiKtris, in. 
 ciifqil', I ((Icslroji), al)-siiin(>, ("-re, etc. 
 (•/// ofl'ldi s/roi/i'(/), I (I III, interi'o, ire. 
 
 (fdi/ijcr, ]>ii<,'i-(>, -oiiis, 711. 
 
 (Id'iljl, (lUotidie ; iritli roiii/mrn tires 
 
 (iiiil nrfdiii ri'rl's, in dies. (.See 
 
 328, ('. ) 
 i/iiiiifcr, })erifuluin, 71. 
 ifmii/rr inis (of), the. (138.) 
 i/diii/iroiis, periculosus. 
 Ihnnihi', tin', Daiiiibius, m. 
 (lure, see venture: ihiriinj (adj.), 
 
 aiidiix. 
 ihiriiiijhi, aiidacit(a(;t)-er, -ins. 
 iliirk (iiKfiijili. (i/ijilieil to rrl7ni'), 
 
 atrox. 
 dork, I kei-j) i/oH ill the, te eelo, are 
 
 ((tcr., 230, or de ; 231). 
 d(irkii('H-'<, tisiiebi'ae, y. }>l. 
 dart, (I, jaculum, n. ; teluiii, n. 
 diisli {,)/), a, noil nihil. (294.) 
 (/(rv/(////o,/,iiieiin niittu.ere, niisi,///, 
 ddsli orer, I [iiitrdiis., see 20, 21), 
 
 in-fundor, i, -fusus {d(d.) 
 date, teni])-ua, -oris, //. 
 
 ddi/, dies, -ci, /«. 
 
 dill/ lifter ildji. (328, c.) 
 
 (/(/// hej'iiri , the, jiridic. 
 
 dinj Ill/ore, of the, liestermis. 
 
 (/(///, /■((/• the, ill diem. 
 
 ddii, ni nil/, = ill 7111) time i/d.), 
 
 ddi/liridk, prima lux (lueiH). 
 
 deddljl (ho.-<til< ), iurt'iisiis. 
 
 deddlji {1 III' III If), (See 88.) 
 
 dear, car-US, -ior, -issiiiuis. 
 
 dedr t'r'd lids, li(iiiiiiii.'S aiiiicissiiiii. 
 
 (224, (d>s. 1!.) 
 dentil, iiior-s, -tis.y! \dl'terliis. (61.) 
 ilelit, aes alieiiiiiii ; _</« n. aciis 
 
 alieni, n. 
 deeeln, I , deci])io, ere. 
 deride (reso/n ), to, or on, I , statiio ; 
 
 ooiistituo. (45.) 
 decide (jxiss jnili/ini nt), I, or / 
 
 deride on {(ij'dct), jiidieo, air. 
 deride {let other.'<, ete'.) (146 ) 
 derision, I ronie to <t, deceiiio, ere. 
 derision, depends on //?//. (292, 9.) 
 derUire (irdr), I, iiidi-co, en-, xi, 
 
 -etuiii. (253, ii.) 
 derli/w, [ {trans.), detrecto, are. 
 derline {to), I {7noddl), nolo. 
 decree, I, de-eerno, Ore, -crevi, 
 
 -eretum. 
 decree, a, deeretuni, //. (See 51, h. ) 
 deed. (See 61, h.) 
 deep {of/eelini/s), gravis. 
 deeper {i7npression). Hea impression, 
 defeat, clad-es, -is, _/] ,• of Caniide, 
 
 Cannensis {adj., 68). 
 defend, I, defen-do, ere, -di, -sum. 
 defenddnt, the, iste. (338, Ohs.) 
 defiance (f, in, eoiitra, eontraqnani. 
 
 "(491, h.) 
 defile, a, salt-us, -us, m. 
 deijradinif, indigiuis {nn7nerit< tl) ; 
 
 humilia {abject). 
 delay {to), 1, eiinetor, ari. 
 delaif, bji, (/ernnd of cnnctor. (99.) 
 delai/, 7rithoiit, con+'estiin. 
 deliberate, I, delibei'o, are. 
 deliberation, 7ieed of (286.) 
 deliberation, loith, consult-o, -ins 
 
 {adr.). 
 delii/hfful, jucundus.^ 
 
 I ,hi<itinliin{ jiiririimliif:), tluit svliit-li causes jny or dt'liglit ; iinitii.^, -.vliat s iit',ce!..l- 
 atih', ilt'^etvi's i^ratitiidc ; ista vi'iiliKi I'limiii^i jiunuida mm est, iiiihi tanh:u grata ent - 
 (Ci(«Kn.) 
 
 41 
 
GENEKA L I '0 C.I R ( LA R V. 
 
 868 
 
 ilrminul, /, pd^tiilo," arc. (127, r.) 
 ill inn ml (t'.nirf) f/ila j'rnin //"//, /, 
 
 hi>«; ti]>i iiiipi^ro, ar«'. 
 <l< itiiii/ioin; li.al»it-iis, -us, ni. (.sc. 
 
 foiporiM). 
 (Ivii'ivilthliJ ion, l>oc(*/^/. )carc(», Ore. 
 ilinoiini'i, / (ii/ilitiilil), in-ri'(!|i(t, lire, 
 
 -rrt'imi.' 
 ih nil, /, ncyit, art'. 
 ili/nirf, I l=;/o iiinii/), !il»-t'(), in', 
 
 -ii ; (liscidu, iTr, -cfssi. 
 ill finrfiin , I tah- inij. (26.) 
 ili'fii ml on, I, jK'iidfu, cri', «■, ex. 
 ill /ii nils on i/nn, this. (331, 15.) 
 ill lilon, I, <U'}iIor(t, art'. 
 ill fill riifr, I, «l('|»roc<ir, ari. 
 ili'/irlri> of, /, i)riv(), arc (264) ; ail- 
 
 iiiio, fre, -tiiii, -«'iinitiim (243). 
 (ti/it/i of', of till', nsr ifi n. (318, mil. ) 
 ill j>tli ()/', such II, use tantus ; or eo 
 
 irifh'i/in. (294, Olis.) 
 ilesi nil, J, (K'steiid-o, t'rt', -i. 
 ili'sirf, I, tleser-o, Ore, -iii, -tuiii ; 
 
 tlestitu-o, f're, -i. (See note 
 
 under (iliamlon.) 
 flisvrti'f, transfug-a, ae, in. 
 (li'sertion, use deaero, Ore. (417, i.) 
 deserts, in acconlnnce u-ith his. 
 
 (490, ii. 3.) 
 (leserrc, J, luereor, meritus ; also 
 
 n»ere-o, ere, -ui. 
 ileserre veil of , I. (332, 3, .7.) 
 iliservi'illji, nierito. 
 (leserv/Dif of, digims. (286.) 
 (lesii/n {suhst.), consilium, h. ; hi/ 
 
 (lesiijn, or (lesiipieilly (iil>l.) (268) ; 
 
 consulto (adv.). 
 desire, I, am desirous to, cu^jio, Ore, 
 
 ivi (ii) ; studeo, ere (inf.). 
 desire [suhst.), -- that vhich (i/ou) 
 
 desire. (76.) 
 desire for, with little, panun appe- 
 
 ten8 {with ijen., 302). 
 de.spair, /, despero, are ; of, de {aid. ). 
 despatch, a, litterae, y'. jjI. 
 desperateU/, atro-citer, -cius. 
 despicahle. (See 276.) 
 despise, J, cnnteni-no, fre, -psi, 
 
 -ptnni ; de spicio, Ore, -spexi, 
 
 -spectum. (See Voc. 10, note.) 
 
 dispnf, dorniti ii», i. 
 disfififi.itn, doriiitiiiitii, //, 
 dcititntion, egest-as, -atis,,/'. 
 di.ffinid, fatalis, e (see \ uc. .*{, 
 
 n.) ; for or to, ad, (331, I, ».) 
 deslini/, fatiun, n. 
 distroij, I, exHci-ndo, t re, -di, 
 
 -S.SUIll. 
 
 ill st ruction {ifenernl sinsi ), e.xitiiiiii, 
 
 //. ; pernifi-e.M, -»'i, /'. ; {iiius.'nicri ), 
 
 interneci-o, - oiiis, f. 
 dislrnc ion of {ti nds to flu). (See 
 
 292, Ohs.) 
 ilitnrh (froojis), /, = / si ml. 
 ill fain, I, re-tineo, ere, -tiniii. 
 ill ferniiinun, /,deeeriio, ore(////'.,46). 
 ill traction, ul)treetati-o. -onis, y! 
 iletrlrnentaf, If Is. (260, 3.) 
 dira.ttiiti, /, va.sto, are. 
 devote mi/i^ilfto,!, operant do {duf .); 
 
 or {stromji r), iii-cund)o, t re, 
 
 -ciilmi, in. (263, iv.) 
 ill voted to, studio.suH {ifin., 301, ii.). 
 ! dictate ti rtns to ijou, 1, leges tiUi 
 
 inipono. 
 ilictator, dictat-or, -oris. 
 (//(', /, nior-ior, -i (-tuns est), vit;l 
 
 exeessit. (See Voc. 7, note.) 
 j die out of, to {metaphor), e.\-cUlOre, 
 
 -cldi, e, e.x. 
 difference heticeen, there is this {331, 
 
 10); there is all the. (92.) 
 difference, it makes no, i.ihil interest 
 
 (166) ; to us, nostra (310, i.). 
 different, alius ; to, ac. (91 ; see 
 
 also 92, and 370, 371.) 
 different times, at, alius alio tem- 
 pore. (371.) 
 differenthj to, aliter ae. (491, h.) 
 difficult, difficilis. 
 difficult!/ in pirsuadinij, 1 find a, 
 
 = / jiersuade this (illud) with 
 
 difficult]/ (aegre). 
 difficult!/, with, aegre ; vi,\ ; ditti- 
 
 culter, cov-p. diHicilius. 
 din, stnpit-us, -us, m. 
 dire, use tantus. 
 directions, in both, utriuKjue ; in 
 
 different, opposite, diversi. (61 ; 
 
 and see also 371, and caution.) 
 
 1 Piisro, I " call for,"iiiak«;asli;iiip, )iei'Oin]>t<iry (Iciiiaiul ; often iiseil of wli;it is unjust 
 postulo, 1 claim in accordance with, or aa though in accordance with, what is riglit. 
 
"T 
 
 ^, 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 \.l 
 
 1^ |2B |2.5 
 
 |5o *^™ Ml^B 
 
 1^ Ui 12.2 
 
 ^ yo 112.0 
 
 1.25 III 1.4 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 « 
 
 V] 
 
 7 
 
 
 V 
 
 % *:^ > .^ '^4 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Coiporation 
 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 "9) 
 
^ 
 
 
 ■ 
 
364 
 
 GENERA L VOCAIiULA R ) '. 
 
 ifisiiijr't' trit/i, I, iliHsciitio, iro, -si 
 
 all (ir cirni. 
 ilisiiiirifiioiit oil, (lissensi-o, -onis.y*. 
 
 (irifli (f, II., 300). 
 ill.sti/i/tiiir, I (=./ mil ili's/roi/i'il), 
 
 ex tinmior, i, -tin(;tus. 
 </is,i/i/ii>iiif, I. (332, 3, h.) 
 i/lsii/i/irurii/ {I'j'iiri'.ssn/ hij rlumour), 
 
 .iccliiino, ' an\ (418, A.) 
 (//.s(f.s/r*',(%-is-us,''-ris, III.; calainit-!i8, 
 
 -at is,,/'. 
 ifisii.tf roils, niosf, ii.si' tlii'inlr., infi;li- 
 
 ciU-r, -issiiiu!. (218, O/w.) 
 i/isr/itin/r the iliiliis oJ\ I, fung-or, 
 
 i, -lit'us. (281 ) 
 </lsc!/iliiii', {\inci\*\\UA, f. 
 i/l.'iroiifiiiiii', I, iiiter-mitto, (rv, 
 iiiisi. (See note uiKlei* utiiloiic, 
 
 I hiirr.) 
 i/l.<<ri(s.'<loii, hji, ill, i/i'i'iiiid o/Missoro, 
 
 rie. (99.) 
 ili.sddiii to, /, (letlign<»r, ari. 
 (lini'iisr, II, iiiorlms, i, m. 
 ili.iriiiliiirk, I. (331, 24, a.) 
 (f!.iijriin', ignoiiiiiiia, J\ 
 iH.sifriiri'/iil, tiirpis, e. (See 67.) 
 ilixifrarcf'iil, it is, (260, 3, and <>/<f. 
 
 i.) 
 
 iHshi'intciied, I am. (See 118, 
 
 v.iii infill',) 
 (lls/ioiionr {mihsf.), ignoininia, /*. 
 ilis/ioiioii ra flic, mhaueHtua •,(/(//•., -e. 
 </i.'</ioiiorr<i/>/", It is. (260, 3.) 
 ilisliki', I xonii'ii'hat, liaiul inultuin 
 
 aiiio. 
 <lisloi/(il, intuhis. 
 iHkiikii/ciI, J mil, perterreor, eri. 
 irisniisx, J, (liniitto, ere. 
 dixpcnxe vit/i, I, careo, ere (284) ; 
 
 or carere volo. 
 (liKjM'i'He, to liiitraiiM.), di-labi, -lap- 
 sus. (See 20.) 
 (/isplcdsi', I, ilispliceo, eie (daf.), 
 (fiKposi'if to {a qimlitii), nsi' covipm-a- 
 
 tire of adj. (67, h.) 
 dinstdiKfii'd irith oiuKidf, one is, Mii 
 
 poenitet. 
 dissvmhie, I (=:/ A/V/f ), ilissilliulo, 
 
 are. 
 
 di.\tmici',/roin n, v luiigiiii|iii>. 
 disfmii'i' j'roiii, I am at a, Hlmiiiii. 
 
 (318.) 
 distmif, l(>ngiii<|iMis. 
 distasti/td, iiigratiis. 
 distiiirtioii {iiiiirk of iliffi rnin), tlis- 
 
 criiii-on, iiiis, i>. 
 distiiirfioii (fioiioii nihil), lioiios, 
 
 -oris, rn. 
 disfiiiifiils/iid (adj. ), praeclariis 
 
 (sup., 224) 
 disfrirt, ag-er, -ri. ///. 
 distrust, J, ilit-fido, ere, -lisus. 
 
 (244, r.) 
 ditr/i, fossa, y". 
 dh'liH', (livinus. 
 do, I, faeio, f're, feei, faetiini. 
 dorr, (/it',-= III' ii'lio roiiiniltti d, 
 
 faei(», coiniuitto. 
 doom, fatimi, u. 
 iloomi'd to, J mil, destlnor, ari, 
 
 irit/i dat. or ad. 
 floors, for-es, -uin,y*. 
 Doria, Doria, /. 
 itoiiht, I am ill [=1 iioidif), <iul)ito, 
 
 are. 
 doinifroin, do (a'd.). 
 doini-troddcii, attiirtus. 
 dra<i (to prison), I, tra-lio, f-re, -xi, 
 
 -ctuin, in. 
 draw, I (=/ draij), tralio, ere. 
 ilrmi'' up, 1 (a Imr), serilu). 
 drmr up, I (soldlt'rs), instru-o, ere, 
 
 -xi, -ctuni. 
 i>ri(iK, I, reforniido, are. 
 d nod fill, atrox. 
 
 ilri'.'<.t, vest-is, -is,/. (303, Ohs. 2.) 
 drirc from, I, ex igo, ere, -egi, 
 
 -actum ; pelK), ere, pejiuli, 
 
 pulsuni. 
 drire on shoir, to, ejicere, ejec;, 
 
 ejectum. 
 droirni'il [tnitii/ih. of words). (332, 
 
 6, h.) 
 dull, I, hebeto, are ; aHieio. 
 duration (its futuri'). = /low lastliiif 
 
 (iliuturnus) It will, ur would, Iw. 
 
 (174.) 
 dut;/, it is mil, debeo. (198.) 
 dutii of, it is tlw, use, yi'u. (291.) 
 
 1 Ai'dumo alw.ays iti Cifi-ro of ilis;ii'iiriiv:il ; in lator writers, nf ajuiruval. 
 '- C'((.M(.s', pri>iieily :iii iU'i.'ii.U'iit, lliut wliicli /((//.s out, is mostly iiscil in ;i kul s«<nHO, as 
 iiiitifortiiiie or Uisaster ; but is not so stroii^j a woril us v^ll^llnil^Jli. 
 
(iFX/'/CA / / 'OCAP{ -/.A A' 1 : 
 
 im 
 
 ilutji («.■( o/ijioxiif to t'.r/>ftfii'iii'f/), 
 luHiost-HH. -Jitis, j'. ; or ludiesta, 
 V. />/. (51, <•) 
 
 ihiifHiihi, tloiiiiciliiiiii, II. 
 
 riri/, uiiiis (|Uisi(iur 
 
 rtir/i iiiiil 
 
 (829. <•.) 
 «7(/7/ otfirr, iinr iiiii>t/ii r, uliiis .'ilium ; 
 
 «>/' hrii, ;ilt«T altcniiii ^s«M- 371, 
 
 iv.) ; iiitt'i- Hv. (354). 
 ciiijt'i- I'nr, ( ii|ii<liis (</'//., 301, i.). 
 fiiift-r /ii, I am, gi'st-i<», iic, -ii. 
 <'<(rlif iiiiiii/i(tn)/. (Sue iiKiiiluioil .) 
 fitr/irr {iii/r. ), iiiatiirius. 
 I'tir/lrf //iinn=:l>i'/hr(),nute. (331, }.) 
 carHi'st, = jir.st. 
 ('oriii'.s/h/, iii.igiioimrt'. 
 i'linnstlji iniftlnn', /, <»ro atcjiu* 
 
 oltsern* (127, a). A (>/!(•<■ tlmihlr 
 
 pliniso eqiiimh'iit to Kiuilish oil- 
 
 rci'li. 
 piii'M, ir!t/i 1111/ oini. (365. »/. ) 
 eoi-tli, fiif, tell-us, -uri.s, y". 
 easi/, facilis. 
 emii/if {rcdillli/), facile ; nullo m-- 
 
 gotio {irUhniit I'jI'ort). 
 ei'ho iri'ffi, to, pers<»n-are, ui {nh/.). 
 I'jf'i'i-f, /, eHicio, ('-re. 
 ('jl'''rf oil, I /inn- hut litf/r, paruin 
 
 vaU'<» aj)U(l. 
 fi'i/fit, oft<» {hidccl.), 
 ei]//i f It'll f/i. (530.) 
 eitlur . . . ()i\ aiit . . . ant : vel . . . 
 
 vel (p. 14, iioti). 
 elei'tiil, I mil, ti-o, -I'^ri, faetus. 
 e/in/iii'iif< , i'l(»(jueiitia, ./". 
 ef.si', or, ant {\k 14. ii.). 
 emiiork, I {hitroiiK.), navein con- 
 
 Hoen»l-o, r-re. -i. 
 eimriji iK'H, teiiii>-U8, -oris, ii. ; /"// 
 
 llir fii-fHiiit, see, for ///, 273, (ths., 
 
 and for jivi'xnit , 337. 
 fiiiofioii, irllh, c'omniot-e, -ins. 
 Eiiijicror, Inijterat-or, -oris. 
 finpiiT, iin{H-riiiiu, ii. 
 eriifit;!, inaiNs. 
 eiiiu't,'il, I ijif (<i foir), \H< 
 
 -ferre, -tuli. 
 eiiriiJii/i, I, i'a.stra pono, ^re. 
 enroiirni/i', I, co-, or a(l-h«trtor, ari 
 
 {arc. II III f ut, 118). 
 enroll roi/f lilt' lit, wo/r/.s' of, adhor- 
 
 taiitis vox. (415, c. ) 
 
 -fero, 
 
 iiiroiiiiti'r, I (ili'atli)j oppe-o, Oret, 
 -ii, -ivi, -ituin ; cril, exper-ior, 
 iri, -tus. 
 end, tin-is, -is, m. (rareli//.). 
 ciiilniKfi'r, I, periclitor, ari (iliji.). 
 eiiilearoitr, I, eoiior, ari. 
 eiiiliirc, I, per fero, ferre, -tnli. 
 niiniif {/iririitr), ininiicns. 
 t'liiiiii/ (/iiitt/lr), host'i.H, -is. 
 ciin'iji/, with Home vinit of, paido 
 
 (279) reniissins. 
 eiKjiK/e {an eiienii/), I, con-gredior, 
 
 i, -gressus, cum. 
 I'lii/iitji' in, / (= / tdkr flint ill), 
 
 intersnm (261) ; /// hattli , prae- 
 
 liuni committo, i^re ; /// coiijlict, 
 
 inaniis couser-o, ere, -ui, -tuni. 
 /'Jii;l/iiiii/{ffi<'/'<o/ih'),Aug\i.(i>ee319.) 
 iiii/riifft'if, iusitivuK. 
 <iiJoi/, I, fru-or, i, -ctus (281) ; thr 
 
 f'riiiitts/iiji of, amico utor (282) ; 
 
 )iriilse, etr., flor-eo, ere, -ui 
 
 ioht.). 
 iiijoji /ui/ijiiiii',is, J, beatua sum. 
 I' limit If, iiiimicitia, /. 
 iiiormitif, Hagitium, n. 'See note 
 
 under rW/HY.) 
 I'liormonx, xurh, tantus. 
 I'lioiiifh ami to m/mhi', satis sujter- 
 
 que {ii'it/i ifcii., 294). 
 I iitail thin iifioii yon, I, hoc til»i in- 
 
 or af-fero. (262.) 
 enter, /, in-gredior, i, -gressns : 
 
 venio, ire, in. 
 enter politieal life, I. (See jio/itl- 
 
 ral life. ) 
 en(erpri.te. (See 64.) 
 enthnsiiifnn, alacrit-as, atia, /*. 
 entire innorenre. (See iiniocence.) 
 entinlif, lotus (irith rerhx, 61) \ fur 
 
 iiifjf., use siif/er/. 
 I'litretit, /, oro, are. (127, n.) 
 Lilt rent for, eiiriie.sth/, I, flagito, 
 
 are. (127, (/. ) 
 entreaty, ohsecrati-o, -onis, /' 
 entrust, I. (Se*^ infriisf.) 
 enninerate, I, enumero, are. 
 enroy {entltassy), legali-o, -onis,/'. 
 enrn /, in-video, ere, -villi, -visum 
 
 (ilaf.). (See 6.) 
 eifiial to, US'' tantus . . . «|uautuii. 
 
 (490, i.) 
 err, I , erro, errare. 
 
366 
 
 CEXERAI. VOCA/nn.ARV. 
 
 error, err-or, 
 
 (94, 99.) 
 I'M'dpe, I, ef-fu 
 
 oris, m. ; or errare 
 
 V 
 
 Ctc, -fugi. 
 
 
 iitjio, ere, -lugi. 
 I'stiihlish, I, 8tjiT)il-i(), iro, -ivi. 
 I'ntitntitt', I, aestinio, are. (306.) 
 I'ff'nifil, 8uinpituniu». 
 fi'fiili' (s/iirk'), /, Hubterfugio, t'rt- 
 
 {itrr. ) ; (i laiv, Icgi fraudem facio. 
 cri'it, etiaiA ; (luocine (ciirlifir) ; 
 
 hi'/nri'difj., vc'l ; not ttrn, lie . . . 
 
 (|iii<leiii. (Iiitr. W.) 
 en II iioir {i.e. df the i>rest'iif time), 
 
 hoilie. 
 ereiiiiiif, in the, ves|»eii. 
 erents, at all, eerte. (See note 
 
 uiuler leeiftt, at. ) 
 ever (nliraifn), 8enii)er ; irit/i iieijat. 
 
 {■=zat nil}/ lime), uiiquaiii. 
 cvf'i'i/ [z^zdll, j'l.), oinnis ; erery- 
 
 tfiinif, oiiuiita, ii. jif. (53.) 
 eriileiit, it tens, (satis) apparehat. 
 
 (46, r.) 
 erul, an, in coinni<)(huii,N. ; inaluin, 
 
 11. (51, h.) 
 exact from, 1 {make requisition of), 
 
 impel.*, are. (247.) 
 exact (punishment), I, sum-o, ^re, 
 
 -psi, ab, de or ex. 
 exasperate, I, irrito, are. 
 excellent, oiitiinus, a, um (see 67, 
 
 a) ; for nse vntfi }>ro}ier noun or 
 
 person see 224. 
 except to, nisi ut. 
 exception, without, := all. 
 excessire, niinius. 
 exchanije for, 1, niutu, are ; per- 
 
 miito, are. (See 280.) 
 exclaim, I, ex- or eoii-elamo, are. 
 execruhle (b>/), considered, execra- 
 
 bilis {with dat.). 
 execution { }tu nish inent), supjilicinn,, 
 
 «. 
 e.i-ertion, I lufke {some), (paniiiin) 
 ■ ad-nitor, i, -r.isus. 
 exertions, = toils. 
 exhauMed, fatigatus ; confeotus ; / 
 
 am, or become, fatigor, ari 
 exhoit, I, liortor, ari. (118.) 
 exiU\ »rH,.ex-ul, -ulis. 
 exile, I am driren into, in exiliuin 
 
 pellor. (Sec lanish.) 
 
 exile., I am in, or / endure, exalo, 
 
 .ire. 
 exist, I. sum, esse, fui. (Intr. 49, Ohs.) 
 existence, iisenwxw {no Latin suhsl.) ; 
 
 est l)eii8 = (I'od exists, 
 ex/ticl, I, expecto, are. 
 eipedient, iitilis. 
 expediencif, utilit-as, -ati.s, /. 
 ex/>erience, I, exper-inr, iri, -tus. 
 experience of life, reruni peritia, ./I 
 experienced {adj.), (reruni) ptM'itus. 
 
 (301, ii.) 
 explain, I, expono, t're, etc. 
 exploit, res gesta. 
 ejpose, 1 {to danijer, etc.), o(>-jicio, 
 
 Cre. (263, ii.) 
 expose, I {confute), coargii-o, t'-re, -i. 
 express myself, to, ut dicain. (100, 
 
 note ) 
 e.rtent. (174,, h. ) 
 extortion, res repetuiidae, / j>l. 
 extreme, extreinus. 
 extremely, use snjicrl. of adj. 
 extremity of, extreinus (adj. ). (60.) 
 exult in, I, exulto, are {abl.). 
 eye, ocul-us, -i, «t. 
 eyes, vnth my own, ipse (366, d) ; 
 
 before our (332, 5, c). 
 
 face, I {meet), obviani eo, ire 
 
 (dat.). 
 face, I {put to the prooj ), ex-perior, 
 
 iri, -pertus. 
 face, faci-es, ^\, f. ; in the face of, 
 
 in {with abl., 273, Ohs.)' 
 fact, a, res, rei, /. 
 faction, a, facti-o, -onis, ,/. 
 fail, I {am wantimj to), deticio, f re 
 
 {lifted absolutely or iclth ace.) ; 
 
 desum {dat., 2jj1). (See note 
 
 under 'dmndon.) 
 fain. 1 would : or / icould fain hare 
 
 {done), velim, velleni. (See 149, i. ) 
 fair {adj. ), pulcher ; ainoenus. 
 
 (Voc. 9, note.) 
 fair { = fair amount of), satis. 
 
 (294.) 
 faith, good, fid-es, -ei, f. 
 faith in you, I put, fidem tibi 
 
 habec. 
 fa'tJful, fidolis, e. 
 
 ' Knurc, error yeiierully, in the abstract ; error, an error or blunder. 
 
GF.y/iKA L I 'OCAfiUL A A' V. 
 
 367 
 
 /nil, I {in battle), nereo, ire, ii. 
 fall into, I, in-cido, dre, -cl<li, in 
 
 (ncc. ) ; or praecipito, are (/all 
 
 headlonij) ; into ruin, corru-o, 
 
 Cre, -i. 
 /aUni, aftiictus. 
 /allx out, it, ace (lit it. 
 /alh to (mil) lot. (See lot.) 
 /aUe {n/ /w-;-/<o«.s), mernl-ax, -acis ; 
 
 '/]/'tliln<fs), fah\is ; tictus. 
 /al/<e to, I am, (le-.suin {dnt., 251). 
 
 (iSee note luuler ahandon.) 
 /uisfhooil, a, mendaciuin, n. 
 /alxtlino<l{nhxtnu't) mentiri. (98. if.) 
 /alxfhooil, I t»'ll a ; I xpidk/alticlt/, 
 
 inent-ior, iri, -itus. (54.) 
 /ame, gloria, /. 
 /amihj, familia, y. ; hitt/oviily, sui. 
 
 (349, i)hs.) 
 /aniili/ (ddj), doniesticus. 
 /amine, fam-es, -is, y". 
 /arnoun, praeclarus. (19.) 
 /uncy, I, puto,' are ; opinor, ari. 
 /nr, hif, multo. (279.) 
 /ar/rovi (ailr.), parum. 
 /ar removed /rom, alienus (stiperl.) 
 
 ab. 
 Jare (^ub«l.), vict-us, -us, m. 
 /are, /, mihi evC-nit (imper-t.). 
 /armhoune, villa,/. 
 /atal, pernicios-us, -issimus; funes- 
 
 tus. (Voc. 3, note.) 
 Fate, Fortuna (pemoni/ed). 
 /atlier, pat-er, -ris. 
 /atii/ae, lassitud-0, -inis, /. 
 /an'/t, culpa,/. 
 
 /au/t, I commit a, pecco, are. (25.) 
 /aroiir {k-indne-s-s), a, beneficiuni, //. 
 /arour, J, faveo, Ore, favi, fautuni 
 
 _ (<^at., 6). 
 /arottr, 1 do yoti tuia, )i(»c (ace, 
 
 2.'?7) tibi gratiticor, ari. 
 /arour, I irin your, apud to gra- 
 
 tiani ineo, ire. 
 /aroiirable (snitable), idoneud. 
 
 /anm iijion, I, adu'or, ari. (263, 
 
 iii.) 
 /ear, niet-U8, -us, in. ; tini-or, oris, 
 
 m. 
 /ear, I,"^ metu-o, Cre, -i ; vereor, eri, 
 
 verltus (see 138, 139) ; I /-ar, or 
 
 have /ears, /or, inetuo with dat. 
 
 (248). 
 /ear /or my xa/ety, I, aaluti nieae 
 
 dif-Hdo, t-re, -Hsus. 
 /eatitimj (itnlist.)^ epulae, /. pi. 
 /e>i.luri'ii, vult-us, -us (•umj. ). 
 /eel, I, sen-tio, ire, -si, -sum. 
 /eelinijx, anini-us, -i, m. 
 felloti'-Hubjeet, eiv-is, -is, in. 
 /erocity (o/ an act), atrocit-as, 
 
 -atis, /. 
 /ertile, ftrtilis, e. 
 /etttrs, catenae, / jd. 
 /ew, pauci, ae, a ; perpauci (rery 
 
 /e,r). 
 rickle, levis. 
 Jictitioui*, fictus. 
 /e/d o/ battle, aci-ea,^ -ei, / 
 Jield, ill the (in irar), niilitiac, 
 
 oj)/)0.'<e«l to domi. (312.) 
 fiercely (boldly), ferociter ; acriter. 
 \//'th, quintus. 
 \/l/ht, I, pugno, are : a battle, 
 
 praelium com-iuitto, Ore, -niisi, 
 
 •missum. 
 fill with (panic), I, in-cutio, i^re, 
 
 -cussi, -cussum. (Ex. 53, note.) 
 find, I, reper io, ire, -i, -tuip 
 
 (by search) ; in-venio, ire, -vCni, 
 
 -ventum (by chance), 
 find/ault with, I, vitupero, are. 
 fine, pulcher. (Voc. 9, note. ) 
 finish, I, con-ticio, ere, -feci, -fec- 
 
 tuin. 
 fire and nword, ferruni et igu-is 
 
 (abl. -i). (See Voc. 1, note.) 
 firm, constans. 
 //•.««< (adr. ) ; first . . . then ; firxt . . . 
 
 secondly, etc. (634, and Obs.) 
 
 ' Ptito, " I incline ti) think," " I fancy," " I snsiiect," I tliiiik witliout having na yet 
 any full i-learly rfasoneil grounds for thinking ; opiimr, " 1 lonjci'ture," with still I'ss 
 clear grounds : reur, ratlier " I calculate," " I come to a conclusion ; " urlutmr, I fiirni 
 niy own personal judgment ; venseo, 1 form ■■nd exi)rcss a ( Icar view or judgnn^nt. 
 
 ^ Tiiiicre, the feeling of fear, causing a wish to Hy ; vutufre, the sense of danger, 
 causing us to take juecautions ; ■vcrii i, often, to look on with respect or awe. 
 
 'A Aih's, llie r'trjc of Vow of battle, often answers to tlio Eujjlish "licM/'or eveii 
 
 "twttlt." 
 
 I 
 
nc.s 
 
 CEXEKAI. VOC.MiUr.AK V. 
 
 I 
 
 first of June, f/if, ka1cn<lHu .Tuiiiat; 
 
 (638) ; hif the (326). 
 Jirst to, first irko. (62.) 
 fh'i', (iiiiiM|iu;. 
 Jir (mij ei/cM) on, I, <luH-go, fTC, 
 
 -xi, -xuin, in {ncc). 
 jliiif, Hignuin, II. 
 lid Ilk, II, latUH, -("'ris, /*. ; /■//. (332, 
 
 !.'••) 
 
 fliitti r, I, asHciit<»r, ari. (253, i.) 
 jli't, II, clasH-is, -is, y". 
 Jlhjlit, fug.i.y. 
 /////_7 iriniji, I, ]»ro- ur al»-jii:i(), rrc, 
 
 -jcuj, -jectuni. 
 jUx'k ^siifist.), grex, gregis, m. 
 jloch toijitlitr, to, coiigregari. 
 floitrishitiif, t»j)ulentu8 {iisf ^iiijierf., 
 
 57,11).' 
 th>m iloirii. I, de-riu(», Cre, -fluxi. 
 */(//, /, fugio, C-re, ffigi, 
 j'oi', himt-iH, -is, m. 
 j'lil/oir, I, st'tjuor, i, secutus ; 
 
 fol/oir up, iiist'ctor, ari (nrc). 
 Jbl/oir that, it dins not, iion itloirco. 
 J()//i/, stiiltitia, /. ; or use adj. 
 
 stiiltus. (376.) 
 J'lioif, vict-iis, UH, in. 
 j'ooil, I {fit (of sohVii'rs), fruiuentor, 
 
 ari. 
 food, I iiil'e, cilnim oapio. 
 food, irinit of, inedia, /. 
 foolish, inyipiens ; it 'is foolish. (291, 
 
 Ohs. 1.) 
 foot of {a mountain) inms. (60.) 
 foot-sold iir, ped-es, itis. 
 for (iiri'p.), pro. (See 6 and 332, 7, l>. ) 
 for (<•<>«/.), nam ; enini (Intr. 98) ; 
 
 (juippe. (See also Intr. 56, e.) 
 for soiiu- time, (past), jamdudum. 
 
 (181.) 
 foraije, I ijet, p dmlor, ari. 
 force, via,/, (ahl. vi). 
 force of arms, hi/, vi et armis. 
 force from, J, «leturho, are, «le 
 
 (ahl. ) ;forceoutoj\z=zirrenefifroni), 
 
 cxtor-queo, ere, -si, -turn. (267.) 
 forces (troops), copiae, J. pi. 
 forefathers, niajor-es, -um. (See 
 
 Voc. 2, «., and p. 63, note 5.) 
 foreign, externns. 
 foreiijner, a (opposed to civis), 
 
 peregrin-US, -i, m. 
 forenwdf primus, 
 
 foiesee, I, praesentifi ; pro-spicio, 
 
 r-re, -spexi, -spectiini, pro-video, 
 
 -vidi, -visum. (248.) 
 forest, a, siha, /. 
 foretell, I, praedi-eo, ere, -xi, 
 
 -ctum ; praesagio, ire. 
 fonji'l, I, obliviseor, i, ohlitus (ijen., 
 
 308). 
 forfire, I, igtiosco, Pre, -novi, 
 notum (dat., see 6) ; veuiam 
 
 do (dat. of person, ijen. iftliiiiij) ; 
 
 or eon«lono, are (dat. of person, 
 
 arc. of thin;/), 
 fonjotten, I heeome, or / am, in 
 
 oMivionem venio, iie, veiii. 
 form line (of hattle), J, aciem 
 
 instruo, Cre, -xi, -ctum. 
 former, pristinus (soe note under 
 
 iincicnt), often, joined irifh illc. 
 
 (339, i.) 
 forinidahle, formidandus (393) ; 
 
 romp, niagis formidiindus. 
 fortress, arx, areis, ./'. 
 fortunate, fel-ix, -Tcis. 
 fortunate, it was most, per<tpp(»r- 
 
 tune aecidit ut. (123.) 
 fortune, iortmiii, f. ; forliiiie-> f(»r- 
 
 tunae, pi. 
 fortune, good, felicit-as, -atis,./". 
 Fortune's fa rou rites, (629, /.) 
 foul, foedus. 
 foullii, nefarie. 
 found, I (a colonif), de-duco, r-re, 
 
 -duxi, -ductum. 
 fourteen, (juattuordeeim. 
 fourth, (juartus. 
 free (adj.), liber, a, um ; free 
 
 from, vacuus (266) ; free from 
 
 hlamo, extra culpani (331, y> ; 
 free from care, securus (19), 
 free, I ; I gi re freedom to; or I set 
 
 at lihertij (j'roin), lil)ero, are, a]> 
 
 or ahl. (26i) ; freed from , Jam., 
 
 liberor, ari, etc. 
 freedom, libert-as, -atis,/ 
 freedom, in, liber. (61.) 
 f resit, recens. 
 friend, amic-us, -i (61 a, and 66, 
 
 266); close friend, .amieissimus. 
 friend here, my ; your friend there, 
 
 (338, Ohs. I'and 2.) 
 friend, I nuike my, amicorum in 
 
 numcro habco. (240, Ohs. 2.) 
 
GENERAI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 nfiO 
 
 •eroppor- 
 
 ni<>' 
 
 f < >r- 
 
 tis,. 
 
 /■. 
 
 ,/•) 
 
 
 ICO, 
 
 r-re, 
 
 /r'n'iiiUhionfi, benevolcntia, /. 
 /'ririit/s/ilji, amicitia,/. ; /riendnhip 
 
 "J\ I '''0"!l ''"'. ainico utor. (282. ) 
 /nun, a, ah {(if)/.). (332, i.) 
 j'rtiiif, in, a froiite (332, I, c) ; 
 
 adversus, a</j (see 61) ; in the 
 
 frniif o/' {=:li,'/ntr), ante (331, 3), 
 /iifl, I in/ii {ini'fiijt/i.), faces suh- 
 
 jicio, ere {tint.), 
 /injlfins, 11x1' I tr I'M. jmrf. q/fugio. 
 fidl (= f/w u'/io/c of), totus. (60.) 
 full of', i»lcmi9 ((thi.). 
 J'limfs, pecuniae,/. /»/. 
 j'ltni'fdl, fim-us, -eris, n. 
 further, ultra. 
 furij, ira, /., not furor, (\^^c. 6, 
 
 note ; see also Ex. ()2, note.) 
 J'lirii, v'ith the utmost, vehenien- 
 
 tissinie. 
 future, the, futura, n. pi. (62, 
 
 408. ) 
 future, in, or/or, the, in futuruni ; 
 
 in p«)sterum. (331, 24, /*. ) 
 
 ijdiu, eniohnnentuni, n. ; utilit-iis, 
 
 -atis. f. : i/or) a nonrce of ;ioi>i, 
 
 ([uaestui. (260, 3.) 
 ti<iin fn/, /, =. it i)i jiro/itdhle to me. 
 
 (260, 3.) 
 ijnineil, partus (pario, peperi, 1 
 
 jirodiice). 
 </nl/(int, fortis {su/ier/.) ; for usage 
 
 with proper noun orM'ord ilenot- 
 
 ing a person, see 224. 
 (jaUitnthi, fortiter. 
 (jnllojt, tit full, ecjuo concitato. 
 tjitmes, the, lutli. »/. /if. 
 ijurrixou, pracsitliuni, ;/. 
 ifnte, porta f. 
 i/nt/ier (tiiijetlier), to {intrant.), con- 
 
 vt'-nirc, -vr-ni, -ventuui ; coiign-- 
 
 gari. (20.) 
 Hinils, the, (iail-i, -oruni. 
 ijiize (HI, I, iiitu-cor, -rri. 
 ijeneriil, a, »lux, «lucis. 
 ifeneriif{)iif).), :=. of all. (69.) 
 ifenerallji (heliereil), = It// most men. 
 fjeneration, a, aet-as, -atis, y*. 
 (tenoa, < Jciiua,/. 
 tjentle, niitis ; initissinii ingenii 
 
 (303, i. ) ; .so ijentle as (224, O/w. '1). 
 ifentle)nen of' the Jtir//, judices. 
 gentleness, lenit-as, -atis, ,/'. ; / shoir 
 
 \ 
 
 yentlenesH (241) ; Hueh, tani or 
 
 adeo niitis, etc. 
 ijenthj, leniter. 
 Herman, a, <ierinan-us, -i. 
 (lennauy, <<ennania, ./*. 
 ijesture, gest-us, -us, in. 
 <fetoi'er{ilanifer), I, fungor, i, -ctus, 
 
 or defungor. (281.) 
 ijet reaihf for, I, me paro, arc, ad 
 
 with ijerniul. (396.) 
 ifet to, j, (See / ?v'ar/.. ) 
 ijive, I, do, dftre, df^di, dfttuni ; a 
 
 venfiet, dico, t're; a name, noiiicii 
 
 in-do, t^re, -didi, -dituni ; luji 
 
 word (formally), fideni intcr- 
 
 pono, t^re. 
 ifladhf, lil)enter; or use adj., liltens. 
 
 (61.) 
 Iflohe, the, orbis terraruni, m. 
 glorious, j)raeclaru8. 
 
 .'/'o'V/. gloria,/. 
 
 ijluttouy, gula, / {lit. the gullet), 
 ijo away, I, ah-eo, ire, -ii, -iturus. 
 yo down to meet, I, obviaiu {ilat. ) 
 
 descend-o, (re, -i. 
 yo out, I, ^x-cedo, t're, -cessi ; cx- 
 
 co, ire, -ivi, -ii {(dil. with or irit/i- 
 
 out, e, ex). 
 (tod, De-us, -i, noin. pi. Di. 
 yolil, of, aureus. 
 ifood fortune, I enjoy, fclix sum. 
 yooil name, existimati-o, -onis, /". ; 
 
 fanui, / 
 yood old times. (339, i ) 
 yooil sense, prudentia. ./'. 
 yood -will, lienevolentia, /'. 
 yoodness, virt-us, -utis, /'. 
 yossip, rumusculi, in. pi. {ditni. u- 
 
 tire of contempt), 
 yorern, I, pracsum. (261.) 
 yorernment, the. (176.) 
 yorernor {ofrity), pracfcct-us, -i. 
 yradual/y, paulatiui. 
 yrand f'lit.'a r, av-us, -i. 
 yrandsnn, m;pi>-s, -tis. 
 yratilude, I show, gratiam rc-fcro, 
 
 ttuli ; I feel, haln-o. (98, A.) 
 yratefid, gratus ; / am most yrate- 
 
 f'ul, maxinuim b.alteo gratiam. 
 
 '{9B,h.) 
 yrea\ magnus. <•<»/«/>. major, snperl. 
 
 maximus ; yreat men, Mummi 
 
 viri ; viri praestautis.simi. 
 
 A 
 
•^:^) 
 
 CI.NENAI. VOCAlUn.AK Y. 
 
 
 firfiitf r (= ni'in- nf), jilus. (294,) 
 iji'i'tithi, inagnopcre ; viiliementer ; 
 
 inaxiiiK! ; tritli roni/niniHrcs, 
 
 iiiiilto. (279.) 
 ifri'titiii'MM t)/'{ffonr) ilild =r funn much 
 
 {ifoii) aire (delteo). (174.) 
 (ifi'ik-i, t/ir, (iraec i, -oniin. 
 t/ni't, /, saluto, are. 
 ijroiiiis ('iiiijri/), convicium, n. 
 
 (••"■".'/•). 
 i/rouiii/, on fill', liumi. (312.) 
 i/nmnil, /Kiilinis, on irhii-h t/ifi/ 
 
 utooil, tale t(UiijmM ; taiituin j»eri- 
 
 euliiin. (See Kx. ({'2, note.) 
 ifroiiiiif/i'Ms, faluuH. 
 ifrounils (= ri'tixoii), caiiHa, ,/*. ; on 
 
 i/roiniifs of] propter. (331, 19, '». ) 
 iji'oii', /, = lurontr. 
 ifnu/i/i' iKjdinst i/oii, I hatjti a, tihi 
 
 HUL'cens-eo, ere, -ui. 
 ijnitnl, (I, custo-s, -(lis, m. 
 iliKinl, qir/iis, incautiis. (61.) 
 (jKtiril, /, eust<>(l-i«). ire, -ivi, -ii, 
 
 -ituin ; ijiKtn/ aijn'inut, eaveo, 
 
 r-re, cavi, eaiituni. (248.) 
 ifiiisf, (I, lj(»8p-e.s, -iti.s. 
 ifiiiif)', (lux, aueiH. 
 ijiiilt, se«!l-UH, -eris, n, (See note 
 
 under criinc.) 
 ifiiiltif, noeeii-s, -tin. 
 [intltji ilrfif. It, facin-u.s, -ori.s, ». 
 
 (S(!e note under rrhni'. ) 
 (jnl/fif, J Jim/, condenmo, are ; f am 
 
 foil II' f, eondemnor. 
 (fiiilti/ of', I am {not), (uou) id com- 
 
 mitto ut. 
 
 hahlf of, I am in (he, soleo, ere, 
 
 aolitus {'nij'.). 
 fiarkmi/i'i/, tritus, /if. ' in'// ii'orn^' 
 
 (ten)). 
 hair, ir/iifi', eaiii eapilli (/»/.). 
 ha/j'at ma lift, /arijc, ai/aiii. (635, (/. ) 
 ha/f, I, or roini to a halt, eon 
 
 .sisto, (''re, -stiti. 
 /laiii/, a, inan-u.s, -us,/'. 
 /lanil, I am at. ad-siini. -esse. -fui. 
 /lanil in, J, af-fent, t'erre. 
 /lani! over to, I, ptjr luitto, ('-re, 
 
 -niisi, I12H.) 
 
 hani/fnl of ~ no .sma// a luinil of, 
 hamj l)ack, I, cesso,' are. 
 hajt/t^ni, it, accidit, f-re. (123.) 
 haji/ii/i/ (see 64), deoruin l>eneHcio 
 
 or peropportune accidit. 
 hanpiiifHA, vitiibeata ; l)eate vivere ; 
 
 lieatum esse (98, It) ; / < njoy, 
 
 beatus sum. 
 hajtpif, 1)eatuR, 
 
 //(//•(/ itn'HHi>il, I am, promor, i, 
 /inrd to nit If, ditticile dictu. (404.) 
 haril/;/, vix. 
 hnrilshif), inconiniodum, n, ; hard- 
 
 xhipn, uiolestiae, pi. 
 harm, I ilo. (See/w/w/v. ) 
 harnh, asper, a.sperior, aspcrriniu.s. 
 hari'1'.Ht, nie.sH-is, -is, 7". 
 haMr (/aihx.), celerit-as, -atis, /'. ; 
 
 tJifru in iifi'd 0/ hantf, properato 
 
 opus est. (See 286 and 416. ) 
 hasti'n, I, propero, are ; ahso/nte/y 
 
 or wit/t, inf. ; conteiid-o, i^re. 
 hatf, I, od-i, -isse, -erani (pi-rf. 
 
 inith jire.t. meanimj) ; am ha ted, 
 
 'ulio sum. (260, (ihn. 2.) 
 hatred, odium, n. 
 haiiiihtji, superbuH. (67, it.) 
 Iiave yon, I n-onld. (149, i.) 
 he himself, ipse (366) ; he (11, a, d; 
 
 see Kx. 46). 
 /a'od, cap-ut, -itia, v. 
 head of, J am. the, prae-sum. (261.) 
 head/onij, prae-ceps, -cipitis (adj. ). 
 /lealth, I am in (food, valeo, ("Te, -ui. 
 Iieap (ahiine) on yon, I, te (male- 
 
 dictis) onoro, are. 
 hear, I, or /tea, of, aud-io, ire, -ivi, 
 
 -Itum ; accipio, ?re. 
 heard of hy, hare been. (268, ii.) 
 liearinij, in my, nne aid. alts., pri-s. 
 
 partir. (420, ii.); irithont a hear- 
 in ij (426). 
 heariii'i, .•'ensf. of, aur-es, -ium, 
 
 ./: pi. 
 
 heart {afectioiis, spirit), anim-us, 
 -i, m. ; (disposition), ingenium, n. 
 
 lieat, aest-us, -ns, m. 
 
 !i earea ip'oan, I, ingem-isco, ere,-ui. 
 
 Ifearen (metaph.), Di immortales. 
 (See 17.) 
 
 1 Cemt, I liaiij; b.ick from .'imethiiitj; which I have begun or have to «lo : ilifero, I 
 jiiit ott' iiotioii, aiijoiirii it to iiiiother tiin(^ ; rinu'tor, I delay from eautioii or 'udecisiou. 
 
GENERA I. t 'OC.I P Cl. AN Y. 
 
 .171 
 
 ht'firfu mill iiiiili, I n/ifintf fn, 
 
 (Itoniin liuniiiiuinqiM; tiilcm im- 
 
 ploro. 
 Iifiini, gravis ; or, in mptn phorirnl 
 
 Hi'iiHi' oiih/, laboriosus (».s« iiipcrl,, 
 
 67, a), 
 hfiijlitof, HUininuH. (60.) 
 hrir, t/ir, lijicr-t's, -edis. 
 /ii'l/i, J run {not). (137, I,./.) 
 /ii'l/) jf'tn, I, aiixilio tibi sum 
 
 (269, 260, I ) ; tilti <»i>oiii fero. 
 /iffjtli'MsnesM, ill, in-opH, -opis ((/r/y". ). 
 
 (See 61.) 
 hfnrcfnrth, jam. 
 hinhinitii, liultHM'-u.><, -i, m. 
 Iiiri', hie. 
 
 hiri', I <iin, a<l-!4iiiii, -esse, -fui. 
 hinitiitc to, I, (lul)it<>, atre, inf'. 
 
 (136, h.) 
 hiililin, occultus. 
 ///■'/(', / (/*// sili'ncc), (liHsinuih^, are 
 
 (p. Tm, noti). 
 liiijli, altlis ; lii'ili fio/H's. (See 64.) 
 /i/il/i-s/iirifiil, feiox. (See imte 
 
 uii(ler hithllji.) 
 Iiiijlii.tf, suniiniis. 
 
 hiilhljl (/ liininiir). (See / linnanr.) 
 hill, eull-i.s, -is, in. 
 Iiiinxi'lf, ip.se, a, iiiii. (365.) 
 hin, ejus ; illiiis ; suns. (Set* 11, <■, 
 
 (/ and '-, ami rnnioiiiis i.) 
 his Dim (iiii'iiif/), sihi, or siii (56), 
 
 ipse (iiiiinieus). 
 hi.<fnriiiii, reruiii seript-or, -oris. 
 hol.it (ii JUkj), I, fc-<l(), ere, -didi, 
 
 -(lituiii. 
 hn/il, I, obtin-eo, ere, -ui (19) ; 
 
 liabeo. 
 hold, I (fhiiik), <lue<), ere, diixi, 
 
 (luctiim ; hold (roniif) (ts, lialteo 
 
 (240): habeopn) (240, (/hs. "_'). 
 hold in If pt'(ir<\ /, eontic-esco, ere, 
 
 -ui. '(See 17, Ohs.) 
 hoiiii', at, donii (312) ; at his oini 
 
 haini' (316, iii. ); from hnnn' (irith 
 
 nrl) of motion), doino (9, />) ; hoinc 
 
 (I niiirn), doinuni (9, h). 
 
 hoinr-sirkni >«, siHtniiii dt sidi'riiiiii. 
 homes and Iwnrths, for, pro ari.s ft 
 
 foeis. 
 honest; pr(d>iis. 
 honest;/, probit-as. ' -atis, /'. 
 honour [ijond fiilh), rid es, -v\, f. 
 honour {distinction), linn < is, -oris, in. 
 hononr {silfns/irrl), dijiiiit as, 
 
 ■ati.s, /'. 
 hononr {us op/iosi-d to rjjn dii nri/), 
 
 hoiiest-a(i, -atis. f. (61, c ; s«'e 
 
 note under homsli/.) 
 honour, I jnif (i/on), or / hnnniir 
 
 (ijou), )u>noreni (tibi) liabeo ; te 
 
 in honore habeo ; honour hiifhl//, 
 
 in .suniino lionore liabeo. 
 hononr (trith) I (/"ddiri/), orno, are 
 
 {old.) ; o/" pro-se(pior, i, -.secutiis. 
 honourohh', honestus ; tn he honour- 
 
 aide {ereditiddi' to), honori esse. 
 
 (280, 3.) 
 hope for, I, spero, are. (23.) 
 /.■i»y»'.'(, spes," spei,y'. ; I firm hufn's^ 
 
 spent. (64. ) 
 liorrilied nl, 1 inn, per lioiresio, 
 
 Ore, liornii. 
 hiispi/ii/Hi/, ri'jhis !»/", ju.s iiospitii. 
 /*(/.x^, rf (opp. t (»(/«.. sO, liosp-es.-itis, /(/ 
 hitst, II, niultitud-o. -iiiis, y. 
 hosfii^/r, obs-es, idis. 
 Ii'iiir, liora. _/'. ; if riilurii. (63.) 
 Iii,nsi\ in mil, apud nie (331, 4, u) ; 
 
 donii nieae {'61%, iii.). 
 hiiiisihold, II, faniilia,./". 
 hoir. (See 167, ii.) 
 hoir{disi/riii'ifnl,etr.) (260, OA... 1.) 
 hoir inifh {ndr.), (piantuiii. 
 hoir innrh {with rnmpiirnt. ), (pianto. 
 hull} often, (pioties. (167, ii.) 
 human, hunianus ; or i/i n. j>l. 
 
 o/'hoiiio. (69.) 
 human luini/s, hoiiiiiies. 
 huinlde nouns, tenuis tortun.i. 
 hnndde orii/in, if, liuiiiili loco 
 
 natus. 
 humour, /, ^'ratiticor, ari [da I.). 
 hnndrnl fhoiiso/id, n. (527.) 
 
 1 Uiineftiis is not "' hoiifsty," l>ut the nh.-iirart tmii I'lir \\ iiat is iKHiniiiiilili- (liii>ii->i',iiii) 
 ill 11 gflicral seiLSi'. 
 
 '•i .Sy)f.< is one of tlic few wonls in whii-li Liitiii goes furtlicr in forming h 11 .'ihatriiPt 
 imuii tli.iii Knglisli ; it is r.iicly use<l in the plural of the "Ikoin-s" of a .single | fisoii, 
 or evfu of many. C'f imjeiiiiim, memnria. 
 
 •-^ 
 
372 
 
 Cr.NEKAl. VOCAnVI.AK Y. 
 
 
 
 hurl, /, (Miii-jifin, fTe, -j«'i;i, -jec- 
 
 tuiii ; lit. 111 (lire), 
 hiirrii iiii'iiji f'riini, I, uvolo, are. 
 Intn-ji to, /, ('oiiteii-«l(), rn , -ili 
 
 (.'ul) ; foMliiio, art!. 
 /uis'kiiiI, vir, viri. 
 
 /, t'K". ('^••t! 11, " hikI I> ; also 
 
 334.) 
 /■(//(' {ruin), ViiniiH. 
 //', Hi. (S»;u (.'oiiilitioiial ( 'liuimis aii<l 
 
 171.) 
 t/iint . . , //»7. (466. <:) 
 iijnornn/ of, I mil, ij^noro, ' are 
 
 (triiiiH.); nesfio, irt'. (174, ».) 
 ///, I inn, aegroto, are. 
 Ul-stiirnil, iiifeli.v, roiiiji. infelirior. 
 
 (87, A.) 
 iUitstriniift, pr.aeclarus {mii/hi-I. ) ; 
 
 praoHtaiiH (super/.). (67, (/.) 
 ill-irill, malevoleiitia, /'. 
 imoif!iit', I (tliliik), i>uto, are, (See 
 
 note xnuV'Yj'iuicii.) 
 iiiKKjiiif, I {I'oiirrii'i), aiiinid eoii- 
 
 ei]»i(», Ore. 
 hiiltiiti', !, iniitor, ari. 
 hiiinriHiiti'lji iijhr. (332, I, .7, or 
 
 331, 21, r.) 
 hiiiii>'ii-«hi, (luaiii i>luriiimin. 
 iiii/xirt {ti>), I, coininiiiiieo, nrv 
 
 (emu). (263, iv.) 
 iiii/iiiti/, iiiipiet as, -atis,,/'. 
 iiiijilori', I, (tlwecro, are. 
 niiliortiiiirc dJ' tin' iinittir, t/n-, t.iiita 
 
 res. 
 iiiijiortitiiri' lit III!', it Is of, niea 
 
 interest (310) ; of the utmost iiii- i 
 
 /lortaiiii' to (■= irit/i nfi'n'uci' to). 
 
 (310, iii. ami iv.) j 
 
 iiii/>ort<iiit, gravis. 
 iitijiosi' ii/iou ifoii (roii(/!t!oiis), /, tihi ■ 
 
 iiupoiio, t'Te. 
 ',iu/>ossilili\ If is, (ir it is i/uitf. (126../*.) 
 iniju'iss {ajfirt) //(<», / ; iiiiikv mi ; 
 
 iui/>ri'ssioii on i/oii, te, or oftiinr 
 
 aiiiinuiit tuuiii, inoveo or eoin- 
 
 iu«)ve(>, ere, -inovi, -niotuni ; 
 
 irfnrr more t/imi our /ti'r.-<on /.<* 
 
 impliiil, />!. aniiiuts. 
 
 imjiri'sMion {of), opini-o, -oiuh, y*. 
 iiu/»riMoii)iii'ut, viiiciila, w. jtl. 
 Ini/iroriilnit, iiiipro vidua. 
 iin/iulsr, of itH fiiru, sua 8polltl^ 
 
 (Se(! 'inte under roluntnriti/.) 
 iiii/iiiiiiuf, iritli, iiii|Kine («!«/('. ). 
 ininutf this to i/ou as a fault, I, 
 
 hoe til»i vitit) ver-to, t'-re, -ti, 
 
 ■Hiiiii ; eiilpae do, il.lre, iledi, 
 
 datiiiii. (260, 2.) 
 in ; in a tiinr of, in (ah/,). (See 
 
 332, 5 ; 273, d/>s. ) 
 inra/Ht/i/r of, I am (ninra/li/), ah- 
 
 horrco, ere, ah ; alienisHiiniiH 
 
 sum al). (See una/i/e.) 
 inclination, volunt-as, -atis, y'. 
 inrliiii' to 'hink that, I. (169.) 
 iuronifu'trnrc (iijnoranrf), inscltia,./*. 
 inronsiilernbh' (of ilcnijir), paruni 
 
 gravis. 
 inconsistent irith, alicnus ab. 
 lncorru/)til)i/iti/, integrit-as, -atis,/. 
 iiicrcasi', I (trans,), au-geo, ere, -xi, 
 
 -ctuin. 
 increase, I (intrans.), ercseo, Ore, 
 
 crevi. 
 incur, I, ineurro, t^re, in (ace); 
 
 incur /oss, dainnuni eapio, Ore, 
 
 eepi. 
 Ini/clitcil to yon for this, I am, hoc 
 
 til>i aeceptuni re-fero, -ferre, 
 
 -ttiili ( inctajih.from account-hook), 
 ini/ccisii'c, an-eeps, -eipitis. 
 Inilia ^ndia,,/'.: an Indian, Intl-us, i. 
 inilict, I, renin faeio ; aeeiiso. 
 
 (306.) 
 inilict iticnt, erim-en, -inis, n. 
 inilijl'innt to, neglegens (with i/cn., 
 
 301) ; / mn indifferent to, parvi 
 
 or niiiili (306) faeio. 
 iiidiifnation, MArindignor, ari. (416, 
 
 indisj»ensnl)/e, neeessarius. 
 iniliridua/s ; as indii'iduals, singuli. 
 
 (380, />.) 
 induced, I am, niihi persnadetnr. 
 
 (244, (His.) 
 indu/(je, I, ind'.l geo, ere, -si (dat.). 
 indulijem'e (fonjiveness), venia, f. 
 
 1 JVcs'ciii, " I Mill altsolutely igiiorai t of," opjtoseil to xcio : iqnoro, " I liiive not iiuule 
 myself aii|iiaiiilt'il with," opjui^scd t,o iiori . ilium ignoro (not itcsrin), I do not know 
 liiiii. 
 
CF.XFK',1 1. I V >C. / AY 7 . / A' ) '. 
 
 .173 
 
 (See 
 
 -us, 1. 
 
 •I'USO. 
 
 !/'"•. 
 
 parvi 
 
 (416, 
 
 iiiguli. 
 (letur. 
 
 im.r/Hrii'tK'i', »<.><*' «"//., !iii|M'ritUH. 
 
 (376, iii.). 
 iiij'iillilili , (M'rtisHiiims. 
 in.iimniiM, I (iin ill il(tnit, igiiniiiiniri 
 
 notitr, uri. 
 iit/iiiit, iiifans, -tiH. 
 'ni/iintrif, podit t'H, -uin. 
 iiij'i rlnr to. (278. ) 
 inj'isf, I, infeHtuiii lialwo, (240.) 
 iHjliit (/«».•<.•<) nil (//""), / (ilaimio tv) 
 
 atficio, (•nt. (283.) 
 iiiftii'f ifiiif/i on tfiiii ( iiiiHrliilh/), I, 
 
 inoi'tu tf iinilto, HIV. 
 iiiflirf inniinluiii lit on, I, jxifiias 
 
 HUin-o, r-re, -psi, -ptiiiii, ilu (iil>f. ). 
 iiifiin'iii-i', auctorit-a.s,' atiH, y'. 
 iiijlniiii'i- it'ith, I liiii'i' (iiiiir/i, itr.), 
 
 possum apu<l. (331, 4, (/. ) 
 iiif'onniitinii, I ijli'i', doccd. (231.) 
 i nil II inn II, iiihuiuanus. 
 iiijnrr, I, noL'-eo, «rc, -ui, -lt\iiii 
 
 (ilat.). 
 injni'if (hiinn), (lainnuiii, n. (Scf 
 
 note under irroinj. ) 
 iniioi'i'iii'c, i'litiri', nil' sii/h rl. of' 
 
 iinuK'ens, and stse 224, (thx. 1. 
 innni-int, I mil, extra culpauj sum. 
 
 (331, 9.) 
 hinorinf, tin', innocentes. (80.) 
 iin/niri', I, ([uaero, I'le, a or ex ; 
 
 (te) rogo, inter-rogo, are (231, 
 
 note); pereunctor, ari {tin'.). 
 inxpi ration, atHat-us, -fls, in. 
 inxtaiitlji, continuo. 
 in,stcad of {iloimj, etc.), ad:;o non 
 
 . . . ut ; non moilo . . . sed ; 
 
 tantum abfuit ut . . . ut (124); 
 
 or (|uum posset, del)eret (131, 
 
 Oh^. ). 
 instiijntion, tine auetor (424), or 
 
 suadeo, moneo (*20, ii.). 
 insfitntion, an, iiistitutum. (81, /».) 
 in.strnmA'iitalitii, hi/ i/nnr. (267, (Jhs.) 
 inxnit, an, contumelia, y*. 
 intellirt, men-a, -tis, /. 
 intend to, I, iiMefut. in -rus. (See 
 
 14, r.) 
 intent on, I am., do operam. (397.) 
 
 intuition nt\ with the. (107.) 
 
 intt ntiotitilli/, coiisulto ; oiiisilio. 
 
 (268. ) 
 intensl, gratia,/'. (See note uiidtT 
 
 infliii iiei . ) 
 interent (iiilriintiiifi), titilit-as, -atis, 
 
 /. (61, r.) 
 interest or interixtn of, / eonsnlt, 
 
 eouf-ulo, ere irith ilnt. (S»«'248.) 
 inti nst of in the, eausii. (290, Oh.i. ) 
 interfere iritli, I, interveiiio, ire, 
 
 \eni {lint.). 
 Inti rftose, I {intra ns.). ■= interfere, 
 inti r/iositlon, I'liraenloiii. (64.) 
 inter/ireti-r, interpr-es, -etis. 
 intern-ne, I, inter venio, ire, veni. 
 interrieir with, I linre an, eon- 
 
 venio, ire, -veni {trnns., 24 an<l 
 
 229) ; coMoquor, i, -loeutus 
 
 (cum). 
 intiinnte terms with, I lire on. 
 
 (282.) 
 into, in. (331, 24.) 
 intolernhle {to) almost, vix ferendus. 
 
 (394 and 268, i.) 
 intrust, I, per-niitto, f-re, -niisi, 
 
 -niissum ; niando, are. (See 247 
 
 and 128. ) 
 ini'iiile, I, bellum, o/' arma, in-fer«), 
 
 ferre, -tuli, illatum, in {are., 331, 
 
 24, (•). 
 inraslon, use Itellum infero {jhism. 
 
 part., 417, i.). 
 ini'i'st {a citij), I, circum-sedeo, ere 
 
 {truiiH., 229). 
 inreiijh aijainst, I. (331, 24, e.) 
 inrent, I {fahrieate), tingo, ere, 
 
 tinxi, Hetum. 
 inventor, invent-or, -oris : fern. 
 
 form inventr-ix, -icis. 
 inrite, /, invito, are. (331, 24, !>.) 
 ini'olred in, I am, versor, ari, in 
 
 (ahl.). 
 involre.'i, it {imflies), liahct. 
 irrujitioii, an, in»'ursi-o, -onis,y' 
 island, insula, f. 
 issue, the, event-us, -us, m. ; Imtsee 
 
 174, (/. 
 
 ot Illittif 
 it know 
 
 1 Auctoritas, jnoral influence as distinct from autliority in the sense of power ; 
 foltstiis, \*i^».\ or Icgitinmtc authority or jiower; ivijier'mm, military autliority or 
 power; fHttentin, "power," "mijjht," in a more general sense; riijnum, kin<;ly or 
 (lespotio power; gratia, " interest" with the powerful ; yayor, " popularity " with the 
 masses, 
 
374 
 
 CEM-.NAl VOi AHUI.AK Y. 
 
 hllllltllM, tin, iHtlllllllH, -i,./. 
 
 I'tilji, Italiii,./". 
 
 itmlf, il»««', ii, urn. (365.) 
 
 Jiiiiiinrji, ,]n\\\\i\v\\\^. (Sue Voc. 1, 
 
 iiiiti . ) 
 Jiiriliii {/I'lniiini sn/i/iirx'), nilmii, /*. 
 i<(/(iiiM iij' i/iiii, I iitii, tilti iii-vi»liM», 
 
 fir, -vnli. 
 }< in I {iiii(itji/i.), rt'H siijlifiriit. (222, 
 
 n/,s.) 
 Jiilii {i/iiii), I (iiitrniis.). Hit! (til)i, ('/■ 
 
 iiil tt). fuljuii-pi, tT*!, -xi, -ctniii ; 
 
 fill' niiikx ()f\ I'ul. 
 jiiiiniif/, (I, it IT, -ineriH, //. ; / am 
 
 on a Jininiijf, iter fiicio. 
 joif, liu.'titia, ,/'. ,• slumts of joji, lae- 
 
 taiitiiiiii (liU't(n) ihinior. (See 
 
 418. /', and the vimt'ton.) 
 
 j<>l(f'l(l, l.'U'tUS. 
 
 jidliic, I (thhik), reor, ratu ^ hiuii. 
 
 (See note WiiiXw/itiK'n.) 
 JHidjiiK'/it {tlirisioii), jn*iiriuni, n. 
 iiii/iiiiiiiif {iri/l), arltiti'iuin, n 
 jiiiiiiiii' lit (ijooil), oonsilinni, n. 
 jiii/f/iiDiit i,s i/iji'crcnf, nil/, aliter 
 
 judini. (64.) 
 Jniii' (iiKiiith of), (niensis) Jnniirs : 
 
 jii-Kt of, kalendae .luniae. (038 ) 
 Juiiinrx, juniores ; natii niinores. 
 JKi'i/ijinhjfx), jndiccs. (Voc. 7, uoti' 
 
 '. -•) 
 
 jiisf {iiilj.), Justus. 
 
 //^sy (httclji), nu])en-inie (nuiier). 
 
 ///.v/ [tlnii], jam tuni. 
 
 Jiisfifiriifloii, eansa, /'. 
 
 Ji(.'<fli/, jwrc. (See note niuler riif/it/y.) 
 
 k'lt'iiiii'sft, aci-es, -ei,,/'. {/If. fi/i/i). 
 hi ji, I (jiroiiiixi'fi), sto, stare, .steti 
 
 („hl.). 
 kri'/> {ii'illihi), I, contin-eo, ('•re, -ui 
 
 (intra). 
 kii'p (tnj:iott.s iihouf, I, s<»llicitiun 
 
 lialuio de. (240. 
 kt< II hiifk from, I , prohiI)eo, ere ; 
 
 arceo, ere (iihl.). 
 hip ill till' dark, or aerret, I, celo, 
 
 (230, 231.) 
 
 kii fi nil/ ii'oril, /, lidcni pnie Mto, 
 
 are, -Htiti. 
 ki/f, I, inter-tifio, ' ere, fni, -feetnni ; 
 
 oecldo, ere, -ili, -muim. 
 kind ihiil, II, lieneticiiini, //. ; o(li- 
 
 eiuni, //. 
 kind if, ii'irii, oninis, e. 
 kind if mini, tin, iisi i|iia1i.>i. (174, 
 
 /•/■/((/, of this, liiijnsniodi ;^ uj tin, of 
 tliiit kind , that kind if, ejuHUKHli.- 
 (See 87.) 
 kindlfi (iidj.), Itenignnw ; liunianiis. 
 kindlij disji iMi'd III, lienevoluM, -vol- 
 
 entior, in. (255, "/«. ) 
 kindnixs, Itonit-as, atis, /'; {art of), 
 lieneHcinni, n. ■ I ntnrn (see 
 I i/rntitiidi ). 
 
 i kin;/, re.v, regis; .kinif-i, regius 
 i ((»'//., 68). 
 
 ' knoir, I, scio, ire (n furt) ; novi, 
 lULSse, noverani (norani) (o jur- 
 ■ion) ; notuin haheo (188). 
 knoir/i diji' (/iiirniiiif), «loctrina, /'. 
 knoii'tidiji; to, or iritliin, tni/. (607.) 
 
 link, I, niilii deest. (261.) 
 Iiidiii, onustus. 
 Inifijiird, a, ignavus. 
 lanii'ntutions, J rnuke, lainentor, ari. 
 Innd, terra,./! ; ag-er, ri, in. 
 land, our {ti'rritori/), agri nostri. 
 
 (See ronntrij and 16, o.) 
 land on, I (trans.), ex-pono, Pre, 
 
 -posui, -po.situni. in (aid.). 
 Iiindinif of, till'., partir. of expono. 
 
 (417; i.) 
 lanijiiaifjii {roni'crsation), serni-o, 
 
 onis, in. 
 lanifnai/i; I usi' this, haec lo«juor, 
 
 i! (See 25 and 54.) 
 lanji'. (See ijnut.) 
 last (to), thi', ultinius. (62.) 
 last (of /iiLst time), proxinius ; yb/% 
 
 or within, thi' last (dai/s, etc.) 
 
 (326, Ohs.) 
 last, at, tandem ; denmm. 
 las'inij, dinturnus. 
 late (recent), recen-s, -tis. 
 
 ' I iiterjiccre, gfiitTiil word for to kill : dciIiIi tr, to kill witli a we.'iiioii. as in war: 
 ■uernrr, to ]iiit to di'iitli cniclly : trm-iilinr. to iiiiinh-r uihiuiiaiily, to " Itiitclni'. " 
 
 - lliijiiKniiyli, I'iiismiiili. tti'.. art' coiislaiiMv iiscil roiitciiiiiiiioiuslv ; liiliti rartlv ho, 
 (Fa. ■■■>.: h, ,1. 4/ ■ , , .. 
 
CKMNAI. roC.I/if 7.1 A'V 
 
 .175 
 
 /(//(• III lifi , jam Hfiux (63) ; |iim 
 vi'ctii jam actat*' [uhL tifm.), 
 
 Iil/r, fill) [Oil I'. ), KfC I, 
 
 liililji, iiii|M r. fii/iir/., iiii|)firiiii«' ; 
 
 hut lilt, III, |iaiilii aiitf. (279. 
 
 riiiitlnn. ) 
 liiinir/i iii)iiiii.it, /, im-mittn, vvv, 
 
 ill [iirr. I. 
 Iiiir, ,t, U\, Icjiis, /; (Kx. *.), II. 'J.) 
 Iiiirf'iil, IcuitiliiiiK. 
 Iiii/ III j'ini , /, lU-fiTi), friTf, ail. 
 /((/, ihjii'ii iiiji III ins, I [iHkIiiuhI or 
 
 iiii'i'iiiilrr), altarmis iliHi'«'(lo,«''rt', 
 ssi. 
 /((// iiili III /ihiiiIm nil tllljxilj', I 
 
 (263, ii.) 
 /((*/ irnsfi, I. (ScO iniMti.) 
 Iir.i/, iuiiaviiH. 
 
 Iiiiil, /, (iiico, (rv, <liixi, iliu-tiim. 
 /(■,/(/ ,1 lii'r, I. (237.) 
 Iniil orntMH, or lliroinj/i, I, traii.s- 
 
 tliu'o, (■■r*-. (luxi. (229, ^lltM.) 
 Iiiiil Imrk, I, niluco, ri-L'. 
 hail out, /, cmIium), f-re. 
 Iiiiih rs/ii/i. (424.) 
 Iiiini, I, (lisri), i-vv, ilidiri. 
 Inirn /'n-s/i {nililitioiial), J, ad-diHco, 
 
 (•re, -diilici. 
 /('(>/'///'«;/, (loctriiia, f. ; ]t\\t I nilnniri' 
 
 ill h'liriiiiiij, tliictinr tio ; ami see 
 
 279 flip siijM r'lor in Inirii'iiij. 
 h'Kxt I it, salt vu\ ; /»»/ /(//>■/. I'^'ocerte.' 
 lain', I , or li'iin- In liiinl, le-limiun, 
 
 t'l-e, -liijui, lic'tiim (see note 
 
 under (ilniiiiloii); {it. jihin), ex- 
 
 cedo, ere, ahl, orvx; prolieiHeor, 
 
 i, -fectns {11 III., see 314); hiirc vnj 
 
 iiHiiifri/ (264). 
 liiirc i/oi'i ( t'rrr) to, I. (197, 0/»,v. '1.) 
 liiiri' itloiii, I. missum, am, um, 
 
 facio. (240.) 
 li'itrc iiot/iiiiif, I (298, /'); liam no- 
 
 tluilij lllllloilr (137, /. ). 
 Icnrr, ifoii hiii'cinii. (331. 10, r.) 
 Iij't (di/J.), .sini.'^t-er, -r.a, -rum. 
 hi/ioii, I', legi-o, -onis, y] 
 h'i.'*iirv. tium, 11.; at li'iKure, otio«'-3 
 
 Lniiiios, Lcmn-o8, i/ci -i. 
 
 hsM (ailr.) millllM ; hx.i thnii (irith 
 
 iiHitii'ialM). (318, tihu.) 
 ht iiioii), I, (tilii) tradii, iir. didi, 
 
 ditlim iril/i ijiiiiiitlir,. (400.) 
 lit slifi, I [nil o/ijHirfiniiti/), deHUtii, 
 
 (261.) 
 httir, II, litter ae, arum,/'. . /"/•«/«, 
 
 n, a)>. 
 hi'il filain, |ilaiiiti-eH, ei,,/'. 
 h rif (miliHt.), delert-llM, iik, ///. . / 
 
 lioli/ a h rij, deltitiilii li.il'cu. 
 hrii I'otitrihiitioiis oil i/oii, I, |ir('iiiiias 
 
 tilii im|i«-r(>, an-. 
 liiir, a, iiH-iid a\, acis (mlj.). 
 lilnrfiin, lilieit as, ati.s, /. (siiii;.); 
 
 =:i'.n'iii/itioiiM, immunitat es, -um, 
 
 /•. ,.l. 
 Iifr, vita,,/'. 
 li/itiiii,', iiih'ix (61); 111 f/oiirj'iit/n i'm, 
 
 ^!foii0 f'lifli, r III ill!/ iilin (\ i\ us), 
 
 ahl. iiliH. (424). 
 liki' (atlj ), similiH. (264, 268.) 
 I'lkilji to, iiMi' jiorlii'. ill Ills. (14, I.) 
 line (of hattli), aei es, -ei, /'. (see 
 
 note under jii'il); Um of' nnirrh, 
 
 au;m-en, inis, //.; lim s (/'miijii il), 
 
 miinimeiita, n. f>l. : lliii- {iinta/i/i, 
 
 for " opinion "), jiidiciiiiu, //. 
 linger, I, eiinctor, aii. 
 lilt of', I irrilr 11, per serilio, rro 
 
 {trnns.). 
 liitiii to, 1, amlio. ire. (23.) 
 listiii to, J (I'oin/'ljf n'ilh or ohiij)^ 
 
 obtempero, aie. (See "'"//, 
 
 note) ; lit^tiii fn fiiaiti'r, ex<U"or. 
 litiraturi', litterae. ./". /</. 
 little (see 63); little '0/, \y.\.r\u\\ (294). 
 lire, /, vivo, ere, vixi, viituni. 
 loail, [, oiK'io, are. 
 loud, a, onus, -eris 11. 
 loralitif, lot-a, oriim, 11. 
 lo/ii/, praealtiis. 
 Luialon, Londiniiim, 11. 
 loiKj {in iHntaiin), longiis ; /// llinr, 
 
 diutimis,'- diuturnus. 
 lon[i {ailr.), diu, or jam din ; loinj 
 
 ".'/". .j'"*"' pridem ; hiiiij rontiniml, 
 
 diutinus ; loiuf tried , speetatiis. 
 
 (67, a.) 
 
 ' ''(■;■^', win", it tiilliiws .1 \v ' , iiH'iins •■ .. ist," ami is i(|iii\.ilfiit tn >(///(/»(, nmrt; 
 (>ll)|i)iiitii' tli.'i 'luiili in. 
 
 - IHiiliirnii , liiiij.'. liii^tiiig, ui long ^itat»<liii ; (tiutinns loiij^ ct.ntiiiiifil, in .1 bu4 
 eciisi', " wiar: -"iiir." 
 
37fi 
 
 GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 hnKjvr (<iifr.), «liutius ; no loiiffHr, or 
 
 ani/ loiiijir {ajhr a in'ijativf), 
 
 jam or dintiii.s (328, (i); lioir initrh 
 
 lotKjt't i (jiums(jiie, or <|^uous(|ue 
 
 tandum (167, <ibx. ) 
 look (it, I, specto, arc (see note 
 
 under m'e) ; intueor, Gri (/>*'//. 
 
 r<iri'). 
 look tloirn on, f, de-spicio, f're, 
 
 -spt'xi, -spectiMu (tnins.). 
 look /'or, I, (icxiUj'or), expecto, are. 
 
 (23.) 
 look for (in vain), J, desidero, are. 
 look f'onrard to, J, provideo, ere 
 
 (ore), 
 look round for, 1, eircunt-spicio, <?re, 
 
 -spexi. (22, 23.) 
 look up at, J, suspicio, 6re. 
 looked for, than 1 had, spe, or ex- 
 
 pL'ctatione, meii, (277.) 
 /().s< , /, a-initto, ere, -niisi, -missuni. 
 losi', I (opporttinitif), de-sum, esse. 
 
 (251.) 
 lose heart, I, aiiinio deficio, ere ; 
 
 ()/' )nnn- than one person, aniniis. 
 lose mil lafionr I (= / ejfect nothin<f), 
 
 nihil ago. 
 lose t'nne, I , tempus tero, ere, trivi, 
 
 tritum. 
 lose the da If, I (= / am comcatri'd), 
 
 vincor, i, victus. 
 loss, dainnum, n. ; detrimentun., n. 
 loss of, without the, use a-mittt», t're. 
 
 (425. ) 
 loss what to do, I am at a. (172. ) 
 lost, all is, de summa re actum est. 
 lot (metaph.), lot in life, fortuna, f. 
 lot, it falls to (»<,'/), (mihi)contingit -.^ 
 
 it in men's lot to, hominibiis , . . 
 
 ut. (123.) 
 lore, I, di-ligo, fre, -lexi, -lectum ; 
 
 amo,^ are. 
 loreli/, puleherrimus. 
 low, ahjectus ; vri/ low, infimus. 
 
 (57, a.) 
 
 low, or lowhf, liirth, 
 
 -atis, /. 
 hiirest part of, inni.s. 
 loifal, tidelis. 
 loi/altif, fid-e,s, -ei,y*. 
 luxury, luxHria,y! 
 
 igpol)ilitas, 
 (60.) 
 
 (See 
 
 mad, J am ()/uite), furo, r-re. 
 
 Voe. (), ».) 
 made, I am lieinf/, fio, fieri, facttis. 
 ina</ni/iceiit, jtraeolari.ssinni.s. 
 maijnitude, use quantus. (174, a.) 
 niainli/, potissiniuin. 
 maintain, I, sustin-eo, r-re, -iii. 
 make, I, facio, f-re, feci, factum ; 
 
 make war infero, ferre (253, ii.); 
 
 make mif icai/, iter facio. 
 make fast (bind), I, coustri-ngo, 
 
 fire, -nxi, -ctus. 
 malice, malitia ;* malevolentia. 
 Malta, Melita, /. 
 man, vir, viri ; liom-o, -iiiis (for 
 
 the difference see p. ir>3, note 
 
 3) ; to a man (331, \.,f.). 
 manai/enienf, procuratio, -oiiis, _/'. 
 manhood, in ipiite earhi, aduiodum 
 
 adolescens. (63, and p. (j.S, note 3. ) 
 manifesthj, -■ ofirious/i/. (64.) 
 ^nankind, homines ; or genus hu- 
 
 manum. 
 manliness, with, viril-iter, -ius. 
 munner, in this. (268 and Ohs.) 
 manner of life. (174, c.) 
 nianni rs, mor-es, -um, m. ]d. 
 manif, mult-i, -ae, -a. 
 marhle (iidj.), marmoreus. 
 m/irch, a, iter, -ineris, n. 
 march, f, iter facio. 
 Marseilles, Massilia, f. 
 marsh, pal-us, -udis, f. 
 mass, a, niol-cs, -is,f. 
 mass (of the pojile), vulg-us, -i, n.; 
 
 for flat, in vulgus, 264, note, 
 masnacr", caed-es, -is,./'.; I am,pre- 
 
 Hent at the, use ijerundive. (417, ii. ) 
 
 1 Contingll, "hajipons" by a natural jinici'ss ; ofti-ner, liut not always, of what is 
 desirahk- : iircidit, "lirtpi>ens," " falls nut," by chance, often, but not always, of what 
 i.s unilcsirabU' : vsw rciiit, " falls within my cxjitrienee : " eveait, " haiipcns," " turns 
 »iut," as tilt! result of ]iri'vious circuiustancfs. 
 
 - Anuire i'X|)rcsses greater warmth of feelinj,' than (liliycre: it is " to love jiassion- 
 ately," " to hp. enamoured of." 
 
 ■^ Mtili'rolmtia, ill-will; mnlUia, the same feellnsj slxnvn in underhand attacks or 
 Kcljenies ; nuiliyiiiUis. ill-will shown in a desire to defraud, " niggardliness," 
 
GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 377 
 
 masftacre, I, tnicido, are. (See kill. ) 
 maMir, a, domin-us, -i, m. 
 maftrr, a, res, rei, /'. 
 viatterA littlt', it, parvi refert (310 at 
 
 end) ; it vuitlers not, niliil ret'ert 
 
 {ihiil.). 
 vut/nrc lift, in. jam adultus. (63.) 
 J/f/y (month of), (nieusis) Mains. 
 
 (538, n.) 
 inn 11, /. (197 and Ohs.) 
 mi'nn, {adj ), .sordidus ; a1>jectus. 
 vu'iin, ti'hiit J, you, etc. ; or ir/inf 
 
 iftf/ie, VK'oninij (174) of, ((uid mihi 
 
 veliin, ti^i velis, etc. (163). 
 means, bij no, neiiuaciuam ; haiid- 
 
 quaquam ; imllo niodo ; miuime. 
 means, hif this. (268.) 
 Dieans, hinnhle, tenuis fortnna. 
 meantime, interea. 
 metldle irlth, J, at-tiiigo, t^re, -tigi, 
 
 -tactus. 
 Medes, the, Medi, -oriun. 
 vieditate on, I, cogito, are de (nhl.). 
 meet, I, obviani fio (dnt. ) ; / come, i/t>, 
 
 (JO down, to meet, itbviani venio, 
 
 ire ; eo, ire ; descendo, t'-re. 
 meet, I (endure), ex-perior, iri, 
 
 -pertus. 
 meet (ilonm), I, obeo, ire, -ii (ace.). 
 meet (toi/ether) at, to, eonv^^nire ad. 
 
 (331, 'i. c.) 
 m,emherofthe nation, or slate, civ-is, 
 
 -is, m. 
 memorti, inemoria, /. 
 menace (icith), I, denuntio, are 
 
 (ace. of thin;/, daf. of person) ; 
 
 for menaces use tjernnd. (99.) 
 mention, J, nientioneni facio (;/»'«.). 
 mention, not to, ne dicani. (100, 
 
 note. ) 
 vnrchant vessel, navis oneraria. 
 mt rcji, niiscricordia, /'. ; I place 
 
 injiseJf < nflrelif at your, totuni 
 
 nie til»i trado ac pennitto. 
 mere (from, tf.e), \\)sv (use aid. of 
 
 (Vf»,s7% o/' propter : .see also 355, 
 
 c): merclii, - only : " /H<'/r " and 
 
 ''me nil/ " are if fen. expres.'ied by 
 
 emphatic order simphi. 
 vu'.'isaije, a, nuntinm, /;. 
 messenger, nunti-us, -i, m. 
 method, rati-o, oins, y". 
 mid-day, uieridi-es, -ei, m. 
 
 m'ddle of, midst of. (60. ) 
 vi^dst of, in the. (332, 5, h) 
 tni'/hty, siiperl. (;/"inagniis. 
 Milan, Mediolaiiuin, n. 
 mile, a, niille, pi. inilia, sc. pas- 
 
 smun (1000 jxiceti of iS feet), 
 mind, animus, -i, m. ; (= intellect), 
 
 men-s, -tis, f ; his itdade. mind, 
 
 = all that he, thinks (seiitio, in-). 
 mind (verb imperat.), fac, eura, ut. 
 
 (141.) 
 mind, I am out of my, insan-io, 
 
 ire, -ivi, -ii. (See 25.) 
 mind, I am if one (with), con- 
 
 sentio, ire, -sensi (cunil. 
 mimjle with, I (intrans. ), ini-inisceor, 
 
 (20), f'ri, -mixtus (/hit.), 
 luinijled . . . anil, et . . , et. 
 mirac. bats interposition, by a. 
 
 (64.) 
 miserable, mis-.er, -era, -erum. 
 mislead, I, decipio, t'-re, etc. 
 missile, a, telum, »/. 
 mlssini/, I am, desitleror, an. 
 mistake, a, err-or, -oris, m. ; in, 
 
 yen. ('CO.) 
 mistake, I make a ; am mistaken, 
 
 erro, are. 
 Mithridates, Mithridat es, -i.s. 
 m'>b, nudtitud-o, -inis, f. 
 moile, rati-o, mi8,y. 
 moderate (not too ijreat), modiru.s ; 
 
 mediocris (''middliny ''). 
 moment vhen, at the. (433.) 
 ,noney, pecunia,/. 
 monstrous (wicked), nefarius. 
 monument, inoniimentuni, ». 
 moon, Inna, y*. 
 morals, mor-es, -um, m. 
 more. (adv. ), plus ; magis : as subst. 
 
 (294), jdus, n. pi. (54) plura ; 
 
 7nore than ( = rather than), magis 
 
 qnam ; more than once, see once, 
 more, (aerer^ p(»sthae. 
 lU'ireorer, prai!terea. 
 niornimj, in the, mane (adc.). 
 morrow, the (still in future), dies 
 
 crastinus ; on the morrow [if a 
 
 past ilate , die pn.stero. 
 mortal (wound), morti-fer, tVra, 
 
 -ferum. (18, 19.) 
 moiit (used loosely in comparimj two 
 
 only), plus. (See more.) 
 
378 
 
 GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 iiiiitlrii j'roni, or inth, n, tixr, oh 
 (331, 14) mil/ causa,./'. ; 1111/ on/i/ 
 ninflri' ix (483, 0/w. ). (See also 
 107.) 
 
 iiioinif ii/i, I, a.sct!iul-o, fre, -i. 
 
 iiioiiii/iiiii, iiion-.s, -tin, 111. 
 
 vionni/iilhi, inao.stu.s. (61.) 
 
 inniif/i, in 1 riri/ (ihi''h. (257.) 
 
 inorr, I {liifnnis.), iiioveor, Ori, 
 iiKitus. (20.) 
 
 niiir/i, imiltiis, a, uin ; ns .siihxf. (.see 
 63) ; iiiiirh o/'(294) ; w/'/f com- 
 jiiinit., iiiulto (279). 
 
 ■nnillihidi-, iimltitiul o, -iiiis, /". 
 
 Diiin/ir, II, cat'd-e.s, -i.s, j\ 
 
 iiiiifi/ir, I, ueco, are. 
 
 iniinfin'r. (Sec 175.) 
 
 iiiii.'<f he, vm jiiiii. in -tins. (198, 
 
 niiif/ni/, .sediti-o, -oiiis, _/*. 
 
 ?«//, ineus. (.See 11, r.) 
 
 iinixrlf (I'Ni/i/iiitir), ipse (356, <l) ; 
 {ri'jli'.riri'), me, me i|mum (356, 
 ii.); ./'(//• mi/xi'lj', ego, or ecjiiidem 
 (11, ((, ami 334, i.). 
 
 Hiinir, II, 110m 111, -iiiis, n. ; in name 
 
 {nnniiiiii/fi/). (274.) 
 nntnc, i/oml, fama, y". 
 .Xn/ili-t, Neapol-is, -is, lor. -i. 
 S'lirliDinii', Narlio, -onis, in. 
 niitioii, jiopul-us, -i, in. ; civit-aa, 
 
 -atis. /!. or civ-e-s, -inm ; re.spub- 
 
 lica. (.See 19, ami Voc. 2, w.) 
 nnfionnl, eommuiiis ; or ijen. of 
 
 ri'.s])iiltlica. (68.) 
 iintii))iii{ cannv, thv, respuMica ; 
 
 communis rei ]». causa. 
 nil f II nil /Hiiri'rs, iiatura, /'. , and see 
 
 note under r/iuriirfir. 
 nntiirnllji (lii/ nnliiri'), natura. 
 natnri', iimo (|ua]iaor (juis. (174, h.) 
 niifirr 111 ml , or rmintrf/ (see 16, (i) ; 
 
 / /('(//•■ ;«//, p.itria cedo (264). 
 ni'iirlji, ]tr<t|)e, )»;iene. (See note 
 
 nn 1 "r n/ino.sf.) 
 nrri'S'iiirii, nec<(ssarius; in necen>iori/. I 
 
 (See 286.) 
 nrri'.isarii'x (o/lifi'). (286.) I 
 
 ni'ri'sfiHif ( - cnimjinri/), tenip-us, I 
 
 -oris, n. ! 
 
 need of; innerdt'if, p/r. ,opus. (286.) I 
 
 nri'fh miint, neeesse est. (201, and 
 
 p. 144, noh.) 
 iii'i/hrf, /, negle-go, •'•r.!, -xi, -ctum. 
 ni'ii/hhonr (m'tiiul), vicin-us, -i ; in 
 
 sense o/'\/'il/ou'iniin,^' or " ni'jn," 
 
 alter ; ceteri. (372. ) 
 ni'iij/ihoiirini/, HnitinniH 
 neither . . . nor, necpie . . . neque. 
 neither of the t ICO. (340, ii.) 
 ni'ver, nuncpiam ; and ntrer, nee 
 
 uiKjuam. (110.) 
 neir, novus. 
 news of, the, use nuntio, are (417 
 
 i. ) ; neii's has been iiroin/ht (46, a). 
 iie.>i, the, proximus ; inseijuen-s, 
 
 -tis ; next {ilaif), posterns ; or [on 
 
 thi'), postridie {ailr.). 
 nej-t toJprejK). (331, 21, '•-) 
 nieetii's{o/'arifinni'iit),nrj^nt\im,f]>l. 
 niijht, mix, noctis, ./'. 
 ninetein, undev'«'i:iti. (52V.) 
 niuetji-sei'onil. (See 630 and 631. ) 
 no (162) ; / sai/ or ansirer " ho." 
 
 nego, are. 
 vo, none {adj.), nnllus. 
 no (not) wore (udr.) than, niliilo 
 
 magis (piam. 
 no one, none, nemo, ijen. nullins 
 
 (see 223, note) ; and no one, none, 
 
 nee quisquam (110). 
 no sooner . . . than, ubi prinnim ; 
 
 simul atcjuc. (428. ) 
 noh/e hnoraU)/), ])raeclarns (p. 03, 
 
 note 4) ; pulcherrimus (57, a) ; 
 
 for nsaije irith projier nouns and 
 
 persons see 224. 
 ,ohU's. (51, a, and note.) 
 noon, noon-da ji. {i^ec niid-dai/.) 
 nor, ueque ; in ^final clauses, neu. 
 not f/ef, nonduni. 
 nothimj, niliil. 
 now, jam ( = % fhi.'i time, can he 
 
 used of the past) ; nunc (at the, 
 
 j>re.-<<.'nt, at the moment of spiak- 
 
 inij) ; hotlie (to daif). 
 mar . . . lomj, jamdiu ; jampridcm. 
 
 (181.) 
 noir . . . voir, nu»do . . . modo. 
 nirmher (proportion or }iart), par-s, 
 
 -fs,/. 
 niimher of the (interroff.). (174, a.) 
 numhers, <p-eat, multi ; complures ; 
 
 hujitrior, multitud-o, -inis,./*. 
 
GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 379 
 
 niniK rutis, inor>', plures ; such 
 ntimfrouft, tot. 
 
 oittli, jusjuniixluiu, jurisjunuiili, ii. 
 
 ofir>/li'iit Ui, I (I III, -ohfji. 
 
 f>f"'.'/t Ij l):ir-e(»,' ere, -ui ((hit., 6) ; 
 
 obteiiipc'io, are (duf.) ; f/ir ortlern 
 
 of, (lieto aiulieiis suiii (ihit.). 
 ohji'ct, I, recuso, are (136, a); I do 
 
 not (131). 
 object {siilist. ), ohji'ctx, (see 64) ; ohjcct 
 
 of ini/io/tiil(tritf/ ii'ith yfni, I <tiii, 
 
 invidia Hagm, are, ajtiul vos. 
 oh/ii/d/ioii, / (nil iiiidcr, gratiam 
 
 ilelieo. (98, //. ) 
 ohsfdc/c, (i<l) (jiiod ol)stat. 
 ohstiiKifc, j)ertiii-a\, coin/i. -acior. 
 o/itdin, I, atliiiiscor,'' i, a<lei)tus ; 
 
 c<»ii-se(|iit>r, i, -seeutus (18, 19) ; 
 
 (I r('(/H(st, inipetro, are. 
 ohrioiirli/. (64.) 
 
 ocoisioii, on l/Hit,t\un. (Intr. ]*.).) 
 occii/)i/, I (hold), teii-eo, ere, -ui. 
 ocean, ocean us, -i, in. 
 of (at (I distance of), J din, absuni. 
 ■ (318.) 
 
 ojf'enee, (///^ peocatuni, n. (408.) 
 oj/'end, I (diinoji), ort"en-«lo, ere, -di, 
 
 -sum. (245. ) 
 ojj'er, /, <le-fero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum; 
 
 ofer (terms), fero. 
 office, magistrat-us, us (18, 19) ; / 
 
 (irii in, in magistratu sum ; / 
 
 hold, m. habeo ; obtineo. 
 officers, tlie (inllitdri/), tribuni (mili- 
 
 turn) eenturionescjue. 
 often, saepe ; .so often, toties. 
 old. (See dnci it, antl lu^te.) 
 o/d (Kfe, seneei-iis, -utis, f. ; in my. 
 
 (63'.) 
 old. riuiii, sen-ex, is. 
 old-icoild, old fashioned, priscus ; 
 
 anti(|uus, (See note under 
 
 ancient.) 
 
 oldest, natu maxiinuK. 
 
 once, seniel ; often tup. by tensa oj 
 
 verb (471, not( ) ; more than oiiC( , 
 
 seniel ae saepius. (633, c.) 
 once ( forna rljf), *|uondain ; olim.'' 
 once, at (iiniiiediateli/), statini. 
 once, at (at the same time), nse idem. 
 
 (366, i.) 
 one (numeral), unus ; of, ex (529, e) ; 
 
 one of the best (629, d) ; one or 
 
 two; one, two, sereral. (529, (j.) 
 one (irjlefnite), one toho (see 72) ; 
 
 one so "(224, Obs. 'J). 
 one, not, nemo (223, note), ne unus 
 
 qui<lem (529, a), 
 one, . . , the other. (368.) 
 one. and all, euncti (see under all) ; 
 
 omnes (/ilaced last), 
 one by one, siuguli. (380, b.) 
 one (lay ( = at some time or other), 
 
 alii|Uando. (See note under o/zr*. ) 
 one thiiKf . . . another, it is. (92.) 
 only, solum, modo, tantum (placed 
 
 (fter the icord (/iKilijied) ; this and 
 
 only this (347, e.cdin/ile) ; nut only, 
 
 non solum, non modo. 
 onset, impet-us, -us, m. 
 open, I ; throw open ; open icide .- 
 
 cause to be opened, pate-facio, Ore, 
 
 -feei, -factum. 
 open, to be, patere (no fit. in -nis 
 
 193, iii.). 
 open to (/Hestion, is, = can be doubted, 
 
 dubitari potest. 
 openiny, first possible. (377.) 
 openly, palam. 
 opinion, ijood, exi.stimati-o, -onia, 
 
 /• 
 opinion on, your, = what you think 
 
 o/*(eenseo, ere, de). 
 opponent, I am, an. See / o/ipo,>ie. 
 oppnrtnnity, occasi-o, -onis, /'. ; 
 
 facult-as, -atis, /'. ; first possible. 
 
 (377.) 
 
 1 /'«.r('(i, tli(> frciuTal wonl.for "I olicv," ajiplit'il oftcd to liabitiiiil (ilicilii'iic r nf iiiiy 
 kiinl : nhti'miM'tii, I obey ii.s I'niiii ii simim' of iciisoii ami ri^^lit ; nhiniUii, 1 oln-y a siii};l(' 
 (■oiiiiiiaiiil ; iihsi-qiiiir, "1 coiiiiily witli," "I suit inysclf to ; " (liclixiinlicns sum, I it;iiilcr 
 iiii]ili(:it ohi'ilji'iii'i', as that ot'a solilicr. 
 
 '■' Xaiirimnr, I oKiaiii, oftfii without cllort, hy (•iicuiiist;>u<i's or cliaiwo ; c.aiisiijiior, I 
 obtain iithinj,' whicli I t'oHow after as a gooil ; (uUjii.iinr, I obtain after effort ; imjietro, 
 by eutreaiy. 
 
 * 01hii(\Ui\ oUf), at a ilistantjioiji/, in tlu' jiast or(.sonietiiues) in the future ; qvinnhim 
 (nui(liini), <inly of the past, ami j,'enerally iluring some Sjunr of time in tlm past; 
 alii{uanil(), at some time or otlier, past, present or I'uture, opposetl itt " never." 
 

 380 
 
 GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 II 
 
 oppose, I, adverser, ari (<lnt., 244, />); 
 
 ol»-.sto, are, -stiti (263, i.). 
 op/iofiifr to. (331,2.) 
 oppoxUioii, ill Kfiile. of your, vsi' 
 
 parfU'. f>/'a»lvers()r, ari. (420, ii.) 
 oppress, y, vexo, are. (19.) 
 np/ifi'ssirt', iiii(|uus. 
 or, ant, vel (seep. 14, iiotr)', inf)ial 
 
 and coiixer. ('Idii.scs, 103, 110 ; 
 
 iuterrog., 169, 160 ; 168, and Ohtt. 
 orator, orator, -oris. 
 order, I, ju})e(), ere, iussi, jussuin. 
 
 (120, 128.) 
 orde:r,s, ju.ssa, n. ]d. (61, ft.) 
 orders, I ijlve, iinpero, are ; edico, 
 
 Gre, etc. (127, h, and 128.) 
 oriijin (ex(rart'n)ii\ gcn-us, -eris, ». ; 
 
 of humble orijin, Iminili loco 
 
 natus. 
 oriijiiialli/ {sprniHj). (See .v^>r« //;/.) 
 orphitti, orbus, a, iini. 
 other, the (of tiro), ille (339, iv.) ; 
 
 alter (368) ; others, alii, or ( = ofh< r 
 
 men, the rest) ceteri (372) ; it is 
 
 for, use (fen. (291, Ohs. 4). 
 other uien's, or persons^ alieiuis 
 
 (adj., 68). 
 oiajht, J. (198.) 
 oxr, iiost-er, -ra, -mm. 
 our men, iiostri. (50.) 
 out of, e, ex (332, 5), or de (tdn.). 
 outcries, a)i</ri/, maledicta, ». ]>L 
 
 (408.) 
 ouf(f(), I (far), (facile) vinco, -ere, 
 
 supero, are. 
 oufiiundier, ire, plurcs suiims quaiii. 
 outnti/e on, the, vse ijerundire or 
 
 jHtrfic. o/"vi(do. (417, ii. or i.) 
 onfsit/e (the ri;f/). (311, Ohs.) 
 outstrip, f, rz outdo, 
 orer (more than), plus. (318, Ohs.). 
 orer with, all. (332, 3, d. ) 
 orer-rearh, I, circuni-veiiio, ire, 
 
 -veiii. (229.) 
 orern'helni, J, obni-o, ere, -i, -turn ; 
 
 op-primo, r-re, -jiressi, -pressiini. 
 ouw, J, del)eo, T'l-e. 
 ouun<f to, i)ropter (are., 331, 20, J)). 
 own, his, aims (11, f); mijoivn, mens. 
 
 p(U'if!/, I, placo, are. 
 pain, <lol-or, -(»ris, in. 
 painful, is. (260, 3. ) 
 
 pahiee, doni-us, -us,./'. ; the kiny's, 
 
 domus regia. (68.) 
 panic, pav-or, -oris, m. 
 pardon, I, ig-iiosco, ere, -novi, 
 
 -mttum (dat., 6); jiardon (i/ou) 
 
 for (this) ; hoc tilu comlono, are 
 
 (247) ; / mish you pardoned ; tibi 
 
 ignotum volo (240, Ohs. 1 ) ; la/ 
 
 pardoninij, tjerund o/'ignosco (99). 
 parent, paren-s, -tis. 
 jiark (pleasure yrounds), horti, m. 
 
 pi. 
 Parliament = Senate, 
 part, for my, equidem. (See 
 
 also 334, i. ) 
 part, it is our. (291, Ohs. 2.) 
 part, the ijreater, pleri(]ue. 
 part from, /, discedo, Cre, ab. 
 jiart in, I take, me im-misceo, ere, 
 
 -mi.scui. -iiiixtum (dat.); a battle, 
 
 intersiun (dat. ) ; politics, attingo. 
 jKirt in, without, exper-s, -tis (yen., 
 
 301, ii.). 
 partly, partim. 
 party, the (popular), pars, -tis, and 
 
 see popular and aristocratic, 
 party, one . , . the other. (340, iii. ) 
 })ass (a law), I, perfero, Terr6. 
 jK(ss (time), I, dego, dre, degi ; ago, 
 
 Gre. 
 pass, to (iutrans., of intervals of 
 
 time), inter-cedPre, -ccssit. 
 pass by, I, praeter-eo, ire, -ii. 
 passio/i (anyer), ira, f 
 j>assionate, iraciindiis. 
 passionateness, iracundia, f. 
 past (adj. ), praeteritus ; the past, 
 
 praeterita (62) ; tempus prae- 
 
 teritum. 
 pathless, invius. 
 pidience, with, aequo animo, or 
 
 patienter. 
 patriot, true patriot, bonus civis ; 
 
 civis optinnis ; jtafriots, erery 
 
 jxdriot, all true patriots; optinnis 
 
 qiii.s(pie (376, and note) ; best 
 
 jHttriot, optimus civis. 
 jiay attention to, I, rationem liabeo 
 
 (uutli yen.); pay (you) honour; 
 
 honorem (tibi) habeo ; j>ay my 
 
 respects to, saluto, are (ace. ) ; 
 
 jiay the jtenalty (243, and see 
 
 penalty). 
 
GENERA I. VOCABULARY. 
 
 .381 
 
 j>eaa', pax, pacis, /. 
 
 jx'ucc {of viimi), 8uciirit-aH, -atia,/. 
 
 p('<u(li(trifi/, sjHci/i/, pntpriuin, //. 
 
 (266.) 
 pcmtltij, poena,/. ; supplioiuiii, «.; 
 
 I pttji the /i<'Hii/fi/ of. pitenas <!<» 
 
 (,'/'"•)■ (^t'o note under judiif/i- 
 
 incut. ) 
 jH'oftlc (-tueii), homines; a /)ct)j>le 
 
 {=: iKttioii), popul-us, -i, in. 
 jH'rft'ii'c, /, intel-lego, itu, -lexi, 
 
 -leotum. (19.) 
 j)(')'/i(i/M, nescio an (see 169), or 
 
 hand scio an (the, latter .s/iould 
 
 alwuijii he. usal he/ore ttti (k/J. 
 
 lolien no verb is ejjircMcd) ; for- 
 
 tasse ; forsitan (170). 
 pcrilGiiSy periculosus. (67, a.) 
 period, at that. (294, Obn.) 
 j}eri.sft, I, pereo, ire. 
 2M'7'missioH, tcith your kind; without 
 
 his. (269, Obs.)^ 
 ■permit,!, per me licet (331, 15, c) ; 
 
 1 ai: jierniitted, mihi licet (197). 
 perpetrate, I, com-, or ad-, mitto, 
 
 6re ; facio, Cre. 
 j)erpftrator {of), — he who jx'rpe- 
 
 trated. (176.) 
 persecu*e, I, insector, ari (dep.). 
 persevere or per>iist, I, persevere, are. 
 person, a, homo, -inis. (224, Obs. 
 
 2 and note, and Ex. 39, note.) 
 person, a single (after a neyat.), 
 
 qiiisqnam. (368, i.) 
 person (i/our oivn), caput, n. 
 personal appearance, corporis (69) 
 
 habit-US, -us. 
 persuade, /, persua-deo, ere, -si, 
 
 -sum (6) ; / cannot be persuaded, 
 
 persuader! mihi non potest. 
 
 (219, see also 122, i.) 
 pestilence, pestilentia, /. 
 philosopher, philosoph-us, -i. 
 philosophy, philosophia, /. 
 pierce, I, con-fodio, <?re, -fodi, 
 
 -fossum. 
 pitch of, tosucha, eo {ijen. , 294, Obs. ). 
 pity for, I feel, me miseret {<jen., 
 
 309). 
 2}lace, loc-us, -i, m. ; in the place 
 
 (where), ibi; to the (. . . tvhence), 
 
 eo. (89.) 
 
 place, /, pono, 6re. 
 
 plain, campus, -i, in. 
 
 pbtin (adj.), manife.stus ; as plain 
 
 (w, manifestior. (276.) 
 plan, consilium, //. 
 plead (as e.rcu.sc), J, excu.-(o, are ; 
 
 = nci/otiate, ago, ere; iny cause, 
 
 cauMam oro, are, dico, C'rc. 
 pleasantly (f spt'(tk'), jucunda, //. pi. 
 please, I (i/ou), plac-co, ( re, -ui, 
 
 -itum (dat., 6). 
 plea.'<e, I ( - it plcaxis me), miiii 
 
 llbet, lilmit or libitum est (246); 
 
 if you jdeasr, si libet. 
 pleasiny to, grains (dat.). 
 pleasure, vohipt-as, -atis, f. (often 
 
 in jil., when used for pleasure in 
 
 the abstract), 
 pledye myself, I, spondeo, ere, 
 
 spopondi. 
 plunder, praeda, /. 
 poet, poeta, m. 
 point (in ercry), res (pi.), 
 point of, in. (332, i, «.) 
 point of, on the, uxc fut. in -rus 
 
 (189, iii. ) ; when on the, partic. 
 
 in -rus (418, d). 
 point (whence), to the. eo. (89.) 
 point out, I, monstro, are ; ostend-o, 
 
 ere, -i. 
 poison, venenum, n. 
 policy, consilia, n. pi. 
 political, yen. of res publica (nee 69) ; 
 
 for jtotitiral storms, in repabli<^a. 
 political life, res publica ; / enter 
 
 political life ; ad rem p. me con- 
 
 fero, ferre; orac-cedo, fire, -cessi. 
 politicians. (176.) 
 jwlitics, respublica (nerer pi. ). 
 poor, paup-er, -eris ; the poor, 
 
 pauper-es, -um. (61, a.) 
 popular (party), popularis ; or the 
 
 popular party, popular-es, -ium, 
 
 m. pi. (p. 63, note 4). 
 popularity, fav-or, -oris, m,. (See 
 
 note under injlnence.) 
 populous, frequen-s, -tissimus. 
 position, loc-us, -:, ni. 
 possible (jrith superlatives), vel. 
 
 possible, it is. (126, e. ) 
 possibly, use potest fieri ut. 
 and 126, e.) 
 
 (64 
 
3S2 
 
 GENEKA r. VOCA /? ULA R J : 
 
 V 
 
 \)ttnt iij), /, figo, ('TV, fixi, lixuiii. 
 fiosfi-titi/. (S('(! 61, II, (iiiil note.) 
 /Htst/tDiic, J, (lirtcro, ferru. (Se« 
 
 note under /inini hnck.) 
 /lonrti/, i>!inpert-a8, -atis, _/*. 
 poinr, potcntia, ,/*. ; potest-as, 
 
 -atis, /. (See note under in- 
 
 ffiii'iin.) 
 poin'i; iinilt')' hix oini, ijin. of ditio 
 
 8ua, arbitriuni Himni. (290, 
 
 O/w.) 
 /inirt r/'iil, jiotens ; f/ic poire r/nl, 
 
 poteiitissinnis (jui.s(pie (xiiii/., 
 
 376) ; / am mo.'<t jioiirr/iil, 
 
 plurimum possum. 
 poin'rlcsi^, I (im, nihil possum, 
 pniixii (xiihst.), lau-8, -dis, /, 
 pniisc, /, lau<lo, are. 
 pvdiKi'il, to In' (lulj.), laudandus. 
 pniixcirortfiif, laudabilis. 
 pniif J'or, J (I (li'xire iniirh), opto, 
 
 are (ncr.) ; / mahi one jiraj/er, 
 
 unum opto. 
 prin/^rs, preo-es, -um,y. 
 preceilhiij, proxiuius. 
 predou.% pretiosus {niiperl., 67, a). 
 ]>n'(le('exsorn. (176.) 
 prefer, I (modal rerh), malo, malle, 
 
 malui. (42, i. d, and ii. ) 
 prefer (/liin to i/oii), I, (eum tibi) 
 
 l)rae-, or ante-pono, fre, -posni, 
 
 -positum (263, ii.) ; or prae-fero, 
 
 ferre, -tuli. 
 preparation «, I make, pare, are. 
 
 (64.) 
 prepare {tran.<<.), I {for or against 
 
 you), (til)i) in-tendo, Cre, -tendi. 
 preparinif to, tine ])artic. in -rus. 
 
 (14, c) 
 ])rexence, in hix, viy, etc., praesens. 
 
 (61, «r 420, ii.) 
 jrre.vnee of, in the {prep.), in (273, 
 
 Ohfi.) ; coram {abl. of ])ersnns). 
 present \adj.), hio (337); but your 
 
 present, iste (338). 
 prexant, I am, ad -sum, -esse, -fui ; 
 
 present at, intersum. (261.) 
 present, nt, or for the, in praesens. 
 
 (331, 24, h.) 
 present, as a. (260, 3. ) 
 
 are (39) ; 
 fingo, »"'re, 
 
 not), 
 
 i present yon with this, I, lioc (aid.) 
 
 te (aee.) <b»no, are. 
 presently, mux ; brevi. 
 jireservation of, the, use conservo, 
 
 are. (399, Ohs. -2; 292, Ohs.) 
 jireseri'e, J, servo, are ; conservo, 
 
 are. 
 liress on, I, insto, are ; hy jiressinij 
 
 on, ijerund, (99.) 
 jireteiiil, I, simuio, 
 
 dii'tito,' are (assert) 
 
 finxi, tic-tnni. 
 jiretty (ailr. ) ; pretty mil, satis. 
 prevail by prayer, I, inipetro, tare, 
 
 upon, ab. (127, c.) 
 prevent, I (from), ob-sto, -stare, 
 
 -stiti (dat.), quominus. (137, 
 
 II.) 
 prevent, to (in order that 
 
 ne. (101, ii.) 
 j)rieeless, prutiosissimus. 
 p, 'nee, rex. legis. 
 principle, ivanl if, levit-as, -ati.s,y*. 
 prison, vincula, n. pi. 
 prisoner, captiv-us, -i, m. ; I am 
 
 heinij taken, capior, i, captus. 
 2)rivate (person), privatus ; iirivate 
 
 property, res familiaris. 
 privilefje, a, jus, juris, v. 
 procrastinate, J, differo, ferre, dis- 
 
 tuli. (See note under hanf/ hack.) 
 procrastination, cunctati-o, -onis, 
 
 f ; or use rerh, cunctor. (98, ft.) 
 profess, I, pro-fiteor, eri, -fessus. 
 proijress in, I make (much, more), 
 
 (multum, plus) proficio, Cre, in 
 
 (abl). 
 project (siihst.), consilium, n. 
 prolonyed, diutlims. 
 promise, J, poUic-eor, eri, -itus ; 
 
 promitto, Ore, -misi, -missum. 
 
 (37.) (Voc. 6, «.) 
 2irom'ise, a, ])romissum, n. (61, b) ; 
 
 of i/ood, or the hiyhest (303, Obs. 
 
 2) ; / make promises, polliceor 
 
 prooj, indicium, n. ; is a proof. 
 (260, 3.) 
 
 proof aifainst, invictus ab, or 
 adversus (ace). 
 
 ■ For Simula see p. 55, note. Wlu'ii the jiretence is iip[)lied to words rather than to 
 cxmilnct, iHcti to (a frequentative form of (tico) is fomnion in tlie seiise of " I assert, 
 allege." l''inijo, and still more vientLr, emphasises the falsehood of tlie allegation, 
 
cemeral vocabulary. 
 
 .18^ 
 
 j^roper, suns, a, um. 
 
 prnpi rhi, bouji, n. pi. (81, f>) ; 
 
 fortiiiiJU!, ./'. />/. ; res, rei,./". 
 jtrop/ir/, v;it-(;s, -is, w. 
 priiphi'tii\ = iif him J'nyfi'HiiKj the 
 
 fat an', 
 propoftiuii ti>, ill (332, 7, h ; 376) ; 
 
 crart juDpnrfioii to (with vrlm of 
 
 nt/aiiiij), tiiiiti . . . quaiiti. 
 ]}ru/<e.cut('il for, f am, reus Ho ; 
 
 accusor. (306.) 
 proHjH'cf, or prospi'iis, spes, spei, 
 f. (■-<iiii/.) (See note iinaer hope.) 
 proiipcritij, res 2)i'«»sperae, oyseeun- 
 
 (lae. 
 jirofict pniir interi'Htii, I, til)i 
 
 (248) cave<», ere, cavi, cautuiii, 
 
 ?■•/.-</» . . . jimfecfetf (240, Oht<. 1). 
 profi'sfdi/diiisf, J. (136, ((.) 
 profnicf, I (ii'dr), traho, Cre. 
 pronil, superhus. 
 proud of I <ini, glorior, ari. (281 
 
 anfl 282, i b.^. ) 
 proce, I (i)it.r<in.s. ). (259, Ob,s. ) 
 proviili' oi/iiitisf, /, caveo, ere, cavi, 
 
 cautum. ne, i>r, iritli .■<ahnt., dec. 
 proride for, I, pro- video, ere, 
 
 -vidi, -visuiM. (248.) 
 prandt'tl tliot, luodo, niodo ne. 
 
 (468.) 
 prorisio/i, I riHih' no, nihilprovidoo ; 
 
 for. (331, 24, />.) 
 prom<o«.«i (for ormf), friuneiituin, 
 
 n. ; res fruinentaria. 
 2>rovo('(ition, nu(/ioaf,=iio one ]>ro- 
 
 vokiii'i, old. (ihn. (See 332, 8, (ind 
 
 425.)' 
 provoh', I, lacess-o, 5re, -ivi, o/"-i, 
 
 -itum ; irrito, are. 
 pradtui'i', prudeiitia, f. 
 prudence, umtd if, imprutleutia, f. 
 public (si'rric('.s),'=: to tin' people; 
 
 pid)lic interest, respublica ; pub- 
 lic life, see juditiial life, 
 punitih, I, poeufis sumo, 6re, de 
 
 (332, 3, /<) ; am. punished for, poe- 
 
 nas do, dare, with gen. of the 
 
 crime. 
 2)unishnient, poena,'/*. ; snppliciuin, 
 
 n. (hearif); to bring punishment, 
 
 frauJi Cose. (2JD, 3. j 
 
 /)U7'posf, a, propositus, n. (51, h) ^ 
 
 consilium, n. 
 purposehi, consulto. 
 parsae, I, seijuor, i, secutus. 
 /lursait, studiuM-, 11. 
 pat of, I, diflero, ferre, di.stuli. 
 pid to diiitli, J, caedo, f^re, cecidi, 
 
 caesuni. (See aI.so under kill.) 
 put to the test, J, periclitor, ari 
 
 (dep.). 
 put up with, I, tcdero, are (ace). 
 I'l/rrhus, Tyrrh-us, -i, 
 
 (piail before, 7, pertim-esco, dre, 
 
 -ui (oee.), 
 'pinlUies, tfood, virtut-es, -um, f. 
 
 pl. 
 ijaontiti/, vis, ace. vim. (See also 
 
 174.) 
 quarter, I ask for, ut mihi parcatur 
 
 precor, -ari ; mortem or victoris 
 
 iram deprecor ; I obtain, ut mihi 
 
 parcatur impetro, are ; or mihi 
 
 jiarcitur. 
 i/uesfion, I (ask), interrogo, aro 
 
 (231, note) ; it is questioned 
 
 (doubted), dubitatur ; mag be, 
 
 duhitari potest. 
 question, mg, his, the ; to mg, etc., 
 
 ]>res.part. ()/'interrog<: (416, a, and 
 
 346) ; the real question (.-jee real), 
 question, a (matter), res, rei, /'. 
 quiet (subst.), tranquillit-as, atis, /. 
 qaietlg, use adj. (61), securus. 
 quit, [, exce-do, f're, -ssi, -ssum 
 
 (with or without e, ex, 314). 
 quite, not, parum ; vix. 
 quiteuptOfSid with ipse. (Of. 366, a.) 
 
 race (nation), gen-s, -tis f ; the 
 hunuiii race, hominum (69), or 
 humanum, gen-iis, -eris, n. 
 
 rage, ira, /. 
 
 raiil upon, I make a, incursionem 
 facio in (ace. ). 
 
 raise, I, toUo, 6re, sustuli, subla- 
 tum ; an armg, comparo, are ; 
 a cheer, (clamorem) toUo. 
 
 raise up, f, attollo, ere, sustuli, 
 su.tiaDum. 
 
 1 Votwi, " reniiitil ;" auppllcium h used mainly of the punisliment of deatli. 
 
S84 
 
 Cr.NLRAl. VOCAnVl.ARY. 
 
 rullji, I [iiitniiifi.), iiK! cud-lij^o, Ora, 
 -Ir-j^i ; to rtil/i/ {of II iHiiiihcr), 
 f«)nr;irrt'T(!. 
 
 milk (jiitsitioti), Htat-UH, -US, m. ; 
 (of arm If), ord-o, -inis, w. / nnikx 
 {iiiifii/t/i. of a p'irfi/), jKirt-oH, 
 -imii, /. ]tl. ; hi(fh nnd; «ligiiit- 
 as, -atis, /. 
 
 rare (ninnrbifih), siiignlaria. 
 
 rnn'/j/, raro, cdni/i. rarius. 
 
 nis/i, U'.iiwriir'niii. 
 
 7'ii.'</nii:'<M, ti'iiu-rit-as, -atis, /. 
 
 riithi')' {(idr.), jxitius. 
 
 ritt/nr, I /i(i(l, or / iroiihl, iiialo, 
 inallu, iiialui. 
 
 rdi'tnff, I, populor, ari (dcp.). 
 
 rnir/i, f, p(;rvOiiii>a(l (263. iv. ) ; reach 
 Kiirli a jiifrh of, eo (294, O/w. ) 
 prooedd, (^re ; to rcar/i {of letters), 
 I)erferri a<l. 
 
 reoch {ifiliirts), the, jact-us, -us, in. 
 
 rewf throiKjh, or of, J, per-lego, dre, 
 -If'gi, -leotum. 
 
 rcaibi to, I am, volo, velle, volui 
 {moihil); or use flit, in -rus. (14,r. ) 
 
 real {i/iiestion) is, t.'w, illud (341) 
 quaeritip- (218). 
 
 realise, I {emieei re), ixnmw, or ineiite, 
 concipio, t're. 
 
 realiti/, in ; really, re ; re ijisa ; re 
 vera. (274.) 
 
 reap (ijain), I, j)er-cipio, ere ; tlie 
 fruit of fructinu percipio {</eii.). 
 
 rear, terguni, ». ; in the, a tergo 
 (332, I, c), or aversus (See 
 61.) 
 
 reason, a, causa,,/". ; for {hoth) rea- 
 sons (378, i.) ; irhat reason ? (137, 
 1, /) ; the reason ((f); «iuas olt 
 causas or cur (174, a) ; the reason 
 (of) . . . mis (483, (fhs.). 
 
 rebel^ a, qui contra regein anna 
 sunipsit. (176. ) 
 
 rehi I to (/ inrite), = to rehellion. 
 
 rebellion, (reneiral if war after snh- 
 mission), rebelli-o, -onis, f. ; 
 (rerolt), defecti-o, -onis, y! 
 
 rebuke (snbs.), use increpo, are. 
 (416, feandf.) 
 
 recall (to), I, re voce, are (ad) ; to 
 viiwl, in aninuim. 
 
 rereire, /, ac-cipio, ere, -cepi, 
 
 -eeptuni (19) ; ii'ithoiit receirimj 
 
 (426, 420, i. ). 
 recent, rectuis. 
 reckon Uj>, I, enuniero, are. 
 recoijnisf, I, eognosco, ere. 
 recoiicilri/ ii'ith ijon, I am, tecum in 
 
 gratiani red-eo, ire, ii. 
 reconciliation {i/oii ile/aif your), =sfo 
 
 be reconcileil irith. 
 recorer, / (trans.), recupero, are; 
 
 recipio, vre ; recorer inysilf me 
 
 recipio ; recorer {intrans.)fro,n, 
 
 einer-go, t're, -si, -sums, e, ex. 
 recruit, a, tir-o, -onis ; army of 
 
 recruits. (223.) 
 reflect on, T, reeordor, ai'i. 
 refrain from, I. (137, l,./*.) 
 refiije irifh, I take, cou-fugio, 6re, 
 
 -ffigi, ad. 
 refuse, I, nol(». (136, a.) 
 refute, I (an opponent), redarguo, 
 
 ere ; a charije, diluo, dre ; a nie 
 
 renioveo, ere. 
 regard for or to, I have, rationeni 
 
 hal)eo (ijen.). 
 reijiment, use cohor-s, -tis, f. 
 rei/ret, I, me pud-et, ere, -nit. (309. ) 
 reijular emjaijement, a, justum 
 
 praelium. 
 reii/n, I, regno, are. 
 reinforcements, subsidia, n. pi. 
 reject, I, repudio, are. 
 rejoice, I, gaudeo, ere, gavisus. 
 
 "(Intr. 44.) 
 rejoicinij (subst.), laetitia, y*. 
 relates to, spectat ad. 
 relation, a, propinqu-us, -i. m. (266.) 
 reliance on (you), J ]>lace, lidem 
 
 (tibi) habeo. 
 relief, / briny you, tibi suecurr-o, 
 
 ere, -i. 
 reliere, I, sublevo, are (arc.) ; relieve 
 
 of levo, are (ahl. of thimj). 
 relini/uish, I, o-mitto, ere, -misi, 
 
 -missum. (See note under «« 
 
 done, I leare.) 
 reluctant, I am, nolo, nolle. 
 reluctantly ; with, reluctance. (61.) 
 rely on, I, con-fido, t^re, -fisus (282, 
 
 Obs., 244, (•); fidem halieo (dat.). 
 
 1 A " ri'bfl ■ niijiht also 1m' "nut a lide ilrsch-it or ih/icit ;" or tern publicain iiiiflit be 
 BubstitiiU'd for ngem. 
 
oVwVAA'./ /, / '(X\l nUl A R ) • 
 
 .'IS.-) 
 
 . fretuH. (285.) 
 /, i'i!-iiinno(i, Ore, 
 
 reUj'nuj on (ttd).] 
 ri'tiKiin hihinil, 
 
 •iiuii>:;i. 
 
 remain firm, /, ptTinaneo, r-rc. j 
 
 ninniii^, if, rt'stat ut. (See 125, g.) 
 reiiKirhihli', HingnlariH. 
 roiicmlur, /, ineniin-i, -insi'. (i in prra- 
 
 tirr iiieinento ; fur pn'.'i. xtiitj. 
 
 ineniiiieriiii). 
 Jfeiiii, (Ik; lU'Ui-i, -oruiii. 
 remor.v J'vr, / J'lcl, me (234) poc- 
 
 nit-et, f'le, -uit i<j>'ii., 309). 
 rcmoi'f {mil fiomt), /, coininigro, 
 
 are (Intrdiis.), 
 remov>'il from, I am far. (264.) 
 rcnoirii, gloria,/. 
 rejit-atrdlt/, saepe; sacpissime (57, a) ; 
 
 persaepe. 
 repel, I, propnlso, are ; from, ah. 
 repent of, I, me pi»enit-et, -ere, 
 
 -uit. (309.) 
 reply, I, respond-eo, ere, -i. 
 repone,oti\\m, n. ;Ienjoi/,otios\\a sum. 
 rejiroarh, it w a. (260, 3.) 
 repntrJ' .,1, exiatimati-o, -onis, /. ; 
 
 fama, /. ; reputation for, lau-s, 
 
 -(lis,/, (iien.). 
 refjHesf, J vuikr a, peto, f re (127, e), 
 
 posco, ere, poposci (231.) (See 
 
 note under demami) ; I make 
 
 thi>*, hoe {arc.) peto ; mij requent, 
 
 quae peto. (175.) 
 rcipiire, I, me opus. (286. ) 
 reaemhle (doHely), I, similis {xuperl.) 
 
 sum. (256.) 
 rei^entment, dol-or, -oris, m. 
 resident, I am, domicilium habeo ; 
 
 at (312.) 
 7'eKi(fuation, wit/i, aecjuo animo. 
 resist, I, repugno. are. (dat. ) 
 resistance, use inf. pass, of resisto, 
 
 f-re (219), in spite of resistance, 
 
 resisto or repugno (420, ii. ). 
 resolution {desitjn), eonsilium, n. 
 resolution, / pass a, decerno, ere. 
 resolve, /, statu-o, ('ve, -i ; de- 
 cerno, fre, -erevi, -cretum. (46. ) 
 resources, op-es, -um, ./'. 
 respect, observantia, /. 
 respectable, honestus. 
 
 responslhle {for), I make ifon, ratio- 
 
 neiii ii te reposco, f-re {wit/i </en.) 
 nsf, (jui-es, -I'tiH, f. 
 rest {of), the, eeteri ; or (372) reli- 
 
 <ju-u.s, -i (/■// a<irei rnt nt, 60, or 
 
 irlf/t ;/»'«.); rest tf the world. 
 
 (See wo rill.) 
 rest on, I, ni-tor, i, -sus {aid., 282, 
 
 ^d,s.). 
 rest with, to, penes (33 , 15) esse. 
 restore, / {sfrrmjfh.ite.), rediiitegi'o, 
 
 are. 
 resfra. Ill from, to he. { 37, I, k.) 
 risitlt, res, rv'x.f. ; {if toil), fniet-us, 
 
 -U8, m. ; the result is, vas, etc., 
 
 evenit, evenit, eventurum ; with- 
 out ri'snlt. (332, 8.) 
 retain, /, re-tineo, fre, -tinui. 
 retake, /,re-cipio,(''re,-cepi, -ceptum. 
 retire from, I, abeo, ire. (264.) 
 retreat, I, nie reeipio, Ore ; pedem 
 
 refero, ferre. 
 retrieve, I, sano, are, 
 return {suhst.), redit-us, -us, vi. 
 return, I {intrans.), red-eo, ire, -ii, 
 
 -iturus. 
 return kindness, J, gratiam refero. 
 
 {98, h.) 
 revolt, a, defeeti-o, -onis,/. 
 reward, praemium, n. (jirize) ; 
 
 mere-es, -edis, f, ; fruet-us, -us, 
 
 m. (fruit), 
 reward, I, praemiis afficio. 
 rich {of persons), div-es, -itis, 
 
 divit- (dit-)ior, -issimus; of cities, 
 
 opulentus ; the rich (51, a), 
 riches, diviti-ae, -arum. 
 ride past, I, (e(juo) praeter-vehor, i, 
 
 -veetus {trans. ,2^) ; vi.eoa,^talon(j. 
 rid I /I', jugum, n. 
 ridiculed, I am, irrideor, eri. (263, 
 
 iii.) 
 7'ii/ht {suhst.), jus, juris, n. ; I have 
 
 a riijhf, debeo, ere : / am in the. 
 
 rii/ht, vere, recte, sentio, ire. 
 riijht hand, dextra,/. 
 riijhtlji, tiifhtfulh/, jure.' (268.) 
 rii/our, severit-as, -atis, /". 
 rinr/ with, to {echo with), person-are, 
 
 -ui {abl.). 
 
 1 Jure is " rightly " in the sense of " rightfully," '* deservedly ;" rerte, 
 "accurately ;" rite, in accordaufc with rfljgious usage nr ei reuionial. 
 
 '2 B 
 
 ' correctly.' 
 
386 
 
 GEN EN A I. VOCARUr.ARY. 
 
 risliiij, (I, Ht'(liti-o, -oniH, /. 
 
 I'Miinj (frniiiul, tuiiiul-us, -i, m. 
 
 {UM<' /)/.). 
 
 rival , invitl-ua, -i, m. 
 
 river, Hmn ea, -inis, n. ; Huvi-us, 
 
 -i, m. 
 mad, It, via, /. 
 roar oitf, I, vocifcrnr, ari ; magna 
 
 voce conclaino, arc. 
 rock, Haxiiin, «. 
 roll, [ (in! ram.), volvor, i, volu- 
 
 tus. (21, a.) 
 Rome (the city), Roma, ./*. ; (the 
 
 nation) populus KoinanuH. (319.) 
 roof, un/ler my. (331, 4, a. ) 
 round (pre/». ), circa or circum (acr. , 
 
 331, 5) ; round which (standard), 
 
 (juo (008). 
 rout, I, fuiulo, 6re, fiuli, fusum. 
 royal, regius. 
 ruin, iutcrit'-U8, -ua, m. ; exitium, 
 
 H. ; periiici-es, -ei,./! ; chul-es, -is, 
 
 f. ; calamit-as, -atis, f. ; without 
 
 ruin to, u.h<: salviis (ahl. abs. , 424). 
 ruin, [, pesaum do, dftre (Sallust) ; 
 
 ruined, atHictiia (a(Higo). 
 , ruler of, I am, impero, are (dat.). 
 rumour, ruin-or, -oris, m. 
 run forward, /,pro-curro,6re, -ourri, 
 run into, f, incurro, ^vg (in, ace), 
 rural, rusticus. 
 ruxtic (adj. ), agrcstis. 
 
 sack (a city) I, di-ripio, 6re, -ripui, 
 
 -reptum. 
 sacrifice to (rnetaph.), I — I place 
 
 behind, post-habeo. (263, ii. ) 
 sad, maestus. 
 safe, tutus ; incidumis (xafe and 
 
 .'iound) ; salvus (of thimjs an will 
 
 as pcrxons). For adr. use tutus 
 
 or incolumis. (61.) 
 safety, sal -us, -litis, f. ; in safety, 
 
 tuto(adiK); inccdumis (<f<//. , 61) ; 
 
 / wish for your safety, te salvum 
 
 V(do. '(240, (fbs. 1.)" 
 sail, I, navigo, are ; .s7//7 round, 
 
 circumnavigo, are (trans.). 
 
 sailor, naut-a, -ae, m. 
 
 sake of, for the, causa, or gratia, 
 
 with ijen. or pronontinal adj. (289); 
 or with (jerund (396) ; for its own 
 sake, propter se (331, 20, b). 
 sally, a, erupti-o, -onis, f. ; I make 
 
 a, eruptioii'Mn facit), f^re. 
 sally out, I, e rumjto, f're, -rupi. 
 salute, /, saluto, are. 
 same as, the. (84, 365.) 
 satisfactory, (See \'oc. (5.) 
 satisfied with, contentus (abl.. 286). 
 save you, I, tibi salutem affero, 
 
 ferre. 
 say, I, dico, Cre, dixi, clictum ; 
 
 said he (parenthetii) (40) •, it is 
 
 said (44). (See also uiuler speak. ) 
 sayiny, a, dictum (see 61, /), 66); 
 
 the sayinif, illud (341). 
 .>tcale, I, conscen-do, C-re, -di. 
 scanty, cxiguus. 
 scarcely, vix. 
 scatter, to, (intrans.), dissipari. 
 
 (20, 21, a.) 
 scene, / come on the, intervenio, 
 
 ire. 
 scenes (places), loc-i, -orum, m. 
 schemes, insidiae, /"; art-es, -ium,/. 
 .science «;/' war, res militaris. 
 scout, a, expl()rat-or, -oris. 
 .sea, mare, -is, n. ; by sea and land, 
 
 terra marique (note the order), 
 sea-sickness, nausea, /. 
 second, alter (631, <i) ; (for) a 
 
 second time, iterum (633, c) ; 
 
 .secondly, deiiule (634, Obs.). 
 secret from, I keep, celo, are (230) ; 
 
 / make 0. secret of, dissimulo, are 
 
 (with covstr. of s\mii\o, 39). 
 secrt'tly, secreto (adv.) 
 secure (safe), tutus. (19.) 
 .secure, I (make secure), eontirnio, 
 
 are. 
 see, /, video," ere, vidi, visum; (as 
 
 a s/tectator) specto, are ; (in sense 
 
 of perceive), intel-leg(), T-re, -lexi, 
 
 -lectum ; 1 am seen, con-spicior, 
 
 i, -spectus. 
 
 1 Riiiiin is the fall (litt'ial) of a builtling, etc., and is only oc<^asionally used in a 
 nietaphoiioal si'nse. (See 17-19.) 
 
 * Vuhrr, the general wonl, to see ; sfurtitri-, t.t look long at, to watch as a speetaele ; 
 oemure, to see ''Icarly, to discern ; conspicere, to get sight of; uspicere, to turn the eye 
 towards ; intiieri, to gaze at earnestly or steadfastly. 
 
CF.x/'.hwi. roc nn.Ah'V. 
 
 .S87 
 
 sri k/or, /, |K'l-o, ("'rt', -ii, -ivi, -Itiiiii. 
 Kiriii, /, vi(U(»r, »'ri, visiiH (43) ; if 
 
 sniiiM lis Hiihui/i (149, ii.). 
 fir.r, /, f(»m|iielirti-il<t, ('ir, -tli, 
 
 -Hiiiii ; (//// ii/iporttniHif), utor, i, 
 
 U8IIH. (281.) 
 Hililiiiii, niro. 
 
 K>'{t'riuiiiili iii-i , Hiii ti«liu'ia,./'. (300 ) 
 Mt /f'-cinitn>/, iiKxIcstia ; (aiiinii) 
 
 llinilui'.lti (I, -oiiis. _/'. 
 si //-rntitnif, irnnf («/, innMiti'litia, y." ; 
 
 iii/J. imi>i»tt'H.s, ihti'. iin|Mitciitfr. 
 SiHii/i . till , St>iiat-us, -fi«, m. 
 iSriiiifr //iHisi, till. Curia,./'. 
 mini, I, iiiittd, t'lf, niisi, inissutii ; 
 
 III, a<l (6); >iiiiilhiuk[t(i), ivinitto, 
 
 »■!•(' (ad I; i*iiiil /in\ arc(!8.s(», Ore, 
 
 -ivi, itiiiii (ltd-.), 
 xnisi', ijoo'l, pnuleiilia, ./'. 
 tn'iisilih'. or (if miiHc, pru(len-8, -tior, 
 
 -tissiiims ; mii' so siiisihlc as (224, 
 
 Ohn. •_') ; iiili\, prutlenttT. 
 KCiitciiciil to, I (I in, multor, tiri. 
 
 (307.) 
 HI' lit i nil' Ills, I liahl till' xami', eadem 
 
 (366) suntin (54). 
 Hi'fHirnti'iji, Hin^'iili. (380, /;.) 
 Ki'fioiis, jjjrav-is, -ior, -iasiiiuia. 
 KiTftriit. aurjten-s, -tis, /'. 
 Hi'ri'i'fl, till' nation is, ro8pu})lica ger- 
 
 itur, gesta est. 
 scrriri', mllitiiri/, militia, /. 
 si'rrii'f to, I do [ijooo, tlir Ixst, .such 
 
 if(iod), (bene, optiiiie, tain l)ene) 
 
 njereor, r-ri, nieritus, de (332, 3, 
 
 !/) ; but scrriri's to, nierita (61, 
 
 l) in (331, 24, (I), 
 xi't (s/nirs), I, siil»d(», ere {(Int.). 
 sit lit lilirrfi/, I, liltero, are. 
 »H at no III flit, J, eon-tenino, T-re, 
 
 -tenipsi, -beinptuni (see Voe. 10, 
 
 //.); parvi, niininii, niliili, faeio 
 
 or haheo (305). 
 Hct hi'/orr (jioii), /, (til)i) expo-no, 
 
 (ire, -sui, -situni. 
 net fii'i'. to, 1, ineen-do, ere, -di, 
 
 -sum {arc.), 
 si't out, I, pro-fieiseor, i, -feetus. 
 nettle, f, constit-uo, f-re, -ui (trann.). 
 tteveraf (=.som^'), aliquot (inrlerl.) ; 
 
 ^ res/ieiiire, suus with (juisijue. 
 
 (353, 0/«.) 
 severe, giavia. 
 
 HI.I-, «ex-UM, -iiH, m. 
 sliiiie, I (trans.), laliefacto, are. 
 sliaini lissiiess, inipudentia, y'. 
 sliiiri (leitli), I, eoinniunieo, are 
 
 (euni, 263, iv. ). 
 aliatter, I, quHMHo, arc. 
 sliilter, I, tego, t''re, texi, tettiini. 
 slii'ltir, purfugiuni, 11.; under slulti r 
 
 of, tectus (ahl.), 
 slieir, I. (See slioir.) 
 sliield, scutum, n. 
 shift 0/ ii'iir, a, navis longa ; im r- 
 
 rhant ship, iiaviH oneraria. 
 short, ill, denitpie. 
 .•ihort-lireil {fMinir) :rzof' thr short' sf 
 
 time. (303, ( dis, \.) 
 shortlji, brevi. 
 shout, a, eI}im-or, oris, ni. 
 tthoir, I (fioinf out), monstro, are ; 
 
 I show (disfdaif) cleineneii, itr., !■'■, 
 
 I show myself ( /iron) (see 241 |; 
 
 J show sneh eriieltij to, adeo 
 
 saevio, ire, in (ahl ) ; show ijrati- 
 
 tude (98, //). 
 shrewd, :teutu8 {snpe)l. 57, a.), 
 shrink from, I, detrecto, are (ffr.\). 
 sirL; aeg-er, -ra, -rum ; / am siek, 
 
 aegroto, are; his siek-lied, hint 
 
 whilst siek' anil j'ailin;/. 
 side {0/ a rirer), ripa, y". 
 side, I am hi/ i/oiir, tibi pi-aesto 
 
 {(idr.) sum ; on i/oiir, a te 8t(t, 
 
 are, steti. (332, 1., d.) 
 siile, on no, iiustjuam ; nee uscjuam ; 
 
 on this side (of), /tre/i , eis (331, 
 
 6) ; on the other, ultra (331, L'S) ; 
 
 on (ill sides, uiidique. 
 sii/h for, I (rnetii /ill. ), desidero, are 
 
 ' {trims., 22, 23). 
 sii/nal, a. signum, //. 
 site nee, in. (61.) 
 silrtil, I am, taeeo, ere. 
 sin, I, peeeo, are. 
 since, {adr.), postea ; as jin/i., - 
 
 from. (326.) 
 si III fie comhiit, in, comminus. 
 siiiifle^ a, unus ; not a siiujle ; not 
 
 one : ne unus ({uideni. (629, a. ) 
 sink, I (trans.), demer-go, ere, -si, 
 
 -sum; int rails, (meta/ih.), de- 
 
 seend-o, ere, -i : / am sinkimi 
 
 (fnintiinf) under, exaninior, uri 
 
 (ttft/., 267). 
 
388 
 
 Cr.NFKAr. VOCABl'I.AR Y. 
 
 Mixtrr, H(tr<»r, -oriH, 
 
 xlf, /, s^deo, r-ro, H»'*li ; nil down, 
 citii-sido, orti, -hChM. 
 
 silnntioii, sit-iis, -uh, m. 
 
 h'ix., 80X ; nirtk, HcxtUH. 
 
 .'*/:'', miigiiitiiil-o, -iiiis, /. ; and see 
 174. 
 
 stiiiKftf, nialiidicta, ii. fd. (61, /». ) 
 
 xlililii/ifii; /, ii.ir ncoidioiiu OC'-cldo, 
 f'lv., -cidi, -eisiiiii. 
 
 Klarc, Hcrv-us, -i, in.; I <im a nluvf, 
 H«'rv-io, ire, -ii, -Itiiin. 
 
 nfni'trif, 8iM-vlt-us, -utis, y*. 
 
 sin If, '/. (Soil k-i/l.) 
 
 ship, [, donn-io, ire, -ivi, ii, -ituin; 
 in Ills Hlfi'p, use. piWH. part if. 
 
 sli'i'p, soinii-iis, -i, in. 
 
 sleep, n'ltnt nt\ vigiliae, /'. pi, 
 
 sliiiifstonf, a, ^laii-8, -dia, f. 
 
 so, ita : tritfi ivrhs, adeo ; so little, 
 adoo iKHi : onth mljs and tidm. 
 onlfi, tain : .so = itccordinijli/, | 
 itaipie : so 'frent, so mnnif (84) : ' 
 ,'<n sni'ill, tantnlus: so Jhr from, 
 tantuni al>u8t iit (124): so, or (is, 
 lonij ns, ahl. alts. (420, ii.) (See 
 alai) 224, Obs. 2. ) 
 
 .sorieli/, as a. (380, b.) 
 
 soften (mefap/i.), I, exoro, are. 
 
 .Holemnlif appeal, f. (i^ee appeal.) 
 
 Hohlier, mil-ea, -itis. 
 
 solitude {of a place), infrequentia, 
 
 /. 
 Solon, Sol-on, -onia. 
 some (.Home. one), aliquia (360); neacio 
 
 quia (362) ; some, others, alii 
 
 . . . alii (363). 
 Honw {amount of), ali(|uantum {'jen., 
 
 294) ; for some time, aliiiuantnm 
 
 teuiporia. 
 somehow. (363.) 
 .soniet/iintf {opposed to nothine/), ali- 
 
 quid (360). 
 sometimes, nonnun({Uani ; ' inter- 
 
 diim. 
 son, tili-us, -i. 
 
 Siton, nidx ; Itrevi ; jam (328, b} ; 
 
 sooner than he had hopeilzzn/uieier 
 
 (celeriua) than his own hojie 
 
 (277). 
 sore {of fa mine), j^ravia. 
 sorrr^ws, incMininioda, u. pi. ; aeriiin- 
 
 nau (stmnijer). 
 sorri/, I should be, noilMi. (231, 
 
 e.vample ) 
 soul, (not) a, <|iiia(|uani (308, i.); in 
 
 l/irij unna is .'<ometiniis added ; 
 
 ne nnuM (|iiidt>ni. (029, a.) 
 sound i/our pr< ises, I, laiidilma te 
 
 fero, ferre. 
 .sounds inereilible, it, incredil>ile 
 
 dictu eat. (404. ) 
 source of {melapli.), the, use nnde 
 
 (174, e);a soureeof{<jain) (260, 3). 
 sorereii/u {k'imj), rex. 
 .sorenitpiff/, principat-wa, -fia, m. 
 Sjutniard, a, Hiapan-ua, -i ; Spain 
 
 (= the nation), Hiapani. (319.) 
 spare, /, parco, t^rc, peperoi {<lat., 
 
 6) ; for perf pass, teniperatum 
 
 eat (249). 
 speak, I, loquor', i, locutus ; dico, 
 
 f're ; / speak out, eloipior, i ; in 
 
 speakinij, abl. of ijerund. 
 special peculiarity of. (See peculi- 
 ar it y.) 
 speech, a, orati-o, -onia,/.; if to«o/- 
 
 diers or multitude, conti-o, -onia, 
 
 /.; my speech is over ; I have done 
 
 my speech, dixi. (187.) 
 speed, celerit-as, -atia, /. 
 spirit, anini-us, -i, m. ; of more 
 
 than one person, aninii ; irith 
 
 spirit, feroeiter. (See note under 
 
 boldly. ) 
 .npite of, in, in (273, Obs.) ; of your 
 
 resistance, etc. ), abl. abs. (420, ii.); 
 
 in spite of his innocence (224, 
 
 OIkh. 1). 
 spoil, praeda,y. 
 spotless, integer, 
 
 innocen-8, -tior. 
 
 integerrimns ; 
 -ti.sainms. 
 
 J Nminumiuam. " fairly often ; " aitproaolies saeplus. Inferdum, "now and then," 
 more rarely than nonnuiiqudm. Aliiiiiniidn, "on certain (x-easions," opjiosetl to 
 '■ never," almost = mm. 
 
 '•' Dico, 1 "sjieak" or ".say," i.e. I Rive expression to thoughts or views which I 
 liave formed : IntpDrr, I "sjHiak," use the organs of speech to utter articulate; words. 
 Hence dico = I make a formal speacb loquor —. I utter informal or casual words. 
 
af-:.v/:KA r. t 'oca /? r 7 a A' y. 
 
 nsn 
 
 sfiriu'l f>''iii)tt/i, I (trnuH.), Hiib-jicio, 
 ir»!, -jfci, -jfi'tiiin ; intra hm., sub- 
 jiiior, i. (20.) 
 
 M/il'llif. t/lf, VIT, VItIh, II. 
 
 '*l'i'i";l, I ('iiii '*j>i'iiiii/)t orior, Iri, 
 
 ortiis; s/irHiiij/rniH, nrtuH {nhl.); 
 
 urlijiim/li/ x/niiiKjj'runi, oriiiiitliiM 
 
 al>. 
 M/iiir, «'iilc-tti', iiriH, II. ; / fnil M/tiirx 
 
 to, ciiluuriii suImIo, •"•re (ilttt.). 
 Hjtii, II, H[tv.c\i\iit-*n\ -(»riH, m. 
 xtd /'(iiii/ifiirfi), U'^'iiti, III. i>l. 
 Kill ml, I, sto, stiiH', Htt'ti ; Mil ml hi), 
 
 iul-Htn, stiiiT, -«titi (ilitl.); xtiiihl 
 
 riiiiiiil, circuin-Hto, uro, -stfti 
 
 {iir,'.). 
 sill ml for, I, (mil <i ciiiiiliiliidj'or), 
 
 ptito, i'Vii (iirr. ). 
 sliiiiit in unit ()/, I, iiidigf*), i'vv,. 
 
 (284.) 
 stami in i/our vnij, /, tilu dbsto, 
 
 are. (263, i.) 
 Hi'dm/iiril, II , >i\gumu, n . ; vt'xillum.H. 
 utiirt {si't out), J, pi'o-ticiMcor, i, 
 
 -fectus, -fecturuH. 
 fitiiti' (romlitioii), Htut-U8, -us, vi. 
 stall' (ailj.), puldifus. 
 slatesiiuin, a ronsiiinimili', reipuhli- 
 
 cae mibernaiuhve pcritissiiiiUH. 
 
 (301, li.) 
 utaywilh, I [I risil), cnmiiioror, aii 
 
 apud (331, 4, a) ; tleverto, (>re 
 
 (rcjiexive), apud; I sin if at home, 
 
 duini inaneo, ere. 
 ateadilij, turn by did not cease to 
 
 (desisto, fre, -stiti). 
 steadiness, irant of, incoiistantia, ,/'. 
 steal an'iiji, 1 (inlraiis.), dilabor, i, 
 
 lapsus. 
 stern, seviTUS. 
 
 slernlij, I net, saevio, ire. (28.) 
 still {ltd r.), iidhuc ; <^tiani nunc [of 
 
 llie present) ; utiuni tuni (past or 
 
 fid.), 
 stony-hearted, ferreus. 
 storm, tenii»est-as, -atis, f. 
 storm, I (take by storm), expugno, 
 
 are, 
 story, a, res, rei, /. ; and see 54 ; 
 
 there is a story, ferunt (44). 
 siranifehi, nes.'io cjuo paoto. ^See 
 
 169. ) ' 
 stream, riv-us, i, in. : see rirer. 
 
 streuijth, vir-uH, -inni,/. /*/. , stremjth 
 
 of mind, i'onNtantia, /'. 
 at reteh forth, I, |H)r-rigo, fre, r«'.\i, 
 
 •n't'tuni. 
 strike ojl\ I, cxt'u tit), i^rc, -HHi, 
 
 MHUni. 
 
 strikimjiy, gravit»'r. 
 
 sirli'e, I (to), ninur, ari (modal), 
 
 stroi ijhold, ar\, arrift, ./. 
 
 strnik( /III rile ), ittuM (ito, viv) ; I 
 am struck; pfrtntior, i, -iuhhuh. 
 
 study, a, ar-s, -tin, f ; study (of), 
 (-*)){iiiti-o, iiuiH, f 
 
 study, /, «>peruui do (dat.) ; ftmly 
 my Dim interest, niilii (248) lon- 
 Huln. (>rv, 
 
 siihjeel, a, civ-i.s, -is, ///. 
 
 suhmit to, I, per-fjro, -ferre (aer.), 
 
 sulistantial, H«)liduH, romp, niagis 
 HolitluB. 
 
 siiereed in, J (a desiijn, etc.), per- 
 ficio, fre (trans,); eHiciu with ut. 
 (128. i.) 
 
 siireeed to, / (the throne), (regnuni) 
 ex-cipio, (TV, -c»ipi, -ceptuni (17); 
 / siieeeed yon, tibi sue cedo, i-re, 
 -cessi, -eesHuni. 
 
 sueress (98, a) ; irilhout sureess, in- 
 fecta re (332, 8 ; 426). 
 
 sncressfully, prospere. 
 
 siirressire, continuus. 
 
 sncressors (his), ^those who reiyned 
 after (him) ; or those who are to 
 (flit, in -vuH) succeed (him), (See 
 178, 342, n. ) 
 
 succour, J, subvenio, ire (dat. ), 
 
 such ( = of such a kind), talis ; (=.'»o 
 ijreat), tantus ; us, ipialis or 
 quantus (see 86) : such . . . as 
 this, hujusmudi (87). or hie talis, 
 hie tantus (88, Ohs.)-. such as to, 
 of such a kind thnl (108) : such 
 (adi\), such a (with adj.), tani ; 
 talis (or tantus) tani<|ue (88) : 
 where Enylish siihst, is cjjiresscd 
 by Latin verb, use adeo ; 7 show 
 such cruelty, adeo saevio. 
 
 sudden, subitus; repentinus (unex- 
 peeled), 
 
 suddenly, sublto. 
 
 suddenness of, the, = hoic sudden it 
 was. (174. <-.) 
 
 siiffi .• from, I, laboro, are (aid.). 
 
noo 
 
 CENERAL VOCARtfLARY. 
 
 • 1 
 
 \i 
 
 I' 
 
 
 mffii-iiKj ('/'//.), ailliitus (aftligo). 
 .sdjllrii'iif, Justus; satis, ii'it/i <jen. 
 mijllccs. If, satis est. 
 Miii/iii's/, /, auctorsuiii (399, Ohs. 2); 
 
 adtinnieo, ecu (127, /f)- 
 siKjifr.ifioii, (if (ill If), (ine) atictore 
 
 '()//*/. <t/M'., 424).' ' 
 Kiiiciitr, I rovitnlf, niortyin inilii con- 
 
 scisco, Ore, -scivi. (23«, ii.) 
 xiiiininr, aest-as, -atis, y'. 
 suiiniiit. (60.) 
 
 siiiHiiioii, I, voe<», are ; to, atl. 
 sun, sol, solis, 111. 
 niiii/ii/Zif, lux, lu(;is, /'. (mAia itiiii/ he 
 
 iiiiiliil). 
 sii/iiriitr fo, I (ini, ~ / siir/Hiss : {in 
 
 t'oiiniiji, iff.), use 'rnin/iitntt. of 
 
 11(1 j. (278, 279); sii/icrior iiiuiihcrx 
 
 (see iiiiinhir.s). 
 sii/icrsfifldii, superstiti-o, -ouis, /'. 
 •^ii/i/xr, caeua, ./.; fo, ail (331, 24,/;, 
 
 ('.niiiip/c). 
 siip/i/ics, coiuineat-us, -lis, rti. (.s/w;/. 
 
 (iiiil /)!. ) 
 niipfi/i/ iritii, I, suppedito, are. (247. ) 
 siip/iorf {siilisf. ), suhsidiuin, 11. 
 xii/i/mrf (nil/) II nils, I, aniia fero, 
 
 ferre. 
 sii/i/i(>y.(', I, puto, are. (See note 
 
 WWiXar f II lie ij. ) 
 sii/imnc /loircr, iiuperium, n. 
 tfiirc. I (im uv feel, oertoscio; l)ro 
 
 certo lialteo ; / Iku'c iiiikIc sure of, 
 
 fdiiipertuin habeo (188) : lie sure 
 
 fo, fac, cura (ut). (See 141.) 
 siiriHiss, I. supero, are. 
 surprise (osn foe), I, opprinio, fre. 
 sum mlir, I (tniiis.), de-do. Ore, 
 
 -didi. -ditiuii ; (iiif rails.), me dedo 
 
 (si-e 21, /•); / Slim II Icr iiii/ iirnis, 
 
 aiMiia tr.ulii, (-vv. 
 surrou.i'/, f", circiim vciiiro (fniiis.): 
 
 siimnni /(' /, usr firc<. /xirfie. 0/ 
 
 eircmiisto, i\n-((il>/. o/is.. 420, ii.); 
 
 siirrouiiilc I (1)1/ </cj'ciiees). einctus 
 
 ((.•iii<i;o) : fo he siirrouiiilcd (as hi/ 
 
 inifcr), eirt'iuii-limdi, -fusus. 
 .Hurrire, I, supersuiu ; from, e, ex : 
 
 so lou(f (IS i/oii siirrire, te sujter- 
 
 stite (iff'L (iL<., 424). 
 
 nus/icrt, I, suspicor, ari ; / fliink, 
 puto, are (see note underyW/zc//); 
 1 iini (fiecomc) sus/ierfed (f in sus- 
 pieioneni vf'uio, ire ((jeii.). 
 
 siis/)('ii(/, 1, inler-niitto, ere. (See 
 note niid'-'r undone, I Iciire.) 
 
 siisjiicioti, Huspiei-o, -onis, /! .• / /litre 
 110, I siisficrf iKifliiiKj. (54.) 
 
 sustitiii (oiisi'f), I, sustineo, «"'re. 
 
 sivid/oir, (I. iiirund-o, -inis /". 
 
 swiinii out of, to, ef-fundi, -fusua 
 (iihl.) 
 
 sireitr, /, juro, are. 
 
 siree/i, / (iiirfdii/i.), volito, are 
 
 siooril, ghulius, -i, in.; in niefii- 
 ji/iorii'iil .'<i'ii.'<e, anna, n. pi.; t'er- 
 runi, II.; irif/i /irediii/ sii'()r(/,i\'vro 
 et igni ; hi/ sironl iiinl riolciiee, 
 vi et annis : nofe flie order. 
 
 Si/ntetise, Syraeusae, f 
 
 take, I ((I ri/i/), capio, t^re ; hi/ os- 
 
 sdiilt, expugno, are. 
 fdkc (idranfd(/e of, I, utor, i, usus. 
 
 (281.) 
 fdkc care (lidt, I, facio ut. (118.) 
 tdke from i/oii, I, til)i ad-imo, ere, 
 
 -enii, -eniptuin. (243.) 
 take part in, I. (See part in.) 
 tdke })ldec, to, fieri. 
 take prisoner, 1 , eapio, ("^re. 
 take the tame riem, I. (See view.) 
 take np, I (arms), suni-o, ere, -psi, 
 
 -ptuni, = / spend, eonsunio, t're. 
 talk, I, lo(pior, i, loeiitus. 
 falkdtire, lotpi-ax, -aeior. 
 tall, i)rocr'nis. 
 fa k, op-US, -I'l-is, n. 
 taste, a studiuni, n. 
 fdiinf jimi irifli. I, tilt' (•l)jicio, i-re, 
 
 -jeii. (247.) 
 fii.r irit/i. I, iiieuso.' are ; iiisiniiilo, 
 
 ai'i' (di'r. <f person, ij< n. 0/ tliiiiif). 
 ti (le/ier, iiiagist-ei, -ri : fin. form, 
 
 inagi.stra. 
 teae/iiiKj. !lie, i)raei'epta, }il. 
 tear, a, laerinia, f 
 tedious, longus. 
 teit/i of, in the. (420, ii.) 
 tell, f (hid), jubeo, ere. (120.) 
 
 1 Inrii.io. " I tax witli,' 
 to prove t,'iiilty." 
 
 •'clvir^'i' with," liiit infiiniially, not as nivvito with gcii. 
 Iiisiiinilii, " I liiiit (•linrij;fs witJudit prool." Arijuti, " 1 (1— 
 
GENERAL VOCAnVl.ARY. 
 
 391 
 
 tell (a story), I, narro, are. 
 tt'tnpcr, anim-us, i, m. 
 tnii/ientmi'iif, iinlol-e8, -is,/. (See 
 
 note under c/itirarftr.) 
 ttniptc, tenipluni, u. 
 tcti, decern ; {(i-fiicn'), deni. (632.) 
 tctKirioKn of, teiiax. (301, i.) 
 t<'iii/n to. use (fell. With est. (292, iHm.) 
 tent, tabeniaouluiii, ti. 
 t^'mis, c(>ii(liti<»!i-es, -uin, /'. pi, 
 terrihlc, xo, tantiis. 
 terrifori/, fiii-es, -iiiin, m. 
 terror, I <nii hi sitcli, adeo pertim- 
 
 esco, vve, -\i\. 
 ti'xtifii, I (xlioir), declaro, are. 
 than, (juain; or abl. (276.493.) 
 thank you (for), I, gratias (tibi) 
 
 ago, oh or pro. 
 thanks, I return, gratias ago (98, 
 
 />); "thankfi to", propter (331, 
 
 2o, h). 
 that(dfmonstratii'e), ille, a, ud(339). 
 that, ajti'r vfrhn of xayimj (see 
 
 Oratio Ol)liqua) : :=!n onhrthat, 
 
 (,so) that (see Final, Consecutive, 
 
 Clauses). 
 thermieiveK {rejli'xire), se (ipsos) (366, 
 
 ii. ) ; emphatk, ipsi (366). 
 then, turn, tunc ; then and there, 
 
 illico. (See also therefore. ) 
 thence, inde. 
 there, ibi ; illic ; after verb of 
 
 motion, eo, illuc. 
 therejore, igitur ; in narrative, ita- 
 
 que. 
 thereupon, turn. 
 
 thick of, the, ---- the midst of. (60.) 
 think, I (reflect), cogito, are. 
 fliinl, tertius (adj.). 
 thirst, sit-is, -is,/., ahl. siti. 
 thirty, triginta (indech). 
 this, liic, haec, hoe. (337.) 
 thoroui/hly (with adj.), use su})erl. 
 thouifh, use pres. jHirt. (412, Ohs.) 
 thousand (sulist.), mille, pi. milia ; 
 
 to die a thousand deaths, = a 
 
 thousand times, milies (adv.). 
 threaten, I, insto, are ; of things, 
 
 imniineo, ere ; inipend-eo, ere, 
 
 -i (263, i. ); / threaten with, 
 
 minor, ari, niinitor, ari. dcnunt.o, 
 
 are (247); threaten, to, minor, 
 
 uri. (See 37.) 
 
 'iree days {sjiare 
 II. ; (hric years. 
 
 threats, minae, / pi. ,- / mak* 
 
 threats, =: / threatiii (minor). 
 three, trcH, tria ; th 
 
 of J, triduum, 
 
 triennium, //. 
 thrice, ter. 
 throne, regnuni, v., or imporium, 
 
 H. ; / am on the thnuie, regno, 
 
 are. (See 17. ) 
 throni/, niultitud-o, -ini.«, /". 
 throughout, per (ace); fhroui/huut 
 
 (the city), = in the whole (ahl.). 
 throw, I, eonjicio, ("'re, -jeci, -jec- 
 
 tum ; into, in (ace.) \ inys,lf(iit 
 
 the feet of), me projitio, ore 
 
 (267); threw across, iYix']\v\u. tre ; 
 
 throw away, projicio, ("'re; throw 
 
 down (arms), al»jicio, f-re. 
 tie (siiltsf.), netes.situd-0, -inis, /. 
 till, f, col-o, ere, -ui, cultuni. 
 till (440, 441) ; not till (443, <H>s.). 
 time, tcnip-us. -oris, n. .- at that 
 
 time, tum ; e;T temjiestate ; tum 
 
 temporis (294, Olis.) ; at his own 
 
 time (349, (>//,s.) ; in good time, ad 
 
 tem])us (326). 
 timid, timidus. 
 
 to, ad (331, 1) ; in (331, 24). (See 6.) 
 to-day, hodie. 
 tod, lab-or, -oris, m. 
 toiisoine, = of such toil. (303, i.) 
 tonih, sepulcrum, //. 
 to-morrow, eras. 
 tongue, lingua,/. 
 too (also), quoque. (Intr. 1>S.) 
 too, with adjectires. (Sec 57, l>.) 
 too little (of), parum. (294. ) 
 too much, 294 ; il co.<ts, niniio (2C0, 
 
 01 >s.). 
 torture, cruciat-us. -fi.«. m. 
 touch (his heart), /, (aniinuni tjus) 
 
 Hecto, ere; / am toiiehid hy, 
 
 moveor, eri (ahl. ). 
 towards, ad (331, l) ; irifh doinum 
 
 and towns, versus (331, 22). 
 town, oppidum. n. 
 townsman, oppidan-us, -i. 
 traditions, I hand doini, 
 
 f're ; there is a tradition, 
 train, /, exerc-eo, tire, -ui, 
 
 exercito, are ; traiiml in, 
 
 tatus (ahl. ). 
 training, disciplina, /. 
 
 tra<lo, 
 (41.) 
 -itiint ; 
 
 t.:.c;-. i- 
 
im 
 
 GENERAL VOCABVLAkV. 
 
 traitors, cives inipii, 
 Ininntict, /, ago, t'Tc, T'gi, actum. 
 IniiK/nil/Kif, otiuiii, //. 
 trmisporlcd, /am (nu'Miih.), exar- 
 
 (lesco. 6re, -si (lit. Jhcrome hot), 
 trarcl, f, iter facio ; = j/o ahroad, 
 
 lusnigrinor, ari ; travel over, pcr- 
 
 liistro, are (avc). . 
 
 troarhcni, j)erfi(lia, f. 
 treat as a noinrc oj'ifaiii, I. f260, 3. ) 
 treat UijIitJii, /, parvi facio. (306.) 
 treat inlth nueress (heal), I, inedeor, 
 
 rri (tlaf.). 
 treatif, ti, foed-us, -t^ris, u. 
 tree, a, arb-or, -oris, /. 
 tritiP, a, iiati-o, -ouis, /, ; gen-s, 
 
 -tis,/ (V^oc. 2, note.) 
 trijUiKj, (ailj.), levissimus (67, a); 
 
 incon.staii-s, -tissimus. (See 224. ) 
 frlinn{>h (.•<iu'ceH.s), victoria, /. ; (a 
 
 llotiian (jeneral\i), triuinpli-us, -i 
 
 (see note under / triumph) ; in 
 
 triumph, victor (63) ; in the vert/ 
 
 hour of, in ipsa victoria ; tiJiout.'i 
 
 of trinmph, exultantiuiu clamor 
 
 (416, h). 
 triumph, I (metaph.), exulto,' are ; 
 
 triumph over, supero, are (are. ). 
 troop.'i, copiae, /. ; milit-ea, -um, m. 
 iroiihle, without, nullo negotio (269, 
 
 Olts.) ; trouhles, molestiae, y'. y>/. ; 
 
 troublesome, molestus. 
 tnire, a, indutiae, /'. />/. 
 true, verus; it is true, use ille (334, 
 
 iv. ) ; truest patriot (sgo patriot), 
 trust (that), I, con-fido, {"re, -tisus ; 
 
 tru.'<t jfonr word, fidem tibi haljeo. 
 truth, the, vera, n. pi. (63) ; hut in 
 
 truth (o/tposi'il to a .■supposition), 
 
 nunc voi'o. 
 //■// (/(>), /. Conor, ari. 
 Iri/iih/, (dili. ). dill'u'ilis. (67, a.) 
 tumult, tuinultus, -us, ni. 
 hirn, I (trau--<. ), vert-o, »'re, -i ; mif 
 
 hark on jiou, tergum tibi verto. 
 turn, I (intrans. ), vertor, i. Versus ; 
 
 convertor, i (20) ; to, ad ; turn 
 
 hark, ro-vertor, i. 
 turn, each in, pro sequis(iue. (362.) 
 
 turn out, I (prore), eva-do, fere, -si 
 
 (Intr. r»0) ; // turns out, evfnit ; 
 
 usu vf'uit (see note under lot) ; 
 
 turns out .so, eo evadit. 
 twelve hum! red, niille ducenti. 
 
 (627, 628. ) 
 twentieth, vicesinnis. 
 twenty, viginti (indecl.). 
 twiee over, semel atcjue iterum ; 
 
 tu'iee two, bis bina. 
 two, du-o, -ae, -o ; twoa-piece, bini 
 
 (632, a); two-thirds, duae partes 
 
 (636, (■) ; two years (space of), 
 
 bienniinn, n. . 
 
 tyrant, tyrann-us, -i. 
 tyranny, dominati-o, onis, /. 
 
 unable to, I am, necju-eo, -ivi, -ii ; 
 
 non possum. 
 unanimous; unanimously, useomnis. 
 
 (69.) 
 unarmed, inermis. 
 unawares, imprudens (adj., 61) 
 uncertain, it is, incertumest. (166. ) 
 uncle, avuncul-us, -i. 
 nncomplainin\i nnder, patiens (67, 
 
 a), with {fen. (302). 
 unron.stitutional, unconstitutionally, 
 
 contra rempublicam. (331, 7-) 
 uncultivated, rudis. 
 undaunted, intrepidus (for usane, 
 
 with proper noumi and persons, 
 
 see 224. ) 
 under (disijrace), cum. (269.) 
 understand, I, intel-lego, f re, -lexi, 
 
 -lectum. 
 undertake, I, suscipio, i're. 
 u)ulertakin<t, an, inceptum, n. 
 
 (61, b.) 
 undeterred, innneritus. 
 undiminished, = the .same as before. 
 
 undone, I leave, o-mitto,'- Cre, -misi, 
 
 -missum. 
 undoubtedly, ■= indisputably. (64.) 
 une(/ualled, tantus . . . quantus 
 
 (followed by nemo etc.), (See 
 
 490, i. ) 
 unhappy, niis-er, -ei-a, -erum. 
 
 1 Trill 1)1 pill) is lardy used iiietiiiihorically, or in any other sense than tliat of cele- 
 liratiu^ a triii nij'li ii.t, i.e. of a ^'eneral entering,' tlie city in triuini))ial i)rocession. 
 
 "(hiiittd is I ^i\e lip, or ilo not begin, soniething, designedly : intermitto, I leave 
 a'.Diw Jill II time , jiriie'remi/fii, I jiass liy, omit,, iniilesiijnidly. 
 
GENERA L I 'OCA B UI. A R ) '. 
 
 .303 
 
 viihtirmed, incolnmis. 
 
 Hiihi'dlthii, ])estilentus. 
 
 uuheard, indictJl causa [nhl. aim.), 
 
 Kiiion, in, conjuncti. 
 
 iniiirrsal, «.sv' omnis, (69. ) 
 
 Kiijusf, ini(juiis. 
 
 nulurkji, infel-ix, -icior. 
 
 iiiniioml, imiiiotus. 
 
 iniiKiturdI, nefariiis. 
 
 uii/>iitri(}tit\ (lie, mali, i.r iinprobi, 
 
 civea. (60, )iofe.) 
 viijinpnlaritii, invidia, / ; object of 
 
 (see object), 
 unprincipled, neqii-am, -ior, -issi- 
 
 inus (tit. jcnrthleM) : .see 224. 
 uiK/uestionable, it /.v, = it cannot he 
 
 doubted. (See 137.) 
 unrivalled. (368, ii., or 490, i.' 
 until. (Hectill.) 
 untimehf, imiiiaturus. 
 untouched, integ-er, -ra, -rum. 
 unusual, inusitatus. 
 uni'er.sedin, imperitus {(jen. , 301, ii. ). 
 uniriirunf, I am, nolo, nolle, nolui. 
 unwillinifl;/. (61. ) 
 «H»'/.sr, insipiens. 
 unwounded, integer. 
 up to, a<l ; up to thin datj, ad hnnc 
 
 iisipie diem. 
 uphold, I, siis-tineo, ere, -tinui. 
 uproar, tumult-us, -us, tn. 
 urr/e, I {to do), sua-deo, ere, -si; 
 
 insto, are {loth with dat. and ut 
 
 or ne) : urije to {crime), ad (scelus) 
 
 impello, ere, -puli : unje thi-t 
 
 upon you, hoc tibi suadeo ; hujus 
 
 rei auctor tibi ac suasor sum. 
 unjenfl/f, veliementer. 
 use of, I make, utor, i, usus. (282.) 
 Vfie to, I am of prosum. (261.) 
 t(sefulne.s.H, public, use i-erb (376, ii. 
 
 iii.), reipultlicae (plus, maxime) 
 
 prosum. 
 useless, is, nihil prodest. 
 uttnost (to), [ will do my, (juantum 
 
 in me est or erit (332, 5, 7), rvith 
 
 flit, 
 xitmost value. (Seera/?/e. ) 
 
 vain, in, frustra,^ nequidquam. 
 
 valley, a, vall-is, is, _/'. 
 
 value {to), I am 0/ {tliv ulino.''t), 
 
 (maximo) prosum. (261.) 
 value hiijhly, more h>(j/ily, I , niiigni, 
 
 pluris, aestimo, are ; facio, rie : 
 
 I am valued, tio, fieri ; /*//, a pud : 
 
 / estimate you at your proper 
 
 value, tnnti te (pianti del eo 
 
 facio (see 3C5) : / nihic above, 
 
 = prejer to (263. i. ). 
 rtUKpiish, /, vinco, ei'e, vlci, vie- 
 
 tum. 
 variance with, to be at, piiguaie 
 
 cum {abl. ). 
 various. (371.) 
 vast, maxinms ; ingen-s, -tis. (St-e 
 
 Voc. 3, w.) 
 vehement, use adv. velienuiit-er, 
 
 -issime. 
 Veii, Veii, m. jd. 
 venture. J, audeo, ere, ausus ; by ' 
 
 venturiny on .somethiny, audendo 
 
 aliquid. (99, 360, i.) 
 verdict, sententia, ./'. {use pi. -. see 
 
 Voc. 7, n 2) ; I yirerny, dico, ('ve. 
 versed in, jieritus (;/'//., 301. ii.). 
 veiy, this, hie ipse (see 366, b) -.for 
 
 very, with adjs. see 67, a. 
 veteran {adj. ), veteranus. 
 victorious, when he was, victor 
 
 {subsf., 63). 
 victory, victoria, /., vincere. {98, a.) 
 view {op!nion), sententia,/'. 
 view, J take the same, idem, eadem, 
 
 sentio, quod, quae, or ac (366) ; 
 
 a different, aiiter sentif) ac (367. ) 
 viyour {spirit), ferocia, f. : (f>rci), 
 
 vis, ace. vim, y. 
 rile, turpis, e. (19.) 
 vileness, turpitud-o, -ini.-t, /. 
 violatiny, without, ?<.<tf' salvus (424. ) 
 violation of jiartic. oj violo, are 
 
 (417, i.); in violation of contra 
 
 quam (491, b). 
 violenci-, vis, aid. vi, /'. 
 virtue, virt-us, -litis, y! ; '"// virtm 
 
 of, pro (332, 7, !f. ) 
 virtuously, hoaeste. 
 visible, I am, appareo, ere, 
 vint, I, vis-o, ere, -i. 
 
 1 Frustra, "in vain, " of the ]Kr.^rtH who fails u\ his object ; uiiiiiiihiiium, 
 of the attempt which hns prodiK^vd iiu result. 
 
 Ill Willi , 
 
304 
 
 GENERAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 rolrc, vox, soi'ia,/. 
 vohinittrihi, iiltro. ' 
 riitc (nf (lector), siifrrai,'ium, n. ; (of 
 
 jittliji- or si'iiafnr), «»■ iteiitia, ./*. 
 roi/di/f, n;ivig;iti-»», -oius,y'. ; I have, 
 
 or riuikv, <t, iiavigo, are. 
 
 "'",'/''. I, K<'i''>. '■'I'tN g««'*i> gestum ; 
 
 irifh, cimi or coiitiJi. 
 irdi/iii;/, pl()i;it-us, -uh, vi. 
 Vdit (for), I, expecto, arc (ace, 
 
 22);' iriilt to see (174, d : 474 />. ) 
 iro/k {take a milk) in, /, iuambulo, 
 
 an; {olil. ). 
 iroll {i/riK'nil term), iimr-us, -i, m. ; 
 
 Willis {qt'citiiorfortri'.^x), inoenia, 
 
 11. fil., '.iril ili'cl. 
 in nit (of), till' re hnx Iwcn the i/rcatcxt, 
 
 iiiaxime laboratuin ost (ab, 332, 
 
 I, (') : iriiiit oj' caution, etc., see 
 
 caution, itc. 
 want {to), I, volo, /elle, volui. 
 K'ltntin;/ to, I din [I fail), de-siim, 
 
 tvsse, -fui (251) : innitinif in (no- 
 
 tlilnif), (nihil) inihi deest. 
 loar, hollum, n. ; I wake war 
 
 aijainst, l)olluni, or anna, infero, 
 
 ferre (253, ii.); I ilcclate, indico, 
 
 T're (ihiiL): .slilpof war (see sA/y). 
 warfare, militia, /'. 
 war mill, irit/i, vehenienter. 
 warn, I, nioii-eo, ere, -ui, -itxim ; 
 
 adnioneo, ere (127, a): warnimjK, 
 
 (415, a), 
 wade, 1 liiji, popiilor, ari ; vasto, 
 
 are ; iriiste (time), tero, i^re. 
 -irare, a, Huct-iis, -us, m. 
 will/, via, ./." 
 iicak (iiiorallii), levis; weak cluirac- 
 
 tirs (375). " 
 irr(ik.i<'.'<.'<, inlinnit-aa, -atis, f. ; in 
 
 /lis ircakness, inibeci lus (adj., 61). 
 iri'iilt/i, divitiae, y. /il. 
 iniill/ii/ (if ritii's), opulentus 
 ircapon, a, teliini, //. 
 iciiiriiii'ss, lassitiid-o, -inis, f. ; I 
 
 fell irrariiiess of,= am wearij of. 
 irearij, / (//v/z/.s. ), fatigo, are : I avi 
 
 wear led icitli, langiieo, ere de 
 
 (332, 3, e), or e, ex. 
 
 wenrif of, I am, me taedet, ere, 
 
 pertaesum est. (309. ) 
 iceatlwr, ike, tenipest-as, -atis, f. 
 week, suhstilufe a/i/iroximate numher 
 
 of dnifH ; at the end of a, irit/iin 
 
 a, = after, before, the 1th day. 
 weep over, I, illaeriino, are (dat. ). 
 iveif/ht, I have ijreat, no, niultinn, 
 
 nihil, valeo (apiid.) (331, 4, d.) 
 tcelfare, sal-us, -utis,/. 
 loell (adv. ), bene ; well enouijh^ satis: 
 
 / know well, eerto scio ; well 
 
 knoivn, satis notus. 
 well-d imposed to, bene-vohis, -volen- 
 
 tior in or erga, (266, Obs.) 
 tvell-earned, meritus. 
 well-trained, exereitatus. 
 well-winhei's, (176. ) 
 what. (167 ; and see who.) 
 trhen (interroi/at. ), (juando (167, ii.): 
 
 conj., cinn (quuni). (See Tempo- 
 ral Clauses, I. ) 
 ivhence, unde; interroijat. (167, ii. ); 
 
 correlat. (89). 
 whenever. (434, and Ohn.) 
 tvhere, ubi ; where . . . from 
 
 { = whence), unde ; = whither, 
 
 quo ; where in the world? ubi 
 
 gentium. (294, Obs.) 
 whether . . . or. (168 ; see also 
 
 171, c. d, and 467. ) 
 which (see who): which of two, uter 
 
 (167, i.). 
 xvhile (conj.), dum. (180.) See 
 
 also Temporal Clauses, II. 
 while, for a, paulisper. 
 whither, quo. (167, ii.) 
 who, which (that), what (relat ), qui, 
 
 quae, quod. (See Relative.) 
 who, nhich, what (interroijat.), (juis, 
 
 quae, quid (siibst.) ; cpii, <juae, 
 
 quod (adj.). (See 167, i. ) 
 whoever, quiounque : cffen ex]). by 
 
 tense if verb. (434, ifhs.) 
 whole, totus, a, urn ; whole of. (60. ) 
 wholly (61): (to despair), de suninia 
 
 re, i.e. of our most important in- 
 terests, 
 why, cur, (juamobrem (167, ii. ). 
 
 (See also 174, a, and note.) 
 
 1 lUli'ii, Ixfore ro(t'ivi!i}f, witliout waitiiin for, jirovocntion, solicitntidn, etc: sua, 
 »(('((., etc., KpniUe, of ouf's own iiii|)ulsi', without external pressure or advice. 
 
GENERAL VOCAflUI.ARY. 
 
 .Sl)5 
 
 'V- % 
 
 wicked, the, improbi. (60, and Ho/e. ) 
 mrkeilnf.sH, neciuitia, f. (See note 
 
 under crime, ) 
 vndoii), vidua. 
 will, ivjaiiiKt mil, me invito, ahl. 
 
 <thn. (420, ii.) 
 wiltiu(j, I am, volo, velle, volui. 
 loiit, I (obtain), conseijuor, i ; win 
 
 the da II, I, vinco, f're. (Intr. 40. ) 
 iciiid, vent-U8, -i, m. 
 winq (of armii), cornu, n. ; on the, 
 
 332, I, c. ) ' 
 winter (adj ), hil)ernu8. 
 ti'inter, J {jia,sH the winter), hiemo, 
 
 are. 
 wisdovi, sapientia, /. 
 wiw, sapien-s, -tior, -tissinius ; all 
 
 the UHM'fit men. (376.) 
 winh, I, volo, velle, volui : could 
 
 hare w:,shed{1^9.i-): I do not toixh, 
 
 nolo, nolle nolui. 
 wish/or this, J, lioc opto, are : volo, 
 
 velle. 
 wishes (aijainst yovr), = will. (424. ) 
 trith, (See 8, and 332, 2 ;) weight 
 
 with (see weiijlit). 
 withdraw-from, I, me recipio, Cre, 
 
 e, ex. 
 within, intra (331, 12); oftime,Z26; 
 
 within memorji, j)Ost (331, 17, //): 
 
 / <im irilhin a little o/(137, l, h). 
 without (prep ), sine ; more often 
 
 exp. bjialtl. ahs. (332, 8, and 426); 
 
 ita ut (111) ; quin (132, b); with- 
 out a nil (360, jiote). 
 withstand, I, ob-sto, are, 
 
 ((/(//., 244, h). 
 woman, a, nnili-er, -eris. 
 ironder, J, niiror, ari. 
 irondcr/ul, niiriticus. 
 ■ward, a, ver))uin, n. ; words, 
 
 (66.) 
 word (0/ honour), Hd-es, e\,/. 
 work, a, opus, -eris, n. 
 work upon (jiourj'iitiiiiis), /, tlecto, 
 
 ere, Hexi, Hexuni. 
 tcorld (see 16, b) ; all the world, 
 
 nemo est fjuin (80); in the, in the 
 
 whole, world, usquam : the rest of 
 
 -stiti 
 
 dicta. 
 
 the, ceteri homines ; ceterae Ren- 
 tes. 
 worse, pej-or, -us ; deteri-or, -u.s ; 
 
 for the, in. 
 icorst foe, enemy, superl. o/'ininii- 
 
 cus. (26ri.) 
 worth seekin<i, gerundire o/"appcto, 
 
 t^re. (393. ) 
 worthless, ne(iu-am, -ior, -issinms ; 
 
 st'c 224. 
 Worth !i of dignus. (286.) 
 woulii that. (162.) 
 u'ounl, vuln-us, -eris, ;/..• national, 
 
 reipublicae. (68.) 
 wound, J, vulnero, are ; iroundrd, 
 
 sauoius (adj.); I a 1,1 irouiidcil, 
 
 vulneror, ari ; saucior, ari (sc- 
 
 verelii). 
 wrench from (you), I, (tibi) extor- 
 
 queo, ere, -torsi, -tortuni. (267.) 
 write, I, scri-bo, ere, -psi, -ptuni ; 
 
 write you woril, ad te seribo, 
 wrou<i, a, injuria,'/.; I do irron.j, 
 
 pecco, are ; ivronii-doiiii/, peecare 
 
 (98, a). 
 
 yi'ar, ann-us, -i, w. ; (space of) two, 
 
 three, years. (See tiro, thri-i\) 
 yes (see 162) ; / say yi's, aio, pres. 
 
 part., aien-s, -tis. 
 yesterday, heri ; of ycstinlay, hes- 
 
 ternus (adj.). 
 yet (nevertheless), tanien ; v«'ro (i-rn- 
 
 phatic). 
 yet, not, nonduni. 
 yii'ld (to), I, cedo, f-re, cessi (dot.), 
 you, tu, pi. vos. (See 11, a, b ; 
 
 334, i.-iii. ) 
 younij, juvenis, junior. (61, a, 
 
 note. ) 
 your, your own (sini/.), tuiis : (pi.), 
 
 vester (see 11, c) ; that of yours, 
 
 iste (338). 
 yoursitf (finphatic). ipse (366) ; (rr- 
 
 fcriri'), te, vos (366, ii.). 
 youth (time of), adole.sciMitia, y! .• //* 
 
 viy (63.) (See also 61 a, note ) 
 
 zeal, studium, n. 
 
 1 lujuriu is never used for "injury" in the sense of mere hann or ditmiiye: this 
 must Jje exi)res8eil by damnnvi. 
 
INDKX OF SU15JJCCTS. 
 
 Aiii.vi'iN K. wliy s(»c:ilkMl, main use 
 of. 211 : syiilax of, xxxiii.- 
 \\x\. : Ahsoliiti', liii. : of 
 -/'/r/,/, liitf. 41 ; 8, o ; 267 : 
 of hist rii mint, 8 ; 267 : of 
 Vint Ion I'miii, 9, /' ; 263 ; 314 : 
 local, 272 ; of iiliirc nf irlih-fi, 
 311 sr////. ; of thill' lit ir/lir/l, 
 9, II ; 320: ui tiiin' irit/iin ir/iir/i, 
 325 : of iirri)iii/)iniiiii< lit, 269 : 
 (if i/iHilltif, 271 : i>f roiii fill risoii, 
 275 ; of iiiiiisiiri' in conipai ison, 
 279 : of /ir!n\ 280 : iifter 
 (H'ftain adjectives, 265, 285 : 
 after certain VcHks, 281-284. 
 
 Al>stra(!t, •«'(' Noun. 
 
 AccisAi'iVK, why .so called ; main 
 \ise of, 209 : syntax of, xxvii. 
 and xxviii. : is the only ease 
 of the direct o])ject, ' 228 : 
 of time, ihiriiiij, or j'or, ir/iirfi, 
 9, II ; 321 : of motion to, 9, f> ; 
 236; 313 : double, 229, (>/>■•<.; 
 230 : of neuter pronouns, 231 ; 
 237 : of /I'irt iiffirti'd, 233 : 
 cognate, 236-238 : predicative, 
 239 : exclamatory, 239, tiotf. : 
 of HjHiri' roi'i'ri'd, <li/it(nii'P, 
 (limiiixioii, 318 : with infini- 
 tive after verhs of sni/liiij, .scr 
 Oratlo ()l)lii/ii(i. 
 
 Active, .srii N'erbs. 
 
 Ad.ikctiv.vi. i;lause, in analysis, 
 Intr. JSl : substituted for sub- 
 stantive, 76; 176 : place of , in 
 J^atin Sentence, stc Order; 
 particij)le for, 406 ; constr. of, 
 sri' Relative Clauses: phrase, 
 nuianing of, Intr. (»S, ii. 
 
 Al>lK("nvK, Intr. 7-l> : agreement 
 of, .sri' Agreement : kinds of, 
 lutr. IM) : place of, in Latin 
 Sentence, sci' Order : used as 
 substantive, Intr. 8*2 ; 60-55 : 
 its uses as predicate, and as 
 attribute distinguished, Intr. 
 
 7- : superlative and compara- 
 tive of, ottcn merely intensivt^ 
 57: represi'uting Kni,disli "of," 
 58 : for ])aititive substantive, 
 60 : adverbial use of, 61-62 : 
 often placed irit/iiu relative 
 elau.se, 69 : how combined 
 with ])roiier niimcs, 224 ; witli 
 names of towns, itc, 317 : 
 in aid. abs., 424 : with cognate 
 ace, 237 : with ilat. of n.<ii/f, 
 260, 3 and ( ths. ; with abl. of 
 iii'i'tim/iiiiiimi'iit, 269 ; and of 
 i/iiii/iti/, 271, Olis. : with iji'n. 
 of i/iiii/ifi/, 303, ii. ; and see 
 under these eases : verbal, sre 
 (Jerundive: numeral, Ixvi. 
 
 Al)VKi:i{, Intr. l()-l!l ; in analysis, 
 Intr. 70 : plaieof, in Latin Sen- 
 . ttiuce, .s( ' ( >rder : ad jective for, 
 
 60: tuined by adverbial phrase, 
 Litr. lit, 64: correlative, 89: 
 interim igativc, 157, iioti: : for 
 I'lnglish adjective, 282 : in or. 
 old., 518; numeral, 533-4: 
 notes on adveibs of Time, 328. 
 
 Adverbial clauses, classes of, Intr. 
 S'J-Sf) : phice of, in Latin 
 Sentence, .si-c Order : partici- 
 ple for. 40C, i. 
 
 Adversative clauses, Mee Adver- 
 bial clauses, classes of : con- 
 junctions, Litr. nC), c. 
 
 AHirmative answer, 162. 
 
 Age, how expressed, 327. 
 
 Agent, case of tlus, si-c Abl. and 
 Hat. : secondary, 267, <>hs. : foi- 
 words denoting agents, ftnc. 
 Noun. 
 
 Agreement, general rules of, 1-3 : 
 of Relative, 12 ; 65-66 : of 
 Subject and \'erb, iv. ; of 
 adjectives, 47-49 : of substan- 
 tives in apposition, 221 : of 
 predicate after apposition, 226. 
 
 Alternative, wc Disjunctive. 
 
IMDEX OF scrnyz-cTS. 
 
 31)7 
 
 Aiiil)iguity, larc in Latin, 62 : 
 
 avoidt'tl 1)V cli,iii;;o of voici'. 
 
 216, '>/w. : ill iiso of (iiriiiid 
 
 iiiid ( !i!niii(livc. 387 ; 399. 
 Aiititlii'sis, Kt'c ( 'oiitrast. 
 Answiiis t(» (|ii('Hti()iis, 162. 
 Aori.st, 177, h ; mid si-r 'I'uiisi', 
 An-osiTioN, xxvi. ; liitr. (>.S ami 
 
 <».'); 3; 317. 
 Articli', KiiL,'li.sli, .soliu'tiinrs iv- 
 
 prt'Sfiitud l)y !■■<, l//< . 348. 
 Attraction, of ri'lativc, 83 : of 
 
 demonstrative, 83, Ohs. ; 347. 
 Attiiliiite, meaning of tlie ti-iin, 
 
 Jntr. S ; (Iik/ si-c .Adji'i-tive. 
 Auxiliary veil>s, Nrr \'erl»s. 
 
 Calendar, the Roman, Ixvii. 
 (.'ases, remarks on, xxv. 215 ; (///(/ 
 
 see Nominative, ete. 
 Causal clauses, Intr. N.S, 4; Ixi. : 
 
 with (/until, 430 : with </iii, 
 
 609 ; 512. 
 Clause, meaning of the term, 
 
 Intr. 73, //. : kinds of, Intr. 
 
 78-Kr). 
 
 Collective, scf Noun. 
 
 Commands, hew expressed, xviii. : 
 in or. oh/., 522. 
 
 Commanding, verlis of, sec Verbs. 
 
 CoHPAHATlVK clauses, Intr. N.S, 7: 
 syntax of, Ixii. ; two classes 
 of, 489 ; (1.) with indicative, 
 490-4, and (II.) with sul)junc- 
 tive, 495 ; expressing /iropor- 
 Hon, 497. 
 
 Comparative degree, 57, /> ; 275-9 : 
 in final clause, 102 : with iiiiis- 
 i/iK', 376, iii. : doulile, 493, 
 /<■■<. '2. 
 
 ('ompound \erlis. .^d N'erli. 
 
 CoNTKSsiVK clauses, Intr. S.S. 6 : 
 syntax of, 1\. : with (/iiiuii, 
 431 ; witl- i/iil, 509 v* 77. I 
 
 Concords, >( c AgroeL-'eiit. • | 
 
 CoNOiTKtNAL, clauses, Inti'. S.S, 5 : I 
 syntax of, Ivii.-ix. : in(»ods 
 in, 451 ,sy'7</. : tenses in, 454 
 .s7'77. ; exceptional consts. , 
 460-3, 475 ; ii/.s!, etc.. 464-6 ; 
 .siiY, .'<i'ii, 467 ; (/inn, iikx/o, | 
 468 ; in or. oA/. , 469 .s« 77. ; - 
 after 11/ consecutive or a de- 
 
 pendent interrogative, 475 : 
 suppressed, 149. 
 
 CuNJi'NrriuNs, Intr. 'J.")-'J7 : di 
 \ide(i into (I) Co-ordiuatini.' 
 and ("J) Suhordinating. hitr. 
 "),'{-,"),"»: Co-ordinating, classes 
 anil list of, Intr. .")('); gnater 
 variety of, in Latin, Intr. .")7 : 
 Suliordinating, I'lasses and 
 list of, Jntr. ')'.(: donlde uk ail- 
 ing of "if, " " wliether, " 
 "or," 171: intinitive in]ila(e 
 of. 31, note; (/ni, 78, 79. 
 
 Co.NSKci-riVK, clauses, Intr -S.'S, 2 : 
 const, of, with nf, nt non, \\ . ; 
 with (jni, 503 : <listiMguisli((' 
 fi'om jiiKi/ and rotn/fHid/'rt , 
 106-108: lu'gatives in, 109: 
 tense of suhj. in, 112 116. 
 
 CfUijunetive, i^ce Sul)juncti\ e. 
 
 Contrast, i)lace in sentence of 
 words in, Intr. 107: maiked 
 l»y j)lace of relative clause, 
 75 : expressed Ity use of |»er- 
 sonal pronouns, 349, iv. ; by 
 idi^ni, 366, ii. ; by iei»eated 
 a/ii/x, 370. 
 
 Co-ordination of Sentences, Intr. 
 74-77 : ■'<('<' <(/'<o 406, ii. 
 
 Copulative verbs, .sw' Verbs. 
 
 C0KKKLATIVE.S, Ex. xii. 
 
 Correlative pronouns, .sec Pro- 
 luiuns, kinds of. 
 
 Dativk, why so called, main use 
 of, 210: syntax of, xxix.- 
 xxxii. : the case of f/ic person 
 iiitcir.itci/, aftei- certain classt's 
 of verbs, 242 ^777. : com 
 pleting sense of intrans. 
 verbs, Intr. 'Mi ; 5 : with 
 compound vei-lis, 251 3 : with 
 adj. anil adv., 254-6 : for 
 possessive pron. or gen., 257: 
 of the ("/( nf, 258 : of /•<.>«// or 
 dim, 259-60. 
 
 Denuuistiative, .sec Pronouns. 
 
 Deponent, .sec. Verbs. 
 
 Ditl'ereuce, litnv expressi'd, 9192: 
 by ii/in.-i, 387: ■^70-1 ; (iin/ x-r 
 Compiirative ChiUses. 
 
 I >isjunctive, conjunctions - - (.'on 
 
398 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 junctions : questions, «p*? Ques- 
 tions. 
 I)iity, liow expressed, 198. 
 
 KlIijMis, of //,', 126 : of a (condition, 
 
 149 : of ;i (|U(;.stion. 161. 
 iMiiplirisis, cxpnissed l»y use of 
 
 pronouns, 11 : in (piestions, 
 
 156 ; it ml xcr Oi'der. 
 Knclitic, meaning of term, Intr. 
 
 IKS, //. 
 
 Factitive, wr Verl)8. 
 
 FiNAi, (tlauses, Intr. 83, I : const, 
 of, with Hf and dc, xiv. ; with 
 ([III, 802 : secjuenec of tenses 
 in, 104. 
 
 Fractions, 635. 
 
 Fit'i(iU'ntative clauses, 434 and 
 0/;.s'. ; 192 ; 613. 
 
 Frii'itK, tense, 177, (f, and Ohx., : 
 uses of ttiree tenses, 189- 
 191 : sulijunetive, in consecu- 
 tive chiuses, 114 ; when used 
 after verl>s oi fvur'nvj, 139 ; in 
 dependent questions, 173, iii.: 
 infinitive, 193, iii.-v. ; 37-8: 
 participle, 418 : fut. perf. for 
 iniperat. , 146. 
 
 (iKMTiVE, why so called, main 
 use of, 214 : syntax of, xxxvi.- 
 xl. : possessive, and adjec- 
 tival, 287 .s('77, : used to ex 
 I»ress "property," "duty," 
 " mark," 291 : partitive, 293- 
 298 : Subjective and Objective, 
 299-302 : of Qmtlitji, and De- 
 fiiiitioii, 303, 304 ; nee a!so 68, 
 69 ; 87 : of prln', 306 : of the 
 puniilnnmt, 307 : with imper- 
 sonal verl)s, 309, 310 : with 
 certain classes of verbs, xl. : 
 of pliifc (it ir/iirh (so called), 
 311 .s('77. 
 
 Ciuographical expressions, Latin 
 usage in, 222 ; 304, i. and ii : 
 (tinl sec Place. 
 
 C.KKUNi) and r.KHiTNmvF., in nom- 
 inative, xlix. ; in oblique 
 cases, 1. : su])ply ca.ses to sub- 
 stantival infinitive, 99 : ex- 
 press huty and Necess ty,198, 
 
 iii. ; 199 : genindive as a ]»res. 
 partic. paissive, 417 ; in depen- 
 dent (piestioiis, 172, iiuti'. 
 
 Historic, tenses, mcc Tenses : 
 present, 179 : infinitive, 186. 
 
 Impkrativk nu)od, 147. ii., amf 
 note ; in commands and 
 prohibitions, xvii. 
 
 Imperfect tense, 177, f> ; uses of, 
 183-186 : subj.,186 : in eonse 
 cutive clau.ses, 113 : in depen- 
 dent questions, 173, ii. : see 
 <ilso (h-ntio (>/>/li/iia. 
 
 Impersonal, passive, of intransi- 
 tive verbs, Intr. 42 : 6 ; 217 
 and (fits ; of some modal 
 verl)s, 219 : impers. verbs, 
 Intr. 4() : with ace. and inf., 
 46 : with »<-clause, 123-126 : 
 with inf. or iit, 202 : cases 
 with, 234 ; 309-10 : the impers. 
 const., "it seems," not used 
 in Latin, 43, 46, />. 
 
 Indicative, mood, 147, i., and 
 note: for English subjunctive, 
 163 : inserted in oratio ohliqna, 
 449 ; 623 : and nee under the, 
 various kinds of clauses. 
 
 Infinitive, mood, 147, iii. : why 
 so called, 94, n. 1 : as substan- 
 tive, xiii. : never fual, 100, 
 101, n. : English, turned by 
 substantival clause, 117 seq(i. : 
 after some verbs of command- 
 imj, 120 : English, after inter- 
 rogative, exp. by subj., 172 : 
 historic, 186 : tenses of, 193 : 
 fut. 37, 38 : compared with 
 Gerund, 384, 386 : aud see 
 Oratio Obliqua and Modal 
 Vei'bs. 
 
 Inflexion, Intr. 14, 15 : of adj., 
 Iiitr. 9 : its influence on orilcr 
 of words, Intr, 86-7. 
 
 Interjections, Intr. 28. 
 
 Interrogative, particles and pro- 
 nouns, list of, 167 ; aud see 
 Pronouns : clauses, distin- 
 guished from adjectival, 176 : 
 for English nouns, 174 : coast, 
 of, see Questions. 
 
INDEX OF sun J EC TS, 
 
 tm 
 
 LoCATIVK case, 212 ; xli. 
 272, (Vw. ; 306, mit. 
 
 ami 
 
 out iiiunii, 318, O/ax. 
 with (/iii.siiHc, 377. 
 
 on 
 
 liiijil, 
 
 Metaplioiiual expniHaions, not to 
 be literally translated, 17 : 
 (jualiHeil hy ({itiddin, 361, ^ths. 
 I and 2 ; by *-•(/(//, etc. , 496. 
 
 Modal, xec Verbs. 
 
 MoodH, I'eniarks on, 147, ant I note : 
 and .see Indicative, etc. 
 
 Motion, to, /mm, etc., ,'«■(' Accusa- 
 tive and Ablative. 
 
 Necessity, how expressed, 199, 
 ami note ; by gerund or gerun- 
 dive, 386-8 ; 390-3. 
 
 Negative, after ".w//," expressed 
 by neyo, 33 : in Hnal clauses, 
 103 ; in consecutive, 109 : 
 second, in indicative clauses, 
 110 ; in pi'ohibitions, 146 : 
 virtual, 130 : negat. answer, 
 162. 
 
 Noutoi, adjectives, for abstract 
 nouns, 61, c. : pronouns, see 
 Pronouns. 
 
 NoMlNATlVK, why so called, 208 : 
 syntax of, 216-220 . with inf., 
 see Modal Verbs. 
 
 Noun, substantive and adjective, 
 Intr. 5-9: substantive, tlivided 
 into Proper and t'ommon. 
 Collective, Abstract, Intr. 29 : 
 adjectives used for, Intr. 31 ; 
 60-6 ; 266 : abstract nouns, few 
 in Latin, 417, Ohs, ; expressed 
 by neuter adj., 61, c. ; by inf., 
 98, a ; by interrog. clause, 174; 
 by impers. const., 218; l>y 
 partic. or gerundive, 416, 417 : 
 English verbal, 94, h. 2; ex- 
 ' pressed by (junmlniis, 131 ; by 
 nnpers. const., 218. Nouns 
 denoting atfcnts, and chiHsex 
 of persons, translated by 
 adjectival clause, 76 ; 176 : 
 Latin nountj in -tor, -nor, 
 compared with f^nglish in -er, 
 342, note. 
 
 Numerals, Ixvi. ; cardinal, 627-9 ; 
 ordinal, 630-1 ; distributive, 
 632 : follow pla.'<, etc., with 
 
 Object, direct, Intr. .'W , 4 ; 228 ; 
 and ser Accusative : indirict, 
 sev Dative. 
 
 OH AT lit <>/iiJ(J('A, ace. and 
 inf., v.vi. : subordinate dau.ses 
 in, Ivi. : conditional clauses in, 
 lix. : reported speeches, l.w. : 
 relative in, 77, 78, eml. 
 
 Onler of wonls in Latin Sentence, 
 Intr. S(J-99 : J(Mi l(»7 : of 
 clauses, Intr. lOOiO;"): of 
 correlative clauses, 86 : of de- 
 pendent interrogative clause, 
 176, end: of M'ords in apposi- 
 tion, 224, Ohs. I, //.: enijAiatic, 
 instead of relative clause, 82 ; 
 cf 166. 
 
 Parthiim,k.s, 14 ; Hi. ; for sub- 
 ordinate clauses, 16 ; 406 : for 
 adja , 407 : for substs., 61 ; 
 408 : syntax of presei't par- 
 ticiple, 410-16 ; of past par- 
 ticiple, 416-17 ; of fut. partic, 
 14, c. ; 418 : "those who" 
 expressed by partic, 73, 74 : 
 sul)stitute for partic. of .sinn, 
 224, Ohs. I : pass, partic. after 
 0]ni.s est, 286 : partic. in dm, 
 see Gerun<live. 
 
 Particles, why so called, Intr. 15. 
 
 Partitive, substantive, adjective 
 for, 60 : gen., sec (Jenitive. 
 
 Parts of Speech, Intr. 1-4. 
 
 Passive, see Verbs. 
 
 Perfk<'T, tense, 106 ; 177 and 
 Olts. : uses of, 187 : conijtoiind 
 formed with Ar//yro, 188: peif. 
 subjunctive in consecutive 
 clauses, 113 ; in ]>roliil)itions, 
 142 ; in depcncbnit (piestion, 
 173, i. : ])erf. inf., 193, ii. ; 
 after fiossum, 196, Ohs. ; see 
 also (fratlo Ohl. 
 
 Permi-ssion, how expressed, 197. 
 
 Personiticatiojj of a country, to 
 denote its inhabitants, rare, 
 319. 
 
 Phrases, adverbial, expressed by 
 single Latin adverb, Intr. JU 
 
UK) 
 
 /NP/'.x ('/•• s('/iy/-:c7s. 
 
 vcrlt.il. i»y Hiii^^lt! 
 
 \Ii. 
 
 used 
 192 ; 
 
 lldW 
 
 .iliil ')•_' ; 64 
 vctl>, 25. 
 
 IMiiiT, liuw ('X|tr«!S,sc(l, 
 iilf^i) Aid. .111(1 .Ai'c. 
 
 ri.lM'KIM'KCI', tflisc, 177, /'. 
 to tixprti.ss /'ri'i/m iirif, 
 434 : of s-.ilijiiiictivi!, 
 rcpnvst'iitiMl ill coiiscciitivc 
 claiistis, 115 ; its ustj in or. 
 (>l>/., 471-3. 
 
 PosHi'ssivc, si-c ( Ii'iiitivf or I'ro- 
 
 lloilllS. 
 
 I'ossiliility, liow cxprcsst-d, 196 ; 
 200 ; not l)y j.,'friiiiil or ;,'iw- 
 iimlivi! except occiisioiiiilly 
 witli iK'H itivtjs, 394 : si',' (i/so 
 Modal ViM'lts 
 
 potential, iiioi)d, ■'«'<' Sul)jnnctiv(! 
 usoil indt'piiiidontly : tut. inf., 
 193, V 
 
 I'redieatc;, in analysis, si'c Seii- 
 teiici! : adj. as, Intr. N ; its 
 relation to snliject, Intr. II : 
 enlargement of, I;>tr. (»!J-7<>. 
 
 riiKi'osirioNS, Intr. 'JO'Jt: as.siat 
 case-sy.stein, 205 : wlien neces- 
 sary \vitli aid., 234 ; 270 ; 273, 
 Ohs. ; 314 ; with ace., 313 : 
 general nsinarkson, 329 : with 
 (icr., 330-1: with ahl., 330; 
 332-3. 
 
 Prksknt, tense, 177, a. ; uses of, 
 178-182: English, future for, 
 190 : of .sul)j,, in prohibitions, 
 142 ; jussive, 144 : of inlini- 
 tive, represents pres. and im- 
 perfect indicative, 35, n. ; 193, 
 i. ; for English incorrect per- 
 fect, 153, nhi. ; cf. 196, O/w. ; 
 anilni'(> ( >r. OhI. ; pres. partic, 
 see Participles. 
 
 Price, see Ablative and Cienitive. 
 
 Primary, sen Tenses. 
 
 Prohibitions, how expressed, 
 xviii. ; ill o;-. old., 622. 
 
 Piu)\oi:\, fntr. 10 and ;^2-34 : 
 Personal and Demonstrative, 
 11 ; xlv. : Reflexive and 
 Emphatic, xlvi. ; Indefinite, 
 xlvii. : Prnnotnhialia, .\lviii. 
 A and n : Relative, see Rela- 
 tive : indefinite ((Jrcek rt?), 
 want of in Latin, 351: neuter. 
 
 231 ; 237 ; 294 : lecipnieal, 
 often Hiippli<d by hthrse, 354; 
 by repeateil uliu.i, 371, iv. : 
 pidiioiiiis followed by i/iiisi/iir, 
 373, 374 : piDiioiiiis in or. i>ltl., 
 34 : 517. 
 Pro|Miitioii, three ways of express 
 iiig, 376. 
 
 <i>l'KslloNS, hireet, XX.; (I) single, 
 165-167 ; (•-') .lisjiinetive, 168- 
 161 : hepeiideiit or Indirect, 
 x.xi., xxii. ; depeiidenttlisjunc- 
 tive, les.vr'/. : subj. in (rhetori- 
 cal) ([liestloiis, 169 ; 172 ; 
 answers to ipiestioiis, 162 : 
 dependent (piestioiis for Eng- 
 lish limns, 174 : distinguisiied 
 from iilativ(! clauses, 176 : 
 (piestions in or. olil., 620-1. 
 
 (jtiiotatioii, introduced liy i//ii(f, 
 341. 
 
 l!i:i,AiiVK, clause, placed fiist in 
 contrasts, 76 : turned by Latin 
 order, 82 : adj. for, 62 ; 81 : 
 adjectival, x. : sul)junctive in, 
 Ixiii. : causal and concessive, 
 Ixiv. : in or. oh/., .srr Onifio 
 Oil/. : llelative Pronoun, co- 
 ordinating, Intr. oS ; 70; 13, 
 78, i. : subordinating, Intr. 
 ()0 ; 79: with Denumstrative, 
 70-72 ; 76 ; 0)i<l .•<ee Correla- 
 tives : referring to a sUitenient, 
 67 ; (/III 11(111, (/((III, 80 : in- 
 definite, 364 : foUoweil by 
 </ii/si/iii\ 373 : see al.fo Agree- 
 ment itiid Attraction. 
 
 Sentence, Analysis of, Tntr fil -72 ; 
 the comjiound, Intr 7.'V8/3. 
 
 Space, how expressed. 318. 
 
 Subject, in analysis, see Sentence : 
 its relati(>n to Predicate, 
 Intr. 1 1 : enlargement of, 
 Intr. ("iS : place of, in sentence, 
 Intr. 88 : composite, 26-9. 
 
 Subordination of sentences, Intr. 
 78-8;'). 
 
 SuBJUNCTlVK, mood. 147, iv. , and 
 vote : used indepen<lently, 148- 
 152 : for im]ierative. sre Com- 
 mands and Prohibitions : with 
 
I.VD/'IX OF SU/iJF.CTS. 
 
 401 
 
 , and 
 
 y, 148- 
 
 T'om- 
 
 : with 
 
 </iii nv ifi.itival .hIvciIi. Ixiii.; 
 tilt. siil>j.. 189, '»l>s. S,. (}uv>i- 
 tiiiiis, Orii/iii iil)/ii/iiii, mill till' 
 ViU'ioiis kiiitls of ohiUHOH (liitr. 
 .s()-s,-»). 
 
 SiiisiANiiN Ai,, cliiusf, Iiitr, SO: 
 pliiccdf, wee ( )rtl(r : ilitindiiccd 
 l»y lit, III', xvi. ; l»y iiiti iii»;,'ii- 
 tivcH, 174 ; l>y n-lutivf, 175 ; 
 76. Siiiistiiiitival iiiliiiitivo, i 
 xiii. ; ('//'/ SI, liitinitivc. 
 
 Siilistiiutivi', vcili, liitr. 4".l. Oli.i. ; 
 iioiiii sulistaiitivi'. .s' « Nnim. 
 
 Supri'lativf diLircc, 67, n ; 69 ; 
 376-6 ; '///'/ -SI r Ailjcctivc. 
 
 SUPINKS, li. : sup. in -11111 after 
 verbs of motion, 236 ; in fiit. 
 inf. pass., 193, iv. ; sup. in 
 ■a an al>lativi', 274, 0I1.1. 
 
 TKMroKM clauses, Iiitr. S.'?, 3, 
 (iiiil H','.' : syntax of liv., Iv. 
 
 Ten.se, reniaiks ».ii, primary, 
 seeondary (liistoric), etc., 
 xxiii. : ami tri i'ri'st iit, etc. : 
 .se<pieiiceof, •»■' < Final ( 'lauses, 
 etc. : ill or. i)l>/., 624-5. 
 
 Time, expressions of, xlii. : sn n/so 
 Ablative niiif A(HMisativr : 
 notes on adverbs of time, 328 : 
 tin- IJoiiiaii ealeiidar, Iwii. 
 
 'I\nvns, islands, etc, sir (li'oc^ra- 
 pliieal expressions nm/ Place. 
 
 Transit! v(\ si'i' Verl)s. 
 
 ef. iii. : .\eti\e, Passive, and 
 iK'puiieiit, Iiitr. .'{I*- 1."» : ini- 
 
 IH'isonal, Intr. -J(J ; nml .so 
 mpersonal : Auxiliary, Intr. 
 47 ; 4!t, Ohs. ; 188"; 198 : 
 Modal. Intr. 4N ; \ ii. ; 219 : 
 Copulative or Link, Intr. 4!>- 
 .')(), and 71 ; 7 : Finite and 
 Intinitive, Intr. ')! ; ef. xiii. : 
 fat titivf, 239: some in i'lii^disli 
 used both transitively and 
 intransitively, 20-21 : some 
 trans. l)y addition of a pre- 
 position, 22-3 : some in Latin 
 transitive by composition, 24 ; 
 229 : transitive, used intransi- 
 tively, 232 : verbs of double 
 const., 122: sum, Intr. 4!» 0/(.s.; 
 itn eonipoiin<ls, 261 : verliH 
 governiiij,' dat., abl., or ;.'en., 
 firi' (/lo.sr riifirs : Verba {lironi- 
 iiiiniiliiiii or I'jJ'i-rfiiiij (iiii/nriiiii/! 
 I'll I'jfirii'iii/!), 118 ; 127 ; of 
 fliiiikiiKj or siii/iiiij {si iifinii/i n I 
 i/i-r/iirinn/i), sc' Or. Oh/. ; of 
 liinilruiiri', with <iiiiii. i/iiimii- 
 viis, 129-137 ; of i/onhfimj, 
 133 ; of /lojiiiii/, 37 ; of fiiiriiii/, 
 138, mill iiofi' ; of fiiir/ihn/, 
 rniiiiit/lmi, etc., 230-1. 
 
 VocATlVK, why .so called, u.se of, 
 216. 
 
 Voice, elian<:ed to prevent ambi- 
 guity, 216, <>/as.; mill .si I' A'eibs, 
 
 Vkim'.s. Intr. ll-l.'i: Intransitive AVish. expressed by subjunctive, 
 ai.d Transitive, Intr. .S")-.SS ; , 161-152 ; in or. oli/., 622. 
 
LATIN INDEX.* 
 
 n, flit, fi, n; 2tl4-7 ; 314 ; 
 
 .fill ; :»;io ; ;t;t-', i ; ns;. 
 iililiiiic, :m. 
 iil)..iilvi>, :toit. 
 iilMiiiii, -' il, "'"'■ ; tHiyicrs. , 
 
 l:t2. '/. 
 Mi-cidit., r-':i, II nil nh.-i. ; -.'Iti; 
 
 is;, (/ ; p. :i"ii, II, 
 
 uci'luliin, |>. :ilU, 11. 
 iirifs, |i. :iiJ7, II. 
 acta, lit; 4()S, 
 
 liccilso, ;tl)li ; p. .'ill I, II. 
 
 11(1, •-'.'..•; :tll. o'w ; :ii;{ : 
 ifjii : :i:((>, ;t:tl, i. 
 
 il.l.M., 107; l'J4. 
 
 iiillii>rtiir, 127, n. 
 
 ailiiuD, -IV.i, iiii'l H'lti' : 247. 
 
 iulipisriii', p. :t7'.t, II. 
 
 Miliii'iiico. 1-7, " ; :{0.s, ((. 
 
 ii.liili'scciis, Til, ((, (((('/ noti' ; 
 
 .■).■> ; i>:t : 4(>s. 
 ;iilsiliil, 'ill, mill W)ti\ 
 Ililvi'l'slM (((((/ ), til. 
 .tilvcisiis ( /iM'/i.), Ii;{(( ; M;1!, 2. 
 ,ii'(|il.ilis, .(1, II ; -IM. 
 ii'iliiis, -J Hi; ;iOI, ii. 
 .lit. bl-J. 
 ,ili(liiMiiil(), p. ;17'.), n. ; p. 
 
 ;iS-i. ;(,. 
 
 .•ili(|uiH, .'itii), i. ; .'ISI. 
 
 .ilit.T, !H ; Ixil. : 4!tl, 01,^. 2. 
 
 alius, Vi ; '.••-' ; :{i)7-71. 
 
 altiT, :it!S <>; ;{7-.' ; JiM. 
 
 aiiiliid, p. :{.">.S, /(. 
 
 aiiilK), .•i7S, i. 
 
 amicus, ">1, if; '^^■. ; 2'>r>. 
 
 uiiii), p. ;l7i>, )» 
 
 aiiiiii'ims, Viic. (t, «. 
 
 iiiipliiis, :!l,s, '(/is 
 
 an. l.V) : l.V.tiil ; Kis <) ; 171. 
 
 ante, 2.VJ ; ;{2J ; WM ; ;t;tl, ). 
 
 ante ilicni, ")4'>. 
 
 .riiliMpiain, l4'J-.'<. 
 
 aiiliipiiis, p. .'..'i.^, ti. 
 
 app irct, 4(>, r. 
 
 aptns, 2'>.'>. "/'.<. 
 
 apml. ;t:!i», ,!;u, 4. 
 
 .irldtiKr. p. :{ii7, /(. 
 
 .iiKiii), :!nr> ; |i. :t!iii. n. 
 
 aspi'iiitH', Viic. 10, /(. 
 
 aspicii), p. ;j,si), n. 
 
 llHHMl'illH, aSHIIefllf tllH, 2.'>6, 
 llllH. 
 
 iit<pit', p. 14, II.; <.K), !•! ; Ixli. 
 iiiicturila.s, p. :i7.'(, n. 
 iiiiiliii, 'SA ; 410, iilix. 
 iiiit, p. 14, n. ; -jy; 17! ; 
 
 407, rinitinn. 
 aiitttiii, I lit I'. '.18. 
 aii.xiiio, 2iio, I. 
 avi^rsu.s, til. 
 iivl, 51, a, tintc. 
 
 boate viverc, ln'ntuni esse, 
 
 08, II. 
 liciif, 2,'i2. 
 
 iHMit'Vnliis, 255, Ohs. 
 Iioiii, 50, 11. ; lioiwi, 51, 
 
 ciilaniitas, ]■. :tii4, n. 
 (Niiididatiis, 51, a ; 408. 
 capax, :iol, i. 
 I carwi, 284. 
 ca.sii.s, p. ;tii4, )i. 
 causa {iihl. ), 2Si» ; 32S), Obs. 
 caved, 248. 
 <*!(), 2;{0-l. 
 ceiisco, p. ;ttl7, n. 
 ccrno, p. ;iS(i, Ii. 
 certe, p. 375, «.. 
 ceitidieiii facid, 301, Obs. 
 ci'sso, p. :{70, 11. 
 ceteri, 372. 
 
 cinMiiii ; circa, 330 ; 331, 5. 
 rircuiiuld, 250. 
 circuiiitlud, 2S4 
 ('is, cilra, 3;i0 ; i:U. 6. 
 cocpi, 42, i. h ; 2lt) ; Cdcp 
 
 tuiii est, 210. 
 cdiuiiiiini't'acid, 308. 
 cdiMplcii, 284. 
 coiulciiini), 30(i-7, 
 conilniid, 247. 
 c. iiitl.il I, 244, c ; 253, i. ; 282, 
 
 iih.i. 
 cdiidr, 120. 
 ciiiiscipiiir, p. 37tl, H. 
 I'diispicio, p 3.S(), II. 
 CDiistat, 4ti, I'. 
 Cdiistd, 280, Oha. 
 cdiistitUd, 45. 
 (!diisuld, 248; 301, Obs. 
 
 cdiit(«iiinn, V<x\ 10, n. 
 cdiitclitus, 2"i5. 
 cdiitinjjit, 240; p. 370, n. 
 contra, 01 ; 330 ; 331,; ; 401, 
 
 h. 
 I'oriiiia, 17. 
 cifilo, 32, h ; 217, 'Hill note. ; 
 
 218; 30), nl,.^, 
 cillpac ilii, 2tiO, J. 
 cuiii, 8, h, iinildh.'i. : 252 ; 209 
 
 (I'll/ "/w. ; 27(1 ; 3;J0 ; 332, a. 
 fiinctor, !>. ;»70, ». 
 coiictus. p. 354, n. 
 ciipio. 41, " ; 42, i. '/ ; 120. 
 cur, 157, ii. ; 174, aiul nvte. 
 euro, 121 ; 400. 
 
 (taiiino, 307. 
 
 (le, 21M1 ; 300, Ohs. ; 330 ; 332,3. 
 
 (If iiitt'gro, 328,/. 
 
 (lelit'o, 42, i. (•; 153; l(i8, 
 
 i., iiiiil note.. 
 (leeeilo, 410, 71. 
 ilccet, (Icdccct, 2:14. 
 (Iftlcio, 1), 3.'i3, n. 
 delictimi, 408; p. 301, n. 
 deiiiuin, 347 ; 443, O/w. 
 dciiiiiiu', 44:t, Ohs. ; 534, Oba. 
 di'scro, p. 3,53, n. 
 di'sitiiiu est, 21ii. 
 dcHpicio, Voc 10. 71 
 dt'stilud, ji. 353, II. 
 desiiin, 251 ; J). ;iri3, ». 
 died, 32, }i : 44 ; p. 38.S, 71. ; 
 
 dicdi , 43. 
 dictito, ]i. ,'j82, M. 
 dictoaudienssuin,]). 370, n. 
 dies, 328, c ; Voc. 1, )i. 
 (liH'erd, p. 370, 11. 
 (liKiior, 281. , 
 
 difjiius, 285. 
 ililiKo, p. :<7t), 71. 
 disseiisio, 300. 
 dissiiunlii, 30, ni4e. 
 dill, 181. 
 diiirnu.s, 328, c. 
 diutiiius, diiiturnns, i>. 375, 
 
 n. 
 diversns, 01 ; 371, rrnition. 
 divites, 51, n, ami ni>ti\ 
 do, 2.')it ; 400. 
 
 1 This Index is cliiefly limited to words siieci.ally noticed. Many, tlierefore, which 
 occur ini-nly as e.xanipii's, or in the Vocalmlary, will not he contained in it. 
 
/.A UN INDEX. 
 
 40:t 
 
 (iDrcii. 'J.'ini. I piiiilcM, II, h; 4M7, Oh», 
 
 doiiii. ill-' . ;i. ), iii. ; ilitiiui, H''i". -•"■ '"'■'*: -■♦1. 
 
 !', \> ; <li)iiiuiii, It, /i ; 'I'Mi , KliMior, '-'.S|, •.'«-', itb.'. 
 
 iil.'l, "''< j^i.itiii. |i ;<7:t, ». ; Kniliain 
 
 ilmiiM', 4.'tt(-4l. I liiiU'it, I'll'. ; ^iiutiitN ii>ji>, 
 
 • lollii. •^'.(1 DM, /) ; Kiutiii ((/W.>, :;iM», 
 
 (liiiiitii, i;m, ^. ' (*/>.■*.; :<!.".•, o/w. 
 
 iliiio, ".'.v.!. 'Kntiiis, p. .itc.', n. 
 
 «lmii, l.S(», 4;itl-41 ; 4«S, giili.iiK.. 'i\U, 
 
 i'>'<iiiis, ir.7, i. 
 
 nlico, lis; r.'T, h ; I'.'S. 
 (•mri... lis; I'j.jj, /,■. 
 •'K''", '-"*■♦ 
 t'Ko, ll.K, 'i ; '.'(I, ;ll-^'; ;i;i4 ; 
 
 MT. 
 t'Jusiiiodi, N7 ; |i. ;)74, II. 
 ••iiaii, LTi'.t 
 
 rliiii, no.'). 
 
 ••iiiin, Iritr. <tH, 
 
 •■<i(iii'), lo:), in\i\ OhH. 
 
 ••rwi, 'MO : .'t;tl. 8. 
 
 ••rr.iri', t'lror, |i ;i(i6, a. 
 
 eHMiiii, 4-', )i. 'J 
 
 ft, Intr. ')7, mite. 
 
 tttiiiiii, I •'•2. 
 
 •'tiaiiisi, ctsi, Ix. 
 
 pvciijt, p. ;i7ti, II. 
 
 f'X, :iti:t 4; •J'.mI; :U4: K(\ ; 
 
 :f:i() ; :<:f.', 4. 
 expcctiitiit, ■.'77. 
 cxiicilit, •.'4(5. 
 expiTs, ;t(ii, ii. 
 exstii, '.Ml. 
 rxt()r(|iii'(i, 2.'i7. 
 extm, :i;to: '.m, q. 
 
 fnciniiH, y>. Mtil, \i. 
 
 facio, ns; •.'40 ; •.'«>0, Ob.<. ; 
 
 aorj: fac, VJ-2, -/; 141. 
 factum, .'>1, h; bU; 408. 
 faiiia, 'J77. 
 
 faiiKisus, Vof. 2, (I. ; 19. 
 falalis, Voc. H, k. 
 favcd, .1 ; 244, k. 
 favor, ji. ■i7.'l, /I. 
 fclicita.s, H47. 
 
 fl'I'C, p. H.'),'), H. 
 
 fcrox, ]) Mu, n. 
 
 ft'iTum, Voc. 1, 11. 
 
 fciiint, 44. 
 
 liilo, '.'44, c : tkiciis, 407, ii. 
 
 licri potest, I'J.'J, c, /; 132, il 
 
 lines, 10, ((. 
 
 tiii^o, 11. ;iS2, )f. 
 
 tla^itimii, p. HOI, v. 
 
 tIaKito, 1'.'7, d ; •-'30-1. 
 
 I'ora.s, 2;{.''.. 
 
 fore lit, :!S : 10:!, iii. 
 
 for.sitan, foilMs>!e, forte, l()lt, 
 
 170. 
 fraud i, '_'H0, 3. 
 fretii.s, •.'.'^■1. 
 fnior. 2S1. 
 friistra, )>. .'i'.Ki, ». 
 fuiif^or, 2.S1. 
 fiiro, furor, Voc. fi, )i. 
 fiituruui, ry> ; 4O8. 
 
 Iialieo. IKK; 'J40 ; MOS. 
 
 hae, S!». 
 
 Iiaml, liitr W , \W, )i. : 
 liauil scio an, IM, 170, 
 
 liii', ss, (ihs ; ;{:t7 ; ;t4(). 
 
 lili' ((»</(•.), hiiic, .si». 
 
 hoc (11, lit), -SM ; '2'i7. 
 
 lioilie, r>ls. 
 
 , homo, 224, (((((/ iiiitf : K\ 
 '•W, II. ti : hoiiiiiie.s. Id, /(, 
 jhoiiestaH, hoiieMtuiil, .Ol, r, 
 I p. :<71, n. 
 
 Iiorreo, •->;i2 
 
 .hortor, 1 IS; 127, n ; '-M.'i. 
 I liostis, Kx 1, II. . Voc. H, II 
 
 hue, Ki) 
 
 liu.jusmodi, 87 ; p. ;(74, n. 
 
 humi, :U2. 
 
 ilii. Hit 
 
 ! ill aetati.'4, temjioris, etc., 
 I -i'.H, o/w ; 2;t.S, iii. 
 lid a^'o, lis. 
 lideireo, 107; W.i, 0/w. 
 
 idem, xii ; Sti,')(i : vent., 
 I 21(7. 
 
 idoiiens, 2.■).^, Obs. 
 I Idu.s, Ixvii. 
 
 iK'iiaruH, :toi. 
 i iguoro, p :!72, n. 
 I iguosco, b; 244, r. 
 lille, 11, il : M; 88, Ohs. ; 
 101, i., /( ; ;t:i4, iii., nml 
 iv. ; ft;5'.t-40; :i4t)-8; 481, 
 a; ,117: iifiit., 21! 1 ; 237 , 
 341 ; 48ii, nittl Obs. 
 
 illic, illuc, SO. 
 
 iniUK'iiior, 301, ii. 
 
 impar, 307. 
 
 imi>edire, 137, ii. 
 
 imiieriuiii, |i. 373, 11. 
 
 imiiero, 118; 1'27, h ; V2S ; 
 244, «• , 247. 
 
 iin))etro, 118; 127, <• ; p. 
 370, n. 
 
 impoten.s, 407, iii. 
 
 imiu'ol)!, 50, X. 
 
 imus, 00. 
 
 in, 2r>2; 208, Ohs ; 273 
 0/w ; 313; 3'-'0, ,i,i<l h.f. 
 I 326 : 330, ;<31, 24 ; 3;i2, 5 
 ' 308, Olis. 
 
 '\u-(priv<it.), 407, iii. 
 
 inciitio, 42, i. h. 
 
 incuso, 306; p. 390, w. 
 
 inde, SO. 
 
 iiidico, '.!.«)3, il. 
 
 indif^eo, '-'84. 
 
 indi^rin.s, 2S.'i, 
 
 iiulides, |i. 3.'i|t, )(. 
 
 itiiliio, 2'>o. 
 
 inlltia.s eo, •;;(.'>. 
 
 ilil'lii, 330, ;i3l, II. 
 
 IliKenluill, II. 3.'><.t, II. 
 
 ihimicii.1, \oe 8 (/ ; .M, ,1 ; 
 I .'..'.; 2.-.ti. 
 j in.jiiiia, p. 3i».'.. (/. 
 
 llljUrtHU, 2t'i'.l, llli.i. 
 
 iiii|uaMi. 40. 
 
 insaiiio, \'iic ti, II. 
 
 insiiiiMlo. p U'.Mt. ". 
 
 iiiHtilutniM. .M, t> ; (IIS 
 
 illSUi tus. 2.'..'i. "l.v. r .301, ij, 
 
 iiiMum, 2.'i|, iiliH. 
 
 inter, 'J!<-Jt. -JOii ; 33o, ;;31, 
 
 10 ; -.ibi ; ;i',Ml. 
 inteidrni, p. .">>N, /), 
 interest, :.'<>2 ; ;*l(). 
 interlicio, p 374, n. 
 iiiteniijtio, p 302, ". 
 inleiro;;o, 2;!0 ; 231, miil 
 
 iiitlf. 
 intra, ,".'_'.'>; 3.30, .•;31, 12. 
 inliicor, p 380, /(. 
 in\ ideo, 244, i'. 
 invitos, 01. 
 ipse, 3.'.jt). 
 irascor, 244, c. 
 irrideo, 2.'i3. iii. 
 is, II, (/ ; 34; 7o-7t; ; S3, 
 
 (ihs. ; 33'. ; 312 8 ; .'.(Mi ; 
 
 .')I7 : III 11},, 2.'.8, iii. j 204, 
 
 (itiri. 
 isle, I I, (/ ; 3;i8 ; 'A'. 
 ita, 107 ; 488 : it;i . . ut, 
 
 111, 4t'„s : ita v.ro, |(;2. 
 iterum, :i28,/; •,:!;!, c; ,•.34. 
 
 .jam, 328 : Jam diu, pijdem, 
 dudum. 1 81 : 328, *. 
 
 ,julieo, 41, (/ ; 120 ; 127, n ; 
 I'JS ; 24. ^. 
 
 jucuiidus, p .3i;2, 11. 
 
 ,iure. p. :'.8."i, /) 
 
 .juris consul! IIS, .302. 
 
 .inro, 37. 
 
 .jiisto, acipio, 277. 
 
 .ju\enis. .M, ((, mill nulc. 
 
 .juvo, 24.'i. 
 
 ,ju.\ta, 330, :!31, n. 
 
 .juxta .•ic-, 4'.n. 
 
 Kalendac, IavII. 
 
 laedo. 'J4.'> 
 
 lex, V.s. '.I, II. 
 
 lilief, •jce.' ; 24ii. 
 
 licet, p.ii ; 1117 ; -JOl ; 240; 
 
 480, ii. 
 lonu'iiiii est. I'r.;, 
 loiliioi-, p. :;.ss, „. 
 
 niajorcs, .M, n, imil imtr. 
 majiis exclam.'it, 238, ii. 
 male, 2.")2. 
 . liii.ledico, 2.0.3, i. 
 
m 
 
 LA TIN INDEX. 
 
 iiiali'viilciitiii, maliguitas, 
 
 inalitia, p. ;{7ti, n. 
 1ii;iIm, 4'J, 1. (i. 
 iiiamlc), \-ll, h; li!S; 247. 
 iiK' Dins liiliiis, liitr. 28. 
 iiii'liiis, tK). 
 
 irii'liiilii, ■-'•JS, O/is ; ;',08. 
 iiii'iiioi'ia<! pi'iiilitiim I'Mt, U), 
 
 a. 
 iMi'iiliiir, ji. :i.S2, ». 
 iiiiiita, 4(IS. 
 
 iiiftiKi, \'M-<* 'J4S ; p. ;((')", /(. 
 llii'iH, II, r. 
 iiiilitiac, :il2 
 iiiilli', ,J2.s. 
 iiiiiiiiiii;, 1(52. 
 niiiicpi', :i7 ; 247. 
 iiiiiior (aii.j.), .■<27 : iiiiiioii's, 
 
 51, (I, uiitf. : iiiiiius, 'MS, 
 
 1)1 IS. 
 
 iiiiscnu)!-, H(iS, 
 
 iiiisiTft, 2:i4; .•{09. 
 
 iiiiscror, lidS, <;. 
 
 iiiiHleror, 249. 
 
 jiiDilo, 4()S : inodo iit', 4:i'.', 
 
 i.iiti'. 
 inoiino, lis ; 122, a; 127, a. 
 iiionstni. 241. 
 iiiiirtalis, HI. 
 iiiiu'Luiis, 01 : iiioituus est, 
 
 V,,r. 7, )i. 
 nidvco, 21, (I. 
 
 iimlta (/(. III.), M, 54; 2:i7. 
 iiiulto ("W. ), 279. 
 iiiuMdns, l(i, /(. 
 luiito, 21, (f ; 281 ». 
 
 iianoiscor, ]i. ;i7!t, ». 
 
 iiatii), li»; Yoc. 2, u. 
 
 iiatiis, 2(1() ; :i27. 
 
 ii.ivis liniKa, 5(">. 
 
 Ill', xiv. ; xvi.; 109 ; l:iS, i:j , 
 
 142, 140. 
 iifilii'aiii, l()ii>,'ii:i sill), 100, n. 
 no . . . (|ui(lt'iii, Iiitr. W. 
 -lie (end.), liitr. yS, and 
 
 note ; 155-0 ; 159-00 ; 107- 
 
 108. 
 nece.s.s(! est, 120; 199, (tnd 
 
 iiiite; 201. 
 llfciie, lOS, OliK. 
 IH'. 11, (I. ;{74, n. 
 j...jr|,.^ri), Voc. lO, n. 
 II.,.., :i:i , l:{»!, a; 102. 
 Ileum, Voe. s, /(. ; 22H, and 
 
 note. ; 290. 
 lie|mt('S, 51, ((, )l()^. 
 iiei|iiaiiiiaiii, 102. 
 iie((iie, liitr. yg; 29 ; 110 ; 
 
 145. 
 . ei|iiii|i|ii^iii), ]i :i9:!, ". 
 iie(|Uitia, i>. ;<01, n. 
 
 iies.io, .'■lOO, n. : J). ;57'2. n. jiariter, 488. 
 iiescid (|iiis, (|ii(i )iaet(i, ((im pars, 535. 
 
 nisi, 404, 401). 
 
 iiilor, 282, Ulis. 
 
 iiiiliiles, 51, a, and note. 
 
 IK )(•(!( I, 244, b. 
 
 111)1'), 42, i. (/ ; i;{0, (( : noli, 
 14;f ; iK.liiu. 120 ; 149, i. 
 
 noil, liifr. (jy, 102. 
 
 noil iliiitiiis, noil jam, .128, a. 
 
 noil iiiodo . . se(l, 124. 
 
 noil i|iiiii, lion (lUo, 485. 
 
 Noiiae, l.wii. 
 
 noiiiliiiii, :i2,s, (/. 
 t noiine, 155, ir, 107. 
 I noiiiiiilli, 300, iv. 
 
 noniiiiU'iiiani, p. 388, n. 
 
 nos, 334 ; 517. 
 
 iiostri, 50. 
 
 iiotuiii liabeo, 188. 
 
 iiovissiiti.is, 00. 
 
 nulliis, Voe. o, n. 
 
 iiuni, 155, and note; 167; 
 171 : nuiiKinis, 157, i. 
 
 iiniic, 328, ti ; 518. 
 
 iiuiitjatiiin est. 40, a. 
 
 ol), 252: 207, Ohs. ; 330,331. 
 
 14; 390. 
 ol)eilio, 244, it , '). 379, n. 
 ol)liviseor, 308. 
 obseero, 127, 0. 
 ol)se(|U()r, ]). 379, 11. 
 ol)si(leo, Voe. 3, n. ; 24 ; 229. 
 ohsto, oiisisto, 137, ii. ; 244, ft. 
 )i)teiiipero, j). 379, n. 
 »)('( iilo, ]). 374, n. 
 <)(ii() sum, 200, Olis. 2. 
 otleiido, 245. 
 oltieere, 1;{7, ii. 
 otlleinm, 18, 19.. 
 oliiu, |). 379, n. 
 omitto, J). 392, n. 
 omiiis, 297 ; J). 354, n. 
 o|)i'ra(((ft/.), 207, Obs. ; 289: 
 
 ojieram do, 118; 397. 
 opinio, 277; 300. 
 opinof, J). 307, n. 
 ojiortet, 120; 198, ii., and 
 
 note. 
 oppiduni, 226 ; 316, ii. 
 oj)piigno, Voe. 3, n. ; 229. 
 optiiiiates, 51, i(, and note. 
 opto, 23 ; 118. 
 oims, '!M), an I dbs. 
 orl)is tcnaruni, 10, ft. 
 oro, HS; 12", a : oro et 
 
 oliseero, 141. 
 ortiis, oriiiiidua, 200, and 
 
 (Ills. 
 osttMido, 24 J. 
 
 jiaene, p. 355, n. 
 
 pare.), 228, Ohi. ; p. 379, n. 
 
 lii.).lo, 109 , 302-3 
 n.ve, lien, 103 : 145. 
 
 nihil 
 nil 
 
 paruiii, 294. 
 patiens, 302. 
 
 1; 237 : 294 : iiilill patior, 120 
 
 .pll etc , 29S, ft. 
 
 patres, Voc. 2, n. ; 51, a, note. 
 
 6; 
 
 127, ft; 128; 
 127, c. 
 
 309. 
 
 , ; 37. 
 
 231 ; 
 
 P- 
 
 patria, 10, a; patria ee.lo, 
 
 204. 
 j)aiilo,.279. 
 
 peeeatuiii, p .301, ?i. : 408. 
 liemlere aiiimi, 312, <>h.s. 
 ]ielies, 3:i0, 3:il, 15. 
 J).'!-, 207, (II1.1. ; 330, 3.31, 
 
 197, Ohs. ->. 
 ])erli.)riese.), 232 
 ])eri.'iiliim est, 138, 139, 
 perimle ae, l.xii. 
 ]).'ritiis, 301, ii. 
 perniitto, lis ; 
 
 247 
 peto, 23; US; 
 I)ie, 04. 
 
 l)i-ef, 202; 234; .309, 
 l)la.'et, 202 ; 240. 
 pleiuis, 301, Obs. 
 plus, 294 ; 318, Obs. 
 l)oena, ]). 383, n. 
 poeiiitet, 202 ; 2.34 ; 
 jiollieeor, Voe. 0, n. 
 poseo, 127, d ; 230, 
 
 303, n. 
 posse, 37, end : iiossnm, 42, 
 
 \.,a: 153; 190; 200; 219. 
 post, 252; 322 ; 3;iO, 331. 17. 
 iposteri, 51, a, and note. 
 post()nain, 428 ; 440. 
 l)Ostulo, 127, c ; j). 303, n. 
 j)otentia,p(>testas, p. 373, n. 
 ]iotior, 28 w 
 potiiis, 488 
 
 prae, 252 ; 330 ; 332, 6. 
 ])rafcbeo, 241. 
 Iiraeeeptuin, 408, Ohs. 
 prae<-ipio, 127, ft; 128. 
 praeditus, 285. 
 praefectus, 408. 
 ])raefl(;io, 253, ii. ; 397. , 
 ])raesinn, 251 ; 397. 
 praesto. 229, H. ; 239; 278. 
 l)raeter, 330, 331, 18. 
 praeterniitto. p. 392, n. 
 l)raetervelior, 24. 
 precor, 118; 127, 1/ ; 231. 
 pridie, 540. 
 primus, 02 ; 377. 
 {iriseus, pristinus, j>, 355, n. 
 priusipiam 442-3. 
 priv.), 284. 
 pro, ; 330 ; 332, 7. 
 l)rolii), 247. 
 pioliihe.), 41, «; 120; 127, 
 
 a; 137, ii. ; 245. 
 proinde, Ixii. 
 l)r()iiiitto, Voe. 0, n. ; 37. 
 l)r.)pe, 256 ; 330, 331, i.; ; j). 
 
 355, 71. 
 pr.)prium, 255. 
 l)r.)liter, 207, Ohs. ; 330, 331, 
 
 ■JO. 
 
 pri)se(|Uor, 2 3. 
 prosj)iei.), 24S. 
 l)rovideo, 248. 
 l)i'oxinius, 256. 
 prudelis, 301, ktbs 
 
LA TIN INDEX. 
 
 405 
 
 l>H(lfl, 202; 234; :{0!>, and 
 
 Oha. 2 ; 404. 
 imlchiT, Voc. 9, n. 
 
 imto, ji. ;i07, «. 
 
 qua, St». 
 
 <jll!lt'SO, 141. 
 
 «)iiai'stui, 260, 3. 
 <|Ualis, xii. ; IT)', i. ; 174. 
 <iuaiii(//(fcr/-.), 157, ii.; 174, e. 
 tUmiti {rnmptir.), yi ; Ixii. ; 
 
 2~i> ; .-{18, (;^.s-. ; 323. 
 quaindiii, 43(!-7. 
 quamobrcin, 157, ii. ; 174, ?'. 
 (luamvis, ix. ; 480, n. 
 qu'iiilo, l.')7, ii. ; 174. 
 qimiidoquiili'iii, Ixi. 
 qiiaiKiuaiii, Ix. ; 440. 
 quantus, xii. ; 157, i. ; 174. 
 quare, 157, ii. ; 174, «. 
 quasi, Ixii. 
 -que, Intr. 5", ».; Iiitr. 98, 
 
 ((/((/ note. 
 qufmadiuoduiii, Ixii. ; 157, 
 
 ii ; 174, n. 
 qui, Intr. 58; Intr. (50; 12, 
 
 13; x.-xii.; 192; 227; 
 
 31)0, iii. ; 434, Obs. ; Ixiii.- 
 
 Ixxiv. I 
 
 quia, Ixi. 
 quicuniiue, Mi ; 434, Obs. ; 
 
 513. 
 quidaiu, 301. 
 quideni, Intr. 98; 481, a. 
 quilil)et, 359. 
 quill, 80 ; xvii. : quinetiaiii, 
 
 135. 
 quis, 157, i. ; 163-5 ; 174. i 
 quis (imkf.), 357. 
 quisjii.im, 300, ii. j 
 
 quisquani, 110; 358. 
 quisque, 352, Obs. ; 373-7 ; 
 
 497. 
 quisquis, 304. I 
 
 quivis, 359. < 
 
 qu()(o(/c.), 89;157, ii.;174, (i. 
 quo (abl.), 102. , I 
 
 quoad, 430 441. ' 
 
 quod, 32, a ; Ixi. ; 446 ; 448, 
 
 end. 
 quoMuuns, xvii. 
 (luondarn, p. 379, n. 
 quoiiiaui. Ixi. 
 (lU(iqiu>, lutr. 98. 
 (luot, xii. ; 157, i. ; 174. 
 (luotidianus, ((uotidie, 328, c. 
 (luoties, 157, ii. ; 428 ; 434, 
 
 Oho. 
 quotusquisque, 293. ' 
 
 quuni, 192; 411, 412; 429- 
 435 ; 494. 
 
 receptui oanere, 259. { 
 
 reoipio, 37. 
 
 rectt', ]) 3S5, n. | 
 
 ivf uso, 136. n. 
 
 irfcrt, 202 ; 310. 
 
 ' rcgiuiiii. 17 ; p. 373, ;i. 
 n;litii|U(i, p. ;i53, n. 
 ri'iiquus, 00; 372. 
 rcor, p. ;i07, it. 
 rcpudio, V(pc. 10, /(. 
 res, 52 : 222, (ib.t. 
 rcspiiMica, 10, o ; ji. 191, 
 
 Hate. 
 ri'x, p. 15:?. n. 
 rite, p. 3n5, 7^. 
 rogn, 127, n ; 230, 231, tnul 
 
 note. 
 ruiiia, 19; p. 3S(), n. 
 rursus, 328, /. 
 ru.s, 9, b ; 16, a : 2;{5 ; 312. 
 
 sane, 481, e. 
 
 sati.s, 252; 294. 
 
 satius est, 153. 
 
 scelus, ]). 361, 71. ; 404. 
 
 scribo, 122, c. 
 
 se, 11, e; 34 ; 349-54; 517. 
 
 secundum, 3;i0, 331, 21. 
 
 seourus, 19. 
 
 seeus, Kx. 59 b, 71. ; 488. 
 
 seinel, p. 296, v 
 
 senatus pojiuiusque, 30, 
 Obs. 
 
 sene.sco, p. 57, ». 
 
 sententia, Voe. 7, /i. ; 230, n. 
 
 sequor, 228, Obs. 
 
 ai, Iviii. ; 400 3 ; lix. ;171 : si 
 non, sin, si iiiiiius, 465-6 : 
 si quandt), 434, Obs. 
 
 sic, 488. 
 
 sicut, Ixii. 
 
 siinilis, 255. 
 
 simul atque, 428. 
 
 siniulo, 39, and nute. 
 
 sine, 360, i.;330; 332, 8. 
 
 singularis, 381, Ob^. 
 
 singuli, 532; 380. 
 
 sino, 120; 127, u ; 128. 
 I .^itio, 232. 
 I sive, seu, 171 ; 467. 
 
 solium, 17. 
 I solus, 62 ; 504, (lbs. 
 I .solvendo esse, 397. 
 
 speiito, J). 386, n. 
 
 sperno, Voc. 10, n. 
 
 spero, 23 ; 37, 38. 
 
 spe^, 277 ; p. 371, 71. 
 
 sponte, i". 394, n. 
 
 sto, 280, Obs. 
 
 stupeo, 232. 
 
 'ub. 252; ;«0, 831,25; 333. 
 
 sum, Intr. 49, Obs. ; Intr. 
 90, end ; Z ; 251 ; 259 ; 305, 
 Obs. 
 
 sunimus, 60. 
 
 super, 330, 331, 26. 
 
 .suppedito, 247. 
 
 sujiplicium, p. 383, n. 
 
 suscipio, 400. 
 
 suns, 11, c ; .349-354. 
 
 taedet, 202 ; 234 309. 
 
 talis, xii. ; Kx. 33 n, nuti-; p. 
 
 374, n. 
 I tain, 107 ; S8 : tanim. 479; 
 
 4S1, /,. ,/, andc. 
 tanietsi, ix. 
 liindeni. 1;')7, "'«. 
 tani|iiaiii, ixii. 
 tantus, xii, M, n. ; 107, 108; 
 
 497, Ob.-i. : tantiiiii abest 
 
 ut, 124 
 l.llus, 10, /(. 
 ti'Mijx'ro, 249. 
 tenus, ji. 21ii. ». ; 33:t. 
 tinifd, 13S, 139 ; 24.S ; p. 
 
 367, 71. 
 tiro, 223. 
 tot, xii. 
 
 tottis, 60 ; 01 ; p. 354. ?(. 
 trado, 400 ; trador, tradmit, 
 
 44. 
 tra.jicio, 229, Olis. 
 trans, :i30, 331, 6. 
 transit ucere, 229, Obs. 
 triumidin, j), ;592, n. 
 tnuido, ]i ;i74, 7). 
 tu, 11, (7, /- ; 26; 334 ; 517. 
 tiuis, 11, c. 
 
 turn, :i28, b ; 494 : turn 
 I teniporis, 294, Oh.<. : turn 
 I deninni, 443, obs. 
 
 ubi, 89; 157, ii. ; 428; 4;f4, 
 Obs. 
 
 uUus, :?58. 
 
 ultinius, 62. 
 
 ultra, 330, 331, 23. 
 
 ultro, p. 394, 7(. 
 
 unde, 89; 157, ii. ; 174, f. 
 
 universiis, 380; p. :{54, n. 
 
 unciuam, 110. 
 
 unus, 02; 293; 381 ; 504, 
 Obs. ; 529. 
 
 urbs, 220; 316, ii. 
 
 .s(iuani, 10, //. 
 
 usu venit, y. 370, 7i. 
 
 usus, 2S(). 
 
 ut, 32, (I ; xiv.-xvi. ; 138, 
 139; Ixii. ; 4t)8, «, and 
 iwU'\ 481, b and f. 
 ut dicam, lOo, w. 
 ut noil, XV. 
 ut (;uis(|iK', 434, (lbs. 
 utor, 157, i. ; 379. 
 uterque, 29S, n ; ;!78. 
 iitcrvis, utcrlil'ct, 379. 
 utile, utilitas, 51, <■. 
 utilis, 254, 255, Obs. 
 iiti am. 152. 
 u'.ir, 22s, (ib^. ; 2S1-2. 
 iitrum, 155 ; 15;t-10(); 171, 
 467, cuutijn. 
 
 vaco, 248, 
 vacuus, 265. 
 variiis, 371, cnution. 
 vastus, Kx. 3, n. 
 vel, lutr. 57, n. : -ve, Intr. 
 98, and Hok. 
 
40() 
 
 LATIN INDEX. 
 
 vi'liiii, 
 
 12ti; 
 
 141. 
 
 vcliit, 
 
 Ixii. 
 
 
 vcrcor 
 
 . i:is, 
 
 1 :'.'.! ; |i. :!»>'; 
 
 veld, liitr. 
 
 »«. 
 
 VtTSIIH 
 
 , V. •- 
 
 It;, n. : .i.'iO 
 
 2 2. 
 
 
 
 vcrl", 
 
 •2.V.I. 
 
 
 vi'iido 
 
 , -jso 
 
 ; liOf). 
 
 vi'iiirc 
 
 , '^^'i. 
 
 O/i.s. 
 
 VfiiiiMi dart 
 
 •, tik. 
 
 Vfscitr, 'JSl. 
 vcsiifii, 'AVI. 
 veto, r.'O; '245 
 
 li. 
 VftUS, vcturtliis, 1 
 vicfiii, 238, iii. 
 vifimis, ^.V). 
 vi(ltM), 118; 410, 
 
 27. «; i;!7 
 
 ;{5.'), ;i. 
 
 1 
 
 381), ».: vi<te)>r,4H: vi.lctiir, 
 40, h; 202: videro, 140 
 
 ilis, 1!>. 
 
 ir, 224 nnii iidi 
 
 u. 0. 
 itiiiiii, 
 
 vei'ti) 
 ix. 130. 
 ixi, 18V 
 (ill), 41, 
 
 120: i 
 
 lllgllS, 
 
 1. 301, 
 200, 2. 
 
 a ; 42, i 
 240. 
 254, ami 
 
 , Ex. 30, 
 II. : vitio 
 
 (? ; 40, d 
 iiott. 
 
 VI ' 
 
 
' . F 
 
 ]\. ;!0, 
 
 n. : 
 
 vitio 
 
 . ii; 
 
 41), d 
 
 mt»